ETX-5300A_1.0_mn

March 24, 2018 | Author: cafe0sugar | Category: Radius, Network Packet, Computer Network, Communications Protocols, Osi Model
Share
Report this link


Comments



Description

INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUALETX-5300A Ethernet Service Aggregation Platform Version 1.0 ETX-5300A Ethernet Service Aggregation Platform Version 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Notice This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD"). No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RAD Data Communications. Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the ETX-5300A and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD. The ETX-5300A product name is owned by RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark. The RAD name, logo, logotype, and the terms EtherAccess, TDMoIP and TDMoIP Driven, and the product names Optimux and IPmux, are registered trademarks of RAD Data Communications Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the ETX-5300A. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the ETX-5300A, based on or derived in any way from the ETX-5300A. Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement. This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the ETX-5300A package and shall continue until terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof. Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the ETX-5300A and all copies and portions thereof. For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor. International Headquarters RAD Data Communications Ltd. 24 Raoul Wallenberg Street Tel Aviv 69719, Israel Tel: 972-3-6458181 Fax: 972-3-6498250, 6474436 E-mail: [email protected] North America Headquarters RAD Data Communications Inc. 900 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA Tel: (201) 5291100, Toll free: 1-800-4447234 Fax: (201) 5295777 E-mail: [email protected] © 2008–2013 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 570-200-03/13 Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Limited Warranty RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the ETX-5300A to be delivered hereunder shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR. If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect, RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party shall pay one-way shipping costs. RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD. The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for consequential damages. RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the ETX-5300A, and in no event shall RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the ETX-5300A. DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes relating to ETX-5300A and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the said warranties are satisfactory. Software components in the ETX-5300A are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind. RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period under this Agreement. RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the ETX-5300A shall not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the ETX-5300A. In no event shall RAD be liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits, even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages. This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of Israel. Product Disposal To facilitate the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of waste equipment in protecting the environment, the owner of this RAD product is required to refrain from disposing of this product as unsorted municipal waste at the end of its life cycle. Upon termination of the unit’s use, customers should provide for its collection for reuse, recycling or other form of environmentally conscientious disposal. ii ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter General Safety Instructions The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the manual. Safety Symbols This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates potential safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to operator or service personnel. Warning Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines. Protective ground: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building protective ground bus. Warning Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached. Please observe the following precautions: • • • • • Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact and is connected to the transmitter. Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current. Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look straight at the laser beam. The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard. Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible! In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP or XFP laser transceivers into the product. Users are alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if noncompliant transceivers are used. In particular, users are warned to use only agency approved products that comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products. Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment, maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs should be performed by either the operator or the user. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 iii Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Handling Energized Products General Safety Practices Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages may be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF position or a fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually not hazardous, energy hazards may still exist. Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts. Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use. Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective ground terminal. If a ground lug is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective ground at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 14 AWG (1.4 mm2) or wider. Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in grounded racks and cabinets. Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground. Some products may have panels secured by thumbscrews with a slotted head or other means. These panels may cover hazardous circuits or parts, such as power supplies. These thumbscrews should therefore always be tightened securely with a screwdriver after both initial installation and subsequent access to the panels. The ETX-5300A is equipped with surge protectors between the telecommunication lines and ground. The connection to the protective ground must be always maintained. Warning In Finland, Norway and Sweden, the unit is restricted to installation by service personnel in Restricted Access Locations only. FI NO SE Laite on liitettävä suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag Connecting AC Mains Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes. Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground. The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to the product is 16A (20A for USA and Canada). The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A (40A for USA and Canada). Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or emergency switch is installed in the building installation. In cases when the power distribution system is IT type, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously. iv ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter Connecting DC Power The DC input to the equipment is floating in reference to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded. Due to the high current capability of DC power systems, care should be taken when connecting the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards. Make sure that the DC power supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the installation complies with the local codes. A 25A circuit breaker must be installed for each DC input. The circuit breaker must have a high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 60A. Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. Switch off both circuit breakers. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit breakers back to the ON position. A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated in the building installation. If the DC power supply is floating, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously. Connecting Data and Telecommunications Cables Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status. The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port differs from the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual. Ports V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530, X.21, 10 BaseT, 100 BaseT, Unbalanced E1, E2, E3, STM, DS-2, DS-3, S-Interface ISDN, Analog voice E&M, Alarm xDSL (without feeding voltage), Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1 Safety Status SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage: Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC. TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1: Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from telecommunications networks are possible. TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2: Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from telecommunication networks are not possible. These ports are not permitted to be directly connected to external telephone and data lines. TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3: Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from telecommunication networks are possible. FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber) FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL (with feeding voltage), U-Interface ISDN ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 v Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance of a qualified safety engineer. Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables. Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables. Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables. Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms. When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both ends. The grounding and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes. The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk, there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment and the mating connectors. Caution To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords. Attention Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure. Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions. Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of major regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity against disturbances. A good ground connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to remove all traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an external grounding lug is provided, connect it to the ground bus using braided wire as short as possible. The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially for high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be installed on certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual. Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time configuration. The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines is dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal conversion loss (LCL). Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building installation. vi ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD). However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with plastic connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines. Before connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching ground or wear an ESD preventive wrist strap. FCC-15 User Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Canadian Emission Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulation. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22) Warning This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures. Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut être demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées. Das vorliegende Gerät fällt unter die Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohngebieten können beim Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen auftreten, für deren Behebung der Benutzer verantwortlich ist. Avertissement Achtung ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 vii Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Mise au rebut du produit Afin de faciliter la réutilisation, le recyclage ainsi que d'autres formes de récupération d'équipement mis au rebut dans le cadre de la protection de l'environnement, il est demandé au propriétaire de ce produit RAD de ne pas mettre ce dernier au rebut en tant que déchet municipal non trié, une fois que le produit est arrivé en fin de cycle de vie. Le client devrait proposer des solutions de réutilisation, de recyclage ou toute autre forme de mise au rebut de cette unité dans un esprit de protection de l'environnement, lorsqu'il aura fini de l'utiliser. Français viii Instructions générales de sécurité Les instructions suivantes servent de guide général d'installation et d'opération sécurisées des produits de télécommunications. Des instructions supplémentaires sont éventuellement indiquées dans le manuel. Symboles de sécurité Ce symbole peut apparaitre sur l'équipement ou dans le texte. Il indique des risques potentiels de sécurité pour l'opérateur ou le personnel de service, quant à l'opération du produit ou à sa maintenance. Avertissement Danger de choc électrique ! Evitez tout contact avec la surface marquée tant que le produit est sous tension ou connecté à des lignes externes de télécommunications. Mise à la terre de protection : la cosse ou la borne marquée devrait être connectée à la prise de terre de protection du bâtiment. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter Avertissement • • • • • Avant la mise en marche de l'équipement, assurez-vous que le câble de fibre optique est intact et qu'il est connecté au transmetteur. Ne tentez pas d'ajuster le courant de la commande laser. N'utilisez pas des câbles ou connecteurs de fibre optique cassés ou sans terminaison et n'observez pas directement un rayon laser. L'usage de périphériques optiques avec l'équipement augmentera le risque pour les yeux. L'usage de contrôles, ajustages ou procédures autres que celles spécifiées ici pourrait résulter en une dangereuse exposition aux radiations. ATTENTION : Le rayon laser peut être invisible ! Les utilisateurs pourront, dans certains cas, insérer leurs propres émetteurs-récepteurs Laser SFP/XFP dans le produit. Les utilisateurs sont avertis que RAD ne pourra pas être tenue responsable de tout dommage pouvant résulter de l'utilisation d'émetteurs-récepteurs non conformes. Plus particulièrement, les utilisateurs sont avertis de n'utiliser que des produits approuvés par l'agence et conformes à la réglementation locale de sécurité laser pour les produits laser de classe 1. Respectez toujours les précautions standards de sécurité durant l'installation, l'opération et la maintenance de ce produit. Seul le personnel de service qualifié et autorisé devrait effectuer l'ajustage, la maintenance ou les réparations de ce produit. Aucune opération d'installation, d'ajustage, de maintenance ou de réparation ne devrait être effectuée par l'opérateur ou l'utilisateur. Manipuler des produits sous tension Règles générales de sécurité Ne pas toucher ou altérer l'alimentation en courant lorsque le câble d'alimentation est branché. Des tensions de lignes peuvent être présentes dans certains produits, même lorsque le commutateur (s'il est installé) est en position OFF ou si le fusible est rompu. Pour les produits alimentés par CC, les niveaux de tension ne sont généralement pas dangereux mais des risques de courant peuvent toujours exister. Avant de travailler sur un équipement connecté aux lignes de tension ou de télécommunications, retirez vos bijoux ou tout autre objet métallique pouvant venir en contact avec les pièces sous tension. Sauf s'il en est autrement indiqué, tous les produits sont destinés à être mis à la terre durant l'usage normal. La mise à la terre est fournie par la connexion de la fiche principale à une prise murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise à la terre. Si une cosse de mise à la terre est fournie avec le produit, elle devrait être connectée à tout moment à une mise à la terre de protection par un conducteur de diamètre 18 AWG ou plus. L'équipement monté en châssis ne devrait être monté que sur des châssis et dans des armoires mises à la terre. Branchez toujours la mise à la terre en premier et débranchez-la en dernier. Ne branchez pas des câbles de télécommunications à un équipement qui n'est pas mis à la terre. Assurez-vous que tous les autres câbles sont débranchés avant de déconnecter la mise à la terre. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 ix Français Certains produits peuvent être équipés d'une diode laser. Dans de tels cas, une étiquette indiquant la classe laser ainsi que d'autres avertissements, le cas échéant, sera jointe près du transmetteur optique. Le symbole d'avertissement laser peut aussi être joint. Veuillez observer les précautions suivantes : Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Connexion au courant du secteur Assurez-vous que l'installation électrique est conforme à la réglementation locale. Branchez toujours la fiche de secteur à une prise murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise à la terre. La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant le produit est de 16A (20A aux Etats-Unis et Canada). Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de court-circuit dépassant 35A (40A aux Etats-Unis et Canada). Branchez toujours le câble d'alimentation en premier à l'équipement puis à la prise murale. Si un commutateur est fourni avec l'équipement, fixez-le en position OFF. Si le câble d'alimentation ne peut pas être facilement débranché en cas d'urgence, assurez-vous qu'un coupe-circuit ou un disjoncteur d'urgence facilement accessible est installé dans l'installation du bâtiment. Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si le système de distribution de courant est de type IT. Français Connexion d'alimentation CC L'entrée CC de l'équipement est flottante par rapport à la mise à la terre. Tout pôle doit être mis à la terre en externe. A cause de la capacité de courant des systèmes à alimentation CC, des précautions devraient être prises lors de la connexion de l'alimentation CC pour éviter des courts-circuits et des risques d'incendie. Assurez-vous que l'alimentation CC est isolée de toute source de courant CA (secteur) et que l'installation est conforme à la réglementation locale. Un coupe-circuit de 25A devrait être installé pour chaque entrée CC de l’équipement. Le coupecircuit devrait disposer d’une capacité élevée de coupure, et devrait fonctionner sur courant de CC dépassant 60A. Avant la connexion des câbles d'alimentation en courant CC, assurez-vous que le circuit CC n'est pas sous tension. Localisez les coupe-circuits dans le tableau desservant l'équipement et fixezles en position OFF. Lors de la connexion de câbles d'alimentation CC, connectez d'abord le conducteur de mise à la terre à la borne correspondante, puis le pôle positif et en dernier, le pôle négatif. Remettez les coupe-circuits en position ON. Un disjoncteur facilement accessible, adapté et approuvé devrait être intégré à l'installation du bâtiment. Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si l'alimentation en courant CC est flottante. x ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 28-30.Part 3-3: Limits Limitation of voltage changes. equipment – Safety – Part 1: EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-2:2006 EN 61000-3-3:2008 Safety EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009. Information technology equipment – Immunity characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement. The product was tested in a typical configuration. Homologation Team Leader European Contact: RAD Data Communications GmbH Otto-Hahn-Str. voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems.0 xi . Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . A1:2010 + A12:2011 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC. Information technology General requirements. 85521 Ottobrunn-Riemerling. 1. Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s): EMC EN 55022:2010 Information technology equipment – Radio disturbance characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement.Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer's Name: Manufacturer's Address: Declares that the product: Product Name Product Options: ETX-5300A All RAD Data Communications Ltd. Germany ETX-5300A Ver. the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.Part 3-2: Limits Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16A per phase) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . Tel Aviv. the R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment and the ROHS Directive 2011/65/EU. 1 January 2013 Nathaniel Shomroni. 24 Raoul Wallenberg St. for equipment with rated current ≤ 16A per phase and not subject to conditional connection. Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Glossary Address Agent ANSI APS (Automatic protection switching) AWG Backhaul Balanced Bandwidth A coded representation of the origin or destination of data. In SNMP, this refers to the managed system. American National Standards Institute. An automatic service restoration function by which a network senses a circuit or node failure and automatically switches traffic over an alternate path. The American Wire Gauge System, which specifies wire width. Transporting traffic between distributed sites (typically access points) and more centralized points of presence A transmission line in which voltages on the two conductors are equal in magnitude, but opposite in polarity, with respect to ground. The range of frequencies passing through a given circuit. The greater the bandwidth, the more information can be sent through the circuit in a given amount of time. Unit of signaling speed equivalent to the number of discrete conditions or events per second. If each signal event represents only one bit condition, baud rate equals bps (bits per second). A QoS class in which no specific traffic parameters and no absolute guarantees are provided. Signaling method in E1/T1 representing a binary “1” by alternating positive and negative pulses, and a binary “0” by absence of pulses. The smallest unit of information in a binary system. Represents either a one or zero (“1” or “0”). A device interconnecting local area networks at the OSI data link layer, filtering and forwarding frames according to media access control (MAC) addresses. A storage device. Commonly used to compensate for differences in data rates or event timing when transmitting from one device to another. Also used to remove jitter. A transmission path or channel. A bus is typically an electrical connection with one or more conductors, where all attached devices receive all transmissions at the same time. A group of bits (normally 8 bits in length). A continuous signal at a fixed frequency that is capable of being modulated with a second (information carrying) signal. Baud Best Effort Bipolar Bit Bridge Buffer Bus Byte Carrier xii ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter CESoPSN Structure-aware TDM Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network. A method for encapsulating structured (NxDS0) Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) signals as pseudo-wires over packet switched networks (PSN). A path for electrical transmission between two or more points. Also called a link, line, circuit or facility. A term, which defines the information rate that the network is committed to provide to the user, under any network conditions. New technology for offering circuit emulation services over packetswitched networks. The service offers traditional TDM trunking (at n x 64 kbps, fractional E1/T1, E1/T1 or E3/T3) over a range of transport protocols, including Internet Protocol (IP), MPLS and Ethernet. Command Line Interface (CLI) is a mechanism for interacting with a RAD product by typing commands in response to a prompt. A term for the source(s) of timing signals used in synchronous transmission. A state in which the network is overloaded and starts to discard user data (frames, cells or packets). A resource and traffic management mechanism to avoid and/or prevent excessive situationthat can cause the network to collapse. Information represented in digital form, including voice, text, facsimile and video. The detection and isolation of a malfunction or mistake in a communications device, network or system. The binary (“1” or “0”) output of a computer or terminal. In data communications, an alternating, non-continuous (pulsating) signal. A 2.048 Mbps line, common in Europe, that supports thirty-two 64 kbps channels, each of which can transmit and receive data or digitized voice. The line uses framing and signaling to achieve synchronous and reliable transmission. The most common configurations for E1 lines are E1 PRI, and unchannelized E1. The European standard for high speed digital transmission, operating at 34 Mbps. Encapsulating data is a technique used by layered protocols in which a low level protocol accepts a message from a higher level protocol, then places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. The logistics of encapsulation require that packets traveling over a physical network contain a sequence of headers. Excess Information Rate. The rate that exceeds a specified threshold (CIR) for brief periods of time. A local area network (LAN) technology which has extended into the wide area networks. Ethernet operates at many speeds, including data rates of 10 Mbps (Ethernet), 100 Mbps (Fast Ethernet), 1,000 Mbps (Gigabit Ethernet), 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps. Channel CIR (Committed Information Rate) Circuit Emulation Service CLI Clock Congestion Congestion Control Data Diagnostics Digital E1 Line E3 Encapsulation EIR Ethernet ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 xiii Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Ethernet OAM Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) are a set of standardized protocols for measuring and controlling network performance. There are two layers of Ethernet OAM: Service OAM (provides end-to-end connectivity fault management per customer service instance, even in multi-operator networks) and Link or Segment OAM (detailed monitoring and troubleshooting of an individual physical or emulated link). A two-octet field in an Ethernet frame that indicates type of the protocol encapsukated in the Ethernet frame payload Unidirectional traffic entity that connects two physical or logical ports A congestion control mechanism A logical grouping of information sent as a link-layer unit over a transmission medium. The terms packet, datagram, segment, and message are also used to describe logical information groupings. At the physical and data link layers of the OSI model, bits are fit into units called frames. Frames contain source and destination information, flags to designate the start and end of the frame, plus information about the integrity of the frame. All other information, such as network protocols and the actual payload of data, is encapsulated in a packet, which is encapsulated in the frame. A circuit or device permitting transmission in two directions (sending and receiving) at the same time. An ITU standard for the physical and electrical characteristics of various digital interfaces, including those at 64 kbps and 2.048 Mbps. Gateways are points of entrance and exit from a communications network. Viewed as a physical entity, a gateway is that node that translates between two otherwise incompatible networks or network segments. Gateways perform code and protocol conversion to facilitate traffic between data highways of differing architecture. The combined effect of resistance, inductance and capacitance on a transmitted signal. Impedance varies at different frequencies. A shared boundary, defined by common physical interconnection characteristics, signal characteristics, and meanings of exchanged signals. Also known as an Internet address. A unique string of numbers that identifies a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers from 0 to 255, separated by periods (for example, 1.0.255.123). Digital interconnection protocol similar to T1 and E1 used in Japan. The deviation of a transmission signal in time or phase. It can introduce errors and loss of synchronization in high speed synchronous communications. Set of Layer-2 control (slow) protocols that operate across a number of access and aggregation network technologies Ethertype Flow Flow Control Frame Framing Full Duplex G.703 Gateway Impedance Interface IP Address J1 Jitter L2CP xiv ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter Laser A device that transmits an extremely narrow and coherent beam of electromagnetic energy in the visible light spectrum. Used as a light source for fiber optic transmission (generally more expensive, shorter lived, single mode only, for greater distances than LED). The time between initiating a request for data and the beginning of the actual data transfer. Network latency is the delay introduced when a packet is momentarily stored, analyzed and then forwarded. A technique that distributes network traffic along parallel paths in order to maximize the available network bandwidth while providing redundancy. The addition of inductance to a line in order to minimize amplitude distortion. Used commonly on public telephone lines to improve voice quality, it can make the lines impassable to high speed data, and baseband modems. A type of diagnostic test in which the transmitted signal is returned to the sending device after passing through all or part of a communications link or network. An application that receives Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) information from an agent. An agent and manager share a database of information, called the Management Information Base (MIB). An agent can use a message called a traps-PDU to send unsolicited information to the manager. A manager that uses the RADview MIB can query the RAD device, set parameters, sound alarms when certain conditions appear, and perform other administrative tasks. In telecommunications, this means the presence of a signal. A mark is equivalent to a binary 1. A mark is the opposite of a space (0). The source of timing signals (or the signals themselves) that all network stations use for synchronization. Modular interfaces enable field-changeable conversion. At one end of a communications link, a device that combines several lower speed transmission channels into a single high speed channel. A multiplexer at the other end reverses the process. Sometimes called a mux. See Bit Interleaving/Multiplexing. (1) An interconnected group of nodes. (2) A series of points, nodes, or stations connected by communications channels; the collection of equipment through which connections are made between data stations. A point of interconnection to a network. The name of the BTS for 3G cellular traffic The Network Time Protocol, a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems over packet-switched, variable-latency data networks. NTP uses UDP on port 123 as its transport layer. Latency Load Balancing Loading Loopback Manager Mark Master Clock Modular Multiplexer Network Node NodeB NTP ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 xv Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Packet Parameters An ordered group of data and control signals transmitted through a network, as a subset of a larger message. Parameters are often called arguments, and the two words are used interchangeably. However, some computer languages such as C define argument to mean actual parameter (i.e., the value), and parameter to mean formal parameter. In RAD CLI, parameter means formal parameter, not value. Layer 1 of the OSI model. The layer concerned with electrical, mechanical, and handshaking procedures over the interface connecting a device to the transmission medium. A method for verifying that the incoming traffic complies with the user’s service contract. See Multidrop. The physical interface to a computer or multiplexer, for connection of terminals and modems. Also called CoS (class of service), classifies traffic into categories such as high, medium, and low. The lower the priority, the more “drop eligible” is a packet. When the network gets busy, prioritization ensures critical or high-rated traffic is passed first, and packets from the lowest categories may be dropped. One or more characters in a command line interface to indicate that the computer is ready to accept typed input. A formal set of conventions governing the formatting and relative timing of message exchange between two communicating systems. Point-to-point connections set up to emulate (typically Layer 2) native services like TDM, or SONET/SDH over an underlying common packetswitched network (Ethernet, MPLS or IP) core. Pseudowires are defined by the IETF PWE3 (pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge) working group. Technique used in the QoS architecture during periods of congestion. The packets are held in queues for subsequent processing. After being processed by the router, the packets are then sent to their destination based on priority. Strict priority and Weighted Fair queuing methods are used for traffic differentiation. See MAC-in-MAC. An authentication, authorization and accounting protocol for applications such as network access or IP mobility. Many network services require the presentation of security credentials (such as a username and password or security certificate) in order to connect to the network. Before access to the network is granted, this information is passed to a network access server (NAS) device over the link-layer protocol, then to a RADIUS server over the RADIUS protocol. The RADIUS server checks that the information is correct using authentication schemes like PAP, CHAP or EAP. Physical Layer Policing Polling Port Prioritization Prompt Protocol Pseudowire Queuing Q-in-Q RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) xvi ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter Router An interconnection device that connects individual LANs. Unlike bridges, which logically connect at OSI Layer 2, routers provide logical paths at OSI Layer 3. Like bridges, remote sites can be connected using routers over dedicated or switched lines to create WANs. The process of selecting the most efficient circuit path for a message. Able to be changed in size or configuration to suit changing conditions. For example, a scalable network can be expanded from a few nodes to thousands of nodes. Describing an optical wave-guide or fiber that is designed to propagate light of only a single wavelength (typically 5-10 microns in diameter). Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) over Packet. A method for encapsulating Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) bitstreams (T1, E1, T3, E3) that disregards any structure that may be imposed on these streams, in particular the structure imposed by the standard TDM framing. A North American standard for using optical media as the physical transport for high speed long-haul networks. SONET basic speeds start at 51.84 Mbps and go up to 2.5 Gbps. In telecommunications, the absence of a signal. Equivalent to a binary 0. A network protocol that allows data to be exchanged over a secure channel between two computers. Encryption provides confidentiality and integrity of data. A logical port used for binding flows to bridge ports, router interfaces or Layer-2 TDM pseudowires See Synchronous Transmission. Communcation standard for data logging. It collects heterogeneous data into a single data repository, providing system administrators with a single point of management for collecting, distributing and processing audit data. The Syslog operation is standartized by RFC 3164 and RFC 5674. A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mbps used in North America. Typically channelized into 24 DS0s, each capable of carrying a single voice conversation or data stream. Uses two pairs of twisted pair wires. A digital transmission link with a capacity of 45 Mbps, or 28 T1 lines. The virtual terminal protocol in the Internet suite of protocols. It lets users on one host access another host and work as terminal users of that remote host. Instead of dialing into the computer, the user connects to it over the Internet using Telnet. When issuing a Telnet session, it connects to the Telnet host and logs in. The connection enables the user to work with the remote machine as though a terminal was connected to it. Routing Scalable Single Mode SAToP SONET (Synchronous Optical Network) Space SSH (Secure Shell) SVI Sync Syslog T1 T3 Telnet ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 xvii Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual Throughput The amount of information transferred through the network between two users in a given period, usually measured in the number of packets per second (pps). A portion of a serial multiplex of timeslot information dedicated to a single channel. In E1 and T1, one timeslot typically represents one 64 kbps channel. Set of actions and operations performed by the network to guarantee the operability of the network, exercised in the form of traffic control and flow control. Mechanism whereby any traffic which violates the traffic contract agreed to at connection setup, is detected and discarded. A method for smoothing the bursty traffic rate that might arrive on an access virtual circuit so as to present a more uniform traffic rate on the network. A single circuit between two points, both of which are switching centers or individual distribution points. A trunk usually handles many channels simultaneously. A device that is doing the Layer 2 bridging according to the VLAN tag in addition to the standard bridging parameters. A VLAN-aware device will not strip or add any VLAN header. A technique that lets carriers offer multiple virtual LANs over a single circuit. In essence, the carrier creates an Ethernet virtual private network to tunnel customer VLANs across its WAN; this helps avoid name conflicts among customers of service providers who connect to the carrier. Stacking works by assigning two VLAN IDs to each frame header. One is a "backbone" VLAN ID used by the service provider; the other one has up to 4,096 unique 802.1Q VLAN tags. Technique used to ensure a minimum density of marks. Timeslot Traffic Management Traffic Policing Traffic Shaping Trunk VLAN-Aware VLAN Stacking Zero suppression xviii ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Quick Start Guide This section describes the minimum configuration needed to prepare ETX-5300A for operation. 1. Installing the Unit Perform the following steps to install the unit: 1. Determine the required configuration of ETX-5300A, according to your application. 2. Connect the main and I/O card ports as required for the application. 3. Connect the ASCII terminal to the CONTROL DCE port on an E4-MC-4 card. 4. Connect power to the unit. Connecting the Interfaces  To connect the interfaces: 1. Insert the XFP/SFP modules (if applicable) into the relevant ports. 2. Connect the optical cables. 3. Connect the network port(s) to the service provider network equipment. 4. Connect the user port(s) to the customer network equipment. Notes • The number of available Ethernet ports depends on the options you purchased. • Lock the wire latch of each XFP or SFP module by lifting it up until it clicks into place. For additional information, refer to Chapter 2. Connecting to a Terminal  To connect the unit to a terminal: 1. Connect the male DB-9 connector of terminal cable to the 9-pin D-type female connector on E4-MC-4 card, designated CONTROL DCE. 2. Connect the other side of the cable to the ASCII terminal equipment. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installing the Unit 1 Quick Start Guide Installation and Operation Manual Connecting the Power The unit can be connected to AC or DC power.  To connect to AC power: • Connect each power cable first to the connector on the E5-PIM/AC module, and then to the power outlet. The unit turns on automatically upon connection to the mains, and the PWR indicator lights up.  To connect to DC power: 1. Strip 7 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation from the leads. Caution Pay attention to polarity. For each source, connect the positive lead first, and the negative lead second. Refer to the Connection of DC Mains section at the beginning of this manual. 2. Use a narrow blade screwdriver to release the terminal screw. 3. Push the lead into the terminal up to its insulating sleeve. 4. When the lead is in position, fasten the screw to secure the lead. 5. Verify that the lead is securely held by pulling on it lightly. 6. Insert the plug into the socket of the E5-PIM/DC module. 7. Secure the plug by tightening the two screws. 8. Connect the cable to the DC power source. 2. Configuring the Unit for Management Configure ETX-5300A for management, using a local ASCII-based terminal. Starting a Terminal Session for the First Time  To start the terminal session: 1. Make sure all ETX-5300A cables and connectors are properly connected. 2. Turn on the control terminal or start the PC terminal emulation program to create a new terminal connection. 3. Configure the PC communication port parameters to a baud rate of 9.6 kbps, 8 bits/character, 1 stop bit, no parity and no flow control. 4. Set the terminal input delay between characters to at least 10 msec. 5. Power-up the unit. 6. ETX-5300A boots up. When the startup process is completed, you are prompted to press <ENTER> to receive the login prompt. 7. Press <ENTER> until you receive the login prompt. 2 Configuring the Unit for Management ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start Guide 8. To log in, enter your user name (su for full configuration and monitoring access) and your password. 9. The device prompt appears: ETX-5300A# You can now type the necessary CLI commands. Note RAD recommends using the 115.2 kbps data rate for CLI management sessions. 10. Navigate to config>terminal# prompt and change the default terminal baud rate (9.6 kbps) to 115.2 kbps. 11. Configure the PC communication port parameters to a baud rate of 115.2 kbps to match the new ETX-5300A setting. 12. Continue with product configuration. Configuring Management Flows To manage the ETX-5300A from a remote NMS, you must first preconfigure the basic parameters using a supervision terminal connected to the ETX-5300A CONTROL DCE port. RAD recommends Layer-3 management access via the out-of-band Ethernet management port.  To preconfigure ETX-5300A for Layer-3 management access: 1. Add a router-type SVI. 2. Create classifier profiles for matching all traffic and matching untagged traffic. 3. Add two flows (incoming and outgoing) connecting out-of-band Ethernet management port and the SVI. 4. Add a router interface, bind it to the SVI, and add a static route to the next hop. 5. Configure SNMPv3 parameters:    OID tree visibility, mask and type Access group Trap report policy. The following script provides all necessary configuration steps. Replace IP addresses and entity names with values relevant for your network environment. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Configuring the Unit for Management 3 Quick Start Guide Installation and Operation Manual #*******************************Adding_SVI*********************************** config port svi 99 router exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #***************************Adding Classifier_Profiles*********************** config flows classifier-profile classall match-any match all exit all config flows classifier-profile classutg match-any match untagged exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Flows******************************** config flows flow mng_in classifier classutg ingress-port mng-ethernet main-a/0 egress-port svi 99 no shutdown exit all config flows flow mng_out classifier classall ingress-port svi 99 egress-port mng-ethernet main-a/0 no shutdown exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #*********************Configuring_Router_Interface*************************** configure router 1 interface 1 address 172.18.219.116/24 bind svi 99 no shutdown exit static-route 0.0.0.0/0 address 172.18.219.1 exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #*********************Configuring_SNMP_View/Mask/Type************************ configure management snmp view internet 1 mask 1 type included no shut exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #*********************Configuring_SNMP_Access_Group************************ configure management snmp access-group initial usm no-auth-no-priv context-match prefix 4 Configuring the Unit for Management ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start Guide exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #**************************Configring_SNMP_Traps***************************** configure management snmp target-params p message-processing-model snmpv3 version usm security name initial level no-auth-no-priv no shutdown exit target a target-params p tag-list unmasked address udp-domain 172.17.176.35 no shutdown exit notify unmasked tag unmasked no shutdown exit all #**********************************End************************************ 3. Saving Management Configuration Saving Configuration Type save in any level to save your configuration in startup-config. Copying User Configuration to Default Configuration In addition to saving your configuration in startup-config, you may also wish to save your configuration as a user default configuration.  To save user default configuration: • Enter the following commands: exit all file copy startup-config user-default-config 4. Verifying Connectivity At the ASCII terminal, ping the IP address assigned to management router interface and verify that replies are received. If there is no reply to the ping, check your configuration and make the necessary corrections. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Verifying Connectivity 5 Configuring Services Proceed with service configuration. 6 Configuring Services ETX-5300A Ver.Quick Start Guide Installation and Operation Manual 5. 1. Chapter 5 details different scenarios for provisioning supported Ethernet services.0 . .................................................................................... 1-6 System Structure .................................................................. 1-16 Adaptive Timing ..................... 2-3 Protection against ESD ................................................................................................................................... 1-3 Hardware-Based Ethernet OAM and Performance Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4 Chapter 2... 1-5 Rear Panel ... 1-1 Features ............................. 2-4 AC Power .........................................................2 1....................................................................... 1-1 Applications ................................................. 1-20 Physical Port Clock ......................................................................... 1-6 Functional Description .............................................. 2-5 i 2........................................................................................................... 1-19 Timing Mechanism ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2 Forwarding Schemes ................. 1-4 Front Panel .........................................................3 1..... 1-4 Physical Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-7 10GbE Interface . 1-22 GPS Clock ............................................................................. 1-13 Timing Subsystem ................................ 1............................................................................................. 1-4 Synchronization and Timing over Packet ....... 1-3 Remote Provisioning and Traffic Management............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-14 SDH/SONET Card ............................................................................................Contents Chapter 1......................... 2-2 Laser Safety .............................................................................. 1-14 STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces ......... 2-1 Grounding .......................................... 1-6 Available Modules .................... 2-4 Power .......................................................................... 1-10 Management Subsystem ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15 Pseudowire Services ............................................................................................................1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 1-12 GbE and 10GbE Interfaces .............. 1-6 Main Card .................................................................................. 1-4 Management and Security ............................. Installation and Setup Safety .............................................................................. 1-2 Carrier-Class Layer 2 Aggregation Switch ........................................................................................................................... 1-11 Ethernet Service Cards ....................................................... 1-19 Timing Subsystem ......................................................... 1-23 1...................................................................................................................................................... 1-23 Technical Specifications.................... 1-3 Service Resiliency and Protection ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 ETX-5300A Ver.......................................................................... 1-13 Packet Processor .......... 2-5 DC Power ..................................................................................................................................0 ............................................................................................................. 1-1 Product Options ................ 1-21 External (BITS) Clock......................................... 2-3 Proper Handling of Modules ........................................ 1-9 Packet Processor ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Introduction 1............................................................................................................................................................ 1-22 IEEE 1588v2 Clock ................................................................................... 2-4 Site Requirements and Prerequisites ........................ 1-9 Timing Subsystem ............................ ..............7 2................................................................. 2-6 Package Contents.....................13 2....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.............................. 2-6 Installing AC Power Supply Modules ...............................2 3....................................................................... 2-14 ETX-5300A Chassis with two CONTROL Modules ........................................................................................................10 2.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-19 Connecting to External Clock Devices ........ 2-22 Connecting to an External Alarm Device ............................................................................................... 3-3 Loading Sequence ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15 Grounding .................................. 3-1 Indicators ...................14 2..............................................................3 2......................... 2-15 Connecting to DC Power ................................................................................... 2-18 Connecting to Gigabit Ethernet Equipment .. Operation 3......... 2-21 Connecting to a Network Management Station .............16 2... 2-6 Required Equipment .............1 CLI-Based Configuration ............................................................................................ 2-22 Chapter 3..................................19 2................................................................................................. 2-20 Connecting to GPS Clock Devices .......................................... 4-2 ii ETX-5300A Ver.........4 3....15 2................ 3-5 Saving Configuration Changes ................................................................ 2-5 Ambient Requirements ................................................................................................. 2-10 Installing Power Inlet Modules ........................ 2-14 Connecting to Power ...........................................17 2...................................................................................................................... 3-3 Configuration and Application Software Files ..... Management and Security 4............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5 Handling Configuration File Errors ......21 Panel Clearance ...... 2-12 Inserting the Main Card . 2-12 Installing PI Modules ..................................................................................................................................... 2-11 E5-PIM/AC Module................................................ 2-7 Installing Cable Managers ..........................................................................................6 3............... 2-17 Connecting to 10Gb Ethernet Equipment .................................................................. 2-13 Replacing a Main Card during Equipment Operation ........ 3-6 Turning Off the Unit ........ 2-15 Installing I/O Cards ........... 3-4 Using a Custom Configuration File ................................................ 2-12 E5-PIM/DC Modules ....8 Chapter 4...................3 Turning On the Unit ................................Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual 2................. 2-20 Connecting to a Terminal ............................................. 2-6 Electromagnetic Compatibility Considerations ................................ 2-17 Installing SFP or XFP Modules ...........................................................................................................................................................................5 3............................ 3-2 Startup ..................................................................... 1.................................................................8 2..............................................................................2 2...................18 2... 2-13 Removing the Main Card ...............................12 2...............................0 .................................................................................20 2............. 2-12 Installing the Main Card ..................................................................9 2....................................................................................... 2-8 Installing a Fan Tray ........................................................................................................................................ 2-22 Labeling Cable ..................................5 2...............................................................1 3......................................................................................... 2-7 Installing ETX-5300A in Racks .............................. 4-2 Working with Terminal ..................................................... 2-19 Connecting to STM-1/OC-3 Equipment ..................4 2..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 Confirming the Configuration File ................................ 2-7 Installing the ETX-5300A Enclosure ................. 2-16 Installing Blank Panels ...7 3.................................................................................................................................11 2................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15 Connecting to AC Power .............. 2-14 ETX-5300A Chassis with Single Main Card ................................6 2................................................................................................................................................... ..................3 Management Access Methods .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6 User Access .................................................... 4-37 SNMP Engine ID .................................................................... 4-53 Factory Defaults ...................................................... 4-51 4...................... 4-3 Using the CLI .................................... 4-30 4................................................................................................................................. 4-56 Components................................................................................................. 4-53 Benefits .............................5 Terminal Control Port ................................................................................................. 4-36 Standards ...................... 4-27 Working with RADview .............................................. 4-34 Factory Defaults ......... 4-36 4............................................... 4-51 Configuring Access Policy ..... 4-33 4.............................. 4-40 Factory Defaults ....................................................................... 4-33 4................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-36 Benefits .............................................................................................................................................................................................2 GUI-Based Configuration ............................................11 Authentication via TACACS+ Server......... 4-31 4.................................................... 4-51 Factory Defaults ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-39 View-Based Access Control Model (VACM) ...............................................................................Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents Working with Telnet and SSH ..................................................... 4-31 Layer-2 Management Access .............................................................. 4-56 Factory Defaults ................. 4-40 SNMPv3 Configuration ......... 4-34 Example – Displaying Users ............................................................................................... 4-56 Accounting .............................. 4-33 Configuring Control Port Parameters ................................. 4-40 SNMPv3 Administrative Features ...... 1................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-52 4.............................................................................................................................. 4-54 4...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5 4..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-52 Standards ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-53 Functional Description ......................................................................... 4-57 ETX-5300A Ver................ 4-30 Working with 3rd Party Network Management Systems ........................................................................................................................ 4-51 Configuring Management Access.................................................... 4-3 Command Tree ..........................................8 Management Access.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-38 SNMPv3 Message Processing ............................................................................................................... 4-56 Benefits ............................................................................................................................. 4-54 Displaying RADIUS Statistics...... 4-2 Login ..................................................................................... 4-38 User-Based Security Model (USM) ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-33 Factory Defaults ............................................................................................... 4-55 Standards ............................................................................ 4-56 Functional Description .............................................. 4-53 Displaying RADIUS Status ....................................................................................................................... 4-48 4............... 4-41 Example ................. 4-53 Configuring RADIUS Parameters ........10 Authentication via RADIUS Server ............................................ 4-34 Example – Defining Users............................................................... 4-57 Defining TACACS+ Server ......................... 4-31 Layer-3 Management Access ...............................7 SNMP Management .............................................................................................................................................................................0 iii .......... 4-51 Factory Defaults .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-27 Preconfiguring ETX-5300A for SNMP Management ............................ 4-39 SNMP Security Level ....................................................................................................................9 Access Policy ................................................................... 4-37 Functional Description .................................................4 Services for Management Traffic .......... .................................................................................................. 5-18 Router-to-Bridge Path .................................................................................................................... 4-62 Facilities and Severities ....................................................... 5-5 Router...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1........................................................................................................................................... 4-62 Elements ................... 4-65 Configuration Errors ........... Services 5............ 5-3 Forwarding Entities .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-66 Displaying Card Summary ......................................................................................................................3 5............................................................................................................................................. Ports 6....................................... 5-2 Logical Ports ..................Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual Configuring Accounting Groups ............................................................................................. 5-5 E-Line Service .............................................................................................................. 4-61 Factory Defaults ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15 Routing Services ...................................................................................................................................................................................2 5............................................................................. 5-18 I/O-to-Main via Router Path ..... 4-62 Functional Description .......1 Service Elements ..................... 4-63 Syslog Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 4-69 Chapter 5..... 4-61 Benefits ....................5 Chapter 6......................................................................................... 5-6 I/O-to-Main Path ........................................................................................................... 4-65 4............................... 4-68 Configuration Errors ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-61 Standards and MIBs ......................................................................................... 4-62 Transport Protocol ................................4 5...... 5-30 5............... 6-1 Standards and MIBs .............. 5-13 E-LAN Service .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25 L2 Pseudowire Service over Bridge .... 6-1 iv ETX-5300A Ver......... 5-2 Physical Ports ......................12 Syslog .........1 Ethernet Ports ................................................................................................................................................ 4-60 Defining Accounting Groups ........................................... 5-1 Profiles ....................................................................................... 4-68 Displaying Card Status .......................................... 4-63 Example ....................................................................................................................... 5-11 Main-to-Main Path ........................................................................................................ 5-21 Pseudowire Services ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-59 Displaying Statistics .................13 Programming Cards .................................................................................................................................. 5-9 I/O-to-I/O Path................ 4-66 Provisioning I/O Cards .............. 6-1 Benefits ........... 4-61 4...............................0 .................... 5-5 Bridge ................................ 4-59 Example – Defining Accounting Group ........................................................................................... 4-67 Resetting I/O Cards . 4-62 Message Format ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-4 Flows ............................................. 5-6 Main-to-I/O Path ........................................................................................................................... 4-58 Example – Defining Server ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-27 L3 Pseudowire Service ................................................................... 5-1 Scheduling and Shaping Entities........................... 5-24 Point-to-Point L2 Pseudowire Service ................................................................................. ........................................................ 6-36 Displaying Status ............ 6-1 Flow Control ............................................................................................... 6-2 Jumbo Frames ...................... 6-2 Classification Key ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-12 General Structure of SDH Signals ........... 6-11 Benefits .............................2 6..................................................................................................................................... 6-46 Multiframes ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Factory Defaults ...................................................................... 6-25 SONET Environment ................. 6-48 CRC-4 Error Detection ................ 6-45 Standards and MIBs ................................................................................ 6-33 Configuring SOH Profile ................................................................................................................ 6-5 Displaying Optical Link SFP/XFP Status .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-29 Configuring SDH/SONET Interfaces..................................................................................................................................... 6-10 Configuration Errors ................................. 6-46 Timeslot 0 ............................................... 6-48 E1 Alarm Conditions ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-49 E1 Port Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................................... 6-45 E1 Line Signal Characteristics ....................... 6-47 Channel Associated Signaling ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-39 Testing SDH/SONET Ports ................................................. 6-16 Pointers ............................... 6-12 SDH Implementation Principles ..... 6-43 E1 Ports .................... 6-11 SDH/SONET Ports ......... 6-2 L2CP Handling ........................................................3 Factory Defaults ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-35 Example ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-30 Configuring AUG/OC-3 Interfaces ....................................................... 6-17 SDH Overhead Data .................................................................................. 6-49 v ETX-5300A Ver.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-34 Configuring Path Profile ........................................ 6-17 SDH Tributary Units ................................................................................................... 6-14 VC Assembly/Disassembly Process ............. 6-31 Configuring TUG3/AU3/STS-1 Inerfaces ................................................................................ 6-32 Configuring VC-12/VC-11/VT-1.... 6-13 SDH Frame Organization .......................................................................... 6-9 Example ..................................................................................................................... 6-22 SDH Maintenance Signals and Response to Abnormal Conditions .................................................................... 1........................................................................................... 6-11 Standards and MIBs ......................................................................................................................................Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents 6.................................... 6-3 Displaying Port Status ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1 Autonegotiation ........................................ 6-3 Queue Group Profile ......... 6-37 Displaying Statistics ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................0 ..................................................................................................................... 6-45 Functional Description ........................................... 6-2 Ethertype ....................................................................................... 6-45 Factory Defaults ................................................................................. 6-45 E1 Signal Structure ........................................................................................ 6-12 Functional Description ....................................................................................................................... 6-28 SDH/SONET Port Diagnostics ........................................5 Inerfaces ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4 Displaying Statistics ........................... 6-15 STM-1 Frame Structure ............................................................... 6-1 Functional Description ..................................................................................................... 6-42 Configuration Errors ........................... 6-3 Configuring Ethernet Ports. .................................................................................................................................................... 7-10 ETX-5300A Ver.................6 Configuring Internal E1 Interfaces ............................................. 1....................................... 6-56 T1 Ports ............................. 7-3 Factory Defaults ............................................................ 6-57 T1 Line Signal ............................................................................. 6-53 Testing Internal E1 Ports ...................................................... 6-58 T1 Alarm Conditions ............ 6-66 Benefits ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-51 Displaying Status ............................... 7-2 Displaying Main Card Protection Status ............................................2 vi ................................................ 6-68 Functional Description ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-70 Configuration Errors ............................................... 6-63 Displaying Statistics ....................................... 6-65 Service Aggregation Group (SAG) .............................................................................. 6-52 Displaying Statistics ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-57 Functional Description ................................................................... 7-1 Configuring Main Card Redundancy . 6-59 T1 Port Diagnostics ................ 7-5 LACP Traffic ........................................ 6-66 Factory Defaults ...................... 6-62 Displaying Status ............................ 7-5 Special Considerations for I/O Cards .............................................................................................................................Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual 6.... 6-54 Running Loopbacks ................. 6-68 Service Virtual Interface (SVI) ................................... Resiliency 7.............................. 6-67 Configuration Errors ................................... 7-4 Configuring LAG .................................................................................... 6-68 Configuring SVIs ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 6.................................................................................................................................................................. 6-56 Factory Defaults ........ 6-54 BER Testing ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Benefits .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-67 Example ................................................................ 6-69 Example ............................................................................................................... 7-3 Standards and MIBs ............................. 6-66 Configuring SAGs ....................................... 7-1 Benefits .................................................................................................................... 7-3 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-64 Example ................................................................................................ 6-66 Functional Description ......... 6-56 Standards and MIBs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Intra-Card LAG.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4 Inter-Card LAG ........................................................................................................ 7-3 Functional Description ........................................................................................ 6-70 Chapter 7................................................................................................ 6-55 Configuration Errors ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-57 T1 Signal Structure .................... 6-68 Factory Defaults ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-59 Configuring Internal T1 Interfaces .........................................4 6........................... 6-55 Example ........................ 7-6 Deleting the LAG ..........................0 7......... 6-65 Configuration Errors ..................... 7-2 Configuration Errors ........................................................................................... 7-1 Functional Description ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Main Card Redundancy ................................. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-38 APS Architecture .. 7-11 Displaying LACP Statistics .................................................................................. 7-21 Timers ............ 7-15 Configuration Errors ....... 7-21 Mechanism of Operation ....................................................................................................... 8-6 Examples ............................................................................................................. 7-42 Displaying APS Status ...... 7-22 Multiple Rings.................................................................. 8-7 Error Messages ........................................................................................................................................ 7-41 Configuring APS ................... 7-40 Manual Switching Commands ....... 7-18 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ...................... 7-20 Factory Defaults ............................. 7-20 R-APS Messaging .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-38 Benefits .......................................................................................... 7-24 Displaying ERP Status................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-39 Automatic Switchover Conditions ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-43 Inter-Card APS .....................................................3 7..........................................0 ...............................................................................................1 Flows ........................ 8-2 Drop Action ..................... 1............................................... 7-38 Factory Defaults ....................... 8-4 RFC-2544 Loopback Responder .............................................................................................. 7-43 Example ..... 7-35 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27 Example ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-26 Displaying ERP Statistics .............. 8-1 I/O Ingress Flows ... 8-5 Classifier Profiles .................................................................................. 7-11 Displaying LACP Status ..... 7-19 Standards ...... 7-12 Example ....................................................................... Networking 8........................................................................................ 7-44 Chapter 8.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2 Flow Processing ................... 7-13 Inter-Card LAG between Two Main Cards.............................................................................. 8-1 Benefits ........................................ 7-20 Ring Topology .......... 7-43 Intra-Card APS ....................................................................................................................... 7-43 Configuration Errors ................................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Standards and MIBs .......................... 7-28 Configuration Errors ................................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Flow Counters ..................................................................... 7-13 Inter-Card LAG between Two I/O Cards ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Functional Description ........Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents 7.......................................................................................4 Displaying LAG Status .................................. 8-1 Functional Description ........... 8-7 vii ETX-5300A Ver............................................................. 7-22 Configuring ERP ............................ 7-40 Configuring I/O Card Protection .................................................................. 8-2 Other Flow Types ........................................................................................ 7-22 Administrative Commands ................................................................................................................................ 7-20 Benefits ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1 Factory Defaults ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-20 Functional Description ....... ................................................................................................................................................... 8-25 Benefits ..... 1...................................................................................................................................................... 8-8 Examples ............ 8-44 Configuring Pseudowires .......................................................................................................................... 8-27 Configuring Layer 2 Control Processing Profile Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-26 Benefits ................ 8-40 Alarm Indications and Fault Propagation .................... 8-26 Functional Description ............................................2 8....................................................................................... 8-53 ETX-5300A Ver.......................................................... 8-27 Deleting Layer 2 Control Processing Profiles ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-21 Ethertype .....................................................................................5 8.......................................................................... 8-25 Standards and MIBs ........................................................................................................................ 8-32 Benefits .......................................... 8-52 Benefits ....................................................................................................................... 8-29 Example ............................................................................... 8-30 Configuration Errors ................................................ 8-25 Configuring Ethertype ................................................................................................................ 8-33 Jitter Buffer ............................... 8-25 Functional Description ............................................................................ 8-28 Configuration Errors ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-51 Cross-Connection ......... 8-31 TDM Pseudowires ............................................................................... 8-20 Configuration Errors .................................................................................................... 8-28 Peer ....................................................................................................................... 8-39 Packet Loss ................................................................. 8-50 Configuration Errors ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-26 Standards ............................................................................................................................. 8-32 Pseudowire Packet Processing Subsystem . 8-26 Factory Defaults .......................0 viii ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-29 Factory Defaults ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-52 Factory Defaults ..................................................................................................... 8-25 Factory Defaults ......................................................................................... 8-29 Functional Description .............................. 8-29 Benefits ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-49 Example ..............................................Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual 8............................................................ 8-32 Functional Description .................................................................................................................4 8.3 8....... 8-25 Example ..... 8-52 Functional Description ....................................................................................6 Configuring Flows ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-41 Adaptive Timing .................................................................................................... 8-25 Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP)............................................................................................................................................... 8-11 Multipoint Service ................. 8-53 Configuring Cross-Connection ........................................................................................................................ 8-49 Viewing the Pseudowire Status and Summary .................................................................................... 8-29 Configuring Remote Peers .......................................................................................................... 8-31 Factory Defaults ........... 8-40 ToS ................................ 8-31 Standards .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-16 Statistics ........................... 8-25 Configuration Errors ....................................................................................................... 8-11 Multiple CoS Point-to-Point Service .......................................................................................................................... 8-45 Displaying PW Statistics ................................................................. 8-47 Clearing Statistics .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-27 Example ..................... 8-40 OAM Protocol ............................................. 8-26 Adding Layer 2 Control Processing Profiles .............................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-85 Color Mapping ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-56 Bridge ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-57 Functional Description .............................................. 8-74 Shaper ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-67 Displaying Interface Table ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-60 Configuring Bridge ............................ 8-58 VLAN Editing at Bridge Port Ingress and Egress ................8 8................................................................................................................................................................. 8-86 ix ETX-5300A Ver........................................................... 8-85 Configuration Errors ... 8-80 Queue Group. 8-76 Internal Queue .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-68 Configuration Errors ..................................................... 8-65 Management ....................... 8-86 Factory Defaults .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-84 Factory Defaults .......... 8-66 Displaying ARP Table ...................................................................................................................................... 1............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-54 Configuration Errors ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-62 Displaying Bridge Port Status .................................................................................................. 8-68 Example ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-65 Loopback Router Interfaces ........................................................................................Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents 8............................ 8-57 Standards ............................. 8-72 Quality of Service (QoS) ............ 8-86 Example ................................................ 8-57 Factory Defaults .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-74 Traffic Management .............................................................9 Examples ........ 8-59 Deleting Bridge Elements .......................................................... 8-74 Factory Defaults ............. 8-57 Bridge Model ..................... 8-74 Standards .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-85 Configuring CoS Mapping .................................................. 8-62 Example ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-63 Configuration Errors ................................ 8-66 Configuring Router ......................... 8-78 Queue Block ........................................................................... 8-53 Pseudowire Service ...................... 8-75 Congestion Avoidance (WRED) ................ 8-61 Displaying VLAN Information ........................................................................................ 8-64 Benefits ......................................................................... 8-81 CoS Mapping .............................................................................................................................. 8-68 Displaying Router Interface Status ............................ 8-67 Displaying Routing Table ............................................................................................................................7 8.... 8-64 Functional Description .....................................0 .................. 8-64 Factory Defaults ........................................................... 8-63 Router ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-85 Example ... 8-86 Configuring Color Mapping ........................... 8-64 Connection to Physical and Bridge Ports ..................................... 8-74 Benefits ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-53 Cross-Connection ........................................ 8-65 Routing and ARP Tables ............................. 8-64 Standards .......................................... 8-60 Displaying MAC Address Table ................................................ 8-74 Functional Description ... 8-57 Benefits ............................................... ..................................................................................................................... 9-8 Redundancy ............................................................................................................ 8-91 Priority Queue Mapping ......................... 8-90 Configuration Errors .................................. 8-121 Examples ............. 9-6 Input Sources ................ 9-1 Factory Defaults ............................... 9-2 Clock Domain ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-113 Configuring Maintenance Endpoints ......................................... 8-132 Chapter 9.................................................... 8-119 Performing OAM Loopback ................................................................................................................................. 8-113 Configuring Maintenance Intermediary Points .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-111 Configuring OAM ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-103 MIPs ....... 8-101 OAM Elements.................................. 8-89 Marking ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Down MEP between Main and I/O Card Ports .................................................................................................................................................... 8-102 OAM Connectivity ............................................................. 8-107 Performance Monitoring......................................................................................................... 8-101 Factory Defaults ................................. 8-90 Example ..................................... 8-101 OAM Functions ...... Up MEP between Main Card and Bridge Ports ................10 Ethernet OAM ..... 9-1 Standards and MIBs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-101 Functional Description ..................... 8-89 Configuration Errors ............................................ 8-122 Example 2...........................................................................................................................................................Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual Configuration Errors .... 9-1 Functional Description .............................................................. 1............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-117 Configuring Destination NEs ..0 x .................................................................................. 9-3 SEC Module ....................................................................................... 8-121 Performing OAM Link Trace ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-89 Factory Defaults ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-10 Configuring the Clock ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-87 Policing .......................... 8-112 Configuring Maintenance Associations .............................................. Timing and Synchronization 9............... 8-90 Configuring Color-Blind Marking Profile ............................................................................ 8-91 Example ............................................... 8-91 8............................................................... 8-118 Displaying OAM Statistics ..... 8-88 Configuring Policer Aggregate Profile ................................. 9-11 ETX-5300A Ver. 8-90 Configuring Color-Aware Marking Profile .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-124 Example 3......... 8-128 Configuration Errors ................... 8-88 Example ........................... 8-87 Factory Defaults .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1 Benefits ................................................................................................................................ 8-106 Messaging System ......................... 8-87 Configuring Policer Profile .........................................................1 Clock Selection ........................................... 8-111 Configuring Maintenance Domains .............................................. 8-102 MEPs and Services .......................................................................................................................................... 8-122 Example 1............... 8-115 Configuring Maintenance Endpoint Services ............................................... 8-101 Standards ........................ Down MEP between Main Card Ports ......................................................................................... ................................................. 10-11 File Names in the Unit................. 9-20 Example ......................................................Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents 9.......................................... 10-12 ETX-5300A Ver...................... 9-32 Configuration Errors ............................................................................. 10-3 Functional Description ..........................................................................................................................................................................2 Configuring the Clock Domain ................................................................ 9-39 Configuring ToD Clock ................................... 9-28 Configuring 1588v2 Master Clock ................................................................................. 10-6 10................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-11 Example – Upload via SFTP ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-7 Setting Administrative Inventory Information .................................................... 9-21 Configuration Errors .............................. 9-35 Displaying Status...... 10-3 Displaying the Date and Time .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Copying Files within ETX-5300A ..................................................................................................... 10-4 SNTP Configuration ................................................................................................................ 10-2 Factory Defaults ....................................................................3 Inventory............................................................................. 9-34 Configuring a Peer 1588v2 Master ...................................... 9-14 Configuring Station Clock . 10-3 Configuring Date and Time..................... 10-11 10.............................2 Date and Time.............................................................................................................................4 Downloading/Uploading Files .......................................................................................... 1............... 9-25 1588v2 Master Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-24 Factory Defaults . 10-1 10.................................................................................. 9-24 Functional Description ....... 10-3 Transport Protocol .......................................................................... 9-25 1588v2 Slave Mode ................................................................................... 10-10 Example – Download via SFTP ................................................................................... 10-5 Configuring SNTP Server Parameters ........................................................................ 9-40 Example ....................................................................................... 9-37 Configuration Errors ....................................... 9-23 1588v2 Timing ............................................................... 9-30 Displaying Statistics ......... 9-36 Displaying Statistics ...................................................... 10-6 Displaying Inventory Component Information ............. 9-33 Configuring 1588v2 Slave Clock Configuration ........ 10-2 Standards and MIBs ............................................... 10-6 Displaying Inventory Information ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-18 Configuring Y-Cable Protection ............ 10-7 Displaying Manufacture Information ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-5 Example .... 10-4 Defining SNTP Servers ........... 10-9 10................. 9-12 Configuring the Clock Sources ........................................................................................................................................................................... Administration 10..................................................................... 10-3 Client Operation Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 10-2 Benefits .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4 Example ..........................................................................................................................................1 Administrative Information .. 9-29 Displaying Status................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-41 Chapter 10............................................................................................................ 9-24 Benefits .........................................................................................................................0 xi ............... 9-23 Standards and MIBs ....................................... 10-8 Example ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-33 Defining 1588v2 Slave Entity ....................................... .................................... 11-26 Tracing the Route ......................................................................................................3 Prerequisites ........................................................................... 11-14 Trap List................................................................................................................................................................. 11-10 Clearing Alarms ................................................................ 11-6 Example 1: Displaying Active Alarms .. 10-15 Example – Displaying the Contents of startup-config File .................................................... 12-2 12.............................................................. 11-2 Alarm Buffer .............. 12-2 Using SFTP ... 11-27 Chapter 12................................. 11-1 Configuration Error Messages .................................................. 12-1 Software Files ........................................................ 11-1 Indicators.................1 Detecting Problems .................................................... 11-2 Masking ..................................................................................... 11-8 Example 5...........................................................................4 Technical Support ........................................................................... Alarm Log .................................................................................................. 12-3 Downloading the New Software Release File to ETX-5300A Flash Disk ...................................................................................... 11-3 Configuring Alarm Reporting ............................................. 10-17 Resetting to User Defaults ............................................................... 11-26 Running a Ping Test ................................................................................................................. Software Upgrade 12..................................................... 11-5 Working with the Alarm and Event Logs ..........................................6 Resetting ETX-5300A ......................................................... 10-15 Example – Displaying the Contents of Application Files .............................Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual Displaying Files within ETX-5300A......................... 11-1 Alarms and Traps ...................................................................... 11-26 11............................................................................. 11-2 11............ 10-16 Saving the Configuration ........... 11-7 Example 2.............................................................................................. 12-2 System Requirements ................................................................................................................................................ 12-2 Pinging the PC ....................................................... 11-3 Alarm Relays ....................................................................................................1 Impact ................................................................................................................................................................... 12-3 Activating the SFTP Server ............................................................................................................................. 10-16 10................................................................................ 11-10 Alarm List ................................................................................................................... 11-4 Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 10-17 Rebooting the Module ................................................ Alarm List ..................................................... 10-13 Displaying the List of Configuration Files and their Contents ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1 Statistic Counters ..........................0 . 12-1 12.........3 Running Diagnostic Tests . Monitoring and Diagnostics 11.................................................................. 12-1 12............................. 11-9 Example 7.......................................................................................................... 1.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-17 Rebooting the ETX-5300A Chassis . 11-10 Event List .................................................. 12-3 xii ETX-5300A Ver.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-18 Chapter 11...................................................... 11-7 Example 3: Displaying Information of LOF alarm on SDH/SONET port ...................................................................................4 Upgrading Software using the CLI.......... Displaying Brief Log .................................................................................................................................... 11-8 Example 4........................ 10-14 Example – Displaying the List of Configuration Files ............2 Software Upgrade Options ............... 10-15 Deleting Files .............................................................................2 Handling Events ..................... 11-19 11............................................................... 10-17 Resetting to Factory Defaults ............................. Displaying Active Alarms Details ............... ...................................................................................................................... 12-7 12................................ 12-9 Using the FTP Protocol ............5 Upgrading Software via the Boot Menu ..............................................6 Verifying the Upgrade Results ....... 12-5 Confirmation of Software Application File . 12-11 12.......... 12-8 Starting Boot Manager .........................................7 Restoring the Previous Software Version. Connection Data Appendix B..........0 xiii .....................Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents Installing the New Software Release File from the Flash Disk................................................................................................................................................................... 12-13 12....... 12-18 Appendix A........................................................................................................................... 12-6 Displaying Software Upgrade Status .... 1...................... Data Flow and Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver........................... 0 .Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual xiv ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Product Options ETX-5300A is available with the following interface cards: • • • GbE card with 20 copper or fiber optic GbE ports 10GbE card with two 10GbE ports. STM-1/OC-3 card with up to four channelized STM-1/OC3 ports. MEF-14. Applications In a typical service aggregation application. 1. The ETX-5300A system also features advanced Timing over Packet capabilities. EVPLAN) services. Its automatic fault localization capabilities also help carriers and service providers to reduce operational costs and minimize expensive truck rolls.1 Overview ETX-5300A is a 10G Carrier Ethernet access platform for aggregating SLA-based business Ethernet. legacy TDM and mobile backhaul services. MEF-9. MEF-22 and MEF-26 certified for E-Line (EPL. combined with powerful Carrier Ethernet service delivery attributes. ETX-5300A concentrates SLA-based traffic coming from RAD’s or third-party Ethernet NTUs. Synchronous Ethernet and adaptive clock recovery. the chassis is designed to receive power from AC and/or DC sources. and performs class of service differentiation through traffic editing. EVPL) and E-LAN (EPLAN. ETX-5300A Carrier Ethernet aggregator enables advanced rate policing and shaping. Clocking mechanisms include Precision Time Protocol (IEEE 1588-2008). uses advanced rate policing and shaping techniques to ensure service reliability and exact service level agreement (SLA) management. These Timing over Packet features. allowing for clock synchronization over packet switched networks. In addition. using Circuit Emulation Services (CES).Chapter 1 Introduction 1.0 Overview 1-1 . make the ETX-5300A an ideal solution for LTE mobile backhaul applications. In addition.999%) service reliability and exact service level agreement (SLA) management. It performs class of service differentiation through traffic editing. ETX-5300A delivers high-quality E1/T1 and STM-1/OC-3 streams. ETX-5300A ensures five nines (99. ETX-5300A Ver. they provide a complete end-to-edge solution that allows carriers and service providers to easily migrate from SDH/SONET to packet technology and to converge voice and data services – both TDM.8032 Ring ETX-5300A TDM STM-1/OC-3 ETX-2xxA ETX-203AX. With efficient traffic management techniques. 1.0 . enabling cost optimization and freeing up expensive capacity at the PE (provider edge). SLA-Based Service Aggregation In a mobile backhaul application (Figure 1-2). Carrier-Class Layer 2 Aggregation Switch The ETX-5300A powerful aggregation platform works opposite the ETX Carrier Ethernet demarcation devices and the IPmux TDM pseudowire gateways. carrier-grade service resiliency and strong Timing over Packet capabilities.8023v2 10GbE Ring ETX-5300A ETX GbE. Together. Access Network Core Metro Aggregation First Mile ETX-5300A PCRF MME GbE G. 10GbE TDM BTS/Node B DSLAM DSL ETX-203AM BTS/Node B RNC BSC Figure 1-2.8023v2 10GbE Ring ETX-5300A GbE. Mobile Backhaul Features ETX-5300A aggregates SLA-based business Ethernet.Chapter 1 Introduction Copper GbE Installation and Operation Manual GbE Media Converter FO 10GbE GbE/10GbE G. Supported services include: 1-2 Overview ETX-5300A Ver. It combines high-capacity aggregation and carrier-grade performance. IP or MPLS networks.and packet-based –over Ethernet. 10GbE P-GW S-GW TDM G. hardwarebased OAM and performance monitoring. ETX-5300A represents a robust multifunctional Ethernet service delivery platform. mobile backhaul and legacy TDM services. carrier-owned ETX-5300A and ETX2xxA devices use smart traffic management and Ethernet OAM tools to ensure end-to-end service control and provisioning from the service hand-off points. ETX-36 ETX-205A GbE GbE 4/8 x E1/T1 PSN GbE ETX-2xxA PE GbE v Figure 1-1. Other tools include real-time SLA violation alerts and per-flow daily statistics reporting. latency. ETX-5300A also uses weighted random early detection (WRED) policy for intelligent queue management and congestion avoidance. Remote Provisioning and Traffic Management ETX-5300A efficiently handles multi-priority traffic on a per-flow basis. transparent LAN services and multicast networks E-Access for reaching the service provider’s out-of-franchise subscriber locations as part of providing an end-to-end service 2G.1731). Hardware-Based Ethernet OAM and Performance Monitoring ETX-5300A features a comprehensive Ethernet OAM suite that includes Ethernet Service OAM (IEEE 802. premium and best-effort traffic.1ag) and Performance Monitoring (ITU-T Y. 3GPP and LTE transport. policing and shaping to help carriers rate-limit user traffic according to predefined CIR (committed information rate) and EIR (excess information rate) profiles. Packet editing capabilities include 802. Enhanced quality of service is further supported by a 3-level hierarchical scheduling mechanism that combines Strict Priority (SP) and weighted fair queue (WFQ) scheduling. which ensures metering continuity across color-aware and color-blind Metro networks and WANs. as well as for storage and dedicated Internet access E-LAN (EP-LAN and EVP-LAN) for multipoint Layer 2 VPN.1ad Q-in-Q tagging and color-sensitive P-bit re-marking. including user-defined KPI (key performance indicators) threshold configuration for jitter. or two 10GbE ports or their combinations. VoIP and IP-VPN connectivity. ETX-5300A offers advanced SLA assurance tools.0 Overview 1-3 . each housing four 10GbE network ports Up to four service cards. to efficiently handle real-time. The device enables multi-criteria traffic classification as well as metering. Scheduling and shaping are supported at the EVC. tunnel and port levels. packet loss and availability. or four channelized STM-1/OC-3 ports. delivering up to 120 Gbps of user throughput via the following interfaces: • • Two redundant main cards. Forwarding Schemes Traffic forwarding is performed using point-to-point (E-Line). ETX-5300A Ver. with ultrahigh capacity that enables simultaneous processing of thousands of service flows. The 3U modular system features high port density for space-restricted facilities. 1. bridge (E-LAN) or static router mechanisms.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction • • • • E-Line (EPL and EVPL) for LAN-to-LAN. each housing either 20 UTP/SFP 1-GbE tributary ports. Hardware-based processing capabilities allow ETX-5300A to perform OAM and PM measurements in nanoseconds with maximum precision. or out-of-band using a dedicated management port.and 1+1 APS protection on the TDM ports. remote management can be performed either inband using the network or user ports.0 . 1. Webbased Secure Socket Layer (SSL). These provide exceptional value for wholesale mobile backhaul service providers. with primary/secondary clock redundancy 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol master. including local management via an ASCII terminal (RS-232).2 Physical Description Figure 1-3 shows a general front view of an ETX-5300A chassis. Air intake and discharge vents are located on the side walls. including CLI over Telnet. 1-4 Physical Description ETX-5300A Ver.8032v2. and has a height of 3U. Advanced FCAPS (Fault. ETX-5300A also supports a variety of access protocols. however it can also be installed on shelves. Administration.8266. The chassis is intended for installation in 19-inch (ANSI) and ETSI racks using rack mounting kits available from RAD (not shown in Figure 1-3). Incorporated security features include Secure Shell (SSH). via an SNMPbased GUI. Security) and diagnostic tools are provided by RADview-EMS.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual Service Resiliency and Protection ETX-5300A offers various tools to ensure five nines (99. These include Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG). and TFTP. Synchronization and Timing over Packet Incorporating RAD’s SyncToP synchronization and Timing over Packet feature set. while maintaining separation between management and user traffic via the use of VLANs. Performance. SNMP. the ETX-5300A utilizes standard technologies to ensure highly accurate clock recovery and distribution over both the physical and packet layers: • • • Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) master and slave clock support per ITU-T G. transparent and slave clock with hardware-based time-stamping as well as ToD (time of day) synchronization 1 PPS. 1. The ETX-5300A chassis is modular. ensuring the required service quality – such as ±16 ppb (parts per billion) accuracy – while eliminating the need for costly dedicated hardware.999%) availability and sub-50 ms restoration in the event of network outages. In addition. ETX-5300A’s SyncToP capabilities also include a built-in input/output clock interface and support for multiple clock domains. SNMPv3. RAD’s carrier-class element management system. Configuration. RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System (TACACS+). ETX-5300A supports Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS) per G. Management and Security ETX-5300A features flexible management capabilities.8261-G. In addition. 10-MHz signal phase and frequency synchronization. All the external connections are made to connectors located on the plug-in modules. Typical ETX-5300A Front View ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A Front View Front Panel The front side of the chassis has physical slots in which plug-in modules are installed to obtain the desired equipment configuration: • • The main and power inlet modules. are always installed in dedicated chassis slots. called system slots GbE. and identify the functions of the various slots. Main Cards 1 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV Power Inlet Cards E5-PIM PWR FLT RAD ETX-5300A LINK E5-MC-4 1 ACT LINK 2 ACT LINK 3 ACT LINK 4 ACT EXT CLK EXT CLK IN GPS OUT TOD 10MHz 10GbE DCE LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T MNG MNG ETH 1PPS CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV PWR FLT ACT FLT RMV E5-PIM ALARM CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR TEST LED FAN 20 FLT LINK 4 RMV F I L T E R PS-B MAIN-B MAIN-A PS-A F A I/O 2 I/O 4 N I/O 1 I/O 3 LINK E5-MC-4 11 LINK ACT 1 E5-GBE-20 11 LINK ACT 1 E5-GBE-20 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 20 FLT RMV LINK 11 1 E5-GBE-20 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE 100/1000BASE-X 20 FLT RMV 100/1000BASE-X 10/100/1000BASE-T OC-3/STM-1 FLT LINK 2 LOS OK FLT FLT LOS LINK 1 FLT LOS LINK 3 FLT LOS E5-cTDM-4 E5-FAN Service (I/O) Cards Fan Tray Figure 1-4. 1.0 Physical Description 1-5 . Figure 1-4 shows typical ETX-5300A rear views. and the fan tray.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 1-3. 10GbE and SDH/SONET service modules are installed in the other chassis slots (called I/O slots). 1. and ETX-5300A system capacity. 50/60 Hz) Single port DC power input module (48 VDC) Main card. point-to-point VLAN cross-connect. contains 4 × 10GbE ports. Table 1-1.0 • 1-6 Functional Description .Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual Rear Panel The ETX-5300A rear panel may have mechanical extension for housing two AC power supplies. Four I/O cards are interconnected with the main card via the chassis backplane in a star topology. They also perform post-forwarding scheduling and shaping (at port egress). in which: • Two main cards include forwarding engines (packet processors) responsible for bridging. The cards perform ingress traffic processing and management (pre-forwarding scheduling and shaping). The TDM cards handle TDM pseudowire traffic. their functions. TDM I/O cards include four channelized STM-1/OC-3 ports. system control circuits and its timing subsystem Fan tray with eight fans and alarm relay port GbE card with20 × GbE ports. Ethernet I/O cards include 20 GbE or two 10GbE ports. and Level-3 forwarding (router). System Structure The ETX-5300A is a fully redundant 3U chassis for Ethernet aggregation applications. Figure 1-5 illustrates a high-level structure of an ETX-5300A system. Available Modules Table 1-1 lists the modules currently available for the ETX-5300A. ETX-5300A Modules Module E5-PIM/AC E5-PIM/DC E5-MC-4 E5-FAN E5-GBE-20 E5-10GBE-2 E5-cTDM-4 Function Single port AC power input module (110–240 VAC.3 Functional Description This section provides a functional description of the ETX-5300A system that supplements the information above. SFP or UTP 10GbE card with2 × 10GbE ports SDH/SONET card with 4 × channelized STM-1/OC-3 ports Maximum Chassis Capacity 2 2 2 1 4 4 4 1. Four 10GbE ports on each main card forward aggregated traffic towards network. The chassis accommodates four I/O cards and two main cards. ETX-5300A Ver. Collection of operational history (alarms.0 Functional Description 1-7 . and Telnet hosts. fan module) provide DC or AC power to the system and cool the chassis. which determines the capabilities and features provided by the ETX-5300A. etc. performance statistics. Control of ETX-5300A system operation. Storage of application software. High-Level Architecture of ETX-5300A Main Card The main card (E5-MC-4) performs three main functions: • Control functions:      Interfacing with the network management stations. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.). supervision terminals. 4 x 10GbE 4 x 10GbE Main Card Main Card Timing Timing Packet Processor Common Logic Packet Processor Common Logic Power GbE.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction • System modules (power inlets and AC power supplies. 10GbE or SDH/SONET I/O Card Fans ETX-5300A Figure 1-5. Storage of configuration databases. to enable physical connection in parallel (e. When a second card is installed. however. and therefore the standby can take over at any time without disrupting system operation. E5-MC-4 Block Diagram 1-8 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver. Figure 1-6 illustrates main card block diagram. the chassis has two slots dedicated to this type of module. The second slot is used to install a redundant main card. which can be ordered with XFP transceivers with optical interfaces. thereby providing a hot-standby capability for the ETX5300A 10GbE. Only the active card communicates with the management station/terminal and actively manages the ETX-5300A system. It has four external ports. locked to user-selected internal or external sources. The standby card communicates only with the master module.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual • 10GbE interface function: E5-MC-4 card provides the interface to 10GbE packet-switched networks for the ETX-5300A packet traffic. system control and timing functions. by means of a Y cable) to a management facility. The four 10GB ports of the standby card can be used without any limitation. • Only one main card is required per ETX-5300A chassis. Backplane Bus Power 4 x 10GbE XFPs Quad 10GbE Physical Interface Packet Processor ToD/1 PPS Timing BITS/10 MHz RS-232 CPU 10/100/1000BT E5-MC-4 Card Figure 1-6. exactly as the active main card ports.g. The standby card is automatically updated by the active card with all the configuration and status data. the two cards operate as an active/standby pair. one module is the active card. and the other serves as a hot standby. Moreover.0 .. the transmit line in the standby serial port connectors is disabled. 1. Clock and timing generation functions: generates nodal clock signals for the ETX-5300A system. In addition to forwarding user data. Packet Processor With 100 Gbps full duplex performance. Type 1 Queue Group ETX-5300A Ver. the egress traffic management (TM) mechanism consists of three queue group types: Level-0 SEs CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 8 CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 7 WFQ 8 Up to 8 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 5 WFQ 6 CIR Shaper Level-1 SE CIR/EIR Shapers Figure 1-7. strict and WFQ priorities. 10GBase-LR.or 3-levels hierarchical scheduler. see Appendix B. serves as: • • • Main engine for point-to-point (E-Line). Note For details on system architecture and traffic management techniques. WRED congestion avoidance. With 2. bridging (E-LAN) and routing (Layer3) forwarding schemes Post-forwarding scheduler and shaper (see Figure 1-7. Each 10GbE port of the module has its own MAC address. the packet processor (PP) located on the E5-MC-4 cards.0 Functional Description 1-9 . multiple queues per shaper.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 10GbE Interface ETX-5300A main cards provide four interfaces (10GBase-SR. 10GBase-ER) for full duplex connection to 10GbE packet-switched networks. and is capable of processing data at wire speed. and can be assigned its own IP address for Layer-3 forwarding. Figure 1-8 and Figure 1-9) Hardware-based OAM utility. 1. the 10GbE interfaces of the E5-MC-4 cards distribute synchronous Ethernet timing (master and slave mode). The card supports IP and Ethernet networks. Timing Subsystem See Timing Mechanism section below for detailed description of clocking schemes supported by ETX-5300A. Type 3 Queue Group See Appendix B for detailed description of Ethernet services and traffic management.Chapter 1 Introduction Level-0 SEs CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shapers Installation and Operation Manual Level-1 SEs WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shapers Level-2 SE WFQ 1 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Up to 384 Up to 64 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 63 WFQ 64 Up to 64 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 384 CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 2 CIR Shaper WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Figure 1-8. 1. Type 2 Queue Group Level-1 SEs WFQ 1 Level-0 SEs SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Up to 768 Up to 768 Up to 64 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 WFQ 63 WFQ 64 Up to 64 Level-2 SE WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR Shaper CIR/EIR Shapers WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shapers Figure 1-9. 1-10 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver.0 . but also enables configuring the minimal severity level for reporting to each Syslog server. SSH: secure access using the SSH (Secure Shell) protocol. connected directly to ETX-5300A. SSH for secure Telnet access. which determines the capabilities and features provided by the ETX-5300A. SNMP: ETX-5300A includes an internal SNMP agent that enables full SNMP management by SNMP-based network management.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Management Subsystem The main functions of the management subsystem located on the main card module are as follows: • Interfacing with external management and monitoring functions. startup or userdefault). To record and track information on device operation and user activity on it. as read by an internal temperature sensor. ETX-5300A can report all the supported traps and alarms. The following options are available:  Supervision terminal: ASCII terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program. Functional Description 1-11 • • ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A supports a wide range of security features for every management facility: RADIUS authentication for supervision terminal and Telnet access. run by the main card. Storage of application software. ETX-5300A supports TACACS+ client application. and of internal chassis temperature. system and command accounting. The collected information can be read by maintenance personnel through the management link. The functions available under the Telnet protocol are similar to those available from a supervisory terminal. 1. Storage of configuration databases (factory-default.). running. and in particular the preliminary system configuration. the RADview family of management stations for element and network management available from RAD. using any standard SSH client utility running on a PC or laptop capable of IP communication with ETX-5300A. This software can be remotely downloaded and updated through the management link without taking the equipment off-line. This terminal can perform all the ETX-5300A supervision and configuration functions. • • Control of ETX-5300A system operation. The stored software includes both system software. See Chapter 3 for explanation of startup procedure and different types of configuration databases. and software for the other modules installed in the chassis. Collection of operational history (alarms. etc.0 . for example. and SNMP management with authentication and privacy per SNMPv3 using selectable security models. performance statistics. with support for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2. The application provides shell. Syslog: ETX-5300A supports automatic event notification to user-specified Syslog servers in accordance with the Syslog protocol per RFC 3164. Telnet: by means of any host capable of IP communication with ETX5300A.     To protect network operations against unauthorized access. designated CONTROL DCE. The switch is also connected to external 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet interface terminated in the CONTROL ETH RJ-45 connector serves. The cards provide physical connection to user equipment. The real-time clock can be set either manually or automatically. it is necessary to configure the IP address of the desired NTP server. This port is connected directly to terminals using the CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR cable available from RAD. perform packet processing and distribute synchronous Ethernet timing (master and slave mode). Out-of-Band Ethernet Port The main card has an internal Layer-2 Ethernet switch that serves management communications. using the NTP (Network Time Protocol). Serial Port The supervisory port of the ETX-5300A has a serial RS-232 asynchronous DCE interface terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector. To use NTP.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual A real-time clock provides time stamps for all the collected information.0 . A network operator can use NTP to periodically synchronize the local equipment time within the managed network to the accurate time provided by the worldwide network of NTP time servers. 1-12 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver. The performance statistics collected for the modules installed in the chassis are also synchronized to the real-time clock. which serves for out-of-band management access. and thus is able to reliably correlate alarm reports from different sources. Ethernet Service Cards ETX-5300A supports two types of Ethernet I/O cards: • • E5-GbE-20 with 20 fiber optic (SFP) or electrical GbE interfaces E5-10GbE-2 with two fiber optic (XFP) 10GbE interfaces. 1. and select a time zone. The switch is connected to the chassis buses to provide management access to the ETX-5300A management subsystem network or user interfaces. Figure 1-10 illustrates block diagram of the Ethernet I/O cards. ETX-5300A Ver.0 Functional Description 1-13 . 1000BaseLx. 10GBase-LR. E5-GbE-20 and E5-10GbE-2 Block Diagram GbE and 10GbE Interfaces E5-GbE-20 cards provide 20 interfaces (1000BaseSx. CoS/color mapping. Ethernet interfaces support autonegotiation (except for 100BaseFX). E5-10GbE-2 cards provide two interfaces (10GBase-SR. flow control with maximum frame size of up to 12K. policing and pre-forwarding traffic management (Figure 1-11). Packet Processor Packet processor (PP) located on the E5-GbE-20 and E5-10GbE-2 cards serves for classification.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Backplane Bus Power 20 x GbE SFPs/RJ-45s or 2 x 10GbE XFPs Physical Interface Packet Processor Timing CPU E5-GbE-20 or E5-10GbE-2 Card Figure 1-10. 100BaseFX. 10GBase-ER) for full duplex connection to 10GbE packet-switched networks. 1. 10/100/1000BaseT) for connection to GbE packet-switched networks. The module has four independent channelized STM-1/OC-3 ports.0 . SDH/SONET Card The E5-cTDM-4 card operates as a quad-port SDH/SONET terminal multiplexer for the ETX-5300A chassis that terminates STM-1/OC-3 links and their overhead. where each port is capable of multiplexing up to 63 E1 or 84 T1 internal streams into one STM-1 or OC-3 data stream.Chapter 1 Introduction Level-0 SEs SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 50 SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 50 CIR Shapers Installation and Operation Manual Level-1 SE WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 49 WFQ 50 Figure 1-11. 1-14 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Pre-Forwarding Traffic Management Timing Subsystem See Timing Mechanism section below for detailed description of clocking schemes supported by ETX-5300A. Figure 1-12 illustrates the E5-cTDM-4 card block diagram. The card uses pseudowire emulation to deliver E1/T1 streams over packet-switched networks (UDP/IP or Ethernet). and also handle the TDM traffic flow between ETX-5300A internal E1 ports.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Backplane Bus Power 4 x STM-1/OC-3 SFPs SDH/SONET Mapper/ Framer TDM Pseudowire Processor Timing CPU E5-cTDM-4 Figure 1-12. and the SDH network.520 Mbps). E1/T1 mapping to STM-1 is performed using the G. 1. Total module capacity is 252 E1 data streams. SDH Interface The SDH interface provides physical STM-1 interfaces for direct access to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) transmission cores at the STM-1 level (155.0 Functional Description 1-15 . ETX-5300A Ver.707 mapping scheme: • • E1 > VC-12 > TU-12 > TUG-2 > TUG-3 > VC-4 > AU-4 > STM-1 T1 > VC-11 > TU-11 > TUG-2 > VC-3 > AU-3 > STM-1. E5-cTDM-4 Block Diagram STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces The TDM interfacing subsystem provides interfaces to the TDM user’s equipment or network. The physical STM-1/OC-3 ports support a wide variety of SFP transceivers with optical interfaces for meeting a wide range of operational requirements. Therefore. Packetizing Considerations The number of TDM bytes per frame affects several performance aspects: • Bandwidth utilization. the bandwidth utilization efficiency depends on the overhead that must be transmitted to the network in order to support the transmission of a certain amount of payload. using pseudowire emulation technology.048 Mbps). The packet processor converts the payload into packets suitable for transmission over the packetswitched network. 1. and also handles the TDM traffic flow between ETX-5300A internal T1 ports. packets are formed by inserting a user-specified number of complete TDM frames in the packet payload area. the number of raw TDM bytes per packet should be as large as possible.520 Mbps). CESoPSN pseudowires can only be configured on framed ports. Because of the relatively short payload. The main steps of the circuit emulation procedure are the following: • SDH/SONET payload received via STM-1/OC-3 interfaces is processed by the framer to extract timing information and separate E1/T1 timeslots (the framer creates an internal E1/T1 port. T1 mapping to OC-3 is performed using the G. • • ETX-5300A uses the following payload encapsulation techniques during packet processing: • CESoPSN transports raw TDM data. which is connected through the mapper to the SDH/SONET link). and thus only one pseudowire can be configured per port. SAToP can be used only when the port uses the unframed mode. • Note The SAToP packet overhead is large. SAToP is different from the CESoPSN.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual SONET Interface SONET interface provides physical OC-3 interfaces for direct access to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SONET) transmission cores at the OC-3 level (155. in that it is used to transfer transparently a bit stream at the nominal port rate (2. Total module capacity of 336 T1 data streams. The resulting packets are encapsulated in Ethernet frames and sent to the main card for analyses and forwarding to the UDP/IP or Ethernet (MEF-8) network. that is. Therefore. 1-16 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver.5 > VT group > STS-1 > OC-3. and therefore.707 mapping scheme: T1 > VT1. and the SONET network. Pseudowire Services The pseudowire processing subsystem performs the conversion between the circuit-switched (TDM) and packet-switched networks. for efficient bandwidth utilization.0 . The resulting payload is provided to packet processor. thus reducing the total Ethernet throughput. 1. but can be very significant when few timeslots are transferred.125 Where: N = Number of TDM frames in packet SAToP PCT (ms) = N × 0. When E5-cTDM-4 builds a frame. Ideally. for UDP/IP networks the overhead is 50 bytes when using VLANs. The packets are transported by the PSN and arrive to the far end after some delay. it is necessary to evaluate the transmission bandwidth required on the PSN. • Packetizing delay. a packetization delay is introduced. is given by: RT Delay(msec) = 2 × (PCT + Jitter Buffer Level) + network round trip delay Increasing payload size reduces the ratio between the IP/Ethernet header segment in the packet and the payload. This effect can be small and negligible when a full E1/T1 (or many timeslots) are transferred.  For example. This parameter controls the number of TDM bytes encapsulated in one frame. It is calculated according to the following formulas: Mode CESoPSN Delay PCT (ms) = N × 0.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction  The overhead depends on the packet structure: for example. and 46 bytes without VLANs The payload depends on the number of TDM bytes. when using the payload size of 48 bytes.125 TS N – Number of TDM bytes in packet TS – Number of timeslots in one frame (32 for E1 or 24 for T1) • Round-trip delay. which also depends on the number of TDM bytes. packetization delay is increased. Sometimes. there is additional aspect (packetization time) that must be considered when selecting the size of the packet payload. Jitter Buffer Functions The packets of each pseudowire are transmitted by pseudowire emulation modules at essentially fixed intervals towards the PSN. Configuring the TDM bytes per frame (TDM bytes/frame) parameter has impact on the Ethernet throughput (bandwidth or traffic traveling through the Ethernet). this contributes to a higher end-to-end delay. The packet creation time (PCT) is different for the different payload encapsulation methods.0 Functional Description 1-17 . the packets arrive at regular intervals (these intervals are equal to the intervals at which they had been ETX-5300A Ver. The voice path round-trip delay is a function of all connections and network parameters. ±2 msec. the PSN transport delay should be constant: in this case. On the other hand. bandwidth utilization efficiency is around 50%. However. The delay value. Bandwidth utilization efficiency increases when using a large payload size per frame. For this purpose. Two conflicting requirements apply: • Since packets arriving from the PSN are first stored in the jitter buffer before being transmitted to the TDM side. causing an underrun. To compensate for deviations from the expected packet arrival time. The added delay time is equal to the jitter buffer size configured by the user.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual transmitted). or immediately after an underrun. When an overrun is detected. The jitter buffer is filled by the incoming packets and emptied out to fill the TDM stream. TDM traffic suffers an additional delay. the jitter buffer must be configured to compensate for the jitter level expected to be introduced by the PSN. and the PDV is equal to the expected peak value of the jitter. The read-out rate must be equal to the average rate at which frames are received from the network. the buffer size can be selected by the user in accordance with the expected jitter characteristics. a function performed by the adaptive clock recovery mechanism of each packet processor. The term Packet Delay Variation (PDV) is used to designate the maximum expected deviation from the nominal arrival time of the packets at the far end device. because of variations in the network transmission delay. underflow/overflow conditions occur. resulting in errors at the TDM side:  A jitter buffer overrun occurs when it receives a burst of packets that exceeds the configured jitter buffer size + packetization delay.0 . the pseudowire packet processing subsystem starts processing the packets and empty out the jitter buffer toward the TDM side. A jitter buffer underrun occurs when no packets are received for more than the configured jitter buffer size. the buffer is automatically filled with a conditioning pattern up to the PDVT level in order to compensate for the underrun. nothing prevents the actual delay from exceeding the selected PDV value. Then. To minimize the possibility of buffer overflow/underflow events. however. • 1-18 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver. However. or immediately after an overrun. to ensure that the TDM traffic is sent to the TDM side at a constant rate. the read-out rate must be continuously adapted to the packet rate. In reality. each pseudowire emulation module uses jitter buffers that temporarily store the packets arriving from the PSN (that is. Note The deviations from the nominal transmission delay experienced by packets are referred to as jitter. packets arrive at irregular intervals. For each pseudowire. the pseudowire packet processing subsystem clears the jitter buffer. the jitter buffer size determines the Packet Delay Variation Tolerance (PDVT). •  When the first packet is received. If the PSN jitter exceeds the configured jitter buffer size. in the range of 0 to 200 msec. separately for each pseudowire. For this purpose. 1. that is. from the far end equipment) before being transmitted to the local TDM equipment. two conditions must be fulfilled: • The buffer must have sufficient capacity. However. ETX-5300A Ver. 3. Note Generally.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction After the jitter buffer mechanism reaches a stable state.or overrun occurs. the average rate at which payload arrives will be equal to the rate at which payload is transmitted by the source. in accordance with the standard SDH/SONET terminology (Stratum 1. there may still be temporary changes in network delay. for CESoPSN and SAToPSN. This condition can be maintained only when the rate at which frames are loaded into the buffer is equal to the rate at which frames are removed.0 Functional Description 1-19 . this results in negligible voice degradation. Assuming that the packet-switched network does not lose data. the adaptive clock recovery mechanism actually recovers the original payload transmit clock. by specifying the following parameters: • • The accuracy of the original timing source. may sometimes compensate for the resulting problems). or higher protocols. the user instructs the receiving end to do nothing until eventually an under. The performance of the clock recovery mechanism can be optimized for the operating environment. Ethernet). some packets are discarded. or 4/unknown) The type of PSN that transports the traffic: router-based network (for example. 3E. or conditions return to normal. the user instructs the receiving end to automatically reset the jitter buffer when the buffer remains at its high value for a long time (this introduces a long delay). and generates a read-out clock signal with adjustable frequency. Timing Subsystem See Timing Mechanism section below for detailed descriptions of clocking schemes supported by ETX-5300A. but for voice applications and under normal conditions. 1. As a result. The adaptive clock recovery mechanism estimates the average rate of the payload data received in the frames arriving from the packet-switched network. Therefore. lost packets. are replaced by special dummy packets. By specifying that the handling will be sensitive to data. 2. This achieves the best possible data integrity (error correction. packets can be reordered. UDP/IP) versus switch-based network (for example. The frequency of this clock signal is adjusted so as to read frames out of the buffer at a rate that keeps the jitter buffer as near as possible to the half-full mark. • Adaptive Timing Each PDH port can use the adaptive timing mode to lock its transmit timing to the clock signal associated with the payload carried by a user-specified pseudowire. The method used to recover the payload clock of a pseudowire is based on monitoring the fill level of the selected pseudowire jitter buffer: the clock recovery mechanism monitors the buffer fill level. To provide the best possible user experience the user can specify how to handle packets under such transient conditions: • By specifying that the handling will be sensitive to delay. which occur before the mechanism can readjust. as well as packets that did not arrive in the correct order. The domain has its own system clock derived after selection process implemented via SEC (Synchronous Equipment Clock). redundancy is also available for the central timing subsystem. 1. located on the main card. jitter and holdover. The figure below shows the functional block diagram of the ETX-5300A timing mechanism.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual Timing Mechanism ETX-5300A timing subsystem includes a central timing subsystem. Timing Mechanism The timing system in ETX-5300A is based on one domain with master and fallback clocks. The SEC outputs a clock with Stratum-3 accuracy. and local timing subsystems located on the individual I/O modules. complying with the following requirements: 1-20 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver. Main Card System Clock 10GbE Ports I/O Clock 1 I/O Clock 2 1588v2 (master) T0 SEC Mux 1588v2 (slave) Station Clock (BITS/GPS) Station Clock Output (T4) Station Clock Output (T4) Secondary Clock via Standby Main Card I/O Card 1 I/O Card 2 I/O Card 3 I/O Card 4 Figure 1-13.0 . Clock sources (SEC inputs) are based on: • • • • Clock derived from a physical port on a main or I/O card External clock (BITS) IEEE 1588v2 clock GPS clock. Since ETX-5300A is normally equipped with two main cards. A Tx clock of an STM-1/OC-3 port can be locked to: • • ETX-5300A system clock Rx clock of the port. E5-10GbE-2 or E5-GbE-20 support Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) master and slave modes according to ITU-T G. ETX-5300A can use an adaptive clock. Ethernet Ports Ethernet ports located on E5-MC-4. E1.8261–G. A Tx clock of an internal E1/T1 port can be locked to: • • • ETX-5300A system clock Rx clock of the port Adaptive clock. the 2-way 1588v2 slave entities can be used. E1/T1 Ports An Rx clock of any internal E1 or T1 port on the E5-cTDM-4 card can be extracted and supplied to the main card clock selection mechanism (via backplane clock bus). the clock is used from a selected interface and not from an APS group. The main advantage of Sync-E over 1588v2 clock is that it is distributed over physical layer. STM-1/OC-3 Ports An Rx clock of any STM-1/OC-3 port on the E5-cTDM-4 card can be extracted and supplied to the main card clock selection mechanism (via backplane clock bus).0 Functional Description 1-21 . it is a Stratum-3 clock with near SDH/SONET holdover properties. it is not packetoriented and is considered to be more stable.826 requirements. T1 or GbE or 10GbE port located on an I/O or main card. OC-3. Moreover. If the ToD (time) is not required. 1. Sync-E mode can be used for clock frequency distribution. recovered from a TDM pseudowire stream as an Rx clock source. This allows each port to: • • Extract the port clock to be used a source clock to the clock selection mechanism Set the port Tx clock according the domain clock available from the main card.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction • • • GR-253-CORE for SONET Stratum 3 and SONET minimum clock (SMC) GR-1244-CORE Stratum 3 ITU-G813 Option 1 and Option 2 for SDH Equipment Clock (SEC). ETX-5300A Ver. Physical Port Clock The ETX-5300A clock domain can be configured to use timing information derived from an STM-1. Note When APS is enabled. IEEE 1588v2 clock signals are received and transmitted via 10GbE and GbE ports on the main and I/O cards. 32. The following clock signals are supported: • • • • 2. composite clock interface.048 Mbps. ANSI T1-403.0 . or in transparent mode if a NodeB supports 1588v2.544 Mbps.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual External (BITS) Clock The external clock interface has two functions: • • Input for external (station) clock signal Output for the ETX-5300A nodal clock. 1. 110Ω balanced. In this case remote a CPE can operate in a slave mode. Currently. ETX-5300A recovers Building-Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) clock via the station clock interface ports on E5-MC-4 card. Currently. 120Ω balanced. ITU-T G. 100Ω balanced 2. See Appendix A for the external clock connector pinout. When only one external clock source is available. IEEE 1588v2 Clock ETX-5300A fully supports IEEE 1588v2 clock distribution scheme.048 MHz / 1 pps + TOD. ITU-T G.703. 1-22 Functional Description ETX-5300A Ver. 75Ω balanced 1. ETX-5300A can operate in transparent clock mode. RS-485 64 kHz. transferring 1588 packets to remote Ethernet CPEs with updated correction field. The output clock signal is at 2.703. by means of a Y-cable. Transparency Mode If there is a 1588v2 grandmaster in the network. you can improve hardware protection by connecting the external clock inputs in parallel. Synchronization rate of the received clock can be at 16. ETX-5300A provides clock recovery mechanism with frequency and phase alignment. 64 or 128 pps. Slave Mode In the 1588v2 slave mode. it can terminate 1588 stream to recover the clock. only UDP/IP encapsulation is supported. if a NodeB has no slave clock capabilities. The ETX-5300A device can be located near the core of the network to supply up to 512 clock reference streams to remote Ethernet CPEs. Master Mode Using 1588v2 master mode eliminates the need for an external timing device installed in the core of the network to support 1588v2 timing distribution. The chassis can be a grand master and distribute 1588 streams. This output provides a convenient means for distributing the ETX-5300A nodal clock signal to other equipment. only UDP/IP encapsulation is supported.048 MHz squarewave. or it can forward 1588 packets transparently to other devices for clock termination. 550m (1804 ft) • 10GBase-LR. 1310 nm. When only one GPS clock source is available. full duplex only. you can improve hardware protection by connecting the GPS clock inputs in parallel.0 Technical Specifications 1-23 . full duplex (100 Gbps ingress and 100 Gbps egress) 4 per E5-MC-4 card 2 per E5-10GbE-2 card 10GbE Interface Number of Ports Transceiver Type Fiber optic XFP. 40 km (24. 10 km (6. by means of a Y-cable.8 mi) Maximum Frame Size Connector 12 kbytes (12284 bytes for I/O card ports) LC 20 per E5-cTDM-4 card Fiber optic SFP: • 1000BaseSX. single mode.0/2. using the following interfaces on the E5-MC-4 card: • • • Input or output of 10 MHz sinewave synchronization signal via mini-BNC connector Input and output of ToD timestamp signal via RJ-45 connector with RS-422 interface Input or output of 1 pps TTL synchronization signal via mini-BNC (DIN 1.2 mi) • 10Gbase-ER. 1. multimode. 1550 nm. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction GPS Clock ETX-5300A accepts GPS-based frequency and phase reference signal from GPS units. flow control: • 10GBase-SR. 1300 nm. autonegotiation. flow control • 1000BaseLX. flow control GbE Interface Number of Ports Transceiver Type ETX-5300A Ver.4 System Capacity Technical Specifications Up to 4 Number of I/O Cards Line Rate Max Throughput 120 Gbps 100 Gbps. autonegotiation. 850 nm. 850 nm.3) connector. flow control • 100BaseFX. 105 Transceiver Type Channelization Mapping Fiber optic SFP 63 E1 or 84 T1 per G. ESF System. adaptive LC 802. 1. Para.709 SONET: GR-253-CORE and ANSI T1.957 SONET: ITU-T Rec.1ad Ethernet Forwarding Forwarding Number of EVCs 4K 1-24 Technical Specifications ETX-5300A Ver. port Rx clock (loopback) System. G. G. port Rx clock (loopback). MDI-X 12 kbytes LC (fiber optic) RJ-45 (electrical) SDH/SONET Interface Number of Ports Physical Layer 4 per card SDH: ITU-T Rec.1D. 802. full duplex only.1Q.5 > VT group > STS-1 > OC-3 Jitter Tributaries E1 Framing T1 Framing SDH/SONET Transmit Clock E1/T1 Transmit Clock Connector G. G.520 Mbps SDH: ITU-T Rec.708.0 .958.707. 12 Nominal Bit Rate Framing 155. G.1322 SDH: • E1 > VC-12 > TU-12 > TUG-2 > TUG-3 > VC-4 > AU-4 > STM-1 • T1 > VC-11 > TU-11 > TUG-2 > VC-3 > AU-3 > STM-1 SONET: T1 > VT1.825 E1.707/Y. flow control. G. SF. 2.544 Mbps Unframed. multiframe with or without CRC-4 Unframed. 1. G. autonegotiation. 802.048 Mbps or T1.703.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual Electrical Interface Maximum Frame Size Connector 10/100/1000BaseT. EBS Color Mode Standard CIR/EIR Range (1 kbps Granularity) CIR/EIR Resolution (Actual Rate) Color-aware and color-blind MEF 10. EVPL). CBS/EBS Range (1 byte Granularity) CIR/EIR Resolution (Actual Value) Policer Compensation Hierarchical Scheduler Queue Group Profiles Indirectly-attached ports: 0–2 Mbytes 1 byte 0–63 byte 3-level Up to 128 (user-defined and default) Default: 4 (3 egress and 1 ingress) Queue Block Profiles Up to 384 (user-defined and default) Default: 4 Queue Profiles Shaper Profiles Up to 16K Up to 256 ETX-5300A Ver.6384 Gbps: 100 kbps 1. CBS. MEF 14.384 –163.6384–10 Gbps: 1 Mbps Note: The actual rate is rounded down according to the resolution.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Number of Shaped EVCs Services Compliance 384 (per network port) E-Line (EPL. EVPLAN) MEF 9.0 Technical Specifications 1-25 . EIR.1 Indirectly-attached ports: 0–10 Gbps 0–16. MEF 26 SP + WFQ Traffic Management QoS Mechanism Policer Dual Token Bucket mechanism (two rates.84 Mbps–1. 1.84 Mbps: 10 kbps 163. E-LAN (EPLAN. MEF 22.384 Mbps: 1 kbps 0–16. three colors) CIR. 0 . 16384. Ethernet Ring Protection per G. 4094. 256. 1. SAToP UDP/IP. E5-GBE-20 Cards Timing Number of Clock Domains 1 (master and fallback) 1-26 Technical Specifications ETX-5300A Ver. dynamic Pseudowire Number of TDM Pseudowires 1344 (336 per E5-cTDM-4 card) Payload Encapsulation Network Encapsulation CESoPSN. MEF-8 Protection Chassis E5-cTMD-4 Card E5-MC-4 card. 512.841 LAG. userconfigurable per broadcast domain 300–3600 sec 1 MAC Address Aging Router Number of Router Instances Number of Interfaces (RIFs) Number of Routing Table Entries Number of ARP Table Entries Up to 128 Up to 1K.8032 E5-MC-4. IVL Up to 32 Up to 128 per bridge instance Up to 4K per system Bridge Mode Number of Instances Number of Ports Number of Broadcast Domains Number of MAC Table Entries MAC Table Size 256K (max) 64 (default).Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual Congestion Control WRED VLAN-aware. 1024. E5-PIM card 1+1 unidirectional APS per G. static Up to 1000. 703.0/2. ANSI T1-403.048 MHz squarewave.0/2. input or output OAM CFM Number of MDs Number of MAs Number of MEPs/MIPs 8021. with primary/secondary clock redundancy Input and output: • 2. ITU-T G. 120Ω balanced.1ag.3). ITU-T G. ITU-T G.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Nodal Clock • GR-253-CORE for SONET Stratum 3 and SONET minimum clock (SMC) • GR-1244-CORE Stratum 3 • ITU-G813 Option 1 and Option 2 for SDH Equipment Clock (SEC) Clock Sources Up to 4 inputs for selection mechanism 1588v2 recovered. station (BITS/GPS) . Y. composite clock interface.3).048 Mbps. with up to 4K MA defined under one MD Up to 4K (512 MIPs) Up to 1 Down MEP per MA Up to 88 Up MEPs per MA Up to 1K MEPs with LM Up to 1K MEPS with DM Number of PM Services per MEP Number of RMEPs 1 (per predefined P-bit) Up to 8K MEP-RMEP pairs per shelf with up to 512 RMEPs per MEP ETX-5300A Ver. RS-485 • 64 kHz.703.8261–G.544 Mbps. RS-422 via RJ-45 (input and output) 1 PPS TTL interface via mini BNC (DIN 1. input or output ToD. sinewave via mini BNC (DIN 1.8266.1731 Up to 4K Up to 4K. 110Ω balanced Station Clock (BITS) GPS 10 MHz. 75Ω balanced • 1. main card port Rx 1588v2 Sync-E Master/slave/transparent (TC) Master/slave. 100Ω balanced • 2. I/O port Rx. 1.0 Technical Specifications 1-27 . supports Telnet. and SNMP Management Interfaces Serial Control Port Characteristics Interface: RS-232 asynchronous DCE Data Rate: 0. TACACS+ Interface – 10/100/1000BaseT Duplex mode – Full duplex only. 1. severity indication.3. inband T1. no flow control Maximum frame size – 1518 bytes Connector –RJ-45 Alarm Collection and Monitoring Alarms Last 256 time-stamped alarms stored in buffer Alarm synchronization.4. SNMPv2. and SNMP • Inband via network or user ports. MDI-X. BERT Ping. SNMPv3 • Serial ports on main card • 10/100/1000BaseT port on main card.4. SSH.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual Diagnostics SDH/SONET. Default maximum capability –100 Mbps full duplex. 19. masking RMON Syslog RFC 2819 RFC 3164 Alarm Relay Alarm Outputs Major alarm indication by floating change-over drycontact contacts Minor alarm indication by floating change-over contacts 1-28 Technical Specifications ETX-5300A Ver.2.2.6 and 115. Autonegotiation. 38. 57. SSH. E1/T1 IP Connectivity User-activated loopback.0 . trace route Supervision terminal Telnet SSH SNMP (RADview-EMS and other SNMP-based network management stations) Management Management Capabilities Management Utility SNMP Management Capabilities CLI SNMPv1.8.6.2 kbps Connector: 9-pin D-type female User Authentication Out-Of-Band Ethernet Management Port Password-protected login. 4. correlation. 2. 1. RADIUS. supports for Telnet. 9. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Output Contact Ratings Max. software or power failure is detected E5-GBE-20 LINK (green) – 10GbE link status ACT (yellow) – 10GbE activity status RMV (blue) – Safe extract mode FLT (red) – Hardware. RS-232 levels PWR (green) – Input power is OK FLT (red) – Hardware failure is detected Indicators E5-PIM E5-FAN OK (green) – Fans are operating properly FLT (red) – Hardware failure is detected CRITICAL (red) – Critical alarm is detected MAJOR (orange) – Major alarm is detected MINOR (yellow) – Minor alarm is detected TEST (yellow) – Test in progress E5-MC-4 RMV (blue) – Safe extract mode FLT (red) – Hardware. 1 ADC through closed contacts Max. load switching capacity: 60W External Alarm Input One active-low input.0 Technical Specifications 1-29 . software or power failure is detected Power AC Power DC Power 100 to 240 VAC (115/230 VAC nominal). 60 VDC/30 VAC across open contacts Max. software or power failure is detected E5-cTDM-4 ON LINE (green) – Card administrative status LOS (red) – Loss of synchronization is detected RMV (blue) – Safe extract mode FLT (red) – Hardware. 50/60 Hz 40–72 VDC (48 or 60 VDC nominal) ETX-5300A Ver. 1. software or power failure is detected PRI (green) – Primary/secondary card mode CLK (red) – Station clock status LINK (green) – 10GbE or GbE link status ACT (yellow) – 10GbE or GbE activity status E5-10GBE-2 LINK (green) – 10GbE link status ACT (yellow) – 10GbE activity status RMV (blue) – Safe extract mode FLT (red) – Hardware. 0 in) DC.Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual Power Consumption 500W max 440 mm (17. non-condensing Internal fan tray 1-30 Technical Specifications ETX-5300A Ver.3 in) 133 mm (5. 3U 380 mm (15.6 in) AC/DC 12 kg (26.4 lb). 455 mm (23. 1.2 in). maximum Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F) Storage: -20 to +70°C (0 to 150°F) Physical Width Height Depth Weight Environment Temperature Humidity Cooling 0 to 93%.0 . operation. the system can also be managed by means of Telnet hosts or SNMP-based network management stations.. main and I/O cards.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup This chapter provides installation instructions for the ETX-5300A systems. Always observe standard safety precautions during installation. which are applicable throughout the installation procedures. AC extension shelf and AC power supplies. The software necessary for using the terminal is stored in the main cards: if the main cards are not yet loaded with the required software.0 Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-1 . such activities may be performed only by a skilled technician who is aware of the hazards involved. The preliminary system configuration is always performed by means of a supervision terminal (procedures for using the terminal are detailed in Chapter 4). After the preliminary configuration. After the system is installed. RADview. Warning ETX-5300A Ver. power inlets. it must be configured it in accordance with the specific user's requirements. No internal settings. maintenance. e. Where necessary. Refer to the User's Manual of the network management station for operating instructions. including the installation of the modules that are part of the basic system configuration. adjustment. read the following safety precautions.g. refer to Chapter 12 for detailed software installation instructions. 1. Safety Before starting. and maintenance of this product. Mechanical and electrical installation instructions for the enclosure itself and the fan tray. specific precautions also appear before certain procedures. and repairs may be performed by either the operator or the user. This chapter presents the following information: • • General description of the equipment enclosure and its panels. retract the card. 1. • When inserting a card into its chassis slot.. • Do not stack cards one above the other. • Disconnect all the cables connected to the electrical connectors of the ETX-5300A before disconnecting its grounding connection. Grounding Dangerous voltages may be present on the electrical cables connected to the ETX-5300A and its cards. the power cable plug must always be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective ground. as the rack can also provide a connection to the ground. and then push it in gently. The grounding connection is made to the grounding terminal located on the ETX-5300A rear panel.g. Make sure the card PCB does not touch the adjacent cards. a lightning stroke or contact with high-voltage power lines. Intentional interruption is prohibited. make sure that the rack is properly grounded and connected to a reliable. Whenever ETX-5300A units are installed in a rack. Before connecting any other cable and before applying power to this equipment. the ETX-5300A case must be properly grounded (earthed) at any time. In addition.0 . wait at least four seconds before reinserting it. or the disconnection of the protective ground terminal can make this equipment dangerous. realign it with the slot guides and then re-insert. If resistance is felt before the card fully engages the mating backplane connector. the protective ground terminal of the equipment must be connected to protective ground. and do not lay any objects on PCBs. Any interruption of the protective (grounding) connection inside or outside the equipment. Warning • Never connect cables to ETX-5300A if not properly installed and grounded. To prevent physical damage: • Always keep cards in their protective packaging until installed in the ETX-5300A chassis. and return them to the packaging as soon as they are removed from the enclosure. occurs on the lines connected to the equipment. 2-2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites ETX-5300A Ver. or any part of the chassis. Therefore. • After removing a card from a slot.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual Caution Delicate electronic components are installed on both sides of the printed circuit boards (PCBs) of the ETX-5300A cards. low-resistance grounding system. the grounding connection is also made through each one of the AC power cables. Grounding For your protection and to prevent possible damage to equipment when a fault condition. e. align it carefully with the chassis slot guides. a label with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical transmitter. In such cases.0 Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-3 . ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible! ETX-5300A modules equipped with laser devices provided by RAD comply with laser product performance standards set by governmental agencies for Class 1 laser products. The modules do not emit hazardous light. separation of two such surfaces and may also be induced by electrical fields. Wherever applicable. ETX-5300A Ver. • Do not look straight at the laser beam. Laser power up to 1 mW at 1300 nm and 1550 nm could be collected by an optical instrument. 1. make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact and is connected to the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached. especially when humidity is low. In particular. Routine activities such as walking across an insulating floor. Warning Protection against ESD An electrostatic discharge occurs between two objects when an object carrying static electrical charges touches. can easily build charges up to levels that may cause damage.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Laser Safety ETX-5300A modules may be equipped with a laser diode. the users may insert their own SFP or XFP laser transceivers into ETX-5300A modules. Do not remove these covers until you are ready to connect optical cables to the connectors. In some cases. ETX-5300A modules are shipped with protective covers installed on all the optical connectors. Keep the covers for reuse. the other object. • Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current. friction between objects. • Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors. Users are alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if non-compliant transceivers are used. or is brought near enough. For your safety: • Before turning on the equipment. friction between garment parts. • Use of controls or adjustment or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. etc. and the beam is totally enclosed during all operating modes of customer operation and maintenance. and do not directly into the optical connectors while the unit is operating. to reinstall the cover over the optical connector as soon as the optical cable is disconnected. • The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard. Static electrical charges appear as result of friction between surfaces of insulating materials. users are warned to use only agency approved products that comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products. The AC power supplies convert AC voltage into 48 VDC voltage. Always keep the modules in their protective shipping containers until installed in the chassis. It is also recommended to use garments and packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistance. These components are exposed as long as the modules are not installed in the chassis. are therefore may be unintentionally damaged. 1. Whenever feasible. To prevent physical damage to modules: 1. If you are not using a wrist strap. 2. support the modules and make sure their components do not touch the chassis structure. The external circuit breaker used to protect the input power line can be used as an ON/OFF power switch. up to 12A current AC for 100–240 VAC. which conduct power from external sources to the ETX-5300A backplane. make sure to read the Handling Energized Products section at the beginning of this manual. always hold a module by its sides. Warning Caution ETX-5300A does not have a power switch. To prevent ESD damage. There are two PI module types: • • DC for 40–72 VDC (48 or 60 VDC nominal). 2. and do not touch the module components or connectors. These containers also protect against ESD. Power ETX-5300A can be equipped with either AC or DC power inlet (PI) modules. it is recommended to discharge the electrostatic charge of your body by touching the frame of a grounded equipment unit. 2-4 Site Requirements and Prerequisites ETX-5300A Ver. When inserting modules into chassis slots.0 .1 Site Requirements and Prerequisites Before connecting this product to a power source. yet are not insulators. It operates in conjunction with AC power supplies installed in a hardware extension at the back of the chassis. or other modules. during installation works use standard ESD protection wrist straps to discharge electrostatic charges. Do not pile up modules. Proper Handling of Modules ETX-5300A modules include small components installed on both sides of the printed circuit boards. and therefore will start operating as soon as power is applied to one of the power supply inlets. or an external ON/OFF switch may be installed. 3. up to 6A current. before touching a module.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual Caution ETX-5300A modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup ETX-5300As with AC power supplies can be powered via any combination of PI cards: 2 × AC. AC and DC. bottom and side for cables and module replacement. Note 70 mm (2. but some more rigid cables (such as Krone) require as much as 110 mm (4. It is necessary to arrange a single ON/OFF power switch to simultaneously apply power to all the ETX-5300A power inlets. and thus when power is connected to both DC input connectors. ETX-5300A Ver. availability is increased by having a redundant power source. Panel Clearance ETX-5300A can be installed on shelves and in telecommunication racks. Warning Within the ETX-5300A.0 Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-5 . which deliver the DC input voltage to power supplies installed on main and I/O cards via two redundant backplane buses. and therefore it is not possible for current to flow from one DC input to the other. Powering AC power supply modules one at a time may cause undesirable effects. DC Power DC-powered ETX-5300A units require a 48 or 60 VDC (nominal voltage) power source supplied over 14 AWG (1. 1. RAD offers rack mount kits for installation in 19 inch (ANSI) racks or in ETSI racks. top. This module has a separate input connector for each AC power supply module installed in the mechanical extension at the back of the chassis. AC Power AC-powered ETX-5300A units should be powered via easily-accessible grounded AC outlets capable of furnishing 100. 115 or 230 VAC. 2 × DC. Caution The same nominal DC voltage must be supplied to both DC input connectors. 50/60 Hz. 5 mm2) wires. The second DC input enables connecting a separate DC input voltage.7 inches) clearance is sufficient for most telecommunication and power connections (including fiber optic lines). the DC input supply lines are not referenced to the chassis (frame) ground. Allow at least 70 mm (2. The two DC inputs are isolated.7 inches) of clearance at front. ETX-5300A without AC power supplies can be powered only via 2 × DC PI cards. If one of the power feeds fails all the power is delivered by the redundant feed. The connection of DC power is made through DC power inlet modules. The connection of AC power is made through the front panel AC power inlet module.3 inches) of clearance. Each DC input must be protected by its own circuit breaker rated at 25A maximum. Whenever possible. in accordance with your order. To meet these standards. or preinstalled in the chassis. or you can order cables from RAD. Covering all empty slots is also required for reasons of personal safety and for efficient cooling of the chassis. Caution Do not operate ETX-5300A without the fan tray installed.3 Required Equipment The cables needed to connect to ETX-5300A depend on your specific application. for Class A electronic equipment. Cards are shipped either separately. Part 15 and EC regulations. and additional applicable standards.2 • • • • Package Contents The ETX-5300A package includes the following items: ETX-5300A chassis Power cords Hardware kit for rack installation Cable manager. 1. Warning 2.0 . Install blank panels to cover all empty slots. 2-6 Required Equipment ETX-5300A Ver. Irreversible damage to hardware will occur if the chassis is operated without the fan tray installed. If your chassis is shipped with preinstalled cards. it is necessary to perform the following actions: • • • Connect the ETX-5300A case to a low-resistance grounding system. use shielded telecommunication cables. at a relative humidity of up to 93%. Electromagnetic Compatibility Considerations ETX-5300A is designed to comply with the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements of Sub-Part J of FCC Rules. non-condensing. even for a few minutes (maximum allowed at room temperature is 5 minutes). You can prepare the appropriate cables yourself in accordance with the information given in Appendix A. skip the card installation procedures described below 2. Appropriate blank panels can be ordered from RAD.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual Ambient Requirements The ambient operating temperature range of the ETX-5300A is 32 to 122°F (0 to +50°C). Cable managers are attached to the 19” and 23” brackets.  To install an AC power supply: 1. Each module can supply a maximum of 500W. 2.4 Installing AC Power Supply Modules AC-powered chassis have a mechanical extension at the back that accommodates up to two AC power supplies. Do not connect power to the enclosure before it is installed in its designated position. Figure 2-1. 3. disconnect the power cable connected to the corresponding E5-PIM/AC connector or E5-PIM/DC terminal strip. 1. Installing Cable Managers Cable managers provide cost-effective solution for organizing and protecting telecommunication and power cables connected to ETX-5300A. Attaching Cable Managers to 19” Rack Brackets ETX-5300A Ver. and slide it in as far as possible. If necessary.5 Installing the ETX-5300A Enclosure The ETX-5300A is designed for installation on shelves and racks. 2. Insert the PS module into upper or lower section of the mechanical extension at the back of the chassis. Secure the PS module by tightening its two screws. The chassis accepts two power supplies that share the load. 4.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup 2. Check that the two fastening screws of the module are free to move. Figure 2-1 shows how to attach cable managers to 19” rack brackets.0 Installing the ETX-5300A Enclosure 2-7 . for mid-chassis installation in 23” racks RM-ETX-5300-AC-3U-19-FRONT. for front-edge installation in 23” racks RM-ETX-5300-3U-23-NEBS. for front-edge installation in 19 “ racks RM-GMUX-5300/3U/23/FRONT. 2-8 Installing the ETX-5300A Enclosure ETX-5300A Ver. 1.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual Installing ETX-5300A in Racks For rack installation. RAD offers the following rack mount kits: • • • • RM-GMUX-5300/3U/19/FRONT. Figure 2-3. Attaching Brackets for Front Edge Installation in 23” Racks Figure 2-4 shows how to attach the brackets supplied in the RM-ETX-5300-3U-23-NEBS kit for mid-chassis installation in 23” racks. Attaching Brackets for Front Edge Installation in 19” Racks Figure 2-3 shows how to attach the brackets supplied in the RM-GMUX-5300/3U/23/FRONT kit for front edge installation in 23” racks. it is necessary to install two brackets to the sides of the unit.0 . for front-edge installation and rear-end fastening in 19” racks Figure 2-2 shows how to attach the brackets supplied in the RM-GMUX-5300/3U/19/FRONT kit for front edge installation in 19” racks. Figure 2-2. AC power supplies increase the unit’s depth and weight. Identify the prescribed position of each ETX-5300A in the rack.0 Installing the ETX-5300A Enclosure 2-9 . 2. and then insert the guide posts located on each bracket in the matching holes in the rack side rails. ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Figure 2-4. 1. Figure 2-5. Attaching Brackets for Front Edge Installation and Rear Fastening in 19” Racks  To install ETX-5300A in the rack: 1. With help from an additional person. Figure 2-5 shows how to attach the front and rear brackets supplied in the RM-ETX-5300-AC-3U-19-FRONT kit for front edge installation of AC-powered ETX5300A devices in 19” racks. place ETX-5300A in its prescribed position. Attaching of Brackets for Mid-Chassis Installation in 23” Racks Note Mid-chassis fitting. This will help keep ETX-5300A in position until it is fastened to the rack with the screws. Installation of AC-powered ETX-5300A devices in 19” racks requires additional brackets attached to the rear of the chassis. using the RM-ETX-5300-3U-23-NEBS kit. in accordance with the rack installation plan. meets the requirement for seismic Zone 4 installations. The same procedure is used to replace the fan tray. While the other person holds ETX-5300A in place. 4.6 Installing a Fan Tray This section provides instructions for installing a fan tray in an empty chassis. Figure 2-6. Figure 2-6 illustrates a 19” rack fully populated with ETX-5300A units. fasten the chassis to the rack side rails with four screws. in accordance with the installation plan. 1. After installing the enclosure. washers and nuts. check and install the required modules.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual 3. Full Rack Installation 2.0 . 2-10 Installing a Fan Tray ETX-5300A Ver. Figure 2-7 shows a view of the fan tray panel.7 Installing Power Inlet Modules The connection of power to the ETX-5300A power supply modules is made through hot-swappable PI modules. Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9 show the offered PI modules.0 Installing Power Inlet Modules 2-11 . The fans are divided into two groups (four fans each). RAD ETX-5300A ALARM CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR TEST LED FAN OK FLT F I L T E R PS-B MAIN-B MAIN-A PS-A F A I/O 2 I/O 4 N I/O 1 I/O 3 E5-FAN Figure 2-7. and thus the airflow. DC connector pinout is given in Appendix A. Chapter 3 describes the PI module indicators. The fan and alarm relay indicators are described in Chapter 3. The panel also has a 15-pin D-type female connector serving as an alarm relay with LED indicators for alarm monitoring. The rotation speed of the fans. irreversible damage to hardware will occur if the chassis is operated without the fan tray installed.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup The fan tray includes a total of eight fans that provide cooling air. Fan Tray Panel Note The I/O slots labels are located on the fan tray panel. Carefully check the fan tray for foreign objects and dirt that may be trapped inside. Leave at least 80 mm (3. 1. and remove them. pertaining to fan operation. can be varied to adapt to the cooling requirements. 3. The fan tray has two indicators. do it quickly. which are independently controlled by main cards A and B.  Caution The cooling fan tray exhausts air from the chassis. even for a few minutes (maximum allowed at room temperature is 5 minutes). When replacing the ETX-5300A fan tray in an operating chassis. for example. the speed is decreased to reduce wear and noise. 2.1 inch) clearance for sufficient airflow. Do not obstruct these vents. Secure the fan tray by tightening its two spring screws. The chassis cooling vents are located in the side panel. Insert the fan tray in the chassis slot. when the temperature inside the enclosure is sufficiently low. ETX-5300A Ver. To install the fan tray: 1. and slide it in until its rear connector engages the mating connector on the backplane. 2. only one card is active. Power Inlet Module for DC Input E5-PIM PWR FLT Figure 2-9. Power Inlet Module for AC Input E5-PIM/AC Module The E5-PIM/AC module is used for connecting to 100–240 VAC power sources. 2 × DC. ETX-5300A without AC power supplies can be powered only via 2 × DC PI cards. E5-PIM/DC Modules The E5-PIM/DC modules are used for connecting to 40–72 VDC (48 VDC nominal) power sources. 3. and slide it in until its rear connector engages the mating connector on the backplane. 2. that have AC power supplies installed in the mechanical extension at the back of the chassis. Insert the PI module in its chassis slot. and the other serves as hot standby.  2. Figure 2-10 shows the front panel of the main card. 1. At any time. Check that the two fastening screws of the PI module move freely. To install a PI module: 1. 1 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-10. Secure the PI module by tightening its two screws. AC and DC.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual E5-PIM PWR FLT Figure 2-8.0 . Installing PI Modules Caution ETX-5300A units with AC power supplies can be powered via any combination of PI cards: 2 × AC. Main Card Panel 2-12 Installing the Main Card ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 3 explains the functions of the indicators located on the panel.8 Installing the Main Card The ETX-5300A chassis can be equipped with two main cards. The E5-PIM/AC can be used only in ETX-5300A units. …swing the locking levers to disengage the rear of the card from the backplane connectors. Make sure that the inner side of the locking levers (item 3 in Figure 2-11) engages the chassis frame. Removing the Main Card  To remove the main card: 1. 1. Pull the card out. Disconnect all cables from the main card to be installed. Make sure that the locking hooks (item 2 in Figure 2-11) snap into place. 6. Push the locking levers forward to fully insert the rear connector of the card into the mating connector on the backplane. 2. see Figure 2-11. 5. Opening the Locking Lever 4. and slide the card in. Check that the two fastening screws of the card move freely. Secure the main card by tightening its two screws. 3. 2.0 Installing the Main Card 2-13 . 4. ETX-5300A Ver. Open the locking levers. Insert the card in its chassis slot.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Inserting the Main Card  To insert a main card: 1. Fully release the two screws fastening the module to the chassis. 1P P S M NG ET H MN G 10 M Hz 10 L IN K 10 / 0/ 1 AC T 00 0B A SE CO NT RO L PR I -T DC E FL T CL K RM V 2 3 1 Figure 2-11. Move the central plate (item 1 in Figure 2-11) of the locking levers to disengage locking hooks (item 2 in Figure 2-11) from the frame and … 3. the PRI indicators state do not change. You can identify the active and standby modules by their PRI (primary) indicators. provided that card is functional.  Note The command is not executed if a fault is detected in the module that is to become the on-line module. If you replace the on-line main card. If not. because the active main card also houses 10GbE ports and provides clock signals to all the ETX-5300A subsystems. Use the manual-switch command in the config>protection>main-card# prompt to flip to the standby main card (the card with the blinking PRI indicator). a functional main card be installed in the free slot. To flip to the other main card using the supervision terminal: 1. it is recommended that before replacing that main card. 4. ETX-5300A automatically switches to the standby card. wait about 10 minutes before starting the replacement procedure described above for an ETX5300A with two main cards. and remove the module. 5. However. You can now disconnect the supervision terminal. the indicator of the other module stops blinking and lights steadily. first let it update its database from the information provided by the existing main card.0 . ETX-5300A services will always be disrupted to some extent while no main card is present. The card replacement can be temporary. and log in as administrator. 1. 3. the PRI indicator of the main card to which the supervision terminal is connected starts blinking. ETX-5300A Chassis with Single Main Card In an ETX-5300A equipped with a single main card. there will be a short disruption in service. 2. be prepared and perform the replacement as rapidly as possible. This disruption can be avoided by first switching (flipping) to the standby card before replacing the on-line module. and wait for execution of the command before continuing. Caution To prevent service disruption. After it is executed. 2-14 Installing the Main Card ETX-5300A Ver. use the supervisory terminal (or any other management facility) to instruct the ETX-5300A to flip to the other main card. When replacing a single main card in the chassis. For this purpose. check that the PRI indicator of the main card you want to remove is blinking. Therefore. After inserting the additional main card. the standby card can be removed/replaced without disrupting ETX-5300A services. Identify the on-line main card: this is the card with the steadily lit ACT indicator.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual Replacing a Main Card during Equipment Operation ETX-5300A Chassis with two CONTROL Modules In an ETX-5300A equipped with two functional main cards. Connect the supervision terminal directly to the CONTROL DCE connector of the on-line main card. In this case. Wait for the flipping to be executed. Warning Caution ETX-5300A does not have a power switch. it is recommended to connect the power cables to outlets powered by different circuits. 1. Note When redundant power supplies are used. Strip 7 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation from the leads. Before connecting power to an AC-powered device. or an external ON/OF switch may be installed.  To ground the chassis: 1. the protective ground terminal of this instrument must be connected to the protective ground conductor of the (mains) power cord.0 Connecting to Power 2-15 . and the bottom E5-PIM card is connected to AC power supply A. and therefore it will start operating as soon as power is applied to one of the power supply inlets. Crimp the terminal to tighten the grounding connection. However. Connecting to AC Power  To connect to AC power: • Connect each power cable first to the connector on the E5-PIM/AC module. Intentional interruption is prohibited. The external circuit breaker used to protect the input power line can be used as an ON/OFF power switch.2 mm/0. Connecting to DC Power  To connect to DC power: 1. Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the instrument) or disconnecting the protective ground terminal can make this instrument dangerous. and then to the power outlet. Grounding A grounding terminal is located on the front panel of the ETX-5300A chassis.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup 2. 2. ETX-5300A Ver. Connect an 8 AWG (3. it is necessary to use one ON/OFF switch to simultaneously connect/disconnect all of them. The top E5-PIM card is connected to AC power supply B. The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective ground contact. verify that every power inlet card has a corresponding AC power supply installed in the chassis.12 inch) thick copper wire between the grounding terminal on the ETX-5300A front panel and a nearby grounding point.9 Connecting to Power Before connecting any cables and before switching on this instrument. For each source. 1. fasten the screw to secure the lead. 4.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual Caution Pay attention to polarity. 2. 5. Refer to the Connection of DC Mains section at the beginning of this manual. PW R F LT 4 8/ - 6 0V + E5 -PI M eL ti v a g Ne d ea e iti v ad Le s Po Figure 2-12. Chapter 3 explains the functions of the indicators located on the panel. Push the lead into the terminal up to its insulating sleeve. connect the positive lead first.10 Installing I/O Cards The ETX-5300A chassis can be equipped with up to four hot-swappable I/O (service) cards. Figure 2-10 shows the front panel of the main card. Use a narrow blade screwdriver to release the terminal screw. Secure the plug by tightening the two screws. 3.0 . Verify that the lead is securely held by pulling on it lightly. 7. Insert the plug into the socket. and the negative lead second. 2-16 Installing I/O Cards ETX-5300A Ver. When the lead is in position. 6. Connection to E5-PIM/DC Terminals 2. Note Some SFP or XFP models have a plastic door instead of a wire latch. Lock the wire latch of each SFP or XFP module by lifting it up until it clicks into place. Warning  To install the SFP or XFP modules: 1. Third-party SFP or XFP optical transceivers must be agency-approved.Installation and Operation Manual 11 LINK ACT 1 E5-GBE-20 Chapter 2 Installation and Setup 20 FLT RMV 100/1000BASE-X Figure 2-13. 2. E5-cTDM-4 Card Panel  To install an I/O card: • Follow the procedure for main cad installation to install each I/O module in the prescribed I/O slot. complying with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser equipment. as illustrated in Figure 2-16. in accordance with the installation plan.11 Installing Blank Panels Install blank panels in all the chassis slots that are not occupied by modules.0 Installing SFP or XFP Modules 2-17 . E5-GBE-20 Card Panel 1 10GbE 2 FLT RMV LINK E5-10GBE-2 ACT LINK ACT Figure 2-14. ETX-5300A Ver. E5-10GBE-2 Card Panel FLT LOS LINK 1 FLT LOS LINK 2 OC-3/STM-1 FLT LOS LINK 3 FLT LOS 20 FLT LINK 4 RMV E5-cTDM-4 Figure 2-15. 1. 2.12 Installing SFP or XFP Modules ETX-5300A uses SFP (GbE and STM-1/OC-3 ports) or XFP (10GbE ports) modules with LC fiber optic connectors. This may result in physical damage (e. 3.g. 4.0 . 2-18 Connecting to 10Gb Ethernet Equipment ETX-5300A Ver. Caution Do not remove the SFP or XFP while the fiber optic cables are still connected.  To remove the SFP or XFP module: 1. and then repeat the procedure. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated. Insert the rear end of the SFP or XFP into the socket. retract the transceiver using the latch wire as a pulling handle. Using force can cause damage to the connecting pins. Carefully remove the dust covers from the SFP or XFP slot. Unlock the wire latch by lowering it downwards (as opposed to locking).g. a chipped SFP or XFP module clip or socket) or cause malfunction (e. 3. 1. and push it in slowly until the SFP or XFP clicks into place. 2. Disconnect the fiber optic cables from the SFP module..  To connect to 10GbE equipment • Connect ETX-5300A to the 10GbE equipment at provider’s edge or customer premises using standard fiber optic cables terminated with LC connectors.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual Figure 2-16.. the network port redundancy switching may be interrupted).13 Connecting to 10Gb Ethernet Equipment ETX-5300A is connected to 10Gb Ethernet equipment via the fiber optic XFP transceivers with LC ports located on E5-MC-4 or E5-10GBE-2 cards. These ports are designated 10GbE. Hold the wire latch and pull the SFP or XFP module out of the port. Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-18 illustrate typical E5-MC-4 and E5-10GBE-2 cards with 10GbE ports. Remove the protective rubber caps from the SFP or XFP modules. Caution Insert the transceiver gently. 2. Locking the SFP Wire Latch 2. 14 Connecting to Gigabit Ethernet Equipment ETX-5300A is connected to Gigabit Ethernet equipment via the fiber optic SFP transceivers with LC ports or RJ-45 electrical ports located E5-GBE-20 cards.  To connect to Gigabit Ethernet equipment with fiber optic interface: • Connect ETX-5300A to the Gigabit Ethernet equipment at customer premises using standard fiber optic cables terminated with LC connectors. Figure 2-21 illustrates typical E5-cTDM-4 cards with STM-1/OC-3 ports.Installation and Operation Manual 10GbE EXT CLK EXT CLK IN GPS TOD Chapter 2 Installation and Setup MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV 1 2 3 4 OUT LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-17. These ports are designated OC-3/STM-1. Refer to Appendix A for the RJ-45 connector pinout. 11 LINK ACT 1 E5-GBE-20 20 FLT RMV 100/1000BASE-X Figure 2-19.15 Connecting to STM-1/OC-3 Equipment ETX-5300A is connected to STM-1/OC-3 equipment via the fiber optic SFP transceivers with LC ports located on E5-cTDM-4 cards.0 Connecting to STM-1/OC-3 Equipment 2-19 . 10GbE Ports on E5-10GBE-2 Card 2. These ports are designated 100/1000BASE-X or 10/100/1000BASE-T. Fiber Optic GbE Ports on E5-GBE-20 Card  To connect to Ethernet equipment with a copper interface: • Connect ETX-5300A to the Gigabit Ethernet equipment at customer premises using standard straight UTP cables terminated with RJ-45 connectors. 10GbE Ports on E5-MC-4 Card 1 10GbE 2 FLT RMV LINK E5-10GBE-2 ACT LINK ACT Figure 2-18. Electrical GbE Ports on E5-GBE-20 Card 2. LINK 11 1 E5-GBE-20 ACT FLT RMV 10/100/1000BASE-T Figure 2-20. ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-20 illustrate typical E5-GBE-20 cards with fiber optic and electrical GbE ports. respectively. OC-3/STM-1 FLT LOS 20 FLT LINK 4 RMV E5-cTDM-4 LOS LOS LOS FLT LINK 1 FLT LINK 2 LINK 3 FLT Figure 2-21. (RJ-45 on E5-MC-4 card uses different pins for clock input and output.cTDM-4 Card 2. respectively. 1 PPS and 10 MHz GPS-based clock input or output are provided via mini BNC (DIN 1.0/2. IN and OUT Ports on E5. Connect the external clock source and/or slave clock device to the RJ-45 connector on E5-MC-4 card designated EXT CLK.) 1 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-22. 1. 2.16 Connecting to External Clock Devices ETX-5300A supports station clock input and output via balanced RJ-45 or unbalanced BNC ports on E5-MC-4 card. EXT CLK Port on E5-MC-4 Card  To connect to external clock devices with unbalanced interface: • Use two 75Ω coaxial cables to connect the external clock source and/or slave clock device to the two BNC connectors on the E5-MC-4 card designated IN (input) and OUT (output).  To connect to external clock devices with balanced interface: 1. using the information presented in Appendix A.17 Connecting to GPS Clock Devices ETX-5300A supports GPS-based Time of Day (ToD) clock input and output via RS-422 RJ-45 port on E5-MC-4 card designated TOD.MC-4 Card 2. 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV 1 LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-23. The external clock ports are designated EXT CLK.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual  To connect to STM-1/OC-3 equipment • Connect ETX-5300A to STM-1/OC-3 equipment at customer premises using standard fiber optic cables terminated with LC connectors. STM-1/OC-3 Ports on E5. Prepare a cable in accordance with your particular application requirements.0 .3) connectors on E5-MC-4 card designated 1PPS and 10MHz. 2-20 Connecting to GPS Clock Devices ETX-5300A Ver. 2. Connect the GPS-based ToD clock source and/or slave ToD clock device to the RJ-45 connector on the E5-MC-4 card designated TOD. 2.3) connectors to connect the GPS 1 PPS or 10 MHz clock source or slave clock device to the mini BNC connectors on the E5-MC-4 card designated IN (input) and OUT (output). TOD Port on E5-MC-4 Card  To connect to 1 PPS and 10 MHz GPS clock devices: • Use coaxial cables with mini BNC (DIN 1. Prepare a cable in accordance with your particular application requirements. using the information presented in Appendix A. Connect the other connector of the CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR cable to an ASCII terminal. Caution Terminal cables must have a frame ground connection.18 Connecting to a Terminal ETX-5300A is connected to an ASCII terminal via a 9-pin D-type female connector on the E5-MC-4 card designated CONTROL DCE. Use ungrounded cables when connecting a supervisory terminal to a DC-powered unit with floating ground.0/2. 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV 1 LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-25. 1. ETX-5300A Ver.) 1 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-24.0 Connecting to a Terminal 2-21 . Refer to Appendix A for the connector pinout. CONTROL DCE Port on E5-MC-4 Card  To connect to an ASCII terminal: 1. Using improper terminal cable may result in damage to supervisory terminal port. 1 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-26. Connect the male 9-pin D-type connector of the CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR straight cable available from RAD to the CONTROL DCE connector on the E5-MC-4 card. 1PPS and 10MHz Ports on E5-MC-4 Card 2.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup  To connect to ToD clock device: 1. (RJ-45 TOD connector on E5-MC-4 card uses different pins for clock input and output. RAD recommends adhering to the relevant EIA standards when designing you inter-building power distribution and telecommunication network. 2. 2.21 Labeling Cables Keep your data and power cables organized and clearly labeled according to the cable management system adopted by your company. Refer to Appendix A for the connector pinout.  To connect to an external alarm source: 1. 1.19 Connecting to a Network Management Station ETX-5300A is connected to a network management workstation via a dedicated 8-pin RJ-45 copper connector on the E5-MC-4 card designated MNG-ETH. 1 2 10GbE 3 4 EXT CLK EXT CLK IN OUT GPS TOD MNG 1PPS MNG ETH CONTROL PRI FLT CLK RMV LINK E5-MC-4 ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT LINK ACT 10MHz LINK ACT 10/100/1000BASE-T DCE Figure 2-9 MNG-ETH Port on E5-MC-4 Card  To connect to a network management station: • Connect ETX-5300A to network management station using a standard straight or cross UTP cable terminated with an RJ-45 connector.20 Connecting to an External Alarm Device ETX-5300A is connected to an external alarm device via the 15-pin D-type connector on the E5-FAN card.Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual 2. Connect the ALARM port on the E5-FAN card to an external alarm device. such as a buzzer. using a prepared cable. Prepare a cable in accordance with the alarm connector pinout given in Appendix A. 2-22 Labeling Cable ETX-5300A Ver. RAD ETX-5300A ALARM CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR TEST LED FAN OK FLT F I L T E R PS-B MAIN-B MAIN-A PS-A F A I/O 2 I/O 4 N I/O 1 I/O 3 E5-FAN Figure 2-9 ALARM Port on E5-FAN Card 2.0 . and remain lit as long as the ETX-5300A is powered.Chapter 3 Operation This chapter provides general operating instructions and preliminary configuration instructions for ETX-5300A units. all the indicators turn off (except for the E5-PIM PWR indicators as ETX-5300A performs its power-up initialization. monitor the power-up indications:  After power is applied. For an ETX-5300A equipped with AC-powered power supply modules. be sure to simultaneously connect the power to all the installed PS modules. The PWR indicators on all the E5-PIM PS modules that are powered light up. After a few seconds. 2. During this interval. all the ETX-5300A indicators turn on for a few seconds. Caution  ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Wait for the completion of the power-up initialization process (this takes about one minute).1 Turning On the Unit When turning on the ETX-5300A. and will start operating as soon as power is applied. 3. for example. You may also hear the fans in the ETX-5300A fan tray start operating. 1. This allows you to check that the equipment indicators are functioning properly.0 Turning On the Unit 3-1 . This chapter covers the following topics: • • • • • • • • Turning On the Unit Indicators Startup Using a Custom Configuration File Saving Configuration Changes Confirming the Configuration File Handling Configuration File Errors Turning Off the Unit. by means of a common circuit breaker or an ON/OFF switch.  To turn on ETX-5300A: ETX-5300A does not have a power on/off switch. it is useful to monitor the power-up sequence. Connect the ETX-5300A to power (see detailed instructions in Chapter 2). E5-10GBE-2. Table 3-1. the PRI indicator for the standby main card starts blinking. Table 3-1 lists the functions of the ETX-5300A LED indicators.2 Indicators The unit's LEDs are located on the system and I/O modules. software or power failure PRI Green ON – Main card is primary Blinking – Main card is secondary CLK Red ON – Station clock is configured. After startup ends. E5-cTDM-4 E5-FAN E5-FAN E5-FAN E5-FAN E5-FAN E5-MC-4. After the power-up initialization ends. E5-GBE-20 E5-MC-4. E5-10GBE-2. E5-FAN. 1. or station clock is configured and synchronized LINK Green ON – Ethernet interface has been connected E5-MC-4. E5-10GBE-2. but is not synchronized OFF – Station clock is not configured. E5-MC-4. ETX-5300A performs the startup procedure. E5-GBE-20. all the PWR indicators and the PRI indicator of the active main card are lit steadily. after it has been administratively shut down OFF – Hardware. See the Startup section below. E5-cTDM-4 E5-MC-4 Location E5-PIM ACT Yellow ON – Data is being transmitted/received at the Ethernet interface 3-2 Indicators . E5-10GBE-2. software or power failure has been detected OFF – No hardware.0 E5-MC-4 E5-PIM. using the supervision terminal. you may log in. 4. E5-GBE-20. ETX-5300A LEDs Name PWR Color Green Function ON – Power inlet module is providing power to chassis OFF – No power is applied to the inlet module FLT Red ON – Card hardware. E5-GBE-20 ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual 3. software or power fault has been detected OK CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR TEST RMV Green Red Orange Yellow Yellow Blue ON – E5-FAN receives power and all fans are operational ON –Critical alarm has been detected ON –Major alarm has been detected ON –Minor alarm has been detected ON – Diagnostic test is in progress Blinks – Power-up is in progress ON – Card can be safely extracted from chassis. 3. You must save the file startup-config. AIS. if the installation process fails. startup-config – Contains the saved user configuration. sw-pack-4 – Contain up to four software images • Refer to Chapter 10 for details on file operations. sw-pack-1. See Confirming the Configuration File. user-default-config – Contains the default user configuration. Caution Always wait until all main cards installed in the chassis are up and running before executing any file operation commands.0 Startup 3-3 . RFI etc) has been detected Chapter 3 Operation Location E5-cTDM-4 E5-cTDM-4 3. 1. Some commands that reset the device also erase the saved user configuration by copying another file to it before the reset. System configuration can be restored from this file.3 Startup Configuration and Application Software Files The following are system files that contain configuration settings or application software: • • • • • factory-default – Contains the factory default settings running-config – Contains full configuration (default and user). sw-pack-2. • restore-point-config – Contains the configuration saved during software installation. ETX-5300A Ver. sw-pack-3. Note The save command is used to save the user configuration.Installation and Operation Manual Name ON LINE LOS Color Green Red Function ON – Card is administratively enabled ON – Loss of signal has been detected Blinking – Other signal failure (LOF. rollback-config –Contains configuration settings to be used if the user confirmation of loading startup-config file has not been received. it is not automatically created. the user-default file.Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual Figure 3-1.0 . If none of these files exist. in the sequence shown in Figure 3-2 . 1. or the factory-default file. Start Boot from Startup-config Pass Sanity Check Yes Startup-config exist? Fail No Boot from User-default-config Pass Sanity Check Yes User-default-config exist? Fail No Boot from Factory-default-config End Figure 3-2. Loading Sequence 3-4 Startup ETX-5300A Ver. the device boots from the startup-config file. Commands That Reset Device/Copy Configuration Files Loading Sequence At startup. the device boots using hard-coded defaults. After downloading the configuration file.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation 3. Figure 3-3. a central network administrator often sends configuration scripts to the remote locations. Figure 3-1 indicates the commands that copy to startup-config. After the unit completes its startup. Some commands reset the device. If confirmation of the startup configuration file is enabled. 3. the custom configuration is complete. ETX-5300A copies running-config or any other user-specified ETX-5300A Ver. the unit must be reset in order to execute the file.0 Confirming the Configuration File 3-5 . user-default-config contains a configuration common to all of the provider’s devices of the same type. and the local technician only needs to replace the IP address in the script or make other small changes (using any text editor). use the copy command. Commands That Reset Device/Copy Configuration Files 3.5 Saving Configuration Changes The save command is used to save the running configuration in startup-config. and whether the device resets after copying. you must confirm the startup-config within a defined period of time. while startup-config contains a device-specific configuration. based on user-default-config. 1.4 Using a Custom Configuration File In large deployments.6 Confirming the Configuration File ETX-5300A allows you to enable active confirmation of the startup-config file after reboot. On issuing the startup-confirmrequired command. The startup-config confirmation prevents loss of the management link to a remote device due to an erroneous configuration. Normally. To download the configuration file. as explained in Chapter 10. and then download the file to the device. and also erase the configuration saved in startup-config by copying another file to it before the reset. Task Enabling or disabling confirmation of configuration file after reboot 3. If the new startup-config is not confirmed. enter the startup-confirm-required command according to the table below. The default option is runningdefault. 3-6 Turning Off the Unit ETX-5300A Ver. no before startup-confirmrequired cancels the previously enabled startup-config confirmation. You can change this behavior and require execution to stop upon error.  To configure handling errors in configuration file: • Enter on-configuration-error {ignore | stop | reject} into the configuration file to select the required mode.Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual configuration file to rollback-config.8  • Turning Off the Unit To power off the unit: Remove the power cord from the power source. The startup-config-confirm command is used to confirm startup-config. ETX-5300A executes commands in configuration files or scripts one by one and skips any invalid command. or reject the file with a subsequent device reboot. as it is the configuration currently run by the user. 1. You can define any configuration file to be a source for your rollback-config file. which is guaranteed to maintain management connectivity. rollback-config is ready to be loaded. Command startup-confirm-required [time-toconfirm <1–65535>] [rollback {startupconfig | user-default-config | factorydefault-config | running-config}] no startup-confirm-required Comments Default time-to-confirm – 5 min.  To enable startup-config confirmation: • In the admin# prompt.7 Handling Configuration File Errors By default.0 . 3. Management Alternatives Port Manager Location Local Transport Method Management Protocol RS-232 Application Control Out-of-band Terminal emulation programs (HyperTerminal. 1. SecureCRT.Chapter 4 Management and Security This chapter provides general operating instructions and preliminary configuration instructions for ETX-5300A units. out-of-band Telnet. Putty (see Ethernet Local. ETX-5300A Ver. Telnet (SSH) and SNMP management access methods are enabled. See Working with Terminal below. Table 4-1. terminal. SecureCRT. Putty). Procomm. This chapter presents the following information: • • • • • • • • • Terminal Control Port User Access SNMP Management Management Access Access Policy Authentication via RADIUS Server Authentication via TACACS+ Server Syslog Programming Cards.0 CLI-Based Configuration 4-1 . Table 4-1 summarizes management alternatives for ETX-5300A. remote Inband. SSH Working with Telnet and SSH below) SNMP RADview (see Working with RADview below) 3rd-party NMS (see Working with 3rd Party Network Management Systems below) Note By default. Procomm. Navigate to config>terminal# prompt and change the default terminal baud rate (9. 57. Power-up the unit. 12.0 . you can use a Telnet host connected to it directly or via a local area network. 1. 5. 10. Turn on the control terminal or start the PC terminal emulation program to create a new terminal connection.6 kbps) to 115. the Telnet host is a PC or a Unix station with the appropriate suite of TCP/IP protocols. 11. Set the terminal input delay between characters to at least 10 msec.2 kbps to match the new ETX-5300A settings. When the startup process is completed. Press <ENTER> until you receive the login prompt. The ETX-5300A control port can be configured to communicate at the following rates: 9. To enable a Telnet host to communicate.6.6 kbps. 6. Configure the PC communication port parameters to a baud rate of 9.2 kbps. 3. 1 stop bit. 4-2 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver. you are prompted to press <ENTER> to receive the login prompt.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual 4. ETX-5300A boots up. 7.6 or 115.2. 19. it is necessary to configure the IP address of router interface 1. enter your user name (su for full configuration and monitoring access) and your password. Continue with product configuration. 9. which is connected via default ingress and egress flows to out-of-band Ethernet management port.2 kbps.24/RS-232 asynchronous DCE port. 2. 8 bits/character. 8. The device prompt appears: ETX-5300A# You can now type the necessary CLI commands. To log in.4. Note RAD recommends using the 115. designated CONTROL DCE and terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector on E4-MC-4 cards. Working with Telnet and SSH Typically. After this preliminary configuration. Configure the PC communication port parameters to a baud rate of 115. 38. no parity and no flow control. Make sure all ETX-5300A cables and connectors are properly connected. The control port continuously monitors the incoming data stream and immediately responds to any input string received through this port.1 CLI-Based Configuration Working with Terminal ETX-5300A includes a V. 4. To start a terminal control session: 1.2 kbps data rate for CLI management sessions. Techs (technicians) – read-only access.0 CLI-Based Configuration 4-3 .  To enter as a user: 1. Enable RIF 1. they cannot change any settings. Enter tech for user name. user and tech are permanent users. Enter su for user name. By default the device name is ETX-5300A. 2.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security  To configure router interface 1 for management: 1. Using the CLI The CLI consists of commands organized in a tree structure. 2.1. Define IP address of RIF 1 2. Enable management access for RIF 1 3. 1. The su. but the technicians are allowed to reset the unit. Enter user for user name. Enter 1234 for password.1. set its parameters to defaults and use TFTP download/upload. Login To prevent unauthorized modification of the operating parameters. The base prompt is the device name. ETX-5300A# ETX-5300A# configure ETX-5300A>config# router 1 ETX-5300A>config>router(1)# interface 1 ETX-5300A>config>router(1)interface(1)# address 1. 2. ETX-5300A supports three access levels. Enter 1234 for password. ETX-5300A has Telnet and SSH access enabled. they cannot be removed from the authorization database. which can be configured in the system level (refer to Configuring Device Information in Chapter 4). user or tech) to them. The su level users can define new dynamic users and assign access levels (su. Enter 1234 for password. • • • Superuser can perform all the activities supported by the ETX-5300A management facility.  To enter as a superuser: 1. Users have read-only access.1/1 ETX-5300A>config>router(1)interface(1)# management-access allow-all ETX-5300A>config>router(1)interface(1)# no shutdown By default.  To enter as a technician: 1. ETX-5300A Ver. starting at the base prompt ETX-5300A#. In the following example. for example you can enter config manag to navigate to the management level. type the name of the next level. The dynamic entity is created as inactive. use the global command exit. To navigate down the tree. At the prompt. In addition to being the default prompt. ETX-5300A# ETX-5300A# configure port e1 1/1/1 loopback local 1 ETX-5300A# Figure 4-1. If only level names are typed. If the level names are followed by a command. it is activated by using the no shutdown command. so the prompt has not changed. the levels and command were typed together and therefore no navigation was performed. navigation is performed and the prompt changes to reflect the current location in the tree. To find out what commands are available at the current location. For a list of the commands and their levels. The $ symbol indicates a new dynamic entity (such as a flow) that takes several commands to configure. the command is executed. one or more level names separated by a space can be typed. Commands With Level Navigation Note Level names are abbreviated in the prompt. followed (or not) by a command. Commands Without Level Navigation In the following example. the # symbol also indicates a static entity (such as a port) or already configured entity. 4-4 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver. You can type only as many letters of the level or command as required by the system to identify the level or command. type show followed by the level name(s) followed by the rest of the show command. the levels were typed separately and the navigation is reflected by the changing prompt. refer to Command Tree. as shown in the following example. After the configuration is completed. To navigate up.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual Commands that are not global are available only at their specific tree location. 1. but no navigation is performed and the prompt remains unchanged. The prompt then reflects the new location. type exit all. followed by #. type ?. Note To use show commands without navigating. ETX-5300A# ETX-5300A# configure ETX-5300A>config# port ETX-5300A>config>port# e1 1/1/1 ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# loopback local ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# Figure 4-2.0 . To navigate all the way up to the root. CLI commands have the following basic format: command [parameter]{ value1 | value2 | … | valuen } [ optional parameter <value> ] where: {} [] <> Indicates that one of the values must be selected Indicates an optional parameter Indicates a value to be typed by user according to parameter requirements The following keys are available at any time: ? <Tab> ↑ ↓ <Backspace> <Ctrl-C> <Ctrl-Z> Lists all commands available at the current level Command autocomplete Displays the previous command Displays the next command Deletes character Interrupts current command Logs out CLI commands can be gathered into text files called scripts. 1. The scripts can be imported from and exported to RAD devices via file transfer protocols.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security ETX-5300A# ETX-5300A# configure flows flow flow1 ETX-5300A>config>flows>flow(flow1)$ ingress-port ethernet 1/3 ETX-5300A>config>flows>flow(flow1)$ egress-port ethernet 1/1 queue 1 block 0/1 ETX-5300A>config>flows>flow(flow1)$ classifier Classifier1 ETX-5300A>config>flows>flow(flow1)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>flows>flow(flow1)$exit ETX-5300A>config>flows# Figure 4-3.0 admin configure debug file logon on-configuration-error CLI-Based Configuration 4-5 . by recording the user commands or by saving the current configuration. Command Tree At the CLI root. Creating and Activating a Flow The shutdown command is also used to deactivate/disable a hardware element (such as a port). the following categories are available: • • • • • • ETX-5300A Ver. while no shutdown enables/activates it. They can be created using a text editor. Global Commands Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | copy echo exit exit-remote help history info level-info logout ping save software-confirm startup-config-confirm trace-route tree Description Copies files within device or uploads/downloads files to/from remote locations Displays a line of text (command) on the screen Returns to the next higher command level (context) Returns from the remote commands context to the host commands tree Displays information regarding commands in the current level Displays the history of commands issued since the last restart Displays the current device configuration Displays the current device configuration (commands from the current level only) Logs the device off Issues ping request to verify reachability of remote host Saves current settings Confirms newly installed software Confirms configuration file Checks the path connectivity to a remote device Displays the command levels from the current context downwards Table 4-3. Table 4-2.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual • rados-versions Each category is detailed in the tables below. Commands in the admin Category Command admin | | | | | | | factory-default factory-default-all reboot software | | | install software-confirm-required show status Description Administrative commands Loads factory default configuration Resets all configuration and counters Reboots the device Software installation Instructs the device to run from another sw-pack (upgrade) Requires user confirmation after reboot Displays status of upgrade process 4-6 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. 1. adds/removes static MAC address Defines the behavior and attributes of bridge ports Binds the bridge port to an SVI Defines the bridge port name Administratively enables/disables the bridge port Displays the bridge port status Enables/disables VLAN membership Defines maximum number of supported MAC addresses Specifies VLAN name Adds/remove the bridge port as VLAN egress tagged member Displays VLAN members Displays status of product slots Chassis configuration and status Specifies device inventory parameters Assigns/removes an alias entity name Specifies/removes an asset identifier Enters/removes the serial number of entity Displays the status of inventory item Displays a list with installed hardware and software Chassis and card production information Pseudowire cross-connect TDM PW cross connect configuration OAM threshold parameters vlan | | | maximum-mac-addresses name tagged-egress show vlans show cards-summary chassis | | | | | | | inventory | | | | alias asset-id serial-number show status show summary-inventory show manufacture-info cross-connect | pw-tdm fault ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | undo-install Description Chapter 4 Management and Security Aborts the upgrade process the return to previous sw-pack (downgrade) Requires user confirmation after reboot Loads user default configuration startup-confirm-required user-default Table 4-4.0 CLI-Based Configuration 4-7 . Commands in the configure Category Command configure | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | bridge | | | | | | | | | | | | | aging-time clear-mac-table show mac-address-table port | | | | bind name shutdown show status Description Device configuration commands Defines bridge parameters Defines aging time for the MAC table entries Clear addresses from the MAC table Displays MAC addresses. or fixed color value Defines ingress port of the flow Assigns L2CP profile to the flow Defines marking action for the flow Overwrites inner P-bit according to marking profile Overwrites inner TPID with a new value Overwrites inner VLAN ID with a new value Overwrites P-bit according to marking profile Overwrites TPID with a new value Overwrites VLAN ID with a new value Overwrites P-bit with a new value Overwrites inner P-bit with a new value Enables/disables statistic data collection Assigns policer profile to the flow Assigns policer aggregate to the flow Defines window size for sampling flow rate statistics Administratively enables/disables the flow Display flow statistics Display flow status Pushes VLAN tag flows | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | classifier-profile | match flow | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | classifier clear-statistics cos-mapping drop egress-port ingress-color ingress-port l2cp profile mark | | | | | | | | inner-marking-profile inner-tag-ether-type inner-vlan marking-profile tag-ether-type vlan p-bit inner-p-bit pm-collection policer policer aggregate rate-sampling-window shutdown show statistics show status vlan-tag push vlan 4-8 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver.0 .Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | cfm | | | service | | frames-report shutdown Description Installation and Operation Manual Configures OAM CFM thresholds Configures OAM CFM service thresholds OAM CFM service event reporting Enables/disables event reporting for OAM service Flow parameters Defines classifier profile Creates matching criteria Configures a specific flow Assigns classifier profile to the flow Clears flow statistics Assigns CoS mapping profile to the flow. 1. or fixed CoS mapping value Commands to discard traffic transmitted via the flow Defines egress port of the flow Assigns color mapping profile to the flow. 0 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | vlan-tag pop vlan p-bit fixed p-bit profile p-bit copy inner-vlan tag-ether-type inner-tag-ether-type no vlan-tag Description Pops VLAN tag Chapter 4 Management and Security Sets P-bit to a specific value Sets P-bit value according to marking profile Sets P-bit value by copying from the incoming frame Pushes inner VLAN tag Pushes TPID Pushes inner TPID Leaves outer and inner VLAN tags intact Displays flow configuration summary Management parameters Specifies access paths and rights Assign policy of authentication Enables/disables SFTP access Enables/disables SNMP access Enables/disables Secure Shell (SSH) access Enables/disables Telnet access Enables/disables TFTP access Specifies RADIUS parameters Clears the RADIUS statistics Defines the RADIUS server Specifies the RADIUS server's IP address Specifies the RADIUS server authentication port Specifies the shared secret between client and RADIUS server Number of authentication attempts at RADIUS server Administratively enables/disables RADIUS server Specifies the timeout Displays the RADIUS server statistics Displays the RADIUS server status SNMP parameters Defines the SNMP group Configures context match Defines notify view of the SNMP group Defines read view of the SNMP group Administratively enables/disables the SNMP group CLI-Based Configuration 4-9 show summary management | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | access | | | | | | auth-policy sftp snmp ssh telnet tftp radius | | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics server | | | | | | address auth-port key retry shutdown timeout show statistics show status snmp | | | | | access-group | | | | context-match notify-view read-view shutdown ETX-5300A Ver. 0 . 1.Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | write-view Description Installation and Operation Manual Defines write view of the SNMP group Defines the SNMP community Defines the SNMP community name Defines the SNMP community security name Administratively enables/disables the SNMP community Defines the transport tag Configures notification Assigns trap to notification Administratively enables/disables notification Assigns tag to notification Configures notification filter Configures notification filter mask Administratively enables/disables notification filter Configures notification filter type Configures notification filter profile Defines notification filter profile name Administratively enables/disables notification filter profile Configures security for access group Specifies access group Administratively enables/disables security for access group Defines SNMP engine ID Defines SNMP target Defines SNMP target address Administratively enables/disables SNMP target Defines SNMP target tag list Defines SNMP target parameters Specifies trap synchronization group for SNMP target Defines SNMP target parameters Configures SNMP target parameters message processing model Configures SNMP target parameters security Administratively enables/disables SNMP target parameters Configures SNMP target parameters version Displays the trap synchronization information community | | | | name sec-name shutdown tag notify | | | bind shutdown tag notify-filter | | | mask shutdown type notify-filter-profile | | profile-name shutdown security-to-group | | group-name shutdown snmp-engine-id target | | | | | address shutdown tag-list target-params trap-sync-group target-params | | | | message-processing-model security shutdown version show trap-sync 4-10 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver. 0 .Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | trap-sync-group | | tag-list target-params Description Chapter 4 Management and Security Configures trap synchronization group with SNMP managers Configures tag list for trap synchronization group with SNMP managers Configures target parameters for trap synchronization group with SNMP managers Defines SNMP user Configures SNMP user authentication Configures SNMP user privacy Administratively enables/disables SNMP user Configures SNMP view Defines SNMP view mask Administratively enables/disables SNMP view Defines SNMP view type TACACS+ parameters Creates a group for binding TACACS+ servers Enables/disables TACACS+ accounting for the group Adds or removes a TACACS+ server Sets accounting TCP port for a TACACS+ server Sets authentication TCP port for a TACACS+ server Clears the TACACS+ statistics Binds\unbinds TACACS+ server to\from a group Specifies the shared secret of TACACS+ server Defines number of authentication attempts at TACACS+ server Administratively enables/disables TACACS+ server Displays the TACACS+ server statistics Defines TACACS+ server response timeout Defines OAM parameters OAM CFM configuration Creates/deletes a maintenance domain Specifies MD level Creates/deletes a maintenance association Specifies MA name Defines interval between continuity check messages MEP parameters CLI-Based Configuration 4-11 user | | | authentication privacy shutdown view | | | mask shutdown type tacacsplus | | | | | | | | | | | | group | accounting server | | | | | | | | | accounting-port authentication-port clear-statistics group key retry shutdown show statistics timeout oam | | | | | | | cfm | | | | | | maintenance-domain | | | | | | md-level maintenance-association | | | ma-name ccm-interval mep ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ais bind ccm-initiate ccm-priority classification profile client-md-level cos-mapping direction flow lbm show lbm-results linktrace show linktrace-results queue queue-mapping show status show service shutdown remote-mep | show status Description Installation and Operation Manual Enable/disable sending AIS Binds MEP to a device port Enables/disables CCM initiation by the MEP Specifies priority of the CCMs and LTMs transmitted by the MEP Associates the MEP with a classifier profile Defines client MD level Associates the MEP with a CoS profile Defines the MEP direction Assigns flows to the MEP Runs diagnostic OAM loopback Displays OAM loopback results Runs OAM linktrace utility Displays OAM linktrace results Defines the queue for the MEP Displays MEP status Displays MEP service status Enables/disables the MEP Creates/deletes a remote MEP Displays remote MEP status Creates/deletes a MEP service Specifies delay threshold Specifies Delay variation threshold Defines Destination network elements for delay and loss measurement Clears the performance measurement counters Performance management method Selects loss measurement method Defines the MAC address of the destination NE Displays the performance measurement counters Specifies the interval for delay measurement messages Specifies the interval for loss measurement messages Enables/disables the MEP service Define the MEP name service | | | | | | | | | | | delay-threshold delay-var-threshold dest-ne | | | | | clear-statistics delay loss remote mac-address show statistics dmm-interval lmm-interval shutdown name 4-12 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | mip | | | | | | | | bind flow mhf | | | classification cos-mapping queue Description MIP parameters Chapter 4 Management and Security Binds the MIP to a device port Assigns flows to the MIP MHF parameters Associates the MHF with a classifier profile Associates the MHF with a CoS mapping profile Defines the queue for the MHF Enables/disables the MIP Displays MIP status Measurement bin profile parameters Defines threshold limits for measurement bin profile Displays configuration summary Peer parameters Displays peer configuration summary Port parameters E1 parameters shutdown show status measurement-bin-profile | thresholds show summary peer show peer-summary port | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e1 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | bert show bert clear-bert-counters clear-statistics idle-code line-type loopback name out-of-service path-interval-threshold pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status trail-mode tx-clock-source Activates/deactivates a bit error rate test (BERT) Displays the BERT results Clears the BERT counters Clears the statistics Defines code transmitted to fill unused timeslots in E1 frames Specifies the E1 framing mode Enables/disables loopback mode for the port Defines port name Enables/disables transmission of out-of-service signal for all services Setting path interval threshold Enables/disables PM collection Administratively enables/disables the port Displays the port statistics Displays the port status Controls the propagation of alarm indications Specifies the source of the port's transmit clock ETX-5300A Ver.0 CLI-Based Configuration 4-13 . 1. 0 . 1.Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ethernet | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | auto-negotiation classification-key clear-sfp-counters clear-statistics flow-control l2cp mau-type name pm-collection queue-group restart-auto-negotiation show sfp-status shutdown show statistics show status tag-ethernet-type tx-ssm Description Ethernet parameters Installation and Operation Manual Enables/disables automatic speed and duplex mode adjustment Defines traffic classification key used by the port Clears SFP counters Clears all statistics Enables/disables the flow control Assigns the L2CP profile to the port Defines MAU type of the port Assigns/removes a port name Enables/disables PM collection Assigns/removes a queue group profile Restarts autonegotiation process Displays the Ethernet port SFP status Administratively disables/enables the port Displays the Ethernet port statistics Displays the Ethernet port status Determines the tag protocol identifier Enables/disables Synchronous Status Messages transmission Defines L2CP profile Specifies the default action for undefined control protocols Specifies the L2CP action for MAC addresses LAG parameters l2cp-profile | | lag | | | | | | | | | | | admin-key bind show bind classification-key l2cp lacp show lacp-statistics show lacp-status name queue-group shutdown default mac Defines LAG capability Binds a port to the LAG Displays ports bound to the LAG Selects traffic classification key for the LAG Assigns L2CP profile to the LAG Enables the LACP protocol on the LAG Displays the LAG members statistics Displays LAG members status Assigns name to the LAG Assigns a queue group profile to the LAG Administratively disables/enables the 4-14 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver. Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | tag-ethernet-type Description Chapter 4 Management and Security Selects the Ethertype for the LAG Management Ethernet port parameters Enables/disables automatic speed and duplex mode adjustment Clears all statistics Defines MAU type of the port Assigns/removes a port name Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays the Ethernet port statistics Displays the Ethernet port status Defines SDH/SONET VC profile Selects EED (error rate degradation) and SD (signal degrade) thresholds Sets CV. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting with a trap sent Sets CV. 1.0 CLI-Based Configuration 4-15 . ES. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting with a trap sent Sets character type for padding path trace label Specifies the expected signal label Enables/disables TIM monitoring Create/delete Service Aggregation Group Assigns name to the SAG port Assigns a queue group profile to the SAG Displays information on SAPs defined on the SAG Displays the SAG status SDH/SONET port parameters Defines the administrative unit group (AUG) Defines AUG and enters AU3 controller level Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name Defines path profile Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port mng-ethernet | | | | | | | | auto-negotiation clear-statistics mau-type name pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status path-profile | | | | | | ber-threshold fe-interval-threshold interval-threshold padding payload-label tim-monitoring sag | | | | name queue-group show saps show status sdh-sonet | | | | | | | | aug | | | | | | | au3 | | | | | | clear-statistics j1-pathtrace name path pm-collection shutdown ETX-5300A Ver. ES. Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | show statistics show status vc11 | | | | | | | | clear-statistics j2-pathtrace name path pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status Description Installation and Operation Manual Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Defines VC-11 parameters Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name Sets profile configuration Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name Defines path profile Selects an administrative unit (AU) Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Defines TUG and enters TUG3 controller Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name Sets profile configuration Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Defines VC-12 parameters Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name Defines path profile ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 clear-statistics j1-pathtrace name path path-width pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status tug3 | | | | | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics j2-pathtrace name path pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status vc12 | | | | clear-statistics j2-pathtrace name path 4-16 CLI-Based Configuration . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status Description Chapter 4 Management and Security Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Clears the SFP statistic counters Clears the statistics Enables/disables triggering AIS/RDI on failure Specifies the cell frame type Sets section trace bytes in the section header Sets section trace bytes in the section header Enables/disables loopback mode for the port Assigns/removes a port name Defines an OC-3 (STM-1) connection Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name Sets profile configuration Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays the specified SDH/SONET statistics Displays the SDH-SONET of the port Number in the range from 1 to 3. Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name Defines path profile Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Specifies VT-1.0 .5 as SONET channelized format Clears the statistics Sets section trace bytes in the section header Assigns/removes a port name CLI-Based Configuration 4-17 clear-sfp-counters clear-statistics eed-action frame-type j0-pathtrace j0-pathtrace loopback name oc3 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics j1-pathtrace name path pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status sts1 | | | | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics j1-pathtrace name path pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status vt1-5 | | | clear-statistics j2-pathtrace name ETX-5300A Ver. 1. ES. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting with a trap sent Sets character type for padding path trace label Sets CV. ES. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting with a trap sent Enables/disables TIM monitoring Displays a summary of a port and its parameters Creates/deletes Service Virtual Interface overhead-mode show sfp-status shutdown soh show statistics show status tim-action tx-clock-source tx-ssm soh-profile | | | | | | ber-threshold fe-line-interval-threshold line-interval-threshold padding section-interval-threshold tim-monitoring show summary svi | | t1 | | | | bert show bert clear-bert-counters clear-statistics name show status Assigns name to the SVI port Displays SVI status Specifies T1 parameters Activates/deactivates a bit error rate test (BERT) Displays the BERT results Clears the BERT counters Clears the statistics 4-18 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | path pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status Description Installation and Operation Manual Sets profile configuration Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Defines overhead mode of the port Displays the Ethernet port SFP status Administratively disables/enables the port Sets SOH profile Displays statistics of the port Displays status of the port Enables/disables triggering AIS/RDI on failure Specifies the source of the port's transmit clock Enables/disables DNU/DUS transmit Defines SDH/SONET VC profile Selecting EED (error rate degradation) and SD (signal degrade) thresholds Sets CV.0 . SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting with a trap sent Setting CV. ES. 0 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | idle-code inband-loopback line-type loopback name out-of-service path-interval-threshold pm-collection shutdown show statistics show status trail-mode tx-clock-source Description Chapter 4 Management and Security Defines code transmitted to fill unused timeslots in E1 frames Controls inband loopback activation Specifies the T1 framing mode Enables/disables loopback mode for the port Assigns/removes a port name Transmits out-of-service signal for all services Defines path interval threshold Enables/disables PM collection Administratively disables/enables the port Displays the port statistics Displays the port status Controls the propagation of alarm indications Specifies the source of the port's transmit clock Protection parameters APS parameters Adds/removes working and protection ports to/from the APS Clears all externally initiated switch commands and the WTR timer Forces traffic to the protection port Forces traffic to the working port Prevents a working link from switching to a protection link Manually switches traffic to the protection port Manually switches traffic to the working port Specifies the APS operation mode Switches the APS to standby or re-activates the APS Displays the APS status Ethernet Ring Protection parameters Assigns ring node to a bridge instance Clears ring statistics Defines data VLAN Defines bridge port as an East port of ERP node Configures dedicated VLAN for R-APS messages Enables propagation of Signal Failure (SF) condition from the Ethernet OAM service layer CLI-Based Configuration 4-19 protection | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | aps | | | | | | | | | | bind clear force-switch-to-protection force-switch-to-working lockout-of-protection manual-switch-to-protection manual-switch-to-working oper-mode shutdown show status erp | | | | | | bridge clear-statistics data-vlan east-port r-aps sf-trigger ETX-5300A Ver. 1.Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | shutdown show statistics show status timers west-port backward-compatibility manual-switch force-switch clear switch-command port-type sub-ring | virtual-channel Description Installation and Operation Manual Administratively enables/disables the ring Display statistics counters Display status parameters Defines guard and hold-off periods in msec Defines bridge port as an West port of ERP node Makes the ring compatible with previous ERP implementations Blocks the East or West port of a ring node Blocks the East or West port of a ring node Clears the existing switch commands Defines node port type in relation to RPL owner Sub-ring parameters Enables virtual channel over shared link I/O card protection group parameters Binds a card to an I/O card group Enables/disables an I/O card protection group Displays status of I/O card protection group Main card protection parameters Switches to secondary card if possible Displays status of main card protection Pseudowire parameters Creates/deletes pseudowires io-group | | | bind shutdown show status main-card | | manual-switch show status pwe | | | | | | | | | | | | pw | | | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics egress-port jitter-buffer label name oam peer pm-collection psn-oos shutdown show statistics CLI-Based Configuration Clears PW statistics Assigns egress port for L2 forwarding Defines the jitter buffer size Specifies the PW label used in the inbound and outbound directions Assign name to the PW Enables/disables OAM protocol for the PW Defines a remote peer terminating the PW Enables/disables PM collection Selects the response to out-of-service conditions detected at the local TDM port Administratively enables/disables the PW Displays PW statistics counters ETX-5300A Ver.0 4-20 . using CIR/CBS and EIR/EBS rates Configures color awareness of the police Compensates for Layer-1 overhead and additional VLAN tag Defines the admission options for yellow packets Queue block profile parameters Defines a queue within the queue block profile Assigns an internal queue profile to the queue within the queue block Queue group profile parameters Defines a queue group which settings will be copied to create a new queue group profile Selects a queue block within a queue group Binds a queue block to a queue in the next-level queue block Assign name to a queue block within a queue group Assigns a queue block profile to a queue block within a queue group Assigns a shaper profile to a queue block within a queue group Internal queue parameters CLI-Based Configuration 4-21 show pw-summary qos | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | color-map-profile | map cos-map-profile | map marking-profile | mark policer-aggregate | | show flows policer policer-profile | | | | bandwidth color-aware compensation coupling-flag queue-block-profile | | queue | internal-profile queue-group-profile | | | | | | inherited-from queue-block | | | | bind name profile shaper queue-internal-profile ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 .Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | show status tdm-payload tos Description Displays PW status Chapter 4 Management and Security Specifies the number of TDM payload bytes to be inserted in each packet Specifies the value for the TOS byte used on outbound traffic Display PW configuration summary Quality of Service parameters Color mapping profile parameters Defines color mapping rules CoS mapping profile parameters Defines CoS mapping rules Marking profile Defines marking rules Policer aggregate profile parameters Displays flows associated with the policer aggregate profile Assigns a policer profile which settings will be used by the aggregate policer profile Policer aggregate profile parameters Defines bandwidth profile. 1. EBS burst rate Configures extra bytes to be taken into account Defines congestion avoidance profile Color mapping profile parameters Alarm/event reporting parameters Acknowledges the alarm/event logs Rebuilds active alarm table Displays active alarms Displays detailed information about active alarm Displays information on a specific alarm Configures alarm input Displays alarm input information Displays list of alarms Displays alarm log Masks alarm/event from a specific source Masks alarm/event from a specific source type Displays brief alarm log Displays brief alarm/event log Clears alarm log Displays information on a specific event Displays event list Displays alarm/event log Mask alarms per their severity Router parameters Displays the router ARP table Deletes dynamic ARP entities Creates/deletes router interface queue-map-profile | map shaper-profile | | bandwidth compensation wred-profile | color reporting | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | acknowledge active-alarm-rebuild show active-alarms show active-alarms-details show alarm-information alarm-input show alarm-input show alarm-list show alarm-log alarm-source-attribute alarm-source-type-attribute show brief-alarm-log show brief-log clear-alarm-log show event-information show event-list show log mask-minimum-severity router | | | show arp-table clear-arp-table interface 4-22 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver.0 . EIR data rate and CBS.Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | congestion-avoidance scheduling shaper Description Installation and Operation Manual Assigns a WRED profile to the internal queue Sets scheduling method Assigns a shaper profile to the internal queue Defines queue mapping profile (this profile is preset and cannot be changed) Maps CoS values to priority queues Shaper profile parameters Defines CIR. 1.0 .Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | address bind management-access name shutdown show status Description Chapter 4 Management and Security Assigns an IP address and a subnet mask to the router interface Binds router interface to physical/logical port Configures interface management access Assigns name to the router interface Administratively enables/disables the router interface Displays router interface status Displays the interface table Assigns name to the router Displays the routing table Creates/deletes static ARP entities Creates/deletes static route entities Provisions cards in the chassis database Binds loopback address Provisions card in the slot Resets the card Enables/disables the card Displays status of the card System parameters Clock parameters Defines clock domain number Clears the Forced or Manual command Clears statistics for all clock sources Forces a particular clock source Forces T4 timing generator to use the same clock source as the T0 generator Selects a particular clock source Sets maximum frequency deviation Defines clock mode Sets minimum quality of outgoing station clock Clock source parameters Resets the WTR timer Defines amount of time that signal failure must be active before it is transmitted Defines clock source priority CLI-Based Configuration 4-23 show interface-table name show routing-table static-arp static-route slot | | | | | bind card-type reset shutdown show status system | | | | | | | | | | | | | | clock | | | | | | | | | | | | | domain | | | | | | | | | | | | clear clear-statistics force force-t4-as-t0 manual max-frequency-deviation mode quality source | | | clear-wait-to-restore hold-off priority ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | show status sync-network-type master | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics distributed-mode domain-number ip-address maximum-slaves pm-collection shutdown slave | | | clear-statistics show statistics show status show statistics show status sync-rate tx-clock recovered | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics ip-address ptp-domain recovery-mode revertive shutdown source-port-identity show status wait-to-restore 4-24 CLI-Based Configuration .Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | quality-level show statistics show status wait-to-restore Description Installation and Operation Manual Sets quality level of the clock source Displays statistics counters of the clock source Displays status of the clock source Defines amount of time that a previously failed synchronization source must be fault free in order to be considered available Displays clock status Sets synchronization network type 1588v2 master clock parameters Clears the statistics Defines the 1588v2 distributed clock mode Creates a PTP domain Defines IP address of the master entity Defines the maximum number of slaves Enables/disables PM collection Administratively enables/disables master clock 1588v2 slave clock parameters Clears the statistics Displays statistics counters Displays status parameters Displays statistics counters Displays status parameters Defines synchronization message rate Selects Tx clock domain 1588v2 recovered clock parameters Clears the statistics Defines IP address of 1588v2 slave entity Creates a PTP domain Defines 1588v2 message exchange mode Defines BMCA (Best Master Clock Algorithm) mode Enable/disable recovered clock Identifier number of the master clock Display status parameters Defines amount of time that previously failed clock must be fault free in order to be considered available ETX-5300A Ver. 732N–CRC and T1 ESF interfaces Enables/disables Y-cable redundancy for station clock ToD parameters Configure baud rate Define interface type Assigns/removes a port name Enables/disables ToD clock Displays ToD status | | | | | | | | | | clear-statistics delay-respond | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | peer quality-level shutdown show statistics show status sync | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | station | | | | | | | | | | impedance interface-type line-type name rx-sensitivity shutdown ssm-channel show status tx-clock-source tx-ssm station-y-cable tod | | | | | baudrate interface-type name shutdown show status ETX-5300A Ver.732N–CRC bits to carry SSM information Displays station clock status Assigns station transmit clock source Enables SSM transmission for E1 G. minimum sync message rate supported by the slave and duration of sync message transmission Station clock parameters Sets impedance for E1 and 2-MHz interfaces Defines station clock interface type Sets line type for E1. minimum Delay Response message rate supported by the slave and duration of Delay Response message transmission Specifies the peer device that transmits the clock signal Sets clock quality level depending on the network type Enables/disables recovered clock Displays statistics Displays status Defines sync message rate requested by the slave. T1 or 64 kHz interfaces Assigns a name to station clock source Sets receiver sensitivity for E1 and 2-MHz interfaces Administratively enables/disables station clock Defines E1 G.0 CLI-Based Configuration 4-25 . minimum Announce message rate supported by the slave and duration of Announce message transmission Clears statistics Defines Delay Response message rate requested by the slave. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Command | | | | | | | | master | announce Description Chapter 4 Management and Security Defines peer master source port ID Defines Announce message rate requested by the slave. Chapter 4 Management and Security Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | tod-y-cable Description Installation and Operation Manual Administratively enables/disables ToD Y-cable redundancy Specifies/removes a contact person Date and time parameters Defines system date Defines system date format Simple Network Time Protocol parameters Enables/disables broadcast client mode for SNTP Defines period for polling SNTP server SNTP server parameters Defines SNTP server IP address Sets/resets the SNTP server preference Queries the timestamp from the SNTP server Administratively enables/disables SNTP server Defines UDP port for SNTP communication Displays SNTP server status Defines system time Defines time zone and offset Displays current system data and time Displays device information Specifies/removes the location of a device Assigns/removes a name to the device Syslog parameters Specifies the Syslog server IP address Clears the Syslog statistics Identifies facility to send Syslog messages from Defines the UDP port for Syslog communication Specifies the severity level of Syslog messages to be sent Opens/closes the connection to the Syslog server Displays Syslog statistics Supervisory terminal parameters Defines the data rate for terminal communication Sets the length of the terminal screen Specifies the time of inactivity after which the device disconnects contact date-and-time | | | | | | | | | | | | | | date date-format sntp | | | | | | | | | broadcast poll-interval server | | | | | address prefer query-server shutdown udp show status time zone show date-and-time show device-information location name syslog | | | | | | | address clear-statistics facility port severity-level shutdown show statistics terminal | | | baud-rate length timeout 4-26 CLI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. 0 GUI-Based Configuration 4-27 . Commands in the logon Category Command logon Description Allows to logon to debug level Table 4-7. 1. ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security Table 4-5. as well as by the standalone RADview stations. provided IP communications possible with the management station. Commands in the on-configuration-error Category Command on-configuration-error Description Determines the device behavior when encountering an error in configuration file Table 4-8. For example. Commands in the file Category Command file | | | | | | | | | | show configuration-files show copy delete dir show factory-default-config show rollback-config show running-config show startup-config show sw-pack show user-default-config Description Initiates file operations Displays configuration files properties Displays results of the copy operation Deletes a file from the device Lists all files in the device Displays factory-default-config file contents Displays rollback-config file contents Displays running-config file contents Displays startup-config file contents Displays the existing application software packages and their contents Displays user-default-config file contents Table 4-6.2 GUI-Based Configuration Preconfiguring ETX-5300A for SNMP Management ETX-5300A can be managed by any SNMP-based network management station. Commands in the rados-versions Category Command show rados-versions Description Displays RAD-OS version 4. in the RADview family of network management stations. 4. bind it to the SVI and add a static route to the next hop. 2. mask and type Access group Trap report policy. 5. Create classifier profiles for match all and untagged traffic 3. Script below provides all necessary configuration steps. Configure SNMPv3 parameters:    OID tree visibility. Add two flows (incoming and outgoing) connecting out-of-band Ethernet management port and the SVI. it is necessary to preconfigure the basic parameters using a supervision terminal connected to the ETX-5300A CONTROL DCE port.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual To manage the ETX-5300A from a remote NMS.0 . Add a router-type SVI. Add a router interface. RAD recommends Layer-3 management access via out-of-band Ethernet management port.  To preconfigure ETX-5300A for Layer-3 management access: 1. Replace IP addresses and entity names with values relevant for your network environment. #*******************************Adding_SVI*********************************** config port svi 99 router exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #***************************Adding Classifier_Profiles*********************** config flows classifier-profile classall match-any match all exit all config flows classifier-profile classutg match-any match untagged exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Flows******************************** config flows flow mng_in classifier classutg ingress-port mng-ethernet main-a/0 egress-port svi 99 no shutdown exit all 4-28 GUI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver. 1. 0 GUI-Based Configuration 4-29 .116/24 bind svi 99 no shutdown exit static-route 0.0.35 no shutdown exit notify unmasked tag unmasked no shutdown exit all #**********************************End************************************ ETX-5300A Ver.1 exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #*********************Configuring_SNMP_View/Mask/Type************************ configure management snmp view internet 1 mask 1 type included no shut exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #*********************Configuring_SNMP_Access_Group************************ configure management snmp access-group initial usm no-auth-no-priv context-match prefix exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #**************************Configring_SNMP_Traps***************************** configure management snmp target-params p message-processing-model snmpv3 version usm security name initial level no-auth-no-priv no shutdown exit target a target-params p tag-list unmasked address udp-domain 172.17.176. 1.219.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security config flows flow mng_out classifier classall ingress-port svi 99 egress-port mng-ethernet main-a/0 no shutdown exit all #**********************************End*************************************** #*********************Configuring_Router_Interface*************************** configure router 1 interface 1 address 172.0/0 address 172.18.219.18.0. including configuration. For more details about this network management software. RADview-EMS provides a dedicated graphical user interface (GUI) for monitoring RAD products via their SNMP agents. statistics collection.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual Working with RADview RADview-EMS is a user-friendly and powerful SNMP-based element management system (EMS). Working with 3rd Party Network Management Systems ETX-5300A can be integrated into 3rd-party management systems at different levels: • • Viewing device inventory and receiving traps (see Chapter 5 for trap list) Managing device. RADview-EMS for ETX-5300A is bundled in the RADview-EMS package for PC (Windows-based) or Unix.MIB (MAU-MIB) RFC 4878. and for detailed instructions on how to install. provisioning and managing heterogeneous networks.0 . used for planning. RAD private MIB. using standard and private MIBs:                      CFM MIB (IEEE8021-CFM-MIB) IANAifType-MIB IETF Syslog Device MIB IEEE8023-LAG-MIB MEF-R MIB RAD private MIB RFC 2819 (RMON-MIB) RFC 2863 (IF-MIB) RFC 3273 (Remote Network Monitoring MIB) RFC 3411 (SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB) RFC 3413 (SNMP-TARGET-MIB) RFC 3414 (SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB) RFC 3415 (SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB) RFC 3418 (SNMPv2-MIB) RFC 3433 (ENTITY-SENSOR-MIB) RFC 3636 (MAU-MIB) RFC 4133 (ENTITY-MIB) RFC 4668 (RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB) RFC 4836. and use RADview. 1. diagnostics. set up.MIB (DOT3-OAM-MIB). contact your local RAD partner or refer to the RADview-EMS User's Manual at the RAD website. 4-30 GUI-Based Configuration ETX-5300A Ver. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security 4. Layer-2 Management Access Layer-3 Management Access Figure 4-5 illustrates a typical Layer-3 management scheme. or Inband traffic via a 10GbE port. 1. ETX-5300A and remote ETX-2xxA devices can be managed using: • • Out-of-band traffic via a dedicated Ethernet management port. connected to a bridge port. Network management station (NMS).3 Management Access Methods This section describes two methods used to access the ETX-5300A management host via Layer 2 or Layer 3 networks.0 Management Access Methods 4-31 . ETX-5300A LB IP Router RIF SVI ETX-2xxA NMS SVI Management Network VLAN X SVI VLAN X BP BP BP SVI VLAN X Management Network User VLAN X OOB VLAN X VLAN X Out-of-Band Access Bridge PSN VLAN X VLAN X VLAN X User VLAN X BP SVI BP VLAN X NET SVI VLAN X Inband Access PSN ETX-2xxA NMS Figure 4-4. or Inband traffic via a 10GbE port. ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A and remote ETX-2xxA devices share the same Layer-2 broadcast domain (VLAN X) and Layer-2 forwarding entity (bridge) is used for access. ETX-5300A and remote ETX-2xxA devices are managed using: • • Out-of-band traffic via a dedicated Ethernet management port. The ETX-5300A host is an IP address of a router interface. Layer-2 Management Access Figure 4-4 illustrates a typical Layer-2 management scheme. including virtual loopback (LB) IP addresses. To enable remote management.0 . 4-32 Management Access Methods ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A has router interface 1 connected to out-of-band Ethernet management port via ingress and egress untagged flows (Figure 4-6). it is necessary to: 1. ETX-5300A SVI Router RIF 1 OOB Figure 4-6. By default. which are used for TDM pseudowire or Precision Time Protocol (IEEE 1588v2) traffic.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A ETX-2xxA NMS SVI Layer-3 PSN SVI RIF 4 RIF 1 OOB Out-of-Band Access Layer-3 PSN User Router SVI Layer-3 PSN SVI Layer-3 PSN User RIF 3 RIF 2 NET Inband Access ETX-2xxA LB IP NMS Figure 4-5. Enable RIF 1. Define IP address of RIF 1 2. Enable management access for RIF 1 3. Default Management Access via Out-Of-Band Ethernet Port Note Management is disabled for loopback RIFs. Layer-3 Management Access The ETX-5300A host can be accessed by defining IP address and enabling management on any of the internal router interfaces (RIFs). 1. device remains connected or disconnects after a specified time period Specifying the number of rows to display length <0–20> The number of rows can be 0. Services are explained in Chapter 5.0 Terminal Control Port 4-33 . Parameter baud-rate timeout Default Value 9600bps 10 Configuring Control Port Parameters  To define the control port parameters: • At the config>terminal# prompt. to indicate no limit on the number of lines displayed. 4. or 20.5 Terminal Control Port You can configure the serial port parameters. as explained in Management Access Methods. 1. security timeout. Task Specifying the desired data rate Defining whether in case of inactivity. and screen size from which you are accessing the device. ETX-5300A Ver. Command baud-rate {300bps | 1200bps | 2400bps| 9600bps | 19200bps | 38400bps | 57800bps | 115200bps} timeout forever timeout limited <0–60> Comments The default data rate is 9600 bps. which include specifying the data rate. enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security 4.4 Services for Management Traffic To gain access to the devices. Factory Defaults Parameter defaults are listed in the table below. you must provision an E-LAN (Layer-2) or routing (Layer-3) service. Define a new user with a text password. To add a new user: 1.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual 4. even if they were given full management and access rights.6 User Access ETX-5300A management software allows you to define new users. When a user attempts to log in by entering a password. 2. Factory Defaults By default. You can specify a user’s password as a text string or as a hashed value. Make sure that you are logged on as superuser (su). in combination with other data. the same function is applied to the entered value and the result is compared with the stored value. Define a new user: user <name> [ level { su | tech | user } ] [[ password <password> [hash] ] Example – Defining Users  To define a new user: • • User name = staff User password = 1234. that you obtain by using info detail to display user data. 1. with default password 1234: • • •  su tech user. such that any change to the data changes the hash value. the regular users are limited to changing their current passwords. ETX-5300A# configure management ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# user staff level su password 1234 # Password is encrypted successfully ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt#  To add a new user with a hashed password: 1.0 . Navigate to the Management context (config>mngmnt). the (cryptographic) hash value. 4-34 User Access ETX-5300A Ver. the password verification data is typically stored after a one-way hash function is applied to the password. the following users exist. 3. Only superusers (su) can create new users. • A cryptographic hash function is a deterministic procedure that takes an arbitrary block of data and returns a fixed-size bit string. their management and access rights. To preserve confidentiality of system passwords. Notes • User passwords are stored in a database so that the system can perform password verification when a user attempts to log in. Define another user with the hashed password from the info detail output.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security 2. ETX-5300A# configure management ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# user staff1 level user password 4222 # Password is encrypted successfully ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# info detail user "staff1" level user password "3fda26f8cff4123ddcad0c1bc89ed1e79977acef" hash user "su" : ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# user staff2 level user password 3fda26f8cff4123ddcad0c1bc89ed1e79977acef hash ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# info user "staff1" level user password "3fda26f8cff4123ddcad0c1bc89ed1e79977acef" hash user "staff2" level user password "3fda26f8cff4123ddcad0c1bc89ed1e79977acef" hash user "su" ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# logoutexiting cli ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# CLI session is closed user>staff2 password>****  To delete an existing user: • At the config>mngmnt# prompt. Use info detail to display the password hash value. ETX-5300A Ver. 3. 1. to add the following users: • • • • User name = staff1 User password = 4222 User name = staff2 User password = hash of 4222 (user staff2 can log in with password 4222). The second user can log in with the text password defined in step 1. enter no <user_name>. For example.0 User Access 4-35 . The specified user is deleted. 0. Example – Displaying Users ETX-5300A# configure management ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# show users User Access Level Source IP-address ----------------------------------------------------------------------------su SU Terminal 0. SNMPv2 Working Group. SNMPv2 Working Group.0 . RFC 1903. To configure SNMP. Standards This section lists the standards on which the supported SNMP versions are based. you must define the relationship between the manager and the agent. RFC 1907. SNMP systems consist of an SNMP manager. the type of connection. showing their access level.0 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt# 4. an SNMP agent and a MIB. ETX-5300A supports SNMPv3.7 SNMP Management SNMP stands for Simple Network Management Protocol. Conformance Statements for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2). Management Information Base for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2). Textual Conventions for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2). and the IP address from which they are connected. RFC 1904. Protocol Operations for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2). SNMPv2 Working Group. RFC 1905. Transport Mappings for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2). 4-36 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver. Introduction to Community-Based SNMPv2. It is an application layer protocol that provides a message format for the communication between managers and agents. The NMS can be part of a management network system. Structure of Management Information for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2).0. A list of all connected users is displayed.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual  To view all connected users: • At the config>mngmnt# prompt. RFC 1902. the latest SNMP version to date. enter show users. SNMPv2 Working Group. 1. SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices in the network by using authentication and data encryption. SNMPv2 Working Group. SNMPv2 Working Group. • • • • • • • RFC 1901. RFC 1906. RFC 3412. RFC 2274. RADview EMS offers a graphical user interface that resembles the front panel of your unit with its interfaces and LEDs. Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security • • • • • • • • • • RFC 1908. nor provide privacy (encryption). ETX-5300A supports SNMPv3. Coexistence between Version 1 and Version 2 of the Internetstandard Network Management Framework. Update for RFC 1904. which allows data to be collected securely from SNMP devices. Version 3 Message Processing and Dispatching. Confidential information such as SNMP commands can thus be encrypted to prevent unauthorized parties from being able to access them. RFC 2275. RFC 2104. SNMPv2 Working Group.   • Administrative features:   Naming of entities People and policies ETX-5300A Ver. View-Based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).0 SNMP Management 4-37 . To overcome these limitations. Benefits The SNMP protocol allows you to remotely manage multiple units from a central work station using RADview EMS. RFC 2271. SNMPv3 provides a security framework for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 that adds the following main capabilities: • Security features:  Authentication – checks the integrity of management data and verifies its origin. RFC 3414. User-Based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv3). User-based Security Model for SNMPv3 RFC 3416. 1. RFC 2272. and thus ensures that unauthorized users cannot masquerade as authorized users Privacy – ensures that unauthorized users cannot monitor the management information passing from managed systems to the management system Authorization and access control – ensures that only authorized users can perform SNMP network management functions and contact the managed entities. RFC 2273. SNMPv3 Applications. Architecture for Describing SNMP Management Frameworks. message processing and dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Functional Description SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 can neither authenticate the source of a management message. The message processing model performs the following tasks: • In the transmit direction: accepts SNMP protocol data units (PDUs) from the SNMP agent central processor. SNMPv3 Message Processing SNMPv3 message processing requires two mechanisms (models): the message processing model. 1. the SNMP engine ID is the first parameter to be set whenever SNMPv3 is used and the configuration data and authorized users must be reconfigured. fixed segment A selectable segment that identifies the configuration type (method) used to derive the user-defined segment A user-defined segment. The automatically-generated segment of the SNMP engine ID changes after each restart (reboot) of the SNMPv3 protocol. encapsulates them in messages.0 . which must be unique within the SNMP-managed network. a unique and unambiguous identifier of the function that processes SNMP messages. It also identifies the SNMP entity that corresponds to the engine. to insert security-related parameters in the message header In the receive direction: accepts incoming messages. The SNMP engine ID is a string that has three segments: • • • An automatically-generated. and then subjects the message to the security model.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual     Usernames and key management Notification destinations Proxy relationships Remote dynamic configuration of agents via SNMP operations. As explained below in the SNMPv3 Administrative Features section. and a specific security model. uses the security model to process the security-related parameters in the message header. SNMP Engine ID An important parameter related to SNMPv3 is the SNMP engine ID. The method used to configure this segment depends on the configuration type. and delivers the encapsulated PDU to the SNMP agent central processor • The message processing models supported by ETX-5300A are as follows:    SNMPv2c: SNMPv2 with community-based security model SNMPv2u: SNMPv2 with user-based security model (USM) SNMPv3 The security models available for ETX-5300A are as follows:   SNMPv2c: SNMPv2 with community-based security model User-based security model (USM) 4-38 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver. to protect against modification of information in transit from an authorized entity (including modification of message order. and to prevent disclosure of the contents of the messages exchanged between a management station and an agent. to match different management station capabilities: the appropriate model is automatically selected. VACM makes it possible to configure each SNMPv3 agent to allow different levels of access to different managers. etc.). the ETX-5300A SNMPv3 agent may limit some managers to viewing only the ETX-5300A performance statistics. Therefore. and encryption to prevent disclosure: • Authentication mechanisms. an SNMP engine requires an authentication key and a privacy key. read-only access to the configuration parameters part of a MIB. User-Based Security Model (USM) The USM.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security You can also enable using any of the above-mentioned models. delaying or replaying of valid messages to change their effect. Mechanisms that provide integrity checks based on a secret key are usually called message authentication codes (MAC). HMAC-SHA-96: HMAC is used with SHA-1 (Secure Hashing Algorithm 1). To achieve these goals. Encryption mechanism. because the keys are not accessible via SNMP. with a key length of 56 bits. USM allows the use of one of two alternative authentication protocols. 1. defined in RFC 2272. to prevent an unauthorized entity from performing management operations by assuming the identity of an authorized entity. and read-write access to the diagnostics part). provides authentication and privacy services for SNMP. and their values must be stored by each user. Separate values of these two keys are maintained for each local and remote user. HMAC uses a userselected secure hash function and a secret key to produce a message authentication code. described in RFC2104. Typically. Moreover. ETX-5300A Ver. USM uses the cipher block chaining (CBC) mode of the Data Encryption Standard (DES) for encryption. message authentication codes are used between two parties that share a secret key in order to validate the information transmitted between these parties. USM uses authentication to check the integrity of transmitted messages. USM authentication protocol is based on the key-Hashing Message Authentication Code (HMAC). where both generate a 96-bit output that is used to check message integrity:   • HMAC-MD5-96: HMAC is used with MD5 (Message Digest algorithm 5) as the underlying hash function. the SNMPv3 agent can also limit what a manager can do by accepting only commands that invoke parameters included in certain parts of the relevant MIBs (for example. and allow others to view and update ETX-5300A configuration parameters. in accordance with the model used in the incoming SNMP message. for example. View-Based Access Control Model (VACM) SNMP manager authorizations are defined by means of the view-based access security model (the name of the model is derived from the method used to define the authorizations: control over the MIB parts that can be viewed by each manager).0 SNMP Management 4-39 . and the passwords used for each type of protection (authentication and/or privacy) needed at the selected level. • Factory Defaults The default configuration of the SNMP parameters is as follows: • • • • SNMP engine ID set to device MAC address View named “internet” providing access to IETF MIBs and IEEE MIBs User named "initial". Target and notification management. There are two administrative elements: • User management. For each target. The options are as follows: • • • No authentication and no privacy (encryption) – the lowest protection. For each user.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual The access control policy used by the agent for each manager must be preconfigured (the policy essentially consists of a table that details the access privileges of each authorized manager). it is possible to select the security level. a security model. the VACM parameters can be configured only by means of a MIB browser. For ETX-5300A. it is necessary to define allowed users and their security attributes. With authentication. authentication and privacy User: “initial” Views for read/write/notify: "internet". with security level no authentication and no privacy Group for SNMPv3 named "initial":    • Security levels: no authentication and no privacy. 1. and/or by SNMP commands SNMP Security Level The USM capabilities enable the user to select the level of security at which SNMP messages can be sent or with which operations they are processed. SNMPv3 Administrative Features The administrative features of SNMPv3 enable definition of the entities that are allowed to manage an entity. During SNMPv3 configuration. As part of the SNMPv3 configuration. you can also define the notification capabilities for a list of entities referred to as targets (of notification messages). Group for SNMPv2c named “v2_read”:    Security level: no authentication and no privacy Read view = “internet” Write view = “” 4-40 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver. You can also define a list of notifications that can be sent to the corresponding target. you can specify a message processing model. but without privacy With authentication and with privacy – the best protection level. the ETX-5300A. for example. and the required security level. authentication and no privacy.0 . 0 . Configure target parameter sets to be used for targets 7. • Notifications with tag “unmasked” for the device traps. Navigate to configure management snmp. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. The ETX-5300A default configuration provides only one standard user named “initial” with no encryption and the lowest security level. 1. as the application can create users based only on existing users. they should contain at least eight characters. Add users. Configure targets (SNMPv3 network management stations to which ETX-5300A should send trap notifications). the new user has the same encryption method. Connect users to groups 5. Use the following procedure to configure SNMPv3: 1. Add groups. specifying authentication protocol and privacy protocol 3. and the same security level or lower. Add notification entries with assigned traps and tags 6. you must first use the device CLI to create users with the required encryption method and security level. providing secure SNMP access to the device by authenticating and encrypting packets transmitted over the network. The config>mngmnt>snmp# prompt is displayed. If you intend to use it. specifying security level and protocol 4. 2. SNMP Management 4-41 ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security  • Notify view = “internet” Group for SNMPv2c named “v2_write”:     Security level: no authentication and no privacy Read view = “internet” Write view = “internet” Notify view = “internet” • Group for SNMPv2c named “v2_trap”:     Security level: no authentication and no privacy Read view = “” Write view = “” Notify view = “internet”. SNMPv3 Configuration ETX-5300A supports SNMP version 3. The SNMPv3 manager application in RADview-EMS provides a user-friendly graphical interface to configure SNMPv3 parameters. specifying target parameter sets and notification tags  To configure SNMPv3 parameters: 1. Note When you enter password parameters. Set SNMP engine ID if necessary 2. 1.Chapter 4 Management and Security Task Configuring group Command access-group <group-name> { snmpv2c | usm } { no-auth-no-priv | auth-no-priv | auth-priv } context-match {exact | prefix} Level snmp Installation and Operation Manual Comments no access-group deletes the group Defining context matching Setting notify view of group Setting read view of group Setting write view of group Administratively enabling group Configuring community Configuring name Configuring security name Configuring transport tag Administratively enabling community Configuring notification snmp>access-group notify-view <name> read-view <name> write-view <name> no shutdown community <community-index> name <community-string> sec-name <security-name> tag <transport-tag> snmp> access-group snmp> access-group snmp> access-group snmp> access-group snmp snmp> community snmp> community snmp> community This should be normally set to the default value shutdown disables community no shutdown snmp> community notify <notify-name> snmp> 4-42 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. in separate commands bind {coldStart | linkDown | linkUp | snmp>notify authenticationFailure | systemDeviceTemperatureOra | systemSoftwareInstallEnd | systemAlternateConfigLoaded | systemDyingGasp | systemDeviceStartup | systemSwUnconfirmed | systemStartupConfigUnconfirmed | fanFailure | systemSuccessfulLogin | systemFailedLogin | systemLogout | powerDeliveryFailure | systemTrapHardSyncStart | systemTrapHardSyncEnd | systemUserReset | smartSfpMismatch | systemRfc2544TestStart | systemRfc2544TestEnd | clockDomainSystemClockUnlock | sourceClockFailure | stationClockLos | clockDomainStationClockUnlock | ptpRecoveredUnacceptableFrequencyAccuracy | ptpRecoveredMasterDisqualification | ptpRecoveredPtpStateChange | ptpRecoveredSevereFrequencyCondition | epsConfigurationMismatch | epsPortSwitchover | sfpRemoved | ethLos | oamEfmRemoteLoopback | oamEfmRemoteLoopbackOff | oamEfmCriticalLinkIndication | oamEfmFeCriticalLinkIndication | oamEfmDyingGaspIndication | oamEfmFeDyingGaspIndication | sdhSonetLos | e3t3Los | e1t1Los | systemDownloadEnd | oamCfmMepAis | oamCfmMepLck | oamCfmMepMismatch | oamCfmRmepLoc | oamCfmRmepRdi | oamCfmDestNeDelayTca | oamCfmDestNeDelayTcaOff | oamCfmDestNeDelayVarTca | oamCfmDestNeDelayVarTcaOff | oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTca | oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTcaOff | oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTcaFe | oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTcaFeOff | oamCfmDestNeUnavailableRatioTca | oamCfmDestNeUnavailableRatioTcaOff | oamCfmDestNeUnavailableRatioTcaFe | oamCfmDestNeUnavailableRatioTcaFeOff} tag <tag-value> snmp>notify Assigning tag to notification.0 SNMP Management 4-43 . to be used to identify the notification entry when configuring target ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Task Assigning trap to notification Command Level Chapter 4 Management and Security Comments You can assign more than one trap to a notification. g.Chapter 4 Management and Security Task Administratively enabling notification Configuring notification filter to define access to a particular part of the MIB hierarchy for trap variables Specifying the part of the subtree OID to use in order to define the MIB subtree Defining whether traps with trap variables belonging to the MIB subtree are sent Administratively enabling notification filter Configuring notification filter profile Configuring notification filter profile name Administratively enabling notification filter profile Connecting security name to group (e.0 . 1. connecting user or community to group) Specifying group to which to connect security name Administratively enabling security-to-group entity Command no shutdown Level snmp>notify Installation and Operation Manual Comments notify-filter <name> <sub-tree-oid> snmp mask [<mask>] snmp>notify-filter type {included | excluded} snmp>notify-filter no shutdown snmp>notify-filter notify-filter-profile <params-name> snmp>filter-profile profile-name <argument> snmp>filter-profile no shutdown snmp>filter-profile security-to-group { snmpv2c | usm } sec-name <security-name> snmp no security-to-group removes security-to-group entity group-name <group-name> snmp>security-to-group no shutdown snmp>security-to-group shutdown disables the security-to-group entity 4-44 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver. the brackets are optional Specifying set of target parameters for target Specifying trap synchronization group target-params <params-name> snmp>target trap-sync-group <group-id> [import-trap-masking] • • If the group does not exist. the group is deleted.<tag2>. the manager’s trap masking is imported from the first manager in the group Enter no trap-sync-group <group-id> to remove the manager from the group.Installation and Operation Manual Task Setting SNMP engine ID. you must enclose the list in square brackets. the SNMP engine ID is set to the device IP address Configuring target (SNMPv3 network manager) Specifying target address as IP address or OAM port Assigning tag(s) to target (the tag(s) must be defined in notification entries) target <target-name> snmp no target removes target address udp-domain <ip-address> address oam-domain <oam-port> snmp>target tag-list <tag> tag-list [ <tag> ] tag-list [ <tag1>. as MAC address or IP address or string Command snmp-engine-id mac [ <mac-address> ] snmp-engine-id ipv4 [ <ip-address> ] snmp-engine-id text <string> Level snmp Chapter 4 Management and Security Comments If you use the mac option and don’t specify the MAC address.…<tagn> ] snmp>target If you specify more than one tag. If the manager was the last in the group. if you specify just one tag. the SNMP engine ID is set to the device MAC address If you use the ipv4 option and don’t specify the IP address. 1. • Administratively enabling target Configuring set of target parameters.0 SNMP Management 4-45 . it is created If you specify the import-trap-masking parameter. to be assigned to target no shutdown target-params <target-param-name> snmp>target snmp shutdown disables target no target-params removes target parameters ETX-5300A Ver. To create a user with no authentication. the default is MD5 with DES privacy protocol.Chapter 4 Management and Security Task Specifying message processing model (SNMP version) to be used when generating SNMP messages for the set of target parameters Specifying user on whose behalf SNMP messages are to be generated for the set of target parameters Specifying SNMP version to be used when generating SNMP messages for the set of target parameters Administratively enabling target parameters Configuring target parameters and tags for trap synchronization group Specifying tags Command message-processing-model { snmpv2c | snmpv3 } Level snmp>target Installation and Operation Manual Comments security [ name <security-name> ] [ level { no-auth-no-priv | auth-no-priv | auth-priv } ] snmp>target version { snmpv2c | usm } snmp>target Use usm for SNMPv3 version no shutdown snmp>target shutdown disables target parameters The trap synchronization group must be previously defined in the target level trap-sync-group <group-id> snmp tag-list <list> snmp>trap-sync-group To remove the tag list. specify none-auth. 1. enter: no target-params <params-name> If you don’t specify the authentication method when creating a user.0 . no user <security-name> deletes the user Specifying set of target parameters target-params <params-name> snmp>trap-sync-group Configuring user user <security-name> [md5-auth [ {des | none} ] ] user <security-name> [sha-auth [ {des | none} ] ] user <security-name> [none-auth] snmp 4-46 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver. enter: no tag-list To remove the tag list. 8 to 1.3.0 SNMP Management 4-47 . read. or write view sub-tree-oid – OID that defines the MIB subtree (for example 1. which can be associated to a group as a notify.6.1 converts OID 1. • Defining access to a particular part of the MIB hierarchy view <view-name> <sub-tree-oid> snmp view-name –Name of view. unless the user was defined with no authentication (none-auth) shutdown disables the user.6). 1.7. the mask 1.1 represents the Internet hierarchy) Specifying the part of the subtree OID to use in order to define the MIB subtree mask <mask> snmp>view The mask is comprised of binary digits (for example.6.3. It is not necessary to specify a mask if sub-tree-oid is the OID that is used to define the MIB subtree included – Allows access to the subtree excluded – Disables access to the subtree Defining whether access to the MIB subtree is allowed type {included | excluded} snmp>view Administratively enabling view no shutdown snmp>view ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Task Setting user authentication password and optional key for changes Setting user privacy password and optional key for changes Administratively enabling user Command authentication [ password <password> ] [ key <key-change> ] Level snmp>user Chapter 4 Management and Security Comments no authentication disables authentication protocol privacy [ password <password> ] [ key <key-change> ] snmp>user no privacy disables privacy protocol no shutdown snmp>user • You must define the authentication and privacy method before you can enable the user.1.3. Chapter 4 Management and Security Task Displaying trap synchronization groups and members for SNMPv3 manager groups Displaying SNMPv3 information. such as the number of times the SNMPv3 engine has booted. 4-48 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver. and how long since the last boot Command show trap-sync Level snmp Installation and Operation Manual Comments show snmpv3 information snmp Example  To create SNMPv3 user and connect it to group: • User named “MD5_priv”:  • Security level – MD5 authentication. DES privacy Group named "SecureGroup":   All security levels Contains set of views named "internet" (from default configuration). 1.0 . 1. agnUploadDataTrap. ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security ETX-5300A# configure management snmp ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# user MD5_priv md5-auth des ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>user(MD5_priv)$ privacy password MD654321 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>user(MD5_priv)$ authentication password MD654321 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>user(MD5_priv)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>user(MD5_priv)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# access-group MD5Group usm no-auth-no-priv ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/no-auth-no-priv)$ context-match prefix ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/no-auth-no-priv)$ read-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/no-auth-no-priv)$ write-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/no-auth-no-priv)$ notify-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/no-auth-no-priv)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/no-auth-no-priv)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# access-group MD5Group usm auth-no-priv ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-no-priv)$ context-match prefix ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-no-priv)$ read-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-no-priv)$ write-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-no-priv)$ notify-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-no-priv)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-no-priv)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# access-group MD5Group usm auth-priv ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-priv)$ context-match prefix ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-priv)$ read-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-priv)$ write-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-priv)$ notify-view internet ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-priv)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>access-group(MD5Group/usm/auth-priv)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# security-to-group usm sec-name MD5_priv ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>security-to-group(usm/MD5_priv)$ group-name MD5Group ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>security-to-group(usm/MD5_priv)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>security-to-group(usm/MD5_priv)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp#  To create notifications: • Notification named “TrapData”:   • Tag = “Data” Bound to agnStatusChangeTrap.0 SNMP Management 4-49 . coldStart. Notification named “TrapPower”:   Tag = “Power” Bound to agnPowerFailureTrap. 4.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A# configure management snmp ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# notify TrapPort ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPort)$ tag Port ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPort)$ bind ethLos ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPort)$ bind sfpRemoved ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPort)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPort)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# notify TrapPower ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPower)$ tag Power ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPower)$ bind powerDeliveryFailure ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPower)$ bind systemDeviceStartup ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPower)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>notify(TrapPower)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp#  To create target parameters and target: • Target parameters named “TargParam1”:     • Message processing model SNMPv3 version USM User “MD5_priv” Security level authentication and privacy Target named “TargNMS1”:    Target parameters “TargParam1” Tag list = “Data”.4. 1. ETX-5300A# configure management snmp ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# target-params TargParam1 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargParam1)$ message-processing-model snmpv3 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargParam1)$ version usm ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargParam1)$ security name MD5_priv level auth- priv ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargParam1)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargParam1)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# target TargNMS1 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargNMS1)$ target-params TargParam1 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargNMS1)$ tag-list [Port.Power] ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargNMS1)$ address udp-domain 192.3 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargNMS1)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp>target(TargNMS1)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp#  To display SNMPv3 information: ETX-5300A# configure management snmp ETX-5300A> config>mngmnt>snmp# show snmpv3 information SNMPv3 : enable Boots : 2 Boots Time (sec) : 102 EngineID : 800000a4030020d2202416 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>snmp# 4-50 SNMP Management ETX-5300A Ver.0 .5.3. “Power” IP address 192.5. and SNMP are disabled. ETX-5300A can be managed via an ASCII terminal only. In addition. you prevent unauthorized access to the system when security of the ETX-5300A IP address has been compromised. access is enabled via Telnet. SSH. authentication is via the locally stored database (1st-level local). Configuring Management Access  To configure management access: • At the configure management access prompt enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security 4. RADIUS. By disabling Telnet. Factory Defaults By default. the next method is used if applicable. you can limit SFTP and TFTP operation. Command telnet no telnet Allowing SSH (Secure Shell) access ssh no ssh Allowing SNMP access snmp no snmp Allowing SFTP operation sftp no sftp Allowing TFTP operation tftp no tftp no tftp blocks TFTP operation Use TFTP for transferring small files.9 Access Policy The access policy allows specifying up to three user authentication methods (local.0 Access Policy 4-51 . such as configuration files. no sftp blocks SFTP operation no snmp blocks access by SNMP no ssh blocks access by SSH Comments no telnet blocks access by Telnet Task Allowing Telnet access 4. and SNMP. SSH. SSH. ETX-5300A Ver. Factory Defaults By default. or SNMP. When Telnet. 1.8 Management Access You can enable or disable access to the ETX-5300A management system via Telnet. TACACS+. SSH. or SNMP applications. If an authentication method is not available or the user is not found. then ETX-5300A authenticates via the local database. Command auth-policy 1st-level radius [2nd-level tacacs+ [3rd-level {local | none}]] auth-policy 1st-level tacacs+ [2nd-level radius [3rd-level {local | none}]] Comments ETX-5300A first attempts authentication via the server specified by 1st-level. 4. ETX-5300A ends the authentication process and does not attempt authentication at the next level.If the TACACS server rejects the authentication request.0 . If the TACACS server does not answer the authentication request. an authentication server rejects an authentication request. then ETX-5300A attempts to authenticate via the server specified by 2nd-level. Task Specifying authentication method preferably via RADIUS/TACACS+.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual Configuring Access Policy  To define the access policy: • In the config>mngmnt>access# prompt. then optionally local Note: If at any time in this process. . then optionally local auth-policy 1st-level tacacs+ [2nd-level { local | none } ] If 2nd-level is set to local. If the server does not answer the authentication request. ETX-5300A ends the authentication process. The RADIUS client communicates with the RADIUS server using a defined authentication sequence.10 Authentication via RADIUS Server RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) is an AAA (authentication. authentication is performed via the TACACS server. then ETX-5300A attempts to authenticate according to 3rd-level: • • local – ETX-5300A authenticates via the local database none –No further authentication is done. authentication is performed via the TACACS server only. enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. 4-52 Authentication via RADIUS Server ETX-5300A Ver. Specifying authentication method preferably via TACACS+. It is used to authenticate users and authorize their access to the requested system or service. authorization and accounting) client/server protocol that secures networks against unauthorized access. 1. and the authentication request is rejected. If the server does not answer the authentication request. If 2nd-level is set to none. then optionally TACACS+/RADIUS. RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Benefits The RADIUS protocol allows centralized authentication and access control. You must specify access parameters such as RADIUS server IDs. the associated server IP addresses.255.1. no RADIUS servers are defined. Task Assigning an IP address to the server Command address <ip-address> Comments Possible IP addresses range from 1. Parameter address retry timeout auth-port Default Value 0. The RADIUS server checks the database and replies with either Access Rejected or Access Accepted. Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) RFC 2618. Functional Description When a login attempt occurs at ETX-5300A. At the config>mngmnt>radius# prompt.  To define RADIUS parameters: 1. Enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.1 to 255. it submits an authentication request to the RADIUS server. etc. it is configured as shown below.255 ETX-5300A Ver.0.1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security Standards RFC 2865. type server <server-id> to specify which server to configure. 2.0. Factory Defaults By default.0 2 2 1812 Configuring RADIUS Parameters ETX-5300A provides connectivity to up to four RADIUS authentication servers.0 Authentication via RADIUS Server 4-53 . avoiding the need to maintain a local user data base on each device on the network. The config>mngmnt>radius>server(<server-id>)# prompt is displayed. 1. When the RADIUS server is first defined. and the number of retries.255. Command key <string> [hash] Installation and Operation Manual Comments The shared secret is a secret key consisting of free text known to the client and the server for encryption.0. 0.0. 0. 0.0 Disable Not connected 3.0 Disable Not connected Figure 4-7.Chapter 4 Management and Security Task Defining a non-disclosed string (shared secret) used to encrypt the user password. RADIUS statistics appear as shown in Figure 4-8.0 Disable Not connected 4. 4-54 Authentication via RADIUS Server ETX-5300A Ver.0.0 .0.0. ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>radius# show status Server IP Address Access Status ---------------------------------------------------------1.0.0. RADIUS status appears as shown below. Range 0–10 Defining the number of authentication request attempts Defining timeout (in seconds) for response from RADIUS server Defining the UDP port to be used for authentication Administratively enabling server retry <number-of-retries> timeout <seconds> Range 1–5 auth-port <udp-port-number> Range 1–65535 no shutdown shutdown administratively disables the server Displaying RADIUS Status  To display RADIUS status: • At the config>mngmnt>radius# prompt.0. RADIUS Status Displaying RADIUS Statistics  To display RADIUS statistics: • In the config>mngmnt>radius# prompt. It is hashed if specified. 1.0 Disable Not connected 2. enter clear-statistics. enter show status. 0. enter show statistics.  To clear RADIUS statistics: • In the config>mngmnt>radius# prompt. authorization. RADIUS Statistic Counters Counter Access Requests Access Retransmits Access Accepts Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Response Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Description Number of Access-Requests packets sent to RADIUS server The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to RADIUS server Number of Access-Accept packets sent to RADIUS server Number of Access-Reject packets received from the RADIUS server Number of Access-Challenge packets sent to RADIUS server Number of malformed Access-Requests packets received Number of Access-Requests packets with invalid Signature attributes received The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response. Access-Reject or Access-Challenge. Number of times a server did not respond. TACACS+ provides separate authentication. bad authenticators or unknown types Timeouts Unknown Types Packets Dropped 4. It is ETX-5300A Ver. 1. RADIUS Statistics Table 4-9. and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers.0 Authentication via TACACS+ Server 4-55 . a timeout or retransmission. and accounting services.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>radius# show statistics Server1 Server2 Server3 Server4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Access Requests :0 0 0 0 Access Retransmits :0 0 0 0 Access Accepts :0 0 0 0 Access Rejects :0 0 0 0 Access Challenges :0 0 0 0 Malformed Response :0 0 0 0 Bad Authenticators :0 0 0 0 Pending Requests :0 0 0 0 Timeouts :0 0 0 0 Unknown Types :0 0 0 0 Packets Dropped :0 0 0 0 Figure 4-8. network access servers. This counter is incremented when an Access-Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access-Accept.11 Authentication via TACACS+ Server TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus) is a security application that provides access control for routers. and the RADIUS server resent the packet Number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received Number of incoming packets silently discarded for some reason other than malformed. • • The access client is an entity which seeks the services offered by the network. Authorization – The action of determining what a user is allowed to do. Standards RFC 1492. ETX-5300A Ver. Because TACACS+ is based on TCP. network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers. avoiding the need to maintain a local user data base on each device on the network. An Access Control Protocol. When the TACACS+ server is first defined. sometimes called TACACS. Factory Defaults By default. 1. TACACS+ client running on ETX-5300A. it is configured as shown below. and TACACS+ server. Accounting – The action of recording what a user is doing. TACACS+ client. It can be used to customize the service for the particular user. implementations are typically resilient against packet loss. and/or has done. The TACACS+ server encrypts the entire body of the packet but leaves a standard TACACS+ header. TACACS+ is based on AAA model: • • • Authentication – The action of determining who a user is. Components The TACACS+ remote access environment has three major components: access client. processes the requests from the access client and pass this data to TACACS+ server for authentication. Benefits The TACACS+ protocol allows centralized authentication and access control. Parameter retry timeout authentication-port accounting-port Default Value 1 5 seconds 49 49 Functional Description TACACS+ is a protocol that provides access control for routers. no TACACS+ servers are defined.0 4-56 Authentication via TACACS+ Server . The TACACS+ client can be configured to use authentication/authorization with or without accounting functionality.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual used to communicate between the switch and an authentication database. ETX-5300A Ver. and authorizes services over the connection. 3. TACACS+ client and server can agree to use any port for authentication and accounting. System accounting. If you intend to use TACACS+ for authentication. A group can be defined with its own accounting level: • Shell accounting. Accounting ETX-5300A supports up to five accounting groups. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security • The TACACS+ server authenticates the request. each TACACS+ server can be bound to a single accounting group only. which logs the following events:   Any shell command that was successfully executed by ETX-5300A Any level that was successfully changed in a shell. TACACS+ supports authentication by using a user name and a fixed password. the TACACS+ client decides whether to establish the user's connection or terminate the user's connection attempt. Enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# prompt. which records system events/alarms registered in local log file Command accounting. The TACACS+ client also sends accounting data to the TACACS+ server to record in a trusted database. 2.0 Authentication via TACACS+ Server 4-57 . key. Defining TACACS+ Server ETX-5300A provides connectivity to up to five TACACS+ authentication servers. etc. which logs the following events:     • • Successful logon Logon failure Successful logoff ETX-5300A-terminated management session. Based on this response from the TACACS+ server.  To define TACACS+ server: 1. with up to five TACACS+ servers per group. However. The TACACS+ server does this by matching data from the TACACS+ client`s request with entries in a trusted database. number of retries. type server <ip-address> to specify the server IP address. The config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(<ip-address>)# prompt is displayed. TACACS+ server decides whether to accept or reject the user's authentication or authorization. You must specify the associated server IP address. verify that TACACS+ is selected as level-1 authentication method (see Access Policy). TACACS+ uses TCP for its transport and encrypts the body of each packet. The config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(<ip-address>)# prompt is displayed. Type exit to return to the TACACS+ level. The config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# prompt is displayed. To define the accounting for the group. system.0 . 4. type group <group-name> to configure an accounting group with the specified name. At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# prompt. 4-58 Authentication via TACACS+ Server ETX-5300A Ver. It is hashed if specified. but you must enter at least one of them. and commands. 3. Type server <ip-address> to select the TACACS+ server to which to bind the group. Range 1–65535 Defining a non-disclosed string (shared secret) used to encrypt the user password key <string> [hash] Defining the TCP port to be used for accounting Defining the TCP port to be used for authentication Binding accounting group to TACACS+ server Defining the number of authentication request attempts Defining timeout (in seconds) for response from TACACS+ server Administratively enabling server accounting-port <tcp-port-number> authentication-port <tcp-port-number> group <string> Range 1–65535 no group detaches accounting group from server Permanently set to 1 retry <number-of-retries> timeout <seconds> Range 1–10 no shutdown shutdown administratively disables the server Displaying statistics Clearing statistics show statistics clear-statistics Configuring Accounting Groups  To configure accounting groups: 1. enter accounting [shell] [system] [commands] Note You can enter any combination of shell.Chapter 4 Management and Security Task Defining a new TACACS+ server Command server <ip-address> Installation and Operation Manual Comments no server deletes a TACACS+ server The shared secret is a secret key consisting of free text known to the client and the server for encryption. 2. 1. The config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>group(<group-name>)# prompt is displayed. At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(<ip-address>)# prompt.172.18.172.150)# group TAC1 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.18. • • • Group name: TAC1 Accounting: Shell. enter group < group-name> to bind the previously defined accounting group to the TACACS+ server.0 Authentication via TACACS+ Server 4-59 .18.172.172. ETX-5300A# configure management tacacsplus ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# group TAC1 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>group(TAC1)$ accounting shell system commands ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>group(TAC1)$ info detail accounting shell system commands ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>group(TAC1)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# server 175.172.172.18. ETX-5300A# configure management tacacsplus ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# server 175.150)$ key TAC_server1 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.18.18. system.150 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.150 ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.150)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.150)$ information detail key "244055BF667B8F89225048C6571135EF" hash retry 1 timeout 5 authentication-port 49 accounting-port 49 no group no shutdown Example – Defining Accounting Group The example below illustrates the procedure for defining an accounting group.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security 5.172.150)# info detail key "244055BF667B8F89829AB8AB0FE50885" hash retry 1 timeout 5 authentication-port 49 accounting-port 49 group "TAC1" no shutdown ETX-5300A Ver. Example – Defining Server The example below illustrates the procedure for defining a TACACS+ server.18. • • Server IP address: 175.172. and commands Bound to server defined in Example – Defining Server.18. 1.150 Key: TAC_server1. Usually. TACACS+ Statistic Counters Counter Requests Request Timeouts Unexpected Responses Description Number of authentications performed toward a specific TACACS+ server Number of transaction timeouts that occurred between the client and server Number of times the TACACS+ client receives a TACACS+ packet that is not expected at that time. 1.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual Displaying Statistics  To display TACACS+ statistics: • At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server <ip-address># prompt. type clear statistics. TACACS+ statistic counters are set to 0.0 .18. this occurs due to a delayed response to a request that has already timed out Number of errors received from the TACACS+ server Number of times the TACACS+ client: • • Fails to decrypt the packet Detects an invalid field in the TACACS+ packet Server Error Responses Incorrect Responses • Receives a response that is not valid according to the initial request Transaction Successes Transaction Failures Pending Requests Number of successful transactions between the client and TACACS+ server Number of times the TACACS+ client’s request is aborted by the TACACS+ server or the server fails to respond after maximum retry is exceeded Number of TACACS+ client’s requests minus number of TACACS+ server responses or timeouts  To clear TACACS+ statistics: • At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server <ip-address># prompt. ETX-5300A>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175. 4-60 Authentication via TACACS+ Server ETX-5300A Ver. The TACACS+ statistic counters are displayed.172.150)$ show statistics Requests 0 Request Timeouts 0 Unexpected Responses 0 Server Error Responses 0 Incorrect Responses 0 Transaction Successes 0 Transaction Failures 0 Pending Requests 0 Table 4-10. type: show statistics. The config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>group(string)# prompt is displayed. At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(ip-address)# prompt. Benefits Syslog protocol collects heterogeneous data into a single data repository. The config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(<ip-address>)# prompt is displayed.0 Long-term auditing Intrusion detection Tracking user and administrator activity Product operation management. enter group <string> to bind a previously defined accounting group to the TACACS+ server. type server ip-address to display previously defined TACACS+ server. Data logging can be used for: • • • • ETX-5300A Ver. Syslog standardizes log file formats. 1. 4. 3. Enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# prompt. At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# prompt. Task Creating an accounting group Command group Comments no group deletes accounting group Accounting can be of any combination no accounting disables TACACS+ accounting for the group Enabling TACACS+ accounting for the group accounting [shell] [system] [commands] 4. making it easier to examine log data with various standard tools. It provides system administrators with a single point of management for collecting. Standards and MIBs RFC 3164.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security Defining Accounting Groups  To define an accounting group: 1. distributing and processing audit data. Syslog 4-61 . RFC 5674. 2. type group <string> to create an accounting group.12 Syslog ETX-5300A uses the Syslog protocol to generate event notification messages and transport them over IP networks to Syslog servers. When enabled. 1.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual Factory Defaults By default. Syslog operation is disabled.0 . The standard designates two types of receivers: • • Relay. It contains the following information: • • • • Facility and severity (see below) Host name or IP address of the device Timestamp Message content. but devices and servers can be defined to use any port for communication. Transport Protocol Syslog uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP) for its transport. The UDP port assigned to Syslog is 514. stores or forwards logged information. ETX-5300A supports up to five Syslog servers. Mess ages PSN ETX-5300A Mess ETX-5300A ages Syslog Server Figure 4-9. Syslog Functionality Elements Typical Syslog topology includes message senders (devices) and message receivers (servers). The receiver displays. the default parameters are as follows: Parameter facility port severity-level Default Value local1 514 informational Functional Description The Syslog protocol provides an instrument for generating and transporting event notification messages from ETX-5300A to servers across IP networks. Message Format The length of a Syslog message is 1024 bytes or less. 4-62 Syslog ETX-5300A Ver. which forwards messages Collector which displays and stores messages. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security A typical Syslog message looks like this: <145>Jan 15 13:24:07 172.160. 1. Severity is assigned to a message to specify its importance. 2. The standard includes some pre-defined facilities in the 0–15 range. it is necessary to define Syslog device and servers. Enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. ETX-5300A uses the following severity designations: Table 4-11. ETX-5300A uses facilities local1–7 for originator identification. Task Defining a facility from which Syslog messages are sent Defining Syslog device UDP port for communication Command facility {local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7} port <udp-port-number> Range is 1–65535 Port configuration is allowed only if a Syslog device is administratively disabled severity-level { emergency | alert | The log messages that contain critical | error | warning | notice | severity level above or equal informational | debug} the specified level are transmitted Comments Defining severity level ETX-5300A Ver. Syslog Severities Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Syslog Type Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational Debug Description Emergency message Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Event Cleared alarm Informational message.17. Navigate to the syslog device context (config>system>syslog device). not in use Debug-level messages. not in use Syslog Configuration When configuring Syslog parameters.69 Eth 1: Loss of signal (LOS) Facilities and Severities Facility designates a device or application that sends a message. The config>system>syslog(device)# prompt is displayed.0 Syslog 4-63 .  To configure a Syslog device: 1. Chapter 4 Management and Security Task Administratively enabling Syslog device Command no shutdown Installation and Operation Manual Comments shutdown administratively disables Syslog device Displaying statistics Clearing statistics show statistics clear statistics Example below illustrates procedure for defining a Syslog device. ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(device)# show statistics Total Tx Messages : 356 Non-queued Dropped Messages : 265 Figure 4-10. The counters are described in Table 4-12. Navigate to the syslog device context (config>system>syslog device). Navigate to system context (config>system).  To define a Syslog server: 1. 2. 4-64 Syslog ETX-5300A Ver. Navigate to the syslog device context (config>system>syslog device).0 . The config>system>syslog(device)# prompt is displayed. Syslog statistics appear as shown in Figure 4-10. • • • Facility: local2 UDP port: 155 Severity level: major. 1. ETX-5300A# configure system syslog device ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(device)# ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(device)# facility local2 ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(device)# port 155 ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(device)# severity-level major ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(device)# no shutdown  To display Syslog statistics: 1. enter show statistics. Syslog Statistic Parameters Parameter Total Tx Messages Non-queued Dropped Messages Description The total number of Syslog messages transmitted The total number of Syslog messages that were dropped before being queued  To clear Syslog statistics: 1. 2. At the config>system>syslog(device)# prompt. At the config>system>syslog(device)# prompt. Syslog Statistics Table 4-12. The config>system>syslog(device)# prompt is displayed. The Syslog statistic counters are set to 0. enter clear statistics. Table 4-13. Task Defining Syslog server IP Command address <0. The config>system>syslog(server/1–5)# prompt is displayed. 1.0.0–255.152 UDP port: 155 1 address 178.16.173.255> port <udp-port-number> Range 1–65535 Port configuration is allowed only if a Syslog server is administratively disabled no shutdown shutdown administratively disables Syslog server Comments Defining Syslog server UDP port for communication Administratively enabling Syslog server Example • • Server IP address: 178.0.0 Syslog 4-65 .16. from 1 to 5. 2. At the config>system# prompt. 3. Enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.255. enter server <server-ID> to specify server to receive Syslog messages.173.255.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security The config>system# prompt is displayed.152 port 155 no shutdown ETX-5300A# configure system syslog server ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(server/1)# ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(server/1)# ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(server/1)# ETX-5300A>config>system>syslog(server/1)# Configuration Errors Table 4-13 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Configuration Error Messages Message Syslog Port is out of range Port is illegal or Device Port is already in use Parameter cannot be changed if Logging Status/Server Access is enabled Illegal Severity Illegal Facility Illegal Server IP Address Description Selected UDP port value is out of allowed range (1–65535) Selected UDP port is already in use Device/server UDP port or server IP address cannot be changed while Syslog server is enabled Invalid severity value Invalid facility value Invalid server IP address ETX-5300A Ver. Enter show card-summary command The card summary screen is displayed: ETX-5300A# configure ETX-5300A>config>show card-summary Slot Actual Provisioned Admin Oper Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------PS-A PSU PSU Up Up Standalone PS-B PSU PSU Up Up Standalone Main-A Main 10GbEx4 Main 10GbEx4 Up Up Standalone Main-B Main 10GbEx4 Main 10GbEx4 Up Up Standalone 1 STM-1 Ch-4 STM-1 Ch-4 Up Up Standalone 2 STM-1 Ch-4 STM-1 Ch-4 Up Up Standalone 3 STM-1 Ch-4 Empty Down Down Standalone 4 STM-1 Ch-4 Empty Down Down Standalone Fan Fan Fan Up Up Standalone Figure 4-11. The system identifies card types. Displaying Card Summary Before programming cards.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual 4. The config# prompt is displayed.  To display the card summary 1.13 Programming Cards Use the following procedure to program cards in the ETX-5300A chassis. run show card-summary command to display list of cards installed and identified by the chassis and their current status. but powers up the cards and downloads operation software only after cards are provisioned by the user. Navigate to configure. After physical installation in the chassis. 1. Card Summary Parameter Slot Description Chassis slot Possible Values PS-A/B – power supply slots Main-A/B – main card slots 1–4 – I/O card slots Fan – fan card slot Actual Slot status (vacant or occupied) Empty – slot is vacant Card name – a specific card is installed in the slot Provisioned Card provisioning status Empty –card is not yet provisioned Card name –card is successfully provisioned Admin Card administrative status Up – card is administratively enabled Down – card is administratively disabled 4-66 Programming Cards ETX-5300A Ver. each card must be provisioned manually.0 . Card Summary Screen Table 4-14. 2. The card can be bound only if it is in shutdown state.Provisioning of a TDM card defines its t1-ch-4 | oc-3-ch-4] interface type: stm-1-ch-4 – STM-1 E1 card with four TDM ports stm-1-t1-ch-4 – STM-1 T1 card with four TDM ports oc-3-ch-4 – OC-3 card with four TDM ports Binding TDM I/O card to previously configured loopback router interface bind loopback-address <value> Binding TDM I/O card to loopback router interface is required for PW operation on UDP/IP networks. 4. and card software download is in progress Mode Card protection status Standalone – Card is not a protection group member Protection – Card is a protection group member Provisioning I/O Cards This section explains how to provision I/O cards in slots 1 to 4. 2. For example: ETX-5300A Ver. no before bind loopback-address unbinds from loopback router interface.Installation and Operation Manual Parameter Oper Description Card operational status Possible Values Chapter 4 Management and Security Not present – slot is vacant Up – card is provisioned and operational Down – card provisioning command has been received. ETX-5300A service cards (power inlets. Defining slot as vacant no card-type no card-type defines all unused chassis slots as vacant 3. The config>slot(1–4)# prompt is displayed. power supplies. Enter card-type command according to the tasks listed below: Task Provisioning Ethernet I/O cards Command Comments eth {gbe-20-sfp | gbe-20-utp | gbe-20-sfp – GbE card with 20 SFP ports 10g-2-xfp} gbe-20-utp – GbE card with 20 UTP ports 10g-2-xfp – 10GbE card with two XFP ports Provisioning TDM I/O cards sdh-sonet [stm-1-ch-4 | stm-1.0 Programming Cards 4-67 . 1. fan card) and main cards are detected and provisioned automatically. Navigate to configure slot(1–4)#. Wait until the card initialization process is complete before starting service configuration.  To provision I/O cards: 1. Use no shutdown command to activate a card in a specific slot. 0 . 1. enter the show card-summary command. The config>slot(1–4)# prompt is displayed.Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual  To configure a chassis with: • • • • • Two AC power supplies Two main cards One E5-GbE-20 card with SFP ports in slot 1 Two E5-cTDM-4 cards with E1 interfaces in slots 2–3.10.10 Empty slot 4.10.10. Enter show status to display status the card installed in the selected slot.10 no shutdown card-type sdh-sonet stm-1-ch-4 no shutdown no card-type ETX-5300A>config>slot(1)# ETX-5300A>config>slot(1)# ETX-5300A>config>slot(2)# ETX-5300A>config>slot(2)# ETX-5300A>config>slot(2)# ETX-5300A>config>slot(3)# ETX-5300A>config>slot(3)# ETX-5300A>config>slot(4)#  To verify card provisioning: • At the config# prompt. Navigate to configure slot(1–4)#. 4-68 Programming Cards ETX-5300A Ver.10. card-type eth gbe-20-sfp no shutdown card-type sdh-sonet stm-1-ch-4 bind loopback-address 10. The card in slot 2 is bound to loopback router interface with IP address 10. Navigate to configure slot(1–4)#. 2. 2. The config>slot(1–4)# prompt is displayed. ETX-5300A# configure ETX-5300A>config>show card-summary Slot Actual Provisioned Admin Oper Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------PS-A PSU PSU Up Up Standalone PS-B PSU PSU Up Up Standalone Main-A Main 10GbEx4 Main 10GbEx4 Up Up Standalone Main-B Main 10GbEx4 Main 10GbEx4 Up Up Standalone 1 ETH GBE-20-SFP Up Up Standalone 2 STM-1 Ch-4 STM-1 Ch-4 Up Up Standalone 3 STM-1 Ch-4 STM-1 Ch-4 Up Up Standalone 4 Empty Empty Down Not Present Standalone Fan Fan Fan Up Up Standalone Resetting I/O Cards  To reset an I/O card: 1. Displaying Card Status  To display card status: 1. Enter reset to reset the card installed in the selected slot. card type cannot be changed Remove a card before changing card type A card port is used by flow: card type cannot be changed/deleted A card port is used by PW: card type cannot be changed/deleted Description Card cannot be shut down if no backup card has been configured A card cannot be reset if it is shut down The type of an active card cannot be changed IP address of an active card cannot be changed The type of card in the selected slot cannot be modified The type of card in the selected slot cannot be set the type of card cannot be changed if a service is configured on the card The type of card cannot be changed if the card is in a slot.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Management and Security ETX-5300A>config>slot(2)# show status Actual Type Provisioned Type Administrative Status Operational Status Status Protection Mode Software Version : : : : : : : STM-1 Ch-4 STM-1 Ch-4 Up Up OK Standalone 0. Table 4-15.92D001 Configuration Errors Table 4-15 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Shutdown is not allowed. Cannot reset card in shutdown Cannot change card type in no shutdown Cannot change card IP address in no shutdown Cannot change card type in requested slot Cannot set the card type in requested slot A service is defined on a card. remove it The type of card cannot be changed if a flow is configured on the card The type of card cannot be changed if a pseudowire connection (PW) is configured on the card ETX-5300A Ver.0 Programming Cards 4-69 . Configuration Error Messages Message No protection. 1. Chapter 4 Management and Security Installation and Operation Manual 4-70 Programming Cards ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 . EIR and EBS parameter Defines green and yellow packet thresholds and drop probabilities Defines queue type with shaper and WRED profile Defines queue block parameters (queues. 1. weights) Scale per Chassis 24K 256 8 16K 384 ETX-5300A Ver. Table 5-1.Chapter 5 Services This chapter presents information on the service elements and services supported by ETX-5300A. Service provisioning elements are as follows: • • • • • Profiles Scheduling and shaping entities Physical ports (NNI. queue block Queue Queue block Queue block within queue group Description Defines criteria for flow classification Defines CIR. Profiles Most packet processing features are defined by creating and applying various profiles. bridge. UNI) Logical ports (SAG. CBS. router). SAP. scheduling scheme. Profile Types Profile Type Classifier Shaper WRED Queue Queue block Applied to Flow Queue. Profiles comprise sets of attributes related to a specific service entity. LAG) Forwarding entities (flow. 5. SVI. Profiles must be defined before other managed objects.1 Service Elements This section describes the managed elements that need to be configured during service provisioning.0 Service Elements 5-1 . Its priority can be strict or weight fair. DSCP. or SEs) – a mid-level scheduling element that consists of several queues. Physical Ports GbE and 10GbE ports located in I/O and main cards serve as ingress (UNI) and egress (NNI) ports for Ethernet flows. There are three levels of queue blocks. Queue group – a top-level scheduling element that consists of several queue blocks. tunnel) Defines CIR. CBS. peer or tunnel) Queue group profile for associating a port with a queue group ETX-5300A Ver. • ETX-5300A provides the following shaping tools: • • Dual leaky bucket shaper (CIR/EIR) Single leaky bucket shaper (CIR). DSCP. Queue blocks have shaper profiles assigned to them. Congestion is avoided by using the WRED mechanism. DEI etc) to packet color Defines method and values for mapping packet attributes (P-bit. policer aggregate Ingress color mapping Port.0 Service Elements . peer. EIR and EBS parameters Defines method and values for mapping different flow attributes (Pbit. Queues have shaper and WRED profiles assigned to them. Queue block (also referred to as scheduling elements.Chapter 5 Services Profile Type Queue group Applied to Port Description Installation and Operation Manual Scale per Chassis 128 Defines level-1. 1. Queue blocks are created by associating queues with queue block profiles. flow Flow Flow 16 128 36 CoS mapping Flow 36 Marking Flow 16 Scheduling and Shaping Entities ETX-5300A schedules traffic using the following hierarchical scheduling entities: • • Queue – a lowest-level scheduling element. Queue groups are created by associating queue group profiles to ports. IP-Precedence) to internal CoS values Defines method of mapping CoS and packet color values into P-bit and DEI L2CP Policer. -2 and -3 scheduling elements and structures within queue group Defines actions for L2CP processing (drop. swap) at egress L2CP profile for defining L2CP frame handling (discard. The following packet processing attributes are assigned to them: • • • 5-2 Tag Ethertype for identifying VLAN-tagged frames at ingress and setting Ethertype value for VLAN editing (stack. which must comply with standards of their own (VLAN domains for bridge ports or IP address for router interfaces) and do not have physical port attributes. ETX-5300A LB IP Router RIF SVI SVI SVI User BP Bridge User SVI BP BP SVI NET BP BP SVI OOB Figure 5-1. Router and Bridge Connections with SVIs Identified ETX-5300A Ver. router interfaces or Layer-2 TDM pseudowires.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services • Classification key for mapping traffic into flows according to classification profiles. These are 10GbE ports on the main cards. These are GbE. Logical Ports Logical ports maintained by ETX-5300A serve as internal aggregation or forwarding points for Ethernet flows. The following logical ports exist: • Service Virtual Interface (SVI) used for binding flows to bridge ports. 1. ETX-5300A ports can be either of two types: • • Attached directly to the main card packet processor (directly-attached ports). SVIs serve as intermediaries for bridges and routers. 10GbE and TDM ports on the I/O cards.0 Service Elements 5-3 . Attached to the packet processor via the classification and traffic management engine (indirectly-attached ports). They also serve as aggregation points for TDM PWs. These are: • • • 5-4 Flows – the main traffic-carrying elements Bridge – traffic-forwarding element for Layer-2 E-LAN services Router – traffic-forwarding element for Layer-3 services. They have the same attributes as the physical ports that serve as their members. In all. ETX-5300A provides single SAG for every ten GbE or one 10GbE port on an I/O card.Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual TDM Pseudowire Processing I/O Card STM-1/OC-3 Port Flow BP Bridge BP SVI Flow BP SVI BP SVI SVI Flow Figure 5-2. Forwarding Entities Several internal entities carry traffic and make forwarding and switching decisions. Layer-2 Pseudowire Connection • Service Aggregation Group (SAG) – used for pre-forwarding traffic shaping by means of attaching queue groups. They help avoid traffic re-classification and aggregate several ingress flows. SAGs have Service Aggregation Points (SAPs) associated with them. ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Ingress SAG Main Card Ethernet Ports • Egress I/O Card Ethernet Port SAP I/O Card Ethernet Port SAP Figure 5-3. SAPs – serve as ingress/egress ports for flows. Flow Termination and Aggregation at SAG • Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) – used for link protection.0 Service Elements Main Card Ethernet Ports MEF-8 Pseudowires SVI SVI BP SVI . ETX-5300A supports up to 512 SAPs per SAG. Each router interface is assigned an IP address and can be bound to one of the following: • • • Physical port on Ethernet I/O or main card Bridge port TDM pseudowire card for UDP/IP forwarding or 1588v2 clock entity. IP Precedence. • • • Bridge The bridge is a forwarding entity used by ETX-5300A for delivering E-LAN services in multipoint-to-multipoint topology and G.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services Flows Flows are unidirectional entities that interconnect two physical or logical ports. Flow processing is performed as follows: • • • • Ingress traffic is mapped in flows using classification match criteria defined via a classification profile. L2CP frames are handled per flow according to L2CP profile settings. DSCP) is mapped into internal Class of Service (CoS) according to a CoS mapping profile or assignment per flow. DSCP or DEI) can be mapped to packet color (yellow or green) according to a color mapping profile or assignment per flow. A single policer can be applied to a flow or a policer aggregate can be assigned to a group of flows. A flow is mapped to a specific queue block within a queue group associated with an egress port. or swapping (marking) tags on single-. User priority (P-bit. A specific queue in the queue block is defined 1:1 by the packet CoS (0–7) according to a CoS-mapping profile. The bridge is defined by a bridge number. User priority (P-bit. CoS marking profile maps CoS value and/or packet color into the egress priority tags (P-bit. ETX-5300A provides up to 128 bridge ports per bridge entity. DEI). The connection is always made by directing flows from a port to an SVI. Router The ETX-5300A router is an internal Layer-3 interworking device that forwards traffic between its interfaces. The bridge supports one level of VLAN editing on ingress and one level on egress. removing (popping). and then binding the SVI to a router interface.8032 ring protection. by defining a virtual loopback address on a router interface. bridge ports and a VLAN membership table that specifies which bridge ports are members in a certain broadcast domain (VLAN). P-bit and DEI values are either copied or set according to a CoS marking profile. 1.0 Service Elements 5-5 . With up to 32 bridge instances. or double-tagged packets. using a policer profile or policer aggregate profile. VLANs can be edited per flow by stacking (pushing). The bridge uses SVIs for connecting to logical and physical ports. ETX-5300A Ver. The router uses service virtual interfaces (SVIs) for connecting to logical and physical ports. The editing is performed at the flow level. IP Precedence. 5-6 E-Line Service ETX-5300A Ver. I/O-to-Main Path Figure 5-4 illustrates a typical Ethernet service created in I/O-to-main card direction. 1.Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual 5.0 . Table 5-2 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning.2 E-Line Service This section describes different scenarios for provisioning E-Line services. 0 E-Line Service 5-7 . Configure ports 3. Define profiles L2CP Queue mapping Classifier Color mapping CoS mapping Policer Queue group Marking SAG Flow N x 1 I/O Card Ethernet Port Configure I/O card Ethernet port Configure physical layer Define classifier key Bind L2CP profile Define VLAN tag TPID Bind queue group profile SAP Flow 2 Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port Configure physical layer Define classifier key Bind L2CP profile Define VLAN tag TPID Bind queue group profile 2. 1.Installation and Operation Manual WRED Queue Queue block Shaper Chapter 5 Services Shaper 1. I/O-to-Main Path ETX-5300A Ver. Configure flows Configure flow 1 Bind ingress and egress ports Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Bind policer profile Configure flow 2 Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Legend: Mandatory Optional Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Figure 5-4. Define profile for mapping CoS values to queues. Define profiles Policing Priority Queue Mapping Congestion Avoidance (WRED) Shaper Internal Queue Queue Block Queue Group Marking policer-profile queue-map-profile Create a policer bandwidth profile with required CIR. Always use 1:1 mapping (QueueMapDefaultProfile) Define WRED profiles to be attached to queue profiles Define shaper profiles to be attached to a queue and queue group profiles Define internal queue profiles to be attached to queue block profiles Define queue block profiles to be attached to queue group profiles Define queue group profile for SAG and main card port Define profile for conversion of CoS and packet color values into P-bit and DEI when push or mark tag editing is used. EBS values. When creating a flow. tunnel or drop) Define classification profile for traffic originating from I/O port (flow 1) and SAP (flow 2). Use Match All setting for flow 2.0 . you can either bind it to the color mapping profile or use a fixed color value. CBS. CoS Mapping cos-map-profile wred-profile shaper-profile internal-queueprofile queue-block-profile queue-group-profile marking-profile 5-8 E-Line Service ETX-5300A Ver. E-Line I/O-to-Main Service Provisioning Sequence Step Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) Classifier Profiles Commands l2cp-profile classifier-profile Comments Define policy for L2CP traffic handling by port and/or flow (peer. When creating a flow. Define criteria for mapping flow 1 user priority into internal CoS values. you can either bind it to the CoS mapping profile or use a fixed value. Not relevant for flow 2. Not relevant for flow 2. EIR. 1. Color Mapping color-map-profile Define criteria for mapping flow 1 user priority into color values. Not relevant for flow 2.Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual Table 5-2. Not relevant for flow 1. 1. See Table 5-3 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning. ETX-5300A Ver. egress port – SAP Flow 2: ingress port – SAP. Configure flows Bind CoS mapping profile to flow 1 or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1 or use a fixed value Bind policer profile to flow 1 Bind queue mapping profile to flow 1 and 2 Bind queue block instance to flow 1 and 2 Define required VLAN editing actions (push.0 E-Line Service 5-9 .Installation and Operation Manual Sequence Step Ethernet Ports 2. egress port – main card port Bind L2CP profile to flow 1 Bind classifier profiles to flow 1 and 2 3. bind queue group profile intended for flow 2 to main card port Flows flow Define two flows: • • Flow 1: ingress port – I/O card port. mark) for flow 2 Bind marking profile to flow 2 Define TPID editing policy for flow 2 Main-to-I/O Path Figure 5-5 illustrates a typical service created in main-to-I/O card directions. pop. 1. Configure ports Commands port Comments Chapter 5 Services Configure physical layer parameters Define classifier keys for I/O and main card Ethernet ports Bind previously created L2CP profile Select VLAN tag TPID (8100 or select another value) Bind the queue group profile intended for flow 1 to SAG. E-Line Main-to-I/O Service Provisioning Sequence 1. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Flows with ingress main card ports do not support policing Table 5-2 Table 5-2 5-10 E-Line Service ETX-5300A Ver.0 . Configure flows Configure flow Bind ingress and egress ports Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Legend: Mandatory Optional Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Figure 5-5.1 Flow Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5.1 Installation and Operation Manual 1. Define profiles I/O Card Ethernet Port Configure I/O card Ethernet port See Figure 5.1 2. Configure ports 3. 1. Main-to-I/O Path Table 5-3.Chapter 5 Services See Figure 5. Installation and Operation Manual Sequence 2. Configure ports Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Chapter 5 Services Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Define flow with ingress port set to main card port.0 E-Line Service 5-11 . ETX-5300A Ver. Table 5-4 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning. 1. pop. Configure flows Bind CoS mapping profile or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use a fixed value Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Define required VLAN editing actions (push. and egress port set to I/O card port Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile 3. mark) Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy I/O-to-I/O Path Figure 5-6 illustrates a typical service created in I/O-to-I/O direction. Configure ports Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Table 5-2 Table 5-2 5-12 E-Line Service ETX-5300A Ver. Define profiles Flow N x 1 I/O Card Ethernet Port Configure I/O card Ethernet port SAG Flow 2 SAP SAG SAP I/O Card Ethernet Port Configure I/O card Ethernet port 2. E-Line I/O-to-I/O Service Provisioning Sequence 1.0 . Configure flows Configure flow 1 Bind ingress and egress ports Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Bind policer profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 2 Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Legend: Mandatory Optional Figure 5-6. 1. I/O-to-I/O Path Table 5-4.1 3.1 See Figure 5. Configure ports Configure SAG See Figure 5. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Table 5-2 Table 5-2 2.1 Installation and Operation Manual 1.Chapter 5 Services See Figure 5. egress port – SAP Flow 2: ingress port – SAP. Configure flows Bind CoS mapping profile to flow 1 or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1 or use a fixed value Bind policer profile to flow 1 Bind queue mapping profile to flow 1 and 2 Bind queue block instance to flow 1 and 2 Define required VLAN editing actions (push. ETX-5300A Ver. 1. egress port – I/O card port Bind L2CP profile to flow 1 Bind classifier profiles to flow 1 and 2 3.Installation and Operation Manual Sequence Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Define two flows: • • Chapter 5 Services Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Flow 1: ingress port – I/O card port. pop. mark) for flow 2 Bind marking profile to flow 2 Define TPID editing policy for flow 2 Main-to-Main Path Figure 5-6 illustrates a typical service created in main-to-main direction.0 E-Line Service 5-13 . Table 5-4 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning. Configure flows Configure flow Bind ingress and egress ports Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Legend: Mandatory Optional Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Figure 5-7.1 Installation and Operation Manual 1.0 .Chapter 5 Services See Figure 5. Configure ports 3. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Table 5-2 Table 5-2 5-14 E-Line Service ETX-5300A Ver.1 2.1 Flow Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5. 1. E-Line Main-to-Main Service Provisioning Sequence 1. Define profiles Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5. Main-to-Main Path Table 5-5. ETX-5300A Ver. Configure ports Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Chapter 5 Services Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Define one flow with ingress and egress port set to main card ports Bind L2CP profile to flow 1 Bind classifier profiles to flow 1 and 2 Bind CoS mapping profile to flow 1 or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1 or use a fixed value Bind policer profile to flow 1 Bind queue mapping profile to flow 1 and 2 Bind queue block instance to flow 1 and 2 Define required VLAN editing actions (push. All valid combinations are listed in VLAN Editing section of Appendix B. Table 5-6 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning. Configure flows 5. pop.Installation and Operation Manual Sequence 2. mark) for flow 2 Bind marking profile to flow 2 Define TPID editing policy for flow 2 3.3 E-LAN Service This section describes various scenarios for provisioning E-LAN services. Figure 5-8 illustrates a typical E-LAN service. 1. different classification methods and VLAN editing actions are used at bridge port ingress. Depending on flow topology.0 E-LAN Service 5-15 . Define profiles See Figure 5. E-LAN Service 5-16 E-LAN Service ETX-5300A Ver.1 Configure SAG 3.Chapter 5 Services 1.1 Bridge Flow 2a Flow 2b SAP SVI BP BP SVI Flow 3a Flow 3b Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5. Configure VLAN membership Define VLANs Configure bridge ports as VLAN members Configure MAC table size 6.0 . Define SVIs and bridge ports Define SVIs (B) and bridge ports Define bridge-type SVI Define bridge port Bind bridge port to SVI Configure VLAN membership 5. 1.1 Installation and Operation Manual SAG Flow 1 I/O Card Ethernet Port 2. Define bridge Define bridge 4. Configure flows Configure flow 1 Bind ingress and egress ports Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Bind policer profile Bind queue mapping profile Mandatory Optional Bind queue block instance Configure flow 2a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Bind classifier profile Configure flow 2b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Define VLAN editing actions Configure flow 3a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 3b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Legend: Figure 5-8. Configure ports Configure I/O card Ethernet port See Figure 5. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services Table 5-6. 1. E-LAN Service Provisioning Sequence 1. define bridge ports as VLAN members and specify MAC table size for each VLAN Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Define five flows: • • • • • Flow 1: ingress – I/O card port. Configure flows Table 5-2 Bind L2CP profile to flow 1 Bind classifier profiles to all flows ETX-5300A Ver. Configure VLAN membership Bridge bridge Add VLANs. Define SVIs and bridge ports Service Virtual Interface (SVI) Bridge svi bridge Define bridge-port type SVIs. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Table 5-2 Table 5-2 2. egress – I/O card port Flow 3a: ingress – SVI. add ports to the bridge and bind the bridge ports to the SVIs 5. egress – SVI Flow 2b: ingress – SAP. assign a number and configure a bridge entity 4. egress – main card port Flow 3b: ingress – main card port. Define bridge Bridge bridge Define. egress – SAP Flow 2a: ingress – SAP. egress –SVI Table 5-2 6. Configure ports Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Table 5-2 Table 5-2 3.0 E-LAN Service 5-17 . the following editing actions must be performed: • • Push and map CoS to P-bit (single VLAN) Push-push and map CoS to P-bit. Egress flows must use Match All classification profile. tagged. 1. To ensure that only untagged traffic reaches router interfaces. I/O-to-Main via Router Path L3 forwarding services are provisioned by directing flows from indirectly. L2 characteristics (VLAN tag structure) and connection to a physical port are determined by the flows. 2b and 3a Bind queue block instance to flow 1. and then binding the SVI to a RIF.and directly-attached ports to a Service Virtual Interface (SVI). using the same CoS profile for both push actions (double VLAN). User priority is mapped to the required CoS value. 5-18 Routing Services ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 5 Services Sequence Step Commands Comments Installation and Operation Manual Bind CoS mapping profile to flow 1 and 3b or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1 and 3b or use a fixed value Bind policer profile to flow 1 Bind queue mapping profile to flow 1. ingress flows (untagged.4 Routing Services ETX-5300A supports a static router. using pop (single VLAN) or pop-pop (double VLAN classification). double tagged (without P-bit)) must be edited at the SVI to remove tags. To restore VLAN and priority tagging.0 . 2b. RIFs are L3 entities identified by an IP address and a mask. 3a and 3b Bind marking profile to flow 3a and 3b Define TPID editing policy for flow 2a and 3b 5. 2b and 3a Define required VLAN editing actions for flow 2a. Each router interface is assigned an IP address and can be bound to one of the following: • • • Physical port on Ethernet I/O or main card Bridge port Virtual loopback address – on a router interface on a TDM pseudowire card for UDP/IP forwarding or on an IEEE 1588v2 master or slave entity. 1. Depending on flow topology. • Egress editing action for untagged flows must be set to None. Define profiles See Figure 5. Configure ports Configure I/O card Ethernet port See Figure 5. All valid combinations are listed in VLAN Editing section of Appendix B. Configure flows Configure flow 1 Bind ingress and egress ports Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Bind policer profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 2a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind classifier profile Define TPID editing policy Configure flow 2b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Define VLAN editing actions Configure flow 3a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 3b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance 5.0 Routing Services 5-19 . In this case editing must be set to None. I/O-to-Main via Router Path ETX-5300A Ver. Define SVIs Define SVIs (R) 4. Define and bind router interfaces Define RIFs Legend: Mandatory Optional Define router interfaces Bind router interfaces to SVIs Figure 5-9.1 Configure SAG 3. different classification methods and VLAN editing actions are used at RIF ingress or egress.1 Router Flow 2a Flow 2b SAP SVI RIF RIF SVI Flow 3a Flow 3b Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5.1 SAG Flow 1 I/O Card Ethernet Port 2.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services Note • Ingress flows with an untagged classification profile do not require VLAN editing. 1. egress –SVI Table 5-2 Table 5-2 5. 2b and 3a Define required VLAN editing actions for flow 2a. Configure flows Bind L2CP profile to flow 1 Bind classifier profiles to all flows Bind CoS mapping profile to flow 1 and 3b or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1 and 3b or use a fixed value Bind policer profile to flow 1 Bind queue mapping profile to flow 1. I/O-to-Main via Router Service Provisioning Sequence 1. Define SVIs Service Virtual Interface (SVI) svi Define router-type SVIs Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Define five flows: • • • • • Flow 1: ingress – I/O card port. egress – I/O card port Flow 3a: ingress – SVI. 3a and 3b Bind marking profile to flow 3a and 2b 5-20 Routing Services ETX-5300A Ver. 2b. egress – main card port Flow 3b: ingress – main card port. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Table 5-2 Table 5-2 2. 2b and 3a Bind queue block instance to flow 1. egress – SAP Flow 2a: ingress – SAP. egress – SVI Flow 2b: ingress – SAP. 1.Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual Table 5-7. Configure ports Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Table 5-2 Table 5-2 4.0 . Add RIFs and bind them to SVIs Step Router Commands router Comments Chapter 5 Services Add interfaces to the router and bind the RIFs to the SVIs Router-to-Bridge Path When adding Layer-3 services to Layer-2 topology. a router interface must be connected to a bridge port.8032 Ethernet ring. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Routing Services 5-21 . such as G.Installation and Operation Manual Sequence 6. Router-to-Bridge Path 5-22 Routing Services ETX-5300A Ver. Configure VLAN membership Configure VLAN membership Define VLANs Configure bridge ports as VLAN members Configure MAC address ranges 6.1 Installation and Operation Manual SAG Flow 1 I/O Card Ethernet Port Configure I/O card Ethernet port See Figure 5. Define SVIs and bridge ports 5. Configure flows 4a and 4b Legend: Mandatory Optional Configure flow 4a Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 4b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Figure 5-10. 1.0 . Define profiles See Figure 5. Define bridge Define SVIs (B and R) and bridge ports Define bridgeand router-type SVIs Define bridge ports Bind bridge ports to SVIs Define bridge 4.1 Router Flow 2a Flow 2b Flow 3a Bridge Flow 3b SAP SVI RIF RIF SVI SVI BP BP SVI Flow 4a Flow 4b Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5. Configure flows 1-3 Configure flow 1 Bind ingress and egress ports Bind L2CP profile Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Bind policer profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 2a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind classifier profile Define TPID editing policy Configure flow 2b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Configure flow 3a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 3b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Define VLAN editing actions Define RIFs Define router interfaces Bind router interfaces to SVIs 8. Configure ports Configure SAG 3.Chapter 5 Services 1.1 2. egress – SAP Flow 2a: ingress – SAP. Configure ports Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Table 5-2 Table 5-2 3. add ports to the bridge and bind the bridge ports to the SVIs 5. Define bridge Bridge bridge Define. define bridge ports as VLAN members and specify MAC address ranges for each VLAN Same as detailed in 6. egress – SVI (R) Flow 2b: ingress – SAP. assign a number and configure a bridge entity 4. egress – I/O card port Flow 3a: ingress – SVI (R). Router-to-Bridge Service Provisioning Sequence 1. egress – SVI (B) Flow 3b: ingress – SVI (B). Configure flows 1–3 Same as detailed in Define five flows: • • • • • Flow 1: ingress – I/O card port.0 Routing Services 5-23 . 1. Define SVIs and bridge ports Service Virtual Interface (SVI) Bridge svi bridge Define bridge-port type SVIs. egress –SVI (R) Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Bind L2CP profile to flow 1 Bind classifier profiles to all flows ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services Table 5-8. Configure VLAN membership Bridge bridge Add VLANs. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Table 5-2 Table 5-2 2. MEF-8 Ethernet) encapsulation techniques to deliver synchronous traffic over asynchronous infrastructure with the same service quality as of a legacy SDH/SONET network. The circuit emulation traffic has the highest priority. egress –SVI (B) Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Configure flows 4a and 4b in the same manner as flows 3a and 3b 5. 2b and 4a Bind queue block instance to flow 1. Configure flows 4a and 4b Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Define flows 4a and 4b: • • Flow 4a: ingress – SVI (B). 2b. egress – main card port Flow 4b: ingress – main card port.5 Pseudowire Services ETX-5300A can be used for extending TDM-based services over packet-switched networks. 3a and 3b Bind marking profile to flow 3a Define TPID editing policy for flow 3a and 4b 7. Depending on network type and topology.Chapter 5 Services Sequence Step Commands Comments Installation and Operation Manual Bind CoS mapping profile to flow 1 and 4b or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1 and 4b or use a fixed value Bind policer profile to flow 1 Bind queue mapping profile to flow 1. Add RIFs and bind them to SVIs Router router Add interfaces to the router and bind the RIFs to the SVIs 8. ensuring extremely low packet-loss transport.0 . low latency and minimal jitter. It utilizes various payload (CESoPSN. 2b and 4a Define required VLAN editing actions for flow 2a. the pseudowire traffic can be delivered as: • • Point-to-point L2 service for MEF-8-encapsulated PWs Bridge L2 for MEF-8-encapsulated PWs 5-24 Pseudowire Services ETX-5300A Ver. 1. SAToP) and network (UDP over IP. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services • L3 forwarding over router for UDP/IP-encapsulated PWs. Point-to-Point L2 Pseudowire Service ETX-5300A Ver. Configure flows Configure flow 1a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 1b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Legend: Mandatory Optional Figure 5-11. Define SVI Define SVI (PW) 4. Define PW peer Define PW peer 5. Table 5-9 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning.1 2. Define profiles See Figure 5. 1.0 Pseudowire Services 5-25 . Configure timeslot cross-connections Add and configure a pseudowire Configure crossconnections Configure timeslot cross-connection for CESoPSN PW 7. 1. Add a pseudowire 6. Configure ports 3.1 I/O Card TDM Port Configure I/O card TDM port Configure SDH/ SONET ports Configure E1/T1 ports PW Flow 1a SVI Flow 1b Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5. Point-to-Point L2 Pseudowire Service Figure 5-11 illustrates a point-to-point L2 pseudowire service. Remember that PW SVIs represent untagged traffic termination points. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands See Table 5-2 Comments Table 5-2 2. Define pseudowire pwe Add and configure pseudowires Cross-Connections 6. egress – main card port Flow 1b: ingress – main card port. This means that VLAN tags must be pushed on exiting it and popped on the flows terminating at SVI. Configure ports SDH/SONET Ports E1 Ports T1 Ports port Configure physical layer parameters of the SDH/SONET and E1/T1 ports 3. Point-to-Point L2 Pseudowire Service Provisioning Sequence 1. Configure timeslot crossconnections cross-connection Assign timeslots to pseudowire 7.0 5-26 Pseudowire Services . Define SVIs Service Virtual Interface (SVI) svi Define PW-type SVI. Define PW peer Pseudowire Peer peer Configure pseudowire peer by defining its MAC address Pseudowires 5. 1.Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual Table 5-9. Configure flows See Table 5-2 See Table 5-2 Define two flows: • • Flow 1a: ingress – SVI. 4. egress –SVI ETX-5300A Ver. 0 Pseudowire Services 5-27 . ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Sequence Step Commands Comments Chapter 5 Services Bind classifier profile to flow 1b Bind CoS mapping profile to 1b or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1b or use a fixed value Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Define required VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile to flow 1a Define TPID editing policy for flow 1a L2 Pseudowire Service over Bridge Figure 5-12 illustrates a L2 pseudowire service over the bridge. Table 5-10 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning. 1. Configure flows Configure flow 1a Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Configure flow 1b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Configure flow 2a Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 2b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Legend: Mandatory Optional Figure 5-12. Configure ports 3. Configure VLAN membership Configure VLAN membership Define VLANs Configure bridge ports as VLAN members Configure MAC table size 6.1 Installation and Operation Manual I/O Card TDM Port Configure I/O card TDM port Configure SDH/ SONET ports Configure E1/T1 ports PW Flow 1a Bridge SVI BP BP SVI Flow 2a Flow 2b Main Card Ethernet Port Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5. 1. Define PW peer 7. Pseudowire Service over the Bridge 5-28 Pseudowire Services ETX-5300A Ver. Define bridge 4. Add a pseudowire 8. Configure timeslot cross-connections Define PW peer Add and configure a pseudowire Configure crossconnections Configure timeslot cross-connection for CESoPSN PW 9.0 . Define SVIs and bridge ports Define bridge Define SVI (P) Define PW-type SVI Define SVIs (B) and bridge ports Define bridge-type SVIs Define bridge ports Bind bridge ports to SVIs 5.1 SVI Flow 1b 2. Define profiles See Figure 5.Chapter 5 Services 1. Define PW peer Pseudowire Peer peer Configure pseudowire peer by defining its MAC address Pseudowire Services 5-29 . Define bridge Bridge bridge Define. Define SVIs and bridge ports Service Virtual Interface (SVI) Bridge svi bridge Define bridge-port type SVIs. Configure VLAN membership Bridge bridge Add VLANs.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services Table 5-10. 1. assign a number and configure a bridge entity 4. Configure ports SDH/SONET Ports E1 Ports T1 Ports port Configure physical layer parameters of the SDH/SONET and E1/T1 ports 3.0 6. Pseudowire Service over the Bridge Service Provisioning Sequence 1. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Table 5-2 Table 5-2 2. add ports to the bridge and bind the bridge ports to the SVIs 5. define bridge ports as VLAN members and specify MAC table size for each VLAN ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 5 Services Sequence Step Pseudowires 7. 1. Define pseudowire Commands pwe Comments Installation and Operation Manual Add and configure pseudowires Cross-Connections 8.0 . egress – PW SVI Flow 2a: ingress – bridge SVI. 5-30 Pseudowire Services ETX-5300A Ver. Table 5-11 details the configuration steps needed for service provisioning. egress – bridge SVI Table 5-2 Table 5-2 9. egress – bridge SVI Flow 1b: ingress – bridge SVI. egress – main card port Flow 2b: ingress – main card port. Configure timeslot crossconnections cross-connection Assign timeslots to pseudowire Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Define four flows: • • • • Flow 1a: ingress – PW SVI. Configure flows Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile to flow 2b or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 2b or use a fixed value Bind queue mapping profile to flow 2a and 2b Bind queue block instance to flow 2a and 2b Define required VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Define TPID editing policy L3 Pseudowire Service Figure 5-13 illustrates a L3 pseudowire-over-router service. Define and bind router interfaces Define RIFs Define router interfaces Bind router interfaces to SVIs 9.0 Pseudowire Services 5-31 . Configure timeslot cross-connections Configure crossconnections Configure timeslot cross-connection for CESoPSN PW 8.1 Chapter 5 Services Router I/O TDM Card PW LB RIF Define loopback RIF Define loopback router interface RIF SVI Flow 1a Flow 1b Main Card Ethernet Port 2. L3 Pseudowire Service ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual 1. Define PW peer Define PW peer Define pseudowire peer 6. 1. Configure ports Configure TDM I/O card and its ports Define TDM I/O card in slot Configure SDH/ SONET ports Configure E1/T1 ports Configure main card Ethernet port See Figure 5. Add a pseudowire Add a pseudowire Add and configure a pseudowire 7. Define profiles See Figure 5. Define SVI Define SVI (R) Define routertype SVI 5. Define LB RIF 3.1 4. Configure flows Configure flow 1a Bind ingress and egress ports Define VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Configure flow 1b Bind ingress and egress ports Bind classifier profile Bind CoS mapping profile or use fixed value Bind color mapping profile or use fixed value Define VLAN editing actions Bind queue mapping profile Legend: Mandatory Optional Bind queue block instance Figure 5-13. Define profiles Step Same as detailed in Commands Same as detailed in Comments Table 5-2 Table 5-2 2. L3 Pseudowire Service Provisioning Sequence 1. 3. Define loopback router interface Router router Define a loopback router interface and assign an IP address to it. Define PW peer Peer peer Configure pseudowire peer by defining its IP address Pseudowires 6. Define SVIs Service Virtual Interface (SVI) svi Define router-type SVI. and popped on the flows terminating at SVI. bind it to the IP address used by loopback router interface. This means VLAN tags must be pushed on exiting it. Configure physical layer parameters of the SDH/SONET and E1/T1 ports. 1.Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual Table 5-11. Define pseudowire pwe Add and configure pseudowires 5-32 Pseudowire Services ETX-5300A Ver.0 . Configure TDM I/O card and card ports SDH/SONET Ports E1 Ports T1 Ports port When defining TDM I/O card in chassis slot. 5. 4. Remember that router SVI represents an untagged traffic termination point. 1. egress – main card port Flow 1b: ingress – main card port. Configure flows Bind classifier profile to flow 1b Bind CoS mapping profile to 1b or use a fixed value Bind color mapping profile to flow 1b or use a fixed value Bind queue mapping profile Bind queue block instance Define required VLAN editing actions Bind marking profile to flow 1a ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Sequence 7.0 Pseudowire Services 5-33 . egress –SVI Table 5-2 Table 5-2 8. Configure timeslot crossconnections Step Cross-Connections Commands cross-connection Comments Chapter 5 Services Assign timeslots to pseudowire Same as detailed in Same as detailed in Define two flows: • • Flow 1a: ingress – SVI. 0 . 1.Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual 5-34 Pseudowire Services ETX-5300A Ver. The autonegotiation procedure enables automatic selection of the operating mode on a LAN. Functional Description Autonegotiation The speed and duplex mode of an Ethernet interface is set either manually by the operator or negotiated with the peer interface. including out-of-band management port. 6. E5-GBE-20 and E5-10GBE-2 cards provide high-speed connection to GbE and 10GbE networks using fiber optic (SFP/XFP) or copper RJ-45 ports. 1.0 Ethernet Ports 6-1 . Factory Defaults By default.3. RFC 4836. RFC 3635 Benefits Ethernet interfaces located on the E5-MC-4.1 Ethernet Ports This section details the configuration procedure for Ethernet ports located on the main and I/O cards. Ethernet ports are not enabled. It allows equipment connecting to an operating LAN to automatically adopt the LAN operating mode ETX-5300A Ver. Standards and MIBs IEEE 802.Chapter 6 Ports This chapter presents information on the following physical and logical ports present in ETX-5300A: • • • • • • Ethernet Ports SDH/SONET Ports E1 Ports T1 Ports Service Aggregation Group (SAG) Service Virtual Interface (SVI). Flow control is supported on both directly. support flow control.and indirectly-attached ports: • • Directly-attached ports support symmetrical flow control (both Rx and Tx) Indirectly-attached ports support Rx flow control only. It affects both tagged and untagged L2CP frames. to hold the transmitted traffic until it is able to process packets again. without issuing Tx PAUSE frames (asymmetric flow control). When autonegotiation is disabled. The actual flow control mode. If that timer expires or is cleared by getting a PAUSE frame whose timer value is set to 0. the far-end device can then send packets again. flow control mode is negotiated and a port advertises its user-selected flow control capabilities to the peer. In ETX-5300A all Ethernet ports operate in full duplex mode only. See the Ethertype section in Appendix B for details. which is a packet that instructs the far-end device to stop transmission of packets until the receiver is able to handle traffic again. as well as duplex mode and transmission speed are set after the negotiation is completed. The OOB management port accepts frames of up to 1518-byte size. Ethertype Ethertype configured per-port is used for identification of VLAN-tagged frames at ingress and Ethertype stacking at egress. except out-of-band management port.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual (if it is capable of supporting that mode). The mechanism uses a PAUSE frame. support jumbo frames (12 kbytes).0 . If no per-flow L2CP profile is configured. The outer VLAN of an incoming packet must match the configured Ethertype of the port in order to be considered a VLAN-tagged frame (otherwise frame is considered untagged or dropped). Flow Control A flow control is a mechanism that allows an Ethernet receiving end that is unable to process all the traffic sent to it. This refers to outer VLAN only. When autonegotiation is enabled. 6-2 Ethernet Ports ETX-5300A Ver. When autonegotiation is disabled. except the OOB management port. The PAUSE frame includes a timer value (set by the originating receiver). Flow control is an optional port-level parameter. which tells the far-end device how long to suspend transmission. the user must manually define MAU (Medium Attachment Unit) type. 1. per-port-level profile is used. L2CP Handling ETX-5300A handles Layer-2 control protocol traffic on a per-port and/or per-flow basis. All ETX-5300A Ethernet interfaces. the flow control mode is manually selected by the user. Jumbo Frames All Ethernet ports. See the Traffic Management section in Appendix B for details. Task Assigning description to port Command name <string> no name Enabling autonegotiation auto-negotiation no auto-negotiation no auto-negotiation disables autonegotiation.0 Ethernet Ports 6-3 . Comments no name removes the name ETX-5300A Ver. navigate to configure port mng-ethernet. Navigate to configure port ethernet <slot/port> to select the Ethernet port to configure. The config>port>eth(<slot/port>)# prompt is displayed. Note If an L2CP profile has been attached to a port or a flow. See the Classification section in Appendix B for details. For configuring Ethernet out-of-band management port.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports L2CP traffic is processed using a two-stage mechanism comprising per-port or per-flow profiles (set of rules for traffic handling). 3. 1. If no default action is configured for unspecified address or protocol. Queue Group Profile Queue group profiles are the largest entities used in pre. ETX-5300A supports up to 16 L2CP profiles: • • Up to 4 (including default) port-level and a single flow-level profile can be defined on directly-attached ports Up to 32 different addresses/protocols selected per L2CP profile. Classification Key The ingress traffic is first classified into flows according to classification profiles. Configuring Ethernet Ports  To configure the Ethernet port parameters: 1. A per-port classifier key configuration defines which types of classification profiles are supported for this type of port. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. this traffic is tunneled. They are attached to physical ports and consist of queue block and shaper profiles. the profile cannot be deleted or modified. The config>port>mng-eth# prompt is displayed. See the L2CP Handling section in Appendix B for details.and post-forwarding traffic management. In total. The classifier key also defines the CoS mapping and color mapping methods. 2. Autonegotiation is not supported for 10GbE ports. To enable LACP (LAG) on the port. Associating a Layer-2 control processing profile with the port l2cp <l2cp-profile-name> no l2cp Restarting autonegotiation process Administratively enabling port Enabling/disabling performance monitoring data collection Displaying port status Displaying port statistics Displaying SFP status Clearing port statistic counters Clearing SFP counters restart-auto-negotiation no shutdown pm-enable no pm-enable show status show statistics show sfp-status clear-statistics clear-sfp-counters shutdown disables the port no pm-enable disables PM data collection Displaying Port Status You can display the current status of an Ethernet port on a main or I/O card.  To display the Ethernet port status: 1.Chapter 6 Ports Task Defining Ethernet interface type. when autonegotiation is disabled Command mau-type { 10-t | 100-t | 1000-t | 10-1001000-t | 100-any | 1000-any | 10gany | 100-fx | 1000-sx | 1000-lx | 10gsr | 10g-lr | 10g-er } flow-control no flow-control Enabling transmitting of Sync-E clock availability and quality via SSM Assigning queue group profile to Ethernet port Defining classifier key for Ethernet port Setting the VLAN tagged frame Ethertype (tag protocol identifier) tx-ssm queue-group <queue-group-profile-name> no queue-group classification-key {vlan | inner-vlan | p-bit | ip-precedence | ip-dscp} tag-ethernet-type <0x0000-0xFFFF> Installation and Operation Manual Comments mau-type is also used to define SFP/XFP type Enabling flow control no flow-control disables flow control function no tx-ssm disables SSM egress no queue-group removes queue group association This value must be either 8100 or the same as Ethertype value configured at chassis level Defines discarding or tunneling policy for Layer-2 protocols. 1. Navigate to config>port>eth(slot/port)#. Type show status. no l2cp removes association with L2CP profile. 2.0 . the port must have an untagged flow with an L2CP profile defined at the flow level that specifies peer action for MAC 0x02. 6-4 Ethernet Ports ETX-5300A Ver. enter show statistics running.  To display the Ethernet port statistics: • At the prompt config>slot>port>eth(<slot/port>)#.0 Ethernet Ports 6-5 . 1. The counters are described in Table 6-1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports The port status is displayed. for example as follows: ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/1)# show status Name : GBE-5-1 Administrative Status : Up Operational Status Connector Type Actual Mau Type Provisioned Mau Type Auto Negotiation Flow Control MAC Address : Up : XFP In : 10G Based SR : 10g-any : Disabled : Disabled : 00-20-D2-AA-18-00 Displaying Statistics Ethernet ports of ETX-5300A collect performance monitoring data. ETX-5300A Ver. Ethernet statistics are displayed. excluding packets with bad CRC and short packets Tx Total number of transmitted packets Note Total Octets Total number of transmitted octets Total number of transmitted good unicast packets Total number of transmitted good multicast packets Unicast Frames Multicast Frames 6-6 Ethernet Ports ETX-5300A Ver. including FCS and bad packet octets. including packets with bad CRC. excluding packets with bad CRC and short packets Total number of received multicast packets. 1. and excluding short packets and packets dropped due to Rx MAC overflow Total number of received octets. Ethernet Statistic Counters (I/O Card Port) Parameter Total Frames Description Rx Total number of received packets. and excluding framing bits Total number of received good unicast packets.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(1/1)# show statistics running Running --------------------------------------------------------------Counter Rx Tx Total Octets 0 0 Total Frames 0 0 Unicast Frames 0 0 Multicast Frames 0 0 Broadcast Frames 0 0 Jabber Frames L2CP Discarded OAM Discarded ACL Discarded FCS Error Frames MAC Error Frames MAC Overflow Frames Too Short Frames Discarded Frames 64 Octets 65-127 Octets 128-255 Octets 256-511 Octets 512-1023 Octets 1024-1518 Octets 1519-2047 Octets 2048-Max Octets Too Long Frames 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 6-1.0 . 0 Ethernet Ports 6-7 . 1. such as badly formed packets The number of packets discarded due to the FIFO overflow The number of received wellformed frames that were less than 64 octets long. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Description Rx Total number of received broadcast packets. or were not well formed – The number of frames dropped in Tx MAC – Tx Total number of transmitted good broadcast packets Chapter 6 Ports Parameter Broadcast Frames Note Jabber Frames I/O card ports only Discarded Frames Error Frames Not available for main card ports Total number of received bad packets. excluding packets with bad CRC and short packets The number of received frames that exceeded the maximum allowed packet size and contained an CRC error. including packets with bad CRC and short packets The number of packets discarded by the L2CP processing mechanism The number of packets discarded by the OAM processing mechanism The number of packets discarded by the ACL processing mechanism The number of received packets with bad CRC The number of packets discarded in Rx MAC due to PHY error or incorrect packet termination. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets L2CP Discarded OAM Discarded ACL Discarded FCS Error Frames MAC Error Frames – – – – – I/O card ports only I/O card ports only I/O card ports only I/O card ports only I/O card ports only MAC Overflow Too Short Frames – – Not available for OOB management port Not available for OOB management port 64 Octets Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 64 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 64 octets in length. enter clear-statistics.Chapter 6 Ports Description Rx Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 65–127 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 128–255 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 128–255 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 256–511 octets in length.0 . excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Tx Installation and Operation Manual Parameter 65–127 Octets Note Not available for OOB management port Not available for OOB management port Not available for OOB management port Not available for OOB management port Not available for OOB management port Not available for OOB management port Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 65–127 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 256–511 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 2048 to maximum allowed size octets in length. 6-8 Ethernet Ports ETX-5300A Ver. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 512–1023 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 1519–2047 octets in length. 1. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets 128–255 Octets 256–511 Octets 512–1023 Octets 1024–1518 Octets 1519-2047 Octets 2048-Max Octets Not available for OOB management port Too Long Frames Total number of received packets that exceeded the maximum allowed packet size Total number of transmitted packets that exceeded the maximum allowed packet size Not available for OOB management port  To clear port statistics: • At the prompt config>slot>port>eth(<slot/port>)#. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 1024–1518 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 2048 to maximum allowed size octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of transmitted packets (including bad packets) that were 1519–2047 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 1024–1518 octets in length. excluding framing bits and including FCS octets Total number of received packets (including bad packets) that were 512–1023 octets in length. The status is displayed. Link SFP/XFP Parameters Parameter Detailed Status Connector Type Transceiver Code Vendor Name ETX-5300A Ver.3 1.4 -2. 1.2 1. for example as follows: ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/1)# show sfp-status SFP --------------------------------------------------------------Detailed Status : No Defect Connector Type Transceiver Code Vendor Name Vendor Part Number Vendor Revision Vendor Serial Number Enhanced Monitoring : LC : 10GBASE-SR : SOURCEPHOTONICS : XPXESRCDFA : 1a : B9A2005955 : Yes Typical Maximum Range (Meter) : 15000 Wave Length (nm) Fiber Type : 850 : MM SFP --------------------------------------------------------------Current Minimum Maximum RX Power (dBm) : -8.2 Table 6-2 explains the parameters of the SFP installed for selected link port. Navigate to mux-eth-tdm (<slot>/<port>)# 2.5 Power Supply (V) : 3.2 3.0 Description SFP/XFP status SFP/XFP connector type SFP/XFP transceiver mode The original manufacturer’s name Ethernet Ports 6-9 .4 18.  To view the status of a local optical link SFP/XFP: 1. Type show sfp-status. follow the instructions below.2 -8.2 3.4 -2.1 Laser Bias (mA) : 1.0 32. Table 6-2.3 Laser Temperature (Celsius) : 32.9 TX Power (dBm) : -2.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Displaying Optical Link SFP/XFP Status For viewing the status of the optical link SFP/XFP.2 -7. received by the SFP/XFP Displays the current optical power. in dBm. in nm The type of optical fiber for which the SFP/XFP is optimized: SM (single mode) or MM (multimode) Displays the current optical power. enter clear-sfp-counters. in mA Displays the measured laser temperature. 1. Example  To configure Ethernet interface: • • • • • • • Port – port 2 on main card A Autonegotiation – enabled Classification key – VLAN L2CP profile – l2cp_prof_1 Queue group profile – queue_group_1 Performance monitoring is enabled Administratively enabled. transmitted by the SFP/XFP Displays the measured laser bias current. in dBm. in °C Displays the SFP/XFP power supply voltage  To reset SFP counters: • At the prompt config>slot>port>eth(<slot/port>)#. ETX-5300A# configure port eth main-a/2 ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/2)# auto-negotiation ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/2)# classification-key vlan ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/2)# l2cp l2cp_prof_1 ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/2)# queue-group queue_group_1 ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/2)# pm-enable ETX-5300A>config>port>eth(main-a/2)# no shutdown 6-10 Ethernet Ports ETX-5300A Ver.0 .Chapter 6 Ports Parameter Vendor Part Number Vendor Revision Description The original vendor’s part number The original vendor’s firmware revision Installation and Operation Manual Vendor Serial Number The original vendor’s serial number Enhanced Monitoring Typical Maximum Range (Meter) Wave Length (nm) Fiber Type RX Power (dBm) TX Power (dBm) Laser Bias (mA) Laser Temperature (Celsius) Power Supply (V) Enhanced SFP/XFP monitoring support The maximum range expected to be achieved over typical optical fibers. in meters The nominal operating wavelength of the SFP/XFP. 828 (03/2000). ETX-5300A Ver.784 (03/2008). ATIS-0300231. ITU-T G.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-11 .04.829 (12/2002).783 (03/2006).2003(2007). Table 6-3. ITU-T G. using fiber optic SFP ports.2 SDH/SONET Ports Four SDH/SONET ports located on the E5-cTDM-4 cards serve for terminating STM-1/OC-3 links and their overheads. ITU-T G.1322 (01/2007). ITU-T G. ITU-T G. 1.520 Mbps).707/Y. Standards and MIBs Telcordia GR-253-CORE (issue 4 December 2005). Configuration Error Messages Message Autonegotiation enabled not allowed for 10G port Invalid MAU type for 10G port Invalid MAU type for SFP port Invalid MAU type for UTP port Invalid MAU type for autonegotiation enabled Invalid MAU type for autonegotiation disabled Modify failed: Ethertype tag value is in use Invalid port Ethertype tag value Max number of allowed Ethertype tag values has been exceeded Cannot delete default Ethertype tag value Delete failed: Ethertype tag value is in use Description Autonegotiation cannot be enabled for 10GbE ports Invalid MAU type has been selected for a 10GbE port Invalid MAU type has been selected for an SFP port Invalid MAU type has been selected for a UTP port Autonegotiation must be disabled for 100BaseFX interfaces Autonegotiation must be enabled for 1000BaseBT interfaces The Ethertype cannot be changed if an active flow is attached to the port The selected default Ethertype value is different from 0x8100 or the second Ethertype value is equal to 0x8100 Only two Ethertype values (default and another one) are allowed The default Ethertype value 0x8100 cannot be deleted The Ethertype value cannot be deleted because it is use by another port 6.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Configuration Errors Table 6-3 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Benefits TDM ports provide access to SDN/SONET networks at STM-1 and OC-3 levels (155. RFC 359. SDH transport system. as background for the detailed presentation of the SDH signal structures. An SDH network node is a facility at which signals built in accordance with the SDH frame structure are generated and/or terminated. An SDH network is formed by interconnecting the required number of network nodes by means of SDH transport systems. The physical STM-1/OC-3 ports support many types of SFP transceivers with optical interfaces to meet a wide range of operational requirements.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual Factory Defaults ETX-5300A is supplied with all SDH/SONET ports enabled. Other parameter defaults are listed in the table below. for example. ETX-5300A Ver. without any disassembly except at the two network nodes that exchange information through that particular signal. 1. Transparent transporting of each individual tributary signal through the network. An SDH transport system provides the technical means to transfer SDH signals between two network nodes. • • Basic SDH Principles The Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) is implemented on the basis of two principles: • • Direct synchronous multiplexing of individual tributary signals within the structure of the higher-rate multiplexed signal.0 6-12 SDH/SONET Ports . PDH tributary signals. SDH Implementation Principles This section describes the implementation principles for the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). SDH network. Parameter j0-pathtrace string j1-pathtrace string j2-pathtrace string overhead-mode loopback tx-ssm tx-clock-source ber-threshold eed ber-threshold sd Default Value 0x00 0x01 0x00 itu-ansi disabled disabled domain 1 e-3 e-6 Functional Description The TDM interfacing subsystem provides interfaces to the TDM user equipment or network. The descriptions of SDH networks use the following terms: • Network node. for transmission over the SDH network. A network node is thus a convenient access point to add or drop payload signals. which by convention is referred to as byte 1 of the SDH frame. Direct Multiplexing Approach Direct multiplexing means that individual tributary signals can be inserted into the SDH multiplexed signal and removed without intermediate multiplexing and demultiplexing steps. General Structure of SDH Signals The SDH signal is a serial signal stream with a frame structure. Each SDH frame starts with framing bytes. SDH equipment is designed to permit efficient and reliable synchronization of the entire network to a single timing reference. The organization of the frame can be easily understood by representing the frame structure as a matrix of cells arranged in N rows and M columns. This capability results in the following characteristics: • • Efficient signal transport. the SDH signal structure includes sufficient overhead for management and maintenance purposes.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-13 . and therefore gives the network operator full control over all the operational aspects of SDH networks and equipment units. Figure 6-1 shows the general structure of SDH signals. instead of implementing digital cross-connect systems as entities separated from multiplexing equipment. because the same SDH transport system can carry various types of payloads (tributary signals). where each cell carries one byte.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports To enable synchronous multiplexing. The SDH frame structure is formed by byte-interleaving the various signals carried within its structure. column 1). In accordance with this representation. ETX-5300A Ver. This permits the building of cost-effective add/drop multiplexers. the key component of flexible networks. because any tributary can be inserted into the SDH signal and removed as a single unit. In addition. the framing byte appears in the top left-hand cell (the byte located in row 1. 1. which enable equipment receiving the SDH data stream to identify the beginning of each frame. This overhead permits the integration of the network management and maintenance functions within the transport network itself. Flexible routing. without any effect on the other tributary signals carried by the same SDH signal. The location of the other bytes within this frame structure is determined by its position relative to the framing byte. SDH Frame Organization 6-14 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. starting with those in the top row (see arrow in Figure 6-1). the bits in the next row are transmitted. General Structure of SDH Signals The frame bytes are transmitted bit by bit.0 . F F F F N Rows Section Overhead Path Overhead (One Column) Virtual Container (VC) M Columns Figure 6-2. column M). Transmission within each row is from left to right. the whole sequence repeats .Chapter 6 Ports N x M Bytes Order of Transmission Installation and Operation Manual F F F F F B B B B B N x M Bytes N Rows 1 2 Order of Transmission B B M Columns B Legend B Signal Byte F Framing Byte Figure 6-1. After transmission of the last byte in the frame (the byte located in row N. SDH Frame Organization As shown in Figure 6-2. sequentially.starting with the framing byte of the following frame. After the transmission of a row is completed. 1. an SDH frame comprises two distinct parts: • • Section Overhead (SOH) Virtual Container (VC). Virtual Container (VC) The VC is an envelope (i. Since the VC is handled as an envelope that is opened only at the path end points. is fundamental to the operation of SDH networks. Therefore. a special type of signal structure. therefore the VC may be transferred repeatedly from one SDH transport system to another on its path through the network. This means that the section overhead is generated by the transmit side of a network node. VC Assembly/Disassembly Process The concept of inserting a tributary signal into a virtual container for end-to-end transport across a SDH network. This process is referred to as “demapping”.. or frame) that is used to transport a tributary signal across the SDH network. bit error monitoring.e. ETX-5300A Ver. some of its signal carrying capacity is dedicated to path overhead. the tributary signal must be recovered from the virtual container. alarm and performance monitoring). This is achieved by adding stuffing bytes. when several SDH transport systems are connected in tandem.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Section Overhead In SDH networks.) required to support and maintain the transportation of a VC between nodes in an SDH network. etc. path overhead bytes. Some signal carrying capacity is allocated in each SDH frame for the section overhead. to the signal stream as part of the mapping process. The path overhead provides the facilities (e. the mapping process must compensate for this difference. it is necessary to restore the original data rate of the recovered tributary data stream. Nevertheless. This process of inserting the tributary signal into the proper locations of a VC is referred to as “mapping”. required to support and maintain the transportation of the VC between the end points. the section overhead is not transferred together with the payload (VC) between the interconnected transport systems. After demapping. in most cases the VC is assembled at the point of entry to the SDH network and disassembled only at the point of exit. the term section refers to the link between two consecutive SDH equipment units of the same type.g.. e. This increases the bit rate of the composite signal to the rate provided for tributary transport in the SDH structure. The path followed by a VC within the network may include any number of nodes. and is terminated at the receive side of the next network node. In all SDH signal structures. 1.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-15 . At the point of exit from the SDH network. Thus. The section overhead pertains only to an individual SDH transport system. data communications channels. This provides the facilities (alarm monitoring. the carrying capacity provided for each individual tributary signal is always slightly greater than that required by the tributary rate.. by removing the path overhead and stuffing bits.g. The VC-4 structure includes one column (9 bytes) for the VC-4 path overhead.34 Mbps. preceded by one column of path overhead. or VC-4.52 Mbps F F F F Path Overhead (9 Bytes) STM-1 Virtual Container (VC-4) 9 Rows Section Overhead Container Capacity = 150. provides a channel capacity of 150. This carrying capacity is sufficient for transporting a 139.34 Mbps Payload Capacity = 149. The STM-1 signal frame comprises 9 rows by 270 columns. 6-16 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. for total of 81 bytes. VC-4.0 . The virtual container carried in an STM-1 frame is referred to as a Virtual Container Level 4.520 Mbps. 2430 Bytes/Frame Serial Signal Stream 155. The VC-4 signal carrying capacity can also be subdivided. STM-1 Frame Structure STM-1 frames are transmitted at a fixed rate of 8000 frames per second. which is transported unchanged across the SDH network.264 Mbps tributary signal (the fourth level in the PDH signal hierarchy). which is called Synchronous Transport Mode Level 1 (STM-1). 1.76 Mbps 9 Columns 1 Column 260 Columns 2430 Bytes/Frame x 8 Bits/Byte x 8000 Frames/sec = 155. which contain a total of 2349 bytes. to permit the transport of multiple lower-level PDH signals.52 Mbps Figure 6-3. this yields a bit rate of 155. The remaining 261 columns of the STM-1 frame. Virtual Container. Figure 6-3 shows the STM-1 frame structure. Note At a transmission rate of 8000 frames per second. each byte supports a data rate of 64 kbps. The STM-1 frame comprises the following parts: • • Section Overhead. 8000 frames per second. The STM-1 section overhead occupies the first nine columns of the STM-1 frame. Considering the STM-1 frame repetition rate. resulting in a total signal capacity of 2430 bytes (19440 bits per frame). leaving 260 columns of signal carrying capacity (149. are allocated to the virtual container. The virtual container itself comprises a container for the payload signal (260 columns).76 Mbps).Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual STM-1 Frame Structure ETX-5300A handles the base-level SDH signal. which are often used in PDH multiplex equipment. In addition to clock offsets. positively or negatively three bytes at time. Using Pointers to Correct Timing Differences SDH network are intended to operate as synchronous networks. updating the pointer will also accommodate any other adjustment required between the input SDH signal rate and the timing reference of the SDH mode. The result is that a given VC-4 typically begins in one STM-1 frame and ends in the next. SDH Overhead Data SDH Overhead Data Types In SDH networks. Moreover. To accommodate timing differences. Were the VC-4 not allowed to float. However. with respect to the STM-1 frame. a transmission path can include three equipment functions: • SDH terminal multiplexer –performs the insertion/removal of tributary signals into SDH frames ETX-5300A Ver. the VC-4 appears to start immediately after the section overhead part of the STM-1 frame. Excessive jitter on a tributary signal degrades signal quality and may cause errors. 1. network implementation must accommodate timing differences (clock offsets).Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Pointers In Figure 6-3.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-17 . Ideally. introduce long delays. this means that all SDH network nodes should derive their timing signals from a single master network clock. Actually. in practical applications. These may be the result of an SDH node losing network timing reference and operating on its standby clock. Therefore. This means that the VC-4 may begin anywhere within the STM-1 payload part. buffers would be required to store the VC-4 data up to the instant it can be inserted in the STM-1 frame. These buffers (called slip buffers). they also cause disruptions in case a slip occurs. Identifying VC-4 Beginning in the STM-1 Frame When a VC-4 is assembled into the STM-1 frame. The VC-4 is allowed to float freely within the space made available for it in the STM-1 frame. or it may be caused by timing differences at the boundary between two separate SDH networks. SDH networks must be designed to permit reliable distribution of timing to minimize the number of pointer adjustments. VC-4 structures are allowed to float within the payload part of STM-1 frames. the VC-4 can be moved (justified). Pointer adjustments introduce jitter. therefore phase adjustments can be made as required between the VC-4 and the STM-1 frame. a pointer (byte) located in the section overhead of the STM-1 frame indicates the location of the first byte (J1) of the VC-4 that starts in that STM-1 frame. This is achieved by simply recalculating and updating the pointer value at each SDH network node. to facilitate efficient multiplexing and cross-connection of signals in the SDH network. or between two adjacent regenerators. Regenerator section – a part of a transmission path located either between a terminal multiplexer or SDH cross-connect equipment and the adjacent regenerator. VC Assembly Path VC Disassembly Figure 6-4. . SDH Terminal Multiplexer SDH Cross-Connect SDH Terminal Multiplexer Tributary Signals . The resulting structure of an SDH transmission path is shown in Figure 6-4. 1. carried in the first column of a VC-4. or between two adjacent SDH terminal multiplexers. .Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual • • SDH cross-connect switch – permits changing the routing of tributary signals carried in SDH frames Regenerator – used to increase the physical range of the transmission path. Path – the logical connection between the point at which a tributary signal is assembled into its virtual container. 6-18 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. • • To provide the support and maintenance signals associated with transmission across each segment. carried in the first nine columns of the STM-1 frame:    • Multiplexer section (MS) overhead – carried in overhead rows 5 to 9 Regenerator section (RS) overhead – carried in overhead rows 1 to 3 AU pointers– carried in overhead row 4. each of these segments has with its own overhead data.0 . The path overhead carried in the VC-4 is called high-order path overhead. hence three types of overhead data: • Section overhead. and the point at which it is disassembled from the virtual container. . Multiplexer Section Multiplexer Section Regenerator Section Regenerator Section Regenerator Section Tributary Signals . . Structure of Transmission Path in SDH Network As shown in Figure 6-4. Path overhead. A multiplexer section can include up to three regenerator sections. Figure 6-5 shows the detailed structure of the overhead data in STM-1 frames. see the SDH Tributary Units section for a description of the low-order path overhead. a transmission path can comprise three types of segments: • Multiplexer section – a part of a transmission path located either between a terminal multiplexer and an adjacent SDH cross-connect equipment. 0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-19 . A2 Bytes) The six framing bytes carry the framing pattern. or between two adjacent regenerators.). 1. The byte carries the binary representation of the STM-1 frame number in the STM-N frame. and are used to indicate the start of an STM-1 frame. Parity Check (B1 Byte) An 8-bit wide bit-interleaved parity (BIP-8) checksum is calculated over all the bits in the STM-1 frame. Channel Identifier (C1 Byte) The C1 byte is used to identify STM-1 frames within a higher-level SDH frame (STM-N. Framing (A1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Path Overhead ID C1 Section Overhead Framing A1 Framing A1 Framing A1 Framing A2 Framing A2 Framing A2 Path Trace J1 BIP-8 B3 Signal Label C2 Pointer H3 Pointer H3 Regenerator Section Overhead (Rows 1 . to permit error monitoring over the regenerator section.3) BIP-8 B1 Orderwire E1 User F1 DCC D1 DCC D2 DCC D3 AU Pointers (Row 4) Pointer H1 BIP-24 B2 DCC D4 B2 B2 Pointer H2 APS K1 DCC D5 Pointer H3 APS K2 DCC D6 Path Status G1 User Channel F2 Multiframe H4 Multiplex Section Overhead (Rows 5 . etc. The associated equipment includes the aggregate interfaces and SDH processing equipment which either originates or terminates the regenerator section overhead.9) DCC D7 DCC D8 DCC D9 Z3 DCC D10 DCC D11 DCC D12 Z4 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Orderwire E2 Z5 Bytes reserved for future use Figure 6-5. The functions of the various bytes carried in the STM-1 regenerator section overhead are described below. ETX-5300A Ver. where the standardized values of N are 4. Organization of STM-1 Overhead Data Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) A regenerator section of an SDH network comprises the transmission medium and associated equipment either between a network element and the adjacent regenerator. 16. The computed even-parity checksum is placed in the RSOH of the following STM-1 frame. H3 bytes) The Administration Unit (AU) pointer bytes are used to enable the transfer of STM-1 frames within STM-N frames. SDH multiplexers). H2. 6-20 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. D3 Bytes) The 192 kbps Data Communication Channel (DCC) provides the capability to transfer network management and maintenance information between regenerator section terminating equipment. The information transmitted on this channel can be passed unmodified through a regenerator.0 . K2 Bytes) The K1 and K2 bytes carry the information needed to activate/deactivate the switching between the main and protection paths on a multiplexer section. Data Communication Channel (D4 to D12 Bytes) Bytes D4 to D12 provide a 576 kbps data communication channel (DCC) between multiplexer section termination equipment. together with the associated equipment (including regenerators) that provide the means of transporting information between two consecutive network nodes (e. D2. Orderwire Channel (E1 Byte) The E1 byte is used to provide a local orderwire channel for voice communications between regenerators and remote terminal locations. and can carry proprietary communications. User Communication Channel (F1 byte) The F1 byte is intended to provide the network operator with a channel that is terminated at each regenerator location. Parity Check (B2 Bytes) A 24-bit wide bit-interleaved parity (BIP) checksum is calculated over all the bits in the STM-1 frame (except those in the regenerator section overhead).Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual Data Communication Channel (D1. Separate pointers are provided for each STM-1 frame in an STM-N frame. One of the network nodes originates the multiplexer section overhead (MSOH) and the other terminates this overhead. AU pointers link the section overhead and the associated virtual container(s). and therefore are processed by multiplexer section terminating equipment. This channel is used to carry network administration and maintenance information. AU Pointers (H1. Multiplexer Section Overhead (MSOH) A multiplexer section of an SDH network comprises the transmission medium. The functions of the various bytes carried in the STM-1 multiplexer section overhead are described below.g. Protection Switching (K1.. The computed checksum is placed in the MSOH of the following STM-1 frame. 1. or overwritten by data generated by the regenerator. or at any point along the path.e. the VC-4 does not carry any tributary signals) The code “00000001” represents the VC-4 equipped state. VC-4 Path Overhead Functions The path overhead (POH) is contained within the virtual container portion of the STM-1 frame. these four frames form a TU ETX-5300A Ver. The signal label can assume 256 values.. The computed value is placed in the B3 byte. used for error performance monitoring on the path. to provide support for complex payload structures. indicates the structure of the VC-4 container. 1. This allows the status and performance of a path to be monitored from either end. however two of these values are of particular importance: • • The all “0”s code represents the VC-4 unequipped state (i. The POH data of the VC-4 occupies all the 9 bytes of the first column. Path Trace Message (J1 Byte) The J1 byte is used to repetitively transmit a 64-byte string (message). the path trace message can be used to check continuity between any location on a transmission path and the path source. The message is transmitted one byte per VC-4 frame. Path Status (G1 Byte) The G1 byte is used to send status and performance monitoring information from the receive side of the path terminating equipment to the path originating equipment. These functions are explained in the SDH Maintenance Signals and Response to Abnormal Conditions section below. Multiframe Indication (H4 byte) The H4 byte is used as a payload multiframe indicator. Alarm Signals Alarm information is included as part of the MSOH. Signal Label (C2 Byte) The signal label byte. Parity Check (B3 Byte) An 8-bit wide bit-interleaved parity even checksum.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-21 . A unique message is assigned to each path in an SDH network. The functions of the various bytes carried in the VC-4 path overhead are described below. for example. is calculated over all the bits of the previous VC-4. the TU overhead is distributed over four TU frames. such as payload structures carrying multiple tributary units (TUs – see the SDH Tributary Units section). C2. Therefore. If.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Orderwire Channel (E2 Byte) The E2 byte is used to provide a local orderwire channel for voice communications between multiplexer section terminating equipment. It is therefore more accurate to refer to the structure as a TU multiframe. a fixed number of whole TUs may be mapped within the container area of a VC-4. VC-12. These structures are explained below: • TU-11: Each TU-11 frame consists of 27 bytes. 1. These functions are explained in SDH Maintenance Signals and Response to Abnormal Conditions section below. called Tributary Units (TUs). has been defined specifically for the transport of a fourth level (139. several special structures. In general. In addition. structured as 3 columns of 9 bytes. virtual containers (VC) and associated TU structures have been defined for each standard PDH multiplex signal level. which comprises a container and path overhead. a TU frame structure is distributed over four consecutive VC-4 frames. Alarm Signals Alarm and performance information is included as part of the path overhead. these bytes provide a transport capacity 6-22 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. This is the only element of TU section overhead.264 Mbps) PDH multiplex signal.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual multiframe structure. the tributary unit frame is generated in three steps: • • A low rate tributary signal is mapped into the TU “container” Low-path path overhead is added before the container. SDH Tributary Units The VC-4 channel capacity. Tributary Unit Types As mentioned above. VC-2 or VC-3. User Communication Channel (F2 Byte) The F2 byte supports a user channel that enables proprietary network operator communications between path terminating equipment. 149. The H4 byte then indicates which frame of the TU multiframe is present in the current VC-4.0 . to form the corresponding virtual container (VC-11. With reference to Figure 6-2. Tributary Unit Frame Structure The structure of the tributary unit frame is similar to the SDH frame structure. specific containers (C). depending on the TU type) A TU pointer is added to indicate the beginning of the VC within the TU frame. the tributary unit frame also includes a section overhead part and a virtual container part. To enable the transport and switching of lower-rate tributary signals within the VC-4. • The TU frame is then multiplexed into a fixed location within the VC-4. have been defined. Because of the byte interleaving method.76 Mbps. At a frame rate of 8000 Hz. The phase of the multiframe structure is indicated by the H4 byte contained in the VC-4 path overhead. The characteristics of each TU type have been specifically selected to carry one of the standardized PDH signal rates. e. 84 TU-11s may be multiplexed into the STM-1 VC-4.62 TU-12 No. This leaves 8 unused columns in the C-4 container. For example. for the specific case of the TU-12. TU-3: Each TU-3 frame consists of 774 bytes.912 Mbps and will accommodate the mapping of a North American DS2 signal. At a frame rate of 8000 Hz. Figure 6-7 also shows the utilization of additional SDH signal structures: • TUG: tributary unit group. 63 9 Columns 1 Column 260 Columns Figure 6-6.54 Mbps and will accommodate the mapping of a CEPT 34.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-23 .52 Mbps F F F F VC-4 Path Overhead 9 Rows Section Overhead TU-12 No.304 Mbps and will accommodate the mapping of a CEPT 2. At a frame rate of 8000 Hz. These unused columns result from intermediate stages in the TU-12 to VC-4 multiplexing process. structured as 12 columns of 9 bytes. these bytes provide a transport capacity of 2. SDH Multiplexing Hierarchy Figure 6-7 shows a general view of the SDH multiplexing hierarchy. these bytes provide a transport capacity of 49. 1. TUG-2 ETX-5300A Ver. 63 TU-12s may be multiplexed into the STM-1 VC-4. 2430 Bytes/Frame Serial Signal Stream 155. 21 TU-2s may be multiplexed into the STM-1 VC-4.544 Mbps).768 DS3 signal. is the structure generated by combining several lower level tributaries into the next higher level tributary. structured as 4 columns of 9 bytes. 1 TU-12 No.728 Mbps and will accommodate the mapping of a North American DS1 signal (1.048 Mbps signal. The hierarchy illustrates both the European and North American PDH multiplex levels.2 to TU-12 No. • • Figure 6-6 illustrates the assembly (multiplexing) of TUs in the VC-4 structure. TU-2: Each TU-2 frame consists of 108 bytes. Three TU-3s may be multiplexed into the STM-1 VC-4.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports of 1. these bytes provide a transport capacity of 6. 63 TU-12s can be packed into the 260 columns of payload capacity (i. For other multiplexing options.368 Mbps signal or a North American 44. the C-4 container) provided by a VC-4. • TU-12: Each TU-12 frame consists of 36 bytes.. VC-4 Carrying TU-12 Payload As shown in Figure 6-6. At a frame rate of 8000 Hz. structured as 86 columns of 9 bytes. see Figure 6-7. and are filled by fixed stuffing bytes. 0 . 16. Three VC-3 are combined to generate one VC-4 (63 E1 signals per VC-4). For example.) Seven TUG-2 are combined to obtain one TUG-3 (21 E1 signals per TUG-3). TUG-3 is carried in a VC-3.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual is generated by combining 3 TU-12 or 4 TU-11. is the structure generated by combining several lower level administrative units into the next higher level administrative unit. For example. etc. Figure 6-7 shows that the STM-1 signal can be generated by the following multiplexing paths: • • • • Each E1 signal is mapped into a VC-12.520 Mbps) 139.264 Mbps (E4) AUG 44. which is then encapsulated in a TU-12. ×1 ×1 AU-4 VC-4 ×1 ×3 AU-3 VC-3 C-4 STM-1 (155. • Note For simplicity. Each group of 3 TU-12 is combined to obtain a TUG-2 (3 E1 signals per TUG-2. and TUG-3 is generated by combining 7 TUG-2. • AU: administrative unit. is a structure that includes a VC and a pointer to the beginning of the VC. For example. AU-3 contains one VC-3 and includes a pointer to the beginning of the VC.736 Mbps (DS3) ×3 ×7 ×1 TU-3 VC-3 C-3 34.152 Mbps (DS1C) VT3 Legend ×4 TU-11 VC-11 C-11 1. AUG: administrative unit group.) structures).048 Mbps (E1) Figure 6-7.312 Mbps (DS2) 3. AUG for the STM-1 level is generated by combining 3 AU-3 (several AUG can be combined for generating STM-N (N = 4. SDH Multiplexing Hierarchy The flexibility of the SDH multiplexing approach is illustrated by the many paths that can be used to build the various signal structures. 6-24 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. 1. reference is made only to VCs (the actual structure needed to transport a VC can be found in the SDH or SONET multiplexing hierarchy).368 Mbps (E3) TUG3 ×1 ×7 TUG2 Pointer Processing ×3 Mapping TU-12 VC-12 C-12 ×2 TU-2 VC-2 C-2 6.544 Mbps (DS1) 2. The STM-1 signal carries one VC-4. Removal is detected by MSTE when 3 consecutive frames are received with a pattern other than “111” in bits 6 to 8 of K2. Optionally transmitted upon detection of excessive BER defect (equivalent BER. 1. Note Multiplexer Section AIS The AIS indication is an “all 1’s” pattern in pointer bytes. Far End Receive Failure (FERF or MS-FERF) Sent upstream by multiplexer section terminating equipment (MSTE) within 250 µs of detecting LOS.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-25 . Loss of Frame (LOF) LOF state entered when OOF state exists for up to 3 ms. OOF state exited when 2 consecutive SDH frames are received with valid framing patterns. Loss of Pointer (LOP) LOP state entered when N consecutive invalid pointers are received where N = 8. Out of Frame (OOF) OOF state entered when 4 or 5 consecutive SDH frames are received with invalid (errored) framing patterns. Indicated by setting bits 6 to 8 of transmitted K2 byte to “110”. exceeds 10 ). Maximum OOF detection time is therefore 625 µs. Transmission of MS-AIS overrides MS-FERF ETX-5300A Ver. Indicated by STM signal containing valid RSOH and a scrambled “all 1’s” pattern in the rest of the frame. LOF state exited when an in-frame state exists continuously for 1 to 3 ms. 9 or 10. If OOFs are intermittent. -3 LOS state exited when 2 consecutive valid framing patterns are received.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports SDH Maintenance Signals and Response to Abnormal Conditions The maintenance signals transmitted within the SDH signal structure are explained in Table 6-4. LOP state exited when 3 equal valid pointers or 3 consecutive AIS indications are received. -3 Detected by MSTE when bits 6 to 8 of received K2 byte are set to “110” for 3 consecutive frames. based on B2 bytes. SDH Maintenance Signal Definitions Signal Loss of Signal (LOS) Description LOS state entered when received signal level drops below the value at which an error ratio of 10 is predicted. Table 6-4. Detected by MSTE when bits 6 to 8 of the received K2 byte are set to “111” for 3 consecutive frames.25 ms. Sent by regenerator section terminating equipment (RSTE) to alert downstream MSTE of detected LOS or LOF state. the timer is not reset to zero until an in-frame state persists continuously for 0. LOF or MS-AIS on incoming signal. Removal is detected by MSTE when 3 consecutive frames are received with a pattern other than “110” in bits 6 to 8 of K2. provided that during this time no new LOS condition has been detected. 6-26 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. Detected by HO PTE when “all 1’s” pattern is received in bytes H1 and H2 for 3 consecutive frames. Sent upstream to peer HO PTE.e. VC-2 and VC-3 loaded by “all 1’s” pattern). Low Order Path Remote Alarm Indication (LO Path RAI. pointer bytes V1-V3. Indicated by setting bit 8 of LO POH V5 byte to “1”. Indicated by transmitting “all 1’s” pattern in the H1.0 . Detected by peer HO PTE when bit 5 of received G1 byte is set to “1” for 10 consecutive frames. and the flow of alarm and indication signals. also known as HO Path FERF) Generated by high order path terminating equipment (HO PTE) in response to received AU path AIS. Sent upstream to peer LO PTE. 1. TU-2 and TU-3 (i. H2. H3 pointer bytes plus all bytes of associated VC-3 and VC-4). Indicated by setting bit 5 of POH G1 byte to “1”. also known as LO Path FERF) Generated by low order path terminating equipment (LO FTE) in response to received TU Path AIS. Removal detected when peer LO PTE receives 10 consecutive multiframes with bit 8 of V5 byte set to “0”. Indicated by transmitting “all 1’s” pattern in entire TU-1. Removal is detected when 3 consecutive valid TU pointers are received.Chapter 6 Ports Signal AU Path AIS Description Installation and Operation Manual Sent by MSTE to alert downstream high order path terminating equipment (HO PTE) of detected LOP state or received AU Path AIS. TU Path AIS Note TU Path AIS is only available when generating and/or receiving “floating mode” tributary unit payload structures. Detected by LO PTE when “all 1’s” pattern received in bytes V1 and V2 for 3 consecutive multiframes. Figure 6-8 provides a graphical representation of the flow of alarm and indication signals through an SDH transmission path.. Note LO Path RAI is only available when generating and/or receiving “floating mode” tributary unit payload structures. Removal is detected when 3 consecutive valid AU pointers are received High Order Path Remote Alarm Indication (HO Path RAI. Detected by peer LO PTE when bit 8 of received V5 byte is set to “1” or 10 consecutive multiframes. Removal detected when peer HO PTE receives 10 consecutive frames with bit 5 of G1 byte set to “0” Sent downstream to alert low order path terminating equipment (LO PTE) of detected TU LOP state or received TU path AIS. plus all bytes of associated VC-1. This section describes the response to the various conditions that can be detected by the maintenance functions built into the SDH frames. V4 byte. In response to detection of AIS signals and detection of major receiver alarm conditions. such as Loss of Signal (LOS).Installation and Operation Manual Low Order Path Chapter 6 Ports High Order Path Multiplexer Section Regenerator Section Regenerator Section LO PTE HO PTE MS TE RS TE LOP LOS LOF LOS LOF AIS (X2) MS TE LOP HO PTE LOP LO PTE AIS (H1H2) AIS (V1V2) Tributary AIS FERF (X2) RAI (G1) RAI (G1) RAI (VS) RAI (VS) B1(BIP-8) B1(BIP-8) B2(BIP-24) B3(BIP-8) FEBE (G1) FEBE (G1) BIP-2 (VS) FEBE (VS) FEBE (VS) Legend Collection Transmission Generation LO HO Low Order High Low Order PTE RS TE MS TE Path Terminating Equipment Regenerator Section Terminating Equipment Multiplexer Section Terminating Equipment Figure 6-8. or LOF has been detected by equipment terminating in a multiplexer section span. Loss of Frame (LOF). 1.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-27 . cause various types of Alarm Indication Signals (AIS) to be transmitted downstream. and Loss of Pointer (LOP). A Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) for a high order path is sent upstream after a path AIS or LOP condition has been detected by equipment terminating a path • ETX-5300A Ver. other alarm signals are sent upstream to warn of trouble downstream: • Far End Receive Failure (FERF) is sent upstream in the multiplexer overhead after multiplexer section AIS. or LOS. Flow of Alarm and Indication Signals through an SDH Transmission Path Flow of Alarm and Response Signals The major alarm conditions. 520 Mbps) ×1 STS-3 STS-3c × 1 STS-3c SPE 139.048 Mbps (E1) Legend Pointer Processing STS-1 STS-1 SPE VT3 ×7 VT Group ×4 ×3 VT1.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual • A Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) for a low order path is sent upstream after a low order path AIS or LOP condition has been detected by equipment terminating a low order path. SONET Multiplexing Hierarchy The main signal structures in the SONET hierarchy are designated as follows: • • • 6-28 Containers are replaced by synchronous payload envelopes (SPE) for the various virtual tributaries (VTs) Virtual containers (VCs) are replaced by virtual tributaries (VTs). Figure 6-9 shows the SONET multiplexing hierarchy. Performance Monitoring Performance monitoring at each level in the maintenance hierarchy is based on the use of the byte interleaved parity (BIP) checksums calculated on a frame by frame basis. the equipment terminating the corresponding path sends upstream Far End Block Error (FEBE) signals. In response to the detection of errors using the BIP checksums. the following description is based on the information already presented for SDH. however the rates are similar to those used in the SDH hierarchy Tributary unit groups (TUGs) are replaced by virtual tributary groups ETX-5300A Ver.5 SPE VT2 SPE 6. SONET uses implementation principles and even frame structures that are very similar to those used by SDH.264 Mbps (E4) ×3 ×3 44.152 Mbps (DS1C) 1.312 Mbps (DS2) 3. widely used in North America and other parts of the world. Therefore.736 Mbps (DS3) ×1 ×2 VT6 VT6 SPE VT3 SPE VT1.544 Mbps (DS1) 2. These BIP checksums are sent downstream in the overhead associated with the regenerator section. 1. STS-3 (155. multiplexer section and path maintenance spans.5 Mapping VT2 Figure 6-9. SONET Environment SONET (Synchronous Optical Network) is an alternative standard to SDH.0 SDH/SONET Ports . Remote Loopback The recovered STM-1/OC-3 receive signal provided by the STM-1/OC-3 transceiver of the tested port is returned by the remote loopback toward the equipment connected to the local STM-1/OC-3 port. and has the same rate (51. and the STM-1 transceiver of the E5-cTDM-4 card. for transmission through the packet network to the equipment at the remote end of the link. This returns the STM-1/OC-3 signal toward the equipment at the remote end of the link. Figure 6-10 shows the signal paths when a remote loopback is activated. The corresponding optical line signal is designated OC-3. the local STM-1/OC-3 port continues sending the received payload to the ETX-5300A transmit path.520 Mbps).840 Mbps). While the loopback is activated. E5-cTDM-4 Card RX Transceiver TX Framer RX Transceiver TX Framer Figure 6-10. Local Loopback The local loopback connects the STM-1/OC-3 transmit signal generated by the STM-1/OC-3 framer of the tested port. The loopback is activated at the line side of the STM-1/OC-3 framer serving the tested port.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-29 . ETX-5300A Ver. to the receive input of the framer. Figure 6-11 shows the signal paths when a local loopback is activated. SDH/SONET Port Diagnostics Diagnostic tools at the STM-1/OC-3 level include local and remote loopback for checking connections to TDM ports. Remote Loopback The test signal is provided by the equipment connected to the local STM-1/OC-3 port. This test checks the connections to the local STM-1/OC-3 port.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports • • The VC-3 level is replaced by the Synchronous Transport Signal level 1 (STS-1). 1. including the transmission plant connecting the local equipment to the E5-cTDM-4 card. that must receive its own transmission. 3 STS-1 can be combined to obtain one Synchronous Transport Signal level 3 (STS-3) at the same rate as STM-1 (155. path and VT levels eed-action [ { soh } ] [ { path } ] [ { vt } ] no eed-action 6-30 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. EED response is enabled for SOH.0 .Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual E5-cTDM-4 Card RX Transceiver TX Framer RX Transceiver TX Framer Figure 6-11. Task Defining the administrative unit group (AUG) Assigning short description to port Administratively enabling port Setting the type of operation in accordance with the SDH or SONET standards Controlling EED response (sending AIS downstream and RDI upstream) Command aug <aug number> Comments AUG is relevant for STM-1 E1 and STM-1 T1 modes. 2. 1. This test fully checks the operation of the local STM-1/OC-3 port. Navigate to configure port sdh-sonet <slot>/<port> to select the SDH/SONET port to configure. the local STM-1/OC-3 port continues sending the transmit signal to the STM-1/OC-3 line. The test signal is provided by the remote equipment whose payload is routed to the tested STM-1/OC-3 port. It also checks the ETX-5300A signal paths that end at the corresponding STM-1/OC-3 port. no name removes the name name <string> no name no shutdown frame-type {sdh | sonet} shutdown disables the port frame-type parameter is included for information only. Local Loopback While the loopback is activated. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. including the transmission through the packet network connecting the remote equipment to ETX-5300A. Configuring SDH/SONET Interfaces  To configure external SDH/SONET parameters: 1. Interface type is selected when a TDM module is defined in chassis slot. The config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)# prompt is displayed. except for the STM-1/OC-3 line interface (transceiver). See Configuring AUG/OC-3 below. that equipment must receive its own transmission. Configuring AUG/OC-3 Interfaces ETX-5300A supports a single AUG (STM-1) or OC-3 (OC-3) per TDM port. TIM response is enabled for EOH. it declares TIM defect Loopback duration is within 1–60 minute range. no loopback deactivates the loopback. path and VT levels This value defines value for unused overhead bytes. Defining OC-3 Assigning SOH profile Enabling/disabling performance monitoring data collection at port level Displaying port status Displaying port statistics Displaying SFP status Clearing statistic counters Clearing SFP statistic counters Controlling carrying SSM code in S1 byte for system clock quality level definition oc3<oc3 number> soh <profile_name> pm-enable no pm-enable show status show statistics show sfp-status clear-statistics clear-sfp-counters tx-ssm no tx-ssm This parameters is valid for OC-3 mode only and must be set to 1 SOH profile configuration is detailed in Configuring SOH Profile no pm-enable disables PM data collection See Displaying Status See Displaying Statistics If enabled. the TDM port carries SSM code in S1 byte for system clock QL.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-31 . Currently. it is recommended to use domain clock as a Tx clock source. ETX-5300A Ver. 1. In the following cases. It is valid for STM-1 T1 mode only.Installation and Operation Manual Task Controlling transmitted and expected path trace labels (carried in byte J0 of the SDH overhead) by the port Activating diagnostic loopback Command j0-pathtrace [ {tx-string <txtrace-string> ] [exp-string <exp-string>}] loopback { local | remote } [ duration <1–60>] no loopback Controlling TIM response (sending AIS downstream and RDI upstream) Defining STM-1 frame overhead type Selecting the timing reference source used by the port for the transmit-to-network direction tim-action [ { soh } ] [ { path } ] [ { vt } ] no tim-action overhead-mode { itu-ansi | ttc } tx-clock-source {loopback | domain <domain-number>} Comments Chapter 6 Ports When ETX-5300A receives a path trace string that is different from the expected one. Tx clock source set for one SDH/SONET port is automatically copied to the rest three TDM ports of the card. the S1 byte is set to DNU (SDH) or DUS (SONET) mode: • • • SSM transmission is disabled Port Rx clock is set to loopback Port clock is used as a selected source for system timing. At the config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)>aug(number) or oc3(number)# prompt. The config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)aug(1) or oc3(1)# prompt is displayed.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual  To configure AUG/OC-3: 1.0 . Task Controlling transmitted and expected path trace labels (carried in byte J1 of the SDH overhead) by the port Assigning path profile to AUG or OC-3 Selecting path width Command J1-pathtrace [ {tx-string <txtrace-string> ] [exp-string <exp-string>}] path <profile_name> path-width { au4 | au3} Comments When ETX-5300A receives path trace string that is different from the expected one. au3(number) or sts1(number)# prompt is displayed. AU3 (STM-1 T1) or STS-1 (OC-3) per TDM port. See Configuring TUG3/AU3/STS-1 below. See Configuring TUG3/AU3/STS-1 below. This parameter is valid for OC-3 ports only. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. 2. enter aug 1 or oc3 1.  To configure TUG3/AU3/STS-1: 1. enter tug3 1–3. au3 { 1 | 2 | 3} sts1 { 1 | 2 | 3} Configuring TUG3/AU3/STS-1 Inerfaces ETX-5300A supports three TUG3 (STM-1 E1). 1. See Configuring TUG3/AU3/STS-1 below. At the config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)# prompt. The config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)aug(1) or oc3(1)>tug3(number). au3 1–3 or sts1 1–3. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. It is valid for STM-1 ports only. This parameter is valid for STM-1 T1 ports only. 2. 6-32 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. it declares TIM defect Path profile configuration is detailed in Configuring Path Profile This value defines T1-AU-3 and E1 to AU-4 mapping mode. no pm-enable disables PM data collection Enabling/disabling performance monitoring data collection at AUG level Defining TUG-3 (Tributary Unit Group) Defining AU-3 (Administrative Unit) Defining STS-1 port pm-enable no pm-enable tug3 { 1 | 2 | 3} This parameter is valid for STM-1 E1 ports only. 5 values. See Configuring VC-12/VC11/VT-1. The config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)aug(1) or oc3(1)>tug3(number).5 (OC-3) level.5 below. VC-11 (STM-1 T1) or VT-1.5: 1. enter vc12 number number. 2. See Configuring VC-12/VC11/VT-1. vc11 number number or vt1-5 number number. This parameter is valid for STM-1 T1 ports only. See Configuring VC-12/VC11/VT-1. At the config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)aug(1) or oc3(1)>tug3(number).5 number)# prompt is displayed. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.Installation and Operation Manual Task Controlling transmitted and expected path trace labels (carried in byte J1 of the SDH overhead) by the port Assigning path profile to AU3 or STS-1 Enabling/disabling performance monitoring data collection at AU3 and STS-1 levels Assigning short description to port Defining VC-12 ports Command J1-pathtrace [ {tx-string <txtrace-string> ] [exp-string <exp-string>}] path <profile_name> pm-enable no pm-enable name <string> no name vc12 {<1–7> | <1–3>} Comments Chapter 6 Ports When ETX-5300A receives path trace string that is different from the expected one. it declares TIM defect Path profile configuration is detailed in Configuring Path Profile no pm-enable disables PM data collection no name removes the name Use space to separate TUG2 and VC-12 values. ETX-5300A Ver. au3(number) or sts1(number)# prompt. This parameter is valid for STM-1 E1 ports only.5 ports vt1-5 {<1–7> | <1–4>} Administratively enabling port no shutdown Configuring VC-12/VC-11/VT-1. 1. Use space to separate TUG2 and VC-11 values.  To configure VC-12/VC-11/VT-1. Use space to separate TUG2 and VT-1. vc11 (TUG2 number/VC-11 number) or vt1-5 (TUG2 number/VT-1.5 below.5 Inerfaces ETX-5300A allows configuration of internal ports at the VC-12 (STM-1 E1).0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-33 . shutdown disables the port Defining VC-11 ports vc11{ <1–7> | 1–4>} Defining VT-1.5 below. au3(number) or sts1(number)> vc12 (TUG2 number/VC-12 number). This parameter is valid for OC-3 ports only. At the config>port# prompt. enter soh-profile <profile_name> for SOH profile.0 . 2. VC-11 or VT-1. ES. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Note Task Using no before soh-profile. ETX-5300A generates the relevant (EED or SD) alarm.  To configure SOH profile: 1.5 levels Assigning short description to port Administratively enabling port Command J2-pathtrace [ {tx-string <txtrace-string> ] [exp-string <exp-string>}] path <profile_name> pm-enable no pm-enable name <string> no name no shutdown Installation and Operation Manual Comments When ETX-5300A receives path trace string that is different from the expected one. SOH profiles are assigned to SDH/SONET interfaces. Defining EED (error rate degradation) and SD (signal degrade) thresholds Setting far-end CV. Path profile configuration is detailed in Configuring Path Profile no pm-enable disables PM data collection no name removes the name shutdown disables the port Configuring SOH Profile In the ETX-5300A architecture. deletes SOH profile. VC-11 or VT-1. SD BER threshold uses E-5 only.Chapter 6 Ports Task Controlling transmitted and expected path trace labels (carried in byte J2 of the SDH overhead) by the port Assigning path profile to VC-12. it declares TIM defect. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting from which a trap is sent fe-line-interval-threshold [cv <cv-value 0–16383>] [es <es-value 0–900>] [ses <ses-value 0–900>] [uas <uas-value 0–900>] 6-34 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver.5 Enabling/disabling performance monitoring data collection at VC12. The config>port>soh-profile(profile_name)# prompt is displayed. Command ber-threshold [eed {e-3 | e4 | e-5} ] [ sd {e-5 | e-6 | e-7 | e-8 | e-9}] Comments If the selected BER value is exceeded. 1. Currently. You can create up to four SOH profiles to define various monitoring thresholds for SOH examination process. SDH/SONET units can have SOH profiles bound to them. The profiles are used for detecting whether transmission degradations have reached unacceptable levels. 1. 2. ES. enter path-profile <profile_name> for high-order path profile. You can create up to eight path profiles to define various monitoring thresholds for path examination process. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting from which a trap is sent fe-line-interval-threshold [cv <cv-value 0–16383>] [es <es-value 0–900>] [ses <ses-value 0–900>] [uas <uas-value 0–900>] ETX-5300A Ver. Defining EED (error rate degradation) and SD (signal degrade) thresholds Setting far-end CV. SD BER threshold uses E-5 only. The config>port>path-profile(profile_name)# prompt is displayed. Note Task Using no before path-profile. The profiles are used for detecting whether transmission degradations have reached unacceptable levels. Command ber-threshold [eed {e-3 | e4 | e-5} ] [ sd {e-5 | e-6 | e-7 | e-8 | e-9}] Comments If the selected BER value is exceeded. At the config>port# prompt. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting from which a trap is sent Setting section CV. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting from which a trap is sent Defining a padding character (null or space) used when an SDH trace message string is shorter than 15 characters Controlling TIM defect monitoring Command line-interval-threshold [cv <cv-value 0–16383>] [es <es-value 0-900>] [ses <ses-value 0–900>] [uas <uas-value 0–900>] section-interval-threshold [cv <cv-value 0–16383>] [es <es-value 0–900>] [ses <ses-value 0–900>] [sefs <sefs-value 0–900>] padding<value> Comments Chapter 6 Ports tim-monitoring no tim-monitoring no tim-monitoring disables TIM defect monitoring Configuring Path Profile In the ETX-5300A architecture.Installation and Operation Manual Task Setting near-end CV. AU3/VC-11. STS-1/VT-1. ETX-5300A generates the relevant (EED or SD) alarm Currently. ES. SDH/SONET units can have path profiles bound to them. Path profiles are assigned to AUG/VC-12.5 ports.  To configure path profile: 1. deletes path profile.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-35 . ES. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. #***************************Defining_SDH_SONET_Card************************** configure slot 1 card-type sdh-sonet stm-1-ch-4 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_SOH_Profile*************************** configure port soh-profile SOH-PROFILE-1 ber-threshold eed e-3 sd e-5 tim-monitoring exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_HVC_Profile*************************** configure port path-profile PATH-PROFILE-1 payload-label hvc 0x02 tim-monitoring exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_LVC_Profile*************************** configure port path-profile VC-PROFILE-1 payload-label lvc asynchronous tim-monitoring exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_SDH_Port****************************** configure port sdh-sonet 1/1 6-36 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 . ES. SES and/or UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting from which a trap is sent Defining a padding character (null or space) used when an SDH trace message string is shorter than 15 characters Defining the expected higher-order path signal label (byte C2) Controlling TIM defect monitoring Command interval-threshold [cv <cv-value 0–16383>] [es <es-value 0–900>] [ses <ses-value 0–900>] [uas <uas-value 0–900>] padding<value> Installation and Operation Manual Comments payload-label<value> tim-monitoring no tim-monitoring no tim-monitoring disables TIM defect monitoring Example The script below shows the configuration of SDH/SONET port 1 on the E5-cTDM-4 card installed in slot 1.Chapter 6 Ports Task Setting near-end CV. follow the instructions below.  To display SDH/SONET port status: • At the config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)#prompt.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-37 . enter show status. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports j0-pathtrace tx-string "ETX-5300A" exp-string "EGATE-2000" soh profile SOH-PROFILE-1 tim-action soh tim-action path tim-action vt eed-action soh eed-action path eed-action vt tx-clock-source domain 1 tx-ssm no shutdown #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_HVC*********************************** aug 1 path-width au-4 j1-pathtrace tx-string "ETX-AUG-1" exp-string "EGATE-AUG-1" path profile PATH-PROFILE-1 pm-enable no shutdown #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_LVC*********************************** tug3 1 vc12 1 1 j2-pathtrace tx-string "ETX-VC12-1-1" exp-string "EGATE-VC12-1-1" path profile VC-PROFILE-1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Displaying Status You can display current status of TDM port on E5-cTDM-4 card at any level. ETX-5300A Ver. For viewing the status of the SDH/SONET hierarchical entities. The SDH/SONET port status is displayed. signal labels. The status is displayed. Type show status. for example as follows: ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(l/1)>aug(1)# show status Name Administrative Status Operational Status Trace Message (J0) Expected Received Signal Label Expected Received RDI Code  To display AU3/STS-1 status: 1.  To display AUG status: 1. The status is displayed. 1. 2. Type show status. Navigate to config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)>aug(1)#.1-1 Administrative Status : Up Operational Status : Up MAC Address SFP Status Connector Type Loopback Trace Message (J0) Expected Received : : : : 00-07-45-00-0F-08 OK SFP In None : 0x01 : 0x01 The TDM interface status screens provide information on the port name.0 . RDI code and connector type (SDH/SONET level only). for example as follows: : HVC-1/1/1 : Down : Down : 0x01 : 0x01 : 0x00 : 0x00 : No Defect 6-38 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(1/1)# show status Name : SDH/SONET. administrative/operational status. trace message strings. Navigate to: STM-1 T1: config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)>aug(1)>au3(1)# OC-3: config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)>oc3(1)>sts1(1)# 2. 5_num)# 2. for example as follows: ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(4/1)>oc3(1)>sts1(1)# show status Name Administrative Status Operational Status Trace Message (J2) Expected Received Signal Label Expected Received RDI Code : LVC-4/1/1 : Down : Down : HVC-4/1/1 : Down : Down : 0x01 : 0x01 : 0x00 : 0x00 : No Defect : 0x01 : 0x01 : 0x00 : 0x00 : No Defect Displaying Statistics SDH/SONET ports of ETX-5300A feature the collection of performance monitoring data at different hierarchical levels.403.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-39 . ETX-5300A Ver. 1. per ANSI T1. Navigate to: STM-1 E1 config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)>aug(1)>tug3(1)>vc12(tug2_num/vc12_num)# STM-1 T1: config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)>aug(1)>au3(1)>vc11(tug2_num/vc11_num)# OC-3: config>port>sdh-sonet(slot/port)>oc3(1)>sts1(1)>vt1-5(tug2_num/vt1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(4/1)>oc3(1)>sts1(1)# show status Name Administrative Status Operational Status Trace Message (J1) Expected Received Signal Label Expected Received RDI Code  To display AU3/STS-1 status: 1. Type show status. The status is displayed. The PM data is collected for 15-minute and 24-hour intervals. 96> | current-day | previous-day | allintervals | all} Comments • • • current –Displays the current interval statistics interval (1–96) – Displays statistics for a selected interval current-day – Displays statistics for current day starting from 12:00 midnight previous-day – Displays statistics for 24 hours before last 12:00 midnight all-intervals – Displays statistics for all existing intervals (up to 96) all –Displays all statistics in succession: current > all intervals > current day > previous day • • • ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(l/1)# pm-enable ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(l/1)# show statistics current Current Time Elapsed (Sec) : 0 Valid Intervals : 0 Invalid Intervals : 0 Section ES : 0 SEFS : 0 Line : 0 : 0 : 0 Far End ES UAS FC : 0 : 0 : 0 SES CV : 0 : 0 SES CV : 0 : 0 ES UAS FC SES CV : 0 : 0 Figure 6-12..0 .Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual  To display the SDH/SONET statistics: 1. The counters are described in Table 6-5. navigate to the required level and enter show statistics followed by parameters listed below. 2. Task Displaying statistics Command show statistics {current | interval <intervalnum 1. Table 6-6 and Table 6-7. At the prompt config>slot>port>sdh-sonet (<slot/port>)#. SDH/SONET Statistics 6-40 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. SDH/SONET statistics are displayed. 1. Verify that collection of performance data has been enabled for the TDM level that you intend to monitor. 5 Level Table 6-5. SDH/SONET Statistics.0 SDH/SONET Ports 6-41 .5(1/1)# pm-enable ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(1/1)>oc3(1)>sts1(1)>vt1. Line Counters Parameter ES Description SONET: Number of seconds during which at least one Line BIP error was detected or a compound AIS-LINE defect was present SDH: Number of seconds during which at least one MS errored block was detected or a compound AIS-LINE defect was present SES SONET: Number of seconds during which K or more Line BIP errors were detected or a compound AIS-LINE defect was present SDH: Number of seconds during which 2400 or more MS errored blocks were detected or a compound AIS-LINE defect was present ETX-5300A Ver.5(1/1)# show statistics current Current ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Time Elapsed (Sec) : 0 Valid Intervals : 0 Invalid Intervals : 0 ES UAS FC : 0 : 0 : 0 Far End : 0 : 0 : 0 SES CV : 0 : 0 ES UAS FC SES CV : 0 : 0 Figure 6-13. 1. SDH/SONET Statistics. SDH/SONET Statistics. Section Counters Parameter ES Description SONET: Number of seconds during which at least one Section BIP error was detected or an SEF or LOS defect was present SDH: Number of seconds during which at least one RS errored block was detected or an SEF or LOS defect was present SES SONET: Number of seconds during which K or more Section BIP errors were detected or an SEF or LOS defect was present SDH: Number of seconds during which 2400 or more RS errored blocks were detected or an SEF or LOS defect was present SEFS CV Number of the seconds during which an SEF defect was present SONET: Number of BIP errors detected at the Section layer (B1 byte) SDH: Number of errored blocks at the RS layer (B1 byte) Table 6-6.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(1/1)>oc3(1)>sts1(1)# vt1-5 1 1 ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(1/1)>oc3(1)>sts1(1)>vt1. VT-1. enter clear-statistics. The far-end line becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous FE-SES-Ls. Testing SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A supports activation of local and remote loopbacks at the SDH/SONET level. You can initiate up to four simultaneous loopbacks (one per port) on a single E5-cTDM-4 card at a time. Far-End Line Counters Parameter ES Description SONET: Number of seconds during which at least one Line BIP error was reported by the far-end (using the REI-L) or an RDI-LINE defect was present SDH: Number of seconds during which at least one MS errored block was reported by the far-end (using the REI-L) or an RDI-LINE defect was present SES SONET: Number of seconds during which K or more Line BIP errors were reported by the far-end or an RDI-LINE defect was present SDH: Number of seconds during which 2400 or more MS errored blocks were reported by the far-end or an RDI-LINE defect was present UAS Number of seconds for which the Line is unavailable at the far-end. The 10 SES-Ls are included in unavailable time. 6-42 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver. the line becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no FE-SES-Ls. The 10 seconds with no SES-Ls are excluded from unavailable time. A failure event begins when a compound AIS-LINE failure is declared. The line becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous SES-Ls. The 10 FE-SES-Ls are included in unavailable time. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period in which it begins. A far-end failure event begins when an RFI-LINE failure is declared. 1. SDH/SONET Port Diagnostics section above details signal paths when local and remote loopbacks are activated. SDH/SONET Statistics.Chapter 6 Ports Parameter UAS Description Installation and Operation Manual Number of seconds for which the Line is unavailable. CV  To clear statistics: • At the prompt config>slot>port>sdh-sonet (<slot/port>)#. SONET: Number of BIP errors detected at the Line layer (B2 byte) SDH: Number of errored blocks at the MS layer (B2 byte) CV FC Number of Line failure events. the line becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-Ls. Once unavailable. SONET: Number of Line BIP errors detected by the far-end and reported back to the near-end using the REI-L indication in the LOH (M1 byte) SDH: Number of MS errored blocks detected by the far-end and reported back to the near-end using the REI-L indication in the MSOH (M1 byte) FC Number of far-end Line failure events. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period in which it begins. and ends when the failure is cleared.0 . Table 6-7. The 10 seconds with no FE-SES-Ls are excluded from unavailable time. and ends when the failure is cleared. Once unavailable. J1 or J2 expected path trace label CV section threshold value is out of range (0–16383) ES section threshold value is out of range (0–900) SES section threshold value is out of range (0–900) SEFS section threshold value is out of range (0–900) CV line threshold value is out of range (0–16383) SDH/SONET Ports 6-43 . enter no loopback. enter loopback . Configuration Errors Table 6-8 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. disable the loopback first Invalid entity for VC profile to be added The profile is not defined yet Invalid CV threshold value Invalid inband loopDown length Invalid ES threshold value Invalid SES threshold value Invalid SEFS threshold value Invalid CSS threshold value Invalid UAS threshold value Invalid LES threshold value PathWidth is wrong for the LineType Invalid SonetMedium SsmTX value Invalid loopback timeout value Invalid transmitted trace length Invalid expected trace length Invalid CV section interval threshold Invalid ES section interval threshold Invalid SES section interval threshold Invalid SEFS section interval threshold Invalid CV line interval threshold ETX-5300A Ver. The config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)# prompt is displayed. 2. Table 6-8. 1. J1 or J2 transmitted path trace label Invalid length of J0.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports  To activate a loopback: 1. Configuration Error Messages Message Cannot change loopback type.0 Description Loopback type cannot be changed while the loopback is active Invalid port entity has been assigned to a SOH or path profile Non-existing SOH or path profile has been assigned to a port CV threshold value is out of range (0–16383) Invalid length of inband loopback deactivation code ES threshold value is out of range (0–900) SES threshold value is out of range (0–900) SEFS threshold value is out of range (0–900) CSS threshold value is out of range (0–900) UAS threshold value is out of range (0–900) LES threshold value is out of range (0–900) Invalid path width value for STM-1 port Invalid value for SSM code carried in S1 byte Loopback duration value is out of range (1–60 min) Invalid length of J0. At the config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)# prompt. Navigate to configure port sdh-sonet <slot>/<port> to select the SDH/SONET port to test.  To deactivate a loopback: • At the config>port>sdh-sonet>(slot/port)# prompt. followed by loopback type (local or remote) and its duration 1–60 min. Chapter 6 Ports Message Invalid ES line interval threshold Invalid SES line interval threshold Invalid CvFe line interval threshold Invalid EsFe line interval threshold Invalid SesFe line interval threshold Invalid UasFe line interval threshold Invalid EED response value Invalid EED threshold value Invalid CV1 5min interval threshold value Invalid ES1 5min interval threshold value Invalid SES1 5min interval threshold value Invalid UAS1 5min interval threshold value Invalid FeCv1 5min interval threshold value Invalid FeEs1 5min interval threshold value Invalid FeSes1 5min interval threshold value Invalid FeUas1 5min interval threshold value Invalid payload label Medium type SONET does not match card type Medium type SDH does not match card type Path width sts1 is illegal for SDH E1 Path width sts3cSTM1 is illegal for SONET Default profile cannot be deleted Profile can't be created: max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Description Installation and Operation Manual ES line threshold value is out of range (0–900) SES line threshold value is out of range (0–900) CV far-end line threshold value is out of range (0–16383) ES far-end line threshold value is out of range (0–900) SES far-end line threshold value is out of range (0–900) UAS far-end line threshold value is out of range (0–900) Invalid EED response value has been selected Invalid EED threshold value has been selected CV 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0–16383) ES 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0–900) SES 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0–900) UAS 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0–900) CV far-end 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0– 16383) ES far-end 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0– 900) SES far-end 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0– 900) UAS far-end 5-min interval threshold value is out of range (0– 900) Invalid expected higher order path signal label (byte C2) has been selected Frame type is not compatible with selected card type Frame type is not compatible with selected card type Selected STS-1 path width value is incompatible with SDH E1 port type Selected STS-3 path width value is incompatible with SONET port type Default SOH or path profile cannot be deleted Maximum number or SOH or path profiles has been reached SOH or path profile name is already taken SOH or path profile name cannot be changed when it has ports assigned to it 6-44 SDH/SONET Ports ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. 0 E1 Ports 6-45 .732. G. The E1 line signal is encoded in the High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) code.Installation and Operation Manual Message Profile does not exist Description Chapter 6 Ports Cannot assign a port to a non-existing SOH or path profile 6. G. Parameter line-type path-interval-threshold cv path-interval-threshold es path-interval-threshold ses path-interval-threshold sefs path-interval-threshold css path-interval-threshold uas idle-code out-of-service tx-clock-source loopback trail-mode Default Value g732n 0 80 10 0 0 10 7F 00 domain 1 no loopback terminated Functional Description E1 Line Signal Characteristics E1 signal characteristics are specified in ITU-T Rec. The nominal data rate of the E1 signal is 2.048 Mbps.703. Each internal E1 is permanently mapped to a VC-12 channel.3 E1 Ports Internal E1 ports of the E5-cTDM-4 cards deliver pseudowire services.703. G. Factory Defaults ETX-5300A is supplied with all E1 ports disabled. Standards and MIBs The E1 link interfaces meet the applicable requirements of ITU-T Rec. and G. ETX-5300A Ver.704. G. G. 1. Other parameter defaults are listed in the table below.823. handling its payload in accordance with the defined ITU-T framing mode and signaling format. emulating PDH traffic over PSN.706. which do not carry timing information. Therefore.2. Each E1 frame includes 256 bits. when larger structures (multiframes) are used. Time Slot 0 a. when they appear to be part of an encoded “0” string. In the AMI code. 4. The receiving end detects these violations.3. “1”s are alternately transmitted as positive and negative pulses.4-14) 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 FAS b. Frames 1-15 A B C D A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Time Slots 1-15.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual HDB3 is based on the alternate mark inversion (AMI) code. Timeslot 0 Timeslot 0 of E1 frames is used for two main purposes: • Delineation of frame boundaries. therefore the data rate supported by each timeslot is 64 kbps. Odd Frames (1.000 per second. timeslot 0 carries a fixed pattern. ETX-5300A Ver. 17-31 8 Bits per Time Slot 32 Time Slots/Frame TS 0 TS 1 TS 2 TS 3 TS 4 TS 5 TS 6 TS 7 TS 8 TS 9 TS 10 TS 11 TS 12 TS 13 TS 14 TS 15 TS 16 TS 17 TS 18 TS 19 TS 20 TS 21 TS 22 TS 23 TS 24 TS 25 TS 26 TS 27 TS 28 TS 29 TS 30 TS 31 16 Frames/Multiframe Notes I N A FAS FR 0 FR 1 FR 2 FR 3 FR 4 FR 5 FR 6 FR 7 FR 8 FR 9 FR 10 FR 11 FR 12 FR 13 FR 14 FR 15 International Bit National Bits (Sa4 through Sa8) Alarm Indication Signal (Loss of Frame Alignment . called frame alignment signal (FAS). the encoding introduces intentional coding violations in the sequence transmitted to the line. in every second frame. E1 Signal Structure The E1 line operates at a nominal rate of 2. because they are assigned the numbers 0.704. Coding violations may also be caused by transmission errors. etc.048 Mbps. G. in order to restore the original data string. The E1 frame format. Even Frames (0.Red Alarm) Frame Alignment Signal. The frame repetition rate is 8.5-15) I 1 A N N N N N Time Slot 16 a. Frames carrying the FAS are defined as even frames. coding violations that cannot be interpreted as intentional coding violations can be counted. To prevent the transmission of long strings of “0”s. For this purpose. To allow the receiving end to detect the artificially-introduced pulses and enable their removal. is shown in Figure 6-14.0 6-46 E1 Ports . the HDB3 coding rules restrict the length of a “0” string that can be transmitted through the line to a maximum of three pulse intervals. E1 Frame Format The 256 bits included in a frame are organized in 32 timeslots of eight bits each. Frame 0 0 0 0 0 X Y X X MAS Channel Data b. 2. The data transferred over the E1 line is organized in frames. 1. they are removed. as defined in ITU-T Rec. Longer strings of “0”s are encoded at the transmit end to introduce non-zero pulses. occupies alternate (but not necessarily even) frames ABCD X Y MAS ABCD Signaling Bits Extra Bit Loss of Multiframe Alignment Multiframe Alignment Signal Figure 6-14. and thus provide information on the quality of the transmission link. whereas “0”s are transmitted as a zero voltage level. the frames are organized in larger patterns.704 recommendations define the following types of multiframes: • • Basic G. Basic G. Bit 2 is always set to 1.704 framing G. which are identified by means of a separate multiframe alignment signal (MAS) contained in timeslot 16 of each frame.704 structure consists of two frames.704 Multiframe”) The G. Its main use is for error detection using the optional CRC-4 function (CRC-4 stands for Cyclic Redundancy Check. and are actually available to the users. The number of timeslots available for user data is 31. The other bits. timeslot 0 carries housekeeping information. In every frame without FAS (odd frames).704 multiframe structure has 16 frames. if there is an agreement regarding their use. using a fourth-degree polynomial).704 Framing with Timeslot 16 Multiframe (“G. to notify the equipment at the other end that the local equipment lost frame alignment.704 framing with timeslot 16 multiframe. 1. a process called frame synchronization. The total data rate that can be carried by each national bit is 4 kbps. and housekeeping information in the other bits.704 multiframe structure is generally used when timeslot 16 serves for the end-to-end transmission of channel-associated signaling (CAS). ITU-T Rec. or did not receive an input signal. This function is described below. identified as Sa4 through Sa8. The odd frame has a 1 in bit position 2. the equipment can identify each bit in the received frames.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports The receiving equipment searches for the fixed FAS pattern in the data stream using a special algorithm. and therefore the maximum payload rate is 1984 kbps. The G. A typical ETX-5300A Ver. This information is carried as follows:  Bit 1 – this bit is called the international (I) bit. • Interchange of housekeeping information. The CCS information is often transmitted in timeslot 16. To enable the transmission of network management information. and used by the frame alignment algorithm. Bit 3 is used as a remote alarm indication (RAI). called multiframes. which are identified by means of the information included in timeslot 0: • • The even frame of the pair includes the frame alignment signal (FAS).0 E1 Ports 6-47 . G. a separate timeslot may have to be assigned within the frame. Once this process is successfully completed. G.    Multiframes To increase the information carrying capacity without wasting bandwidth. This procedure is called common channel signaling (CCS).704 Multiframe The basic G. are designated national bits. which use channel-associated signaling. timeslot 16 of each of the 16 frames in each multiframe carries the following information: • • • The first four bits of timeslot 16 in multiframe 16 always carry the multiframe alignment sequence. Since timeslot 16 must be reserved for the transmission of the MAS and system signaling. thereby enabling end-to-end transmission of four signaling states. and therefore can be used to evaluate data transmission quality over E1 links. and the maximum payload rate is 1920 kbps. The four checksum bits calculated on a given submultiframe are multiplexed. 1. designated A. Each CRC-4 multiframe is divided into two submultiframes of 8 frames (2048 bits) each. and D. B. Bit 6 in timeslot 16 in multiframe 0 is used to notify the equipment at the other end of the link that the local equipment lost multiframe alignment.704 multiframe format. The other bits of this timeslot do not have mandatory functions. this information is the signaling information for the 30 payload timeslots (channels). in frames 1 through 11 of the CRC-4 multiframe). additional information must be provided to the receiving equipment. As shown in Figure 6-14.706. The CRC-4 function is used to detect errors in the received data. C. in bit 1 of timeslot 0 of each even-numbered frame of the next submultiframe. The additional information is transmitted to the receiving equipment by using a multiframe structure called CRC-4 multiframes. To enable error detection. Channel Associated Signaling When using the G. G. which is multiplexed into bit 1 of timeslot 0 of each odd-numbered (1. the checksum is calculated again on each submultiframe and then compared against the original checksum (sent by the transmitting ETX-5300A Ver. At the receiving end. When using the G. The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a four-bit checksum on each 2048-bit block (submultiframe). only 30 timeslots are available for the user payload.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual application in which timeslot 16 serves for the transmission of signaling is the transfer of voice channels by means of voice modules.. CRC-4 Error Detection The ETX-5300A system supports the CRC-4 function in accordance with ITU-T Rec.0 • • 6-48 E1 Ports . Each frame in the multiframe carries the signaling information of two channels.704 multiframe format. four signaling bits. bit by bit.704 16-frame multiframe structures explained above. This function can be enabled or disabled independently for each link by the user. timeslots 16 in frames 1 through 15 of each multiframe are available for carrying user information. The CRC-4 multiframe structure is identified by a six-bit CRC-4 multiframe alignment signal.704 and G. • A CRC-4 multiframe always starts with an even frame (a frame that carries the frame alignment signal). In general.e. 0000. etc.) frame of the CRC-4 multiframe (i. are available for each channel. This group is not related in any way to the G. 3. 5. A CRC-4 multiframe is an arbitrary group of 16 frames. The equipment receiving an AIS signal loses frame synchronization. the receive signal of the port is connected by the port E1 framer to the input of the port transmit path. when a local loopback is activated on a local internal E1 port. for example. Local Loopback Figure 6-15 shows the signal paths during a local loopback on an internal E1 port. respectively. The loss of frame alignment is reported by means of the A bit (Figure 6-14). The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal. 1.704 multiframe structure is used). Local Loopback on Internal E1 Port. This condition is declared when too many errors are detected in the multiframe alignment signal (MAS) (same conditions as for loss of frame alignment).0 E1 Ports 6-49 . • E1 Port Diagnostics Diagnostic tools at the E1 level include: • • Local and remote loopback for checking connections to E1 ports Bit Error Rate Test for measuring the quality of the E1 line. The signal is then returned toward the remote ETX-5300A Ver. Signal Paths As shown in Figure 6-15. 15 of the CRC-4 multiframe. Loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization). The alarm threshold is an error rate higher than 10 that persists for 4 to 5 seconds.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports end in the next submultiframe). for example. • Alarm indication signal (AIS). and is used to maintain line signal synchronization in case of loss of input signal. • Loss of multiframe alignment (applicable only when the G. This condition is declared when too many errors are detected in the frame alignment signal (FAS). The alarm condition is canceled when the error -4 rate decreases below 10 for 4 to 5 consecutive seconds. Errors are counted and used to prepare statistic data on transmission performance. when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the last 5 frames. The loss of multiframe alignment is reported by means of the Y bit (Figure 6-14). Internal E1 TDM Framer Mapper PSN Figure 6-15. The bit error rate is measured on the frame -3 alignment signal. The results are reported by two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of timeslot 0 in frames 13. Loss of frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are detected in two consecutive frames. because an alarm condition occurred in the equipment that supplies the line signal. E1 Alarm Conditions • Excessive bit error rate. While the loopback is activated.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual side through the port packet processor. Internal E1 TDM Framer Mapper PSN Figure 6-16. and thus it must be frame-synchronized. While the local loopback is activated on the local port. when a remote loopback is activated on an internal E1 port. and part of the internal ETX-5300A signal path that handle the routing of the signals up to the tested E1 port. To ensure that the user equipment is capable of providing a good signal. including the transmission through the packet network connecting the remote equipment to ETX-5300A. To ensure that the remote equipment is capable of providing a good signal. including the SDH mapper of the E5-cTDM-4 card. and thus it must be frame-synchronized. through the corresponding E5-cTDM-4 card. While the loopback is activated. it also checks the signal paths that end at the corresponding E1 port. 1. the local end user equipment must receive its own signal. 6-50 E1 Ports ETX-5300A Ver. the remaining sections of the local transmit path. the remote loopback should be activated on E1 port only after checking that the local end user equipment operates normally while its own local loopback is activated. The signal received from the local end user equipment remains connected to the packet processor and it is transmitted to the remote E1 port. including the transmission plant and SDH equipment connecting the user’s equipment to the ETX-5300A. the signal received from the remote E1 port is ignored. The transmit signal is received from the local end user equipment served by the tested port. the E1 framer of that port returns the transmit signal via the receive path of the same port. This test fully checks the operation of the local E1 path serving the tested port. As shown in Figure 6-16. the local loopback should be activated on the local E1 port only after checking that the remote end user’s equipment connected to the tested E1 port operates normally while its own local loopback is activated. the remote end user equipment must receive its own signal. and the link through the packet-switched network. Remote Loopback on Internal E1 Port. Remote Loopback Figure 6-16 shows the signal paths during a remote loopback on an internal E1 port. Signal Paths While the remote loopback is activated on the local E1 port.0 . the transmit signal arriving from the local end user equipment is ignored. This test checks the transmission path between the local end user equipment to the local port. but the local E1 port continues to send the received signal to the local end user equipment. 1. SES. you select specific timeslots for transport by configuring the appropriate bundle at the pwe# prompt. Configuring Internal E1 Interfaces  To configure internal E1 parameters: 1. Alternatively. BER testing can be activated on the entire internal port or on the selected timeslots with or without the injection of errors randomly or at a constant rate. Note An internal E1 port becomes active only if at least one enabled pseudowire with a valid cross-connection is assigned to the port. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. ES. Multiple BERTs can be run simultaneously on separate E1 ports. SEFS. a single bit tester can be used at one end of the link with a loopback activated at the remote end to return the transmitted data. CSS and UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting from which a trap is sent pm-enable no pm-enable path-interval-threshold [cv <cv-value 0– 16383>] [es <es-value 0–900>] [ses <sesvalue 0–900>] [sefs <sefs-value 0–900>] [css <css-value 0–900>] [uas <uas-value 0–900>] no pm-enable disables PM data collection ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports BER Testing A BERT typically consists of a test pattern generator and a receiver that is set to the same pattern. 2.0 E1 Ports 6-51 . The specific timeslots are selected using the pw-tdm command at the cross-connect# prompt. The config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt is displayed. BER testers can be used together at two ends of transmission link to check data integrity in both directions. Navigate to configure port e1 <slot/port/tributary> to select the E1 port to configure. Enabling/disabling performance monitoring data collection Setting path CV. Command name <string> Comments no name removes the name Task Assigning short description to port Masking/unmasking alarms generated by the internal E1 Specifying E1 framing mode no shutdown shutdown masks alarms generated by the internal E1 line-type {unframed | g732n | g732n-crc} When using one of the framed modes. defining test pattern and error injection Command bert [pattern {2e-10 | 2e-15 | 2e-20 | 2e23 | 511 | 2047| qrss | 2e-11}] [inject-error {none | single | 10e-1 | 10e-2 | 10e-3 | 10e-4 | 10e-5 | 10e-6 | 10e-7}] no bert Specifying the code transmitted to fill unused timeslots in E1 frames idle-code { 00 to FF (hexa) } Installation and Operation Manual Comments no bert disables BER testing This parameter is valid for framed modes only. 6-52 E1 Ports ETX-5300A Ver. See Displaying Status See Displaying Statistics Displaying port status Displaying port statistics show status show statistics Displaying Status You can display current status of any internal E1 port on an E5-cTDM-4 card. ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# show status Name : E1-1-1-1 Administrative Status : Down Operational Status : Down Loopback : Off The E1 interface status screens provide information on the port name. during out-of-service periods when the unframed mode is used. Controls the propagation of alarm indications Selects the reference source used by the transmit path of this port Activating diagnostic loopback trail-mode {terminated | extended} See Alarm Indications and Fault Propagation in the TDM Pseudowires of Chapter 8 tx-clock-source {domain <domain-num> | loopback | pw } loopback { local | remote } [ duration <1– 60>] no loopback Loopback duration is within 1–60 minute range. Only one idle code value is allowed per the E5-cTDM-4 card. enter show status. instead of the external data stream. 1.0 . Only one out-of-service code value is allowed per the E5-cTDM-4 card. Selecting the code transmitted during out-of-service period out-of-service <00–FF> The hexadecimal number is in the range of 0 to FF (two digits). The selected out-of-service code is also sent. and loopback status. no loopback deactivates loopback. administrative/operational status.Chapter 6 Ports Task Activating BER testing.  To display E1 port status: • At the config>port>e1(slot/port/tributary)#prompt. The E1 port status is displayed. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Displaying Statistics Internal E1 ports of ETX-5300A collect performance monitoring data at the path level.  To display the internal E1 port statistics: 1. Verify that statistics collection is enabled (pm-enable) for the E1 port. 2. At the prompt config>slot>port>e1 (<slot/port/tributary>)#, enter show statistics followed by parameters listed below. E1 statistics are displayed. The counters are described in Table 6-5. Task Displaying statistics Command show statistics {current | interval <intervalnum 1..96> | current-day | previous-day | allintervals | all} Comments • • • current –Displays the current interval statistics interval (1–96) – Displays statistics for a selected interval current-day – Displays statistics for current day starting from 12:00 midnight previous-day – Displays statistics for 24 hours before last 12:00 midnight all-intervals – Displays statistics for all existing intervals (up to 96) all –Displays all statistics in succession: current > all intervals > current day > previous day • • • ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(4/1/1)# show statistics current Current --------------------------------------------------------------Time Elapsed (Sec) : 0 Valid Intervals : 0 Path --------------------------------------------------------------CV : 0 Rx Frames Slip : 0 ES : 0 UAS : 0 BES : 0 FC : 0 SES : 0 SEFS : 0 Note For unframed E1 ports, only FC counter is available. Table 6-9. Internal E1 Statistics Parameter CV Description Number of CRC-4 errors ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 E1 Ports 6-53 Chapter 6 Ports Parameter Rx Frames Slip ES UAS Description Number of received Frames Slip events Installation and Operation Manual Number of seconds during which at least one FE or CS was detected or a SEF defect or an AIS defect was present Number of seconds for which the E1 path is unavailable. The E1 path becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous SESs. The 10 SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the E1 path becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SESs. The 10 seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time. Number of seconds during which at least 2 and no more than 804 CRC-4 errors were detected while neither OOF nor AIS defects were present. Number of E1 path failure events. A failure event begins when a LOF failure or an AIS failure is declared, and ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period in which it begins. Number of seconds during which 805 or more CRC-4 errors were detected or an OOF defect was present Number of seconds during which at least one OOF defect or an AIS defect was present BES FC SES SEFS  To clear statistics: • At the prompt config>slot>port>t1 (<slot/port/tributary>)#, enter clear-statistics. Testing Internal E1 Ports Diagnostic tools at the E1 level include: • • Local and remote loopback for checking connections to E1 ports Bit Error Rate Test for measuring the quality of the E1 line. Running Loopbacks ETX-5300A supports activation of local and remote loopbacks at the E1 level. You can initiate a local loopback on a single E1 port and remote loopbacks on any number of E1 ports on an E5-cTDM-4 card at a time. E1 Port Diagnostics section above details signal paths when local and remote loopbacks are activated.  To activate a loopback: 1. Navigate to configure port e1 <slot/port/tributary> to select the E1 port to test. The config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt is displayed. 2. At the config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt, enter loopback, followed by loopback type (local or remote) and its duration 1–60 min.  To deactivate a loopback: • In the config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt, enter no loopback. 6-54 E1 Ports ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports BER Testing Bit Error Rate test is used for measuring the quality of the E1 line.  To run BER testing: 1. Navigate to configure port e1 <slot/port/tributary> to select the E1 port to test. The config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt is displayed. 2. At the config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt, enter bert, followed by pattern pattern_type and inject-error none or error_type.  To display BERT results: 1. Make sure that BERT is running. 2. At the config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt, enter show bert. The BERT results are displayed. ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# show bert Status : Sync Bit Error Count : 0 Pattern : None Inject Error : 10e-3 Run Time (Sec) : 10 ES (Sec) : 0 Sync Loss (Sec) : 0 Result : OK  To reset counters while BERT is running • At the config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt, enter clear-bertcounters.  To deactivate BER testing: • At the config>port>e1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt, enter no bert. Example  To configure internal E1 interface: • • • • • • E1 name – e1_1_1_1 Line type – G.732N Idle code – 0xFF Transmit clock source – Loopback Performance monitoring is enabled Administratively enabled. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 E1 Ports 6-55 Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A# configure port e1 1/1/1 ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# name e1_1_1_1 ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# line-type g732n ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# idle-code 0xFF ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# tx-clock-source loopback ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# pm-enable ETX-5300A>config>port>e1(1/1/1)# no shutdown Configuration Errors Table 6-10 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Table 6-10. Configuration Error Messages Message Cannot change line type when service is defined Cannot change loopback type, disable the loopback first Invalid CV threshold value Invalid ES threshold value Invalid SES threshold value Invalid SEFS threshold value Invalid CSS threshold value Invalid UAS threshold value Invalid LES threshold value Invalid Dsx1IdleCode value Invalid loopback timeout value Description Line type cannot be changed if a pseudowire service has been defined on a port Loopback type cannot be changed while the loopback is active CV threshold value is out of range (0–16383) ES threshold value is out of range (0–900) SES threshold value is out of range (0–900) SEFS threshold value is out of range (0–900) CSS threshold value is out of range (0–900) UAS threshold value is out of range (0–900) LES threshold value is out of range (0–900) Invalid idle code value Loopback duration value is out of range (1–60 min) 6.4 T1 Ports Internal T1 ports of the E5-cTDM-4 cards deliver pseudowire services, emulating PDH traffic over PSN. Each internal T1 is permanently mapped to a VT-1.5 channel, handling its payload in accordance with the defined ITU-T framing mode and signaling format. Standards and MIBs The T1 interface complies with ANSI T1.403-1989, AT&T Pub. 54016, AT&T TR-62411 and ANSI T1.107.4 standards. 6-56 T1 Ports ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Factory Defaults ETX-5300A is supplied with all E1 ports disabled. Other parameter defaults are listed in the table below. Parameter line-type path-interval-threshold cv path-interval-threshold es path-interval-threshold ses path-interval-threshold sefs path-interval-threshold css path-interval-threshold uas idle-code out-of-service tx-clock-source loopback trail-mode Default Value unframed 0 80 10 0 0 10 7F 00 loopback no loopback terminated Functional Description T1 Line Signal The basic T1 line signal is coded using the alternate mark inversion (AMI) rules. The AMI format cannot transmit long strings of “0”s because such strings do not carry timing information. Therefore, the AMI signal source must generate a signal with a guaranteed minimum of “1” density. The minimum average “1” density required by the applicable standards is 1:8. Therefore, when a T1 signal is transmitted over an AMI line, each frame timeslot must include at least one “1” bit. This effectively reduces user data rate to 56 kbps per timeslot, and precludes the provisioning of clear channel capability (CCC). This problem is circumvented by using modified line codes that perform zero suppression by substituting special codes for long “0” strings. The generally accepted zero suppression methods are B7 and B8ZS. • With B7, the maximum length of “0” strings in the user data must not exceed seven zeros. (When a longer string is detected, the seventh bit is changed to “one”, to meet the minimum “1” density requirement and thus ensure that the remote end can properly recover the clock signal.). Although this requirement can be fulfilled in many applications, it does not provide 64 kbps clear channel capability. Therefore, when the B7 line code is used, inband management is not supported. Only the B8ZS zero suppression method provides clear channel capability, and the “1” density requirement no longer restricts user data characteristics. This means that each T1 frame timeslot can support the full 64 kbps. T1 Ports 6-57 • ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual Since the AMI coding does not affect the signal transmitted to the line, it is also called transparent coding. This emphasizes the fact that although the other methods are also transparent to user’s data, perfect transparency is achieved only when the zero-string substitution sequences are correctly recognized. Thus, the other methods are more sensitive to transmission errors (transmission errors may affect the decoding of zero-string substitution sequences). T1 Signal Structure The T1 line operates at a nominal rate of 1.544 Mbps. The data transferred over the T1 line is organized in frames. The T1 frame format is shown in Figure 6-17. 8 Bits/Channel Byte Organization (D4 Frame - See NOTE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B Other Frames Frame 6 Frame 12 Bit B Conveys Signaling Information Frame Organization Ft C H C H 24 Channels/Frame or 1 2 Frame = 193 Bits Fs CH 13 CH 24 Multiframe Organization FR FR 1 2 FR 7 Multiframe SF (D4) 12 Frames ESF: 24 Frames FR FR 11 12 NOTE: In addition, ESF has a C-bit in frame 18 and a D-bit in frame 24 Figure 6-17. T1 Frame Format Each T1 frame includes 193 bits. 192 bits are organized in 24 timeslots of eight bits each that carry the payload data. An additional timeslotconsisting of one bit (the F-bit) carries framing and supervision information. As a result, the data rate supported by each payload timeslot is 64 kbps. The data rate of the framing slot is 8 kbps. The T1 frame does not include a dedicated timeslot for the transfer of channel signaling. When end-to-end transfer of signaling is necessary, a technique called “robbed-bit signaling” is used. The robbed-bit is the least significant bit (bit 8) of the channel byte, and is actually “robbed” only once in every six frames. In order to enhance link/system supervision capabilities, the frames are organized in larger patterns, called super-frames. Two types of super-frames are used: • • SF (also called D4), consists of 12 T1 frames. Extended SF (ESF), consists of 24 T1 frames The SF format provides limited supervision capabilities, such as end-to-end reporting of local loss-of-signal (yellow alarm), and line loopback. The ESF format provides improved supervision capabilities, and allows better utilization of the 8 kbps framing timeslots. The major advantage of the ESF format is that it supports on-line link performance monitoring (by means of a 2 kbps Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) channel) and also provides a 4 kbps end-to-end supervision and control data link. The data link can be used for performance monitoring and failure reporting, for activation of maintenance loopbacks, and for transmission of various commands to the far end equipment. 6-58 T1 Ports ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports The implementation of the multiframing format is based on the use of various F-bit patterns. The F-bit pattern is used to perform three functions: • • Framing Pattern Sequence (FPS) – defines frame and multiframe boundaries. Facility Data Link (FDL) – allows transfer of supervisory data, e.g. alarms, error performance, test loop commands, etc. to be passed through the T1 link. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) – allows the measurement of the bit error rate and enhances the reliability of the framing algorithm. • The F-bit pattern defines the structure of frames and multiframes. In the D4 (SF) frame format, the F-bit of consecutive frames is alternately interpreted as an Ft bit (terminal framing bit) or Fs bit (frame signaling bit). • • Ft pattern: alternating 0s and 1s, defines the frame boundaries. Fs pattern: fixed 001110 pattern, defines the multiframe boundaries, so that one frame may be distinguished from another. In particular, the Fs pattern is needed so that frames 6 and 12 may be identified for the recovery of signaling bits. In the ESF frame format, the multiframe structure is extended to 24 frames, but the frame and channel structure are the same as in the D4 (SF) format. T1 Alarm Conditions The basic alarm conditions are the red alarm and the yellow alarm. Note that with the ESF format, the FDL link can be used for more sophisticated status transmissions, in accordance with the ANSI Standard T1.403-1989 and AT&T Pub. 54016. • Red Alarm. A red alarm is generated when the local unit has lost frame synchronization for more than 2.5 consecutive seconds, or the bit error rate -2 exceeds 10 for 2.5 consecutive seconds. Loss of frame synchronization may be caused either by Fs or Ft errors, by the reception of an AIS signal, or by the loss of the input signal (receive data remains zero for 31 consecutive bits). In accordance with AT&T TR-62411, a system automatically recovers synchronization when there has been a period of 10 to 20 consecutive seconds free of the loss of sync condition. Yellow Alarm. A yellow alarm is sent from the remote unit to inform the local unit that a red alarm exists at the remote end. Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal, and is used to maintain line signal synchronization when an alarm condition occurs in the equipment that supplies the line signal. • • T1 Port Diagnostics Diagnostic tools at the T1 level include: • • Local and remote loopback for checking connections toT1 ports Code-activated local and remote loopbacks. These loopbacks are activated and deactivated by the detection of user-specified patterns in the TDM data, a function enabled and configured as part of the physical parameters of the port. Bit Error Rate Test for measuring the quality of the T1 line. • ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 T1 Ports 6-59 Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual Note You can run only one regular or inband-activated local loopback per the E5-cTDM-4 card. Local Loopback Figure 6-15 shows the signal paths during a local loopback on an internal T1 port. Internal T1 TDM Framer Mapper PSN Figure 6-18. Local Loopback on Internal T1 Port, Signal Paths As shown in Figure 6-15, when a local loopback is activated on a local internal T1 port, the receive signal of the port is connected by the port T1 framer to the input of the port transmit path. The signal is then returned toward the remote side through the port packet processor, the remaining sections of the local transmit path, and the link through the packet-switched network. While the loopback is activated, the transmit signal arriving from the local end user equipment is ignored, but the local T1 port continues sending the received signal to the local end user equipment. To ensure that the remote equipment is capable of providing a good signal, the local loopback should be activated on the local T1 port only after checking that the remote end user equipment connected to the tested T1 port operates normally while its own local loopback is activated. While the local loopback is activated on the local port, the remote end user equipment must receive its own signal, and thus it must be frame-synchronized. This test fully checks the operation of the local T1 path serving the tested port. It also checks the signal paths that end at the corresponding T1 port, including the transmission through the packet network connecting the remote equipment to ETX-5300A. Remote Loopback Figure 6-16 shows the signal paths during a remote loopback on an internal E1 port. As shown in Figure 6-16, when a remote loopback is activated on an internal E1 port, the T1 framer of that port returns the transmit signal via the receive path of the same port. The transmit signal is received from the local end user equipment served by the tested port, through the corresponding E5-cTDM-4 card. While the loopback is activated, the signal received from the remote T1 port is ignored. The signal received from the local end user equipment remains connected to the packet processor and it is transmitted to the remote T1 port. To ensure that the user equipment is capable of providing a good signal, the remote loopback should be activated on T1 port only after checking that the local end user equipment operates normally while its own local loopback is activated. 6-60 T1 Ports ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Internal T1 TDM Framer Mapper Chapter 6 Ports PSN Figure 6-19. Remote Loopback on Internal T1 Port, Signal Paths While the remote loopback is activated on the local T1 port, the local end user equipment must receive its own signal, and thus it must be frame-synchronized. This test checks the transmission path between the local end user equipment to the local port, including the transmission plant and SONET equipment connecting the user equipment to the ETX-5300A, and part of the internal ETX-5300A signal path that handle the routing of the signals up to the tested T1 port, including the SONET mapper of the E5-cTDM-4 card. BER Testing A BERT typically consists of a test pattern generator and a receiver that is set to the same pattern. BER testers can be used together at two ends of transmission link to check data integrity in both directions. Alternatively, a single bit tester can be used at one end of the link with a loopback activated at the remote end to return the transmitted data. BER testing can be activated on the entire internal port or on the selected timeslots with or without the injection of errors randomly or at a constant rate. Multiple BERTs can be run simultaneously on separate T1 ports. Inband Loopbacks ETX-5300A supports code-activated local and remote loopbacks. These loopback functions are activated and deactivated by the detection of user-specified patterns in the TDM data. When a T1 port is configured to activate a local loopback in response to the configured pattern sent using PW OAM messaging, it monitors the incoming TDM data stream: • • • To activate the loopback, the user equipment sends the configured activation pattern several times in sequence. When the configured activation pattern is detected, the port activates its local loopback. The user equipment detects the activation of the loopback because it starts receiving the loopback activation pattern. After detecting the loopback, the equipment can stop transmitting the activation pattern, and send any other desired test signals. To deactivate the loopback and return the port to normal operation, the user equipment sends the configured deactivation pattern several times in sequence, until it detects the deactivation of the local loopback. • ETX-5300A supports the following inband loopback activation methods: • CSU, according to ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR 54016. This method is relevant for framed modes only. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 T1 Ports 6-61 Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual • • NIU (FAC1 and FAC2), according to Telecordia GR-312. This method is relevant for framed and unframed modes. Custom, user-defined 3–8 bit long loopback activation and deactivation patterns. This method is relevant for framed and unframed modes. Configuring Internal T1 Interfaces  To configure internal T1 parameters: 1. Navigate to configure port t1 <slot/port/tributary> to select the SDH/SONET port to configure. The config>port>t1>(slot/port/tributary)# prompt is displayed. 2. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Note An internal T1 port becomes active only if at least one enabled pseudowire with a valid cross-connection is assigned to the port. Command name <string> Comments no name removes the name Task Assigning short description to port Masking/unmasking alarms generated by the internal T1 Specifying T1 framing mode no shutdown shutdown masks alarms generated by the internal T1 line-type {unframed | esf | sf} When using one of the framed modes, you select specific timeslots for transport by configuring the appropriate bundle at the pwe# prompt. The specific timeslots are selected using the pw-tdm command at the cross-connect# prompt. Enabling/disabling performance monitoring data collection Setting path CV, ES, SES, SEFS, CSS and UAS counter value during a 15-min interval starting from which a trap is sent Controlling inband loopback activation pm-enable no pm-enable path-interval-threshold [cv <cv-value 0– 16383>] [es <es-value 0–900>] [ses <sesvalue 0–900>] [sefs <sefs-value 0–900>] [css <css-value 0–900>] [uas <uas-value 0–900>] inband-loopback {local | remote} csu inband-loopback {local | remote} niu {fac1 | fac2} inband-loopback {local | remote} program <loop-up-code> <loop-up-len> <loop-down-code> <loop-down-len> no inband-loopback no pm-enable disables PM data collection no inband-loopback disables inband loopback. One loopback activation and one loopback deactivation code are allowed per the E5-cTDM-4 card. To activate an inband loopback in a far-end unit, you must enable pseudowire OAM functionality. 6-62 T1 Ports ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Task Activating BER testing, defining test pattern and error injection Command bert [pattern {2e-10 | 2e-15 | 2e-20 | 2e23 | 511 | 2047| qrss | 2e-11}] [inject-error {none | single | 10e-1 | 10e-2 | 10e-3 | 10e-4 | 10e-5 | 10e-6 | 10e-7}] no bert Specifying the code transmitted to fill unused timeslots in T1 frames idle-code { 00 to FF (hexa) } Comments Chapter 6 Ports no bert disables BER testing This parameter is valid for framed modes only. Only one idle code value is allowed per the E5-cTDM-4 card. Selecting the code transmitted during out-of-service period out-of-service <00–FF> The hexadecimal number is in the range of 0 to FF (two digits) The selected out-of-service code is also sent during out-of-service periods instead of the external data stream when the unframed mode is used. Only one out-of-service code value is allowed per the E5-cTDM-4 card. Controls the propagation of alarm indications Selects the reference source used by the transmit path of this port Activating diagnostic loopback trail-mode {terminated | extended} See Alarm Indications and Fault Propagation in the TDM Pseudowires of Chapter 8 tx-clock-source {domain <domain-num> | loopback | pw } loopback { local | remote } [ duration <1– 60>] no loopback Loopback duration is within 1–60 minute range no loopback deactivates it. See Displaying Status See Displaying Statistics Displaying port status Displaying port statistics show status show statistics Displaying Status You can display current status of any internal T1 port on an E5-cTDM-4 card.  To display E1 port status: • At the config>port>t1(slot/port/tributary)#prompt, enter show status. The T1 port status is displayed. ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(1/1/1)# show status Name : T1-1-1-1 Administrative Status : Down Operational Status : Down Loopback : Off The E1 interface status screens provide information on the port name, administrative/operational status, and loopback status. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 T1 Ports 6-63 Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual Displaying Statistics Internal T1 ports of ETX-5300A collect performance monitoring data at path level.  To display the internal T1 port statistics: 1. Verify that statistics collection is enabled (pm-enable) for the T1 port. 2. At the prompt config>slot>port>t1 (<slot/port/tributary>)#, enter show statistics followed by parameters listed below. T1 statistics are displayed. The counters are described in Table 6-11. Task Displaying statistics Command show statistics {current | interval <intervalnum 1..96> | current-day | previous-day | allintervals | all} Comments • • • current –Displays the current interval statistics interval (1–96) – Displays statistics for a selected interval current-day – Displays statistics for current day starting from 12:00 midnight previous-day – Displays statistics for 24 hours before last 12:00 midnight all-intervals – Displays statistics for all existing intervals (up to 96) all –Displays all statistics in succession: current > all intervals > current day > previous day • • • ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(4/1/1)# show statistics current Current --------------------------------------------------------------Time Elapsed (Sec) : 0 Valid Intervals : 0 Path --------------------------------------------------------------CV : 0 Rx Frames Slip : 0 ES : 0 UAS : 0 BES : 0 FC : 0 SES : 0 SEFS : 0 Note For unframed T1 ports, only FC counter is available. Table 6-11. Internal T1 Statistics Parameter CV Rx Frames Slip 6-64 T1 Ports Description Number of CRC-4 errors Number of received Frames Slip events ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Parameter ES UAS Description Chapter 6 Ports Number of seconds during which at least one FE or CS was detected or a SEF defect or an AIS defect was present Number of seconds for which the T1 path is unavailable. The T1 path becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous SESs. The 10 SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the T1 path becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SESs. The 10 seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time. Number of seconds during which at least 2 and no more than 804 CRC-4 errors were detected while neither OOF nor AIS defects were present. Number of T1 path failure events. A failure event begins when a LOF failure or an AIS failure is declared, and ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period in which it begins. Number of seconds during which 805 or more CRC-4 errors were detected or an OOF defect was present Number of seconds during which at least one OOF defect or an AIS defect was present BES FC SES SEFS  To clear statistics: • At the prompt config>slot>port>t1 (<slot/port/tributary>)#, enter clear-statistics. Example  To configure internal T1 interface: • • • • • • T1 name – t1_1_1_1 Line type – ESF Idle code – 0xFF Transmit clock source – Loopback Performance monitoring is enabled Administratively enabled. ETX-5300A# configure port t1 1/1/1 ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(1/1/1)# name t1_1_1_1 ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(1/1/1)# line-type esf ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(1/1/1)# idle-code 0xFF ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(1/1/1)# tx-clock-source loopback ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(1/1/1)# pm-enable ETX-5300A>config>port>t1(1/1/1)# no shutdown Configuration Errors Table 6-12 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 T1 Ports 6-65 Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual Table 6-12. Configuration Error Messages Message Cannot change line type when service is defined Cannot change loopback type, disable the loopback first Invalid Dsx1InbandLoopLength value Invalid CV threshold value Invalid inband loopDown length Invalid ES threshold value Invalid SES threshold value Invalid SEFS threshold value Invalid CSS threshold value Invalid UAS threshold value Invalid LES threshold value Invalid Dsx1IdleCode value Invalid loopback timeout value Description Line type cannot be changed if a pseudowire service has been defined on a port Loopback type cannot be changed while the loopback is active Invalid length of inband loopback activation code CV threshold value is out of range (0–16383) Invalid length of inband loopback deactivation code ES threshold value is out of range (0–900) SES threshold value is out of range (0–900) SEFS threshold value is out of range (0–900) CSS threshold value is out of range (0–900) UAS threshold value is out of range (0–900) LES threshold value is out of range (0–900) Invalid idle code value Loopback duration value is out of range (1–60 min) 6.5 Service Aggregation Group (SAG) SAG (Service Aggregation Group) is a logical port (management entity) that represents a physical connection between I/O and main Ethernet cards. Benefits SAGs represent blocks of I/O card ports with ability to aggregate their flows into Service Attachment Points (SAPs), supporting pre-forwarding scheduling and shaping. Factory Defaults By default, two SAGs exist per I/O Ethernet card. Functional Description GbE and 10GbE cards introduce logical ports that serve as management entities (SAG) and flow aggregation points (SAP). Figure 6-20 illustrates Ethernet I/O card schematics. The SAPs aggregate several I/O ingress flows to a single forwarding path (E-Line or E-LAN) towards the main card and help avoid re-classification to different forwarding paths from the same SAG. 6-66 Service Aggregation Group (SAG) ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports Flow SAP 1-10 GbE ports on E5-GbE-20 1 10GbE port on E5-10GbE-2 SAG Flow SAP Flow SAP 11-20 GbE ports on E5-GbE-20 2 10GbE port on E5-10GbE-2 SAG Flow SAP Figure 6-20. I/O Ethernet Card Each I/O Ethernet card has two SAGs, serving 1–10 and 11–20 ports on E5-GbE-20 card respectively. Likewise, SAG 1 serves port 1 and SAG 2 serves port 2 on E5-10GbE-2 card. Each SAG includes 512 SAPs, which aggregate ingress flows from I/O card ports. Configuring SAGs  To configure a SAG: 1. Navigate to config>port. 2. Enter sag <slot/port>. The config>port>sag(slot/port)# prompt is displayed. 3. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Task Associating SAG with queue group Assigning a name to SAG Command queue-group < queue-group-name> name <string> Comments no queue-group removes SAG association with the queue group no name removes SAG name Example  To configure a SAG: • Slot 1 ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Service Aggregation Group (SAG) 6-67 Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual • • • Port 1 Name – SAG_1_1 Queue group – q_group_SAG_2_level_default. ETX-5300A>config>port>sag 1/1 ETX-5300A>config>port>sag(1/1)# name SAG_1_1 ETX-5300A>config>port>sag(1/1)# queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default Configuration Errors Table 6-13 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Table 6-13. Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal ingress/egress SAP number Cannot bind SAG queue group to Ethernet port or LAG Cannot bind level-3 queue group to SAG Shaping profile is bound to level-1 SAG queue block Description Maximum number of ingress/egress SAPs (512) has been reached A queue group that has already been bound to a SAG cannot be used for an Ethernet group or LAG A level-3 queue group cannot be bound to a SAG Level-1 queue block bound to SAG cannot include shaper 6.6 Service Virtual Interface (SVI) Service Virtual Interface (SVI) is a logical port that is used for binding flows to bridge ports, router interfaces or Layer-2 TDM pseudowires. Factory Defaults By default, ETX-5300A does not have SVIs. Functional Description SVIs are used as ingress and egress ports for flows, serving as intermediaries for bridges and routers, which must comply with standards of their own (VLAN domains for bridge ports or IP address for router interfaces). They do not have physical port attributes. They also serve as aggregation points for TDM PWs (see Figure 6-22). ETX-5300A supports up to 4000 SVIs. 6-68 Service Virtual Interface (SVI) ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Ports ETX-5300A LB IP Router RIF SVI SVI SVI User BP Bridge User SVI BP BP SVI NET BP BP SVI OOB Figure 6-21. Router and Bridge Connections with SVIs Identified SVI Flow I/O Card STM-1/OC-3 Port BP Bridge BP MEF-8 Pseudowire SVI Flow BP SVI BP SVI MEF-8 Pseudowire SVI Flow TDM Pseudowire Processing Figure 6-22. Layer-2 Pseudowire Connection Configuring SVIs  To configure an SVI: 1. Navigate to config>port. 2. Enter svi <svi_number>, followed by the SVI type (bridge | pw | router), depending on whether you intend to attach a flow to bridge, pseudowire or router. The config>port>svi(number)# prompt is displayed. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Service Virtual Interface (SVI) Main Card Ethernet Ports MEF-8 Pseudowires SVI BP SVI 6-69 Table 6-14. 3.0 . Configuration Error Messages Message SVI cannot be created: max number of SVIs has been reached SVI number is out of range Delete failed: SVI is bound Delete failed: SVI is used by flow SVI is not configured Modify failed: only bridge-type SVI can be bound Modify failed: SVI is already bound to another bridge port Modify failed: flow is bound to SVI Description SVI cannot be created because the maximum number of SVIs per chassis (4000 interfaces) has been reached SVI number cannot be used because it is out of allowed range SVI cannot be deleted because it is currently in use SVI cannot be deleted because it has flows bound to it Binding to the SVI failed because the SVI does not exist SVI cannot be modified because only bridge-type SVIs can be bound to this entity SVI cannot be modified because it is already bound to another bridge port SVI cannot be modified because flows are bound to it 6-70 Service Virtual Interface (SVI) ETX-5300A Ver. deletes the SVI. Task Assigning a name to SVI Command name <string> Comments no name removes SVI name Example  To configure SVI: • • • Number – 1 Type – bridge Name – svi_1_bridge. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.Chapter 6 Ports Installation and Operation Manual Note no svi <svi_number> entered at the config>port prompt. 1. ETX-5300A>config>port>svi 1 bridge ETX-5300A>config>port>svi(1)# name svi_1_bridge Configuration Errors Table 6-14 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. the chassis has two slots dedicated to this type of module.1 Main Card Redundancy Redundancy for the ETX-5300A control subsystem is supported only when the ETX-5300A chassis includes two operational main cards. ETX-5300A provides 1:1 main card protection. and the other one as secondary. when one of the cards is defined as primary. 7. and controls the timing subsystem.0 Main Card Redundancy 7-1 . This chapter describes port and service protection mechanisms (LAG. Functional Description Only one main card per chassis is necessary. thereby providing a hot-standby capability for the ETX-5300A system control functions. The secondary main card stores a copy of the configuration database. Benefits Main card redundancy with automatic switchover ensures continuous service provisioning. ERP and APS). Timing system redundancy is detailed in Chapter 9. performs data plane forwarding.8032 ring (ERP) APS for STM-1/OC-3 ports. see Chapter 2) Management and timing system (redundant main cards) Port and service:    LAG G. however. as well as main card redundancy.Chapter 7 Resiliency The modular. • • • Power system (redundant power supplies. serving as a hot standby. If only one is installed. 1. ETX-5300A Ver. The primary card manages the chassis with its I/Os and peripherals. it is automatically selected and redundancy cannot be activated. The second slot can be used by a redundant main card. distributed architecture of ETX-5300A enables redundancy at different levels of the network and provides a resilient system with no single point of failure. It provides a hot-standby capability for the ETX-5300A management and timing subsystems. The off-line card can take over at any time without disrupting system operation.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual When a second main card is installed. At the config>protection>main-card# prompt. The off-line main card is automatically updated by the online card with all the configuration and status data.  To switch between main cards: 1. Navigate to configure protection main-card. last switchover time and reason. enter show status. the two modules operate as a master/slave pair. 7-2 Main Card Redundancy ETX-5300A Ver. The switch-over to the off-line card occurs automatically when one of the following occurs: • • • • • • Extraction of the primary main card Power failure of the primary main card Diagnostics indication primary main card failure User-initiated or automatic reset of the primary main card A manual switch command Administratively disabling of the primary main card. The config>protection>main-card# prompt is displayed. Configuring Main Card Redundancy When two main cards are installed in the chassis. Navigate to configure protection main-card. 2. 2. and the other is off-line and serves as a hot standby.0 . The config>protection>main-card# prompt is displayed. ETX-5300A#config protection main-card ETX-5300A#config>protection>main-card# manual-switch Displaying Main Card Protection Status  To display main card protection status: 1. Only the online main card communicates with the management station/terminal and actively manages the ETX-5300A system. At the config>protection>main-card# prompt. enter manual-switch to toggle between main card A and B. 1. redundancy status. you can manually switch between active and standby main cards. ETX-5300A#config protection main-card ETX-5300A#config>protection>main-card# show status Active Card : main-a Primary Card : main-a Redundancy Status : OK Last Switchover Time : Last Switchover Reason : none The main card protection status screen provides information on the currently active and primary main card. one module is the active (online) module. The two ports must be connected to the same switch/router.3-2005. LAG uses 1:1 distribution mechanism. ETX-5300A supports up to 44 LAGs per chassis. Manual switch cannot be performed: Mate card doesn't exist. Standards and MIBs IEEE 802. Factory Defaults By default. Using link aggregation inherently provides redundancy.2 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) Ethernet link aggregation technique allows one or more links to be combined to form a Link Aggregation Group (LAG). the traffic is not disrupted and communication is maintained. in which case all traffic is sent through the other link. 1.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-3 . ETX-5300A supports LAG for up to two members. ETX-5300A Ver. if one of the GbE ports fails. LAG can be used for Ethernet card/port protection and for bandwidth expansion. Description Manual switch has failed because the secondary main card is not operational Manual switch has failed because only one main card is installed in the chassis 7. consisting of Ethernet ports located on the same or different cards.3-2005 Benefits Ethernet link aggregation ensures increased service availability. Configuration Error Messages Message Manual switch cannot be performed: Mate card's operational status is down. using link aggregation in accordance with IEEE 802. If a link within a LAG fails or is replaced. the other can continue transferring traffic. Functional Description The two Ethernet ports can be operated as a single logical interface. no LAG groups exist.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency Configuration Errors Table 7-1 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Link failure is detected by sensing the loss of valid signals. Table 7-1. or receiving a failure report via Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) if applicable. Rx Tx Tx Rx LAG Main or I/O Card Figure 7-1. LACP can be enabled or disabled by the user. the LACP is permanently enabled. when the LAG ports belong to the same 10-port group (ports 1–10 or ports 11–20). In this mode. The LACP uses the STBY option to force the opposite party to receive and transmit on the same port. when the LAG ports belong to the different 10-port groups. data flow redundancy can be provided at a card and port levels. In this LAG scheme. but only one of them transmits data. and for the E5-10GBE-2 card. the two aggregation group members reside on the same E5-MC-4. the two aggregation group members reside on different E5-MC-4. 1. both ports receive traffic at the same time.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A supports LAG for up to two members. the ports must belong to: • • The same card type (LAG between ports residing on I/O and main cards is not allowed) The same 10-port group on E5-GBE-20 cards:   • Permitted – port 2/1 (port 1 on E5-GBE-20 card in slot 2) and port 3/3 (port 3 on E5-GBE-20 card in slot 3) Not permitted – Port 2/1 and port 3/12. Inter-Card LAG With inter-card LAG. Intra-Card LAG With intra-card LAG. E5-GBE-20 or E5-10GBE-2 card. For E5-GBE-20 card. The same port on E5-10GBE-2 cards:   Permitted – port 1/1 (port 1 on E5-10GBE-2 card in slot 1) and port 3/1 (port 1 on E5-10GBE-2 card in slot 3) Not permitted – Port 2/1 and port 3/2. E5-10GBE-2 or E5-GBE-20 card. consisting of Ethernet ports located on the same or different cards.0 . However. 7-4 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver. Intra-Card LAG For E5-GBE-20 card. 1. Service flows to and from the LAG. discard it. In this type of link aggregation LACP is always enabled.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency Main or I/O Card Rx Tx LAG Tx Main or I/O Card Rx Figure 7-2. only one port receives and transmits traffic. LACP Traffic To ensure correct distribution of LACP traffic. classification key. The flow must have the following attributes: • • • Untagged classification Ingress port – LAG Egress port – according to application requirements. LAG serves as a logical port with all relevant port attributes (queue block profile. The second LAG member is forced by LACP to be out-of-sync. Configuring LAG This section explains how to define a link aggregation group (LAG) and enable link aggregation control protocol (LACP). ETX-5300A supports up to 44 LAGs. you must configure flow with an L2CP profile with peer action for the LACP address (01-80-c2-00-00-02). If you use the flow only to peer the LACP frames and do not need to forward the untagged traffic. L2CP profile.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-5 . etc). Figure 7-3 illustrates flows in inter-card LAG between two main cards. LACP flow can be optionally dropped. ETX-5300A Ver. use the LAG as their ingress/egress port. LAG is defined with two Ethernet ports bound to the group. using the drop command on the flow. Inter-Card LAG When an inter-card LAG is active. 0 . belonging to the first 10-port group (SAP slot/1/x) LACP Flow LAG Port 1/3 SAP 1/1/X Port 1/2 LACP Flow Data Flow Any Port Data Flow SAP 1/1/X Any Port Data Flow Figure 7-4. LAG-SAP Connection in Intra-Card LAG 7-6 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver. if unnecessary Figure 7-3. follow these guidelines for establishing flows between the LAG and the SAP: • Intra-card LAG: Connect LAG to a SAP. LAG/SAP Connection When configuring LAG between ports on the E5-GBE-20 or E5-10GBE-2 cards. LAG between Main Cards Special Considerations for I/O Cards This section describes special requirements that must be followed when creating LAG on I/O cards. 1.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual Port A/X LAG Port B/X Flow 1* (LACP) Flow 2 (Data) Flow 3 (Data) Any Port * Flow 1 can be dropped. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency • Inter-card LAG for E5-GBE-20 cards:  LAG between ports belonging to the first ten-port group (1–10): Connect LAG to a SAP. LAG-SAP Connection in Inter-Card LAG over Ports 1 and 1 in E5-10GBE-2 Cards ETX-5300A Ver. belonging to the first 10-port group (SAP slot/1/x) LACP Flow LAG Port 2/1 SAP 1/1/X Port 1/1 LACP Flow Data Flow Any Port Data Flow SAP 1/1/X Any Port Data Flow Figure 7-7. LAG-SAP Connection in Inter-Card LAG over Ports 1–10 in E5-GBE-20 Cards  LAG between ports belonging to the second ten-port group (11–20): Connect LAG to a SAP. belonging to the second 10-port group (SAP slot/2/x) LACP Flow LAG Port 2/12 SAP 1/2/X Port 1/11 LACP Flow Data Flow Any Port Data Flow SAP 1/2/X Any Port Data Flow Figure 7-6. 1.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-7 . LAG-SAP Connection in Inter-Card LAG over Ports 11–20 in E5-GBE-20 Cards • Inter-card LAG for E5-10GBE-2 cards:  LAG between ports 1 and 1: Connect LAG to a SAP. belonging to the first 10-port group (SAP slot/1/x) LACP Flow LAG Port 2/3 SAP 1/1/X Port 1/2 LACP Flow Data Flow Any Port Data Flow SAP 1/1/X Any Port Data Flow Figure 7-5. point-to-point flows from a LAG to a port which is in the same 10-port group as one of the LAG members is not allowed. These SAPs serve as internal peers for SAPs which are used by the LACP and data flows. Flow 1 (LACP) LAG Port 3/2 SAP 1/1/1 Port 1/2 Flow 2 (LACP) Flow 4 (Data) Any Port Flow 3 (Data) SAP 1/1/2 Port 1/15 Flow 5 (Data) Figure 7-9. belonging to the second 10-port group (SAP slot/2/x) LACP Flow LAG Port 2/2 SAP 1/2/X Port 1/2 LACP Flow Data Flow Any Port Data Flow SAP 1/2/X Any Port Data Flow Figure 7-8. 1. have no flows attached to them).e. For example: • Permitted: Flow from the LAG on port 1/2 and port 3/2 to port 1/15. LAG-SAP Connection in Inter-Card LAG over Ports 2 and 2 in E5-10GBE-2 Cards Note • The same rules apply to flows carrying LACP traffic from LAG to SAP. Permitted PtP Flow for LAG 7-8 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver. In the same manner.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual  LAG between ports 2 and 2: Connect LAG to a SAP. • Always leave the mirror SAPs located on the second I/O card unused (i.0 . Point-to-Point Flows ETX-5300A does not support point-to-point flows between ports that belong to the same 10-port group. If the admin-key setting does not match the port type. 2. autonegotiation must be either disabled or configured to a value (rate or capability) matching the admin-key setting.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-9 . Flow 1 (LACP) LAG Port 3/2 SAP 1/1/1 Port 1/2 Flow 2 (LACP) Flow 4 (Data) Any Port Flow 3 (Data) SAP 1/1/2 Port 1/3 Flow 5 (Data) Figure 7-10.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency • Not permitted: Flow from the LAG on port 1/2 and port 3/2 to port 1/3. Navigate to configure port lag 1–44. Not Permitted PtP Flow for LAG  To configure the LAG: 1. 1. LAG configuration will fail. Task Assigning an admin key to the LAG to indicate the port speed Command admin-key { fast-ethernet | giga-ethernet | ten-giga-ethernet } Comments You must define admin key before binding ports to the LAG. Adding a port to the LAG Selecting classification key bind etherent <slot/port > classification-key [ {vlan }] [{ innervlan }] [ { p-bit }] [ { ip-precedence }] [ { ip-dscp }] no bind removes a link from the LAG See the Classification section in Appendix B for description of classification keys available for directly. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. The config>port>lag(1–44)# prompt is displayed.and indirectly-attached ports no l2cp profile removes L2CP profile association Assigning L2CP profile l2cp profile <l2cp profile name> ETX-5300A Ver. For copper ports. 0 . 7-10 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver. The sys-priority parameter Assigning a queue group profile queue-group profile <profile name> See the Traffic Management section in Appendix B for description of queue groups and their elements. All ingress and egress flows attached to the LAG are either disabled or deleted.and indirectly-attached ports. no queue-group removes queue group association Administratively enabling LAG Selecting Ethertype for LAG no shutdown tag-ethernet-type <value> shutdown disables the LAG See the Ethertype section in Appendix B for description of Ethertype values available for directly.Chapter 7 Resiliency Task Enabling LACP and setting LACP parameters: operation mode (active or passive) and time to wait before sending LACP frames (long or short) Command lacp [tx-activity {active | passive}] [tx-speed {slow | fast}] [sys-priority <sys-priority>] Installation and Operation Manual Comments tx-activity: active – LAG interface periodically transmits LACP frames (LACPDUs) to all links with LACP enabled passive – LAG interface does not initiate the LACP exchange. but replies to received LACPDUs. no tag-ethernet-type removes Ethertype association Assigning a name Displaying bind status Displaying LAG status Displaying the LAG members statistics Displaying LAG members status name <string> show bind show status show lacp-statistics ethernet <slot/port> show lacp-status ethernet <slot/port> no name removes LAG name Deleting the LAG Before deleting the LAG verify that: • • • A queue group profile is removed from the LAG. The LAG is disabled. tx-speed: slow – Three seconds fast_– 90 seconds. no lacp disables LACP protocol. 1. 1. ETX-5300A>config>port>lag(1)$ show lacp-status ethernet main-a/1 Ports ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Actor Partner Port Number : 45 167 Port Priority : 1000 1000 System ID : 00-00-01-02-02-03 00-00-09-08-07-44 System Priority : 7 8000 Operational Key : 1 1 Activity : active passive Timeout : short long Synchronized : yes yes Collecting : yes yes Distributing : yes yes The LACP status screen provides information on current state of the local (actor) and remote (partner) interfaces in an LACP exchange. The LAG status is displayed.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-11 . enter show status. The LACP statistic counters are displayed. ETX-5300A Ver. enter show lacp-status ethernet <slot/port>.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency  To delete the LAG: • At the config>port# prompt. Displaying LAG Status You can display current status of existing link aggregation group. Displaying LACP Status You can display the current status of LACP for each LAG member.  To display LAG status: • At the config>port>lag(1–44) #prompt.  To display LACP status: • At the config>port>lag(1–44) #prompt. ETX-5300A>config>port>lag(1) show status Group Name : <lag_1> Administrative Status : {up} Operational Status : {up} MAC Address : 11:22:33:44:55:66 Links Port main-a/1 main-a/2 Admin up up Oper up up LACP sync out-of-sync Protection active active The LAG status screen provides information on the current state of the aggregation group and individual group members. enter no lag(1–44)#. 1. enter show lacp-statistics ethernet <slot/port>.0 .000 Table 7-3. It has been allocated to the correct link aggregation group. Timeout Synchronized Collecting Distributing Displaying LACP Statistics You can display current LACP statistics for each LAG member. Periodic transmissions of LACP PDUs occur at either a slow or fast transmission rate.000 8. The LACP statistic counters are displayed. If the value is No. Yes indicates collection of incoming frames on the link is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled. It is currently not in the right aggregation.000 5.000 12. LACP timeout preference. the link is considered synchronized. Otherwise. Active indicates the port's preference to participate in the protocol regardless of the partner's control value.  To display LACP statistics: • At the config>port>lag(1–44) #prompt. depending upon the expressed LACP timeout preference (Long Timeout or Short Timeout) If the value is Yes. Passive indicates the port's preference for not transmitting LAC PDUs unless its partner's control value is Active. and the identity of the link aggregation group is consistent with the system ID and operational key information transmitted.000 10.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual Table 7-2. Otherwise.000 11. the value is No. the value is Yes. No indicates distribution of outgoing frames on the link is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled. the group has been associated with a compatible aggregator. the link is not synchronized. LACP Statistic Counters Counter Rx LACP Frames Rx Marker Frames Rx Unknown Frame Description Number of valid LACP PDUs received Number of valid Marker PDUs received Number of unrecognized packet errors 7-12 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver. LACP States Counter Actor Partner Activity Description Local device participating in LACP negotiation Remote device participating in LACP negotiation Actor or partner's port activity. ETX-5300A>config>port>lag(1)$ show lacp-statistics ethernet main-a/1 Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx LACP Frames Marker Frames Unknown Frames Illegal Frames LACP Frames Marker Response Frames : : : : : : 5. 2.  To configure inter-card LAG between two main cards: 1. Configure three flows:  Flow 1 from LAG 1 to any ETX-5300A port for LACP data with untagged classification. To peer LACP frames.Installation and Operation Manual Counter Rx Illegal Frames Tx LACP Frames Tx Marker Response Frames Description Number of invalid packets received Number of valid LACP PDUs transmitted Number of valid Marker Response PDUs received Chapter 7 Resiliency Example Examples below illustrate how to configure different types of link aggregation groups. 5. configure a dedicated flow with untagged classifier from the LAG. 1.   Flow 2 from port 3 on main card A to LAG 1 with VLAN 100 classification Flow 3 from LAG 1 to port 3 on main card A with VLAN 100 classification. port 3 on main card A is used for virtual termination of LACP traffic. Configure L2CP profile with peer action for the LACP address (01-80-c2-0000-02). you can discard its traffic by using a drop action on the flow. As the only purpose of this flow is to peer LACP traffic. Discard the flow data. Configure two classifier profiles:   Untagged for LACP peer flow VLAN 100 for user data flows 4. Inter-Card LAG between Two Main Cards LAG configuration involves configuring a LAG group containing the two LAG port members and the LAG group attributes. Configure LAG 1 for port 2 on main card A and port 4 on main card B. Enable the relevant main card ports. This flow must have an L2CP profile attached to it. ETX-5300A Ver. 3. Data-carrying flows use the LAG as their ingress or egress ports.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-13 . In this example. The L2CP profile must have a peer action for the LACP address. Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual Port A/2 LAG Port B/4 Flow 1 (LACP) Flow 2 (Data) Flow 3 (Data) Port A/3 Figure 7-11.0 . Inter-Card LAG between Two Main Cards #*****************************Enabling_Ethernet_Ports************************ config port ethernet main-a/2 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config port ethernet main-b/4 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config port ethernet main-a/3 pm-enable no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*****************************Configuring_LAG******************************** config port lag 1 admin-key ten-giga-ethernet bind ethernet main-a/2 bind ethernet main-b/4 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default lacp tx-activity active tx-speed slow no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Assigning_Queue_Group_Profile******************** config port ethernet main-a/3 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Classifier_Profiles****************** config flows classifier-profile classutg match-any match untagged exit all config flows classifier-profile class100 match-any match vlan 100 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_L2CP_Profile************************* config port l2cp l2cp1 7-14 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Keep in mind that the mirror SAP 3/1/1 and SAP 3/1/2 located on I/O card in slot 3 must be left unused (i. The L2CP profile must have a peer action for the LACP address.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-15 . This flow must have an L2CP profile attached to it.e. 1. As the only purpose of this flow is to peer LACP traffic. These SAPs serve as internal peers for SAP 1/1/1 and SAP 1/1/2. Follow the LAG/SAP Connection guidelines described above when directing flows from the LAG to the relevant SAPs. you can discard its traffic by using a drop action on the flow. Note The I/O card ports combined in LAG must belong to the same 10-port group. See Inter-Card LAG above. To peer LACP frames. ETX-5300A Ver. configure a dedicated flow with untagged classifier from the LAG.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency mac 01-80-c2-00-00-02 peer exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Flows******************************** config flows flow 1 classifier classutg ingress-port lag 1 egress-port ethernet main-a/3 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 l2cp profile l2cp1 drop pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 2 classifier class100 egress-port lag 1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-port ethernet main-a/3 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 3 classifier class100 egress-port ethernet main-a/3 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-port lag 1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Inter-Card LAG between Two I/O Cards LAG configuration involves configuring a LAG group containing the two LAG port members and the LAG group attributes. which are used by the LACP and data flows. have no flows attached to them). Data-carrying flows use the LAG as their ingress or egress ports. 2. Configure LAG 1 for port 2 on I/O card 1 and port 2 on I/O card 3. Configure six flows:  Flow 1 from LAG 1 to SAP 1/1/1 with untagged classification for incoming LACP data Discard the flow data. Port 1/2 LAG Port 3/2 Flow 1 (LACP) Flow 3 (Data) SAP 1/1/1 Flow 2 (LACP) Flow 4 (Data) Port A/3 SAP 1/1/2 Port 1/13 Flow 5 (Data) SAP 3/1/1 Leave Unused SAP 3/1/2 Figure 7-12.0 . Configure L2CP profile with peer action for the LACP address (01-80-c2-0000-02). 4. Flow 3 from LAG 1 to SAP 1/1/2 with VLAN 100 classification Flow 4 from SAP 1/1/2 to port 13 on I/O card 1 with Match All classification Flow 5 from port 13 on I/O card 1 to LAG 1 with VLAN 100 classification. Inter-Card LAG between Two I/O Cards #*****************************Enabling_Ethernet_Ports************************ 7-16 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver.     Flow 2 from SAP 1/1/1 to port 3 on main card A with Match All classification for outgoing LACP data. 1. 6. Configure three classifier profiles:    Untagged for incoming LACP peer flow Match All for outgoing LACP peer flow VLAN 100 for user data flows 5.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual  To configure inter-card LAG between two I/O cards: 1. 3. Attach queue group profiles to all relevant ports and SAGs. Enable the relevant I/O and main card ports. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency config port ethernet 1/13 no shutdown exit all config port ethernet main-a/3 no shutdown exit all config port ethernet 1/2 no shutdown exit all config port ethernet 3/2 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*****************************Configuring_LAG******************************** config port lag 1 admin-key giga-ethernet bind ethernet 1/2 bind ethernet 3/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default lacp tx-activity active tx-speed slow no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Assigning_Queue_Group_Profiles******************* config port ethernet 1/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default config port ethernet 3/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 3/1 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default config port ethernet main-a/3 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet 1/13 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 1/2 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Classifier_Profiles****************** config flows classifier-profile classutg match-any match untagged exit all config flows classifier-profile classAll match-any match all exit all config flows classifier-profile class100 match-any match vlan 100 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_L2CP_Profile************************* ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) 7-17 . 7-18 Ethernet Link Aggregation (LAG) ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 .Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual config port l2cp l2cp1 mac 01-80-c2-00-00-02 peer exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Flows******************************** config flows flow 1 classifier classutg ingress-port lag 1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 l2cp profile l2cp1 drop no shutdown exit all config flows flow 2 classifier classAll ingress-port sap 1/1/1 egress-port ethernet main-a/3 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 3 classifier class100 ingress-port lag 1 egress-port sap 1/1/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 4 classifier classAll ingress-port sap 1/1/2 egress-port ethernet 1/13 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 5 classifier class100 ingress-port ethernet 1/13 gress-port lag 1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Configuration Errors Table 7-4 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. ETX-5300A supports 16 rings (major and sub-rings) per shelf. Configuration Error Messages Message Bind failed: Services are configured on port Bind failed: Ports in LAG must reside on same card type Bind failed: Ports in LAG must both be either between 1-10 or 11-20 No shutdown failed: LAG must have exactly 2 members No shutdown failed: LACP must be enabled when LAG is between 2 cards.1-compliant bridges. and protects against link and node failures. the ports bound to the LAG must have an untagged flow with an L2CP profile that specifies peer action for MAC 0x02 LAG cannot be activated if LACP profile is not attached to aggregation group Maximum allowed number of LAGs per chassis is greater than 44 LAG ID is out of range (1–44) LAG cannot be activated if no ports are bound to it Mismatch between LAG and member port capacity Ethernet ports with invalid (non-existent) numbers cannot be bound to LAG Maximum number of LAG members is above two Selected port has already been configured as a LAG member An active LAG cannot be deleted or modified The same Ethernet port has been bound twice to a LAG An Ethernet port cannot be removed from the LAG if the port is not bound to it No shutdown failed: L2CP profile must be configured when LACP is enabled Error : Exceeded maximum number of LAGs Error : Invalid LAG ID Error : Membership is not specified Error : Invalid port Bandwidth Error : Invalid port number Error : Number Of Ports Exceeds Maximum Error : Port already used in another LAG Error : LAG is enabled Error : LAG members duplicated Error : Given port is not a LAG member 7. This technology builds a logical ring. ETX-5300A Ver.0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-19 . No shutdown failed: L2CP profile must define a peer action for LACPDUs Description Ethernet ports with flows assigned to them cannot be bound to the LAG In the inter-card link aggregation. ports 1–10 and ports 11–20 cannot share the same LAG LAG member number has been exceeded Inter-card LAG cannot be activated if LACP is not enabled In order to enable LACP for the LAG. LAG member ports must belong to the same card type In the intra-card link aggregation on E5-GBE-20 card. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency Table 7-4.3 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) A G. defined as a set of IEEE 802.8032 Layer-2 Ethernet ring is used by ETX-5300A for traffic protection. they can reside on ports belonging to different cards. providing port redundancy.3) and bridging (IEEE 802.8032 revertive rings provide sub-50 ms protection for Ethernet traffic and prevent loops at the Ethernet layer. When a link failure occurs. Note Ring port cannot be bound to a LAG.1) functions. ETX-5300A supports up to 16 major rings and sub-rings. it is detected via LOS or heartbeat messaging. It is independent of any physical-layer technologies and can be utilized in any carrier network. providing port and card redundancy.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual Standards ITU-T G. using an alternative path. with SDH/SONET-type resilience. Ring ports can reside on Ethernet ports belonging to the same main or I/O card. Figure 7-13. Y. Upon failure. Single Ethernet Ring 7-20 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver.0 . Benefits G. 1. Functional Description Ethernet Ring Protection technology provides a scalable solution for low-cost traffic protection and rapid service restoration. It is built on traditional Ethernet MAC (IEEE 802. In ERP every ring node uses heartbeat messaging to determine availability of its neighbor. including single and interconnected (ladder) ring topologies. Ring Topology ETX-5300A supports different ring topologies.8032v2. node forwarding information is recalculated to ensure that data traffic reaches its destination. In addition. Factory Defaults No Ethernet protection rings are configured in the system by default.1731. In total. and the ring protection is triggered by loss of continuity or server layer failure. On receiving these messages. Each node is monitored.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency Major Ring Sub-Ring Figure 7-14. An R-APS channel is configured using a separate dedicated VLAN to enable handling of the R-APS messages differently from the service traffic. to overcome scenarios in which link failures are not recognized via LOS (Loss of signal). 1. When receiving the R-APS (NR). Nodes receiving the R-APS (NR. as defined in Y. when a failed link is restored and a node continually detects a Clear SF. traffic flows on all. ERPS can also use the standard Ethernet OAM 802. the RPL owner starts its Wait-To-Restore (WTR) timer. Interconnected Ethernet Rings R-APS Messaging Ethernet ring protection is achieved by means of a dedicated protocol. When that timer expires. RPL is controlled by a single node called an RPL owner. ETX-5300A Ver. root blocked) messages in both directions of the ring. Automated Protection Switching (APS). RB) message flush their learning table.1ag Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) to expose the failure to the two adjacent nodes. At any time. Moreover. these nodes block the ports facing the failed link. Before sending the R-APS. Figure 7-15 illustrates a stable-state Ethernet ring with blocked RPL to prevent a loop. allowing the RPL to be used for traffic. This link is called the ring protection link (RPL). unblock their blocked ports. An SF message is triggered even if only one node adjacent to the failed link recognizes the failure. RB) (R-APS no request. it blocks the RPL port and sends RAPS (NR. Under normal conditions this link is blocked. the RPL owner unblocks the RPL port. using Ethernet CCM OAM messages.1731. Every ring link is bound by two adjacent nodes. the RPL owner unblocks the RPL port. which is separated from the service traffic channel. An R-APS channel and service traffic blocking is performed via VID filtering by the bridge. it sends an R-APS No Request (NR) message and keeps the failed port blocked. R-APS messages require a designated transmission channel (R-APS channel). and return to idle state. When a failure is detected. Mechanism of Operation Every failure along the ring triggers an R-APS Signal Fail (SF) message in both directions from the nodes adjacent to the failed link. During a recovery phase. which prevents traffic from using the RPL. but one of the ring links.0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-21 . 1. Fault-Free ERP Timers The following timers are used to facilitate ERP operation: • • Wait-to-Restore (WTR) – Period of time used by RPL owner to verify that the ring has stabilized before blocking the RPL after signal recovery. Hold-off – Period of time during which the underlying Ethernet layer attempts to filter out intermittent link faults before reporting them to the ERP mechanism. It can be overridden by SF condition or a force switch command. In such networks a common VLAN is shared on more than one physical ring. Guard – Period of time during which all received A-RPS messages are ignored by the ERP mechanism. Manual switch command manually blocks a particular ring port with only one manual switch command per ring instance. • • Note The manual and forced switch commands are temporary commands and do not permanently change the location of the RPL. • Forced switch command forcefully blocks a particular ring port.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual Traffic is Blocked CCM CCM RPL Owner CCM CCM CCM CCM Figure 7-15. a user connected to node E is communicating with a user connected to node A over the same VLAN. Ring topology includes a physical link between nodes G and C. It can be issued even if an SF condition exists on the ring. • Administrative Commands If there is a need to intervene into ERP operation for maintenance or any other reason. 7-22 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver. Clear switch command clears all existing force and manual switch command on the ERP. For example. with multiple force switch commands supported per ring instance. the operator can issue a forced or manual switch command. Multiple Rings Multiple rings with a common link are usually referred to as ladder network (see Figure 7-16). This prevents the ring nodes from receiving outdated A-RPS messages circulating the network.0 . It belongs to the major ring and is used by the sub-ring as its R-APS channel. Major ring – An Ethernet ring that controls a full physical ring and is connected to the interconnection nodes on two ports (ring A-H-G-C-B in Figure 7-16) Sub-ring –An Ethernet ring that is connected to a major ring at the interconnection nodes. while node A does not change the state of its RPL port. A sub-ring is connected to the interconnection nodes on only one port (ring C-D-E-F-G in Figure 7-16). the RPL owner that controls the ERPS instance containing that link unblocks the RPL port while the distant RPL port.0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-23 . ETX-5300A supports up to five subrings per major ring. remains blocked. Link C–G is not a part of the subring and it is controlled by the major ring. When a non-shared link fails in the network. Major Ring and Sub-Ring The following terms are commonly used for describing ladder ring topology: • • Interconnection nodes – Ring nodes that are common to both interconnected rings (nodes C and G in Figure 7-16). By itself.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency H G F A Virtual Channel Major Ring Sub-Ring E B C D Figure 7-16. For example. if link G-F fails. which is not a part of this instance. A). R-APS virtual channel – The R-APS virtual channel is the R-APS channel connection between two interconnection nodes of a sub-ring over a network or other ring. Physical Ladder Topology H G G F A Major Ring Sub-Ring E B C C D Figure 7-17. 1. ETX-5300A Ver. • • In a stable state the rings in Figure 7-16 have two RPL owners that prevent the traffic from looping in the network (nodes E. the sub-ring does not constitute a closed physical ring. only node E unblocks its RPL port. In the configure>protection# prompt. these are flows used by the East and West ports. and the East and West ports of the major ring. For the sub-ring. Command backward-compatibility no backward-compatibility bridge <1–32> data-vlan <1–4094> no data-vlan Using no before data-vlan removes VLAN ID assignment to user data. Before issuing the no data-vlan command. using this VLAN with the SVI as their ingress or egress. these are flows used by the East port of the subring. 2. sharing more than one ring east-port <bridge_port_number> west-port <bridge_port_number> interconnection-node no interconnection-node Sub-rings have East ports only Sub-rings do not have West ports 7-24 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver. 1. verify that all flows. enter erp followed by ring number (1– 16) and ring type (major or sub). Note Task no before erp (ERP_number) deletes an ERP instance. the RPL port of the sub-ring (node E) remains blocked since that link is declared as virtual channel for this ring. Comments Making the ring compatible with previous ERP implementations Assigning node to a bridge instance Assigning VLAN ID to user data Defining bridge port as an East port of ERP node Defining bridge port as a West port of ERP node Defining ERP node as an interconnection node. Configure the ERP as illustrated and explained below. An ERP instance with is created and the config>protection>erp(1)# prompt is displayed. For the major rings. have been disabled. Configuring ERP  To configure ERP: 1. the RPL owner of the main ring (node A) unblocks its port.0 . however.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual If a shared link fails (link G-C). MEPs used for SF propagation cannot reside on R-APS VLAN. which is not connected to RPL owner Configuring dedicated VLAN for R-APS messages Configuring the revertive mode r-aps [vlan <1–4094>] [vlan-priority <0–7>] [mel <0–7>] revertive no revertive R-APS settings must be the same for all ring members This mode is relevant to the RPL owner node. 1. shutdown disables the ERP. traffic is blocked at the RPL owner and restored to the working state. is cleared. After the node has entered the pending state in non-revertive mode. Connecting previously defined sub-ring to a major ring sub-ring <ring_number> no sub-ring This option available for major rings only. they must be bound to data VLANs only. Enabling propagation of Signal Failure (SF) condition from the Ethernet OAM service layer sf-trigger {east | west} mep <md-id> <ma-id> <mep-id> no sf-trigger {east | west} Before enabling SF propagation. verify that relevant CFM parameters have been configured.0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-25 . after condition. Administratively enabling the ERP interface no shutdown To avoid traffic loops. use the Clear command to exit the state. no revertive enables non-revertive mode.Installation and Operation Manual Task Defining node port type in relation to RPL owner Command port-type owner {east | west} port-type neighbor {east | west} port-type next-neighbor {east | west} port-type ring-node Comments Chapter 7 Resiliency owner – RPL owner neighbor – port directly connected to RPL owner next-neighbor – port connected to RPL owner via neighbor ring-node – regular ring port. ETX-5300A Ver. causing the switch. The sub-ring number must be lower than the number of the major ring it is assigned to. In the revertive mode. always enable Ethernet ports only after enabling Ethernet rings. 0 . 1.Chapter 7 Resiliency Task Defining guard and hold-off periods in msec Command timers [guard <10–2000>] [holdoff <0–10000] Installation and Operation Manual Comments Guard timer is used by the ERP mechanism to prevent ring nodes from receive outdated RAPS messages. Hold-off timer is used by Ethernet layer to filter out intermittent faults. The forced switch can be applied to any number of nodes in the ring. While the guard timer is active. The guard timer is configured in 10-ms steps. Its recommended value for all ring nodes is 2 sec. Task Enabling virtual channel over shared link Command virtual-channel no virtual-channel Comments Currently. enter show status. The ERP status is displayed. all ring nodes shift to the manual switch mode.  To display ERP status: • In the config>protection>erp(erp_number)$ prompt. Faults are reported to the ERP mechanism only after the hold-off timer expires. the virtual channel is permanently enabled Displaying ERP Status You can display current status of configured ERP entity. 7-26 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver. at the config>protection>erp(erp_number)>sub-ring(sub-ring_number)# prompt. Blocking the East or West port of a ring node manual-switch {east-port | west-port } The manual switch command can be applied to a single ring node only. The guard timer is configured in 100-ms steps. all received R-APS messages are ignored by the node. Blocking the East or West port of a ring node forced-switch {east-port | west-port } Clearing the existing switch commands Displaying ERP status Displaying ERP statistics Clearing ERP statistics clear show status show statistics clear statistics The following marking actions can be performed in the sub-ring level. When the command is active. 0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-27 .   Ring state:  Init – The node is not yet participating in the ring Idle – The node is performing normally (there is no link failure on the ring).    East/West Port Status:  Forward – Port is forwarding data Blocked – Port is blocked   East/West Port Local SF Source – Local Signal Failure source:  Server Layer OAM CFM Admin   Displaying ERP Statistics When the G. This node initiates the R-APS message. The RPL owner. Protected – A failure occurred on the ring. ETX-5300A Ver. except for the RPL owner node. which blocks the RPL port (the other RPL owner port is unblocked). those that are not the RPL owner node) operate as normal nodes and have no special role on the ring RPL owner – This node owns the RPL and blocks or unblocks the RPL as conditions require. 1.  To display ERP statistics: • In the config>protection>erp(erp_number)$ prompt. traffic is unblocked on both ring ports. enter show statistics.. In this state.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) is enabled. ETX-5300A allows collecting statistics on R-APS messages sent and received by the East and West ports. unblocks the RPL port so both ports are active. A not-owner node have traffic blocked on the ring port that connects to the failed link. if it is not at one end of the failed link.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency ETX-5300A>config>protection>erp(1)$ show status Bridge Number : 0 RPL Link : Not Owner Ring State : Init East Port : 0 West Port : 0 East Port Status : Forward West Port Status : Forward Local SF Source Local SF Source : Not Applicable : Not Applicable ERP status provides information on:    Bridge number Bridge ports assigned to be East and West ring ports RPL link role:  Not owner – All other nodes on the ring (that is. Received R-APS No Request message indicates absence of failed ports in the ring. ERP Statistic Counters Counter R-APS SF Message Tx/Rx Description Total number of R-APS Signal Fail (SF) messages received or transmitted by East/West port. 1. RPL Blocked (RB) messages received or transmitted by East/West port. RPL Blocked message indicates that RPL port is blocked.RB 0 0 Total Valid 0 0 Total Errors 0 0 Table 7-5. Transmitted from the RPL No Request. ETX-5300A>config>protection>erp(1)$ show statistics East Port ---------------------------------------------R-APS Message Rx Frames Tx Frames SF 0 0 NR 0 0 NR. Total number of valid R-APS messages received or transmitted by East/West port Total number of errored R-APS messages received or transmitted by East/West port R-APS NR Message Tx/Rx R-APS NR. Total number of R-APS No Request (NR) messages received or transmitted by East/West port.RB 0 0 Total Valid 0 0 Total Errors 0 0 West Port ---------------------------------------------R-APS Message Rx Frames Tx Frames SF 0 0 NR 0 0 NR.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual The ERP statistic counters are displayed. Total number of R-APS No Request (NR). RB Tx/Rx Total Valid Rx/Tx Total Errors Rx/Tx Example Figure 7-18 and script below illustrate configuration a G. Received R-APS Signal Fail message indicates a failed port in the ring. Transmitted R-APS No Request message indicates that the node fixed its failed port.8032v2 ring over main card ports.0 . Received R-APS No Request. 7-28 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver. Transmitted R-APS Signal Fail message indicates a failed port in the node. RPL Blocked message indicates that RPL port is blocked and all other not-failed blocked ports are unblocked in the ring. 5. Add four bridge ports and bind them to the SVIs. Define bridge port VLAN membership for bridge ports that are not ring members:   BP 3 – member of VLAN 1500 BP 4 – member of VLAN 500 6. Configure flows for R-APS messages (red flows in Figure 7-18):    Classifier profile for VLAN 777 Configure flows 1. 34 VLAN 1500 Port 1 Flow 16 Main Ethernet Card A Flow 15 Flow 30 Flow 31 I/O Ethernet Card 1 Fl. Assign previously configured queue groups to card ports and SAPs. 10 SAP Fl. 2. 3. Configure data flows (blue flows in Figure 7-18): ETX-5300A Ver. 9 VLAN 500 VLAN 900 VLAN 500 Fl. 4 between main card ports and BPs Configure the color-aware marking profile. 32 Fl. 18 West (RPL Owner) SVI 4 Fl. ERP Configuration  To configure the ERP: 1. Select classification keys (VLAN + P-bit for the main and I/O card ports. 2. 17 Port 1 Fl. 3. 4 SVI 2 Fl. 3 Fl. 4. Configure the ring:     BP 1 – East port BP 2 – West port R-APS VLAN – 777 Data VLANs – 500. 1500 7. 1. 36 SVI 3 VLAN 1500 Fl. Configure four bridge-type SVIs. 8. 11 Port 1 Fl. 35 VLAN 1500 SVI 1 East BP 1 Bridge BP 2 BP 4 BP 3 Fl.0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-29 .Installation and Operation Manual Ethernet Ring Chapter 7 Resiliency Flow 1 Flow 2 Port 1 SAP Fl. 33 Main Ethernet Card B I/O Ethernet Card 2 Figure 7-18. #*********************Assigning_Queue_Group_Profiles************************* config port ethernet main-a/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-b/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default config port ethernet 2/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 2/1 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*********************Selecting_Classification_Keys************************** config port ethernet main-a/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet main-b/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet 1/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet 2/1 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_SVIs********************************* config port svi 1 bridge exit all config port svi 2 bridge exit all config port svi 3 bridge exit all config port svi 4 bridge exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*************************Binding_Bridge_Ports_to_SVIs*********************** config bridge 1 port 1 bind svi 1 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 port 2 bind svi 2 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 port 3 bind svi 3 no shutdown exit all 7-30 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 900 and 1500 Configure data flows. 9. 1. as illustrated in Figure 7-18 Note VLAN 900 is swapped to VLAN 500 on flow 9.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual   Classifier profiles for VLANs 500. Enable the main and I/O card ports. VLAN 500 is swapped to VLAN 900 on flow 11. 0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-31 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency config bridge 1 port 4 bind svi 4 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #******************** Configuring_VLAN_Membership**************************** config bridge 1 vlan 500 tagged-egress 4 config bridge 1 vlan 500 maximum-mac-addresses 64 config bridge 1 aging-time 300 exit all config bridge 1 vlan 1500 tagged-egress 3 config bridge 1 vlan 1500 maximum-mac-addresses 64 config bridge 1 aging-time 300 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************ Configuring_the_Ring******************************* config protection erp 1 major bridge 1 east 1 west 2 r-aps vlan 777 vlan-priority 1 mel 1 port-type east node-port port-type west rpl wait 120 data-vlan 500 data-vlan 1500 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************ Configuring_R-APS_Flows**************************** config flows classifier-profile class_R_APS match-any match vlan 777 exit all config flows flow 1 classifier class_R_APS ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 egress-port svi 1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 2 classifier class_R_APS ingress-port svi 1 egress-port ethernet main-a/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all ETX-5300A Ver. 0 . 1.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual config flows flow 3 classifier class_R_APS ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port svi 2 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 4 classifier class_R_APS ingress-port svi 2 egress-port ethernet main-b/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************ Configuring_Marking_Profile************************ config qos marking-profile mark1 classification cos color-aware green-yellow dei-copy mark 0 green to 0 dei green exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************ Configuring_Data_Flows**************************** config flows classifier-profile class_900 match-any match vlan 900 exit all config flows classifier-profile class_500 match-any match vlan 500 exit all config flows classifier-profile class1500 match-any match vlan 1500 exit all config flows flow 9 classifier class_900 ingress-port ethernet 2/1 egress-port sap 2/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 10 classifier classall ingress-port sap 2/1/1 egress-port svi 4 mark all vlan 500 exit pm-enable no shutdown exit all 7-32 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver. 0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-33 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency config flows flow 11 classifier class_500 ingress-port svi 4 egress-port ethernet 2/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 mark all vlan 900 exit pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 15 classifier class_500 ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 egress-port svi 1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 16 classifier class_500 ingress-port svi 1 egress-port ethernet main-a/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 17 classifier class_500 ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port svi 2 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 18 classifier class_500 ingress-port svi 2 egress-port ethernet main-b/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 30 classifier class1500 ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 egress-port svi 1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 31 ETX-5300A Ver. 0 .Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual classifier class1500 ingress-port svi 1 egress-port ethernet main-a/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 32 classifier class1500 ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port svi 2 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 33 classifier class1500 ingress-port svi 2 egress-port ethernet main-b/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 34 classifier class1500 ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 35 classifier class1500 ingress-port sap 1/1/2 egress-port svi 3 pm-enable no shutdown exit all config flows flow 36 classifier class1500 ingress-port svi 3 egress-port ethernet 1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 pm-enable no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** 7-34 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver. 1. disable the physical ports. OAM service is not defined Cannot modify active ring Ring ports are not defined Invalid parameter value Cannot modify WTR timer for of non-RPL Owner Invalid ring number Cannot enable SF propagation for inactive ring Cannot run command on inactive ring Description Invalid bridge port number is selected Invalid East port number is selected Invalid West port number is selected Invalid Guard timer value is selected Invalid Holdoff timer value is selected Invalid R-APS VLAN ID value is selected Invalid R-APS MEL value is selected Invalid R-APS VLAN priority value is selected Maximum number of rings (16) is exceeded Invalid traffic VLAN ID value is selected Selected VLAN does not exist The ring cannot be disabled if it has active physical ports attached to its nodes. Configuration Error Messages Message Invalid bridge port number Invalid East port number Invalid West port number Invalid Guard timer value Invalid Holdoff timer value Invalid R-APS VLAN ID Invalid R-APS MEL value Invalid R-APS VLAN priority Maximum number of rings exceeded Invalid traffic VLAN ID VLAN does not exist Cannot disable the ring with active physical ports Invalid SF trigger. Table 7-6. SF trigger cannot be enabled if no valid OAM service has been configured An active Ethernet ring cannot be modified Ring ports are not defined yet Invalid value for the parameter is selected WTR timer can be set only for RPL Owner Invalid ring number is selected Signal failure propagation can be enabled only for an active ring Manual or force switch command can be run only on an active ring ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency #****************************Enabling_Ports********************************** config port ethernet main-a/1 no shutdown config port ethernet main-b/1 no shutdown config port ethernet 1/1 no shutdown config port ethernet 2/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Configuration Errors Table 7-6 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. 1. First.0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-35 . 0 . delete the ring. The owner. the West port can be configured only as a ring node.Chapter 7 Resiliency Message East and West ports must be different Cannot assign ERP node to bridge instance after configuring East/West ports Cannot modify East/West port before assigning ERP node to bridge instance Cannot add data VLAN before assigning ERP node to bridge instance Cannot disable major ring with active subrings Major ring of the specified sub-ring is not active Major ring of the specified sub-ring does not exist Illegal node port type in relation to another ring member Cannot set node port type to ring-node Description Installation and Operation Manual Different bridge ports must be defined as East and West A ring node must be assigned to a bridge instance before configuring East/West ports East/West ports can be modified after assigning a ring node to a bridge instance Data VLAN must be defined after assigning a ring node to a bridge instance A major ring cannot be disabled if it has a sub-ring attached to it The major ring of the specified sub-ring has not been enabled A sub-ring cannot be configured if a major ring does not exist Not a valid value for the current node configuration. you must delete and re-create the ring The maximum number of sub-rings (5) per major ring has been reached The selected sub-ring does not exist One of the major ring nodes must be configured as an interconnection node to accommodate a sub-ring Invalid ring type Cannot modify ring type Invalid node type Cannot run FS or MS command in backwardcompatibility mode FS or MS command is already active Cannot configure R-APS VLAN ID for inactive virtual channel Cannot configure R-APS VLAN priority for inactive virtual channel Cannot modify virtual channel bound to subring Cannot modify this parameter. 1. Invalid ring type is selected Ring type (major or minor) cannot be modified Invalid type for the node is selected Force switch and manual switch commands are not supported in the backward-compatible mode Cannot run a force or manual switch command if an active command instance exist on the ring R-APS VLAN ID can be set only for an active virtual channel R-APS VLAN priority can be set only for an active virtual channel A virtual channel attached to a sub-ring cannot be modified This parameter cannot be modified. if an East port is defined as RPL owner. First. neighbor or next-neighbor port type of the node cannot be changed back to the ring-node (default value). then set the port type of the node. For example. delete and recreate the ring Maximum number of sub-rings per major ring exceeded Sub-ring with specified index does not exist Major ring node must be configured as interconnection node 7-36 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ETX-5300A Ver. remove all sub-rings of the major ring This node must be configured as interconnection node First. configured for the virtual channel. configured for the virtual channel. remove all sub-rings bound to the major ring This command is available for major ring only Cannot change bridge number for a ring with configured data VLAN Major ring is assigned to a different bridge instance The sub-ring is already bound to another major ring The port is already in use by another ring Cannot activate a ring without configured bridge number Cannot activate a ring without configured East port Cannot activate a ring without configured West port Cannot activate a ring without configured RAPS VLAN Cannot activate a ring without configured RAPS MEL Cannot activate a ring without R-APS VLAN configured for virtual channel Cannot activate a ring without R-APS VLAN priority configured for virtual channel Cannot activate a virtual channel without configured R-APS VLAN ID and priority for sub-ring Description Chapter 7 Resiliency One of the sub-ring nodes must be configured as an interconnection node Disable the force switch command to operate the ring in the backward-compatibility mode This action requires deleting all sub-rings belonging to the major ring Configure this node as an interconnection node to operate a sub-ring This action requires deleting all sub-rings belonging to the major ring This command can be run only on a major ring A ring with configured data VLAN The major ring is already assigned to another bridge instance The sub-ring cannot be attached to the ring. cannot be activated A ring without R-APS VLAN priority.0 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 7-37 . 1. cannot be activated A virtual channel without R-APS VLAN ID and priority. cannot be activated ETX-5300A Ver. because it is already bound to another major ring The port cannot be attached to the ring because it is in use by another ring A ring without a port assigned to the bridge instance cannot be activated A ring without configured East port cannot be activated A ring without configured West port cannot be activated A ring without configured R-APS VLAN cannot be activated A ring without configured R-APS MEL cannot be activated A ring without R-APS VLAN ID. configured for the sub-ring.Installation and Operation Manual Message Sub-ring node must be configured as interconnection node Cannot enable backward-compatibility mode when FS command is active First. both signals are monitored independently for failures. provided that: • • 7-38 The working port is on the working card The protection port is on the protection card ETX-5300A Ver. APS is disabled. there is no indication beyond the affected network element that a failure has occurred.4 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) ETX-5300A provides 1+1 APS line redundancy for rapid restoration of service in case of line failure. SDH/SONET APS performs switchovers at Layer 1 significantly faster than at Layer 2 or Layer 3. a signal degrade (soft failure caused by the error rate exceeding some pre-defined value). The receiving equipment selects either working or the protection signal. Working and the protection ports can reside on the same or different E5-cTDM-4 cards. At the far end of the line. thus avoiding time-consuming reroutes. Standards and MIBs Telecordia GR-253-CORE.841. producing identical working and protection signals.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual 7. each card is protected against failures. provided that the card is not a member of an I/O card protection group (standalone card). The working and protection ports can reside on two different E5-cTDM-4 cards (inter-card APS) that are already assigned to an I/O card protection group. At the near end of the line. When two TDM cards operate in APS mode for hardware redundancy. The effect of a failure is greatly minimized. 1. ETX-5300A provides a protection facility (backup line) for each working facility. or a response to user-initiated commands. With APS. RFC 3498 Benefits APS switches over traffic with minimal loss of data. Functional Description In 1+1 APS. the optical signal is bridged permanently (split into two signals) and sent over both the working and the protection facilities simultaneously.0 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) . This selection is based on switch initiation criteria. they ensure 50 ms restoration of service in case of line faults. ITU-T G. The working and protection ports can reside on the same E5-cTDM-4 card (intra-card APS). which can be a signal fail (hard failure such as loss of frame). and a fast switchover guarantees minimal effect on the network. When the working and the protection ports reside on different cards. other nodes stay intact. Factory Defaults By default. APS is defined for cards in the following slot pairs:   1 and 2 3 and 4. APS Architecture The K1 byte contains both the switching pre-emption priorities (in bits 1-4) and the channel number of the channel requesting action (in bits 5-8).Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency • • The working and protection ports have the same port number. the K1 byte is still used to inform the other end of the local action. Working Line Tx Rx Tx Rx Protection Line Figure 7-19. 1 and 4. This means that working and protection ports cannot reside on cards in slots 1 and 3. 3 and 4 of both cards.0 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) 7-39 . and the K1 and K2 bytes are not needed to coordinate switch actions. if two ports 1 on I/O TDM cards in slot 1 and slot 2 are inter-card APS members. when an inter-card APS has been defined on at least two ports of different I/O TDM cards. 1. APS Architecture ETX-5300A APS is a 1+1 unidirectional protection switching. Each APS group includes up to two members. 2 and 3. Therefore. The K2 byte is set to indicate that the K1 byte is being received (by indicating the same channel number as the received K1) and to inform the other end of the provisioned architecture and mode of operation. The K2 byte contains the channel number of the channel that is bridged onto the protection ETX-5300A Ver. no pseudowire services are available on ports 2. In this mode. The line selection is based only on the local conditions and requests. For example. However. ETX-5300A can have up to eight APS instances per chassis. Note PW services cannot be assigned to SDH/SONET ports which are not APS members. all communication from the near end to the far end is carried out over the APS channel. each end operates independently of the other end. using the K1 and K2 bytes of the SONET/SDH overhead on the protection line. or 2 and 4. LOF. reset. They are listed in order of priority. Signal failures and signal degradations override manual switch. protection is active Working is active. AIS-L. Behavior of Manual Switching Commands Interface Conditions Working is not present. from lowest to highest. The following commands are available for manually switching the circuits. but are overridden by force and lockout commands. The status values arranged in the following ascending priority order: • • • • • • • • • active(1) standby(2) waitToRestore(3) manualSwitched(4) sd(5) sf(6) forcedSwitched(7) lockedOut(8) (protection only) notPresent(9) The switch occurs whenever the protection status of the active port changed to a higher priority than the standby as a result of a user command (shutdown.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual (bits 1-4) and the mode type (bit 5) as well bits 6 to 8 contain various condition such as AIS-L. Table 7-7. protection is active Allowed Command (1+1 Unidirectional Mode) None Lockout-of-protection Lockout-of-protection Force-switch-to-working (causes a switchover) 7-40 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) ETX-5300A Ver.0 . Automatic Switchover Conditions The following automatic switch conditions are defined for APS: • • Signal Fail (SF): LOS. switch) or protection event. ETX-5300A automatically switches traffic between the working and protection circuits if a link failure occurs. Line BER above configurable EED threshold (10-3 to 10-5) Signal Degrade (SD) above configurable SD threshold (10-5 to 10-9) Manual Switching Commands During normal operation. I/O card maintains a protection status for every port in a protection group. RDI-L. 1. protection is not present Working is shut down. • • • Manual – manually switches to a working or protection link Force – forces switching to a working or protection link Lockout – prevents a working link from switching to a protection link A higher priority command overrides the lower priority command. 2. shutdown disables I/O card protection group  Task Defining working (active) and protection (standby) I/O cards Administratively enabling I/O card protection group Displaying I/O card protection group status show status ETX-5300A Ver. This allows error-free transfer of configuration parameters from the working to the protection TDM I/O card.0 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) 7-41 . protection is reset Lockout-of-protection Configuring I/O Card Protection If you intend to configure inter-card APS. protection is shut down Working is reset. deletes the I/O card protection group. To configure I/O card protection group: • At the config>protection> io-group (group name)# prompt. when working and protection ports belong to different I/O TDM cards. Type io-group and enter an I/O card protection group name. Note Using no before io-group (group name). I/O protection group can be deleted when it is disabled and has no cards assigned to it. you must first define a 1+1 I/O card protection group according to the following rules: • • Working port of the inter-card APS must reside on the working card of the I/O card protection group Protection port of the inter-card APS must reside on the protection card of the I/O card protection group. protection is active Chapter 7 Resiliency Allowed Command (1+1 Unidirectional Mode) Lockout-of-protection Lockout-of-protection Force-switch-to-working (causes a switchover) Working is active. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below: Command bind {working <slot> | protection <slot>} no shutdown Comments Using no before bind removes a card from I/O card protection group When the APS group is activated (no shutdown command).Installation and Operation Manual Interface Conditions Working is active. Navigate to configure protection.  To add an I/O card protection group: 1. the protection TDM I/O card is reset. 1. The config>protection>io-group (group name)# prompt is displayed. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below: Command bind {protection sdh-sonet <slot/port> | working sdh-sonet <slot/port>} no shutdown force-switch-to-working Comments Using no before bind removes a link from protection group shutdown disables APS group Manually switches to the working link. unless a request of equal or higher priority is in effect Use this command to revert the communication link back to the working interface before the wait to restore (WTR) time has expired Use this command when you need to perform maintenance on the working port This command prevents the circuit from switching to a protection interface in the event that the working circuit becomes unavailable Task Defining protection (standby) and working (active) links Administratively enabling APS group Forcing traffic to the working port Forcing traffic to the protection port force-switch-to-protection Manually switching traffic to the working port manual-switch-to-working Manually switching traffic to the protection port Preventing a working link from switching to a protection link manual-switch-to-protection lockout-of-protection Clearing manual. force and lockout commands Displaying APS status clear show status 7-42 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual Configuring APS Use the following procedure to configure redundancy for the ETX-5300A SDH/SONET links. 1. deletes the APS group. Note  Using no before aps (group name). To configure APS: • At the config>protection>aps(group name)# prompt.0 . 2.  To add an APS group: 1. unless a request of equal or higher priority is in effect Manually switches to the protection link. The config>protection>aps(group name)# prompt is displayed. Type aps and enter an APS group name. Navigate to configure protection. 1. enter show status. ETX-5300A>config>protection>aps(aps_group_1)# show status Group Mode : uni-directional Administrative Status : up Rx K1K2 : 100 Tx K1K2 : 100 Last Switchover Time : Last Switchover Reason : Ports Working Protection Port sdh-sonet 4/1 sdh-sonet 3/1 Admin up down Status up sf Active yes -- Example Intra-Card APS  To configure intra-card APS: • • • APS group name – aps_1 Working interface – STM-1/OC-3 port 1 on E5-cTDM-4 card in slot 1 Protection interface – STM-1/OC-3 port 2 on E5-cTDM-4 card in slot 1 ETX-5300A# config protection aps aps_1 ETX-5300A>config>protection>aps(aps_1)$ bind working sdh-sonet 1/1 ETX-5300A>config>protection>aps(aps_1)$ bind protection sdh-sonet 1/2 ETX-5300A>config>protection>aps(aps_1)$ no shutdown Inter-Card APS • • • • • • I/O card protection group name – io-group_1 Working card – E5-cTDM-4 in slot 1 Protection card – E5-cTDM-4 in slot 2 APS group name – aps_1 Working interface – STM-1/OC-3 port 1 on E5-cTDM-4 card in slot 1 Protection interface – STM-1/OC-3 port 1 on E5-cTDM-4 card in slot 2 ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Resiliency Displaying APS Status You can display current status of existing APS group and its member links.  To display APS status: • In the config>protection>aps(group name)# prompt.0 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) 7-43 . The APS status is displayed. Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A# config protection io-group io-group_1 ETX-5300A>config>protection>io-group(io-group_1)$ bind working 1 ETX-5300A>config>protection>io-group(io-group_1)$ bind protection 2 ETX-5300A>config>protection>io-group(io-group_1)$ no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>protection>io-group(io-group_1) exit all ETX-5300A# config protection aps aps_1 ETX-5300A>config>protection>aps(aps_1)$ bind working sdh-sonet 1/1 ETX-5300A>config>protection>aps(aps_1)$ bind protection sdh-sonet 2/1 ETX-5300A>config>protection>aps(aps_1)$ no shutdown Configuration Errors Table 7-8 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. 1. the working and protection port must have the same number For intra-card APS. Table 7-8. the working and protection port must reside on the same card Invalid SDH/SONET port number has been selected An SDH/SONET port on a TDM card that has not been provisioned yet. Configuration Error Messages Message Bind failed: port is already bound to an existing APS group Bind failed: Services exist on port Bind failed: Ports should reside on same card Bind failed: APS ports should be of type SONET-SDH Un-bind failed: APS group must be shutdown before unbinding a port Bind failed: Protection port must reside on protection card in group Bind failed: Working port must be configured on working card in group Bind failed: Working and protection ports must have the same port number Bind failed: Working and protection slots must be the same Sonet/sdh port number is not valid Sonet/sdh card is not defined yet APS group remove failed: Ports are bound to the group APS group creation failed: Maximum number of APS groups is already configured Max length of APS group name is 32 characters Description SDH/SONET port cannot be bound to more than one APS group SDH/SONET port with PWs defined on it cannot be bound to an APS For intra-card APS. the working and protection port must reside on the same card Only SDH/SONET ports can be defined as APS group members A port can be removed from the APS group only after the group is shut down Protection port must reside on a card defined as protection card in the I/O protection group (inter-card APS) Working port must reside on a card defined as working card in the I/O protection group (inter-card APS) For inter-card APS. cannot be bound to an APS group APS group cannot be deleted if it has ports bound to it Maximum number of APS groups per chassis (8) has been reached APS group name length has exceeded 32 alphanumeric characters 7-44 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) ETX-5300A Ver.0 . Installation and Operation Manual Message Command failed: Protection line is in signal fail or signal degrade Command failed: Working line is in signal fail or signal degraded Modify failed: Group should be shutdown in order to perform modification APS create failed: Exactly 2 ports should be bound to group Description Chapter 7 Resiliency Traffic cannot be manually switched to a port with signal failure or signal degrade condition Traffic cannot be manually switched to a port with signal failure or signal degrade condition Active APS group cannot be modified Number of APS member cannot exceed two ports ETX-5300A Ver.0 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) 7-45 . 1. 0 . 1.Chapter 7 Resiliency Installation and Operation Manual 7-46 Automatic Protective Switching (APS) ETX-5300A Ver. The classification key also defines the CoS mapping and color mapping methods. there are no flows in the ETX-5300A system.0 Flows 8-1 . 8. EVC. A per-port classification key configuration defines what types of classification profiles are supported for this type of port. Factory Defaults By default. 1. It presents the following information: • • • • • • • • • • Flows Ethertype Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) Peer TDM Pseudowires Cross-Connection Bridge Router Quality of Service (QoS) Ethernet OAM.CoS) to provide services in a flexible manner.1 Flows Flows are unidirectional entities that connect two physical or logical ports. It also details the different classifier profile types supported per classifier key.Chapter 8 Networking This chapter explains how to configure networking entities in ETX-5300A. Benefits The user traffic can be classified into different Ethernet flows (EVC. ETX-5300A Ver. Functional Description The ingress traffic is first classified into flows according to classification profiles. The Classification section in Appendix B specifies the supported classification keys and the associated CoS and color mapping methods. ETX-5300A also supports flows originating from and directed to main Ethernet card ports.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Flows connect physical and/or logical ports. or to provide L3 connectivity over router interfaces. They are used for E-Line and E-LAN services. In total. Flow Processing Flow processing includes the following: 8-2 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. define the flows between ports belonging to the different 10-port groups on the same E5-GBE-20 card or between ports on the different E5-GBE-20 cards. 1. cannot be defined. with up to 2K flows per Ethernet I/O card. Each set of ten ports (1–10 and 11–20) of the E5-GbE-20 card and each single port of the E5-10GbE-2 card provide up to 1K of I/O ingress flows. I/O ingress flows are marked in red. I/O Ingress Flows Note A flow between two ports that belong to the same 10-port group (1–10 or 11– 20) on the same E5-GBE-20. If an E-Line service is required between two GbE ports. ETX-5300A supports up to 24K of Ethernet flows. Flows include information about traffic forwarding (flow destination). I/O Ingress Flows I/O ingress flows originate in GbE and 10GbE ports of the Ethernet I/O cards. Other Flow Types Up to 512 flows can originate from all SAPs on a single SAG (up to 1K per Ethernet I/O card). Up to 64 ingress flows from the same I/O port can be mapped to a SAP (Service Attachment Point). Note Data flow and traffic management are detailed in Appendix B of this manual. See the Flow Processing section below. I/O Card Ethernet Port I/O Ingress Flows SAG SAP SVI BP BP SVI Main Card Ethernet Port SVI Bridge BP SVI BP SAP I/O Card Ethernet Port I/O Ethernet Card Figure 8-1.0 Main Card Ethernet Port I/O Ingress Flows . traffic mapped into flows is further processed according to user-defined profiles and VLAN editing actions. Figure 8-1 illustrates point-to-point and multipoint flows originating in I/O and main Ethernet cards. or swapping (marking) tags on single. ETX-5300A Ver. IP Precedence. Drop Action Traffic carried by I/O ingress flows or by flows originating from directly-attached (main card) ports can be dropped and thereby prevented from reaching its egress port. removing (popping). you can define two flows: • • Flow 1 with VLAN classification Flow 2 with VLAN + specific MAC classification and drop action. A specific queue in the queue block is defined 1:1 by the packet CoS (0–7) according to CoS-mapping profile. but to drop this traffic if it comes from a specific MAC address. 1. A single policer can be applied to a flow or a policer aggregate can be assigned to a group of flows. DSCP) is mapped to an internal Class of Service (CoS) according to CoS mapping profile or fixed CoS mapping value User priority (P-bit. if the flow egress port is on an I/O or main Ethernet card. Table 8-1. DSCP) or DEI can be mapped to a packet color (yellow or green) according to color mapping profile.0 Flows 8-3 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking • • • • • • Ingress traffic is mapped in flows using the classification match criteria defined in the classifier profile. User priority (P-bit. L2CP frames are handled per flow according to L2CP profile settings. IP Precedence. CoS marking profile maps CoS value and/or packet color into the egress priority tags (P-bit. if you plan to accept traffic marked by a certain VLAN.or double-tagged packets. For example. DEI). using policer profile or policer aggregate profile VLANs can be edited per flow by stacking (pushing). Processing Actions per Flow Type Ingress Port Classifier Profile Drop Action L2CP Profile CoS Mapping Profile Color Mapping Profile Policing Profile VLAN Editing Main card I/O card SAP SVI PW SVI bridge SVI router         – – – –   – – – –   – – – –   – – – – –  – – – –  –     Note All flows can be mapped to a queue block. • Table 8-1 details processing actions supported by different flow types. Flow is mapped to a specific queue block within a queue group associated with the egress port. P-bit and DEI values are either copied or set according to CoS marking profile. These flows include:   Point-to-point (E-Line) flows Multipoint (E-LAN) flows. 1. PM counters must be either enabled or disabled for both multipoint flows. Flow Counters Statistic counters can be enabled on the following flows: • • Up to 512 of I/O ingress flows per each I/O card Up to 2K minus two main card flows per chassis. Note Each pair of the multipoint flows (at bridge port ingress and egress) is counted as a single flow. point-to-point flows (E-Line) and multipoint (E-LAN) flows at bridge port ingress support the following counters:  Received:  Number of received packets Number of received bytes   Transmitted:  Number of transmitted packets Number of transmitted green packets Number of transmitted yellow packets Number of transmitted bytes Number of transmitted green bytes Number of transmitted yellow bytes Total packet transmit rate (packet/sec) Green packet transmit rate (packet/sec) Yellow packet transmit rate (packet/sec) Total bit transmit rate (bit/sec) Green bit transmit rate (bit/sec) Yellow bit transmit rate (bit/sec)             Dropped:  Number of dropped packets Number of dropped green packets Number of dropped yellow/red packets Number of dropped bytes    8-4 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. and preventing it from reaching an egress port.0 . This is done by creating an untagged flow with an L2CP profile defining a drop action for it. ETX-5300A maintains counters for current statistics per flow.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual This action can also be used to direct LACP traffic to the CPU. • I/O ingress flows. In this mode. replying to the LBM packets with LBRs. ETX-5300A Ver. Functionality Before running the flow test. Ports The RFC-2544 testing is supported only on the flows whose ingress port is one of the following: • • An indirectly-attached port (Ethernet port on I/O cards) A LAG with ports bound to indirectly-attached ports. you must configure and enable a Down MEP.Installation and Operation Manual  Chapter 8 Networking Number of dropped green bytes Number of dropped yellow/red bytes Total packet drop rate (packet/sec) Green packet drop rate (packet/sec) Yellow/red packet drop rate (packet/sec) Total bit drop rate (bit/sec) Green bit drop rate (bit/sec) Yellow/red bit drop rate (bit/sec)         Peak:  Maximum transmit bit rate Minimum transmit bit rate Maximum drop bit rate Minimum drop bit rate    • Multipoint (E-LAN) flows at bridge port egress support the following counters:  Transmit:  Number of transmitted packets Number of transmitted bytes Total packet transmit rate (packet/sec) Total bit transmit rate (bit/sec)     Peak:  Maximum transmit bit rate Minimum transmit bit rate.  RFC-2544 Loopback Responder ETX-5300A responds to the application layer loopbacks in accordance with the RFC-2544 requirements.0 Flows 8-5 . ETX-5300A loops back the RFC-2544 frames sent by the remote device. bound to an indirectly-attached port (see Ethernet OAM) with live ingress and egress flows. 1. .. Define a classifier profile and assign a name to it: classifier-profile <profilename> match-any The system switches to the context of the classifier profile (config>flows>classifier-profile(<profile-name>)).0 . such as CCMs and DMMs. This includes the OAM packets. This mode can be activated dynamically. Classifier Profiles You can define up to 24K classifier profiles to apply to flows to ensure the desired flow classification. Tx Flow SAP Main or I/O Card Port A Rx Flow Down MEP Bound to Port B I/O Card Port B A.<Y> ] [ inner-vlan <X>. ETX-5300A loops back all LBM packets received on the flow by swapping the MAC address and changing the LBM code to the LBR code.<Y> ] [ ip-precedence <X>..<Y> ] [ p-bit <X>. The testing mode has no impact on the user traffic. Normal Operation Tx Flow LBR Code LBM Code Loop I/O Card Port B SAP Main or I/O Card Port A Rx Flow Down MEP Bound to Port B B. The LBM packets that are sent back during the RFC-2544 responder operation are not registered by the statistical counters of the flow..  To define a classifier profile: 1. The RFC-2544 testing functions only if the ingress and egress flows use the same port and have the same VLAN settings. 3. MD level etc. 1.. Notes All packets carrying the LBM code are looped back without any filtering according to the destination MAC address. Navigate to the flows context (config>flows). Operation after Enabling the RFC-2544 Loopback Responder Figure 8-2. Specify the criteria for the classifier profile: [no] match [ vlan <X>.<Y> ] [src-mac <src-mac-low>] [dst-mac <dst-mac-low>] [src-ip <src-ip-low>] [to-src-ip <src-ip-high>] 8-6 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. RFC-2544 Loopback Responder ETX-5300A continues to forward all other. non-LBM packets. 2. without disabling the flow.<Y> ] [ ip-dscp <X>.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual When the flow testing is enabled. 0 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking [dst-ip <dst-ip-low>] [to-dst-ip <dst-ip-high>] [ether-type <0xhhhh>] [untagged] [non-ip] [all] All possible combinations of classification criteria are listed under Classification in Appendix B. When you have completed specifying the criteria. no classifier-profile(<profile-name>) deletes classifier profile.150 ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(v100_150)$ exit all ETX-5300A#  To create classifier profile with criteria VLAN 20 and inner VLAN 30: ETX-5300A# configure flows classifier-profile v20_inner_30 match-any ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(v20_inner_30)$ match vlan 20 inner-vlan 30 ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(v20_inner_30)$ exit all  To create classifier profile that matches all criteria: ETX-5300A# configure flows classifier-profile all match-any ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(all)$ match all ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(all)$ exit all  To create classifier profile with criteria VLAN 10 and P-bit 5: ETX-5300A# ETX-5300A# configure flows classifier-profile vlan_10+p-bit_5 match-any ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(vlan_10+p-bit_5)$ match vlan 10 pbit 5 ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(vlan_10+p-bit_5)$ exit all Error Messages Table 8-5 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. 4. Table 8-2. A classifier profile can be edited only if it is not attached to a flow. Flows 8-7 ETX-5300A Ver. enter exit to exit the classifier profile context. A classifier profile can be deleted only if it is not attached to a flow. Examples  To create classifier profile with criteria VLAN 100 to VLAN 150: ETX-5300A# configure flows classifier-profile v100_150 match-any ETX-5300A>config>flows>classifier-profile(v100_150)$ match vlan 100. 6. Remove the flow association before attempting to delete or modify classifier profile. but does not delete the classifier profile. Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value Classifier profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Description Not a valid value for the parameter Classifier profile is being used by a flow. 5. 1.. Using no before match deletes classification criteria. use a single value for outer VLAN ID Not a valid range of values for this classifier profile This classifier profile supports a single value only The maximum number of profiles (24K) has been reached and no additional classifier profiles can be added The classifier profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use Configuring Flows  To configure flows: 1.0 . Navigate to config>flows. If the flow already exists. 1.Chapter 8 Networking Message Classifier profiles overlap Invalid VLAN ID range This profile is not supported Classifier profile cannot use more than one match criteria for classification Outer and inner VLAN classifier profile does not support outer VLAN range Classifier profile: illegal range Classifier profile: use of value range is not allowed Classifier profile cannot be added. the config>flows>flow(<flow-name>)# prompt is displayed. otherwise the flow is created and the config>flows>flow(<flow-name>)$ prompt is displayed. 2. Task Associating the flow with a classifier profile Specifying the ingress port Command classifier <classifier-profile-name> Comments no classifier removes the flow association with the classifier profile no ingress-port removes the flow association with the ingress port ingress-port ethernet <slot/port> ingress-port lag <port-number> ingress-port svi <port-number> ingress-port mng-ethernet <slot/port> ingress-port sap <slot/port/tributary> no ingress-port 8-8 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. 3. max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Description Installation and Operation Manual Classifier profile ranges or values overlap Invalid VLAN ID range is selected for classifier profile Invalid classifier profile for the current classification key or port type Only one match classification criteria is allowed per classifier profile When configuring an outer and inner VLAN classifier profile. Enter flow <flow-name>. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. or using a fixed value for assigning a color (green or yellow) to incoming packets Associating the flow with a policer profile or policer aggregate cos-mapping {[fixed <0. no l2cp profile removes the flow association with the L2CP profile Defining swapping actions for the flow such as overwriting the VLAN ID or inner VLAN ID or setting the priority Defining window size for sampling flow rate statistics Administratively enabling the flow mark Refer to the Table 8-4 for the swapping action descriptions rate-sampling-window no shutdown • You can activate a flow only if it is associated at least with a classifier profile. Associating a Layer-2 control protocol profile with the flow L2CP profiles can be attached to certain types of flows. In ETX-5300A it is permanently set to 1:1 mapping (CoS 0 to queue 0 etc.) If you intend to use an I/O card port as an egress port for the flow.0 Flows 8-9 . no egress-port removes the flow association with the egress port See Appendix B for details ingress-color {[ green | yellow] [profile <color-mappingprofile-name>]} See Appendix B for details policer profile <policer-profile-name> policer aggregate <policer-aggregate-name> l2cp profile <l2cp-profile-name> no policer removes the flow association with the policer.Installation and Operation Manual Task Specifying the egress port.. Flows are created as inactive by default.7>] [profile <cos-mappingprofile-name>]} Chapter 8 Networking Comments The queue map profile maps CoS to a queue. shutdown disables the flow. and the egress queue block and the queue within the block Command egress-port ethernet <slot/port> [queue-map-profile <queue-map-profile-name> block <level_id/queue_id>] egress-port lag <port-number> [queue-map-profile <queue-map-profile-name> block <level_id/queue_id>] egress-port svi <port-number><bridge | router | pw> egress-port mng-ethernet <slot/port> egress-port sap <slot/port/tributary> [queue-mapprofile <queue-map-profile-name> block <level_id/queue_id>] no egress-port Assigning CoS mapping profile. as detailed in the L2CP Handling section of Appendix B. and an egress port. or using a fixed value for mapping user priority to internal Class of Service values Assigning color mapping profile. verify that the port already has a queue group profile attached to it. • • Discarding traffic transmitted via the flow Activating the RFC-2544 responder mode drop test [lbm-responder] no test no test disables the RFC-2544 responder mode ETX-5300A Ver. an ingress port. 1. VLAN Swapping (Marking) Actions Task Overwriting VLAN ID with a new value Overwriting inner VLAN ID with a new value Overwriting P-bit with a new value Overwriting inner P-bit with a new value Overwriting TPID with a new value Overwriting inner TPID with a new value Overwriting P-bit according to marking profile Command vlan <vlan-value> inner-vlan <inner-vlan-value> p-bit <p-bit-value> inner-p-bit <inner-p-bit-value > tag-ether-type <tag-ether-type> inner-tag-ether-type <inner-tag-ether-type> marking-profile <marking-profile-name> Comments no vlan disables the overwriting of VLAN ID no inner-vlan disables the overwriting of inner VLAN ID no p-bit disables the overwriting of P-bit no inner-p-bit disables the overwriting of inner P-bit no tag-ether-type disables the overwriting of TPID no inner-tag-ether-type disables the overwriting of TPID If a marking profile is used. see VLAN Editing in Appendix B. 1. For allowed combinations of VLAN editing for E-Line.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Table 8-3 lists all VLAN pushing and popping actions supported by ETX-5300A. or optionally inner VLAN tag Pushing inner VLAN tag Setting P-bit to a specific value Setting P-bit value according to marking profile Setting P-bit value by copying from the incoming frame Setting TPID Setting inner TPID Command vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> vlan-tag pop vlan [inner vlan] inner-vlan <inner-sp-vlan> p-bit fixed <fixed-p-bit> p-bit profile <inner-marking-profile-name> p-bit copy tag-ether-type <tag-ether-type> inner-tag-ether-type <inner-tag-ether-type> Comments The following VLAN swapping (marking) actions can be performed at the mark level in the config>flows>flow(flow-name)>mark# prompt.0 . VLAN Pushing and Popping Actions Task Pushing VLAN tag Removing outer VLAN tag. Table 8-4. it must be compatible with the classification 8-10 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. E-LAN and router and PW SVIs. Table 8-3. If a color-aware marking profile is applied for the outer VLAN of a flow. the traffic is classified and forwarded back to the I/O Ethernet card port with the SVLAN tag popped on the way. The aggregated EVC traffic is scheduled. either the same color-aware marking profile must be used for the inner VLAN. The SVLAN tag (VLAN 300) is also pushed at this stage.Installation and Operation Manual Task Overwriting inner P-bit according to marking profile Command inner-marking-profile <inner-marking-profile-name> Chapter 8 Networking Comments criteria of the flow. shaped and forwarded to the egress port on the main card.0 Flows 8-11 . then if marking is applied to the inner VLAN.CoS flows with policing and traffic prioritization. ETX-5300A Ver. no marking-profile or no inner-marking-profile disables the overwriting of marking profile or inner marking profile respectively Exiting the marking context and returning to the flow context exit Examples The following examples show the configuration of point-to-point (E-Line) and multipoint (E-LAN) flows. On the return path. 1. or a non-color-aware marking profile must be used for the inner VLAN. Multiple CoS Point-to-Point Service This section gives an example of configuring an E-Line application for multi-CoS point-to-point service. Figure 8-3 shows the flows to be configured for this application. Incoming traffic is classified into four EVC. Configure the CoS mapping profile to map user priorities to internal CoS values. 7.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Figure 8-3. 8. 1. Multi-CoS Point-to-Point Service Flows  To configure multiple CoS point-to-point service: 1. Configure the color mapping profile to map user color to internal color values. main card port and SAG. 4. 6. Assign previously configured queue groups to the I/O card port. CoS and color mapping One flow SAP to main card port. Configure six flows:    8-12 Flows Four flows from I/O card port to SAP with per-flow policing. 5. Configure six classifier profiles:    Four profiles for traffic from I/O card to SAP One profile for traffic from SAP to main card One profile for traffic from main to I/O card. ETX-5300A Ver. 2.0 . 3. Enable the I/O and main card ports. pop S-VLAN. push S-VLAN to this flow with S-VID P-bit and DEI values set by a marking profile One returning flow from main card port to I/O card port. Configure the policer profiles to distribute available bandwidth among flows 11–14. Note Queue group configuration is omitted in this example. Select classification keys for the I/O and main card ports. 0 Flows 8-13 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking #***************************Defining_Policer_Profiles************************ config qos policer-profile "1" bandwidth cir 5000 cbs 10000 eir 0 ebs 0 config qos policer-profile "2" bandwidth cir 30000 cbs 10000 eir 0 ebs 0 config qos policer-profile "3" bandwidth cir 10000 cbs 10000 eir 100000 ebs 64000 config qos policer-profile "4" bandwidth cir 55000 cbs 10000 eir 100000 ebs 64000 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Assigning_Queue_Groups*************************** config port ethernet main-a/1 queue-group profile 3level_1 config port ethernet 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Selecting_Classification_Key********************* config port ethernet main-a/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet 1/1 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Enabling_Ports*********************************** config port ethernet main-a/1 no shutdown config port ethernet 1/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Classifier_Profiles****************** config flows classifier-profile class100pbit6 match-any match vlan 100 p-bit 6 exit all config flows classifier-profile class100pbit5 match-any match vlan 100 p-bit 5 exit all config flows classifier-profile class100pbit3 match-any match vlan 100 p-bit 3 exit all config flows classifier-profile class100pbit0 match-any match vlan 100 p-bit 0 exit all config flows classifier-profile match-all match-any match all exit all config flows classifier-profile class300100 match-any match vlan 300 inner-vlan 100 ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_CoS_Mapping_Profile********************* config qos cos-map-profile cosvzb classification p-bit map 0 to-cos 6 map 1 to-cos 5 map 2 to-cos 5 map 3 to-cos 5 map 4 to-cos 5 map 5 to-cos 4 map 6 to-cos 0 map 7 to-cos 0 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_Color_Mapping_Profile***************** config qos color-map-profile color_all_green classification p-bit map 0 to green map 1 to green map 2 to green map 3 to green map 4 to green map 5 to green map 6 to green map 7 to green exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*****************Configuring_Marking_Profile ******************************* configure qos marking-profile mark1 classification cos color-aware greenyellow dei mapping mark 0 green to 7 dei green mark 0 yellow to 7 dei green mark 1 green to 7 dei green mark 1 yellow to 7 dei green mark 2 green to 7 dei green mark 2 yellow to 7 dei green mark 3 green to 7 dei green mark 3 yellow to 7 dei green mark 4 green to 5 dei green mark 4 yellow to 5 dei green mark 5 green to 2 dei green mark 5 yellow to 2 dei green mark 6 green to 0 dei green mark 6 yellow to 0 dei yellow mark 7 green to 7 dei green mark 7 yellow to 7 dei green exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************************************************************** #***************************Configuring_Flows******************************** #**************************************************************************** 8-14 Flows ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. 1.CoS_Flows_from_I/O_to_SAP*************** configure flows flow 11 classifier class100pbit6 cos-mapping profile cosvzb ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 policer profile 1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 12 classifier class100pbit5 cos-mapping profile cosvzb ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 policer profile 2 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 13 classifier class100pbit3 cos-mapping profile cosvzb ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 policer profile 3 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 14 classifier class100pbit0 cos-mapping profile cosvzb ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 policer profile 4 no shutdown exit all #********************Configuring_EVC_Flow_from_SAP_to_Main_Card************** configure flows flow 15 classifier match-all ingress-port sap 1/1/1 egress-port ethernet main-a/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 vlan-tag push vlan 300 p-bit profile mark1 no shutdown exit all #********************Configuring_Flow_from_Main_to_I/O_Card****************** ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking #********************Configuring_EVC.0 Flows 8-15 . 2. 6. Configure the CoS mapping profile to map user priorities to internal CoS values one-to-one. Define eleven flows according to Figure 8-4. 8-16 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. 8. Assign previously configured queue groups to the I/O card port. Select the classification key for I/O and main card ports. Define the bridge port VLAN membership (VLAN domain for bridge ports 1–4 for VLAN 10 with MAC table size of 256. Configure the classifier profile (VLAN + P-bit). Add the bridge-type SVIs and bind them to the bridge ports. 5. 9. Multipoint Service Configuration  To configure a multipoint service: 1.0 . Figure 8-4. 4. Enable the I/O and main card ports. Figure 8-4 shows the flows to be configured for this application.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual configure flows flow 16 classifier class300100 ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 egress-port ethernet 1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 vlan-tag pop vlan no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Multipoint Service This section provides an example of configuring an E-LAN application built on a four-port bridge with all bridge ports sharing the same VLAN domain (VLAN 10). Configure the color mapping profile to convert CoS values to green color. 1. main card port and SAG. 7. 3. 0 Flows 8-17 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking #***********************Assigning_Queue_Group_Profiles*********************** config port ethernet main-a/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet 1/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet 1/3 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #****************************Selecting_Classification_Key******************** config port ethernet main-a/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet 1/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet 1/2 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet 1/3 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #****************************Enabling_Ports********************************** config port ethernet main-a/1 no shutdown config port ethernet 1/1 no shutdown config port ethernet 1/2 no shutdown config port ethernet 1/3 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #****************************Configuring_Classifier_Profile****************** config flows classifier-profile class10 match-any match vlan 10 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_COS_Mapping_Profile****************** config qos color-map-profile color1 classification p-bit exit cos-map-profile cos1 classification p-bit map 0 to-cos 7 map 1 to-cos 6 map 2 to-cos 5 map 3 to-cos 4 map 4 to-cos 3 map 5 to-cos 2 map 6 to-cos 1 map 7 to-cos 0 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************** Configuring_Color_Mapping_Profile *************** config qos color-map-profile color_all_green classification p-bit map 0 to green map 1 to green map 2 to green map 3 to green ETX-5300A Ver. 4 maximum-mac-addresses 256 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_Flows_to/from_Bridge_Port_1************* config flows flow 100 classifier class10 ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 egress-port svi 11 ingress-color profile color_all_green cos-mapping profile cos1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 101 classifier class10 8-18 Flows ETX-5300A Ver.0 .. 1.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual map 4 to green map 5 to green map 6 to green map 7 to green exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*************************Defining_Bridge_SVIs******************************* config port svi 11 bridge exit all config port svi 12 bridge exit all config port svi 13 bridge exit all config port svi 14 bridge exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*************************Binding_Bridge_Ports_to_SVIs*********************** config bridge 1 port 1 bind svi 11 exit all config bridge 1 port 2 bind svi 12 exit all config bridge 1 port 3 bind svi 13 exit all config bridge 1 port 4 bind svi 14 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************** Configuring_VLAN_Membership_and_MAC_Table_Size ************** config bridge 1 vlan 10 tagged-egress 1. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking ingress-port svi 11 egress-port ethernet main-a/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_Flows_to/from_Bridge_Port_2************* config flows flow 102 classifier class10 ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-color profile color_all_green cos-mapping profile cos1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 103 classifier class10 ingress-port sap 1/1/1 egress-port svi 12 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 104 classifier class10 ingress-port svi 12 egress-port ethernet 1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************end**************************************** #************************Configuring_Flows_to/from_Bridge_Port_3************* config flows flow 105 classifier class10 ingress-port ethernet 1/2 egress-port sap 1/1/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-color profile color_all_green cos-mapping profile cos1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 106 classifier class10 ingress-port sap 1/1/2 egress-port svi 13 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 107 classifier class10 ingress-port svi 13 egress-port ethernet 1/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all ETX-5300A Ver.0 Flows 8-19 . 1. Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_Flows_to/from_Bridge_Port_4************* config flows flow 108 classifier class10 ingress-port ethernet 1/3 egress-port sap 1/1/3 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-color profile color_all_green cos-mapping profile cos1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 109 classifier class10 ingress-port sap 1/1/3 egress-port svi 14 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 110 classifier class10 ingress-port svi 14 egress-port ethernet 1/3 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Statistics ETX-5300A collects the current performance monitoring data for the following flow types: • •  Point-to-point flows (E-Line) and multipoint (E-LAN) flows at the bridge port ingress Multipoint (E-LAN) flows at the bridge port egress. enter show statistics running. ETX-5300A>config>flows>flow(1)# show statistics running Rate Sampling Window ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Window Size [Min.] : 0 Rx ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Packets Bytes Total : 26858717 3384198342 Drop 8-20 Flows ETX-5300A Ver.0 .] : 0 Window Remain Time [Min. To display flow statistics: • At the prompt config>flow>flow(<number>)#. 1. Flow statistics are displayed. 0 Flows 8-21 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Packets Bytes Total : 26657156 3358801656 Green : 26657156 3358801656 Yellow/Red : 0 0 Packets/Sec Total : 838377 Green : 838377 Yellow/Red : 0 Bits/Sec 845084016 845084016 0 Tx ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Packets Bytes Total : 282067 35540442 Green : 282067 35540442 Yellow : 0 0 Packets/Sec Total : 6209 Green : 6209 Yellow : 0 Bits/Sec 6258672 6258672 0 Peak Measurement ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Minimum Maximum Tx Bit Rate [bps] : 6143760 9326016 Drop Bit Rate [bps] : 658197792 859194000  To clear statistics: • At the prompt config>flow>flow (number)#. Configuration Error Messages Message Ethertype tag is unknown. Configuration Errors Table 8-5 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. setting failed L2CP profile does not exist Illegal value Description Not a valid value for the Ethertype tag The L2CP profile cannot be assigned to the flow because the profile has not been defined Not a valid value for parameter ETX-5300A Ver. enter clear-statistics. Table 8-5. 1. Chapter 8 Networking Message Flow creation failure: max number of flows reached Flow is in use A MIP/MEP is defined on the flow Active MIP is defined on the flow.0 . change failed Ingress I/O card port does not match SAG Mismatch between flow SVI (B) and egress port Description Installation and Operation Manual The maximum number of flows (24K) has been reached and no flows can be added The current flow is being used and cannot be deleted or modified A flow is assigned to a MIP or MEP instance A flow cannot be shut down if it has a MIP assigned to it A flow cannot be shut down if it has a MEP assigned to it An SVI must be defined before a flow can be bound to it The policer profile cannot be used because not all of its flows are bound to the same SAG The maximum number of flows per policer aggregate (16) has been reached and no flows can be added to the profile The required classifier profile has not been attached to the flow The CoS or color profile has not been assigned to a flow The CoS or color profile cannot be attached to an ingress flow. 1. shutdown failed Active MEP is defined on the flow. shutdown failed SVI is not configured Illegal flow-SAG combination in policer aggregate profile Max number of flows per policer aggregate profile has been reached Classifier profile is not attached CoS or color profile is missing CoS or color profile are unnecessary CoS and color profile mismatch Illegal CoS method Illegal color method Port classification key and CoS method mismatch Port classification key and color method mismatch Max number of CoS or color profiles for I/O card has been reached Max number of color profiles for I/O card has been reached Policer is not supported Flow is in use. originating from a TDM port A discrepancy between the CoS and color mapping methods Invalid CoS mapping method for the current flow type or ingress color mapping method Invalid color mapping method for the current flow type or ingress CoS mapping method Invalid combination of port classification key and CoS mapping method Invalid combination of port classification key and color mapping method The maximum number of CoS or color profiles per I/O card (36) has been reached and no profiles can be added to flows originating from the I/O card The maximum number of color profiles per I/O card (36) has been reached and no profiles can be added to flows originating from the I/O card Policer and policer aggregate profiles can be attached to flows originating from indirectly-attached ports only The flow is being used and cannot be modified Mismatch between ingress port of the flow and SAG number Flows originating from the same bridge-type SVI must terminate in the same port 8-22 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. including default) has been reached and no profiles can be added The maximum number of L2CP profiles per flow (1) has been reached and no profiles can be added The ingress port selected for a flow has not yet been defined The egress port selected for a flow has not yet been defined If a LAG serves as a flow ingress port. 1. it must have two ports assigned to it If a LAG serves as a flow egress port.Installation and Operation Manual Message Mismatch between flow SVI (B) and egress slot Inner editing action error Outer editing action error Inner + outer editing action error Inner + outer editing action error for bridge service Inner + outer editing action error for P2P service Inner + outer editing action error for router service Classification + editing error for bridge service Bridge port is not a member of identified VLAN VLAN editing error for a P2P flow starting from PW SVI Editing of ingress I/O flows is not allowed Max number of L2CP profiles bound to a port has been reached Max number of L2CP profiles bound to a flow has been reached Ingress port has not been defined yet Egress port has not been defined yet Ingress LAG port has less than 2 ports bound to it Egress LAG port has less than 2 ports bound to it Number of ingress SAPs has been exceeded Number of egress SAPs has been exceeded Specified queue group does not exist Flow type is not valid Classification type is not valid for the ingress port Classification type cannot include Pbit Description Chapter 8 Networking Flows originating from the same bridge-type SVI must terminate in the same slot Invalid editing action for inner VLAN Invalid editing action for outer VLAN Invalid editing action for inner and outer VLANs Invalid editing action for inner and outer VLANs on a flow in multipoint service Invalid editing action for inner and outer VLANs on a flow in point-to-point service Invalid editing action for inner and outer VLANs on a flow in Layer-3 service Invalid classification and VLAN editing action on a flow in multipoint service The bridge port must be a member of an outer VLAN of the frame remaining at the entrance to the bridge port Invalid VLAN editing action for a point-to-point flow starting from PW-type SVI Cannot perform VLAN editing on ingress I/O flows The maximum number of L2CP profiles per port (4.0 Flows 8-23 . it must have two ports assigned to it Cannot define a SAP as an ingress port for a flow if the SAP number is higher than 512 Cannot define a SAP as an egress port for a flow if the SAP number is higher than 512 A queue group assigned to a flow has not yet been defined A discrepancy between the classification key of port and the classification method of the flow The P-bit classification cannot be used for flows originating from bridge-type SVIs ETX-5300A Ver. Inner VLAN or Match All classification is allowed Only Match All classification is allowed for flows originating from router-type SVI Only Match All classification is allowed for flows originating from PW-type SVI Only Match All classification is allowed for point-to-point flows originating from SAP Only untagged classification is allowed VLAN number exceeded maximum allowed value Another classification type has already been defined for the VLAN. Source MAC. The classification type must be unique for the port.Chapter 8 Networking Message Max number of port-based flows per SAG has been exceeded Max number of VLAN-based flows per SAG has been exceeded Classification type must be VLAN or untagged Classification type must be VLAN Classification type must be VLAN or Inner VLAN Classification type must be VLAN. destination MAC. source IP. Another type of classification entry already exists for the port.or bridge-type SVIs MAC ranges are not allowed for the selected classification type IP ranges are not allowed for the selected classification type P-bit ranges are not allowed for the selected classification type A single P-bit is not allowed for the selected classification type 8-24 Flows ETX-5300A Ver. destination IP and Ethertype classifications must be unique per VLAN. VLAN ranges are not allowed for the selected classification type VLAN ranges are not allowed for flows terminating in router. Inner VLAN or Match All Classification type must be Match All for ingress port SVI (R) Classification type must be Match All for ingress port SVI (PW) Classification type must be Match All for P2P SAP flow Classification type must be untagged VLAN number is out of limit Other classification type already defined for the VLAN Classification entry already exists for the P-bit Only single VLAN is allowed for this classification type Only single VLAN is allowed for SVI router/bridge egress port Only single VLAN is allowed for SVI router/bridge ingress port Only single MAC is allowed for this classification type Only single IP is allowed for this classification type Only single P-bit is allowed for this classification type Only one P-bit range is allowed for this classification type Description Installation and Operation Manual The maximum number (128) of port-based flows per SAG has been exceeded The maximum number (128) of VLAN-based flows per SAG has been exceeded Only VLAN or untagged classification is allowed Only VLAN classification is allowed Only VLAN or Inner VLAN classification is allowed Only VLAN.or bridge-type SVIs VLAN ranges are not allowed for flows originating from router.0 . 1. Example  To configure global Ethertype tag 0x88a8: ETX-5300A>config>port>tag-ethertype 0x88a8 Configuration Errors Table 8-6 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected.  To configure Ethertype tag at chassis level: 1. the additional tag value is used in the port configuration. Note Using no before tag-ethernet-type. ETX-5300A Ver. Configuring Ethertype Any Ethertype tag. in addition to the default 8100 value. Afterwards. Navigate to config>port. 1. 2.1Q Benefits Per-port tag Ethertype configuration allows identification of incoming and outgoing VLAN-tagged frames. If the second value is not defined for a port. the port uses default setting (8100).Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking 8. Functional Description See Ethertype in Appendix B for a detailed description of Ethertype. or TPID) configured per chassis and per port is used for: • • Identifying VLAN-tagged frames at ingress Setting Ethertype value used in VLAN editing at egress. Enter tag-ethernet-type <0x0000-0xFFFF>. removes additional Ethertype tag value. Factory Defaults By default.2 Ethertype Ethertype (tag protocol ID. Ethertype is set to 8100. must first be defined at the chassis level.0 Ethertype 8-25 . Standards and MIBs IEEE 802. Configuration Error Messages Message Modify failed: Ethertype tag value is in use Invalid port Ethertype tag value Description The Ethertype tag value cannot be changed because it is currently used by a port of a flow The Ethertype tag value for a port cannot be configured to the default value (0x8100). discarded or trapped to the host. Standards IEEE 802.3 Benefits ETX-5300A offers high flexibility in handling customer’s L2CP packets. discards or peers (trap to host for protocol processing) L2CP packets.0 . and cannot be different from the one configured at system level The default Ethertype tag value (0x8100) cannot be deleted The Ethertype tag value cannot be deleted because it is currently being used by a port of a flow The Ethertype tag value for a port or a flow is different from the one configured at system level The Ethertype tag value is in use by the LAG Cannot delete default Ethertype tag value Delete failed: Ethertype tag value is in use Setting failed: Ethertype tag value is unknown Ethertype tag cannot be modified for a port attached to LAG 8. 1. a “tunnel all” profile is attached to every port. These actions are defined by L2CP profiles. meaning the flow traffic behaves. which also provide different L2CP addresses.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Table 8-6. according to the port profile. 8-26 Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) ETX-5300A Ver. these packets can be tunneled. no default L2CP profile is attached to a newly created flow. However. Functional Description See L2CP in Appendix B for a detailed description of how ETX-5300A handles Layer 2 Control Protocol packets. Factory Defaults By default. by default.3 Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) ETX-5300A tunnels. According to application requirements. The L2CP profiles are attached to ports and flows. The config>port>l2cp-profile(<l2cp-profile-name>)# prompt is displayed. 1. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Type l2cp-profile <l2cp-profile-name> An L2CP profile with the specified name is created and the config>port>l2cp-profile(l2cp-profile-name)$ prompt is displayed.  To delete an L2CP profile: 1. 2. Configure the L2CP profile as needed (refer to Configuring Layer 2 Control Processing Profile Parameters). Configuring Layer 2 Control Processing Profile Parameters  To configure an L2CP profile: 1.0 Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) 8-27 . Task Specifying the default action for undefined control protocols Command default {discard | tunnel} Comments ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Adding Layer 2 Control Processing Profiles  To add an L2CP profile: 1. Deleting Layer 2 Control Processing Profiles You can delete an L2CP profile only if it is not assigned to any port. 2. The config>port# prompt is displayed. 2. Navigate to configure port. Navigate to configure port l2cp <l2cp-profile-name> to select the L2CP profile to configure. Type no l2cp-profile <l2cp-profile-name> The L2CP profile with the specified name is deleted if it is not assigned to any port. The config>port# prompt is displayed. Navigate to configure port. 3. The peer actions are supported at the flow level only. L2CP frames are forwarded to the ETX-5300A CPU. Table 8-7. no mac <mac-addr-last-byte-value-list> removes the action for the specified MAC address mac <mac-addr-last-byte-value-list> {discard | tunnel | peer} Example  To add L2CP profile named layer2ctrl1 with peer action: ETX-5300A# configure port ETX-5300A>config>port# l2cp profile layer2ctrl1 ETX-5300A>config>port>l2cp profile(layer2ctrl1)$ mac 01-80-C2-00-00-02 peer  To delete L2CP profile named layer2ctrl1: ETX-5300A# configure port ETX-5300A>config>port# no l2cp-profile layer2ctrl1 ETX-5300A>config>port# Configuration Errors Table 8-7 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Configuration Error Messages Message L2CP profile creation failure: Max number of L2CP profiles has been reached L2CP profile deletion/modification failure: L2CP profile is in use Illegal L2CP processing action for this MAC address type Description The L2CP profile cannot be added because the maximum number of L2CP profiles has been reached The L2CP profile cannot be deleted or modified because it is currently attached to a port or a flow The L2CP processing action selected for the current MAC address type is not valid 8-28 Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) ETX-5300A Ver. or peer) Command Installation and Operation Manual Comments discard – L2CP frames are discarded tunnel – L2CP frames are forwarded across the network as ordinary data peer –ETX-5300A peers with the user equipment to run the protocol.0 . Unidentified L2CP frames are forwarded across the network as ordinary data. tunnel.Chapter 8 Networking Task Specifying the L2CP action for MAC addresses (discard. 1. Configuring Remote Peers  To add a remote peer: • At the config>peer # prompt. you must specify the MAC address of the destination device.0 Peer 8-29 .Installation and Operation Manual Message Cannot add MAC address: Max number of MAC addresses has been reached PAUSE frames are not supported Illegal MAC address for peer action L2CP profile does not exist Peer action is not allowed for portbound L2CP profile Description Chapter 8 Networking Cannot specify an L2CP processing action for a MAC address because the maximum number of addresses has been reached PAUSE frames must be discarded The MAC address selected for the peer processing action is not valid. The address must be 01-80-C2-00-00-02. instead of directly providing the necessary destination information. To configure a UDP/IP peer. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below: ETX-5300A Ver. 1. For MEF-8 peers. with each assigned a unique index number. You can define up to 1334 peers for pseudowire or 1588v2 traffic. Cannot bind an L2CP profile that has not yet been created An L2CP profile bound to a port cannot perform a peer action 8. you must provide its IP address. In addition.4 Peer Remote devices that are destinations for pseudowire traffic or serve as a grandmaster for 1588v2 slave clock entities are referred to as peers. Benefits Peers serve as destinations for pseudowire connections for transporting a TDM payload over packet-switched networks.  To configure a remote peer: • At the config>peer (number) # prompt. they are configured to be sources for the master clock used by 1588v2 slave entities. type the peer number in the range of 1 to 1334. Factory Defaults By default. there are no peers in the ETX-5300A system. Functional Description Peers are remote devices operating opposite router interfaces. The index number is used to specify the pseudowire destination. type no peer (peer number).9. ETX-5300A>configure peer 1 mac 00-20-d6-54-bf-05 name peer2  To delete remote peer 1: ETX-5300A>config# no peer 1 Note See Pseudowire Service section for a detailed example of a pseudowire configuration.9. 8-30 Peer ETX-5300A Ver.0 . ETX-5300A>config# info peer 1 ip 6.153. ETX-5300A>configure peer 1 ip 9.9 • Name: peer1.7 peer 2 ip 172. Note Setting remote peers as destinations is done under: • configure>pwe for PWs • config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1)>master 1 or master 2 for 1588v2 traffic.191 name peer 3 ip 172.192 name "peer_2" "peer_3" Example  To configure remote peer 1 for UDP/IP PSN: • IP address: 9.154.17. 1.Chapter 8 Networking Task Defining the IP address of a remote peer in UDP/IP networks Assigning a name to a remote peer Specifying number of a router instance Defining MAC address of a remote peer in MEF-8 networks Command ip <valid IP address> name <alphanumeric string > router <1> mac<valid MAC address> Installation and Operation Manual Comments This parameter is permanently set to 1  To remove a remote peer: • At the config>peer (peer number) # prompt.9 name peer1  To configure remote peer 1 for MEF-8 PSN: • MAC address: 00-20-d6-54-bf-05 • Name: peer2. type info and scroll to the corresponding section.9.6.  To display the remote peer table: • At the config# prompt.6.17.9. 0 TDM Pseudowires 8-31 .1453 (03/2006). Standards • • • • • • • Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN). 1. Implementation Agreement for the Emulation of PDH Circuits over Metro Ethernet Networks. October 2004 ITU-T Recommendation Y. draft-ietf-pwe3-oam-msg-map-10 Definitions of Textual Conventions for Pseudowire (PW) Management. RFC 5542 ETX-5300A Ver. RFC 4553 MEF 8. Table 8-8. draft-ietf-pwe3-vccv-bfd-05 Pseudo Wire (PW) OAM Message Mapping. TDM-IP interworking – User plane interworking Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) for the Pseudowire Virtual Circuit Connectivity Verification (VCCV). RFC 5086 Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) over Packet (SAToP).5 TDM Pseudowires TDM pseudowires (PWs) are an emulation of Layer-2 point-to-point connectionoriented services over packet-switching networks (PSN). Configuration Error Messages Message Peer is in use: Peer cannot be updated if used Peer is in use: Peer cannot be removed if in use Peer index is invalid Peer set failed: Maximum number of targeted peers already configured Peer set failed: Peer IP must not be a multicast IP Peer set failed: Maximum number of peers already configured Peer set failed: Peer name too long Description Cannot modify a peer that is being used by a pseudowire Cannot delete a peer that is being used by a pseudowire Peer index is out of allowed range Cannot create a peer because the maximum number of pseudowire peers (1334) has been reached IP address of pseudowire peer on UDP/IP network cannot be multicast Cannot create a peer because the maximum number of pseudowire peers (1334) has been reached Peer name has exceeded the maximum allowed number of characters (32) 8.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Configuration Errors Table 8-8 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Each pseudowire terminated on the E5-cTDM-4 can be independently configured to handle the particular type of traffic: • • Transparent transfer of data (unframed E1/T1 streams) using SAToP. 1.) can be transparently transferred within the pseudowire. Benefits Pseudowire circuit emulation technology enables packet-based infrastructure to provide TDM services with the service quality of an SDH/SONET network. E-LAN) or Layer-3 (router) services. for 8-32 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. To support voice payload. which routes traffic from the internal ports to the pseudowire packet processors with total capacity of up to 336 pseudowires per card and 1344 per chassis. Transfer of framed E1/T1 streams. Factory Defaults By default. the framing format of the pseudowire device at the destination (referred to as a pseudowire peer) can also be taken into account. Each TDM card has four channelized STM-1/OC-3 ports with DS1 capacity at 63 E1 or 84 T1 channels per interface. Note For additional information on the ETX-5300A pseudowire system. or common-channel signaling (CCS) such as Signaling Scheme 7 (SS7). For maximum flexibility in system applications. Packet structure is independently selectable for each pseudowire. The pseudowire subsystem is located on the E5-cTDM-4 cards. there are no pseudowire connections in the ETX-5300A system. see also Peer and Cross-Connection. as regular data timeslots. in CESoPSN. the signaling information can also be transported.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual • • • • Pseudowire (PW) Management Information Base (MIB). Note that when using CESoPSN.824 (03/2000). for compatibility with the various pseudowire protocols (CESoPSN. draft ietf pwe3 tdm mib 11 ITU-T Recommendation G. SAToP) and the PSN type (UDP/IP or ETH). Functional Description The pseudowire services convert TDM payload to packets and transfer these packets through Layer-2 (E-Line. ISDN PRI signaling.823 (03/2000). The traffic to the internal DS1 ports is directed by means of a pseudowire cross-connect matrix (a timeslot cross-connect matrix similar to the TDM cross-connect matrix). The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544 kbps hierarchy. draft-ietf-pwe3-pwmib-14 Managed Objects for TDM over Packet Switched Network (PSN). using CESoPSN. Therefore.0 . etc. any timeslots carrying signaling information (either channel-associated signaling (CAS). The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbps hierarchy ITU-T Recommendation G. and includes labels that uniquely specify the pseudowire source and destination. and vice versa. the Ethernet header is as follows: • • • • SA MAC – MAC address of the router interface used for packet forwarding DA MAC – MAC address of the resolved next hop. MEF-8 For the MEF-type PSN.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking example. Pseudowire Packet Processing Subsystem The packet processors in the E5-cTDM-4 packet processing subsystem perform the functions necessary for converting TDM traffic directed to the E5-cTDM-4 internal DS1 ports into packetized traffic for transmission over pseudowires. The basic format of a TDM-PW packet is illustrated below: Ethernet Header PSN and Multiplexing Layer Headers Control Word Packetized TDM Data (Payload) Ethernet Header The Ethernet header contains the DA. CoS > P-bit) Packet color – green. 1. ETX-5300A supports the following PSN types: • • UDP over IP MEF-8 (CESoETH).0 TDM Pseudowires 8-33 . default gateway or host VLAN –VLAN assigned to the router interface used for packet forwarding P-bit – CoS of PW is set to 1. the Ethernet header is as follows: • • • • • SA MAC – MAC address of the E5-cTDM-4 card DA MAC – MAC address of the peer VLAN – Flow (E-Line/E-LAN) VLAN P-bit – CoS of PW is set to 1. P-bit is a flow attribute (marking profile. PSN and Multiplexing Layer Headers Each pseudowire has a header whose structure depends on the selected PSN type. ETX-5300A Ver. P-bit is a RIF attribute (CoS > P-bit). It may also contain an optional VLAN tag. SA and Ethernet type information. UDP over IP For UDP/IP-type PSN. traffic using the E1 standards can be directed at destinations using the T1 standards. 8-34 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. the TOS byte in the IP header can be configured per PW. a PW label ‘1’ is transmitted as port ‘49153’. the TDM-PW packet structure is as follows: 6 DA 6 SA 2 Type 8100 Where: • • • • • • DA – MAC address of the next hop (taken from the forwarding table) SA – MAC address of the applicable router interface VLAN type 0x8100 + VLAN tag. optional Type – 0x800 (IP packet) IPv4 Header – the protocol field of the IP header is set to 17 (UDP) UDP Header – the PW label/s. manually configured (see below) 2 VLAN Tag 2 Type 800 20 IP Header 8 UDP Header 4 CW TDM Payload For UDP/IP-type PSN IP.0 . 1. UDP port values are as follows: • • • UDP Source Port – source PW label (1–8191) + 49152 UDP Destination Port – destination PW label (1–8191) + 49152 Classification (Rx side) .configured destination port together with both the source and destination IP addresses uniquely identifies the PW for the receiver (a match is checked between the destination port within the Rx packet and the pre-configured source PW label) Note The constant value of 49152 is added to the PW labels configured by the operator. MEF-8 (CESoETH) For MEF-8-type PSN.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual UDP over IP For UDP/IP-type PSN. For example. the TDM-PW packet structure is as follows: 6 DA 6 SA 2 Type 8100 Where: • • • • • 2 VLAN Tag 2 Type 88D8 4 ECID 4 CW TDM Payload DA – MAC address of the peer device SA – MAC address of the associated SVI (per E5-cTDM-4 card) VLAN type 0x8100 + VLAN tag. It is inserted in the outgoing packet at the UDP ports fields. a manually configured unique label which identifies the PW. optional Type – 0x88D8 (CESoETH packet) ECID – Emulated Circuit Identifier. The UDP header is used to multiplex between the different PWs. Reserved for CESoPSN signaling packets. the L bit is also cleared. 1. indicates that the source has detected or has been notified of a TDM fault condition that is affecting the data to be transmitted. it allows detection of signaling packets. only value ‘00’ for M bits is currently defined. ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Control Word The control word structure for different encapsulation methods is illustrated below. it can be pro configured to generate an AIS pattern or “Channel Idle” signal towards the local CE on the TDM trunk. and upon configuration RDI can be generated on the outgoing TDM trunk. CESoPSN: 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 L 5 R 6 M 7 8 9 10 LEN (6) 15 16 Sequence Number (16) 31 FRG SAToP: 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 L 5 R 6 7 8 9 10 LEN (6) 15 16 Sequence Number (16) 31 RSV FRG Bits 0-3 – Set to zero. L & M Code Point Interpretations L 0 0 0 M 00 01 10 Code Point Interpretation Normal situation. Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 1 11 00 1 1 1 01 10 11 FRG – fragmentation field. M/RSV – a 2-bit modifier field in CESoPSN. Additionally. it is set to zero. LEN – the length of the TDM-PW packet (header + payload) if it is less than 64 bytes. If the TDM fault is cleared. Must be set to zero.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-35 . If set. R – remote loss of frame. If L=0. Table 8-9. TDM data is invalid. In SAToP it is reserved and must be set to 0. This field is used for fragmenting multiframe structures into multiple packets in case of structured CESoPSN with CAS bundles. The payload is replaced by an “Idle” bit pattern towards the TDM trunk. indicates that packet loss or buffer underflow condition is detected at the PSN. L & M can be treated as a 3-bit code point that is described in the table below. carrying RDI across the PSN. L – local attachment circuit abnormal condition. Otherwise. The payload is received. If L=1. If set. no failure Reserved RDI condition of the attachment circuit (TDM link). Its generation rules: • • • Its space is a 16-bit unsigned circular space Its initial value is random (unpredictable) It is incremented with each TDM-PW data packet sent in the specific PW. even if they carry voice and CAS. a CESoPSN pseudowire can only be directed to another framed port. TDM Payload This section details the two payload encapsulation methods supported by ETX-5300A. The amount of TDM data in the CESoPSN packet is an integer multiple of the basic structure size (the basic structure consists of N octets filled with the data of the corresponding NxDS0 channels belonging to same PW): N – number of timeslots in the PW L – packet payload size in bytes L = mxN 8-36 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. Since a CESoPSN pseudowire transports raw TDM frames. that is. The TDM frames are considered serial data.0 . packets are formed by inserting a user-specified number of complete TDM frames (4 to 360 frames) in the packet payload area. Therefore. CESoPSN CESoPSN transports raw TDM data. CESoPSN pseudowires can only be configured on framed ports.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Sequence Number – provides the common PW sequencing function as well as detection of lost packets. 1. Maximum payload size for a CESopSN PW is up to 512 bytes. ETX-5300A Ver. Therefore. 16. and the payload can contain any combination of timeslots from the TDM circuit. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Timeslot 1 Frame 1 Timeslot 2 … Timeslot N Timeslot 1 Frame 2 Timeslot 2 … Timeslot N Timeslot 1 Frame 3 Timeslot 2 … Timeslot N … Timeslot 1 Frame m Timeslot 2 … Timeslot N The first structure in the packet starts immediately at the beginning of the packet payload. 1. 56. SAToP can be used only when the port uses the unframed mode. Where N = 8. 40. 64. 48.544 Mbps). and is treated as data payload. The timeslots to be placed into the payload do not need to be contiguous. 32.048 Mbps or 1.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-37 . and therefore. The SAToP packet payload consists of a user-specified number of raw TDM bytes (4 to 1440 bytes). Note The SAToPSN packet overhead is large.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking The resulting payload format is illustrated below. The timeslots are placed into the payload in the same order that they occur in the TDM circuit. It is calculated as N × number of timeslots in the PW. and thus only one pseudowire can be configured per port. the number of raw TDM bytes per packet should be as large as possible. SAToP SAToP is used to transfer a bit stream transparently at the nominal port rate (2. for efficient bandwidth utilization. 24. 24. any other delays encountered along the end-to-end transmission path only add to this minimum. the filling of the 32 bytes takes 1 internal TDM frame (125 ps). 16. Considering the nominal filling rate (approximately one byte every 0. 8-38 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. 96 msec.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual The receiving end restores the original bit stream. for example. 1. Because the instant when a packet is filled up is usually not synchronized with its transmission to network. In this case. The smaller the number of TDM bytes per packet. Since a packet will be sent only after its payload field has been filled. 32 (payload size is an multiple integer of 32 bytes) T1 – N × 24 Where N = 1–8. a SAToP pseudowire can only be directed to another unframed TDM port. consider the time needed to fill a single-timeslot PW:   At 32 TDM bytes per frame: approx. 4 msec At 768 TDM bytes per frame: approx. The overhead can be a significant fraction of the total packet when the TDM payload parameter is small. the filling time can easily become very significant.256 bytes T1 .125 msec). • The round-trip (or echo) delay for voice channels is at least twice the packetizing delay. having a structure suitable for transmission over packet-switched networks. the maximum possible filling rate occurs for PWs carrying 32 timeslots (unframed mode) and a payload of 32 bytes per frame. The number of TDM bytes inserted in each packet affects two important performance parameters: • Bandwidth utilization efficiency. and occurs after an essentially random delay. the filling time increases significantly for PWs with few timeslots. This process is called packetizing. a voice channel can be carried by a single-timeslot PW.192 bytes. Considering that any given TDM byte is received only once per TDM frame. 24.0 . As a worst-case example. the rate at which TDM bytes are received for filling packets is 8000 bytes per timeslot per second. Packetizing delay and the associated delay variance. Another problem introduced by packetizing is intrinsic jitter. Maximum payload size for a SAToP PW is as follows: • • E1 – N × 32 Where N = 1–8. 32 (payload size is an multiple integer of 24 bytes) All SAToP implementations support the following payload sizes (other sizes are optional): • • E1 . the lower the efficiency. However. 16. some jitter is inherently introduced. Therefore. Selection Guidelines for TDM Payload Bytes per Frame The pseudowire technology enables transmitting the continuous data stream generated by TDM equipment as a stream of discrete packets. ETX-5300A Ver. and the PDV is equal to the expected peak value of the jitter. TDM traffic suffers an additional delay. nothing prevents the actual delay from exceeding the selected PDV value. meaning the packets arrive at regular intervals (equivalent to the intervals at which they were transmitted). the jitter buffer size determines the Packet Delay Variation Tolerance (PDVT). from the far end equipment) before being transmitted to the local TDM equipment.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Jitter Buffer The packets of each pseudowire are transmitted by E5-cTDM-4 at essentially fixed intervals towards the PSN. However. the buffer size can be selected by the user in accordance with the expected jitter characteristics. Ideally. E5-cTDM-4 clears the jitter buffer. or immediately after an overrun. 1. causing an underrun. in reality packets arrive at irregular intervals. that is. However. For each pseudowire. because of variations in the network transmission delay. The term Packet Delay Variation (PDV) is used to designate the maximum expected deviation from the nominal arrival time of the packets at the far end device. separately for each pseudowire.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-39 . E5-cTDM-4 starts processing the packets and emptying the jitter buffer toward the TDM side. A jitter buffer underrun occurs when no packets are received for more than the configured jitter buffer size. underflow/overflow conditions occur. in the range of 1 to 16 ms. to ensure that the TDM traffic is sent to the TDM side at a constant rate. the jitter buffer must be configured to compensate for the jitter level expected to be introduced by the PSN. To compensate for deviations from the expected packet arrival time. E5-cTDM-4 uses jitter buffers that temporarily store the packets arriving from the PSN (that is. Then. The jitter buffer is filled by the incoming packets and emptied to fill the TDM stream. Two conflicting requirements apply: • Since packets arriving from the PSN are first stored in the jitter buffer before being transmitted to the TDM side. The added delay time is equal to the jitter buffer size configured by the user. To minimize the possibility of buffer overflow/underflow events. When an overrun is detected. resulting in errors at the TDM side:  A jitter buffer overrun occurs when it receives a burst of packets that exceeds the configured jitter buffer size + packetization delay. the buffer is automatically filled with a conditioning pattern up to the PDVT level in order to compensate for the underrun. two conditions must be fulfilled: • The buffer must have sufficient capacity. or immediately after an underrun. For this purpose. the PSN transport delay should be constant. Note The deviations from the nominal transmission delay experienced by packets are referred to as jitter. If the PSN jitter exceeds the configured jitter buffer size. The packets are transported by the PSN and arrive to the far end after some delay. •  When the first packet is received. a function performed by the adaptive clock recovery mechanism of each packet processor. and the bundle starts carrying traffic. and that it is enabled. in accordance with RFC 791 or RFC 2474.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual • The read-out rate must be equal to the average rate at which frames are received from the network. When lost packets are detected. the mechanism outputs filler data in order to retain TDM timing. little traffic flows until the connection between the two bundle endpoints is established: only after the connection is confirmed by the OAM exchange is transmission at the normal (full) rate started. throughput and delivery reliability to be provided to the IP traffic generated by this pseudowire. This mechanism tracks the serial numbers of arriving packets and takes appropriate action when anomalies are detected. the read-out rate must be continuously adapted to the packet rate. is used by pseudowire emulation modules to check for a valid bundle connection: this includes checks for compatible configuration parameters at the packet processors at the two endpoints of a bundle. which generates little traffic. It uses a sequence number in the control word (or in the RTP header. When supported by an IP network. but ensures that each endpoint recognizes the connection. Packets arriving in incorrect order are reordered. For IP networks. 1. and detection of inactive bundle status. The specified value is inserted in the IP TOS field of the pseudowire IP packets. if used) to detect lost and misordered packets. periodic handshake between the two endpoints of a bundle. In case the connection is lost. Packet Loss In order to handle packet loss and misordering. the bundle is declared inactive. The OAM connectivity check also prevents network flooding if the connection is lost. this priority is indicated by the IP type-of-service parameter for this pseudowire. Misordered packets that cannot be reordered are discarded and treated as lost. OAM Protocol The OAM protocol. 8-40 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. supported only by packet payload version V2. For this purpose. If no response is received by OAM packets within a predefined interval (a few tens of seconds). the transmitted traffic is again significantly decreased (several packets per second per connection). E5-cTDM-4 has a packet sequence integrity mechanism. as a set of qualitative parameters for the precedence. When the use of the OAM protocol is enabled. The bundle state information is collected by the continuous. delay. the type-of-service parameter is interpreted. to achieve the desired quality of service. ToS The ToS specifies the Layer 3 priority assigned to the traffic generated by this pseudowire. Each network that transfers the pseudowire IP traffic can use these qualitative parameters to select specific values for the actual service parameters of the network.0 . If the AIS is generated. 1. Structure-Agnostic Mode In the structure-agnostic mode TDM defect indications are carried within the TDM frame and passed transparently via the pseudowire connection. The first four bits of an OAM control word are always set to 0001. the applicable standards specify the methods used to report loss of signal. M-bit – 00. The following condition must be propagated: • • • TDM link failure PSN failure TDM RDI ETX-5300A uses set of flags in TDM PW control word (CW) to indicate defect conditions: • • • L-bit – TDM forward defect indication used by the local PW device to signal TDM link defects to the remove PW device M-bit – Modification indication.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking OAM packets are identified. MEF-8 – In accordance with the contents of the control word. AIS AIS PSN AIS TDM Device ETX-5300 ETX-5300 TDM Device Figure 8-5. Structure-Agnostic Mode. but use the same VLAN ID and ToS of the originating connection. TDM Failure ETX-5300A Ver. L-bit = 1 M-bit = 00 LOS. loss of frame alignment. AIS reception. TDM emulation requires transfer of defect conditions end-to-end. remote ETX-5300A ignores or propagates the AIS condition. which is included in version V2 packets (Virtual Circuit Connection Verification – VCCV). The following sections detail the ETX-5300A fault propagation techniques. In this case. using the following methods: • UDP/IP – In accordance with source port: in this case the OAM packets run over a UDP port number that is assigned only for OAM traffic. etc. PSN defects are mapped to TDM defects (TDM AIS). Figure 8-5 illustrates fault propagation in structure-agnostic mode when LOS or AIS is detected on the TDM link. This mechanism is referred to as TDM-PSN fault propagation.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-41 . reception of a remote defect indication (RDI) from the equipment connected to the TDM port. it generates the AIS towards the local TDM device. according to the user configuration. used to change meaning of the received defects R-bit – PW reverse defect indication used by the local PW device to signal PSN failures to the remote PW device. • Alarm Indications and Fault Propagation For TDM ports. the ETX-5300A sets the CW bits as follows: L-bit – 1. When ETX-5300A detects the CW bit settings. The RDI is carried transparently over PSN without any modification. ETX-5300A detects the fault condition and generates the OOS code for all DS0 8-42 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. OOF AIS PSN RDI TDM Device TDM Device OOS Code ETX-5300 ETX-5300 Figure 8-8. R-bit = 1 Packet Loss PSN AIS TDM Device ETX-5300 ETX-5300 TDM Device Figure 8-6. PSN Failure Figure 8-7 illustrates fault propagation in structure-agnostic mode. TDM PW defects are translated into TDM conditions on a specific bundle in a remote TDM link. ETX-5300A detects the CW bit settings and generates the OOS code for all DS0 channels belonging to a specific pseudowire in the local TDM circuit. L-bit = 1 M-bit = 00 LOS. Figure 8-8 illustrates fault propagation in structure-aware trail-terminated mode. TDM Failure Figure 8-9 illustrates fault propagation in structure-aware trail-terminated mode. ETX-5300A sets the CW Rbit to 1 in the packets transmitted towards the PSN. PSN defects are also mapped to TDM conditions a specific bundle in a remote TDM link. when persistent packet loss or jitter buffer underflow conditions are detected. M-bit – 00. when RDI signal is received on the TDM interface. If the LOS or OOF conditions are detected. AIS is generated towards the local TDM device. In this case. ETX-5300A sets the CW bits as follows: L-bit – 1. If the AIS is generated. Structure-Aware Trail-Terminated Mode. according to the user configuration.0 .Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Figure 8-6 illustrates fault propagation in structure-agnostic mode. when LOS/OOF is detected on the local TDM interface or AIS is present on a local TDM pseudowire. AIS. TDM RDI Structure-Aware Trail-Terminated Mode In structure-aware trail-terminated mode. 1. In this case. Structure-Agnostic Mode. ETX-5300A sends the RDI towards the local TDM device. PSN RDI TDM Device ETX-5300 ETX-5300 TDM Device Figure 8-7. when persistent packet loss or jitter buffer underflow conditions are detected. ETX-5300A ignores or propagates the AIS condition. Structure-Agnostic Mode. ETX-5300A sets the CW bits as follows: L-bit – 0. This fault propagation mode is suitable when only a single PW is connected to the TDM interface. 1. AIS AIS PSN RDI TDM Device TDM Device AIS ETX-5300 ETX-5300 Figure 8-11. M-bit – 10. ETX-5300A sets the CW bits as follows: Lbit – 1. R-bit = 1 Packet Loss PSN OOS Code TDM Device ETX-5300 ETX-5300A TDM Device Figure 8-9. TDM Failure Figure 8-12 illustrates fault propagation in structure-aware trail-extended mode. it sets the CW R-bit to 1 in all packets transmitted towards the PSN. ETX-5300A sends the RDI towards the local TDM device. In addition. ETX-5300A ignores or propagates the AIS condition. In addition. ETX-5300A sets the CW R-bit to 1 in all packets transmitted towards the PSN. L-bit = 1 M-bit = 00 LOS. If the AIS is generated. If the LOS or OOF conditions are detected. when persistent packet loss or jitter buffer underflow conditions are detected. when LOS. L-bit = 0 M-bit = 10 PSN RDI TDM Device TDM Device ETX-5300 ETX-5300 Figure 8-10. PSN Failure Figure 8-10 illustrates fault propagation in structure-aware trail-terminated mode. Structure-Aware Trail-Terminated Mode. OOF or AIS is detected on the local TDM interface. Structure-Aware Trail-Extended Mode. TDM RDI Structure-Aware Trail-Extended Mode In structure-aware trail-extended mode. Figure 8-11 illustrates fault propagation in structure-aware trail-extended mode. OOF. TDM PW defects are regenerated on the remote TDM interface in the fashion similar to the structure-agnostic mode. ETX-5300A detects the bit settings and generates the AIS towards the local TDM device. AIS is generated towards the local TDM device.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-43 . When ETX-5300A Ver. M-bit – 00. because failure propagates on the whole TDM link. when RDI signal is received on the TDM interface. In this case. in all packets transmitted towards the PSN. according to the user configuration.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking channels belonging to a specific pseudowire in the local TDM circuit. In this case. PSN defects are mapped to TDM defects (AIS/RDI) on the whole TDM interface. Structure-Aware Trail-Terminated Mode. The adaptive clock recovery mechanism estimates the average rate of the payload data received in the frames arriving from the packet-switched network. The clock recovery mechanisms can provide recovered clock signals to serve as timing references for the ETX-5300A nodal timing subsystem. The recovered pseudowire clocks can be used as timing reference signals for the nodal ETX-5300A timing subsystem. M-bit – 10. are replaced by special dummy packets.0 . packets can be reordered. it generates the RDI towards the local TDM device. L-bit = 0 M-bit = 10 RDI TDM Device PSN RDI TDM Device ETX-5300 ETX-5300 Figure 8-13. as well as packets that did not arrive in the correct order. This mechanism is referred to as adaptive clock recovery mechanism. Structure-Aware Trail-Extended Mode. the average rate at which payload arrives will be equal to the rate at which payload is transmitted by the source. Each pseudowire has its own adaptive timing recovery mechanism. in all packets transmitted towards the PSN. and generates a read-out clock 8-44 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. the E5-cTDM-4 cards have independent adaptive clock recovery mechanisms. when RDI signal is received on the TDM interface. in accordance with the options listed in RFC 4197. 1. E5-cTDM-4 allows flexible timing distribution. R-bit = 1 Packet Loss AIS RDI TDM Device ETX-5300 PSN ETX-5300 TDM Device Figure 8-12. TDM RDI Adaptive Timing For each pseudowire. When ETX-5300A detects the CW bit settings. it generates the RDI towards the local TDM device. The clock recovery mechanism monitors the buffer fill level. Assuming that the packet-switched network does not lose data. lost packets. for CESoPSN and SAToPSN. which recover the original timing (clock rate) of the farend source of each pseudowire. The method used to recover the payload clock of a pseudowire is based on monitoring the fill level of the selected pseudowire jitter buffer.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A detects the CW bit settings. Note Generally. However. therefore. PSN Failure Figure 8-13 illustrates fault propagation in structure-aware trail-extended mode. ETX-5300A sets the CW bits as follows: L-bit – 0. Structure-Aware Trail-Extended Mode. The receive path of each pseudowire must use a clock recovery mechanism to recover a clock signal at the original payload transmit rate used at the far end. verify that:   Loopback router interface with valid IP address has been configured (see Router). Ethernet). in accordance with the standard SDH/SONET terminology. The TDM I/O card has been bound to the loopback router interface. temporary changes in the network delay may still occur. UDP/IP) versus switch-based network (for example. This condition can be maintained only when the rate at which frames are loaded into the buffer is equal to the rate at which frames are removed. The config>pwe>pw(<pw-number>)# prompt appears.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking signal with adjustable frequency. This selection is optimal for voice transmission applications. This selection is optimal for data transmission applications.  To define and configure a pseudowire: 1. To provide the best possible user experience.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-45 . its type (connection mode) and a type of the PSN. At the config>pwe# prompt. By enabling delay sensitivity. you can specify how to handle such transient conditions (a capability referred to as delay sensitivity):   By disabling delay sensitivity. The performance of the clock recovery mechanism can be optimized for the operating environment. Therefore. ETX-5300A Ver. 1. If you intend to use UDP/IP PSN type. and be on a timescale that does not allow for the mechanism to fully readjust. Handling of transient conditions: even after the adaptive clock recovery mechanism reaches a stable state. Note An internal E1 or T1 port becomes active only if at least one enabled pseudowire with a valid cross-connection is assigned to the port. using card-type > bind loopback-address commands in the slot(1–4)# prompt. performance is optimized for accurate clock recovery. Configuring Pseudowires A new pseudowire bundle is added by defining its number (1–1344). The frequency of this clock signal is adjusted to read frames out of the buffer at a rate that keeps the jitter buffer as near as possible to the half-full mark. The type of PSN that transports the traffic: router-based network (for example. performance is optimized for constant delay. the adaptive clock recovery mechanism actually recovers the original payload transmit clock. by specifying the following parameters: • • • The accuracy of the original timing source. 2. enter the syntax illustrated in the table below. selecting the encapsulation protocol for the selected pseudowire and specifying the PSN type (selecting the type of PSN header) Command pw <pw-number> [type {cespsn-data | e1satop | t1satop ] [psn {udp-over-ip | ethernet}] Comments Installation and Operation Manual PW number: 1. Task Assigning a name to the pseudowire Specifying the PW label used in the inbound and outbound directions Command name <up to 32 characters> label [in <number>] [out < number>] Comments Using no before name deletes the pseudowire name Out PW label: • For udp-over-ip: Specifies the UDP destination port number used by the pseudowire for Tx PW packets (source port for Rx PW packets) For ethernet: Specifies the Emulated Circuit ID (ECID) for Tx PW packets For udp-over-ip: Specifies the UDP source port number used by the pseudowire for the Tx PW packets (destination port for Rx PW packets) For ethernet: Specifies the expected Emulated Circuit ID (ECID) Rx PW packets • In PW label: • • The allowed range is 1–8191. Defining the jitter buffer size jitter-buffer <value in µsec> Use the shortest feasible buffer. for carrying framed data streams udp-over-ip – UDP over IP network encapsulation ethernet – MEF-8 Ethernet network encapsulation psn (must be configured for the first time): • • Using no before pw <number> deletes the pseudowire. for carrying unframed E1 data streams t1satop: SAToP..0 . enter the parameters specified in the table below.1344 PW type (must be configured for the first time): • • • e1satop: SAToP. 8-46 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 8 Networking Task Assigning the pseudowire number. for carrying unframed T1 data streams ces-psn-data: CESoPSN protocol. At the config>pwe>pw(<pw-number>)# prompt. to minimize connection latency. The allowed range is 1000–16000 µsec. 1. in 1-µsec steps. 3. it is recommended to use only values which are multiples of 4. This parameter is relevant only when psn is udp-over-ip. and evaluation of the end-to-end transmission quality (as indicated by sequence errors) and jitter buffer performance. 40. 96. 384. 16. 120. 1. 192. 128. in particular when the bundle is configured to carry a small number of timeslots. Selecting the response to out-of-service conditions detected at the local TDM port Assigning egress port for L2 forwarding Enabling the pseudowire psn-oos {1-bit | stoptx} OOS conditions are reported by setting the 1 bit within the PW packet overhead egress-port svi <svi_number> no shutdown This parameter is relevant only when psn is ethernet shutdown disables the pseudowire Displaying PW Statistics ETX-5300A PWs feature the collection of statistical diagnostics. 160. 168. The pseudowire transmission statistics enable analysis of pseudowire traffic volume. thereby allowing the carrier to monitor the transmission performance of the links. By resetting the status data at ETX-5300A Ver. 1024) T1 SAToP – n×24. no peer removes the remote peer tdm-payload <value> A larger value increases the bandwidth utilization efficiency. 16. 16. 768) CESoPSN – Number of timeslots × 8.Installation and Operation Manual Task Enabling/disabling the OAM connectivity protocol for this PW Command oam Comments Chapter 8 Networking The selection must be compatible with the equipment at the far end of the connection For pseudowires defined on redundant internal DS1 ports. The pseudowire OAM messaging system is also used for transferring inband loopback activation codes for T1 interfaces. make sure to select the same OAM mode. 512. 64 (up to 512 bytes) Specifying the value for the TOS byte used on outbound traffic tos <tos number> Range: from 1 to 255. no oam disables the OAM protocol. 768. 256. Defining a remote peer terminating this PW Configuring TDM payload size peer <peer number> Range: from 1 to 1334. 192. 32. 32 (32. The values are: • • • E1 SAToP – n×32. 56. 64. but also increases the connection intrinsic latency. In accordance with RFC 2474. 72. n = 1–8. 24. 96. 144. n = 1–8. 24. 48. 24. 48.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-47 . 32 (24. 576. and could not be re-ordered.  To display the PW statistics: • At the prompt config>slot>pwe>pw(<pw_number>)#. Number of packets detected via CW sequence number to be out of sequence. or could not fit in the jitter buffer. it is possible to ensure that only current. 1. valid data is taken into consideration.0 . This count includes duplicated packets. enter show statistics followed by parameters listed below. This count does not include misordered dropped packets. but successfully reordered Number of packets with mismatch between the expected packet and the actual packet sizes Number of times jitter buffer was in underrun state 8-48 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. TDM PW Statistic Counters Parameter Rx Packets Tx Packet Missing Packets Misordered Dropped Packets Reordered Packets Malformed Packets Jitter Buffer Underrun Description Number of packets received on the PW from the PSN Number of packets transmitted on the PW towards the PSN Number of missing packets as detected via CW sequence number gaps. Command show statistics {total | all | current} Comments • • • current – Displays the current statistics all-intervals – Displays statistics for all valid intervals (without current statistics) total-counters – Displays total statistics of last 96 intervals Task Displaying statistics ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1)# show statistics current Current --------------------------------------------------------------Rx Packets : 354994 Tx Packets : 354995 Missing Packets : 0 Misordered Dropped Packets : 0 Reordered Packets : 0 Malformed Packets : 0 Jitter Buffer Underrun : 0 Table 8-10. Number of packets detected via CW sequence number to be out of sequence.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual the desired instant. Table 8-11. enter clear-statistics. 2. refer to the table below. Enter show status. At the config#pwe prompt. For information on the connectivity status values. The pseudowire reports loss of connectivity (it did not receive either OAM or data packets for 10 seconds or more. ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1)# show status PW : 1 Name : pw-1 PW Type PSN Type Operational Status Out Label In Label : : : : : CESoPSN Ethernet Up 33 22 Table 8-11 explains the connectivity status values of the selected pseudowire. The config>pwe>pw(<pw_number>)$ prompt appears. overflows. However. and both the remote and the local pseudowire endpoints receive Ethernet frames.0 TDM Pseudowires 8-49 . which can be displayed using the Statistics function. OAM link then reports loss of synchronization). The pseudowire is waiting for a timeslot assignment A failure has been detected at the local pseudowire endpoint A failure is reported by the remote pseudowire endpoint Unavailable Down Local Fail Remote Fail ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Clearing Statistics  To clear the PW statistics: • At the prompt config>pwe>pw<pw_number>)#. etc. The status screen appears. there may be problems such as sequence errors.. 1. This is often caused by network problems or configuration errors. enter the desired pseudowire (pw <pw_number>). Viewing the Pseudowire Status and Summary  To display a single PW status: 1. underflows. The statistics for the specified PW are cleared. Pseudowire Connectivity Status Values Parameter Displayed Disable Up Description The pseudowire is disabled The pseudowire carries traffic. enter the show summary command. enter the info detail command.Chapter 8 Networking Parameter Displayed Validation Fail Description Installation and Operation Manual The remote pseudowire endpoint replied to OAM packets.  To display PW configuration summary: • At the config>pwe# prompt. For example: ETX-5300A>config>pwe# info detail name: pwe-1 peer 1 label in 22 out 33 no oam tdm-payload size 248 rate 31 jitter buffer 10000 psn-oos 1-bit egress-port svi 1 no pm-enable no shutdown Example  To configure a pseudowire: • • • • • • • • PW number 1 PW type – T1 SAToP PSN type – Ethernet Out (destination) label – 1 In (source) label – 1 Jitter buffer – 300 OAM –disabled Peer – 1 8-50 TDM Pseudowires ETX-5300A Ver. but there is a configuration mismatch (the configuration parameters used at two endpoints of the pseudowire are different). 1.0 . For example: ETX-5300A>config>pwe# show summary PW PSN Type Out Label Peer : : : : 1 UDP Over IP 1 1 : 1000 PW Type Status In Label : SAToP : Not present : 1 Jitter Buffer  Payload Size : 24 To display PW detailed information: • At the config>pwe# prompt. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking • • Egress port – SVI 1 TDM payload size – 96 type t1satop psn ethernet label out 1 in 1 jitter-buffer 300 no oam peer 1 egress-port svi 1 tdm-payload 10 ETX-5300A>config>pwe# pw 1 ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1) ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1) ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1) ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1) ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1) ETX-5300A>config>pwe>pw(1) Note See Pseudowire Service section for detailed example of a pseudowire configuration. or rate. Table 8-12.0 Description Cannot configure a pseudowire because PW peer number is missing Cannot configure a pseudowire because inbound label is missing Cannot configure a pseudowire because outbound label is missing Cannot configure a pseudowire because egress port is missing Cannot configure a pseudowire because TDM payload size. Configuration Error Messages Message PW peer number has not been configured PW inbound label hasn't been configured PW outbound label hasn't been configured PW egress-port hasn't been configured PW TDM mandatory fields: tdm payload size/rate/jitter buffer. 1. Configuration Errors Table 8-12 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. must be configured Peer must have a MAC assigned to it PW removal failed: PW is connected to a cross-connection PW egress-port SVI must be of type PW PW set failed: Payload size is below the minimum value PW set failed: Payload size exceeds the maximum value PW set failed: PW is connected to a cross-connection PW set failed: Maximum number of PWs already configured PW set failed: PW number exceeds maximum ETX-5300A Ver. or jitter buffer values are missing Cannot configure a pseudowire because a destination peer does not have a MAC address assigned to it Cannot delete a pseudowire because it has timeslots assigned to it The SVI used by the pseudowire must be PW type Cannot configure a pseudowire because the TDM payload size is below the minimum value Cannot configure a pseudowire because the TDM payload size is above the minimum value Cannot configure a pseudowire because it has timeslots assigned to it Cannot configure a pseudowire because the maximum number of allowed PWs per chassis has been reached Cannot configure a pseudowire because its number is above the maximum allowed value (1344) TDM Pseudowires 8-51 . Factory Defaults By default. Note DS1 (E1/T1) services can be activated only after defining cross-connections. 8-52 Cross-Connection ETX-5300A Ver.6 Cross-Connection The cross-connect function is used to assign TDM timeslots for pseudowire connections. Benefits Cross-connects allow flexible mapping of individual DS0 channels or full DS1 streams into pseudowires.Chapter 8 Networking Message PW set failed: PW number fails to meet minimum PW PSN type must be of type IP in order to set TOS field Egress port can only be set if PSN type is Ethernet or MPLS Egress port has not been configured Peer must have an IP assigned to it UDP mux method can only be updated if PSN type is UDPoIP PW set failed: combination of peer and outbound label should be unique PW set failed: TDM payload size or rate invalid PW set failed: A peer must be configured first PW set failed: PW label value must be unique PW set failed: Changing this parameter is not allowed Description Installation and Operation Manual Cannot configure a pseudowire because its number is above the minimum allowed value (1) Only PWs with UDP/IP network encapsulation support ToS configuration Only PWs with Ethernet or MPLS network encapsulation require egress port configuration Cannot configure a pseudowire because its egress port has not been configured Cannot configure a pseudowire because its peer does not have an IP address assigned to it Only PWs with UDP/IP network encapsulation support UDP multiplexing method configuration Cannot configure a pseudowire because its peer/outbound label combination is not unique Cannot configure a pseudowire because selected TDM payload type or rate value is not valid Cannot configure a pseudowire because no PW peer has been configured yet Cannot configure a pseudowire because PW label value is already in use Cannot modify pseudowire parameters when a PW is not shut down 8. there are no cross-connections in the ETX-5300A system. 1.0 . Task Establishing crossconnection between this pseudowire and timeslots on the ds1 port Command pw-tdm pw <pw number> ds1 <slot>/<port> [time-slots <ts list>] Comments Timeslots in a list can be separated by a comma or given as a range.3. At the config# prompt. • Configuring Cross-Connection  To configure a pw-tdm cross connection: 1. 8. Configure the cross connection as illustrated and explained below. and is therefore relevant only when using a framed mode with CESoPSN pseudowires DS1 (TDM) cross-connect mode –used when necessary to transparently transfer entire E1 or T1 streams into SAToP pseudowires. 5. enter cross-connect or cr. Using no before the command removes the cross-connection Examples Cross-Connection  To assign timeslots 1–6.. selectable at the level of the individual E1 and T1 port: • DS0 cross-connect mode –used when necessary to control the routing of individual timeslots. 1.0 Cross-Connection 8-53 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Functional Description The ETX-5300A cross-connect matrix supports two types of cross-connect. for example: 1. and 10–15: • • PW number 1 E1 interface 1 in TDM port 1 of E5-cTDM-4 card installed in slot 1 ETX-5300A Ver. 2. The config>cross-connect# prompt appears. #****************************Provisioning_I/O_TDM_Card*********************** configure slot 1 card-type sdh-sonet oc-3-ch-4 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*********************Activating_Ethernet_Port_1_on_Main_Card_A************** configure port ethernet main-a/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************Activating_SDH_SONET_Port_1_on_TDM_Card_in_Slot_1 ************ configure port sdh-sonet 1/1 tx-clock-source domain 1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_Clock_Domain**************************** configure system clock domain 1 source 1 rx-port sdh-sonet 1/1 quality-level prs wait-to-restore 0 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*********************Configuring_Pseudowire_Peer**************************** configure peer 1 mac 00-20-d2-31-bf-01 name IPmux216 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*********************Configuring_Classifier_Profile************************* config flows classifier-profile classAll match-any match all exit all config flows classifier-profile class1000 match-any 8-54 Cross-Connection ETX-5300A Ver.31] pw-tdm pw 3 t1 2/1/1 [1..15]  To remove PW1: ETX-5300A>config>cross-connect# no pw-tdm pw 1  To display information on all assigned timeslots: ETX-5300A>config>cross-connect# info pw-tdm pw 1 e1 1/1/1 [1.4] Pseudowire Service The following script illustrates the configuration of point-to-point L2 pseudowire service for unframed T1. 1.6.0 ...8..Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A>config>cross-connect# pw-tdm pw 1 e1 1/1/1 time-slots [1. 8.. 10. 1.0 Cross-Connection 8-55 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking match vlan 1000 exit all config flows classifier-profile class2000 match-any match vlan 2000 exit all config flows classifier-profile class3000 match-any match vlan 3000 exit all config flows classifier-profile class4000 match-any match vlan 4000 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #********************Assigning_Queue_Group_Profile*************************** configure port ethernet main-a/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*************************Selecting_Classification_Key*********************** config port ethernet main-a/1 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***********************Configuring_Marking_Profile************************** config qos marking-profile mark1 classification cos color-aware green-yellow dei mapping mark 0 green to 7 dei green mark 1 green to 6 dei green mark 2 green to 5 dei green mark 3 green to 4 dei green mark 4 green to 3 dei green mark 5 green to 2 dei green mark 6 green to 1 dei green mark 7 green to 0 dei green exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*****************************Configuring_SVI******************************** configure port svi 1 pw name pw-dataS1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*****************************Configuring_T1********************************* configure port t1 1/1/1 line-type unframed tx-clock-source domain 1 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*****************************Configuring_Pseudowire************************* configure pwe ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual pw 1 type t1satop psn ethernet label in 1 out 1 peer 1 egress-port svi 1 tdm-payload size 96 jitter-buffer 3000 no oam no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************Configuring_Cross-Connect************************* configure cross-connect pw-tdm pw 1 t1 1/1/1 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_T1_to_Ethernet_Flow********************* configure flows flow 1 classifier classAll ingress-port svi 1 egress-port ethernet main-a/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 vlan-tag push vlan 1000 p-bit profile mark1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_Ethernet_to_T1_Flow********************* configure flows flow 2 classifier class1000 ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 egress-port svi 1 vlan-tag pop vlan no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Configuration Errors Table 8-13 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Configuration Error Messages Message PW XC set failed: Only one PW can be configured on an Unframed port PW XC set failed: Timeslots do not match with PW payload size and rate Description Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because unframed ports support only a single PW Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because there is a mismatch between the number of assigned timeslots and the selected PW TDM payload size or rate 8-56 Cross-Connection ETX-5300A Ver. Table 8-13.0 . 1. 0 Bridge 8-57 . Functional Description A bridge is a forwarding entity used by ETX-5300A for delivering E-LAN services in multipoint-to-multipoint topology and G.1D. 802. 1. Factory Defaults By default. With up to 32 bridge instances. Standards IEEE 802.7 Bridge The ETX-5300A bridge is a VLAN-aware Layer-2 forwarding entity.Installation and Operation Manual Message PW XC set failed: The timeslot belongs to another bundle Pw-TDM cross-connection failed: Timeslot(s) out of range Pw-TDM cross-connection failed: PW type doesn't match card configured in slot PW XC set failed: card in specified slot must be of type TDM PW XC create failed: more than one multi-service card cannot use same the SVI PW XC set failed: Mismatch between port line-type (unframed) and pw type (cespsn-data) PW XC set failed: Mismatch between port line-type (framed) and pw type (SAToP) PW XC set failed: Mismatch between port interface type and PW type PW XC set failed: only 1 PW can be configured per port Description Chapter 8 Networking Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because a timeslot is already assigned to another PW Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because there is a mismatch between the number of timeslots and the PW type Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because there is a mismatch between a PW type and a card configured for the slot Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because an Ethernet card has been configured in the chassis slot Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because only one TDM card can use a single SVI Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because a PW type (CESoPSN) requires a framed line type Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because a PW type (SAToP) requires an unframed line type Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because there is a mismatch between an interface type (E1 or T1) and a PW type (e1satop or t1satop) Cannot configure a timeslot cross-connection because only one PW can be configured for this port type 8.8032 ring protection. ETX-5300A Ver.1Q Benefits Bridge is used to deliver EPLAN and EVPLAN (any-to-any) services. no bridge instances exist in the ETX-5300A system. ETX-5300A provides up to 128 bridge ports. 1.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual The bridge operates in VLAN-aware mode (IVL) with ingress filtering. bridge ports and a VLAN membership table that specifies which bridge ports are members in a certain broadcast domain (VLAN). a frame’s VID must be configured as a part of the bridge port VLAN member set. Different flows from one physical port can be mapped to bridge ports on different bridge instances. Note Currently. MAC address aging time is configured per chassis in the range of 300 (default) to 3600 seconds. as shown in the figure below: Bridge Port Bridge Figure 8-14. different flows from the same physical port cannot be mapped to the same bridge port and broadcast domain (VLAN): VID A VID B Port VID C Push C Bridge Figure 8-15. Traffic in and out of a bridge port is configured using flows. ETX-5300A supports up to 32K MAC table entries. The MAC table flush is supported per bridge instance and the MAC table list is available in a file. Mapping Flows with the Same VID to One Bridge Port Likewise. Untagged frames must receive a relevant VID at port ingress (tag push) or they will be dropped. It accepts tagged frames only. The ETX-5300A bridge supports up to 4K broadcast domains (bridge/VLAN) and a MAC table with up to 256K entries.0 . This allows editing action at ingress and egress bridge ports. Mapping Flows from the Same Physical Port to Different Bridges However. Valid and invalid bridge configurations are described below. Bridge Model A bridge is defined by a bridge number. flows from the same bridge port cannot be mapped to different physical ports: 8-58 Bridge ETX-5300A Ver. To be admitted to the bridge. MAC table size is configurable per broadcast domain with up to 4K entries per broadcast domain. ingress VLAN editing action. Tag stripping (pop) at bridge port ingress can be configured only if the flow classification method is configured to Outer + Inner VLAN. Certain restrictions apply to the type of port of flow origin (directly. The editing is performed at the flow level. Mapping Flows with the Same Bridge Port to Different Physical Ports VLAN Editing at Bridge Port Ingress and Egress The ETX-5300A bridge supports one level of VLAN editing on ingress and one level on egress. Flows Originating at Directly-Attached Port Classification Method Ingress Editing Action Bridge Broadcast Domain Untagged Push X None VLAN X VLAN X VLAN Y VLAN Y VLAN X VLAN Y VLAN Z VLAN Z VLAN X Push Y Swap (mark) Y None Outer VLAN X + Inner VLAN Y Pop Push Z Swap (mark) Z • Indirectly-attached ports:  Up to 255 different bridge ports with ingress pop action can be defined ETX-5300A Ver.  Table 8-14 specifies valid combinations of flow classification method.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Port Bridge Port Figure 8-16.) Untagged flows must have a push action configured at bridge port ingress. 1. • Directly-attached ports:   Flows with a classification profile that includes P-bit (VLAN+P-bit or outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN) cannot be bound to a bridge port. the flow must be classified with two VLANs. (If pop action exists. and flow VID for flows originating at directly-attached ports.or indirectlyattached) and flow classification method. see the section VLAN Editing in Appendix B. Table 8-14. For details.0 Bridge 8-59 . Table 8-15. Adding and configuring a bridge instance (1–32) 2. Configure the bridge as illustrated and explained below. ingress VLAN editing action.0 . Binding bridge ports to SVIs 3. Command aging-time <300–600> clear-mac-table Comments Defining aging time for MAC table entries (seconds) Clearing addresses in MAC table 8-60 Bridge ETX-5300A Ver. 1. A bridge instance with the specified number is created and the config>bridge(1)# prompt is displayed. Deleting Bridge Elements Deletion of bridge elements is performed in the following manner: • • • All flows on the VLAN must be deleted before a VLAN member can be deleted from a bridge port.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Table 8-15 specifies valid combinations of flow classification method. Adding VLANs and defining bridge ports as egress tagged VLAN members. 2. and flow VID for flows originating at indirectly-attached ports. All VLAN members of a bridge port must be deleted before the bridge port can be deleted.  To configure a bridge: 1. Flows Originating at Indirectly-Attached Ports (via SAP) Classification Method Ingress Editing Action Bridge Broadcast Domain Match All Outer VLAN X Outer VLAN X + Inner VLAN Y Swap (mark) X Push X None Pop VLAN X VLAN X VLAN X VLAN Y Note All flows from the same SAP must have the same classification mode. All bridge ports must be deleted before the bridge can be deleted. At the configure prompt. Note Task Using no before bridge (bridge_number) deletes a bridge instance. enter bridge followed by bridge number (1–32). Configuring Bridge Bridge configuration includes the following steps: 1. no before the command deletes VLAN membership for the bridge port. which provides information on static addresses. at the config>bridge(bridge_number)>vlan(vlan_number)# prompt.0 Bridge 8-61 . Task Binding bridge port to a bridgetype SVI Assigning a name to bridge port Command bind svi <svi_number> no bind svi <svi_number> name <value> no name Enabling the bridge port Displaying bridge port status no shutdown show status Comments no bind svi (svi_number). deletes a bridge port no vlan (VLAN_number).Installation and Operation Manual Task Configuring bridge ports. no name deletes VLAN name Comments Displaying MAC Address Table You can display an ETX-5300A MAC table. deletes a VLAN Adding VLAN ID after the show mac-address-table all displays MAC table only for selected VLAN Displaying VLAN information show vlans The following marking actions can be performed at the port level. Task Defining maximum MAC table size supported by the VLAN Assigning a name to VLAN Command maximum-mac-addresses <64 | 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096> name <value> no name Defining bridge ports as egress tagged VLAN members tagged-egress<bridge_port_number> no tagged-egress <bridge_port_number> Bridge ports in a list can be separated by a comma or given as a range. 5. ETX-5300A Ver. see below Configuring VLAN membership. see below Displaying MAC address table Command port <1–128> no port <1–128> vlan <1–4094> show mac-address-table all [vlan-id] Chapter 8 Networking Comments no port (port_number).3. unbinds bridge port from SVI no name deletes bridge port name shutdown disables the bridge port The following marking actions can be performed at the vlan membership level. bridge ports and VLANs associated with them. 1. for example: 1. at the config>bridge(bridge_number)>port(port_number)# prompt.. See File Operations in Chapter 10. The MAC address table is displayed. The VLAN information is displayed. To view the whole MAC table. if Ethernet ring protection is configured. download it to your PC. VLAN ERP role. Note ETX-5300A displays only first 100 entries. enter show mac-address-table all.. enter show vlans. 1.  To display VLAN information: • At the config>bridge(bridge_number)# prompt. ETX-5300A>config>bridge(1)# show mac-address-table all vlan 100 VLAN MAC Address Port Status --------------------------------------------------------------100 00:00:11:00:00:01 1 dynamic 100 00:00:11:00:00:02 1 dynamic Displaying VLAN Information VLAN information includes port name.0 . using SFTP. The MAC address table for the selected VLAN is displayed. and. egress tagged VLAN members. ETX-5300A>config>bridge(1)# show mac-address-table all VLAN MAC Address Port Status --------------------------------------------------------------100 00:00:11:00:00:01 1 dynamic 100 00:00:11:00:00:02 1 dynamic 200 00:00:11:00:00:01 1 dynamic 200 00:00:11:00:00:02 1 dynamic 300 00:00:11:00:00:01 1 dynamic 300 00:00:11:00:00:02 1 dynamic 400 00:00:11:00:00:01 1 dynamic 400 00:00:11:00:00:02 1 dynamic  To display MAC address table for a specific VLAN: • At the config>bridge(bridge_number)# prompt.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual  To display MAC address table: • At the config>bridge(bridge_number)# prompt. including their roles in Ethernet protection rings. enter show mac-address-table all vlan-id. ERP status and source of local signal failure.4 Ring : 1 East : 1 West : 2 Data Displaying Bridge Port Status You can display status of ETX-5300A bridge ports. ETX-5300A>config>bridge(1)# show vlans VLAN ID : 20 Name : vlan_20 Tagged Ports : 1. 8-62 Bridge ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A>config>bridge(1)>port(1)# show status Name : Bridge Port-1-1 Administrative Status : Up Operational Status : UP ERP Ring : 1 East ERP Status : Forward Local SF Source : Not Applicable Example Flow configuration example (see Multipoint Service) includes bridge configuration procedure.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking  To display bridge port status: • At the config>bridge(bridge_number)>port(port_number)# prompt. enter show status. The bridge port status information is displayed.0 Bridge 8-63 . 1. Configuration Errors Table 8-16 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Table 8-16. Configuration Error Messages Message Modify failed: shut down the port before modification Modify failed: bridge port is bound Modify failed: bridge port is bound to ERP Modify failed: VLAN does not exist Modify failed: no bridge ports are configured to be this VLAN members Modify failed: max number of bridge instances has been reached Modify failed: max number of VLANs has been reached Modify failed: VLAN is used for RAPS messaging in ERP Modify failed: VLAN is used as data VLAN in ERP Modify failed: VLAN index is out of range Modify failed: only bound bridge ports can be activated Description Active bridge ports cannot be modified Bound bridge ports cannot be modified ERP-bound bridge ports cannot be modified VLAN cannot be modified because it does not exist VLAN with no bridge ports attached to it cannot be modified Maximum number of bridge instances per chassis (32) has been reached Maximum number of broadcast domains (4K) has been reached VLAN cannot be modified because it is used as a messaging VLAN in ERP VLAN cannot be modified because it is used as a data VLAN in ERP VLAN numbering index is out of allowed range Bridge ports must be bound to SVIs prior to their activation ETX-5300A Ver. 8-64 Router ETX-5300A Ver. A router interface can be activated only if it has active ingress and egress flows connected to it.Chapter 8 Networking Message Modify failed: bridge port must be shut down Modify failed: bridge has active ports or VLANs Modify failed: bridge port index is out of range Description Installation and Operation Manual Active bridge ports cannot be modified Bridge entity has active ports or VLANs Bridge port index is out of allowed range 8. to delete or deactivate flows connected to a router SVI. 1. Standards RFC 4292 Benefits The router is used for segmenting a LAN. there is one router instance in the ETX-5300A system.8 Router The ETX-5300A static router is a Layer-3 interworking device that forwards traffic between its interfaces. the RIF must be deactivated first. The router is also used as a forwarding plane for UDP/IP TDM pseudowires and 1580v2 entities. up to 1K of routing table and up to 1000 ARP table entries.0 . Each router interface is assigned an IP address and can be bound to one of the following: • • • Physical port on Ethernet I/O or main card Bridge port Virtual loopback address on a router interface on a TDM pseudowire card for UDP/IP forwarding or IEEE 1588v2 master or slave entity. Likewise. ETX-5300A supports a single router instance with up to 128 router interfaces (RIFs). Functional Description The ETX-5300A static router is an internal interworking device that forwards traffic between its interfaces. increasing network performance. and making packet forwarding more efficient. Factory Defaults By default. one per main card). which can connect to: • • TDM pseudowire card for UDP/IP-encapsulated PW traffic (up to four loopback addresses) IEEE 1588v2 master and slave entities on main cards for Precision Timing Protocol traffic (one or two loopback addresses. Such connections are also made via SVIs. Connection is always made by directing flows from a port to a Service Virtual Interface (SVI). if it is configured to accept management traffic. Router Connection to Physical and Bridge Ports Management ETX-5300A can be managed via any router interface.8032 Ethernet ring. ETX-5300A SVI User RIF Router NET RIF SVI SVI LB IP SVI SVI User BP Bridge User SVI BP BP SVI NET BP BP SVI OOB Figure 8-17. such as G. 1. Figure 8-17 illustrates a RIF-to-BP connection. Loopback Router Interfaces Any router interface can be declared a loopback type. ETX-5300A Ver. and then binding the SVI to a RIF.0 Router 8-65 . a router interface must be connected to a bridge port. OOB) and indirectly-attached (User) ports. ETX-5300A supports up to six virtual loopback addresses. When adding Layer-3 services to Layer-2 topology.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Connection to Physical and Bridge Ports Figure 8-17 illustrates the connection of router interfaces (RIFs) to directlyattached (NET. RIF management modes are as follows: • • • Disabled Enable Allow only ping. enter router followed by router number (1). Add and configure router interfaces (1–128). see below Configuring the static route and the next gateway (next hop) using the next hop’s IP address Displaying the address resolution protocol (ARP) table. 1.  To configure a router: 1. Configure the router as illustrated and explained below. Task Assigning a name to router Command name <value> no name Clearing dynamic entries from ARP table Configuring router interfaces. At the configure prompt. Configuring Router Router configuration includes the following steps: 1. deletes router interface The next hop must be a subnet of one of the router interfaces Comments no name deletes router name show interface-table 8-66 Router ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Notes To enable connection of UDP/IP PW and/or 1588v2 PTP traffic. which lists the original MAC addresses and the associated (resolved) IP addresses Displaying the router interface table clear-arp-table interface <1–128> no interface <1–128> static-route <IP-address/IP-mask-of-static-route> address <IP-address-of-next-hop> [metric <metric>] show arp-table no interface (port_number). Adding a router instance 2. Loopback interfaces are not bound to SVIs. Routing and ARP Tables The ETX-5300A router provides a static routing table.0 . the TDM pseudowire cards and 1588v2 agents on the main cards must be allocated the same IP addresses as the corresponding loopback RIFs. The ARP table adds entries according to: • • ARP replies received by the router ARP requests sent to the router. A router instance with number 1 is created and the config>router(1)# prompt is displayed. Loopback router interfaces must be configured prior to using them for TDM PW or 1588v2 traffic. The ARP table supports up to 1000 dynamic entries with a 20-minute refresh. 2. The ARP table is displayed. enter show routing-table. 1. next hop IP address. including destination IP address/mask. Router 8-67 . protocol and metric (route cost).15. Task Defining router interface to be of the loopback type Assigning an IP address and a subnet mask to the router interface Binding router interface to an SVI or out-of-band management Ethernet port Configuring interface management access Command loopback address <IP-address/IP-mask> Comments bind svi <port-number> bind mng-ethernet <slot/port> no bind management-access {allow-all | allow-ping} no management-access no bind removes RIF link to SVI or management Ethernet port no management-access disables management via RIF Assigning a name to the router interface Administratively enabling router interface Displaying interface status name <interface-name> no shutdown show status shutdown disables the interface Displaying ARP Table You can display the Address Resolution Protocol table with original MAC addresses and resolved IP addresses. ETX-5300A>config>router(1)# show arp-table IP Address MAC Address Status --------------------------------------------------------------15.55 00-20-D2-55-44-33 Dynamic Displaying Routing Table The routing table stores the routes to network destinations.15.0 At the config>router(1)# prompt. outgoing port. at the config>router(1)>interface(interface_number)# prompt.  To display ARP table: • At the config>router(1)# prompt.Installation and Operation Manual Task Displaying the routing table Command show routing-table Chapter 8 Networking Comments The following marking actions can be performed at the interface level.  To display the routing table: • ETX-5300A Ver. enter show arp-table. enter show interface-table.15.124/24 Default Router : -- Example Figure 8-18 and script below illustrate configuration of router with one router interface connected to a bridge port. 1. The interface table is displayed.15. bound interfaces and statuses.0. enter show status.0 svi 1 Local 1 Displaying Interface Table You can display a list of configured router interfaces. The interface status information is displayed.0 .  To display router interface status: • In the config>router(1)>interface(interface_number)# prompt.15. ETX-5300A>config>router(1)>interface(1)# show status IP Address : 15. ETX-5300A>config>router(1)# show interface-table Interface Name Admin Bound to Port Status Port Status --------------------------------------------------------------1 15.15.0.15.15.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual The routing table is displayed.  To display interface table: • At the config>router(1)# prompt.124/24 0. including their IP addresses/masks. 8-68 Router ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A>config>router(1)# show routing-table IP Address/Mask Next Hop Port Protocol Metric --------------------------------------------------------------15.124/24 Up svi 1 Up IP Address/Mask Displaying Router Interface Status You can display information on IP addresses router interface and DHCP server (if DHCP client for this RIF is enabled). 1 Port 3 Fl. 5. Configure seven SVIs (four router-type and three bridge-type). Add bridge 1 with three tagged bridge ports (VLAN 20) and bind them to bridge-type SVIs. 6 Port 4 SVI 2 Fl.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Port 1 Fl. 10 SVI 6 BP 2 SVI 5 BP 1 Bridge BP 3 SVI 7 Fl. 11 Port 1 Fl. 3 Port 4 SVI 4 Fl. 8 Port 3 Fl. 2 Fl. 4 Main Ethernet Card A Figure 8-18. Router-over-Bridge Service  To configure router interfaces and bridge ports: 1. 2. Assign previously configured queue group profiles to main card ports. 1. Use default CoS mapping and color mapping profiles (color –green. Configure four classifier profiles:   One profile (untagged) for traffic from main card A to router One profile (match all) for traffic:  From router to main card A From router to main card B From router to bridge     One profile (VLAN 600) for traffic from main card B to router One profile (VLAN 20) for traffic:  From bridge to router From bridge to main card A From bridge to main card B From main card B to bridge. 7 SVI 1 RIF 1 RIF 4 Router RIF 2 RIF 3 Main Ethernet Card B Fl. 3. 4. Note Queue group configuration is omitted in this example. 5 SVI 3 Fl. ETX-5300A Ver. 9 Fl. 12 Port 2 Port 2 Fl.0 Router 8-69 . Enable the main card ports.    6. CoS – CoS 0). 0 . Configure color-aware marking profile for flows connecting BP 1 with main card A. untagged classifier Flow 2 from SVI 1 to main card A port 2. match all classifier. VLAN 20 classifier. VLAN 600 classifier. Add four router interfaces. push VLAN 20 with VID P-bit and DEI values set by marking profile Flow 8 from SVI 5 to SVI 4.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual 7. configure their IP addresses and bind them to router-type SVIs. match all classifier. VLAN 20 classifier Flow 11 from SVI 7 to main card B port 1. add static route. Configure twelve flows:             Flow 1 from main card A port 2 to SVI 1. VLAN 20 classifier Flow 10 from main card A port 1 to SVI 6. pop VLAN Flow 9 from SVI 6 to main card A port 1. #**********************Enabling_Ports_on_Main_Cards************************* config port ethernet main-a/1 no shutdown exit ethernet main-a/2 no shutdown exit ethernet main-a/3 no shutdown exit ethernet main-b/1 no shutdown exit ethernet main-b/2 no shutdown exit exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*********************Assigning_Queue_Group_Profiles************************* config port ethernet main-a/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-a/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-a/3 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-b/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-b/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default exit all #*********************************End**************************************** 8-70 Router ETX-5300A Ver. VLAN 20 classifier Flow 12 from main card B port 1 to SVI 7. untagged classifier Flow 4 from SVI 2 to main card A port 3. 1. VLAN 20 classifier. match all classifier Flow 3 from main card A port 3 to SVI 2. 9. pop VLAN Flow 6 from SVI 3 to main card B port 2. match all classifier Flow 5 from main card B port 2 to SVI 3. push VLAN 600 with VID P-bit and DEI values set by marking profile Flow 7 from SVI 4 to SVI 5. 8. . 1.3 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***********************Configuring_Classifier_Profiles********************** config flows classifier-profile classall match-any match all exit all config flows classifier-profile classutg match-any match untagged exit all ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking #***************************Configuring_SVIs********************************* config port svi 1 router exit all config port svi 2 router exit all config port svi 3 router exit all config port svi 4 router exit all config port svi 5 bridge exit all config port svi 6 bridge exit all config port svi 7 bridge exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_Bridge_Ports**************************** config bridge 1 port 1 bind svi 5 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 port 2 bind svi 6 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 port 3 bind svi 7 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 vlan 20 tagged-egress 1.0 Router 8-71 . 0 .10. 8-72 Router ETX-5300A Ver.53.52.18.2 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Configuration Errors Table 8-17 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected.10.10.10.0/24 address 10.62.30.1/24 bind svi 2 no shutdown exit all configure router 1 interface 3 address 10.52.1/24 bind svi 3 no shutdown exit all configure router 1 interface 4 address 172.10.180/24 bind svi 4 no shutdown exit all configure router 1 static-route 10.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual config flows classifier-profile class600 match-any match vlan 600 exit all config flows classifier-profile class20 match-any match vlan 20 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***********************Configuring_Marking_Profile************************** config qos marking-profile mark1 classification cos color-aware green-yellow dei mapping mark 0 green to 0 dei green exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*******************Configuring_Router_Interfaces**************************** configure router 1 interface 1 address 10.1/24 bind svi 1 no shutdown exit all configure router 1 interface 2 address 10. 1.219. invalid IP address type) The maximum number of characters in router name has been exceeded Cannot shut down or delete a RIF if it is still in use by a static route Cannot change a RIF parameter (IP address/mask. VLAN etc) when a RIF is active Cannot add a new RIF if the maximum number of RIFs has been reached or the RIF IP address/mask overlaps the subnet of an existing RIF RIF IP mask has not been configured Invalid RIF IP address is for the current subnet (first/last address of the subnet or 0. 1. invalid IP address.0) A static route with the same destination IP address and the same cost (metric) has already been added Cannot change RIF type when RIF is active Cannot activate a RIF with no IP address assigned to it Cannot activate a RIF which has not yet been bound to a port Destination IP address and IP mask of a static route do not match The metric value (cost) of a static route is out of range (1–255) The next hop of a static route is not in the subnet of any existing RIF Destination RIF defined for a static route does not exist Destination RIF defined for a static route must be bound to a P2P port The maximum number of static routes has been reached ETX-5300A Ver.0..0.0 Router 8-73 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Table 8-17. maximum number of routers is reached Cannot clear ARP table Wrong value for set Wrong length for string The static route table is not empty Cannot set value when interface is active Cannot add interface. maximum number has been reached Description Router cannot be deleted if at least one RIF exists in the system Router cannot be deleted if its ARP table is not empty The maximum number of routers (1) has been reached ARP table clear failure Invalid parameter value (e. management access. in the current subnet This address already exists in a static route entry This interface already created with different loopback argument The interface must have an IP address assigned to it The interface must be bound first The values for the IP address and the mask must be consistent Wrong value for priority The address must be an IP address in the local network The interface number is not a router interface of this router The interface must be bound to a P2P port Cannot add static route. Configuration Error Messages Message The interface table is not empty The ARP table is not empty Cannot add router.g. DHCP. maximum number has been reached The interface must have an IP mask assigned to it Wrong IP address for interface. It performs pre. 1. This QoS section describes profile creation. shaping and congestion avoidance) CoS mapping Ingress color mapping Policing Marking. policing and shaping to rate-limit user traffic according to CIR and EIR profiles. queue blocks.and/or post-forwarding traffic management (TM).Chapter 8 Networking Message The address must be different from a router interface IP address Description Installation and Operation Manual The next hop IP address of a static route must be different from a RIF IP address 8. IEEE 802. shaping. Standards IEEE 802. discussing the following: • • • • • Traffic management (queues. Factory Defaults Refer to the following sections for the specific default for each type of QoS. using advanced queuing. queue groups. and provides a configuration example.1Q. They enable multi-criteria traffic classification as well as metering. 8-74 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. monitor and enforce different levels of Service Level Agreements (SLAs) for various service types. policing and mapping mechanisms. gives default profiles (where applicable). Traffic Management ETX-5300A devices employ various traffic engineering techniques to optimize service delivery and ensure end-to-end QoS. Functional Description Appendix B details QoS capabilities of ETX-5300A.9 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A employs enhanced traffic engineering techniques for efficient handling of multi-priority traffic on per-flow basis.1p. Benefits Flexible Ethernet QoS and extensive TM capabilities allow ETX-5300A to offer.0 . Traffic Management in Appendix B details the ETX-5300A SEs and shapers supported by them. The config>qos>shaper-profile(profile_name)$ prompt is displayed. Shaper bandwidth values are different for pre-forwarding (ingress) and postforwarding (egress) traffic management. At the configure>qos# prompt. Excess Information Rate (EIR): The bandwidth allowance for “best effort” delivery. EBS frames may be queued or discarded if bandwidth is not available.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking A 3-level hierarchical scheduling mechanism combines strict priority and weighted fair queue scheduling to handle different types of traffic. Committed Burst Size (CBS): The maximum size. • • Defined shaper profiles (up to 256 per chassis) are assigned to relevant scheduling elements (SE). ETX-5300A Ver. regardless of network conditions. of a burst of back-to-back Ethernet frames for guaranteed delivery. dual-rate shapers have both CIR/CBS and EIR/EBS values. Weighted random early detection (WRED) policy is used for intelligent queue management and congestion avoidance. is shaped to smooth out bursts and avoid buffer overruns in subsequent network elements. Shaping is performed according to a single or dual token bucket algorithm (see Traffic Management in Appendix B for details). there are no shaper profiles in the system.256 kbps – 10 Gbps CBS/EBS 0. Shaper Traffic coming from level-0 internal queues and from level-0. At this stage. -1 and -2 queue blocks. Single-rate shapers are defined with CIR/CBS values only. Pre-Forwarding (Ingress) TM CIR 0–1 Gbps CBS 0–64 kbyte Post-Forwarding (Egress) TM CIR/EIR 0. Excess Burst Size (EBS): The maximum size of a burst of back-to-back Ethernet frames permitted into the network without performance guarantees. 10–512 kbyte Factory Defaults By default. enter shaper-profile followed by profile name. for which service performance is not guaranteed and traffic may be dropped if the network is congested. expressed in bytes. Configuring Shaper  To define a shaper profile: 1. 2. 1. Traffic shaping is performed by creating shaper profiles with the following bandwidth parameters: • • Committed Information Rate (CIR): The bandwidth that the service provider guarantees the enterprise. Configure the shaper profile as illustrated and explained below.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-75 . output packets from each buffer block undergo a shaping function so that the overall traffic volume from each block does not exceed a preset bandwidth value. 8-76 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. EBS = 0 is valid when EIR = 0. Command bandwidth [cir <cir-kbit-sec>] [cbs <cbs-bytes>] [eir <eir-kbit-sec>] [ebs <ebs-bytes>] Comments For single-rate shapers. max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Illegal indices for bandwidth profile Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The shaper profile is being used by a queue or queue block.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual 3. EBS burst rate Compensating for Layer-1 overhead and additional VLAN tag (in bytes) compensation <0–63> Compensation configuration is available for pre-forwarding (ingress) traffic management only. use only CIR/CBS values. 1. Defining CIR. Table 8-18. The maximum number of profiles (128) has been reached and no additional shaper/policer profiles can be added The shaper/policer mapping profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use The values entered for the bandwidth profile are not valid Congestion Avoidance (WRED) The ETX-5300A traffic management engine employs a weighted random early discard (WRED) mechanism for intelligent queue management and congestion avoidance.0 . based on statistical probabilities. CBS=0 is valid when CIR= 0. EIR data rate and CBS. Assign the shaper profile to a relevant scheduling element (internal queue or queue block within queue group). or policer profile is being used by a flow. The WRED algorithm monitors the fill level of each queue and determines whether an incoming packet should be queued or dropped. Remove the association to delete or modify a shaper/policer profile. Note Task Using no before shaper-profile (profile _name) deletes the shaper profile. Example See the Example at the end of the Traffic Management section Configuration Errors Table 8-18 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value Shaper/policer profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Shaper/policer profile cannot be added. the packet is admitted.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking A congestion control policy is defined by a WRED profile attached to an internal queue (level-0 SE only). If a packet is queued and the queue size is between the minimum threshold and the maximum threshold. • • Drop Probability 100% Max Drop Probability Min Threshold Max Threshold 100% Queue Depth Figure 8-19. ETX-5300A provides one WRED profile (DefaultWREDProfile) with the following settings: • Green packets    • Minimum threshold – 100% Maximum threshold – 100% Maximum probability – 100% Yellow packets:    Minimum threshold – 70% Maximum threshold – 85% Maximum probability – 100%. WRED Profile Factory Defaults By default. A WRED profile includes two curves. 1. ETX-5300A Ver. If a packet is queued and the queue size is between 0 and minimum threshold.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-77 . one for green and one for yellow packets. Maximum threshold: a percentage of the maximum queue depth. A profile includes the following parameters: • Minimum threshold: a percentage of the maximum queue depth. You can configure up to eight WRED profiles per chassis. the packet is dropped according to the drop probability of the particular queue size. Maximum drop probability: a percentage of the maximum threshold queue size that defines the drop probability. and. Table 8-19. Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value WRED profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted WRED profile cannot be added. Configure the WRED profile as illustrated and explained below.0 . max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Default WRED profile cannot be changed/deleted Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The WRED profile is being used by an internal queue. 8-78 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. The maximum number of profiles (8) has been reached and no additional WRED profiles can be added The WRED profile name is already in use The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use It is not possible to modify or delete a default WRED profile Internal Queue Internal queues are tier-1 scheduling elements of ETX-5300A. Assign WRED profile to an internal scheduling queue (see Internal Queue below). 3. they are combined into queue blocks. Note Task Using no before wred-profile (profile _name) deletes the WRED profile. Command color green [min <0–100> max <0– 100> [probability <0–100>] color yellow [min <0–100> max <0– 100> [probability <0–100>] Comments A WRED profile must include both green and yellow packet types Defining minimum and maximum thresholds and maximum probability Example See Example at the end of the Traffic Management section Configuration Errors Table 8-19 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. that use strict or WFQ scheduling techniques.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Configuring WRED  To define a WRED profile: 1. enter wred-profile followed by profile name. They have shaper and WRED profiles assigned to them. 2. The config>qos>wred-profile(profile_name)$ prompt is displayed. ETX-5300A supports up to 16K of internal queue profiles per chassis. Remove the queue association to delete or modify WRED profile. at a later stage. 1. At the configure>qos# prompt. At the configure>qos# prompt. Note Using no before queue-internal-profile (profile _name) deletes the internal queue profile. enter queue-internal-profile followed by profile name. weight 10 WRED profile –DefaultWREDProfile • DefaultWfqInternalQWithoutWred   WFQ scheduling. 2. 1. weight 10 No WRED profile Configuring Internal Queues  To define an internal queue: 1. ETX-5300A provides the following internal queue profiles: • DefaultStrictInternalQ   • Strict scheduling WRED profile –DefaultWREDProfile DefaultWfqInternalQWithWred   WFQ scheduling. Command congestion-avoidance wred profile <wred-profile-name> no congestion-avoidance wred Comments You can assign a user-defined or default (DefaultWREDProfile) to the internal queue.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking For a detailed explanation of ETX-5300A scheduling elements. see the Traffic Management section in Appendix B. Task Assigning a WRED profile to the internal queue Setting scheduling method Assigning a shaper profile to the internal queue scheduling { strict | wfq <weight>} shaper profile <shaper-profile-name> no shaper profile The weight range is 0–4095 no shaper-profile removes a shaper profile association Example See Example at the end of the Traffic Management section ETX-5300A Ver. 3.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-79 . no congestion-avoidance wred removes a WRED profile association. Factory Defaults By default. The config>qos>queue-internal-profile(profile_name)$ prompt is displayed. Assign an internal queue profile to a queue block (see Queue Block below). Configure the internal queue profile as illustrated and explained below. • Using no before queue (queue_number) deletes the queue from the queue block. The Traffic Management section in Appendix B describes default the queue block profiles. 1. and details their relationships to different types of queue groups. 5.0 . enter queue-block-profile followed by profile name. The Traffic Management section in Appendix B describes level-0. in turn. Note • Using no before queue-block-profile (profile _name) deletes the queue block profile. serves as part of a tier-3 element – a queue group. At the configure>qos# prompt. Assign an internal queue profile to each internal queue within the queue block (see internal-profile in table below). Configuring Queue Block  To define a queue block: 1. 4.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Queue Block The queue block is a tier-2 scheduling element in the ETX-5300A traffic management system. enter queue. Note The number of internal queues per queue block is different for different types of queue block. The default queue block profiles are as follows: • • • • • • q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_default q_block_8_queue_WFQ_default q_block_64_queue_WFQ_default q_block_16_queue_WFQ_default q_block_50_queue_WFQ_default q_block_4_SP_default. and. Factory Defaults ETX-5300A provides several queue block profiles. depending on the queue group types that use them. 2. The config>qos>queue-block-profile(profile_name)>queue(queue_number)$ prompt is displayed. Verify that you have configured all necessary internal queue profiles. 3. level-1 and level-3 queue blocks. Assign the queue block to a queue group and bind it to a queue within a higher queue block (see Queue Group below). The config>qos>queue-block-profile(profile_name)$ prompt is displayed. It consists of internal queues. At the config>qos>queue-block-profile(profile_name)$ prompt. followed by internal queue number. 8-80 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. Factory Defaults ETX-5300A provides several queue group profiles. enter queue-group-profile followed by profile name. 3. Configuring Queue Group  To configure a queue group: 1. Traffic Management in Appendix B details the exact numbers of queue blocks supported by different queue group types. ETX-5300A Ver. Queue groups perform pre. At the configure>qos# prompt. 1. 2. select a queue block in level 0. 1 or 2 to configure:    queue-block 0/<1–N> queue-block 1/<1–N> queue-block 2/<1–N> Note • The queue block number depends on the queue group type that the queue block belongs to. The default queue group profiles are as follows: • • • • q_group_2_level_default q_group_3_level_default q_group_3_level_768_default q_group_SAG_2_level_default. At the configure>qos# prompt. Traffic Management section in Appendix B describes default queue group profiles.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-81 . queue-block 0/2 etc).and post-forwarding (ingress and egress) traffic management and are subdivided into the different types. • The queue blocks must be added sequentially (queue-block 0/1. depending group type. The config>qos>queue-group-profile(profile_name)$ prompt is displayed. as explained in the Traffic Management section of Appendix B. Queue Group Queue group is a tier-3 scheduling element in the ETX-5300A traffic management system.Installation and Operation Manual Task Assigning an internal queue profile to the queue within the queue block Command internal-profile profile <internal_profile_name> no internal-profile Chapter 8 Networking Comments no internal-profile removes an internal queue profile association from the queue within the queue block Example See Example at the end of the Traffic Management section. Verify that you have configured all necessary queue block and shaper profiles. followed the name of the queue group from which you want to copy parameters.0 . Remove the queue group association to delete or modify a queue block profile. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Alternatively. Table 8-20. The queue block profile is being used by a queue group. 4. Use the inherited-from command in the queue-group-profile(profile_name) prompt. type exit to return to the queue group profile context. Remove the queue block association to delete or modify an internal queue profile. The first four internal queues in a queue block must use a strict priority mechanism Use single-rate shaper The selected profile does not exist 8-82 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. If you wish to configure another queue block. Configuration Errors Table 8-22 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Queue Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value Internal queue profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Queue block profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Only first 4 internal queues in the queue block can be strict Dual shaper cannot be bound Profile does not exist Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The internal queue profile is being used by a queue block.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual The config>qos>queue-group-profile(profile_name)>queue-block(level/ID)# prompt is displayed. Note Using no before queue-block (queue_block_name) deletes the queue block from the queue group. 1. 6. and start again. 5. Task Assigning a name to the queue block Assigning a queue block profile Binding a queue block to a queue in the next-level queue block Command name <block_name> Comments profile <queue_block_profile> bind queue <queue_number> block <level/number> Level-2 (highest) queue block cannot be bound to anything Assigning a shaper profile shaper profile <shaper_profile> Example See Example at the end of the Traffic Management section. you can create a new queue group by copying parameters from an existing one. 1.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-83 . The maximum number of queue group profiles has been reached and no additional profiles can be added Invalid queue combination in a level-0 queue block Level-1 and level-2 queue blocks can have only WFQ queues ETX-5300A Ver. max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Default profile cannot be changed/deleted Illegal indices for profile Illegal CIR value in shaper Illegal CBS value in shaper Illegal EIR value in shaper Illegal EBS value in shaper Illegal shaper compensation value Queue block name is already in use at the same level Source group queue group profile for inherit action does not exist Specified queue group profile does not exist Next level queue block does not exist Assigned internal queue does not exist Internal queue is already in use by another queue bock Assigned queue block cannot be deleted Queue group profile cannot be added.Installation and Operation Manual Message Profile cannot be added. max number of profiles has been reached Internal queue mismatch in level-0 queue block Strict internal queues cannot be assigned to level-1 and level-2 queue blocks Description Chapter 8 Networking The maximum number of internal queue profiles has been reached and no additional profiles can be added The queue profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use It is not possible to modify or delete a default queue profile The values entered for a profile are not valid The CIR value entered is not valid for a shaper assigned to a specific scheduling element The CBS value entered is not valid for a shaper assigned to a specific scheduling element The EIR value entered is not valid for a shaper assigned to a specific scheduling element The EBS value entered is not valid for a shaper assigned to a specific scheduling element The compensation value entered is not valid for a shaper assigned to a specific scheduling element A queue block with the same name already exist in the same level Indicates an attempt to use a non-existing queue group profile as a source for a new queue group profile Indicates an attempt to use a non-existing queue group profile Indicates an attempt to bind a queue block profile to a queue in a next-level queue block that does not exist Indicates an attempt to bind a non-existing internal queue a queue block Indicates an attempt to bind an internal queue already in use to a queue block A queue block cannot be deleted while it is assigned to a queue group. Chapter 8 Networking Message WRED profiles cannot be assigned to internal queues in level-1 and level-2 queue blocks Green or yellow color settings are missing from WRED profile Strict internal queues are missing from level 0 queue block WFQs are missing from level 0 queue block Illegal weight value for internal queues in level 0 queue block Illegal weight value for internal queues in level 1 queue block Illegal number of internal queues Dual shaper cannot be bound to level 0 queue block Dual shaper cannot be bound to level 1 queue block Cannot be bound to internal queues in level-1 and level-2 queue blocks Description Installation and Operation Manual Internal queues in level-1 and level-2 queue blocks cannot have WRED profiles assigned to them No color values are defined in a WRED profile assigned to an internal queue Mandatory internal queues with strict priority have not been assigned to a level-0 queue block. DSCP. according to a classification key used for traffic classification. In other words.and indirectly-attached ports. according to P-bit. 8-84 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. each packet is first “normalized” to a CoS value (0–7). IP Precedence or per flow criteria.0 . 1. Mandatory internal queues with WFQ priority have not been assigned to a level-0 queue block The weight values entered are not valid for internal queues with WFQ priority in a level-0 queue block The weight values entered are not valid for internal queues with WFQ priority in a level-1 queue block The number of internal queues defined in a queue block is not valid Dual shaper profiles cannot be assigned to a level 0 queue block in an ingress (pre-forwarding) queue group Dual shaper profiles cannot be assigned to a level 1 queue block in an ingress (pre-forwarding) queue group Shaper profiles cannot be assigned to internal queues in level-1 and level-2 queue blocks CoS Mapping User priorities must be mapped to internal Class of Service (CoS) values. this CoS is then used for VLAN editing (P-bit) or priority queue mapping. as detailed in Appendix B. CoS Mapping Profiles to map packet to CoS: • Ingress Traffic → • • • P-bit to CoS (0–7) DSCP to CoS (0–7) IP Precedence to CoS (0–7) Flow to CoS → CoS to P-bit (VLAN Editing) Profiles to map: • CoS to P-bit Queue Mapping Profiles to map: • CoS to priority queue (0–7) The CoS Mapping section in Appendix B gives detailed description of CoS mapping methods supported by directly. The newly defined CoS can then be used for: • • P-bit handling during VLAN editing Queue mapping. and DSCP to CoS mapping. Configuring CoS Mapping  To define a CoS mapping profile: 1. enter cos-map-profile followed by profile name and classification method: classification {p-bit | ip-precedence | ip-dscp} Note Using no before cos-map-profile (profile_name) deletes the CoS mapping profile. Map the user priority to a CoS value (user priority values 0–7 for P-bit and IP Precedence. CoS Mapping section in Appendix B describes the default CoS mapping profiles. 0–63 for DSCP.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-85 . Table 8-21. Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value CoS mapping profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Default CoS mapping profile cannot be changed/deleted Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Max number of profiles using one CoS mapping method has been reached Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The CoS mapping profile is being used by a flow.) has been reached ETX-5300A Ver. These profiles are part of 36 CoS mapping profiles supported per system. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Factory Defaults ETX-5300A has three default profiles for P-bit to CoS. Remove the flow association to delete or modify the CoS mapping profile. CoS values 0–7):   map <0–7> to-cos <0–7> map <0–63> to-cos <0–7>. DSCP to CoS. Configuration Errors Table 8-22 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. 2. It is not possible to modify or delete a default CoS profile The CoS mapping profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use The maximum number of profiles (12 or 16) using the same CoS mapping method (P-bit to CoS. Example See Example at the end of the Traffic Management section. At the configure>qos# prompt. etc. IP Precedence to CoS. applied to the same flow. enter color-map-profile followed by profile name and classification method: classification {p-bit | ip-precedence | ip-dscp | dei}. Packet color is also used by WRED mechanism for preventing congestion and for setting DEI value during VLAN editing. color and CoS mapping methods. 0 to green and 1 to yellow) Flow to color Mark all green (default). 0–63 for DSCP. At the configure>qos# prompt. as detailed in the CoS Mapping section of Appendix B. Map the user priority to a color value (user priority values 0–7 for P-bit and IP Precedence. Note For directly-attached ports. The following mapping profiles are supported: • • • • • • P-bit to color DSCP to color IP Precedence to color DEI to color (fixed mapping. color values: green and yellow):   map <0–7> to green or yellow map <0–63> to green or yellow Note DEI to color mapping is fixed: 0 to green and 1 to yellow. Note Using no before color-map-profile (profile_name) deletes the color mapping profile. The mechanism inspects incoming packets and assigns a green or yellow color value according to the configured color mapping profiles. Factory Defaults By default.0 . ETX-5300A supports up to 36 ingress color mapping profiles (12 of each type). The ingress color mapping method for both directly. 1. must belong to the same color-CoS-mapping combination.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Color Mapping ETX-5300A supports an ingress color mapping mechanism as part of its traffic policing features. 8-86 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A marks all incoming packets as green. See Ingress Color Mapping in Appendix B for details.and indirectly-attached ports depends on the classification key used for the port. or DEI 0–1. Example See Example at the end of the Traffic Management section. Configuring Color Mapping  To define a color mapping profile: 1. 2. 1.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-87 . Remove the flow association to delete or modify the color mapping profile. The final color of a packet is determined by a policer (color-aware or color-blind). ETX-5300A Ver. The maximum number of profiles (36) has been reached and no additional color mapping profiles can be added The color mapping profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use The maximum number of profiles (12) using the same color mapping method (P-bit to color. ETX-5300A does not have policer profiles. CBS and EBS bandwidth profiles. Table 8-22. Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value Color mapping profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Color mapping profile cannot be added. etc. the ingress color mapping determines packet color. 11–20) of the E5-GBE-20 card and flows from different ports of the E5-10GBE-2 card cannot share the same aggregate policer. max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Max number of profiles using one color mapping method has been reached Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The color mapping profile is being used by a flow. Rate limitation is performed according to the Dual Token Bucket mechanism (two rates.) has been reached Policing When the flows are established. Policing is implemented by defining policer bandwidth profiles and assigning them to one or more (up to 16) flows (aggregate policer profile) . ETX-5300A supports up to 128 policer bandwidth profiles (regular and aggregate) with up to: • 2K policer instances per each Ethernet I/O card Note Flows from different I/O port groups (1–10. EIR. Factory Defaults By default. a metering and policing function can be applied for each ingress flow on indirectly-attached ports to regulate traffic according to the contracted CIR. DSCP to color.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Configuration Errors Table 8-22 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. three colors) in color-aware or color-blind modes. If a policer is not applied on a specific flow. you can create policer aggregate profiles.0 . Task Assigning policer profile Specifying rate sampling window (minutes) Displaying the associated flows Displaying statistics for the associated flows Clearing the statistics for the associated flows Command policer profile <policer_profile_name> rate-sampling-window <1–30> show flows show statistics running clear-statistics Comments 8-88 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Configuring Policer Profile  To define a policer profile: 1. enter policer-aggregate-profile followed by profile name. enter policer-profile followed by profile name. 3.  To define a policer aggregate profile: 1. 1. 3. 2. using CIR/CBS and EIR/EBS rates Configuring color awareness of the policer Command bandwidth [cir <cir-kbit-sec>] [cbs <cbsbytes>] [eir <eir-kbit-sec>] [ebs <ebs-bytes>] color-aware no color-aware compensation <0–63> no color-aware enables the color blind mode of the policer Comments Compensating for Layer-1 overhead and additional VLAN tag (in bytes) Enabling coupling flag to control the volume of yellow packets coupling-flag no coupling-flag no coupling-flag disables coupling flag usage Configuring Policer Aggregate Profile If you want to set bandwidth limits that are divided among two or more flows. At the configure>qos# prompt. At the configure>qos# prompt. The config>qos>policer-aggregate-profile(profile_name)$ prompt is displayed. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Task Defining bandwidth profile. whose settings will be used by the aggregate policer profile. Policer aggregate profiles can be applied only to the flows with an ingress port residing on an I/O card port. The config>qos>policer-profile(profile_name)$ prompt is displayed. Verify that you have configured a regular policer profile. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Table 8-23. The marking is done per color (green and/or yellow) to support color re-marking. Policer Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value Shaper/policer profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Shaper/policer profile cannot be added.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-89 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Example See the Multiple CoS Point-to-Point Service example in the section Flows above. Configuration Errors Table 8-23 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a policer configuration error is detected. The maximum number of profiles (128) has been reached and no additional policer aggregate profiles can be added The policer aggregate mapping profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use A policer profile. Table 8-24 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a policer aggregate configuration error is detected. max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Policer profile does not exist Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The policer aggregate profile is being used by a flow. Policer Aggregate Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value Policer aggregate profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Policer aggregate profile cannot be added. 1. This example shows how to create four policer profiles to allocate bandwidth to four flows (11–14). The maximum number of profiles (128) has been reached and no additional shaper/policer profiles can be added The shaper/policer mapping profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use The values entered for the bandwidth profile are not valid Table 8-24. or the policer profile is being used by a flow. Remove the association to delete or modify a shaper/policer profile. whose setting are to be used for the policer aggregate profile. and ETX-5300A Ver. Remove the association to delete or modify a policer aggregate profile. has not been defined Marking Marking profiles map CoS and packet color values into egress priority tags. max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Illegal indices for bandwidth profile Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The shaper profile is being used by a queue or queue block. ETX-5300A does not have any marking profiles. Configuring Color-Blind Marking Profile When a color-blind marking profile is used. Example See Multiple CoS Point-to-Point Service example in the Flows section above.0 . Note If DEI value is omitted during configuration. ETX-5300A supports up to 16 color-aware and color-blind marking profiles. Marking profiles are used during VLAN editing procedures applied to flows. yellow) into P-bit (0–7) and DEI (yellow. The configure>qos>marking-profile(profile_name)# prompt is displayed. ETX-5300A converts user CoS (set via CoS mapping profile) and the packet color (set via color mapping profile or policer) into P-bit priority and converts the packet color (set via color mapping profile) into egress DEI value (green or yellow).  To configure a color-aware marking profile: 1.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual optionally the Drop Eligible Indicator (DEI) bit is specified in the frame header. 2. Configuring Color-Aware Marking Profile When a color-aware marking profile is used. 2. Map the CoS value to P-bit value and define DEI color as follows: mark <0–7> <green | yellow> to <0–7> dei <green | yellow>. enter marking-profile followed by profile name and fixed classification method (classification cos). 8-90 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. enter marking-profile followed by profile name and fixed classification method (classification cos). At the configure>qos# prompt. enabled color awareness mode (color-aware green-yellow) and dei mapping or alwaysgreen at the end. At the configure>qos# prompt. green) values. it is automatically set to 0. green. 1. • • A color-aware profile translates CoS (0–7) and packet color (all. Map the CoS value to P-bit value and define DEI color as follows: mark <0–7> to <0–7> dei <green | yellow>. The configure>qos>marking-profile(profile_name)# prompt is displayed. ETX-5300A converts user CoS (set via CoS mapping profile) into P-bit priority and sets the egress DEI to green or yellow. disabled color awareness mode (color-aware none) and dei mapping or always-green at the end. Factory Defaults By default.  To configure a color-blind marking profile: 1. green) values A color-blind profile translates CoS (0–7) into P-bit (0–7) and DEI (yellow. This example shows how to create color-aware marking profile. ignoring the packet color (set via color mapping profile). CoS to Priority Queue Mapping CoS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Example This example shows how to create multiple CoS point-to-point service with traffic management. CoS values are mapped into SE queues according to the default queue mapping profile (QueueMapDefaultProfile). Remove the flow association to delete or modify color mapping profile.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Configuration Errors Table 8-25 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Table 8-26. This profile is fixed and cannot be changed. Configuration Error Messages Message Illegal value Color mapping profile is in use and cannot be changed/deleted Marking profile cannot be added. Traffic management is performed using a 3-level queue group. max number of profiles has been reached Profile name must be unique Profile name cannot be changed Illegal marking profile method Mark value in marking profile is out of range Description The value entered for the parameter is not valid The color mapping profile is being used by a flow. The maximum number of profiles (16) has been reached and no additional marking profiles can be added The marking profile name is not unique The profile name cannot be changed because the profile is in use The selected marking method is not supported The selected mark valuemust be within the range 0–7 Priority Queue Mapping When an Ethernet flow is connected to a level-0 scheduling element (SE). This profile is the only queue mapping profile that can be attached to a flow. illustrated in Figure 8-20. ETX-5300A Ver. Table 8-25. 1.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-91 . 6. Assign the queue group to the main card ports. 5. adding queue blocks to the group. 7. specifying their scheduling types. level-1 and level -2 queue block profiles with queues.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual  To configure multiple CoS point-to-point service: 1. Configure the CoS mapping profile to map user priorities to internal CoS values. 8. or do not provide congestion avoidance. Queue blocks are added to queue groups in the reverse order: level-2 > level-1 > level 0. Select classification keys for the main card ports. such as level-1 and level-2 queue blocks.and dual rate shaper profiles. Enable the main card ports. Define internal queue profiles. 11. Configure 12 VLAN-type classifier profiles. Configure 12 flows from port 1 to port 2 on the main card and direct them to the relevant level-0 queue blocks. 3. 1. 10. The rest of the queues use the default WRED profile. Configure the color mapping profile to map user color to internal color values. 2. shaping and WRED profiles (where applicable). 4. Configure single. 8-92 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. Define the queue group profile. Configure WRED profiles with a small queue depth for delay-sensitive highpriority queues. using internal queue profiles. 12. Configure level-0. 9.0 . binding the queue blocks to the next level queues and assigning the relevant shaper profiles. Def. Def.1 WR. 7 CIR/EIR Shapers Level-2 SE q_block_21_queue_WFQ_10_20 2/1 WFQ 10 WFQ 20 Sh. Def. 7 Sh.1 Def. WR.1 Def. Def. WR.1 WR.1 Flow 30 WR. 7 Sh. Def. SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 10 WFQ 20 WFQ 30 WFQ 40 Sh.Installation and Operation Manual Level-0 SEs q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40 CIR Shapers WR.1 WR. 7 Sh. 7 Sh.1 Flow 20 WR. Def.1 WR.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-93 . 7 Sh. 7 Sh. 7 Sh. 7 Sh. Def. 7 Sh. 2 Sh. 7 Sh. 7 Sh. 5 SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 10 WFQ 20 WFQ 30 WFQ 40 Sh. 7 Sh.1 Def.1 WR. 7 Sh. WR.1 Def. Def. Def. Flow 6 Flow 7 Def. Def. 3 Sh. WR. WR. 7 Sh. WR. Traffic Management Example ETX-5300A Ver. 7 Sh. WR. WR. Def. 1 CIR/EIR Shapers Sh. SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 40 WFQ 30 WFQ 20 WFQ 10 Sh. SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 10 WFQ 20 WFQ 30 WFQ 40 Sh. 1. 7 Sh. 7 Sh.1 WR. 7 Sh. 7 Sh. WR. WR.1 WR. WR. WR. 7 Sh.1 Flow 10 WR.1 WR. Def. 7 Sh. 7 Sh.1 WR. Def.1 WR. 7 Sh. WR. WR.1 WR. 3 CIR/EIR Shapers 0/4 q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40 CIR Shapers WR. 1 CIR/EIR Shapers 0/1 Chapter 8 Networking Flow 1 Flow 2 Flow 3 Flow 4 Flow 5 q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40 CIR Shapers WR.1 Def. 7 Sh. WR. WR. WR. 4 0/2 CIR/EIR Shapers Level-1 SEs q_block_11_queue_WFQ_10_20_30 1/1 WFQ 10 WFQ 20 WFQ 30 CIR/EIR Shapers q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_40_10 CIR Shapers WR.1 Flow 40 WR. SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 10 WFQ 20 WFQ 30 WFQ 40 q_block_11_queue_WFQ_10_20 1/2 CIR/EIR Shapers WFQ 10 WFQ 20 Sh. Def. WR. 0/5 Figure 8-20. WR. 6 0/3 CIR Shaper q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40 CIR Shapers WR. WR. 1.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual ************************Configuring_Shaper_Profiles************************** config qos shaper-profile sh1 bandwidth cir 10000 cbs 100000 eir 50000 ebs 200000 config qos shaper-profile sh2 bandwidth cir 20000 cbs 100000 eir 50000 ebs 200000 config qos shaper-profile sh3 bandwidth cir 30000 cbs 100000 eir 50000 ebs 200000 config qos shaper-profile sh4 bandwidth cir 60000 cbs 100000 eir 20000 ebs 200000 config qos shaper-profile sh5 bandwidth cir 40000 cbs 100000 eir 30000 ebs 200000 config qos shaper-profile sh6 bandwidth cir 130000 cbs 100000 config qos shaper-profile sh7 bandwidth cir 1000 cbs 100000 eir 5000 ebs 200000 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** **************************Configuring_WRED_Profiles************************** config qos wred-profile 1 color green min 30 max 30 probability 100 config qos wred-profile 1 color yellow min 20 max 30 probability 100 #*********************************End**************************************** **********************Configuring_Internal_Queue_Profiles******************** config qos queue-internal-profile qstrict congestion-avoidance wred profile 1 scheduling strict shaper profile sh7 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q10 congestion-avoidance wred profile DefaultWREDProfile scheduling wfq 10 shaper profile sh7 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q20 congestion-avoidance wred profile DefaultWREDProfile scheduling wfq 20 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q30 congestion-avoidance wred profile DefaultWREDProfile scheduling wfq 30 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q40 congestion-avoidance wred profile DefaultWREDProfile scheduling wfq 40 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q10_no_wred scheduling wfq 10 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q20_no_wred 8-94 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-95 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking scheduling wfq 20 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q30_no_wred scheduling wfq 30 exit all config qos queue-internal-profile q40_no_wred scheduling wfq 40 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**************************************************************************** *********************Configuring_Queue_Block_Profiles************************ #**************************************************************************** #*******************Configuring_Queue_Block_Profile_L2-1********************* config qos queue-block-profile "q_block_21_queue_WFQ_10_20" queue 1 internal-profile profile q10_no_wred queue 2 internal-profile profile q20_no_wred exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #********************Configuring_Queue_Block_Profile_L1-1******************** config qos queue-block-profile "q_block_11_queue_WFQ_10_20_30" queue 1 internal-profile profile q10_no_wred queue 2 internal-profile profile q20_no_wred queue 3 internal-profile profile q30_no_wred exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*********************Configuring_Queue_Block_Profile_L1-2******************* config qos queue-block-profile "q_block_12_queue_WFQ_10_20" queue 1 internal-profile profile q10_no_wred queue 2 internal-profile profile q20_no_wred exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**********************Configuring_Queue_Block_Profile_L0-1****************** config qos queue-block-profile "q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40" queue 1 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 2 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 3 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 4 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 5 internal-profile profile q10 queue 6 internal-profile profile q20 queue 7 internal-profile profile q30 queue 8 internal-profile profile q40 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**********************Configuring_Queue_Block_Profile_L0-2****************** config qos queue-block-profile "q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_40_10" queue 1 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 2 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 3 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 4 internal-profile profile qstrict queue 5 internal-profile profile q40 ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual queue 6 internal-profile profile q30 queue 7 internal-profile profile q20 queue 8 internal-profile profile q10 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #********************* Configuring_Queue_Group_Profile1********************** configure qos queue-group-profile 3level_1 queue-block 2/1 name "3Level_2_1" profile "q_block_21_queue_WFQ_10_20" shaper profile sh6 exit queue-block 1/1 name "3Level_1_1" profile "q_block_11_queue_WFQ_10_20_30" bind queue 1 queue-block 2/1 shaper profile sh4 exit queue-block 1/2 name "3Level_1_2" profile "q_block_12_queue_WFQ_10_20" bind queue 2 queue-block 2/1 shaper profile sh5 exit queue-block 0/1 name "3Level_0_1" profile "q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40" bind queue 1 queue-block 1/1 shaper profile sh1 exit queue-block 0/2 name "3Level_0_2" profile "q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40" bind queue 2 queue-block 1/1 shaper profile sh2 exit queue-block 0/3 name "3Level_0_3" profile "q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_40_10" bind queue 3 queue-block 1/1 shaper profile sh3 exit queue-block 0/4 name "3Level_0_4" profile "q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40" bind queue 1 queue-block 1/2 shaper profile sh3 exit 8-96 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking queue-block 0/5 name "3Level_0_5" profile "q_block_4_WFQ_4_SP_10_40" bind queue 2 queue-block 1/2 shaper profile sh1 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #**********************Assigning_Queue_Group_to Main_Card_Ports************** config port ethernet main-b/1 queue-group profile 3level_1 config port ethernet main-b/2 queue-group profile 3level_1 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***********************Defining_Classification_Keys************************* config port ethernet main-b/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet main-b/2 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*************************Enabling_Main_Card_Ports*************************** config port ethernet main-b/1 no shutdown config port ethernet main-b/2 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***********************Defining_Classifier_Profiles************************* config flows classifier-profile class100 match-any match vlan 100 exit all config flows classifier-profile class101 match-any match vlan 101 exit all config flows classifier-profile class102 match-any match vlan 102 exit all config flows classifier-profile class103 match-any match vlan 103 exit all config flows classifier-profile class104 match-any match vlan 104 exit all config flows classifier-profile class105 match-any match vlan 105 exit all config flows classifier-profile class106 match-any match vlan 106 exit all config flows classifier-profile class107 match-any match vlan 107 exit all config flows classifier-profile class200 match-any match vlan 200 exit all ETX-5300A Ver.0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-97 . 1. Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual config flows classifier-profile class300 match-any match vlan 300 exit all config flows classifier-profile class400 match-any match vlan 400 exit all config flows classifier-profile class500 match-any match vlan 500 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #************************Configuring_CoS_Mapping_Profile********************* config qos cos-map-profile cos7_0 classification p-bit map 0 to-cos 7 map 1 to-cos 6 map 2 to-cos 5 map 3 to-cos 4 map 4 to-cos 3 map 5 to-cos 2 map 6 to-cos 1 map 7 to-cos 0 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*********************** Configuring_Color_Mapping_Profile******************* config qos color-map-profile color_all_green classification p-bit map 0 to green map 1 to green map 2 to green map 3 to green map 4 to green map 5 to green map 6 to green map 7 to green exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Flows******************************** configure flows flow 1 classifier class100 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 2 classifier class101 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 8-98 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 . 0 Quality of Service (QoS) 8-99 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 3 classifier class102 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 4 classifier class103 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 5 classifier class104 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 6 classifier class105 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 7 classifier class106 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 8 classifier class107 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ETX-5300A Ver. 0 . 1.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 10 classifier class200 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/2 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 20 classifier class300 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/3 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 30 classifier class400 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/4 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow 40 classifier class500 cos-mapping profile cos7_0 ingress-color profile color_all_green ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/5 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End************************************ 8-100 Quality of Service (QoS) ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A also supports performance monitoring per Y. As a result. OAM functionality is disabled. responding only when triggered by CFM Ethernet OAM 8-101 • • • ETX-5300A Ver. OAM Elements The Ethernet OAM mechanism monitors connectivity in Maintenance Association (MA) groups. Every MA belongs to a maintenance domain (MD). and isolate and bypass network defects. as well as distribution of fault-related information. Functional Description OAM (Operation. Maintenance Association (MA) – A set of MEPs. Standards IEEE 802. and an endpoint of a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same MA. and Maintenance) describes the monitoring of network operation by network operators. The MD levels are used to specify the scope of the MA (provider. A MEP generates and receives CFM PDUs and tracks responses. but such functions are not part of the OAM itself. Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP) – Created in the middle of the domain. ITU-T Y. OAM is a set of functions used by the user that enables detection of network faults and measurement of network performance.0 . Unlike MEPs. etc). customer. established to verify the integrity of a single service instance. Each maintenance domain has an MD level attribute which designates the scope of its monitoring. Maintenance End Point (MEP) – An actively managed CFM entity. and inherits its level from the MD to which it belongs. 1. • Maintenance Domain (MD) – The network or the part of the network for which faults in connectivity can be managed. OAM may trigger control plane or management plane mechanisms. for example. detect anomalies before they escalate. the operators can offer binding service-level agreements.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking 8.10 Ethernet OAM Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is a service-level OAM protocol that provides tools for monitoring and troubleshooting end-to-end Ethernet services.1731 Factory Defaults By default. identified by a Maintenance Association Identifier (MAID). operator.1ag-D8. CFM uses standard Ethernet frames and can be run on any physical media that is capable of transporting Ethernet service frames. A MEP is both an endpoint of a single MA.1731. OAM functionality ensures that network operators comply with QoS guarantees. Each maintenance association consists of two or more maintenance end points (MEP). This includes proactive connectivity monitoring. each configured with the same MAID and MD level. and fault isolation. Administration. by activating rerouting or by raising alarms. MIPs are passive points. fault verification. 0 . 8-102 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Note Loss measurement is supported only if the MEP-connected flows have their statistic counters enabled (PM-enabled).1731   Loss measurement (single-ended) Delay measurement (two-way). A MIP consists of two MIP Half Functions (MHFs). Segment OAM session (operator service ME) between ETX-2xxA and the network side of ETX-5300A. which serve as MEPs.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual trace route and loopback messages. Transport OAM session (tunnel ME) between network ports of two ETX-5300A devices. ETX-5300A devices act as MIPs. The Maintenance Entities (MEs) are created at different levels: • • • • Lowest-level OAM session (subscriber ME) between two subscriber devices (devices 1 and 8). OAM Connectivity Figure 8-21 shows how the various levels of OAM sessions supported by RAD equipment allow each entity to monitor the layers under its responsibility and easily isolate problems. ETX-2xxA devices serve as a MIPs End-to-end OAM session (EVC ME) between two ETX-2xxAs. OAM Functions RAD’s carrier Ethernet aggregation and demarcation devices feature a comprehensive hardware-based Ethernet OAM and performance monitoring for SLA assurance: • End-to-end Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) per IEEE 802.1ag:    • Continuity check (CC) Non-intrusive loopback Link trace for fault localization End-to-end service and performance monitoring per ITU-T Y. A MEP can be either Down or Up. as explained below. Multi-Domain Ethernet Service OAM MEPs and Services ETX-5300A Ethernet main cards support Ethernet OAM functionality and host MEPs as illustrated in Figure 8-22. GbE SAP MEP 10 GbE I/O Ethernet Card 10 GbE 10 GbE MEP BP Bridge BP MEP 10 GbE MEP 10 GbE Main Ethernet Card Figure 8-22. depending on its position and port association.Installation and Operation Manual Subscriber Equipment 1 2 Chapter 8 Networking Subscriber Equipment 7 8 Operator A NEs 3 4 Service Provider 5 Operator B NEs 6 Subscriber ME EVC ME Ethernet Operator A Service ME Operator B Service ME UNI ME Transport Tunnel ME UNI ME ETX-2xxA ETX-5300A Router Router ETX-5300A ETX-2xxA Legend: Triangle – MEP (Maintenance End Point) Circle – MIP (Maintenance Intermediary Point) Figure 8-21. Ethernet Main Card MEPs ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Ethernet OAM 8-103 . Down MEP Down MEPs reside at port egress and are bound to physical ports. 1. Tx Flow MEP Rx Flow Main Card Port A Main Card Port B Figure 8-23. Tx flow in the service is directed to a queue block. Tx flow in the service is directed to a queue block. Different MEP locations are illustrated below. Tx Flow MEP SAP Rx Flow I/O Card Port B Figure 8-24. PtP Service with Down MEP Bound to Main Card Port A Figure 8-26 illustrates a point-to-point service between two I/O card ports with the MEP bound to port B.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual A MEP is transparent to OAM frames whose MD level is higher than the MEP level. Figure 8-23 illustrates a point-to-point service between two main card ports with the MEP bound to port A. SAP MEP SAP I/O Card Port A Rx Flow I/O Card Port B Tx Flow 8-104 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. and drops OAM packets whose MD level is lower than the MEP level. These MEPs receive and send CFM PDU from and to the network. loopback. Tx flow in the service is directed to a queue block. link trace and PM counters. Tx flow in the service is directed to a queue block.0 . Down MEPs are supported for either point-to-point or multipoint services. PtP Service with Down MEP Bound to Main Card Port A Figure 8-24 illustrates a point-to-point service between main and I/O card ports with the MEP bound to port B. PtP Service with Down MEP Bound to I/O Card Port B Figure 8-25 illustrates a point-to-point service between main and I/O card ports with MEP bound to port A. It fully supports connectivity check (CC). Rx Flow MEP SAP Tx Flow Main Card Port A I/O Card Port B Figure 8-25. Rx Flow BP Bridge BP SVI MEP Tx Flow SAP I/O Card Port A Figure 8-28.0 Ethernet OAM 8-105 . whose classification profile can be one of the following:       Untagged Single VLAN Single VLAN+P-bit Single outer + single inner VLAN Single outer VLAN + P-bit + single inner VLAN Match all. PtP Service between Two I/O Card Ports with Down MEP Bound to Port B Figure 8-27 illustrates a multipoint service between main card and bridge ports with the MEP bound to port A. If configured over an IO port. The Down MEP EVC/location is characterized by: • Rx flow. Up MEP Up MEPs reside at bridge ingress and are bound to bridge ports. Tx Flow BP Bridge BP SVI Rx Flow MEP Main Card Port A Figure 8-27. Different MEP locations are illustrated below. the flow from the corresponding SAP must be used. It also needs a classification profile to specify the packet tag structure (as it cannot be taken from the flow classification profile). • Tx flow to a destination queue to forward OAM frames. Multipoint Service with Down MEP Bound to Main Card Port A The Down MEP is defined over the physical port. The Up MEPs inherit their MAC addresses from the corresponding physical ports (egress ports of Tx flows). ETX-5300A Ver. Tx flow in this service is directed to the BP SVI. Figure 8-28 illustrates a multipoint service between I/O card and bridge ports with the Up MEP bound to the bridge port. 1. Up MEPs are supported for multipoint services only.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Figure 8-26. These MEPs receive and send CFM PDU from and to the bridge entity. Tx flow in the service is directed to a queue block. inheriting its MAC address. Tx flow in this service is directed to the BP SVI. Multipoint Service with Up MEP Bound to I/O Card Port A Figure 8-29 illustrates a multipoint service between main card and bridge ports with the Up MEP bound to the bridge port. They also have Rx and Tx flows attached to them: • • MHF 1 facing the physical port to which the MIP is bound MHF 2 facing the bridge port. which faces MHF 1. MIP Functionality Like MEPs. LBM/LTM MIP LBM/LTM Flow X Flow X LBR/LTR MHF MHF LBR/LTR Figure 8-30. which is a directional entity acting as a service termination point. the MIPs are bound to physical ports (directly. The Up MEP is characterized by: • • Rx flow with a single VLAN classification profile Tx flow. whose MD level is equal to the MIP MD level. MIP responds to link trace messages (LTMs) and loopback messages (LBMs). MIPs Unlike MEP. MIP locations are similar to those of MEP.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual Rx Flow BP Bridge BP SVI MEP Tx Flow Main Card Port A Figure 8-29. each directed towards a physical port or bridge port. MIP is defined as a bidirectional intermediate entity. consisting of half functions (MHFs). originating from the MIP-bound port.0 . The MIPs are defined under MD level and are characterized by the following: • • The physical port to which they are bound.or indirectly-attached). 1. Multipoint Service with Up MEP Bound to Main Card Port A Up MEP is defined over the bridge port. inheriting the port’s MAC source address Rx flow. ETX-5300A supports up to 512 MIPs. inheriting the MAC address of the port for LTM purposes. The MIPs have two MHFs (up and down). and whose classification profile can be one of the following:      8-106 Ethernet OAM Untagged Single VLAN Single VLAN+P-bit Single outer + single inner VLAN Single outer VLAN + P-bit + single inner VLAN ETX-5300A Ver. Rx Flow MIP (bound to port B) Tx Flow Main Card Port A MHF 1 MHF 2 Main Card Port B Rx Flow MIP (bound to port B) SAP Tx Flow Main Card Port A MHF 1 MHF 2 I/O Card Port B MIP (bound to port A) Tx Flow SAP Main Card Port A MHF 1 MHF 2 Rx Flow I/O Card Port B Figure 8-31.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking • • • Rx classification. and performance data collection. fault detection. Note OAM cyclic messages (CCMs. MIPs in Point-to-Point Service MIP (bound to port B) Rx Flow BP Bridge BP SVI Tx Flow MHF 1 MHF 2 Main Card Port B Figure 8-32. MIP in Multipoint Service Messaging System The Ethernet service OAM mechanism uses cyclic messages for availability verification.0 Ethernet OAM 8-107 . 1. Figure 8-31 and Figure 8-32 illustrate MIPs in point-to-point and multipoint services. LBMs and LTMs) packet priority (P-bit value) is user-configurable at MEP level. when Rx flow originates from SA with the Match All classification profile Tx flow. The main message types are detailed below. They are used to detect loss of ETX-5300A Ver. originating from the physical port facing MHF 2 Optional egress queue for the Tx flow. CC Messages Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) are sent from the service source to the destination node at regular periodic intervals. such as a receive signal failure or AIS. CCM CoS is also set at the MEP level according to P-bit-to-CoS profile with up to four such profiles per chassis. 1s. CCM priority is configurable as a P-bit value at the MEP level. 1m.33 ms. This informs the upstream MEPs that there has been a downstream failure. AIS. CCM Priority and Color The CCMs are always marked green. and can be set to one frame per second (default) or one frame per minute. 8-108 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. AIS When a MEP detects a connectivity failure at a physical port. 1. CCM Interval CCM interval is user-configurable at the MA level to 3.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual continuity or incorrect network connections. CCM Multcast DA CCM multicast destination MAC addresses per 802.0 . it sends a Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream in the opposite direction of its peer MEP or MEPs. LCK. it propagates an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) in the direction away from the detected failure to the next higher level. CCM status information is available at the MEP and RMEP levels. The AIS message priority is set per MEP via P-bit (0–7) configuration.1ag definition are detailed in Table 8-27. The Tx RDI is also initiated when a LOC is detected on at least one of the associated RMEPs. AIS Transmission RDI When a downstream MEP detects a defect condition. LOC Rx Flow Tx Flow Port A MEP AIS (with client MD level) Port B Figure 8-33. 10 ms. 10m. A CCM is multicast to each MEP in a MA at each administrative level. The transmit interval is configured per MEP. The AIS is sent over the MEP Rx flow with the level as configured by the client MD level (default is the MEP level + 1) for the following trigger events: • • • LOC LCK Rx AIS. 100 ms. The signal is carried in dedicated AIS frames. according to the Y.0 Ethernet OAM 8-109 . When a MIP or MEP receives an LTM. the MEP responds with LTR if the target MAC address of the received LTM is the same as the MEP MAC address (inherited from the port to which the MEP is bound). Link Trace Messages MEPs multicast LTMs on a particular MA to identify adjacency relationships with remote MEPs and MIPs at the same administrative level. CCM Group Destination MAC 01-80-C2-00-00-3y CCM MD Level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Four Address Bits “y” 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Loopback Messages MEPs send loopback messages (LBMs) to verify connectivity with another MEP or MIP for a specific MA. It also forwards the LTM to the target MEP destination MAC address. LTMs can also be used for fault isolation. LBMs are generated on demand and sent up to 500 times at a rate of 10 pps. LBM priority uses the CCM priority that is configurable as a P-bit value at the MEP level.1731 requirements. CCM priority is configurable as a P-bit value at the MEP level. Loopback is a ping-like request/reply function. A MEP sends a loopback request message to another MEP or MIP. The message body of an LTM includes a destination MAC address of a target MEP that terminates the link trace. In Figure 8-34. it generates a unicast LTR to the initiating MEP. The LBMs are always marked green. LTM is not relayed. LTM Priority The LBMs are always marked green. LTM Response and Relay Behavior This section describes how MEPs and MIPs relay and respond to LTMs. which generates a subsequent LBR (loopback response). LBMs/LBRs are used to verify bidirectional connectivity. with up to four such profiles per chassis. LBM CoS is set according to a P-bitto-CoS profile. An LTM effectively traces the path to the target MEP. ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Table 8-27. 1. according to a P-bit-to-CoS profile with up to four such profiles per chassis. If the target MAC is unknown. MEP with LTM Sent from the Bridge Port in Multipoint Service In Figure 8-36. The MIP relays the LTM to the bridge port with the target MAC address. the MIP always responds with LTR and relays the LTM. the MIP responds with LTR if the target MAC address of the received LTM has been learned on the bridge port.0 . the MIP responds with LTR if the target MAC address of the received LTM has been learned on another bridge port. LTM LTM LTR Main Card Port A MIP Main Card Port B Figure 8-36. 8-110 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. the LTM is discarded. 1. MIP with LTM Sent from the Card Port in Point-to-Point Service In Figure 8-37. The MIP relays the LTM if the target MAC address of the received LTM has been learned on the bridge port or has not been learnt at all. the MEP responds with LTR if the target MAC address of the received LTM is the same as the MEP MAC address (inherited from the port to which the MEP is bound). MIP with LTM Sent from the Bridge Port in Multipoint Service In Figure 8-38. LTM LTM BP Bridge BP SVI LTR MIP Main Card Port A Figure 8-37. LTM is not relayed.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual LTM MEP LTR Main Card Port A Main Card Port B Figure 8-34. If the target MAC address has been learned on another bridge port. LTM BP Bridge BP SVI LTR MEP Main Card Port A Figure 8-35. the MIP floods the LTM. MEP with LTM Sent from the Card Port in Point-to-Point Service In Figure 8-35. Configuring OAM Ethernet OAM configuration procedure includes the following steps. verify that it is not used by other ETX-5300A elements. • Frame Delay (FD) – FD is specified as round trip delay for a frame. when the loopback is performed at the frame’s destination node. Configure maintenance domains (MDs) 2. Add maintenance endpoints (MEPs) ETX-5300A Ver. Note Loss measurement is supported only if the MEP-connected flows have their statistic counters enabled (PM-enabled). Measurement is performed for delays of up to 1 second with full DM over tunnels. ETX-5300A supports single-ended loss measurement (LM) with on-demand LMM transmission and automatic LM response (up to 128 simultaneous LM sessions per chassis). LM is not supported over tunnels.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking LTM LTM BP Bridge BP SVI LTR MIP Main Card Port A Figure 8-38. ETX-5300A provides per-service loss and delay measurement and event reporting. OAM MEPs measure frame loss only if statistic counters have been enabled on the incoming and outgoing flows. The following performance parameters are measured by appropriate OAM messages: • Frame Loss Ratio (FLR) – FLR. 1. Define maintenance associations (MAs) 3. divided by the total number of service frames during a time interval. detailed in this section: Note Before deleting any of the OAM CFM components. until the reception of the last bit of the loop backed frame by the same source node. MIP with LTM Sent from the Card Port in Multipoint Service Performance Monitoring ETX-5300A Ethernet service OAM PM functionality complies with the Y.0 Ethernet OAM 8-111 . where FD is defined as the time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source node. such as ERP.1731 requirements. expressed as a percentage. 1. where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames sent to an ingress UNI and the number of service frames received at an egress UNI. ETX-5300A supports dual-ended delay measurement (DM) with on-demand DMM transmission and automatic DM response (up to 128 simultaneous DM sessions per chassis). is the ratio of the number of service frames not delivered. Configuring counter thresholds. the only value allowed for the maintenance domain level is 3.0 . Note A maintenance domain can be deleted only if it has all its MEPs/MIPs deleted or disabled. Define endpoint services 6. Add maintenance intermediary points (MIPs) 5. The config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)# prompt is displayed 2.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual 4. Note  MD name is no name. Configuring Maintenance Domains MDs are domains for which the connectivity faults are managed. no mip <mip id> deletes the MIP. Defining MIPs 8-112 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. To configure a maintenance domain: 1. 1. enter no maintenance-domain <mdid>. Navigate to configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> to select the maintenance domain to configure. The maintenance domain is created and the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)$ prompt is displayed. Each MD is assigned a name that must be unique among all those used or available to an operator. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.  To delete a maintenance domain: • At the config>oam>cfm# prompt. no maintenance –association <maid> deletes the MA Specifying the maintenance domain level md-level <md-level> The allowed range for md-level is 0–7 Note: If the pre-standard OAM protocol is used. mip <mip id> no mip <mip id> Refer to Configuring Maintenance Intermediary Points. To add a maintenance domain: • At the config>oam>cfm# prompt. enter maintenance-domain <mdid> where <mdid> is 1–4095. The MD name facilitates easy identification of administrative responsibility for the maintenance domain. The maintenance domain is deleted.  Task Configuring maintenance association for the MD Command maintenance -association <maid> no maintenance –association <maid> Comments Refer to Configuring Maintenance Associations. Add destination network elements (NEs) 7. 1.  To add a maintenance association (MA): • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)# prompt enter: maintenance-association <maid> where <maid> is 1–4095. ETX-5300A Ver. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. link trace requests.  To delete a maintenance association: • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)# prompt enter: no maintenanceassociation <maid>. The maintenance association is created and the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)$ prompt is displayed.Installation and Operation Manual Task Displaying information on configured MAs Displaying information on configured MIPs Command show maintenance-association <maid> show mip <mip id> Comments Chapter 8 Networking Configuring Maintenance Associations A maintenance domain contains maintenance associations.33ms | 10ms | 100ms | 1s | 10s | 1min | 10min} mep <mepid> Comments Refer to Configuring Maintenance Endpoints Configuring Maintenance Endpoints Maintenance endpoints reside at the edge of a maintenance domain.  Task Specifying MA name in UINT (unsigned integer) format Specifying the interval between continuity check messages Configuring MEP for the MA Command ma-name <0–65535> ccm-interval {3. They initiate and respond to CCMs. for each of which you can configure the continuity check interval and maintenance endpoints (MEPs).0 Ethernet OAM 8-113 . To configure a maintenance association: 1. Note A maintenance association can be deleted only if it has all its MEPs/MIPs deleted or disabled. in order to detect. The maintenance association is deleted. The config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)# prompt is displayed 2. Navigate to configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> maintenance-association <maid> to select the maintenance association to configure. and loopbacks. enter no classification profile. LAG or SVI. 8-114 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. Navigate to configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> maintenance-association <maid> mep <mepid>to select the maintenance endpoint to configure. enter: mep <mepid> where <mepid> is 1–4098. and diagnose connectivity problems.  To delete a maintenance endpoint: • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)# prompt. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. LBMs and LTMs transmitted by the MEP Associating the MEP with a classifier profile ccm-initiate To disable initiating continuity check messages. To delete classifier profile assignment. LAG or SVI Command ais [ interval { 1s | 1min }] [priority <priority>] bind ethernet <slot/port> bind lag <port_number> bind svi <port_number> no bind Comments To disable AIS sending. Note You can remove a maintenance endpoint regardless of whether it contains services.0 .Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual localize. enter no bind Enabling initiation of continuity check messages (CCM) Specifying the priority of CCMs.  To add a maintenance endpoint (MEP): • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)# prompt. ETX-5300A supports up to 4K MEPs and MIPs. 1. The prompt config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)# is displayed. The MEP is created and the prompt config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)$ is displayed. 2. enter: no mep <mepid> The maintenance endpoint is deleted. enter no ais To remove the MEP from an Ethernet port. enter no ccm-initiate The allowed range for <priority> is 0–7 ccm-priority <priority> classification profile <profile_name> no classification profile Classifier profile is needed when the MEP Rx flow has the SAP ingress port (in this case the flow classifier profile is Match All). To configure a maintenance endpoint: 1.  Task Enabling AIS sending and defining interval Binding the MEP to an Ethernet port. consisting half functions (MHFs).Installation and Operation Manual Task Defining client MD level Associating the MEP with a CoS profile Command client-md-level <md_level> Comments Chapter 8 Networking Client MD level is a level for sending upstream AIS The CoS mapping profile must be P-bit-to-CoS to assign the class of service to the packets transmitted by the MEP (CCMs. LBTs etc). To delete CoS mapping profile assignment. enter no queue queue-mapping Defining remote MEP with which the MEP communicates remote-mep <remote_mep_id> no remote-mep <remote_mep_id> Allowed range for remote MEP is 1–8191 The MEP ID and the remote MEP ID must be different. 1. enter no remote-mep <remote_mep_id> Configuring service for the MEP Displaying MEP status Displaying remote MEP status Displaying MEP service status Administratively enabling MEP service <service_id> show status show remote-mep <remote-mep-id> status show service <service_id> no shutdown Refer to Configuring Maintenance Endpoint Services To deactivate the MEP. ETX-5300A Ver. MIPs respond to link trace messages (LTMs) and loopback messages LBMs. enter no flow uni-direction Activating OAM loopback Activating OAM link trace Defining the queue for the MEP lbm linktrace queue queue-mapping <queue_mapping_profile_name> [block <level_id>/<queue_id>] no queue queue-mapping See Performing OAM Loopback See Performing OAM Link Trace To delete queue assignment. whose MD level is equal to the MIP MD level. enter shutdown Configuring Maintenance Intermediary Points MIPs are bidirectional intermediate entities. To delete remote MEP. enter no cos-mapping profile.0 Ethernet OAM 8-115 . cos-mapping profile <profile_name> no cos-mapping profile Defining the MEP direction Assigning unidirectional Rx and Tx flows to the MEP direction {up | down} flow uni-direction rx <rx_flow_name> [tx <tx-name>] no flow uni-direction To delete flow assignment. ETX-5300A supports up to 512 MIPs. otherwise you can define only one remote MEP. You can define up to 511 remote MEPs for the local MEP if standard OAM protocol is being used for the MD and the destination address type is multicast. LAG or SVI Command bind ethernet <slot/port> bind lag <port_number> bind svi <port_number> no bind Comments To remove the MIP from an Ethernet port. enter shutdown The following marking actions can be performed at the mhf level.  To configure a maintenance intermediary point: 1. To delete CoS mapping profile assignment. enter no cos-mapping profile. Navigate to configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> mip <mipid> to select the maintenance association to configure. 8-116 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. LBTs etc).Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual  To add a maintenance intermediary point (MIP): • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)# prompt enter: mip <mipid> The maintenance intermediary point is created and the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>mip(<mipid>)$ prompt is displayed. enter no bind Assigning unidirectional Rx and Tx flows to the MIP flow uni-direction rx <rx_flow_name> [tx <tx-name>] no flow uni-direction To delete flow assignment.  To delete a maintenance intermediary point: • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)# prompt enter: no mip <mipid> The maintenance intermediary point is deleted. enter no flow uni-direction Configuring MIP half functions (MHF) Administratively enabling MIP Displaying MIP status mhf 1 mhf 2 no shutdown show status See table below To deactivate the MIP. LAG or SVI. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. at the config>oam>cfm> md(<mdid>)>mip(<mipid>)>mhf(1 or 2)# prompt.0 . Task Binding the MIP to an Ethernet port. To delete classifier profile assignment. 1. enter no classification profile. The config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>mip(<mipid>)# prompt is displayed 2. Associating the MHF with a CoS profile cos-mapping profile <profile_name> no cos-mapping profile The CoS mapping profile must be P-bit-to-CoS to assign the class of service to the packets transmitted by the MHF (CCMs. Task Associating the MHF with a classifier profile Command classification profile <profile_name> no classification profile Comments Classifier profile is needed when the MHF Rx flow has the SAP ingress port (in this case the flow classifier profile is Match All). Installation and Operation Manual Task Defining the queue for the MHF Command queue queue-mapping <queue_mapping_profile_name> [block <level_id>/<queue_id>] no queue queue-mapping Comments Chapter 8 Networking To delete queue assignment. delay-threshold <delay-thresh> Specifying delay variation threshold in microseconds delay-var-threshold <delay-var-thresh> Specifying the interval for delay measurement messages. to be used by all remote NEs defined for service dmm-interval {100ms | 1s | 10s} ETX-5300A Ver. The allowed range for delay variation threshold is: 1–5. the service is declared as degraded. Task Associating this service with a priority for LMMs and DMMs Specifying delay threshold in microseconds Command classification priority-bit <p-bit> Comments The allowed range is 0–7 The allowed range for delay threshold is: 1–5.000.000. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. enter no queue queue-mapping Configuring Maintenance Endpoint Services You can configure a single service on a MEP. If the threshold is exceeded.1731) functionality for loss and delay measurements.000. 2. The prompt config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)>service(<serviceid>)$ is displayed. 1.0 Ethernet OAM 8-117 . Navigate to configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> maintenance-association <maid> mep <mepid> service <serviceid> to select the service to configure (<serviceid> is 1–8). The prompt config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)>service(<serviceid>)# is displayed.  To add a MEP service: • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)# prompt. The service configures performance monitoring (Y.  To configure a MEP service: 1. If the threshold is exceeded. the service is declared as degraded. enter: service <serviceid> where <serviceid> is 1–8.000. to be used by all remote NEs defined for service Configuring destination NE for service Command lmm-interval {100ms | 1s | 10s} Installation and Operation Manual Comments dest-ne <dest-ne-index> See Configuring Destination NEs below. Activating the MEP service no shutdown You can activate a service only if the corresponding MEP is active and you have defined at least one destination NE Configuring Destination NEs For performance measurement. The prompt config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)>service(<serviceid>)> dest-ne(<dest-ne-index>)$ is displayed. The prompt config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)>service(<serviceid>) >dest-ne(<dest-ne-index>)# is displayed. the exact address of the destination NE must be known. You can define a single NE per MEP service. Task Defining the MAC address of the destination NE Command remote mac-address <mac> Comments 8-118 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 8 Networking Task Specifying the interval for loss measurement messages. You can configure the remote MAC address of the NE. One NE per service is allowed. enter no dest-ne. 2. If the remote MAC address is not configured and needs to be learned.0 . Navigate to configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> maintenance-association <maid> mep <mepid> service <serviceid> dest-ne <dest-ne-index> to select the destination NE to configure. enter: dest-ne <dest-ne-index> where <dest-ne-index> is 1–255. or ETX-5300A can learn it from the CCM messages.  To add a destination NE: • At the prompt config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)>service (<serviceid>)#. 1. performance measurement messages are sent with all 0s in the MAC address until the address is learned. To delete a destination NE. The value range is 1–255. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.  To configure a destination NE: 1. The following prompt is displayed: config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)> service(<serviceid>)>dest-ne(<dest-ne-index>)#. or the amount of time since the service was activated. When the current interval ends. 1. you can select it for viewing interval statistics. You can view the following types of statistics for services: • • • Running – OAM statistics collected since the service was activated Day – OAM statistics for the last 24 hours. When a service is first activated. ETX-5300A measures current performance and stores performance data for the last 24 hours (96 intervals). To display the OAM CFM statistics for a destination NE: 1.Installation and Operation Manual Task Enabling two-way delay measurement method Enabling loss measurement method Displaying statistics data Clearing statistics Command delay two-way no delay loss { single-ended } no loss show statistics clear-statistics Chapter 8 Networking Comments Displaying OAM Statistics You can display end-to-end performance monitoring data for the destination NEs. Task Viewing running statistics Command show statistics running Comments The statistics are displayed as listed in Table 8-28 ETX-5300A Ver. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. You can view the following types of statistics for destination NEs: • • •  Running – OAM statistics collected since performance measurement of the NE started Day – OAM statistics for the last 24 hours Interval – OAM statistics for the current interval or a selected interval. 2. You can select an interval only if it has already ended. Navigate to the level corresponding to the destination NE for which you wish to view the statistics (configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> maintenance-association <maid> mep <mepid> service <serviceid> dest-ne <dest-ne-index>). The statistics data is shown for the time elapsed since the beginning of the interval. if less than 24 hours Interval – OAM statistics for the current interval or a selected interval. you can view statistics for the current interval only. it becomes interval 1 and you can select it for viewing interval statistics. After each interval ends.0 Ethernet OAM 8-119 . as listed in Table 8-28 Performance measurement counters for all available Intervals. statistics for all intervals.0 .Chapter 8 Networking Task Viewing statistics for the current interval Viewing the statistics for a selected interval Command show statistics current Installation and Operation Manual Comments The statistics for the current interval are displayed as listed in Table 8-28 Allowed values for interval-num: 1–96 The statistics for the selected interval are displayed as listed in show statistics interval <interval-num> Table 8-28 If you specified an interval that has not yet ended. statistics for the current interval. a message indicates that the interval does not exist. and day statistics Viewing statistics for all intervals show statistics all All available performance measurement counters. divided by the total number of OAM frames transmitted since the service was activated 8-120 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. Viewing statistics for current day Viewing statistics for previous day show statistics current-day show statistics previous-day The statistics for the current day. except for the time elapsed since the start of the current interval Table 8-28. as listed in Table 8-28 The statistics for the previous day. including the stored interval data. as listed in show statistics all-intervals Table 8-28 Clearing the statistics for the destination NE clear-statistics All statistical data for the service are cleared. 1. as listed in Table 8-28 Viewing running statistics. OAM Statistic Counters Parameter Far End Tx Frames Far End Rx Frames Far End Lost Frames Far End Frame Loss Ratio (%) Description Total number of OAM frames transmitted from the local MEP to the remote MEP since the service was activated Total number of OAM frames received by the remote MEP since the service was activated Total number of OAM frames lost from the local MEP to the remote MEP since the service was activated Total number of OAM frames lost from the local MEP to the remote MEP. 0 Ethernet OAM 8-121 . enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. You can execute the loopback according to the destination MAC address. ETX-5300A Ver.  To run an OAM link trace: • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)# prompt. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.  To run an OAM loopback: • At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>ma(<maid>)>mep(<mepid>)# prompt. Command lbm address <mac_address> [repeat <1– 50>] [data-tlv-length <0–1900>] lbm multicast [repeat <1–50>] show lbm-results Comments Task Specifying remote MEP by MAC address Sending LBMs to default multicast MAC address Checking OAM loopback results Performing OAM Link Trace This diagnostic utility traces the OAM route to the destination.Installation and Operation Manual Parameter Far End Unavailable Seconds (sec) Near End Tx Frames Near End Rx Frames Near End Lost Frames Near End Frame Loss Ratio (%) Near End Unavailable Seconds (sec) Average Two Way Delay (msec) Frames Above Delay Threshold Frames Above Delay Variation Threshold Elapsed Time (sec) Description Chapter 8 Networking Total number of unavailable seconds in the remote MEP since the service was activated Total number of OAM frames transmitted from the remote MEP to the local MEP since the service was activated Total number of OAM frames received by the local MEP since the service was activated Total number of OAM frames lost from the remote MEP to the local MEP since the service was activated Total number of near end lost OAM frames divided by the total number of near end transmitted OAM frames Total number of unavailable seconds in the local MEP since the service was activated Average delay Number of frames that exceeded the delay threshold Number of frames that exceeded the delay variation threshold Time (in seconds) elapsed since the service was activated Performing OAM Loopback This diagnostic utility verifies OAM connectivity on Ethernet connections. 1. specified by MAC address. 5. 4. Configure OAM event reporting thresholds for:    Delay and delay variation Loss ratio Unavailability ratio. which terminates the link trace. 8. 10. 9.0 . Checking the OAM link trace results show linktrace-results Examples This section illustrates OAM configuration for three MEP instances (two Down MEPs and one Up MEP). Destnation MAC address LTM cannot be multicast. Configure a CoS mapping profile to map user priorities to internal CoS values. Configure a VLAN-type classifier profile. 7. Select classification keys for the main card ports.  To configure a Down MEP between main card ports: 1. Example 1. 3. Define a Down MEP bound to port 1 with CCM sent over P-bit 0. Configure MEP service with LMMs and DMMs sent over P-bit 1. 2. Down MEP between Main Card Ports This example shows how to create a Down MEP located between two main card ports and bound to one of them (see Figure 8-39). Down MEP between Main Card Ports 8-122 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. 1.Chapter 8 Networking Task Specifying remote the MEP by MAC address Command linktrace address <mac-address> [ttl <1–64>] Installation and Operation Manual Comments The TTL parameter specifies the number of hops. Configure two flows from main card port 1 to port 2 and vice versa. Assign default queue groups to the main card ports. EVC1_ing MEP PSN Main Card B Port 1 LMMs LMRs DMMs DMRs Remote NE CCMs MEP EVC1_eg Main Card B Port 2 Figure 8-39. Configure two policer profiles. Each unit in the link trace decrements the TTL until it reaches 0. Enable the main card ports. 6. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking **********************Assigning_Default_Queue_Group_Profiles********************* config port ethernet main-b/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-b/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default exit all #*********************************End******************************************** **********************Assigning_Classification_Keys****************************** config port ethernet main-b/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet main-b/2 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Enabling_Main_Card_Ports********************************* config port ethernet main-b/1 no shutdown config port ethernet main-b/2 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Defining_Classifier_Profile****************************** config flows classifier-profile class20 match-any match vlan 20 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** ************************Defining_Policer_Profiles******************************** config qos policer-profile "1" bandwidth cir 5000 cbs 10000 eir 0 ebs 0 config qos policer-profile "2" bandwidth cir 30000 cbs 10000 eir 0 ebs 0 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Defining_CoS_Mapping_Profile***************************** cos-map-profile cos1 classification p-bit map 0 to-cos 0 map 1 to-cos 1 map 2 to-cos 2 map 3 to-cos 3 map 4 to-cos 4 map 5 to-cos 5 map 6 to-cos 6 map 7 to-cos 7 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ******************************Adding_Flows*************************************** configure flows flow EVC1_eg classifier class20 ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-color profile color1 cos-mapping profile cos1 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow EVC1_ing classifier class20 ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Ethernet OAM 8-123 . and to SAG 1. Assign default queue groups to the I/O and main card ports.0 .Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual ingress-port ethernet main-b/2 egress-port ethernet main-b/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-color profile color1 cos-mapping profile cos1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** #**************************Defining_MEP_and_MEP_Service************************** config oam cfm maintenance-domain 1 md-level 4 maintenance-association 1 name uint 265 mep 1 bind ethernet main-b/1 cos-mapping profile cos1 direction down flow uni-direction rx EVC1_ing tx EVC1_eg queue queue-mapping QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ccm-initiate ccm-priority 0 remote-mep 101 no shutdown service 1 classification priority-bit 1 dest-ne 1 remote mac 00-20-d2-50-1d-28 delay-measurement-bin bin_profile_delay1 delay-var-measurement-bin bin_profile_delay_var1 exit no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** #*******************Configring_OAM_Reporting_Thresholds************************** config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 above-delay frames-report 20 10 60 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 above-delay-var frames-report 20 10 60 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 far-end-loss-ratio frames-report 1e-6 1e-8 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 near-end-loss-ratio frames-report 1e-6 1e-8 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 far-end-unavailability-ratio frames-report 10 9 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 near-end-unavailability-ratio frames-report 10 9 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** Example 2.  To configure a Down MEP between main and I/O card ports: 1. 1. 8-124 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. Down MEP between Main and I/O Card Ports T This example shows how to create a Down MEP located between the I/O and main card ports and bound to the main card port (see Figure 8-40). 9.0 Ethernet OAM 8-125 . SAP CCMs ECV2COS1 Port 1 ECV2COS2 SAP 1 EVC2_eg MEP Port 1 PSN LMMs LMRs DMMs DMRs MEP EVC2_ing Remote NE SAP I/O Ethernet Card Main Ethernet Card Figure 8-40.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking 2. 8. 6. Configure classifier profiles:    VLAN 100 + P-bit 6 VLAN 100 + P-bit 5 VLAN 300 + inner VLAN 100. Configure two policer profiles. Configure OAM event reporting thresholds for:    SAG Delay and delay variation Loss ratio Unavailability ratio. 5. Select classification keys for the main and I/O card ports. 1. Enable the main and I/O card ports. 4. Configure MEP service with LMMs and DMMs sent over P-bit 1. Define a Down MEP bound to port 1 with CCM sent over P-bit 0. 10. Configure the following flows:     From I/O card port 1 to SAP (classification VLAN 100 + P-bit 6) From I/O card port 1 to SAP (classification VLAN 100 + P-bit 5) From SAP to main card port 1 From main card port 1 to I/O card port 1. 3. Configure a CoS mapping profile to map user priorities to internal CoS values. Down MEP between Main and I/O Card Ports **********************Assigning_Default_Queue_Group_Profiles********************* config port ethernet main-b/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port sag 1/1 queue-group profile q_group_SAG_2_level_default ETX-5300A Ver. 7. Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual exit all #*********************************End******************************************** **********************Assigning_Classification_Keys****************************** config port ethernet main-b/1 classification-key vlan inner-vlan p-bit config port ethernet 1/1 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Enabling_Main_and_I/O_Card_Ports************************* config port ethernet main-b/1 no shutdown config port ethernet 1/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Defining_Classifier_Profiles***************************** config flows classifier-profile class100pbit6 match-any match vlan 100 p-bit 6 exit all config flows classifier-profile class100pbit5 match-any match vlan 100 p-bit 5 config flows classifier-profile class300100 match-any match vlan 300 inner-vlan 100 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** ************************Defining_Policer_Profiles******************************** config qos policer-profile "1" bandwidth cir 5000 cbs 10000 eir 0 ebs 0 config qos policer-profile "2" bandwidth cir 30000 cbs 10000 eir 0 ebs 0 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Defining_CoS_Mapping_Profile***************************** cos-map-profile cos1 classification p-bit map 0 to-cos 0 map 1 to-cos 1 map 2 to-cos 2 map 3 to-cos 3 map 4 to-cos 4 map 5 to-cos 5 map 6 to-cos 6 map 7 to-cos 7 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ******************************Adding_Flows*************************************** configure flows flow ECV2COS1 classifier class100pbit6 cos-mapping fixed 0 ingress-color green ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 policer profile 1 8-126 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 . 0 Ethernet OAM 8-127 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking no shutdown exit all configure flows flow EVC2COS2 classifier class100pbit5 cos-mapping fixed 1 ingress-color green ingress-port ethernet 1/1 egress-port sap 1/1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 policer profile 2 no shutdown exit all configure flows flow EVC2_eg classifier match-all ingress-port sap 1/1/1 egress-port ethernet main-b/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/2 vlan-tag push vlan 300 p-bit copy no shutdown exit all configure flows flow EVC2_ing classifier class300100 ingress-color profile color1 cos-mapping profile cos1 ingress-port ethernet main-b/1 egress-port ethernet 1/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 vlan-tag pop vlan no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** #**************************Defining_MEP_and_MEP_Service************************** config oam cfm maintenance-domain 1 maintenance-association 2 name uint 22 mep 2 bind ethernet main-b/1 cos-mapping profile cos1 direction down flow uni-direction rx EVC2_ing tx EVC2_eg queue queue-mapping QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ccm-initiate ccm-priority 0 remote-mep 110 no shutdown service 1 classification priority-bit 1 dest-ne 1 ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Enable the main card ports. 10. Configure VLAN-based classifier profile 5. bind the bridge ports to the SVIs. Configure six flows from the main card ports to the SVIs and vice versa. 8-128 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. Configure MEP service with LMMs and DMMs sent over P-bit 1. Define bridge-type SVIs. 9. 7.  To configure a Up MEP between main card and bridge ports: 1. Select classification keys for the main card ports. and configure the ports as members of VLAN 20.0 . 4. 6. Configure OAM event reporting thresholds for:    Delay and delay variation Loss ratio Unavailability ratio.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual remote mac 00-20-d2-50-2e-55 exit no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** #*******************Configring_OAM_Reporting_Thresholds************************** config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 above-delay frames-report 20 10 60 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 above-delay-var frames-report 20 10 60 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 far-end-loss-ratio frames-report 1e-6 1e-8 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 near-end-loss-ratio frames-report 1e-6 1e-8 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 far-end-unavailability-ratio frames-report 10 9 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 near-end-unavailability-ratio frames-report 10 9 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** Example 3. Assign default queue groups to the main card ports. Configure a CoS mapping profile to map user priorities to internal CoS values. Up MEP between Main Card and Bridge Ports This example shows how to create an UP MEP located between main card and bridge ports and bound to the bridge port via SVI (see Figure 8-40). 8. 3. Define an Up MEP bound to port 1 with CCM sent over P-bit 0. 2. 1. Up MEP between Main Card and Bridge Ports **********************Assigning_Default_Queue_Group_Profiles********************* config port ethernet main-a/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-a/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default config port ethernet main-a/3 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default exit all #*********************************End******************************************** **********************Assigning_Classification_Keys****************************** config port ethernet main-a/1 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet main-a/2 classification-key vlan p-bit config port ethernet main-a/3 classification-key vlan p-bit exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Enabling_Main_and_I/O_Card_Ports************************* config port ethernet main-a/1 no shutdown config port ethernet main-a/2 no shutdown config port ethernet main-a/3 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ************************Defining_Classifier_Profiles***************************** config flows classifier-profile class20 match-any exit all #*********************************End**************************************** ************************Defining_CoS_Mapping_Profile***************************** cos-map-profile cos1 classification p-bit map 0 to-cos 0 map 1 to-cos 1 ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Ethernet OAM 8-129 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking Flow 1 Port 1 MEP SVI 1 BP 1 Flow 2 SVI 2 BP 2 Flow 4 SVI 3 BP 3 Flow 6 Bridge Main Ethernet Card Flow 3 Port 2 Flow 5 Port 3 Figure 8-41. 0 . 1.Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual map 2 to-cos 2 map 3 to-cos 3 map 4 to-cos 4 map 5 to-cos 5 map 6 to-cos 6 map 7 to-cos 7 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ***********************Configuring_Bridge_and_Bridge_Ports*********************** config port svi 1 bridge exit all config port svi 2 bridge exit all config port svi 3 bridge exit all config bridge 1 port 1 bind svi 1 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 port 2 bind svi 2 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 port 3 bind svi 3 no shutdown exit all config bridge 1 vlan 20 tagged-egress 1..3 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** ******************************Adding_Flows*************************************** config flows flow 1 classifier class20 ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 egress-port svi 1 ingress-color profile color1 cos-mapping profile cos1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 2 classifier class20 ingress-port svi 1 egress-port ethernet main-a/1 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all 8-130 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. 0 Ethernet OAM 8-131 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Networking config flows flow 3 classifier class20 ingress-port ethernet main-a/2 egress-port svi 2 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 4 classifier class20 ingress-port svi 2 egress-port ethernet main-a/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 5 classifier class20 ingress-port ethernet main-a/3 egress-port svi 3 no shutdown exit all config flows flow 6 classifier class20 ingress-port svi 3 egress-port ethernet main-a/3 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** #**************************Defining_MEP_and_MEP_Service************************** config oam cfm maintenance-domain 2 md-level 3 maintenance-association 3 name uint 37 mep 3 bind svi 1 cos-mapping profile cos1 direction up flow uni-direction rx 2 tx 1 ccm-initiate ccm-priority 0 remote-mep 101 no shutdown service 1 classification priority-bit 1 dest-ne 1 remote mac 00-20-d2-50-1d-28 exit no shutdown exit all #*********************************End******************************************** #*******************Configring_OAM_Reporting_Thresholds************************** ETX-5300A Ver. The Down MEP must be bound to an Ethernet port or LAG The MA number is out of range (1–2048) The MA cannot be deleted if it has MEPs defined under it A name assigned to the MA already exists The MA parameters cannot be changed if the MA has MEPs defined under it MEP is not bound to a port Cannot bind CoS mapping profile to a MEP bound to an Ethernet port or LAG Cannot bind queue mapping profile to a MEP bound to an Ethernet port or LAG Up MEPs are bound to SVI (B).Chapter 8 Networking Installation and Operation Manual config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 above-delay frames-report 20 10 60 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 above-delay-var frames-report 20 10 60 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 far-end-loss-ratio frames-report 1e-6 1e-8 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 near-end-loss-ratio frames-report 1e-6 1e-8 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 far-end-unavailability-ratio frames-report 10 9 config fault cfm service 1 1 1 1 near-end-unavailability-ratio frames-report 10 9 exit all #*********************************End******************************************** Configuration Errors Table 8-29 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. must have different MD levels MIP bound to Ethernet port or LAG must have classification profile MIP-bound bridge port is not a member of the MHF’s classification profile VLAN When the same flow is bound to different MEPs/MIPs. 1. the MIP must have a classification profile assigned to it The bridge port of the SVI to which the MIP is bound is not a member of the VLAN defined in the VLAN-based classification profile used by the MIP’s MHF A MEP must be bound to an Ethernet port. LAG or bridge-type SVI The CoS profile cannot be bound to a MEP bound to an Ethernet port or LAG The queue mapping profile cannot be bound to a MEP bound to an Ethernet port or LAG The Up MEP must be bound to a bridge-type SVI. Down MEPs are bound to Ethernet port or LAG MA number is out of range Cannot delete MA with MEPs Current MA name is already in use Cannot change MA with MEPs 8-132 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. the flow must have different MD levels When a MIP is bound to an Ethernet port or LAG. using the same flow. Configuration Error Messages Message Mismatch between flow and MIP classification profiles Flow must be enabled Description The classification profile bound to the MIP and the classification profiles of its Rx/Tx flows do not match The flow must be administratively enabled before it is bound to the MEP/MIP A single flow can be bound to up to eight MEPs Maximum number of MEPs (8) associated with the flow has been reached Different MEPs/MIPs. Table 8-29.0 . Installation and Operation Manual Message Cannot change MA with MIPs Description Chapter 8 Networking The MA parameters cannot be changed if the MA has MIPs defined under it The value entered not within the allowed range The MA name value is not within the allowed range (0–6535) The maximum number of MEs (4096) has been reached The maximum value for the current parameters has been reached. when MEP/MIP is in shutdown LTM destination MAC cannot be multicast Cannot enable OAM service if no destination NE exists Cannot enable OAM service if no ETX-5300A Ver. LAG or SVI SVI must be of bridge type VLAN ID is out of range VLAN ID can be changed in MEP/MIP shutdown Classification profile can be changed in MEP/MIP shutdown Invalid classification profile Profile does not exist CoS mapping profile must be P-bit-toCoS Only default queue mapping profile is allowed Port can be changed. A non-existing classification or CoS mapping profile has been bound to MEP/MIP Only a P-bit-to-CoS CoS mapping profile can be bound to MEP/MIP Only a default queue mapping profile (QueueMapDefaultProfile) can be bound to MEP/MIP The port to which a MEP/MIP is bound can be changed only when the MEP/MIP is administratively disabled The destination MAC address for OAM link trace messages cannot be a multicast type The OAM service can be administratively enabled only if a destination NE has been defined for it The OAM service can be administratively enabled only if a Port does not exist MEP/MIP port is not Ethernet. etc.) must be administratively disabled in order to delete or change its parameters The port to which you are trying to bind a MEP/MIP does not exist The port to which you are trying to bind a MEP/MIP is not Ethernet. 1. remote MEPs.0 Ethernet OAM 8-133 . etc. port. LAG or SVI The SVI to which you are trying to bind a MEP/MIP is not a bridge type The selected VLAN ID is not within the allowed range (0–4094) The VLAN ID can be changed only when the MEP/MIP is administratively disabled Assigned classification profile can be changed only when the MEP/MIP is administratively disabled The classification profile bound to the MEP/MIP is not valid. This may refer to the number of MEPs/MIPs. Only one Down MEP is allowed per MA The value is out of range MA name is out of range Max number of MEs has been reached Max value has been reached Max number of Down MEPs per MA has been reached Max number of Up MEPs per MA has been reached Entity must be in shutdown Up to 88 Up MEPs are allowed per MA The entity (MEP. MIP. destination NEs. if Tx flow uses Match All classification Classification profile cannot be bound to MEP/MIP. a separate classification profile must be bound to the MEP/MIP MEP Rx flow must be configured MEP Tx flow must be configured I/O port-to-SAP flow must be configured for Rx flow with SAP as ingress port Illegal ingress port for Rx or Tx flow Classification profile must be bound to MEP/MIP. a separate classification profile cannot be bound to the MEP/MIP The OAM service must be administratively disabled for this action The MEP to be administratively enabled for this action The number of MDs is out of range (1–2048) An MD with existing MAs or MIPs cannot be deleted MEP must be in no shutdown Illegal number of MDs Cannot delete MD with MA or MIP under it Illegal MD level Cannot change MD level The MD level value is out of allowed range (0–7) The MD level cannot be changed if the MD has MEPs/MIPs under it The maximum number of MDs (4096) has been reached Max number of MDs has been reached 8-134 Ethernet OAM ETX-5300A Ver. if Rx flow uses other than Match All classification OAM service must be in shutdown If Tx flow uses the Match All classification mode.Chapter 8 Networking Message destination NE MAC exists Destination NE MAC can be unicast only Description Installation and Operation Manual destination NE MAC address has been defined The MAC address of the destination NE can be a unicast type only The Rx flow for the MEP has not yet been configured The Tx flow for the MEP has not yet been configured For Rx flow with ingress port defined as SAP. there must be a matching flow between I/O port and SAP The ingress port for Rx and Tx flows must be an Ethernet port. bridge-type SVI or SAP If Rx flow uses the Match All classification mode. LAG. if Rx flow uses Match All classification Classification profile must be bound to MEP/MIP. a separate classification profile must be bound to the MEP/MIP If Rx flow does not use the Match All classification mode. 1.0 . 8262. phase and ToD alignment capabilities.3 Part 3. G.810–813. G.703.803. G.706.707. Standards and MIBs ETX-5300A timing functionality complies with following standards: G. G.8264. 9.704. IEEE 802. Domain Parameter sync-network-type quality min-level-station Default Value 2 Network type 1 –SEC Network type 2 – ST3 max-frequency-deviation 1200 × 100 ppm ETX-5300A Ver.8261.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization ETX-5300A timing subsystem includes a central timing subsystem. G. G.1D. Factory Defaults Parameter defaults are listed in the tables below. synchronization sources supported by the chassis and their configuration methods. G.783. 1. Benefits Flexible timing mechanism utilizes standard technologies to ensure highly accurate clock recovery and distribution over both the physical and packet layers with powerful frequency.1 Clock Selection This section discusses clock selection mechanism provided by ETX-5300A.0 Clock Selection 9-1 . G. This chapter presents the following information on the ETX-5300A clock capabilities: • • Clock Selection 1588v2 Timing. G. IEEE 802. located on the main card. and local timing subsystems located on the individual I/O modules. 9-2 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Domain Parameter mode force-t4-as-t0 Default Value auto Enabled Installation and Operation Manual Source Parameter priority wait-to-restore hold-off Default Value 4 300 300 Station Clock Parameter interface-type line-type Default Value t1 ESF for T1 G732N-CRC for E1 8 kHz for 64 kHz rx-sensitivity tx-clock-source ssm-channel tx-ssm short-haul domain 1 sa4 no tx-ssm Functional Description The figure below is a diagram of the ETX-5300A timing mechanism. 1.0 . The synchronization network type identifies the type of synchronization network and its levels. The synchronization network types are: • • Option I (Europe) Option II (USA). The clock domain distributes a system clock derived from up to four configured sources after selection process implemented via Synchronous Equipment Clock (SEC). each supported by a synchronized PDH trail. Timing Mechanism Clock Domain The timing system in ETX-5300A provides a single clock domain.3 physical media trail. default. SDH multiplex section trail. 1. or 802. ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Main Card System Clock 10GbE Ports I/O Clock 1 I/O Clock 2 1588v2 (master) T0 SEC Mux 1588v2 (slave) Station Clock (BITS/GPS) Station Clock Output (T4) Station Clock Output (T4) Secondary Clock via Standby Main Card I/O Card 1 I/O Card 2 I/O Card 3 I/O Card 4 Figure 9-1.0 Clock Selection 9-3 . Each synchronization network connection is provided by one or more synchronization link connections. Clock sources (SEC inputs) are as follows: • • • Clock derived from a physical port on a main or I/O card Station clock (BITS/GPS–10 MHz) IEEE 1588v2 clock. 812. as shown in the following tables.812 Timing source is Synchronous Equipment Clock. as defined in Recommendation G. Table 9-1. The quality levels are listed in order of highest to lowest quality level. or work without a quality level at all (see Clock Selection).Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Clock Quality Levels You can define the timing quality level of the source (which can be fixed or SSMbased) and the minimum quality level for the domain. as defined in Recommendation G. Option I Quality Levels Quality Level PRC SSU-A SSU-B SEC DNU Description Timing source is Primary Reference Clock.813 or G. 1. as defined in Recommendation G. Type V Timing source is Stratum 3E clock. Type IV Timing source is SONET/Ethernet self-timed clock. as defined in Recommendation G.8262. Type II Timing source is Transit Node Clock. as defined in Recommendation G.811 Synchronization Traceability Unknown – Timing signal does not carry a quality level indication of the source Timing source is Stratum 2 clock. Option II Timing source is Stratum 4 free-running clock (applicable only to 1. as defined in Recommendation G. The supported quality levels are according to the synchronization network type.5 Mbit/s signals) Provisionable by the network operator Don't Use for Sync – This signal should not be used for synchronization Rank Highest | | | | | | | | Lowest 9-4 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver.0 .813 or G. as defined in Recommendation G. Type III Timing source is Stratum 3 clock as defined in Recommendation G.8262.812.811 Timing source is Type I or V Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU) clock.812 Timing source is Type VI Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU)clock. Option II Quality Levels Quality Level PRS STU ST2 TNC ST3E ST3 SMC ST4 PROV DUS Description Timing source is Primary Reference Source clock.812. as defined in Recommendation G.812. Option I Do Not Use – This signal should not be used for synchronization Rank Highest | | | Lowest Table 9-2. as defined in Recommendation G. You must configure a specific QL for all the ingress synchronization interfaces that do not support SSM. SSM/ESSM Support ETX-5300A supports automatic learning/distributing clock QL using Sync Status Message (SSMs) or Ethernet Synchronization Message Channel (ESMC) systems. an ESMC message is transmitted every 1 second or immediately if a change in QL is detected. By default. the clock mechanism uses data stored during normal operation for timing output. Clock Domain States Clock domain states indicate operation modes of the system clock (T0 timing generator) and station clock output (T4 timing generator). If the transmitted signal quality becomes lower than QL minimum parameter. you must configure the quality level (QL) minimum parameter with the minimum quality allowed. In the receive direction. the external clock interface is squelched (or AIS is sent in E1 / T1 mode). Note QL in free-run mode is SEC/ST3. Clock Mode The domain clock mode can be one of the following: • • • Auto mode – domain timing is determined by the clock selection algorithm (default) Free-run mode – the domain clock is based on the main card local oscillator (TCXO) Force T0 holdover – the domain clock uses data stored by the T0 timing generator during normal operation for timing output.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization To prevent transmission (via station clock interface) of a timing signal of inferior quality. ETX-5300A uses free-run mode. In the transmit direction. This allows use of these signals/interfaces as synchronization sources in the automatic reference clock selection process in QL-enabled mode.0 Clock Selection 9-5 . 1. until a valid clock source is selected. the ETX-5300A system clock is in free-run state. it is possible to force the quality level to a fixed value. System clock: • • • Locked – Locked to selected clock source Free-run – Locked to internal oscillator Holdover – Input lock is lost. ETX-5300A Ver. until a valid clock source is selected. an ESMC-FAILED state is declared if no ESMC messages are received for a period of 5 seconds or more (with issuing SSF). For synchronization source signals/interfaces that do not support SSM. Note By default. External Switch Commands You can issue manual or forced switch commands to choose a specific clock source. Internal Oscillator (TXCO) System Clock SEC T0 T4 Station Clock Output Source Clock 1 Source Clock 2 Source Clock 3 Source Clock 4 Figure 9-2.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Station clock output: • • Locked – Locked to a valid clock input Unlocked – Not locked to a valid clock input. It overrides the previously issued manual switch command. until a valid clock source is selected. regardless of its priority or quality level. clock filtering and holdover. ETX-5300A station clock output is in free-run state. SEC Module The clock domain provides the system clock according to one of the four timing inputs. Note By default. The manual and forced switch commands are cleared using the clear command. Both clock sources must have the same quality level. as selected by the SEC unit. 1.0 . hitless switching. The forced switch command allows selection of any clock source. SEC Module Quality Level The SEC unit supports input prioritization and source quality level configuration. It consists of two timing generators: • • T0 for system clock output T4 for station clock output. The SEC module performs physical clock selection. according to network type: 9-6 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. The manual command overrides the clock priority setting and allows selection of a clock with priority a lower than an automatically selected clock source. Timers For additional flexibility in clock restoration. TNC. During the selection process. If all inputs have the same highest priority.781. the SEC module has two timers: • • Wait-To-Restore. in which the following parameters are considered:     Quality level Signal failure Priority External switch commands If no overriding external commands are active. the SEC uses internal oscillator timing.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Table 9-3. in which the following parameters are considered:    Signal failure Priority External switch commands If no overriding external commands are active. SEC Input Quality Level Network Type Option I Option II Quality Level PRC. the SEC uses internal oscillator timing. ST3E. the input with the highest priority is selected. ST4. ST3. an arbitrary reference clock is chosen. SSM-based Clock Selection The clock selection algorithm is based on ITU-T Recommendation G. If no input clock is available. the algorithm selects the reference clock that has the highest quality level without signaling a fail condition. SEC. 1.0 Clock Selection 9-7 . The timer defines the time (in seconds) that a previously failed synchronization source must be fault-free in order to be considered available. Hold-Off. SSM-based PRS. The timer defines the time (in milliseconds) that a signal failure must be active before it is relayed to the clock selection unit. If all inputs have the same highest priority. SMC. STU. If both inputs have the same quality level. If no input clock is available. DUS. A source clock is considered invalid if any of the following is detected: ETX-5300A Ver. ST2. • QL-disabled. The selection process operates in two modes: • QL-enabled. SSU-B. an arbitrary reference clock is chosen. Switchover Clock switchover (changing current reference clock) occurs if: • • • An external clock switch command is received A locked source clock becomes invalid A higher priority/quality clock becomes available. SSU-A. the best synchronization source from the SEC inputs is selected as the system clock. DNU. the algorithm selects the reference clock that has the highest priority without signal fail condition. The T0 timing generator of the SEC unit delivers a system (domain) clock to I/O cards and to the second main card. SEC Output Input Sources The four clock sources (SEC inputs) are based on: • • Clock derived from a physical port on a main or I/O card Station clock (BITS or GPS-10 MHz) 9-8 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. For non-revertive mode. In addition. in compliance with the following requirements: • • • GR-253-CORE for SONET Stratum 3 and SONET minimum clock (ST3) GR-1244-CORE Stratum 3 ITU-G813 Option 1 and Option 2 for SDH Equipment Clock (SEC). jitter and holdover. 1. Main Card System Clock Bus System Clock I/O Card 1 I/O Card 2 I/O Card 3 T4 I/O Card4 Main card Ethernet ports Station Clock Output 1588v2 master entity Source Clock 1 Source Clock 2 Source Clock 3 Source Clock 4 SEC T0 Figure 9-3. SEC Output The SEC unit outputs a clock with Stratum-3 accuracy. you can configure several sources with the same priority. Note By default.0 . the T4 timing generator outputs an external clock for distribution to other network devices. the T4 generator is forced to use the same clock source as the T0 generator.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual • • • Physical failure – Clock failure has been detected at the physical layer Monitoring failure – Clock failure has been detected by the clock monitoring entity of the domain ESMC failure – Ethernet port only with SSM-based clock has not received valid ESMC-packet stream for 5 seconds. Note Switch over is always revertive. The Tx clock of internal E1/T1 ports can be locked to: • • • System clock Rx clock of the port Adaptive clock recovered from pseudowire stream. STM-1/OC-3 Ports The Rx clock of any STM-1/OC-3 port on the E5-cTDM-4 card can be extracted and supplied to the main card clock selection mechanism (via backplane clock bus). ETX-5300A Ver. E5-10GbE-2 or E5-GbE-20 support Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) master and slave modes according to ITU-T G. The Tx clock of an STM-1/OC-3 port can be locked to: • • ETX-5300A system clock Rx clock of the port (loopback timing). The derived clock will be used by the clock selection mechanism as a source clock Set the port Tx clock according the domain clock available from the main card Act as a source of ESMC messages for SSM-based clock modes. This allows each port to: • • • Extract the port clock.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization • IEEE 1588v2 clock.8266 requirements. Physical Port Clock The ETX-5300A clock domain can be configured to use timing information derived from an STM-1. • One or two SEC inputs can originate from I/O cards (Ethernet or TDM). The main advantages of Sync-E over 1588v2 clock are: • • • It is propagated over physical layer It is a Stratum-3 clock with near SDH/SONET holdover properties It is not packet-oriented and considered to be more stable.0 Clock Selection 9-9 . OC-3 or GbE/10GbE port located on an I/O card or a main card. Note When APS is enabled. Sync-E mode can be used when phase synchronization or Time of Day (ToD) is not required. Ethernet Ports Ethernet ports located on E5-MC-4. 1. Note The following limitations apply to clock sources: • Up to three SEC inputs can originate from main cards. clock is used from a selected interface and not from an APS group. E/T1 Ports The internal E1/T1 ports cannot be used as clock sources for the system clock.8261–G. 120Ω balanced. using the following interfaces on the E5MC-4 card: • • • Input or output of 10 MHz sinewave synchronization signal via mini-BNC (DIN 1.048 Mbps. RS-485 64 kHz. 110Ω balanced. This output provides a convenient means for distributing the ETX-5300A nodal clock signal to other equipment (BITS clock only). ITU-T G.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Station Clock The station clock interface has two functions: • • Input for station clock signal (BITS and GPS clocks) Output for the ETX-5300A nodal clock. composite clock interface. IEEE 1588v2 Clock See 1588v2 Timing section below. 1. Redundancy When ETX-5300A is equipped with two main cards. by means of a Y-cable. When only one external clock source is available. The following clock signals are supported: • • • • 2. ITU-T G. you can improve hardware protection by connecting the GPS clock inputs in parallel. clock selection and distribution mechanisms are mirrored in the active and backup cards. GPS Clock ETX-5300A receives/transmits (1588v2 master/slave) GPS-based frequency and phase reference signal from GPS units.0 .544 Mbps. When only one GPS clock source is available.703. This ensures full timing system redundancy.3) connector Input and output of ToD timestamp signal via Rj-45 connector with RS-422 interface Input or output of 1PPS TTL synchronization signal via mini-BNC connector. you can improve hardware protection by connecting the external clock inputs in parallel.703. See Appendix A for the external clock connector pinout. 9-10 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. 100Ω balanced 2. 75Ω unbalanced 1. BITS Clock ETX-5300A recovers Building-Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) clock via the station clock interface ports on E5-MC-4 card. ANSI T1-403.048 MHz squarewave. by means of a Y-cable.0/2. This results in the same clock source feeding both SECs. the action is duplicated in the backup card. Station Clock Redundancy Configuring the Clock The clock configuration procedure consists of the following steps: • • • • Domain configuration Timing source configuration Station clock configuration (if needed) Recovered clock configuration (if needed). The SECs are connected internally to improve switchover time and reduce phase difference when a flip occurs. 1. which use only the active one. ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization SEC Redundancy When a clock source is configured for the active main card. Each SEC can use input from both station clock sources. Station Clock Any station clock can be used as a clock input on an active or backup main card. The two SEC outputs (active and backup) are master to the I/O cards.0 Clock Selection 9-11 . Active Main Card System Clock SEC Mux Primary Station Clock Secondary From backup card To backup card Backup Main Card System Clock SEC Mux Secondary Station Clock Primary From active card Figure 9-4. free-run – Internal oscillator is used for synchronization force-t0-holdover – Forces the T0 timing generator to holdover mode (no force-t0-holdover clears T0 from holdover mode) Setting maximum frequency deviation max-frequency-deviation <value> 381–6096 × 100 ppm When a frequency deviation of an input clock source exceeds defined value. only an E1 Rx clock can be selected as an input clock for type 1 (European) synchronization network.  To configure the clock domain: 1. no quality removes the quality parameter. this clock source is declared invalid 9-12 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. For example. that is. The config>system>clock>domain(1)# prompt is displayed.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Configuring the Clock Domain By default. Remove the clock source before changing network type. Setting minimum quality of outgoing station clock quality min-level-station { prc | ssu-a | ssu-b | sec | dnu } quality min-level-station { prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | smc | st4 | dus | prov } Minimum clock quality definition is needed to prevent outputting low-quality clock via external clock interface. Navigate to configure system clock domain 1. This parameter cannot be modified if a clock source has been configured. 1. ETX-5300A has one clock domain (domain 1). the best available clock source is selected for synchronization. Task Setting the type of synchronization network Command sync-network-type { 1 | 2 } Comments Type 1 – Europe Type 2 – USA When you change the synchronization network type. The quality values are according to the synchronization network type defined for the domain (refer to Table 9-1) Verify that the force-t4-as-t0 option is disabled. 2. Setting the clock mode mode { auto | free-run | force-t0holdover } auto –Clock selection mechanism functions normally. Synchronization network type defines the Rx input clock type that can be used as a domain source. you must redefine the clock sources. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.0 . If no quality is defined for the domain you cannot configure quality level for the sources. Navigate to configure system clock domain 1. clear Command force-t4-as-t0 Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Comments no force-t4-as-t0 prevents T4 timing generator from using the same clock source as the T0 generator force <source-id> manual <source-id> Canceling a previously issued force or manual command Adding clock source (refer to Configuring the Clock Sources) Configuring clock source (refer to Configuring the Clock Sources) Displaying status no source <src-id> deletes the source show status  To display clock status. enter show status. 2. The config>system>clock>domain(1)# prompt is displayed. 1. At the config>system>clock>domain(1)# prompt.Installation and Operation Manual Task Forcing T4 timing generator to use the same clock source as the T0 generator Forcing a selection of a particular clock source when the sources have different quality levels Manually selecting a particular clock source in the following conditions: • • • No quality is defined for the clock domain The sources have the same qualities The sources have different priorities. Clock status provides information on:  Current system clock source. 1.0 Clock Selection 9-13 . the clock mechanism uses data stored during normal operation for timing output     Current station out clock source and state Forced and manual switch command status ETX-5300A Ver. state and quality:  Locked – Locked to selected clock source Free-run – Locked to internal oscillator Holdover – Input lock is lost. 4. 3. discard it. you must configure flow with an L2CP profile with peer action on the 01-80-c2-00-00-02 address. according to the required clock source:  For Ethernet port: clock source <1–4> rx-port ethernet <slot/port> Use main-a or main-b designation for main card ports. using the drop command on the flow 9-14 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. Type one of the following. If you use the flow only to peer the SSM frames and do not need to forward the untagged traffic. The flow must have the following attributes: • Untagged classification • Ingress port – Ethernet port/LAG. 2. 1.  To add a clock source: 1. Note To ensure correct distribution of SSM traffic. this input will be rejected by the domain during the clock selection process. 5. However. Note The following limitations apply to clock sources: • Up to three sources can originate from main cards. this input will be rejected by the domain during the clock selection process. The sources can be: • • • • Ethernet port on main card or I/O Ethernet card SDH/SONET port on a TDM I/O card Station clock Recovered clock (1588v2). Navigate to configure system clock domain 1. serving as the SSM source (Sync-E port • Egress port – according to application requirements. Verify that the port to be used as a source clock is enabled (no shutdown).0 . Verify that the card whose port will be used as a source clock is provisioned. Note If you choose an invalid clock source. • One or two sources can originate from I/O cards (Ethernet or TDM). Note You can choose an invalid clock source. The config>system>clock>domain(1)# prompt is displayed.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)# show status System Clock Source Station Out Clock Source Force Switch Manual Switch : : : : 0 0 InActive InActive State State : Freerun : Unlocked Quality : ST3 Configuring the Clock Sources You can define up to four clock sources for the domain. Verify that the clock source to be used as an input is valid. add a flow supplying ESMC messages to the port. Navigate to configure system clock domain 1. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below the next procedure. The config>system>clock>domain(1)# prompt is displayed. The quality level values are according to the synchronization network type defined for the domain. If no quality is defined for the domain. Type source <1–4> to select the source to configure. The quality level ssm-based indicates the quality level is learned automatically via SSM messages or S1 byte of SDH/SONET frames. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization    For SDH/SONET port: clock source <1–4> rx-port sdh-sonet <slot/port> For station clock: clock source <1–4> station <main-a/1 or main-b/1> For recovered clock: clock source <1–4> recovered < main-a/1 or main-b/1> 6. 2. no priority disables clock source priority quality-level { prc | ssu-a | ssu-b | sec | dnu | ssm-based } quality-level { prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | smc | st4 | dus | ssm-based | prov } Clock source quality. When using SSM-based clock source. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. 3. this command is not available. Defining the amount of time that a previously failed synchronization source must be fault free in order to be considered available Defining the amount of time that signal failure must be active before it is transmitted Canceling the wait-to-restore timer of a clock source Displaying status Displaying statistics ETX-5300A Ver.0 wait-to-restore <seconds> 0–720 hold-off <milliseconds> 300–1800 clear-wait-to-restore This is useful if a timing source fault is cleared and you want the source to be available immediately show status show statistics Clock Selection 9-15 . The config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(<1–4>)# prompt is displayed.  To configure a clock source for which the port has been defined: 1. as well as source priority are taken into account during clock selection process. Task Setting the priority to be taken into account during the clock selection process Setting quality level of the clock source Command priority <num> Comments 1–4 Priority 1 is the highest.  To display the ESMC statistics for a clock source: 1. The following prompt is displayed: config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(<src-id>)#.        Tx quality – Transmit clock quality Rx quality – Receive clock quality ESMC State – State of the Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel (ESMC) WTR State – Wait-to-restore counter status Displaying Clock Source Statistics You can display the Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel (ESMC) statistics for the clock sources. 2. The following prompt is displayed: config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(<src-id>)#. Navigate to configure system clock domain 1 source <src-id>. Enter show status. One reason for declaring a monitoring failure state is that the maximum frequency deviation of the clock source has been exceeded. Navigate to configure system clock domain 1 source <src-id>. Make sure the Ethernet port has been configured to supply SSMs and a dedicated flow has been directed to the port. 1. 9-16 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. The ESMC statistic counters are available for GbE and 10GbE ports only. ESMC Fail – Ethernet port with SSM-based clock has not received a SSM-packet stream for 5 seconds. ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)# ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)# show status Status : OK Tx Quality : DNU Rx Quality : PRC ESMC State : Unlocked WTR State : Inactive Clock status provides information about:  Clock source status:  OK – The clock source is valid and can be considered as clock input candidate for the system clock Physical Fail – Clock failure has been detected at the physical level Monitoring Fail – Clock failure has been detected by the clock monitoring entity of the domain.0 .Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Displaying Clock Source Status  To display the source clock status: 1. The clock source status is displayed. ESMC is used as a transport layer for SSMs in Sync-E. 2. Enter show statistics. 0 Clock Selection 9-17 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization The ESMC statistics are displayed. 1. ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)# ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)# show statistics ESMC Failure Counter : 1 Rx Tx ESMC Events : 0 1 ESMC Information : 0 29   ESMC Events – Number of changed quality level messages sent and received ESMC Information – Number of quality level information messages sent and received Example  To configure clock selection: • Domain 1:    Synchronization network type 1 Source 1: Station clock port on main card A Source 2: Ethernet port 1 on main card A. #***************************Defining_Station_Clock_Source******************** configure system clock station main-a/1 interface-type e1 no shutdown show status exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Clock_Domain************************* configure system clock domain 1 sync-network-type 1 source 1 station main-a/1 priority 1 wait-to-restore 0 exit source 2 rx-port ethernet main-a/1 priority 2 wait-to-restore 0 exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Ethernet_Ports*********************** configure port ethernet main-a/1 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default tx-ssm no shutdown exit all configure port ethernet main-a/2 queue-group profile q_group_2_level_default no shutdown ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual exit all #*********************************End**************************************** #*******************Configuring_Classifiier_Profile_for_SSM_Flow************* configure flows classifier-profile class1 match-any match untagged #*********************************End**************************************** #*******************Configuring_L2CP_Profile_for_SSM_Flow******************** configure port l2cp-profile l1 mac 01-80-c2-00-00-02 peer exit all #********************************Adding_SSM_Flow***************************** configure flows flow 1 classifier class1 egress-port ethernet main-a/2 queue-map-profile QueueMapDefaultProfile block 0/1 ingress-port ethernet main-a/1 l2cp profile l1 no shutdown exit all #*********************************End**************************************** Configuring Station Clock The ETX-5300A system clock can also use a signal received from a station (external) source as reference. The station clock interface has two functions: • • Input for external clock signal Output for the ETX-5300A clock. 1. This output provides a convenient means for distributing the ETX-5300A clock signal to other equipment or loop it back. To configure the station clock: 1. 9-18 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. oNote • The station clock input can be looped back directly via station clock output. if it uses a GPS 10 MHz signal. • The station clock interface does not provide Tx clock. The station clock ports are located on the main cards and provide the following timing interfaces: • • • • •  E1 via RJ-45 balanced and BNC unbalanced ports T1 via RJ-45 balanced port 2 MHz square-wave synchronization via RJ-45 balanced and BNC unbalanced ports 64 kHz composite via RJ-45 balanced port GPS 10 MHz via mini BNC port (input only). The config>system>clock>station(main-a/1 or main-b/1)# prompt is displayed.0 . Navigate to configure system clock station main-a/1 or main-b/1. ETX-5300A Ver.0 Clock Selection 9-19 . Task Setting the interface type Command interface-type {e1 | t1 | 2mhz | 64khz | gps} Comments You can configure the interface type only if the station clock is administratively disabled (shutdown). Defining transmit (output) clock type Defining E1 G. 1. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.732N–CRC bits to carry SSM information Enabling SSM transmission for E1 G.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization 2. Navigate to configure system clock station main-a/1 or main-b/1. no tx-ssm disables SSM transmission Administratively enabling station clock Displaying station clock status no shutdown show status shutdown disables the station clock rx-sensitivity {short-haul | long-haul} tx-clock-source {station-rclk | domain <domain-number>} ssm-channel {sa4 | sa5 | sa6 | sa7 | sa8} tx-ssm Displaying Station Clock Status The station clock status screen displays information about the station clock name. by default the interface is set as balanced.732N–CRC and T1 ESF interfaces impedance {balanced | unbalanced} line-type {g732n | g732n-crc} line-type {sf | esf} line-type {8khz | 8khz-400hz} name <string> no name removes the station clock source name Used to adjust the signal’s capability to reach destinations close by or farther away The output station clock can be locked to station Rx clock (loopback) or to domain (T4) clock For T1 ESF interface. SSM information is carried over FD.  To display station clock status: 1. Enabling SSM transmission allows using station clock as a SSM– based input clock for domain. T1 or 64 kHz interfaces Assigning a name to a station clock source Setting receiver sensitivity for E1 and 2-MHz interfaces. If you specify e1 or 2mhz and do not specify balanced or unbalanced. its statuses and received SSM quality. Setting impedance for E1 and 2-MHz interfaces Setting line type for E1. Changing the interface type resets all other related parameters to their default values. by means of a simple Y-cable. This configuration ensures that if one of the main cards fails. ETX-5300A# configure system clock station main-a/1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# shutdown ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# interface-type e1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# line-type g732n-crc ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# name E1_Station_Clock_1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# tx-clock-source domain 1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# tx-ssm ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# no shutdown Configuring Y-Cable Protection For the best protection of a clock subsystem. ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# show status Name : Station Clk-5-1 Administrative Status : Down Operational Status : Down Detailed Status : Received SSM : Quality Unknown Example  To configure clock selection: • • • • • • Main card A Interface type: E1 Line type: G732N-CRC Name: E1_Station_Clock_1 Transmit clock source: domain 1 SSM transmission enabled.0 . it is recommended to connect the two station clock interfaces to two separate station clock sources. the clock domain continues receiving timing from the remaining main card. 9-20 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. Enter show status. 1. In such an instance. The two station clocks used for Y-cable redundancy must be identical.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual The config>system>clock>station(main-a/1 or main-b/1)# prompt is displayed. you can achieve better hardware protection by connecting the station clock inputs in parallel. When only one station clock source is available. configure the clock domain to use two station clocks on different main cards as inputs 1 and 2. 2. The station clock status is displayed. 0 Clock Selection 9-21 . 3.  Example This example shows the configuration procedure for defining two clock sources: • • Source 1 – E1 station clock Source 2 – SDH/SONET port 1 on TDM card in slot 1. #*************************Activating_SDH_SONET_Port************************** ETX-5300A# configure port sdh-sonet 1/1 ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(1/1)# no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>port>sdh-sonet(1/1)# exit all #*********************************END**************************************** #*************************Configuring_Station_Clock************************** ETX-5300A# configure system clock station main-a/1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# shutdown ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# interface-type e1 ETX-5300A Ver. line type etc). Navigate to configure system clock The config>system>clock# prompt is displayed. Y-Cable Redundancy Note Although not shown in Figure 9-5. inputs 1 and 2 are doubled in main card B for redundancy.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Main Card A Input 1 Station Clock Input 2 SEC Y-Cable Clock Source Main Card B Station Clock SEC Figure 9-5. Verify that both station clocks to be used in Y-cable redundancy have been configured with the same parameters (interface type. Enter station-y-cable to enable Y-cable protection or no station-y-cable to disable it. To control Y-cable redundancy: 1. 2. 1. 0 .Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>station(main-a/1)# show status Name : Station Clk-5-1 Administrative Status : Up Operational Status : Up Detailed Status : Received SSM : PRC #*********************************END**************************************** #*************************Configuring_Clock_Domain*************************** ETX-5300A# configure system clock domain 1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)# sync-network-type 1 #*********************************END**************************************** #**********************Configuring_Station_Clock_as_Source_1***************** ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)# source 1 station main-a/1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)$ wait-to-restore 10 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)$ show status Status : Monitoring Fail Tx Quality : SEC Rx Quality : SSM Based ESMC State : Unlocked WTR State : Running <===== WTR Timer is running ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)$ clear-wait-to-restore ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)$ show status Status Tx Quality Rx Quality ESMC State WTR State : : : : : OK DNU PRC Unlocked Inactive ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(1)$ exit ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)# show status System Clock Source : 1 State State : Locked : Unlocked Quality : PRC Station Out Clock Source : 0 InActive Force Switch: Manual Switch : InActive #*********************************END**************************************** #**********************Configuring_SDH_SONET_Port_as_Source_2**************** ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)# source 2 rx-port sdh-sonet 1/1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(2)$ quality-level ssu-a ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(2)$ wait-to-restore 10 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(2)$ show status Status : OK Tx Quality : PRC 9-22 Clock Selection ETX-5300A Ver. 1. The device operates in master. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Rx Quality : SSU-A ESMC State : Unlocked WTR State : Inactive ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>domain(1)# show status System Clock Source : 1 State State : Locked : Locked Quality : PRC Station Out Clock Source : 2 InActive Force Switch: Manual Switch : InActive #*********************************END**************************************** Configuration Errors Table 9-4 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. transparent and slave clock modes with hardware-based time-stamping as well as ToD (time of day) synchronization. Configuration Error Messages Message Duplicated Source Existing sources should be removed first Invalid Domain Mode Invalid Domain Number Invalid Holdoff Timer Invalid Priority Invalid Source ID Invalid Source Number Invalid Source Type Invalid Source Invalid WTR Timer Source is not Configured Interface is in conflict with domain network type Description Selected clock source is already in use Domain parameters cannot be modified before removing the clock sources connected to it Selected domain mode is invalid Clock domain number is not 1 Selected holdoff timer value is out of allowed range (300–1800) Clock priority number is out of allowed range (1–4) Selected source ID is invalid Clock source number is not within range (1–4) Selected source type is invalid Configured clock source is invalid Selected holdoff timer value is not within range (0–720) Selected clock source has not yet been configured Interface and domain do not have the same network type 9.0 1588v2 Timing 9-23 . Table 9-4.2 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A fully supports IEEE 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol for distribution of synchronization signals over packet-switched networks. When enabled. Factory Defaults By default. is a high-precision time protocol for synchronization of clocks over a PSN. defined in the IEEE 1588 standard. or for which GPS signals are inaccessible.1 IEEE 1588 profile Benefits The Precision Time Protocol (PTP).Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Standards and MIBs G. each 1588v2 entity is disabled and configured as neither master nor slave.8265. The use of PTP is beneficial for applications that cannot bear the cost of a GPS receiver at each node. it has the following default settings: Master Parameter ip-address ptp-domain maximum-slaves mode sync-rate tx-clock Default Value – 4 256 time-frequency 64pps domain 1 Slave Parameter ip-address ptp-domain BMCA wait-to-restore recovery-mode priority network-type peer sync Default Value – 4 revertive 300 time-frequency 1 Automatic 0 rate – 128pps grant-period –300 announce rate – 2sec grant-period –300 delay-respond rate – 128pps grant-period –300 9-24 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. ETX-5300A 1588v2 master entities comply with the G. ETX-5300A timestamps the correction field of traversing 1588v2 (UDP/IP) packets to reflect time in ingress to egress direction.8265. In the transparent mode. • • 1588v2 Master Mode ETX-5300A supports one or two redundant 1588v2 master entities (one per main card) with a total of up to: • • 512 slaves at 64 PPS rate 256 slaves at 128 PPS rate. ETX-5300A does not use follow-up messaging. The device updates the correction field directly and does not use follow-up messages for the time-correction functionality. Figure 9-6 illustrates the basic schematics of the 1588v2 master functionality.Installation and Operation Manual Slave Parameter quality-level Default Value type2SsmBased Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Functional Description When implementing the 1588v2 PTP. The 1588v2 entities generate PTP packets.0 1588v2 Timing 9-25 . regenerating frequency and time from 1588v2 packets received from grandmaster 1588v2 transparent. ETX-5300A Ver. Note Currently. ETX-5300A supports up to 128 slaves per main card. providing frequency and frequency/time information to the slaves. 1588v2 slave.1 (PTP telecom profile) requirements. which are encapsulated with UDP/IP and forwarded to 1588v2 slaves via PSN. The ETX-5300A system is located near the core of the network and supplies clock reference to remote Ethernet CPEs operating in 1588v2 mode. With one-step synchronization. 1. ETX-5300A operates in the following roles: • 1588v2 master. eliminating the need for an external timing device installed in the core of the network to support 1588v2 timing distribution. Both 1588v2 master entities reside on loopback addresses of the router. They operate in one-way and two-way modes. Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Main Card A Loopback RIF 1588v2 Master ETH 1588v2 Slave RIF Router RIF RIF I/O Card ETH ETH 1588v2 Slave 1588v2 Slave Loopback RIF 1588v2 Master Main Card B Figure 9-6. 1. 1588v2 packets are transmitted via GbE and 10GbE ports on the Ethernet main and I/O cards. 9-26 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver. Sources Each 1588v2 master entity has three inputs (frequency and time): • • • Frequency from the SEC Time of Day (ToD) from the RS-422 interface (NMEA 0183) Phase (1 PPS. They have the same clock input and distribute timing signals to all slaves in their domains. 1588v2 Master Two independent master clock systems reside on active and backup main cards.0 . or Pulse Per Second) from the RS-422 or mini BNC interface. Up to 512 1588v2 slaves are supported. 1 PPS and 10 MHz GPS (via SEC) inputs to the active and backup main cards can be connected to the same GPS source via a Y-cable for clock system redundancy. the chassis provides two independent 1588v2 master entities. and the other one – as backup (secondary). ETX-5300A supports two 1588v2 protection topologies. Redundant chassis – 1588v2 slave operates opposite two ETX-5300As with a single 1588v2 master entity each.0 1588v2 Timing 9-27 . illustrated in Figure 9-8 and Figure 9-9: • Redundant main cards –1588v2 slave operates opposite a single ETX-5300A with two main cards. 1588v2 slaves use the Best Master Clock (BMC) algorithm for selecting the clock source with the best quality.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Active Main Card Time of Day Phase RS-422 Mini BNC ToD and 1PPS 1PPS 1588v2 Master Frequency SEC Clock Inputs 10 MHz Backup Main Card GPS Source 1588v2 Master Frequency SEC Clock Inputs ToD and 1PPS 1PPS Time of Day Phase RS-422 Mini BNC Figure 9-7. One of the 1588v2 masters is defined as active (primary). 1. Redundancy When ETX-5300A is equipped with two main cards. 1588v2 Timing Inputs ToD. • ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A Main Card A 1588v2 Master 1588v2 Slave Main Card B 1588v2 Master Legend: Active Backup Figure 9-8. Card Redundancy ETX-5300A Main Card A 1588v2 Master 1588v2 Slave ETX-5300A Main Card A 1588v2 Master Legend: Active Backup Figure 9-9. Chassis Redundancy 1588v2 Slave Mode The slave clock works in a dynamic mode with the master clock. it notifies the slave clock of the master clock quality level and source port identification. requesting synchronization signal transmission and specifying the period of time and frequency for signal transmission. 1. When the master clock grants signal transmission. and then periodically transmits synchronization signals.0 . 9-28 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver. 1. while ignoring TOD information (time indication and time-related status/alarm messages). setting the 1588v2 entity to be neither master nor slave (recovered) mode. Navigate to configure system clock. • Forwarding The 1588v2 slave entity uses a dedicated router loopback interface for message forwarding. ETX-5300A Ver. delay request and delay response messages.  To configure 1588v2 master: 1.0 1588v2 Timing 9-29 . the 1588v2 slave entity switches to the secondary master clock source. 2. the 1588v2 slave entity reconstructs remote clock. The config>system>clock>master(main-a/1 or main-b/1)# prompt is displayed. Verify that you have defined a loopback-type router interface with a valid IP address. In this mode. In this mode.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization The 1588v2 slave entity receives TOD information from the master clock source and outputs NMEA messages via TOD RJ-45 connector. Use no master command prior to switching between slave and master modes. using sync. The config>system>clock# prompt is displayed. At the config>system>clock# prompt. If a failure is detected (no sync massages within 10 seconds). Each 1588v2 master has its own configuration database which is mirrored in both active and backup main cards. 3. Redundancy The ETX-5300A 1588v2 slaves support non-revertive clock redundancy. while providing TOD information via TOD interface. while the 1588v2 entity is in the master mode. Note • no master disables PTP master mode. The message exchange modes are as follows: • Frequency. Recovery Modes The 1588v2 slave entities operate in two-way mode to recover synchronization information. • Slave mode cannot be activated. Frequency and time. enter master[ main-a/1 | main-b/1 ] {ptp}. using sync and delay request/response messages. similar to 1588v2 master (Figure 9-6). This LB RIF cannot be shared with either a 1588v2 master entity or a PW. using the Best Master Clock (BMC) algorithm for selecting the clock source with the best quality. This IP address must be used as the IP address of 1588v2 master entity. Configuring 1588v2 Master Clock ETX-5300A chassis with two main cards supports two independent 1588v2 master entities. the 1588v2 slave entity reconstructs remote clock. using sync and delay request/response messages. The 1588v2 master status is displayed.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual 4. In the config>system>clock>master(main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt. Task Activating the 1588v2 master entity Defining IP address of 1588v2 master entity Creating a PTP domain Command no shutdown ip-address <value> Comments shutdown deactivates the 1588v2 master entity The IP address of 1588v2 master entity must be the same as the IP address of the router loopback interface A domain consists of one or more PTP devices (masters or slaves) communicating with each other according to PTP requirements. 1. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. The total number of slaves supported by 1588v2 master entities residing on both main cards is 512 In frequency mode the master transmits sync and announce messages to slaves In time-frequency mode the master transmits sync. a 1588v2 master and slaves operating with it must belong to the same PTP domain. For correct distribution of timing signals.0 . enter show status. 9-30 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver. announce and delay response messages to slaves Defining the synchronization message rate Selecting Tx clock domain Displaying 1588v2 master status Displaying 1588v2 slave status Enable statistic collection sync-rate { 16pps | 32pps | 64pps | 128pps } tx-clock {domain <1>} show status slave <value > show status pm-collection The slave is identified by its IP address no pm-collection resets statistic counters and stops further collection of performance monitoring data All slaves within the domain must use the same message rate ptp-domain <4–23> Defining a maximum number of slaves Defining the 1588v2 message exchange mode maximum-slaves <1–512 > mode {frequency | time-frequency} Displaying statistics Clearing statistics show statistics running clear statistics Displaying Status You can display the current status of the 1588v2 master and the slaves in its domain.  To display 1588v2 master status: • At the config>system>clock>master(main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt. identifier (MAC address).1.1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>master(main-a/1)# show status Administrative Status: Up Operational Status : Up Detailed Status : OK Slave IP Address Oper Clock Identity Announce Mode Rate (pps) 1 1. IP address.2.1 Frq xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx 16 2 2.2.0 1588v2 Timing 9-31 .  To display 1588v2 slave status: • At the config>system>clock>master(main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt.1. 1.1.1 show status Validity : On Operational Mode : Frequency+Time Clock Identity : xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Announce Rate (pps) : 4 Announce Period (sec) : 6 Delay Response Rate (pps) : 4 Delay Response Period (sec) : 5 The 1588v2 slave status provides information about:      Validity –Slave validity Operational Mode – Message exchange mode Clock Identity – Unique slave identifier (MAC address) Announce Rate – Current rate of Announce messages Announce Period – Period of time for which an Announce message is transmitted ETX-5300A Ver. The 1588v2 slave status is displayed. including its number. announce and delay response message rates. message exchange mode. ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>master(main-a/1)# slave 1.2 Frq+T xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx 16 The 1588v2 master status provides information about:  Administrative status:  Delay Rs Rate (pps) -16 Up –1588v2 master is administratively enabled Down – 1588v2 master is administratively disabled   Operational status:  Up –1588v2 master is operating properly Down – 1588v2 master has failed LLD – Lower Link Down    Detailed status:  OK –1588v2 master is operating properly TOD Failure – ToD source failure 1PPS Failure – 1PPS source failure    Slave status. enter slave <IP address> show status. or • At In the config>system>clock>master(main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt. enter show statistics running to display master statistics. 1. you can display the current statistics for 1588v2 master or slave. 1588v2 Master Statistic Counters Counter Tx Packets Tx Sync Packets 9-32 1588v2 Timing Description Number of all packets transmitted by 1588v2 master Number of Sync packets transmitted by 1588v2 master or slave ETX-5300A Ver. enter slave < IP address> show statistics running to display slave statistics.1.1.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual   Delay Response Rate – Current rate of Delay Response messages Delay Response Period – Period of time for which an Delay Response message is transmitted Displaying Statistics If the collection of performance monitoring data is enabled.1)#show statistics running Running -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Tx Sync Packets : 1 TX Follow Up Packets : 1 TX Delay Response Packets : 1 TX Announce Packets : 1 TX Signaling Packets : 1 RX Signaling Packets : 1 RX Delay Request : 1 Discarded Signaling Packets : 1 Table 9-5. ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>master(main-a/1)# show statistics running Running ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Tx Packets : 1 Tx Sync Packets : 1 TX Follow Up Packets : 1 TX Delay Response Packets : 1 TX Announce Packets : 1 TX Signaling Packets : 1 Rx Packets : 1 RX Signaling Packets : 1 RX Delay Request : 1 Discarded Signaling Packets : 1 ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>master(main-a/1)>slave(1. The 1588v2 master or slave statistics are displayed.0 .  To display statistics: • At the config>system>clock>master(main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt. skipping the None state The 1588v2 master cannot be modified while it is active The Tx clock domain is not 1 The defined IP address is invalid The defined IP address must be the router loopback interface address The maximum number of allowed 1588v2 slaves per chassis has been exceeded The number of 1588v2 slaves is not within range (1–512 per chassis) The IP address must be defined before attempting to enable the 1588v2 masters The PTP domain number is not within range (4–23) The synchronization message rate value is not within range Configuring 1588v2 Slave Clock Configuration Configuration of the ETX-5300A 1588v2 entity to slave mode requires: • • Defining 1588v2 slave entity Configuring a peer 1588v2 master entity for the slave.0 1588v2 Timing 9-33 . 1. or vice versa. ETX-5300A Ver. Configuration Error Messages Message Distributed must be defined as none Distributed PTP must be in shutdown Domain must be 1 Invalid IP Address IP must be configured as a router LB address Maximum number of slaves per shelf must be less than 512 Maximum slave is out of range Missing IP address configuration PTP domain is out of range Sync rate is out of range Description The 1588v2 clock cannot be changed from master to recovered.Installation and Operation Manual Counter TX Follow Up Packets TX Delay Response Packets TX Announce Packets TX Signaling Packets Rx Packets RX Signaling Packets RX Delay Request Discarded Signaling Packets Description Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Number of Follow-up packets transmitted by 1588v2 master Number of Delay Response packets transmitted by 1588v2 master or slave Number of Announce packets transmitted by 1588v2 master or slave Number of Signaling packets transmitted by 1588v2 master or slave Number of all packets received by 1588v2 master Number of Signaling packets received by 1588v2 master or slave Number of Delay Request packets received by 1588v2 master or slave Number of Signaling packets discarded by 1588v2 master or slave Configuration Errors Table 9-6 lists the messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected. Table 9-6. Revertive mode – if a higher priority master becomes available. 1. • Slave mode cannot be activated. 4. Note • no recovered disables the PTP slave mode. 2. At the config>system>clock# prompt. The config>system>clock# prompt is displayed. Navigate to configure system clock. At the config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1)# prompt. This IP address must be used as the IP address of the 1588v2 slave entity. The config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1/ptp)# prompt is displayed. Use no recovered prior to switching between slave and master modes. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Verify that you have defined a loopback-type router interface with a valid IP address. Task Activating 1588v2 slave entity Defining IP address of 1588v2 slave entity Creating a PTP domain Command no shutdown ip-address <value> Comments shutdown deactivates 1588v2 slave entity The IP address of the 1588v2 slave entity must be the same as the IP address of the router loopback interface A domain consists of one or more PTP devices (masters or slaves) communicating with each other according to PTP requirements. 3. enter recovered [ main-a/1 | main-b/1 ] {ptp}. a 1588v2 master and the slaves operating with it must belong to the same PTP domain. the 1588v2 slave uses it as its active master Non-revertive – if a higher priority master becomes available.0 . while the 1588v2 entity is in the master mode. setting the 1588v2 entity as neither slave (recovered mode) nor master. the 1588v2 slave remains with its current active master Defining amount of time that previously failed clock must be fault free in order to be considered available wait-to-restore <0–720> ptp-domain <4–23> Defining BMCA (Best Master Clock Algorithm) mode revertive nonRevertive 9-34 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Defining 1588v2 Slave Entity  To define a 1588v2 slave entity: 1. For the correct distribution of timing signals. Navigate to configure system clock recovered main-a/1 or main-b/1.0 1588v2 Timing 9-35 . delay request/response messages. The config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1)>master 1 or master 2# prompt is displayed. and ignoring TOD information (time indication and time-related status/alarm messages) time-frequency –the 1588v2 slave entity reconstructs remote clock. 1. Note To delete a peer 1588v2 master. This IP address must be used as the IP address of the master clock for the slave entity. Any other value indicates that the slave ignores the value delivered in the Announce messages and uses the one that has been configured by the user. ETX-5300A Ver. using sync. using sync. 2. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. use no master 1 or no master 2 syntax. 4.Installation and Operation Manual Task Defining the 1588v2 mode Command recovery-mode {frequency | timefrequency} Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Comments frequency – the 1588v2 slave entity reconstructs remote clock. enter master<1 or 2>. At the config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1)# prompt. providing also TOD information via TOD interface Displaying 1588v2 slave status Displaying statistics Clearing statistics show status show statistics running clear statistics Displaying 1588v2 slave status Configuring a Peer 1588v2 Master  To configure a peer 1588v2 master: 1. 3. delay request/response messages. Task Activating peer 1588v2 master Defining peer master source port ID Command no shutdown master-identity {clock-id<value> port <value>} Comments shutdown deactivates peer 1588v2 master Default clock ID value (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF) indicates that the slave retrieves the master source port ID from the Announce messages. Verify that you have defined a peer with a valid IP address. At the config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1)>master 1 or master 2# prompt. The config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1)# prompt is displayed. 9-36 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver.0 .  To display 1588v2 slave status: • At the config>system>clock>recovered (main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt. it selects a clock source with the highest priority (priority 1) Specifying the peer device that transmits the clock signal Defining synchronization message rate requested by the slave and duration of sync message transmission Defining Announce message rate requested by the slave and duration of Announce message transmission Defining Delay Response message rate requested by the slave and duration of Delay Response message transmission Setting quality level peer <peer-number> sync {rate [16pps |32pps | 64pps | 128pps] [grant-period <60–1000>} All slaves within a domain must use the same sync message rate parameters announce {rate [16sec |8sec |4sec |2sec |1sec | 500msec | 250msec | 125msec] [grant-period <60–1000>} All slaves within a domain must use the same Announce message rate parameters delay-respond {rate [16pps |32pps | 64pps | 128pps] [grant-period <60– 1000>} All slaves within a domain must use the same Delay Response message rate parameters quality-level { prc | ssu-a | ssu-b | type1-sec | type1-dnu | type1-ssm-based } quality-level { prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | smc | st4 | dus | type2-ssm-based | prov } quality-level { unk | type3-sec | type3-dnu | type3-ssm-based } The quality level values are according to the network type Displaying Status You can display current status of the 1588v2 slave entity.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Task Defining peer master priority Command priority { 1 | 2} Installation and Operation Manual Comments When a 1588v2 slave operates opposite two 1588v2 masters with the same quality level. enter show status. The 1588v2 master status is displayed. 1. 1. locked. delay respond and announce rates and periods • Displaying Statistics You can display current statistics for 1588v2 slave entity.  To display statistics: • At the config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt.30.30. holdover) Indicated and received quality level Master clock identity.0 1588v2 Timing 9-37 .30 Master Num IP PTSF Clock Identity Received QL Granted Sync Rate (pps) Granted Sync Period (sec) Granted Announce Rate (pps) Granted Announce Period (sec) Granted Delay Respond Rate (pps) Granted Delay Respond Period (sec) : : : : : : : : : : : 1 30. Granted sync.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1)# show status Clock State : Free Run Indicated QL : Type-1 PRC Clock Identity : 1 Active Master : 1 Ip Address : 30. The 1588v2 slave running or measured statistics are displayed.30 ACT Type-1 DNU 64 0 2 0 64 0 The 1588v2 slave status provides the following information • • • • Current state of the slave clock (free run. ETX-5300A Ver. enter show statistics running or measured to display running or measured slave statistics. delay respond or announce message for 10 seconds.30. Its Active state indicates that the 1588v2 slave has not received a sync. acquisition.30. IP address and number PTSF (Packet Timing Signal Fail) indication. 1. 1588v2 Slave Measured Statistics Table 9-7.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1)# show statistics running Running ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Unicast Announce Request : 2 Unicast Announce Accept : 1 Unicast Announce Reject : 0 Unicast Announce Timeout : 0 Unicast Sync Request : 2 Unicast Sync Accept : 4 Unicast Sync Reject : 0 Unicast Sync Timeout : 0 Unicast Delay Respond Request : 3 Unicast Delay Respond Accept : 1 Unicast Delay Respond Reject : 0 Unicast Delay Respond Timeout : 1 Rx Unicast Sync Miss Ordered : 0 No Sync Total Elapsed Time : 10 No Sync Elapsed Time : 0 No Announce Total Elapsed Time : 6 No Announce Elapsed Time : 0 No Delay Respond Total Elapsed Time : 11 No Rx Rx Rx Delay Respond Elapsed Time Sync Packets Sync Lost Delay Respond Packets : : : : 0 9595 0 9467 Figure 9-10. 1588v2 Slave Running Statistics ETX-5300A>config>system>clock>recovered(main-a/1)# show statistics measured Measured ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Sync Rate Delay Respond Rate Current : 128 128 Maximum : 128 128 Minimum : 128 128 Figure 9-11. 1588v2 Slave Running Statistic Counters Counter Unicast Announce Request Unicast Announce Accept Unicast Announce Reject Unicast Announce Timeout Unicast Sync Request Unicast Sync Accept Unicast Sync Reject Description Number of unicast announce messages sent by the slave Number of unicast announce messages accepted by the slave Number of unicast announce messages rejected by the slave Number of unicast announce messages that timed out Number of unicast sync messages sent by the slave Number of unicast sync messages accepted by the slave Number of unicast sync messages rejected by the slave 9-38 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver.0 . Installation and Operation Manual Counter Unicast Sync Timeout Unicast Delay Respond Request Unicast Delay Respond Accept Unicast Delay Respond Reject Unicast Delay Respond Timeout Rx Unicast Sync Miss Ordered No Sync Total Elapsed Time No Sync Elapsed Time No Announce Total Elapsed Time No Announce Elapsed Time No Delay Respond Total Elapsed Time No Delay Respond Elapsed Time Rx Sync Packets Rx Sync Lost Rx Delay Respond Packets Description Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Number of unicast sync messages that timed out Number of unicast delay respond messages sent by the slave Number of unicast delay respond messages accepted by the slave Number of unicast delay respond messages rejected by the slave Number of unicast delay respond messages that timed out Number of received unicast sync messaged that are misordered Total time in seconds during which sync messages were not received Time in seconds elapsed after the last received sync message Total time in seconds during which announce messages were not received Time in seconds elapsed after the last received announce message Total time in seconds during which delay respond messages were not received Time in seconds elapsed after the last received delay respond message Total number of received sync packets Total number of lost sync packets Total number of received delay respond packets Table 9-8. 1. ETX-5300A Ver. 1588v2 Slave Measured Statistic Counters Counter Current Sync Rate Maximum Sync Rate Minimum Sync Rate Current Delay Respond Rate Maximum Delay Respond Rate Minimum Delay Respond Rate Description Current rate of sync messages Maximum rate of sync messages Minimum rate of sync messages Current rate of delay respond messages Maximum rate of delay respond messages Minimum rate of delay respond messages Note Delay respond rate counters are not available in time-frequency recovery mode. Configuration Errors Table 9-9 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected.0 1588v2 Timing 9-39 . Announce or Delay Response messages is higher than the configured message rate The defined IP address is not valid The defined IP address is different from the router loopback interface address The peer 1588v2 master must be 1 or 2 A peer 1588v2 master cannot be disabled while it is active The maximum number of allowed 1588v2 slaves per chassis has been exceeded The IP address must be defined before the 1588v2 slave can be enable The PTP domain number is not within range (4–23) The PTP WTR value is not within range (0–720) The 1588v2 clock cannot be changed from recovered to master or vice versa. At the config>system>clock# prompt. Grant-period out of range Configuration fail. Navigate to configure system clock. enter tod[ main-a/1 | main-b/1 ]. 3.  To configure ToD clock: 1. 2. Configuration Error Messages Message All Masters within slave module must be deleted Configuration fail. skipping the None state A 1588v2 slave cannot be modified while it is active Configuring ToD Clock ToD clock configuration process includes defining ToD clock parameters and enabling/disabling ToD Y-cable redundancy. The config>system>clock>tod(main-a/1 or main-b/1)# prompt is displayed. 1. The minimumexpected value cannot be higher than the rate value Invalid IP Address IP must be configured as a router LB address Master number should be 1 or 2 only Master still active Missing IP address configuration PTP domain is out of range PTP wait-to-restore is out of range Recovered must be defined as none Recovered PTP must be in shutdown Recovered PTP: The delay-respond rate must be equal or lower that the sync rate Description A 1588v2 slave cannot be disabled while it still has peer 1588v2 masters attached to it The grant period value is not within range (60–1000 sec) The selected minimum expected value for Synchronization.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual Table 9-9. At the config>system>clock>tod(main-a/1 or main-b/1)#prompt. The config>system>clock# prompt is displayed. 9-40 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver. enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.0 . 1.0 Router interface (RIF) – 1 RIF IP address – 15. Table 9-10 lists messages generated by ETX-5300A when a configuration error is detected.30 Slave entity IP address – 15.15.30. when Y-cable redundancy is enabled ToD clock cannot be modified if it is active (no shutdown) To enable ToD Y-cable redundancy.15.1588v2 entities residing on two main cards must be the same type: both master or both slave Example This example illustrates configuration of 1588v2 slave and master entities.15. 2.15/32 Physical port – Ethernet port 3 on main card A Peer IP address – 30. baud rate etc). At the config>system>clock# prompt. • Slave clock       ETX-5300A Ver. Verify that both ToD clocks to be used in Y-cable redundancy are active and have been configured with the same parameters (interface type. enter tod-y-cable to enable or no tody-cable to disable the ToD Y-cable redundancy. configure both ToD clock to the same parameters To use ToD Y-cable redundancy.15.30. Table 9-10.Installation and Operation Manual Task Activating ToD clock Defining ToD clock baud rate Assigning name to ToD clock Defining input interface for 1PPS phase stream Command no shutdown baudrate {2400bps | 4800bps | 9600bps | 14400bps | 19200bps | 38400bps | 57600bps | 115200bps} name <tod_name > interface-type {rj-45 | mini-bnc} Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Comments shutdown deactivates the ToD clock no name removes the ToD clock name rj-45 – 1PPS is supplied via RJ-45 TOD connector mini-bnc – 1PPS is supplied via mini BNC 1PPS connector Displaying ToD status show status  To enable/disable ToD Y-cable redundancy: 1. Configuration Error Messages Message TOD Y-cable must be disabled before changing TOD TOD must be in shutdown Both TODs must be in no shutdown and have the same parameters Both PTP 1588 must be the same: slave or master Description ToD clock cannot be modified.15 Quality level – PRC 1588v2 Timing 9-41 . 30 exit all #*********************************END**************************************** #**************************Configuring_1588v2_Slave************************** configure system clock recovered main-a/3 ptp ip-address 15.15.0 .15/32 Router 30. Slave Clock Configuration • Master clock       Router interface (RIF) – 2 RIF IP address – 16.16.15/32 no shutdown exit all #*********************************END**************************************** #***************************Configuring_Peer_Master************************** configure peer 1 ip 30.15.30.15.16.15 9-42 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver.30 RIF 2 SVI Port 4 Main Ethernet Card A Figure 9-12.15.30.15.16.16.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A Port 1 Port 2 Peer Master Clock Source PSN 1588v2 Slave Entity Port 3 15.16 Sync rate – 128 pps To configure 1588v2 slave clock: #***************************Adding_Loopback_RIF****************************** configure router 1 interface 1 loopback address 15.30.15.15 LB RIF 1 15. 1.30.15.16/32 Physical port – Ethernet port 1 on main card B Master entity IP address – 16.15. 16/32 no shutdown exit all #*********************************END**************************************** #**************************Configuring_1588v2_Master************************* configure system clock master main-b/1 ptp ip-address 16. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization master 1 peer 1 quality-level prc no shutdown #*********************************End****************************************  To verify that the slave is locked: #***************************Displaying_Slave_Clock_Status******************** config>system>clock>recovered(1/ptp) show status # Clock State: Frequency : Locked Time : Locked Indicated QL : Type-1 DNU Clock Identity : 0 Active Master : 1 Ip Address : 15.16.16.15.30.16.16.16 sync-rate 128pps no shutdown #*********************************End**************************************** ETX-5300A Ver.15 Master Num : 1 IP : 30.30 PTSF : NACT Clock Identity : Received QL : Type-1 DNU Granted Sync Rate (pps) : 128 Granted Sync Period (sec) : 60 Granted Announce Rate (pps) : 2 Granted Announce Period (sec) : 300 Granted Delay Respond Rate (pps) : 128 Granted Delay Respond Period (sec) : 300 #*********************************End****************************************  To configure 1588v2 master clock: #***************************Adding_Loopback_RIF****************************** configure router 1 interface 2 loopback address 16.0 1588v2 Timing 9-43 .15.30. 0 . 1.Chapter 9 Timing and Synchronization Installation and Operation Manual 9-44 1588v2 Timing ETX-5300A Ver. etc. but if you enter a name containing more than 20 characters. 1.1 Administrative Information The ETX-5300A management software allows you to assign a name to the unit. file management. 2. Enter the necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.Chapter 10 Administration This chapter covers administrative tasks such as entering contact info.0 Administrative Information 10-1 . and assign a contact person. this command that defines a 25-character device name: ETX-5300A# config sys name ETX-5300A12345 results in this prompt that shows the first 20 characters. followed by 0: ETXETXETXETXETX-5300A0# no name removes user-assigned device name Specifying location Specifying contact person Displaying device information. It also includes a section with instructions for resetting the unit. add its description. MAC address. the prompt displays only the first 20 characters followed by 0.  To configure device information: 1. Navigate to configure system. For example. specify its location to distinguish it from the other devices installed in your system. 10. The config>system# prompt is displayed. Task Assigning device name Command name <device-name> Comments The length of the device name is unlimited. and amount of time device has been running location <device-location> contact <contact-person> show device-information no location removes user-assigned location no contact removes user-assigned contact information ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual  To configure device information: • • • Device name – ETX-5300A-HQ Location – floor-8 Contact –Engineer-1.2 Date and Time You can set the date and time for the ETX-5300A internal real-time clock or use the NTP server clock signal as a time/date reference.0. Standards and MIBs • • • • DISMAN-SCHEDULE-MIB. sending NTP requests to the servers at user-defined intervals. 1.0 ETX-5300A-HQ floor-8 Engineer-1 00-20-D2-30-CC-9D 000:00:04:10 10. 1. If there is no preferred server or if the preferred server does not answer. Back-up Sw: 3. RFC 2863 SNMPv2-MIB. organize the NTP subnet of servers and clients. ETX-5300A-HQ location floor-8 contact Engineer-1 show device-information ETX-5300A# configure system ETX-5300A>config>system# name ETX-5300A-HAC >config>system# ETX-5300A-HAC >config>system# ETX-5300A-HAC >config>system# Description Name Location Contact MAC Address Engine Time : : : : : : ETH NTU: Boot. SNTP provides comprehensive mechanisms to access national time dissemination services. then ETX-5300A sends NTP requests to any enabled servers. Hw: 0. so that ETX-5300A sends NTP requests to the preferred server. It improves the timekeeping quality of the network by using redundant reference sources and diverse paths for time distribution. RFC 3231 IF-MIB.0 . 10-2 Date and Time ETX-5300A Ver.10. ETX-5300A can synchronize with up to ten servers. Benefits Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) synchronizes the internal clocks of network devices to a single time reference source. You can set one of the active NTP servers as the preferred server.0. RFC 3418 RFC 4330. Main Sw: 3. and adjust the system clock in each participant. Requ ETX-5300A est PSN Request Response SNTP Server Reference Time Source Resp est Re onse Requ se spon ETX-5300A Figure 10-1.0. A client (ETX-5300A) sets its system date and time by retrieving this information from an SNTP server. Navigate to configure system date-and-time. Syslog entries and so on.0 Not preferred.0 Date and Time 10-3 . The information is used for time-stamping log file messages. SNTP Functionality Transport Protocol SNTP uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP) for its transport. listening to an unsolicited broadcast address and learning timestamps from any broadcast server sending messages to this address The client checks each message received from an SNTP server by performing sanity checks to verify it validity (SNTP server IP match. The config>system>date-time# prompt is displayed. but devices and servers can be defined to use any port for communication. When an SNTP server is defined. sending requests to configured server addresses Broadcast.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 10 Administration Factory Defaults The default configuration of the SNTP parameters is: • • No SNTP servers defined Polling interval set to 15 minutes. Client Operation Mode SNTP client operates in one of the following modes: • • Unicast. source/destination port match etc).0. SNMP traps. The UDP port that has been assigned to SNTP is 123. Configuring Date and Time  To set the system date and time: 1. SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as a reference. ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Functional Description SNTP is a time-maintenance protocol that helps synchronize networked hardware. its default configuration is: • • IP address set to 0. It is based on a server-client topology. in 30-minute increments Comments zone utc [<[{+|-}]hh[:mm]>] time <hh:mm[:ss]> Displaying the Date and Time  To display the date and time: • From the system context (config>system). Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual 2. Task Enabling ETX-5300A to listen to NTP broadcast messages to obtain accurate timestamps Command broadcast Comments no broadcast disables broadcast mode. Task Specifying the desired date format Defining the date Defining the time zone relative to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) Defining the time Command date-format {yyyy-mm-dd | dd-mm-yyyy | mm-dd-yyyy | yyyy-dd-mm} date <date> Date is according to the configured date format Allowed range of values: -12:00 to +12:00. 1. 2011 Time = 5:40pm Zone = UTC–4 hours and 30 minutes.0 . ETX-5300A#configure system date-and-time ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time# date-format mm-dd-yyyy ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time# date 05-17-2011 ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time# time 17:40 ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time# zone utc -04:30 ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time# SNTP Configuration  To configure SNTP parameters: 1. The config>system>date-time>sntp# prompt is displayed. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Example  To set the date and time: • • • • Format = mm-dd-yyyy Date = May 17. enter: show date-and-time. 10-4 Date and Time ETX-5300A Ver. 2. Navigate to config system date-and-time sntp. Type server <server-id> to define an SNTP server with ID <server-id>. The following prompt is displayed: config>system>date-time>sntp>server(<server-id>)$. The config>system>date-time>sntp# prompt is displayed.0 Date and Time 10-5 . The following prompt is displayed: config>system>date-time>sntp>server(<server-id>)#. Navigate to config system date-and-time sntp. Task Setting the IP address of the server Setting SNTP server as the preferred server Command address <IP-address> Comments prefer no prefer removes preference Note: Only one server can be preferred. 2.Installation and Operation Manual Task Setting the polling interval (in minutes) for SNTP requests Defining and configuring SNTP servers (refer to Defining SNTP Servers and Configuring SNTP Server Parameters) Displaying SNTP status Command poll-interval interval <minutes> server <server-id> Chapter 10 Administration Comments Allowed range is 1–1440 show status Defining SNTP Servers  To define an SNTP server: 1. Navigate to config system date-and-time sntp. Configure the SNTP server parameters as needed. The SNTP server parameters are configured by default as described in Factory Default. 3. to a specific UDP port or to default UDP port (123) Administratively enabling server Sending query to server and displaying result ETX-5300A Ver. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. 3. Configuring SNTP Server Parameters  To configure SNTP server parameters: 1. Type server <server-id> to select the SNTP server to configure. 1. as described in Configuring SNTP Server Parameters. The config>system>date-time>sntp# prompt is displayed. udp port <udp-port> udp default no shutdown query-server shutdown disables the server Allowed range is 1–65535 Setting UDP port for NTP requests. 2. 3 Inventory The ETX-5300A inventory table displays the unit’s components.1 UDP : 123 Date : 00-00-0000 Time : 00:00:00 Stratum : 0 ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp>server(1)# exit ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp# show status System Uptime : 000 Days 00:19:55 System Time : 2009-09-14 13:01:09 Current Source : 1 NTP Server Type 127. hardware.1.Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual Example  To define SNTP server: • • • • Server ID = 1 IP address = 192. and you can display more detailed information for each component. In addition. software and hardware revisions and number of defined MAC addresses. Displaying Inventory Information The ETX-5300A inventory table displays the unit’s components. software and firmware revisions. their serial numbers.1 ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp>server(1)# prefer ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp>server(1)# no shutdown ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp>server(1)# query-server Query Server Replay ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Server : 192.1.1.1 Prefer 123 00-00-0000 00:00:00 0 ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp# 10. hardware. enter show summary-inventory.0.1 UDP Port Tstap Date Time Strat Received -- 192. software and firmware revisions.  To display the inventory table: • In the config>chassis# prompt. The inventory table is displayed (refer to Example to see a typical inventory table output).0. ETX-5300A# configure system date-and-time sntp ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp# server 1 ETX-5300A>config>system>date-time>sntp>server(1)# address 192.1.1.0 . you can display manufacture information on items installed in specific chassis slots. 1. 10-6 Inventory ETX-5300A Ver.1 Preferred Administratively enabled. You can display an inventory table that shows all installed components.1.1.1. ETX-5300A Ver. Information for the corresponding inventory component is displayed (refer to Table 10-1 for information on the parameters). To do this. MFG Name Module Name Alias Asset ID FRU Contains the relative position of this component among other similar components Name of component Hardware revision (relevant only for chassis) Software revision (relevant only for chassis) Firmware revision (relevant only for chassis) Serial number (blank if unknown for component) Manufacturer name (blank if unknown for component) Model name (blank if unknown for component) Alias name for component Identification information for component Indicates whether this component is a field replaceable unit that can be replaced on site Physical Class Displaying Manufacture Information You can display manufacture information on items installed in specific chassis slots. The component index is determined by the position of the corresponding row in the output of show inventory-summary. Navigate to configure chassis inventory <index>.0 Inventory 10-7 . software and hardware revisions and number of defined MAC addresses. as it is not contained in any component.g. Enter show status. Class of component Possible values: Chassis. which changes according to what is installed in the unit. Container. Module.  To display the inventory component information: 1. enter the inventory level with the corresponding inventory component index. This is 0 for the chassis. 1. Backplane.PortSlot Index of the component that contains the component for which information is being displayed. e. Inventory Parameters Parameter Description Contained In Description Description of component type. Port Relative Position Name HW Rev SW Rev FW Rev Serial No. ETX-5300A.< Physical Class>. and 1 for all other components. Table 10-1. their serial numbers. in the form: Device_name. as they are all contained in the chassis. 2.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 10 Administration Displaying Inventory Component Information You can display more information for each installed inventory component. ETX-5300A# configure chassis ETX-5300A>config>chassis# show manufacture-info slot 1 Slot Main-A Type Main 10GEx4 Serial Number HW Ver 0. you need to enter the inventory level with the corresponding inventory component index as determined by the position of the corresponding row in the output of show inventory-table. or all existing items. 1. Configuring the alias is meaningful only for the chassis component.0 . Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. Task Assigning user-defined alias to component Command alias <string> Comments no alias removes the alias.0 2. It can be used by a network manager as a non-volatile identifier for the device. enter show manufacture-info slot <slot_number> or show manufacture-info all to display information on items installed in a specific slot. 2.0 0 Setting Administrative Inventory Information If necessary. Navigate to configure system inventory <index>. respectively.  To set inventory component information: 1. asset-id <id> no asset-id removes the asset ID no serial-number removes the serial number Assigning user-specific asset identifier to the component (usually for removable physical components) Assigning vendor-specific serial number to the component serial-number <string> 10-8 Inventory ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual  To display manufacture information: • At the config>chassis# prompt.0 FW Ver 2. The config>system>inventor(<index>)# prompt is displayed. and serial number for inventory components. asset ID. you can configure the alias. To configure the information.0 Shelf Type Serial Number HW Version FW Version Number of MACs : : : : : N/A 0. ETX-5300A# configure chassis ETX-5300A# config>chassis# show inventory-summary Index Physical Class Name HW Ver SW Ver FW Ver ----------------------------------------------------------------------------1001 Chassis AC-chassi N/A N/A N/A 2001 Backplane Backplane 0.0 7005 Port Etherent port main-b/1 N/A N/A N/A 7006 Port Etherent port main-b/2 N/A N/A N/A 7007 Port Etherent port main-b/3 N/A N/A N/A 7008 Port Etherent port main-b/4 N/A N/A N/A 7010 Port RS_232 Control Port N/A N/A N/A 7011 Port Clock RJ45 Port N/A N/A N/A 7012 Port Clock BNC Port N/A N/A N/A 7013 Port Time Of Day BNC Port N/A N/A N/A 7014 Port Time Of Day RS422 Port N/A N/A N/A 7015 Port MNG Port N/A N/A N/A 7016 Port RS_232 Control Port N/A N/A N/A 7017 Port Clock RJ45 Port N/A N/A N/A 7018 Port Clock BNC Port N/A N/A N/A 7019 Port Time Of Day BNC Port N/A N/A N/A 7020 Port Time Of Day RS422 Port N/A N/A N/A 7041 Port Ethernet Port 2/1 N/A N/A N/A 7042 Port Ethernet Port 2/2 N/A N/A N/A ETX-5300A Ver.0 1.0 N/A N/A 5002 Module IO Card 2 65535.00A10T1 2.0 N/A N/A 4003 Fan FAN 0.0 1.00A10T1 2.0 Inventory 10-9 . 1.0 5005 Module Main Card A 5006 Module Main Card B 0.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 10 Administration Example  To display the following inventory information: • • Inventory table Inventory information for the ETX-5300A chassis.0 N/A N/A 3001 Container 1 N/A N/A N/A 3002 Container 2 N/A N/A N/A 3003 Container 3 N/A N/A N/A 3004 Container 4 N/A N/A N/A 3005 Container main-a N/A N/A N/A 3006 Container main-b N/A N/A N/A 3007 Container Slot 5 Port 1 N/A N/A N/A 3008 Container Slot 5 Port 2 N/A N/A N/A 3009 Container Slot 5 Port 3 N/A N/A N/A 3010 Container Slot 5 Port 4 N/A N/A N/A 3011 Container Slot 6 Port 1 N/A N/A N/A 3012 Container Slot 6 Port 2 N/A N/A N/A 3013 Container Slot 6 Port 3 N/A N/A N/A 3014 Container Slot 6 Port 4 N/A N/A N/A 3035 Container Slot 2 Port 1 N/A N/A N/A 3036 Container Slot 2 Port 2 N/A N/A N/A 3095 Container AC Slot N/A N/A N/A 3096 Container AC Slot N/A N/A N/A 3097 Container FAN N/A N/A N/A 4001 Power Supply PS_AC 1 0. 1. For SFTP file transfers. The maximum allowed values for SFTP parameters are: • • • • Username – 1 – 60 characters Password –1– 60 characters File name – 1–100 characters Port – 1–65535. keeping your data secure and your session private. -2. -3. -4 mac-table (upload only) ltm_1 (upload only).Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A# configure chassis ETX-5300A# config>chassis# inventory 1001 ETX-5300A# config>chassis>inventory(1001)# show status Description Contained In Physical Class Relative Position Name HW Ver SW Ver FW Ver Serial Number MFG Name Module Name Alias Asset ID FRU : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ETX-5300A.0 .4 Downloading/Uploading Files You can download or upload files to the ETX-5300A unit via SFTP. SFTP is a version of FTP that encrypts commands and data transfers. The following types of files can be uploaded or downloaded: • • • • • • • • startup-config rollback-config user-default-config factory-default-config (upload only) log (upload only) sw-pack-1.AC-chassis 0 Chassis 0 AC-chassi N/A N/A N/A RAD ETX-5300A-AC True 10. Caution Always wait until all main cards installed in the chassis are up and running before executing any file operation commands. an SFTP server application must be installed on the local or remote 10-10 Downloading/Uploading Files ETX-5300A Ver. The SFTP protocol is used to provide secure file transfers via the device’s Ethernet interface. 20.20.cfg Note Source file name can be one of the following: startup-config.cfg ETX-5300A# file ETX-5300A>file# copy startup-config sftp://<admin>:<1234>@192.img Destination file name – sw-pack-1.20.20/ETX-5300A.20. 1.0 Copying Files within ETX-5300A 10-11 . Example – Upload via SFTP • • • • • SFTP server address – 192. user-default-config or rollback-config. Figure 10-3 shows the commands that can copy configuration files in a visual diagram.20.img swpack-1 Note Destination file name can be only sw-pack-1.20 SFTP user name – admin SFTP password – 1234 Source file name – startup-config Destination file name –db1conf. SFTP file transfers use Port 22. You must check that the firewall you are using on the server computer allows communication through this port. 10. ETX-5300A Ver. sw-pack-2. Downloading a Software Application File via SFTP Example – Download via SFTP • • • • • SFTP server address – 192. For more information.20 SFTP user name – admin SFTP password – 1234 Source file name – ETX-5300A. A variety of third-party applications offer SFTP server software. ETX-5300A# file ETX-5300A>file# copy sftp://<admin>:<1234>@192. refer to the documentation of these applications. sw-pack-3 or sw-pack-4.5 Copying Files within ETX-5300A You can copy files within the ETX-5300A unit with the copy command. Application file is transferred to ETX-5300A Ethernet PC with an Active SFTP Server and Application File ETX-5300 Figure 10-2.20.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 10 Administration computer.20.20/db1conf.20. sw-pack-2. user-default-config – Contains default user configuration. 1. 10-12 Copying Files within ETX-5300A ETX-5300A Ver. System configuration can be restored from this file. if the installation process fails. or via the commands shown in Table 10-2. sw-pack-3. Refer to Saving the Configuration for details on how to save the user configuration. sw-pack-1. restore-point-config – Contains configuration saved during software installation.Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual Figure 10-3. it is not automatically created.0 . sw-pack-4 – Contain up to four software images log –Alarm and event log mac-table – MAC address table ltm – Activity trace file for debug purpose. You must save the file startup-config. Refer to Saving the Configuration for details on how to save the default user configuration. Commands that Copy Configuration Files Caution Always wait until all main cards installed in the chassis are up and running before executing any file operation commands. • • • • • • • You can copy files via the copy command. File Names in the Unit ETX-5300A uses the following reserved file names: • • • factory-default – Contains the factory default settings running-config – Contains full configuration (default and user) startup-config – Contains saved user configuration. rollback-config –Contains configuration settings to be used if user confirmation of loading startup-config file is not received. For example: • • Source file name – running-config Destination file name – startup-config. ETX-5300A Ver.3. Commands That Copy Files Command factory-default Level admin Copies… factory-default-config to startup-config and resets device Manual Section Error! Reference source not found.2011 8:50:52 Transferred : 665600 Bytes in: 16 seconds (41600 Bytes/Second)  To view the copy command history: • At the file# prompt.17.174. enter: show copy. ETX-5300A# show file copy Network to Device. Resetting to Factory Defaults user-default save software-confirmrequired admin global admin user-default-config to startup-config and resets device running-config to startup-config running-config or any other userspecified configuration file to rollbackconfig Resetting to User Defaults Saving the Configuration Confirmation of Configuration File in Chapter 3  To copy files within the device: • At the file# prompt.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 10 Administration Table 10-2. 1. For example: ETX-5300A>file# show copy summary Direction Source Destination End Time 1 Local running-config user-default-conf 13-3-2011 14:6:51 2 Local running-config startup-config 13-3-2011 14:7:35 3 Dev to Net startup-config DB 13-3-2011 14:7:40 Status Ended OK Ended OK Ended OK Displaying Files within ETX-5300A The dir command is used to display the files within the device. enter: show copy summary.bin Dst: sw-pack-4 Started: 14.0 Copying Files within ETX-5300A 10-13 . ETX-5300A# file ETX-5300A>file# copy running-config startup-config  To display the last copy command result: • At the file# prompt. enter: copy <source-file> <dest-file>.56/etx1_03_00b06. Transferring Data Src: sftp://172. enter the show command according to the table below. enter dir.Software Name mac-table sw-pack-1 startup-config rollback-config LO .Other Type Size(Bytes) Creation Date Status O S C C -70250901 508671 509453 34 -26598 2012-01-02 09:25:01 2011-12-10 05:58:01 2012-01-01 16:08:11 2012-01-01 19:58:30 2012-01-02 09:25:01 2012-01-02 11:19:24 2011-12-27 15:48:10 Read Only valid File In Use valid valid valid valid valid Read Only valid File In Use valid Read Only valid factory-default-config C running-config log C LO Total Bytes : 817209344 Free Bytes : 672849920 Displaying the List of Configuration Files and their Contents You can display the list of existing configuration files. 1. as well as contents of any configuration and application files.Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual  To display the files: • At the file# prompt.Configuration S .0 .Log O . For example: ETX-5300A>file# dir Codes C .  To display the list of configuration and application files and their contents: • Task Displaying the list of configuration files Displaying the factory-defaultconfig file contents Displaying the rollback-config file contents Displaying the startup-config file contents Displaying the contents of all application files saved in the system At the file# prompt. Command show configuration-files show factory-default-config show rollback-config show startup-config show sw-pack Application files contain information on application software running on main and I/O cards installed in the chassis Comments 10-14 Copying Files within ETX-5300A ETX-5300A Ver. A list of the file names and types is displayed. 0 Copying Files within ETX-5300A 10-15 . 1.01.Installation and Operation Manual Task Displaying the user-defaultconfig file contents Command show user-default-config Chapter 10 Administration Comments Example – Displaying the List of Configuration Files ETX-5300A>file# show configuration-files Configuration Last Modified Valid ----------------------------------------------------------------------------startup-config 2012.02 09:25:01 Yes running-config 2012.00A9 2011-12-26 00:00:00 active sw-pack-1 Size (Bytes) Type Name : 70250901 Version H/W Ver Size (Bytes) -----------------------------------------------------ETX-5300A Ver.01.01 16:08:11 Yes rollback-config 2012.02 11:48:29 Yes Device loaded from : startup-config running-config has been modified since last time it was equal to startupconfig Example – Displaying the Contents of startup-config File ETX-5300A>file# show startup-config # configuration file exit all configure # Terminal Configuration terminal timeout forever exit # System Configuration system # Clock Configuration clock # Station Clock Configuration station main-a/1 shutdown name "Station Clk-5-1" exit station main-b/1 shutdown more.01. Example – Displaying the Contents of Application Files ETX-5300A>file# show sw-pack Name Version Creation Time Actual -----------------------------------------------------sw-pack-1 1.01..01 19:58:30 Yes factory-default-config 2012. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.1 29194087 9353713 15768873 15933988 Deleting Files You can delete files. 10-16 Copying Files within ETX-5300A ETX-5300A Ver. For example: ETX-5300A# file ETX-5300A>file# delete sw-pack-1 File will be erased. Confirm the deletion.00A9 1. Are you sure?? [yes/no] _yes 2. Saving the Configuration You must save your configuration if you wish to have it available after reboot.  To delete a file: 1.00A9 1. At the file# prompt.0 .1 1. enter: delete <file-name>.1 1. For additional information on configuration files and the consequences of deleting. make sure the file is not in use.  To save your current configuration in the startup-config file: • At any level. or • At the file# prompt.1 1. 1. You can save your configuration as outlined below.bin 1. enter copy running-config startup-config.bin stm1ch.00A9 1.bin eth1g.00A9 1.bin eth2X10g.Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual main eth1g stm1ch eth2X10g main. Before deleting the file. enter save. refer to Configuration Files and Loading Sequence in Chapter 3. as it is not saved automatically. the factory defaults are loaded.6 Resetting ETX-5300A ETX-5300A supports the following types of reset: • • • Reset to factory defaults Reset to user defaults Overall reset (restart. A confirmation message is displayed: Current configuration will be erased and device will reboot with factory default configuration. At the device prompt. Now at the device startup. Are you sure? [yes/no] _ 3. enter admin. At the device prompt. The admin> prompt appears. enter admin. the user defaults are loaded. A confirmation message is displayed: Current configuration will be erased and device will reboot with user default configuration. reboot) of the device. 2. The factory-default file is copied to the startup -config file. Enter yes to confirm resetting to user defaults. The user-default config file is copied to the startup-config file. enter the reboot command. Are you sure? [yes/no] 3. Enter yes to confirm resetting to factory defaults.0 Resetting ETX-5300A 10-17 . 1. Resetting to User Defaults  To reset ETX-5300A to user defaults: 1. At the admin# prompt. 2. Now at the device startup. The admin> prompt appears. Enter user-default. Resetting to Factory Defaults  To reset ETX-5300A to factory defaults: 1. Rebooting the ETX-5300A Chassis  To reboot the chassis: 1. Enter factory-default.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 10 Administration 10. Are you sure? [yes/no] _ ETX-5300A Ver. All configuration since last save will be discarded. Device will reboot. Enter yes to confirm the reset. 10-18 Resetting ETX-5300A ETX-5300A Ver. The config>slot<slot># prompt is displayed. Are you sure?? [yes/no] 3. Enter reset. A confirmation message is displayed: Card will reset. Navigate to configure slot <slot>.Chapter 10 Administration Installation and Operation Manual 2. 1. 2. Rebooting the Module Use the following procedure to reboot a module installed in a specified slot. Note  Resetting a module will temporarily disrupt services supported by that module. The module restarts.0 . To reboot a module: 1. Enter yes to confirm the reset. The chassis restarts. 1.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics This chapter explains fault management procedures supported by ETX-5300A. This enables the network operator to monitor the transmission performance.1 Detecting Problems To detect problems on the hardware level. It presents the following information: • • • • Monitoring and Diagnostics Handling Events Running Diagnostic Tests Technical Support. and thus the quality of service provided ETX-5300A Ver. 11. an internal system log agent can send all reported events to a centralized repository or remote server. you can. On the software level. Statistic Counters ETX-5300A collects statistics per physical and logical ports (see the list below) and per connection in 15-minute intervals. you can follow statistical counters and events and errors returned by the system. In addition. Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual for details regarding the functions and indications of each system indicator. for example. Alarms and Traps ETX-5300A generates various alarms that can be displayed at a supervision terminal. Indicators ETX-5300A cards and the ETX-5300A chassis itself have various status indicators that can be used to identify problems. ETX-5300A maintains a cyclic event log file that stores up to 5000 time-stamped events. and sends alarm traps to management stations so that operators can identify problems. run the self-test and monitor the LED behavior.0 Detecting Problems 11-1 . traps and alarms. a change in status. 11-2 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver. and reports any conflicts and errors. of up to 32 characters Description –Alphanumeric description that provides details about the alarm/event Severity (alarms only) – Critical. or apply the change to all the alarms and events of the selected source type or ID. or an external input to the system. choose a specific alarm or event. Alarm is a persistent indication of fault of an entity. When masking by source type (such as Ethernet) or source ID (such as Ethernet port 1 on card in slot 1). For further information. unless it is important to specify it. 11. The term trap refers to the SNMPv3 notification. • • • • Masking Alarms and events can be masked per source type. Alarms and events have the following properties: • Source –An entity for which alarms and events can be generated. a crossed threshold. An SNMP message issued by an agent that reports an alarm or event. A message that reports a failure. or Minor. source type (e. which may be the device itself or any of its components. Event. system. fan. The difference between them is as follows: • • • Alarm. and source name.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual to users.2 Handling Events Reported events can be events. Statistic counters provide information on possible abnormal behavior and failures.. Traps may be generated and sent as a result of event or alarm. Major. The source consists of a source ID. These error messages are referred to as “sanity errors”. An occurrence that may be of interest. because they are detected by the so-called sanity check that is automatically performed to confirm proper configuration of the equipment. Performance parameters for all the active entities are continuously collected during equipment operation. as well as identify transmission problems. Trap.g. refer to the relevant sections in the configuration chapters. 1. Configuration Error Messages ETX-5300A includes an extensive subsystem that checks the validity of the user’s configuration activities. Statistics for the last 24 hours are stored in the device and can be retrieved at the network management station. such as a fault. The SNMP version is usually omitted. Ethernet). or minimum severity. ID – Unique numeric identification of the alarm/event Name – Unique alphanumeric identification of the alarm/event.0 . source ID. When an alarm/event is not masked. Alarm Relays In addition to the alarm reporting facility. as for the brief log). connected to the ALARM connector. Alarm Buffer ETX-5300A continuously monitors critical signals and signal processing functions. you can: • • • Prevent the alarm/event from being written to the history log. after 5000 alarms have been written into the buffer. only entries entered after the last acknowledgment time are displayed (or calculated. When displaying the log. ETX-5300A Ver. it can monitor an external alarm line. In addition. Internally. a Telnet host. regardless of masking in the SNMP manager configuration Deactivate alarm reporting via LED and alarm relay. and you can also display acknowledged data by using a designated keyword. When ETX-5300A is powered down. ETX-5300A has alarm relays with floating change-over contacts for indicating the presence of critical. The alarm history buffer is organized as a FIFO queue. sent to Syslog servers. You can also acknowledge alarm logs. 1. a Web browser. ETX-5300A generates time-stamped alarm messages. The alarms can be read on-line by the network administrator using the network management station. Alarm messages can also be sent automatically as traps to the user-specified network management stations.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics When masking an alarm/event. These messages are explained below. Each relay changes state whenever the first alarm is detected. The alarm buffer can store up to 5000 alarm messages. In addition. major and minor alarms. and displayed in the default view of the active alarms table Prevent any corresponding traps from being sent to management stations. you can also clear (delete) the alarms stored in this buffer after reading them. or a supervision terminal. any corresponding traps are sent only to management station for which the traps are not masked in the SNMP manager configuration. a Web browser or a Telnet host. When using the terminal. and returns to its normal state when all the alarms of the corresponding severity disappear. the ETX-5300A stores alarms in an alarm buffer. you can: • • • Change alarm severity Mask a specific reporting method Mask alarms per their severity. the alarm messages are not erased. This action does not delete any data from the log. The network administrator can then use the various diagnostic tests to determine the causes of the alarm messages and to restore the system to normal operation. new alarms overwrite the oldest alarms.0 Handling Events 11-3 . together with their time-stamps. If a problem is detected. The last acknowledgement time is recorded by ETX-5300A. The config>reporting# prompt is displayed. defining alarm severity and masking reporting methods Note: Severity and LEDRelay apply only to alarms. 2.apply: relay] • If a trap is masked according to alarm/event attribute. alarm-source-attribute <source-type> Use the no form to mask [<source-id>] alarm <alarm-list> [severity alarms/events. lights. regardless of whether it is masked in the SNMP manager configuration • If a trap is unmasked according to alarm/event attribute. bells. 1. The following {critical | major | minor}] [log] [snmp-trap] [led. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below. buzzers.0 .Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual The relay contacts can be used to report internal system alarms to outside indicators. e. located on an alarm bay or remote monitoring panel.. 11-4 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver. Navigate to configure reporting.  To configure alarm/event properties: 1. Task Configuring alarm input Command Comments alarm-input <port-number> [active {high | low | high – Active alarm input is off}] [description <description>] indicated by high voltage low – Active alarm input is indicated by low voltage off – Alarm input is disabled Masking alarm/event from a specific source. it is sent only to management station for which it is not masked in the SNMP manager configuration.g. it is alarm-source-attribute<source-type> not sent to any management [<source-id>] event <alarm-list> [log] [snmp-trap] station. Configuring Alarm Reporting This section describes how to configure alarm/event properties and mask them and rebuild active alarms. Acknowledging the logs Displaying alarms acknowledge {log | brief-log | all-logs} show See Working with the Alarm and Event Logs Note If alarm/event is masked using one of the masking commands (alarm-source-attribute.event <alarm-list> [log] [snmp-trap] Relay apply only to alarms.Installation and Operation Manual Task Masking alarm/event from a specific source type. and. it is sent only to management station for which it is not masked in the SNMP manager configuration. 1. LED and LED.0 Handling Events 11-5 . alarm-source-type-attribute <source-type> alarm <alarm-list> [severity {critical | major | minor}] [log] [snmp-trap] [led-relay] alarm-source-type-attribute <source-type> Note: Severity. optionally resending traps for all open alarms To ensure that no active alarms are lost due to a system failure. it is not sent to any management station. The following apply: • If a trap is masked according to alarm/event attribute. Examples  To mask alarm for a specific source type: • • • Source type – All E1s Alarm – excessive-bpv Reporting methods – log ETX-5300A Ver. regardless of whether it is masked in the SNMP manager configuration If a trap is unmasked according to alarm/event attribute. mask-minimum-severity). there is no need to repeat the procedure using the other commands. alarm-source-type-attribute. defining alarm severity and masking reporting methods Command Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Comments Use the no form to mask alarms/events. the user can rebuild the active alarm table. The optional traps sent by the system have an indication that are sent because of the configuration change. • Masking alarm per severity mask-minimum-severity [log {critical | major | minor}] [snmp-trap {critical | major | minor}] [led-relay {critical | major | minor}] no mask-minimum-severity [log] [snmp-trap [led-relay] Masking a minimum severity means that lower severities are also masked Rebuilding active alarm table active-alarm-rebuild [send-traps] from scratch. see Example 3. listed in order of severity Same as above but with time-stamp and alarm description added to active alarms. if you need to know what the LOF alarm is on SDH/SONET in Examples 1 or 2. Information includes alarm status. display and clear the alarm and event logs.  To display the alarm/event log: 1.0 . Type show followed by the display option parameter listed in the following table. voltage assigned to it (high or low). 1. alarm history) shows one line per raised alarm and one for cleared alarm..e. The default view of the alarm log (i. and alarm description. Navigate to configure>reporting# context. Log of active and cleared alarms (without events). 2. For example. Display Option active-alarms Meaning Shows the active alarms table.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A>config# reporting ETX-5300A>config>reporting# alarm-source-type-attribute e1 excessive-bpv log  To mask event for a specific source: • • • Source type –E1 1 in port 1 on card in slot 1 Event – css-path-tca Reporting methods – SNMP trap ETX-5300A>config# reporting ETX-5300A>config>reporting# alarm-source-attribute e1 1/1/1 event css-path-tca snmp-trap  To mask alarms per severity: • • Severity –major and lower Reporting method – LED and alarm relay ETX-5300A>config# reporting ETX-5300A>config>reporting# mask-minimum-severity led-relay major Working with the Alarm and Event Logs This section explains how to acknowledge. Example Number 1 active-alarms-details alarm-information 2 3 alarm-input 4 alarm-log 5 11-6 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver. Displays information about alarm inputs (also known as alarm relays) connected to external sources. Counters of active alarms in the output appear at the top of the screen. Detailed information about the alarm type. Counters of active alarms in the output appear at the top of the screen in order of severity: critical. The brief log is cleared at reboot. Displaying Active Alarms Details This command shows the table of active alarms with their time-stamp. major and minor. the brief log provides only one alarm entry with the number of times it was recorded since last acknowledged. ETX-5300A>config>reporting# show active-alarms Total : Critical : 2 Major : 1 1 2 3 Domain Clock Card FAN 1 1 1 Minor : 0 Maj Crt Crt Unmasked Unmasked Unmasked station_clock_unlock card_provision_failure fan_failure Example 2. major and minor. ETX-5300A>config>reporting# show active-alarms-details Total : Critical : 0 Major : 3 Minor : 0 ETX-5300A Ver. cleared alarms and events Example Number 6 brief-log event-information event-list log 7 Example 1: Displaying Active Alarms This command shows the table of active alarms. The brief log is cleared at reboot. Unlike the full alarm log (show log). Brief log of active alarms. Detailed information about event type (similar to alarminformation). 1. cleared alarms and events.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Display Option alarm-list [<source ID> [severity {critical|major|minor}]] brief-alarm-log Meaning List of all ETX-5300A alarms for a specific source ID and severity value. or for all the alarms in the system Brief log of active and cleared alarms (without events). which displays all alarm instances. Counters of active alarms in the output appear at the top of the screen in order of severity: critical.0 Handling Events 11-7 . List of all ETX-5300A events for a specific source IDs or of all the events available in the system Log of active alarms. 4. ETX-5300A>config>reporting# show alarm-information sdh-sonet lof Source : SDH-SONET Name : LOF Description : Loss of frame (LOF) Alarm ID : 100003 Severity : Major LED Relay : No Logged : No SNMP Trap : No SNMP trap OID : 1.00 2 Provisioning failure Card 1 failure FAN 1 fan_failure Critical Unmasked card_provision_failure Critical Unmasked 2011-12-22 01:52:05. followed by a table of sources whose configurations differ from the source type’s configuration.00 3 Fan 2011-12-20 20:56:11.00 Example 3: Displaying Information of LOF alarm on SDH/SONET port This command displays detailed information about a specific alarm. The output shows the configuration of the source type.. The default view of the alarm log (i. In this example the table of sources is empty because all the sources are configured the same as their type. user-initiated. ETX-5300A>config>reporting# show alarm-log Last Acknowledge On : 64-149-1203 00:206:27.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual 1 Domain station clock state changed to unlocked Domain Clock 1 station_clock_unlock Major Unmasked 2011-12-20 20:55:23. 1.3.0.1.6. or cleared. The field on the left shows the reason for alarm removal: resolved. use this command if you need to know what the LOF alarm is on SDH/SONET in Examples 1 or 2.164. major. minor.1.1.6.3. 11-8 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver. Alarm Log This command displays the log of active and cleared alarms (without events).e. alarm suppression.2. The alarm severity is shown on the left. not applicable.0 . alarm history) shows one line per raised alarm and one per cleared alarm.22 Source Source ID Severity LED Logged SNMP Trap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Example 4. For example. Its possible values are critical. Alarm List This command displays the list of all ETX-5300A alarms for source IDs and severity value.0 Handling Events 11-9 . The table also shows whether the alarm is masked or unmasked for the log and whether these parameters are set to default or have been modified by the user. ETX-5300A Ver. This specific example displays the beginning of the list of all the alarms available in the system.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics 1 Loss of signal (LOS) Ethernet main-a/0 los Cleared Suppression 2011-12-18 02:17:00. 1.00 Example 5. use the arrow keys. ETX-5300A>config>reporting# show alarm-list Source Name ID Severity Logged System SYSTEM_TEMPERATURE_ORA 20002 Major Yes (Default) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------System hardware_failure_fe 20012 Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------System configuration_mismatch_fe 20013 Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------System INTERFACE_MISMATCH_FE 20014 Major Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------System NO_INTERFACE_FE 20015 Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Power Supply POWER_DELIVERY_FAILURE 20201 Major Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Alarm Input Alarm_Relay_Input 20401 Major Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Card HARDWARE_FAILURE 40001 Major Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Card CARD_MISMATCH 40002 Major Yes (Default) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------To scroll up and down in the list.00 2 Loss of signal (LOS) Ethernet main-a/0 los Major 2011-12-18 02:16:58. port/entity Alarm name (inside each source) For each alarm. enter clear followed by log. 1. Table 11-1. Alarm List Table 11-1 lists and explains the alarm messages generated by the ETX-5300A. the corresponding trap. brief-log or alllogs to clear the full log. For an alphabetical list of traps. ETX-5300A>config>reporting# show brief-log Last Acknowledge On : 64-149-1203 00:206:27. and the alarm ID (unique number that identifies the alarm). brief log or all alarm/event logs in ETX-5300A. see Table 11-3. Alarms List Source Type alarm-input card card card card Alarm Name alarm_relay_input hardware_failure card_mismatch card_provision failure card_improper removal Alarm Description Alarm input Card hardware failure Card is not supported or misconfigured Provisioning failure Improper card removal Trap Name alarmInput cardHwFailure cardMismatch cardProvisionFailure cardImproperRemoval Alarm ID 20401 40001 40002 40003 40006 11-10 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver.0 . Critical Major Minor Events Total : 9 1 0 7 Since Ack : 9 1 0 7 Source Name Severity sw_install_end Event alternate_configuration_loaded Event Last Raised Last Cleared Total Times Since Ack 1 1 1 1 System System 2011-12-22 02:50:14. Table 11-1 also specifies the alarm description.00 2011-12-22 02:51:05.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual Example 7. Displaying Brief Log This command displays a brief log of active and cleared alarms and events.00 ----- Clearing Alarms  To clear a log: • At the config>reporting# prompt. The log is cleared. The alarm messages are listed alphabetically in order of the following: • • Source type: system. • Alarm names are not case-sensitive. card. 0 Handling Events 11-11 . 1. holdover or locked Domain clock quality level is below minimum Domain station clock state has changed to unlocked Alarm indication signal (AIS) Loss of frame (LOF) Remote alarm indication (RAI) ERP ring state changed to protected Loss of communication with SFP SFP mismatch Loss of signal (LOS) SFP not installed Laser temperature is out of range Optical power received (OPR) is out of range Autonegotiation with remote device failed Fan failure Ethernet port active but LACP out-of-sync LACP detected loop between LAG ports LACP is unable to synchronize with partner Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Lock Signal (LCK) 30301 clock-domain clock-domain e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 erp eth eth eth eth eth eth eth fan lag lag lag oam-cfmmep oam-cfmmep 30302 30303 110105 110106 110107 290301 50001 50002 50003 50004 50005 50006 50008 20101 250001 250002 250003 270201 270202 ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Source Type card card card Alarm Name card_temperature ora card_no_response card_initialization_ failure system_clock_ unlock domain_clock_ql_ low station_clock_ unlock ais lof rai erp_state_protected sfp_no_response sfp_mismatch los sfp_removed sfp_temperature_ ora sfp_opr_ora auto_negotiation_ failure fan_failure lacp_down lacp_loop_detection lacp_churn ais lck Alarm Description Card temperature is out of range Loss of communication with card Card software download has failed Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Trap Name cardTemperatureOra cardNoResponse cardInitFailure clockDomainStation ClockUnlock clockDomainQlLow clockDomainStation ClockUnlock e1t1Ais e1t1Lof e1t1Rai erpStateProtected sfpNoResponse sfpMismatch ethLos sfpRemoved sfpTemperatureOra sfpOprOra ethAutoNegotiation Failure fanFailure lagLacpDown lagLacpLoopDetection lagLacpChurn oamCfmMepAis oamCfmMepLck Alarm ID 40007 40008 40009 clock-domain Domain system clock state changed to freerun. unexpected period Loss of Continuity (LOC) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Loss of Multiframe (LOMF) Unequipped payload Path Trace ID mismatch (TIM) Payload Label Mismatch (PLM) Loss of Pointer (LOP) BER above signal degradation threshold BER above excessive error threshold Remote Failure Indication (RFI) Power supply failure Input power out-of-range Input power near minimum Unavailable Time of Day (ToD) Unavailable 1PPS Slaves limit reached No PTP master can be reached Unacceptable frequency accuracy Unacceptable time accuracy Master disqualification Rx sync messages timeout expiration Installation and Operation Manual Trap Name Alarm ID mismatch oamCfmMepMismatch 270203 loc rdi ais-path lomf-path uneq-path tim-path plm-path lop-path sd-path eed-path rfi-path power_delivery_ failure power_in_ora power_in_low unavailable_tod unavailable_1pps slaves_limit_reached no_ptp_master invalid_frequency_ accuracy invalid_time_ accuracy disqualified_master oamCfmRmepLoc oamCfmRmepRdi pathAis pathLomf pathUneq pathTim pathPlm pathLop pathSd pathEed pathRfi powerDeliveryFailure powerInOra powerInLow ptpMasterUnavailable Tod ptpMasterUnavailable 1pps ptpMasterSlavesLimit Reached ptpRecoveredNoPtpM aster ptpRecoveredInvalid FreqAccuracy ptpRecoveredInvalid TimeAccuracy ptpRecoveredDisquali fiedMaster ptpRecoveredMaster SyncFail 270601 270602 100201 100202 100203 100204 100205 100206 100207 100208 100209 20201 20202 20203 30601 30602 30603 30201 30202 30203 30204 sync_failure 30401 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. unexpected MEG level.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Source Type oam-cfmmep oam-cfmmep oam-cfmmep path path path path path path path path path power-supply power-supply power-supply ptp-master ptp-master ptp-master ptprecovered ptprecovered ptprecovered ptprecovered ptprecoveredmaster 11-12 Alarm Name Alarm Description Mismatch due to mismerge. unexpected MEP. 0 Handling Events 11-13 .Installation and Operation Manual Source Type ptprecoveredmaster ptprecoveredmaster pw pw pw pw pw pw routerinterface sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet station-clock station-clock station-clock Alarm Name Alarm Description Rx announce messages timeout expiration Rx delay response messages timeout expiration Configuration mismatch PW OAM disconnected Remote defect indication (RDI) Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Trap Name ptpRecoveredMaster AnnounceFail ptpRecoveredMaster DelayRespFail pwConfigMismatch pwOamFailure pwRdi pwRxFailure pwFeRxFailure pwFeRdi routerIfDhcpClientNo Lease sfpNoResponse sfpMismatch sdhSonetLof sdhSonetRfi sdhSonetLos sfpRemoved sfpTemperatureOra sfpOprOra sdhSonetAis sdhSonetTim sdhSonetSd sdhSonetEed stationClockAis stationClockLof stationClockLos Alarm ID announce_failure 30402 delay_response_ failure configuration mismatch pw_oam_failure rdi rx_failure rx_failure_fe rdi_fe dhcp_client_no_ lease sfp_no_response sfp_mismatch lof rfi-line los sfp_removed sfp_temperature_ ora sfp_opr_ora ais-line tim sd-line eed-line ais lof los 30403 310001 310002 310003 310004 310008 310009 300101 100001 100002 100003 100004 100005 100006 100007 100008 100009 100010 100011 100012 30102 30103 30104 Ethernet frames not received by PW Ethernet frames not received by PW at far end Remote defect indication (RDI) at the far end DHCP lease not obtained Loss of communication with SFP SFP mismatch Loss of frame (LOF) Remote failure indication (RFI) Loss of signal (LOS) SFP is not installed Laser temperature is out of range Optical power received (OPR) is out of range Alarm indication signal (AIS) Section trace ID mismatch (TIM) BER above signal degradation threshold BER above excessive error threshold Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Loss of Frame (LOF) Loss of Signal (LOS) ETX-5300A Ver. 1. card. 1. port/entity Alarm name (inside each source) For each alarm.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Source Type system system system vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt Alarm Name device_temperature _ora hardware_failure sw_pack_corrupted ais-vcvt uneq-vcvt tim-vcvt plm-vcvt lop-vcvt sd-vcvt eed-vcvt rfi-vcvt Alarm Description Device temperature is out of range Hardware failure Application software file is corrupted Alarm indication signal (AIS) Unequipped payload Path trace ID mismatch (TIM) Payload label mismatch (PLM) Loss of pointer (LOP) BER above signal degradation threshold BER above excessive error threshold Remote failure indication (RFI) Installation and Operation Manual Trap Name systemDevice TemperatureOra systemHardware Failure systemSwPack Corrupted vcVtAis vcVtUneq vcVtTim vcVtPlm vcVtLop vcVtSd vcVtEed vcVtRfi Alarm ID 20002 20005 20008 100101 100103 100104 100105 100106 100107 100108 100109 Event List Table 11-2 lists the event messages generated by the ETX-5300A and explains their interpretation. Event names are not case-sensitive. Table 11-2. The event messages are listed alphabetically in order of the following: • • Source type: system. the corresponding trap and the event ID (unique number that identifies the event type).0 . For an alphabetical list of traps. Table 11-2 also specifies the alarm description. see Table 11-3. Event List Source Type card card card card clockdomain Event Name card_reset card_switchover card_plugged_in card_plugged_out system_source_ clock_change Event Description Card reset Card switchover Card plugged in Card removed from slot Domain system source clock changed Trap Name cardReset cardSwitchover cardPluggedIn cardPluggedOut clockDomainSystem SrcClockChange Event ID 1040001 1040002 1040004 1040005 1030301 11-14 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver. 0 Handling Events 11-15 . 1.Installation and Operation Manual Source Type clockdomain e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 erp-port eth eth eth eth lag lag oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Event Name station_source_ clock_change loopback loopback_off es_line_tca cv_path_tca es_path_tca ses_path_tca sefs_path_tca css_path_tca uas_path_tca erp_port_state_ change sfp_opt_ora sfp_opt_ora_off sfp_lbc_ora sfp_lbc_ora_off sub_group_ switchover lag_failure delay_tca delay_tca_off delay_var_tca delay_var_tca_off Event Description Trap Name clockDomainStation SrcClockChange e1t1Loopback e1t1LoopbackOff e1t1EsLineTca e1t1CvPathTca e1t1EsPathTca e1t1SesPathTca e1t1SefsPathTca e1t1CssPathTca e1t1UasPathTca erpPortState Change sfpOptOra sfpOptOraOff sfpLbcOra sfpLbcOraOff lagSubGroup Switchover lagFailure oamCfmDestNe DelayTca oamCfmDestNe DelayTcaOff oamCfmDestNe DelayVarTca oamCfmDestNe DelayVarTcaOff Event ID Domain station source clock changed Loopback started Loopback ended Errored Seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert Coding Violation (CV) threshold crossing alert Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert Severely Errored Seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) threshold crossing alert Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) threshold crossing alert Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold crossing alert ERP port state changed Optical power transmitted (OPT) out of range Optical power transmitted (OPT) in permitted range Laser bias current (LBC) out of range Laser bias current (LBC) in permitted range Switchover between sub-groups of inter-card LAG All LAG member ports are down Delay threshold crossing alert Delay in permitted range Delay variance threshold crossing alert Delay variance in permitted range 1030302 1110104 1110105 1110106 1110107 1110108 1110109 1110110 1110111 1110112 1291101 1050001 1050002 1050003 1050004 1250001 1250002 1270401 1270402 1270403 1270404 ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Source Type oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne path path path path path path path path ptpmaster ptpmaster ptprecovered Installation and Operation Manual Event Name Event Description Trap Name oamCfmDestNe LossRatioTca oamCfmDestNe LossRatioTcaOff oamCfmDestNe LossRatioTcaFe oamCfmDestNe LossRatioTcaFeOff oamCfmDestNe UnavailRatioTca oamCfmDestNe UnavailRatioTcaOff oamCfmDestNeUna vailRatioTcaFe oamCfmDestNeUna vailRatioTcaFeOff pathEsTca pathSesTca pathCvTca pathUasTca pathFeEsTca pathFeSesTca pathFeCvTca pathFeUasTca ptpMasterGranted ServiceAborted ptpMasterSlave RequestDenied ptpRecoveredPtp StateChange Event ID loss_ratio_tca loss_ratio_tca_off loss_ratio_tca_fe loss_ratio_tca_fe_ off unavailable_ratio_ tca unavailable_ratio_ tca_off unavailable_ratio_ tca_fe unavailable_ratio_ tca_fe_off es_path_tca ses_path_tca cv_path_tca uas_path_tca es_path_tca_fe ses_path_tca_fe cv_path_tca_fe uas_path_tca_fe granted_service_ aborted slave_request_ denied ptp_state_change Loss ratio threshold crossing alert Loss ratio in permitted range Loss ratio threshold crossing alert at far-end Loss ratio in permitted range at far-end Unavailable ratio threshold crossing alert Unavailable ratio in permitted range Unavailable ratio threshold crossing alert at far-end Unavailable ratio in permitted range at far-end Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert Severely errored seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert Coding violation (CV) threshold crossing alert Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold crossing alert Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert at far end Severely errored seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert at far end Coding violation (CV) threshold crossing alert at far end Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold crossing alert at far end Granted service aborted Slave request denied PTP state changed to freerun/ holdover/acquiring/locked 1270405 1270406 1270407 1270408 1270409 1270410 1270411 1270412 1100201 1100202 1100203 1100204 1100205 1100206 1100207 1100208 1030601 1030602 1030201 11-16 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 . 1.0 Handling Events 11-17 .Installation and Operation Manual Source Type ptprecovered ptprecovered ptprecovered ptprecovered -master pw pw pw sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Event Name Event Description Trap Name ptpRecovered SevereFreq Condition ptpRecovered SevereTime Condition ptpRecovered MasterSwitchover ptpRecovered MasterUnicastNeg Fail pwSwitchover pwJitterBuffer Overflow pwJitterBuffer Underflow sfpOptOra sfpOptOraOff sfpLbcOra sfpLbcOraOff sdhSonetEsSecTca sdhSonetSesSecTca sdhSonetSefsSecTc a sdhSonetCvSecTca sdhSonetEsLineTca sdhSonetSesLineTc a sdhSonetCvLineTca sdhSonetUasLineTc a Event ID severe_frequency_ condition severe_time_ condition master_switchover unicast_ negotiation_failure pw_switchover jitter_buffer_ overflow jitter_buffer_ underflow sfp_opt_ora sfp_opt_ora_off sfp_lbc_ora sfp_lbc_ora_off es_section_tca ses_section_tca sefs_section_tca cv_section_tca es_line_tca ses_line_tca cv_line_tca uas_line_tca Network conditions might cause frequency recovery degradation Network conditions might cause time recovery degradation Switchover to master (ID) 1030202 1030203 1030204 Unicast negotiation failure PW switchover Jitter buffer overflow Jitter buffer underflow Optical power transmitted (OPT) out of range Optical power transmitted (OPT) in permitted range Laser bias current (LBC) out of range Laser bias current (LBC) in permitted range Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert Severely errored seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) threshold crossing alert Coding violation (CV) threshold crossing alert Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert Severely errored seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert Coding violation (CV) threshold crossing alert Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold crossing alert 1030401 1310001 1310002 1310003 1100001 1100017 1100002 1100018 1100003 1100004 1100005 1100006 1100007 1100008 1100009 1100010 ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Source Type sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet system system system system system Installation and Operation Manual Event Name Event Description Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert at far end Severely errored seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert at far end Coding violation (CV) threshold crossing alert at far end Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold crossing alert at far end Port switchover Loopback started Loopback ended Software file_name installation started Software file_name installation ended file_name download Device reset by user file_name loaded as running-config Trap Name sdhSonetFeEsLineT ca sdhSonetFeSesLine Tca sdhSonetFeCvLine Tca sdhSonetFeUasLine Tca sdhSonetPort Switchover sdhSonetLoopback sdhSonetLoopback Off systemSoftware InstallStart systemSoftware InstallEnd systemDownload End systemUserReset systemAlternate ConfigLoaded System Configuration Migration System ConfigurationSanity systemTrapHard SyncStart systemTrapHard SyncEnd System Configuration ChangeMask System Configuration ChangeUnmask Event ID es_line_tca_fe ses_line_tca_fe cv_line_tca_fe uas_line_tca_fe port_switchover loopback loopback_off sw_install_start sw_install_end download_end user_reset alternate_ configuration_ loaded configuration_ migration configuration_ sanity trap_hard_sync_ start trap_hard_sync_ end configuration_ change_mask configuration_ change_unmask 1100011 1100012 1100013 1100014 1100015 1100019 1100020 1020001 1020002 1020003 1020004 1020005 system file_name conversion file_name after software upgrade Configuration sanity in file_name: configuration file_name Trap synchronization hard sync process started Trap synchronization hard sync process ended Configuration change traps masked 1020006 system system system 1020007 1020008 1020009 system system Configuration change traps unmasked 11-18 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. 1.0 Handling Events 11-19 . ETX-5300A Ver.Installation and Operation Manual Source Type Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Event Name backup_ configuration_ loaded device_startup active_software_ changed running_config_ saved successful_login failed_login logout sw_unconfirmed startup_config_ unconfirmed es_vcvt_tca ses_vcvt_tca cv_vcvt_tca uas_vcvt_tca es_vcvt_tca_fe ses_vcvt_tca_fe cv_vcvt_tca_fe uas_vcvt_tca_fe Event Description Trap Name systemBackup Configuration Loaded systemDevice Startup systemActive SoftwareChanged systemRunning ConfigSaved systemSuccessful Login systemFailedLogin systemLogout systemSw Unconfirmed systemStartup ConfigUnconfirmed vcVtEsTca vcVtSesTca vcVtCvTca vcVtUasTca vcVtFeEsTca vcVtFeSesTca vcVtFeCvTca vcVtFeUasTca Event ID system Device configuration loaded from backup database Device startup Active software changed from last reboot Running configuration saved to startup configuration user_name login from user_name failed to logon from … due to … user_name logout from … Installed software not confirmed New startup-config not confirmed Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert Severely errored seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert Coding violation (CV) threshold crossing alert Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold crossing alert Errored seconds (ES) threshold crossing alert at far end Severely errored seconds (SES) threshold crossing alert at far end Coding violation (CV) threshold crossing alert at far end Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold crossing alert at far end 1020017 system system system system system system system system vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt 1020018 1020029 1020030 1020022 1020023 1020024 1020028 1100101 1100102 1100103 1100104 1100105 1100106 1100107 1100108 Trap List The traps are listed in the table below. 164.3.0.3.1.3.1.6.164.3.3.1.6.6.1.6.2 1.1.0.164.1.4.4.1.3.1.3.1.164.4.8 1.4.1.4.6.4.3.3.3.3.3.1.52.0.1.3.164.1 1.3.6.3.2.4.0.2.6.6.164.3.3.1.6.6. Trap List Associated to Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Source Type Trap Description Notification OID alarm-input card card card card card card card clock-domain clock-domain clock-domain clock-domain e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 erp eth sdh-sonet eth sdh-sonet eth eth sdh-sonet eth sdh-sonet eth sdh-sonet eth fan lag lag alarmInput cardHwFailure cardMismatch cardProvisionFailure cardImproperRemoval cardTemperatureOra cardNoResponse cardInitFailure clockDomainStationClock Unlock clockDomainSystemClock Unlock clockDomainStationClock Unlock clockDomainQlLow e1t1Ais e1t1Lof e1t1Rai erpStateProtected sfpNoResponse sfpMismatch ethLos sfpRemoved sfpTemperatureOra sfpOprOra ethAutoNegotiationFailure fanFailure lagLacpDown lagLacpLoopDetection alarm_input card_hardware_failure card_mismatch card_provision_failure card_improper_removal card_temperature_ora card_no_response card_initialization_failure station_clock_unlock system_clock_unlock station_clock_unlock domain_clock_ql_low ais lof rai erp_state_protected sfp_no_response sfp_mismatch los sfp_removed sfp_temperature_ora sfp_opr_ora auto_negotiation_failure fan_failure lacp_down lacp_loop_detection 1.3 1.3.6.8 1.0.4.1.1.4.3.0.6.3.6.0.1.1.3 1.4.6.1 1.27 1.6.3.1.6.6.1.6.4.2.1.2 1.2.6.1.9 1.4.164.3.1 1.0.0 .1.1.2.0.4.6 1.5.6.164.1.4.3.0.6.0.3.4.6.4.164.4.6.0.54. 1.6.164.3.164.2 1.164.3.6.52.3.164.1.1.164.1.0.1.3.1.4.164.1.64 1.1.2.1 1.4.6.164.1.164.52.6.1.1.1.4.4.6.1.4 1.1 1.4.164.3.0.164.164.164.1.3.6.0.3.3.1.1.3.0.40.4.6.1.1.6.6.3.1.1.52.1.3.6.3.1.40.1.40.2.26 1.6.164.1.4.164.3.54.3.1.6.1.164.0.1.1.0.4 1.40.4.3.6.5 1.1.3.4.1.3.1.0.164.1.3.0.0.1.4.40.6.1.2.6 1.3.3.4.3.1.1.1.3.2.4.1.25 1.4.0.6.6.3.8 1.0.2.1.1.1.3.1.1 1.1.1.3.4.1.2.3.7 1.4.2 11-20 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual Table 11-3.4.2.0.0.2.6.164.3.1.4.0. 3.6.164.1.1.6.3.3.164.2.4.0.2.4.4.2.52.0.3.1.52.6.3.164.0.3.6.0.6.164.2.0.6.1.3.1.1.1.2.7 1.1.6.1.6.4.6.6.1.4.3.2.0.3.2.3.6.1.164.3.3 1.0.4.4.1.3.14 Alarm ptpRecoveredMasterAnnounce Fail announce_failure 1.1.1.2.3.1.4.4.1.6.0.24 1.6.6.4.1.26 1.164.3.6.1.1.0.6.1.52.1.6.11 1.164.0.6.1.0.3.3.6.6.6.4.1.6.4.3.6.6.6.0.0.2.8 1.6.1.1.3.1.164.4.1.1.1.0.1.15 ETX-5300A Ver.3.2.4.52.2.164.Installation and Operation Manual Associated to Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Source Type Trap Description Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Notification OID lag oam-cfm-mep oam-cfm-mep oam-cfm-mep oam-cfm-mep oam-cfm-mep path path path path path path path path path power-supply power-supply power-supply ptp-master ptp-master ptp-master ptp-recovered ptp-recovered ptp-recovered ptp-recovered ptprecoveredmaster ptprecoveredmaster lagLacpChurn oamCfmMepAis oamCfmMepLck oamCfmMepMismatch oamCfmRmepLoc oamCfmRmepRdi pathAis pathLomf pathUneq pathTim pathPlm pathLop pathSd pathEed pathRfi powerDeliveryFailure powerInOra powerInLow ptpMasterUnavailableTod ptpMasterUnavailable1pps ptpMasterSlavesLimitReached ptpRecoveredNoPtpMaster ptpRecoveredInvalidFreq Accuracy ptpRecoveredInvalidTime Accuracy ptpRecoveredDisqualified Master ptpRecoveredMasterSyncFail lacp_churn ais lck mismatch loc rdi ais-path lomf-path uneq-path tim-path plm-path lop-path sd-path eed-path rfi-path power_delivery_failure power_in_ora power_in_low unavailable_tod unavailable_1pps slaves_limit_reached no_ptp_master invalid_frequency_accuracy invalid_time_accuracy disqualified_master sync_failure 1.3.1.0.1.52.6.58 1.6.55 1.74 1.1.6 1.6.0.164.1.0.2.4.1.4.0.3.1.3.3.1.1.1.2.164.54.164.6.52.57 1.1.3.54 1.4 1.164.164.6.1.1.3.3.52.0.3.2.6.6.164.0 Handling Events 11-21 .3.164.3.1.6.164.3.1.6.6.6.52.4.6.1.3.3.1.1.6.6.3.1.1.1.164.1.0.2.1.164.1.6.6.75 1.2.2.51 1.5 1.1.6.3.6.6.1.164.3.3.164.6.3.1.3.3.6.4.6.73 1.25 1.6.0.1.3.3.1.2.1.1.56 1.1.4.1.52.1.1.13 1.53 1.1.4.4.4.1.12 1.3.4.1.3.4.1.0.164.1.52 1.164.4.1.3.6.0.164.1.3.6.0.164.164.10 1.6.0.0.1.50 1.6.1.164.2.3.1.4.1.0.6. 1.1.4. 1.66 1.1.3.164.0.2.3.6.164.27 1.2.164.1.0.4.1.3.4.1.1.69 1.0.6.1.3.4.6.0.3.3.3.1.3.2.1.1.26 1.6.3.1.0.74 1.4.14.1.4.4.4.164.164.6.1.3.52.6.2.2.1.1.164.6.6.3.4.14.3.0.164.7 1.3.11.6.3.24 1.14.3 1.6.3.2.3.1.6.1.14.1.1.4.2.52.6.4.4.2.7.4.164.1.3.164.6.3.0.3.6.0.6.3.6.3.6.164.6.1.3.1.0.3.1.1.6.164.0.1.6.164.14.0.2.3.1 1.1.2.3.6.1.3.1.28 1.3.1.41 1.1.3.3.1.6.1.4.164.6.67 1.1.0.6.1 1.3.164.3.0.6.1.164.1.1.0.0.10 1.1.4.6.25 1.1.1.164.1.3.1.1.6.1.164.2.16 Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Event Event configuration_mismatch pw_oam_failure rdi rx_failure rx_failure_fe rdi_fe dhcp_client_no_lease lof rfi-line los ais-line tim sd-line eed-line ais lof los device_temperature_ora sw_pack_corrupted hardware_failure_fe ais-vcvt uneq-vcvt tim-vcvt plm-vcvt lop-vcvt sd-vcvt eed-vcvt rfi-vcvt card_reset card_switchover 1.6.164.0.6.0.75 1.0.3.4.1.5 1.6.1.0.2.6.4.1.6.1.164.3.6.1.1.4.1.6.4.164.1.3.164.1.3.164.1.1.2.3.4 1.3.2.1.3.2.6 1.52.0.1.1.6.0 .4.164.1.4.4.1.0.4.6 1.71 1.0.0.4.1.1.1.1.0.0.14.6.1.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Associated to Alarm Source Type Trap Description Installation and Operation Manual Notification OID ptprecoveredmaster pw pw pw pw pw pw routerinterface sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet station-clock station-clock station-clock system system system vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt card card ptpRecoveredMasterDelay RespFail pwConfigMismatch pwOamFailure pwRdi pwRxFailure pwFeRxFailure pwFeRdi routerIfDhcpClientNoLease sdhSonetLof sdhSonetRfi sdhSonetLos sdhSonetAis sdhSonetTim sdhSonetSd sdhSonetEed stationClockAis stationClockLof stationClockLos systemDeviceTemperatureOra systemSwPackCorrupted systemFeHardwareFailure vcVtAis vcVtUneq vcVtTim vcVtPlm vcVtLop vcVtSd vcVtEed vcVtRfi cardReset cardSwitchover delay_response_failure 1.2.164.6.2.3.1.0.6.72 1.13 11-22 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver.3.6.3.0.61 1.0.1.164.3.6.1.2.164.3.6.1.6.52.0.3.164.3.4.22 1.1.0.6.3.6.1.2.6.23 1.6.3.2.0.6.4.2 1.2.1.6.164.3.6.1.73 1.1.1.4.4.6.70 1.164. 1.4.1.7 1.2.164.4.1.6.1.2.6.1.1.1.164.6.1.4.4.1.1.3. 4.1.1.2.1.1.6.3.4.44 1.4.164.3.9 1.1.2.1.1.3.1.6.12 1.6.1.0.6.0.1.41 1.0.11 1.1.164.4.0 Handling Events 11-23 .6.4.1.11 1.1.1.1.1.3.4.4.2.6.6.164.54.0.4.1.6.1.164.1.6.4 1.6.164.164.4.4.6.6.4.4.1.3.1.54.6.6.3.164.3.3.4.3 1.164.4.1.164.1.0.42 1.0.4.6 1.13 ETX-5300A Ver.1.3.0.5 1.3.164.1.3.6.3.Installation and Operation Manual Associated to Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Source Type Trap Description Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Notification OID card card clock-domain clock-domain e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 e1t1 erp-port eth sdh-sonet eth sdh-sonet eth sdh-sonet eth sdh-sonet lag lag oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne cardPluggedIn cardPluggedOut clockDomainSystemSrcClock Change clockDomainStationSrcClock Change e1t1Loopback e1t1LoopbackOff e1t1EsLineTca e1t1CvPathTca e1t1EsPathTca e1t1SesPathTca e1t1SefsPathTca e1t1CssPathTca e1t1UasPathTca erpPortStateChange sfpOptOra sfpOptOraOff sfpLbcOra sfpLbcOraOff lagSubGroupSwitchover lagFailure oamCfmDestNeDelayTca oamCfmDestNeDelayTcaOff oamCfmDestNeDelayVarTca oamCfmDestNeDelayVarTca Off oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTca card_plugged_in card_plugged_out system_source_clock_change station_source_clock_change loopback loopback_off es_line_tca cv_path_tca es_path_tca ses_path_tca sefs_path_tca css_path_tca uas_path_tca erp_port_state_change sfp_opt_ora sfp_opt_ora_off sfp_lbc_ora sfp_lbc_ora_off sub_group_switchover lag_failure delay_tca delay_tca_off delay_var_tca delay_var_tca_off loss_ratio_tca 1.4.6.1.164.1.0.6.164.52.3.2.6.3.4.3.1.1.3.3.164.3.4.3.3.4.3.3.6.1.1.3.3.164.6.4.3.1.0.4.3.1.3.52.1.1.4.6.6.1.164.1.6.1.1.43 1.3.38 1.3.4.3.6.4.4.1.6.164.6.6.4.164.1.1.3.0.6.3.6.10 1.1.1.6.4.164.6.3.4.1.1.1.4.6.1.1.0.40.4.6.0.1.37 1.1.1.3.1.1.1.1.1.164.1.5 1.3.3.0.6.0.0. 1.1.3.3.4.3.0.4.6.6.2.0.4.4.3.0.4.1.9 1.1.1.9 1.40.0.36 1.3.6.1.1.2.3.7 1.3.1.40.3.39 1.1.164.40 1.1.1.0.12 1.40.6.6.1.6.0.6.164.6.6.3.164.3.164.3.3.3.1.3.1.4.4.3.1.164.0.8 1.3.0.1.3.0.4.164.0.6. 3.3.6.1.3.15 1.3.6.164.6.6.3.1.1.164.3.164.4.0.1.6.3.0.164.3.6.6.4.3.4.1.2.3.1.0.1.1.6.6.17 1.6.3.3.1.60 1.1.6.4.2.3.4.14.3.3.59 1.164.0.65 1.3.164.6.3.4.6.164.2.3.27 1.4.4.6.3.21 Event Event pw_switchover jitter_buffer_overflow 1.3.3.164.3.164.164.2.1.1.164.1.1.1.1.2.1.4.6.1.18 1.1.6.4.0.9 11-24 Handling Events ETX-5300A Ver.3.28 1.1.1.6 1.1.1.0.1.0.4.6.4.6.52.6.164.1.1.0.6.14 1.66 1.6.1.0.0.0.3.1.1.3.6.64 1.2.1.1.0.1.1.1.4.1.4.0.4.1.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Associated to Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Source Type Trap Description Installation and Operation Manual Notification OID oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne oam-cfmdest-ne path path path path path path path path ptp-master ptp-master ptp-recovered ptp-recovered ptp-recovered ptp-recovered ptprecoveredmaster pw pw oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTca Off oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTca Fe oamCfmDestNeLossRatioTca FeOff oamCfmDestNeUnavailRatio Tca oamCfmDestNeUnavailRatio TcaOff oamCfmDestNeUnavailRatio TcaFe oamCfmDestNeUnavailRatio TcaFeOff pathEsTca pathSesTca pathCvTca pathUasTca pathFeEsTca pathFeSesTca pathFeCvTca pathFeUasTca ptpMasterGrantedService Aborted ptpMasterSlaveRequestDenied ptpRecoveredPtpStateChange ptpRecoveredSevereFreq Condition ptpRecoveredSevereTime Condition ptpRecoveredMaster Switchover ptpRecoveredMasterUnicast NegFail pwSwitchover pwJitterBufferOverflow loss_ratio_tca_off loss_ratio_tca_fe loss_ratio_tca_fe_off unavailable_ratio_tca unavailable_ratio_tca_off unavailable_ratio_tca_fe unavailable_ratio_tca_fe_off es_path_tca ses_path_tca cv_path_tca uas_path_tca es_path_tca_fe ses_path_tca_fe cv_path_tca_fe uas_path_tca_fe granted_service_aborted slave_request_denied ptp_state_change severe_frequency_condition severe_time_condition master_switchover unicast_negotiation_failure 1.6.1.1.0.3.1.2.4.2.1.2.1.1.0.1.164.6.6.3.6.6.164.3.4.1.20 1.3.6.1.4.1.6.52.164.0 .6.1.6.164.3.0.2.6.1.16 1.20 1.164.6.1.164.6.3.3.164.19 1.1.6.3.1.2.3.4.0.52.52. 1.3.63 1.6.6.0.1.18 1.164.6.3.6.1.17 1.6.3.52.1.1.164.1.1.62 1.2.6.1.0.1.4.1.2.3.1.1.164.6.1.1.3.3.164.3.19 1.2.1.3.6.61 1.0.3.0.6.1.14.1.52.52.1.3.2.4.3.164.3.6.0.0.1.4.4.6.0.4.1. 164.164.4.6.6.3.3.55 1.2.3.1.12.6.1.1.1.4.164.1.6.0.1.6.1.1.1.1.164.2.46 1.6.0.6.0.6.164.1.6.0.6.1.2.1.3.3.35 1.164.164.4.6.2.34 1.2.1.164.3.1.6.1.1.2.1.0.89 1.6.1.3.0.3.6.0.3.3.1.1.1.164.3.1.0.1.1.2.6.4.4.1.3.1.4.41 1.0.6.0.33 1.4.3.6.1.1.6.6.4.6.0.6.6.4.6.2.4.4.0.1.164.3.1.1.3.40 1.3.4.3.1.3.0.164.4.6.3.6.6.164.2.6.1.1.6.1.1.3.1.3.164.4.3.164.1.42 1.4.43 1.90 1.2.1.3.1.3.1.164.164.3.164.36 1.164.164.6.14.1.1.4.6.1.0.1.30 1.37 1.1.39 1.1.4.0.6.18.1.3.6.164.1.1.6.6.54 1.1.1.1.88 1. 1.0.3.0.4.6.6.6.1.77 1.1.4.6.3.6.6.6.0.6.1.1.1.0 Handling Events 11-25 .6.6.1.4.1.6.6.3.3.0.2 1.1.32 1.0.3.0.1.164.0.38 1.4.45 1.1.47 1.3.3.3.1.1.1.6.1.2.1.6.3.10 1.Installation and Operation Manual Associated to Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Source Type Trap Description Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Notification OID pw sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet sdh-sonet system system system system system system system system system system system system system system pwJitterBufferUnderflow sdhSonetEsSecTca sdhSonetSesSecTca sdhSonetSefsSecTca sdhSonetCvSecTca sdhSonetEsLineTca sdhSonetSesLineTca sdhSonetCvLineTca sdhSonetUasLineTca sdhSonetFeEsLineTca sdhSonetFeSesLineTca sdhSonetFeCvLineTca sdhSonetFeUasLineTca sdhSonetPortSwitchover sdhSonetLoopback sdhSonetLoopbackOff systemSoftwareInstallStart systemSoftwareInstallEnd systemDownloadEnd systemUserReset systemAlternateConfigLoaded systemConfigurationMigration systemConfigurationSanity systemTrapHardSyncStart systemTrapHardSyncEnd systemConfigurationChange Mask systemConfigurationChange Unmask systemBackupConfiguration Loaded systemDeviceStartup systemActiveSoftware Changed jitter_buffer_underflow es_section_tca ses_section_tca sefs_section_tca cv_section_tca es_line_tca ses_line_tca cv_line_tca uas_line_tca es_line_tca_fe ses_line_tca_fe cv_line_tca_fe uas_line_tca_fe port_switchover loopback loopback_off sw_install_start sw_install_end download_end user_reset alternate_configuration_ loaded configuration_migration configuration_sanity trap_hard_sync_start trap_hard_sync_end configuration_change_mask configuration_change_ unmask backup_configuration_loaded device_startup active_software_changed 1.4.164.164.164.1.164.2.0.3.164.2.0.6.31 1.1.2.4.6.3.4.4.82 1.1.1.0.1.1.3.6.78 1.2.1.4.3.3.0.6.1.1.1.2.83 ETX-5300A Ver.6.164.6.1.3.164.4.1.0.3.1.3.0.6.4. 4.3.164.6.0.1.1.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Associated to Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Source Type Trap Description Installation and Operation Manual Notification OID system system system system system system vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt vc-vt systemRunningConfigSaved systemSuccessfulLogin systemFailedLogin systemLogout systemSwUnconfirmed systemStartupConfig Unconfirmed vcVtEsTca vcVtSesTca vcVtCvTca vcVtUasTca vcVtFeEsTca vcVtFeSesTca vcVtFeCvTca vcVtFeUasTca running_config_saved successful_login failed_login logout sw_unconfirmed startup_config_unconfirmed es_vcvt_tca ses_vcvt_tca cv_vcvt_tca uas_vcvt_tca es_vcvt_tca_fe ses_vcvt_tca_fe cv_vcvt_tca_fe uas_vcvt_tca_fe 1.3.255> [number-of-packets <1–10000>] [payloadsize <32–1450 bytes>] 2.3.6.1.3.164.4.6.1.1.164.3.1.2.4.164. Tracing the Route This diagnostic utility traces the route through the network from ETX-5300A to the destination host.4.3 Running Diagnostic Tests System-level diagnostic capabilities of ETX-5300A include ping and trace route utilities.1–255.1.3.1.6.0.  To ping an IP host: 1.0.0.0.3.0.1.6.3.3.0.3.6.79 1.1.1.82 1.78 1.0.255.83 11.164.0.1.6.76 1.6.4.0.3. At any level. and payload size: ping <1.3.1.1.6.0.2.164.164.6.164.1.1.72 1.3.4.2.1.71 1.4.6.3.0.6.6.3.0 .6.3.1.81 1.1.2. Running a Ping Test You can ping a remote IP host to check the ETX-5300A IP connectivity with that host.84 1.1.1.1.2.1.6. To stop the ping test.80 1.2.3.1.6.1.1.6.4.1.1.164.4.3.70 1.255.4.2.6.1. the number of packets to send.2.6.6.1.77 1.164. 1.1.6.6.1.3.1.4. 11-26 Running Diagnostic Tests ETX-5300A Ver.0.1.1.6.1.1.1.164. enter no ping.1.1.63 1.4.6.6.3.3.6.4.164.1.164. start pinging the desired host specifying its IP address and. optionally. The trace route utility supports up to 30 hops. please contact the RAD partner nearest you or one of RAD's offices worldwide. RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation. For further information. including expert consulting and troubleshooting assistance. and various equipment coverage options.1. Thank you for your assistance! ETX-5300A Ver.1. Please send us an e-mail with your comments.255> 11. online tools.1–255.4 Technical Support Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local partner from whom it was purchased.255. RADcare Global Professional Services offers a wide variety of service. 1.0 Technical Support 11-27 .255.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics  To trace a route: • At any level. start the trace route and specify the IP address of the host to which you intend to trace route: trace-route <1. support and training options. regular training programs. 0 . 1.Chapter 11 Monitoring and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual 11-28 Technical Support ETX-5300A Ver. Chapter 12 Software Upgrade This chapter explains how to upgrade the ETX-5300A software. The active card transfers new application software to the standby card to ensure seamless redundancy after the upgrade. one in each of the four partitions of its flash memory. to enable new features. to be downloaded to ETX-5300A. 12. using inter-card LAG or ERP TDM services are protected.2 Software Upgrade Options Application software can be downloaded to ETX-5300A via CLI (using SFTP) or via the boot menu (using FTP). which also contains a boot program. New software releases are distributed as *. you must upgrade only the active card. ETX-5300A Ver. Software upgrades may be required to fix product limitations. 1.1 Impact The software upgrade process is designed to minimize service disruption. 12. 12.3 Prerequisites This section details the software file names and outlines system requirements needed for the upgrade procedure.bin files. The software is stored in compressed format. using APS. Verify that both main cards are administratively enabled (no shutdown). as long as following criteria are met: • Two main cards are installed in the chassis Note If your system has two main cards. or to make the unit compatible with other devices that are already running the new software version. ETX-5300A can store four software versions.0 Prerequisites 12-1 . • • Ethernet services are protected. 0 . The software pack is installed as a whole entity. The files can be obtained from the local RAD business partner from whom the device was purchased. sw-pack-2. The upgrade consists of two stages: • • The application software is downloaded from a PC to the ETX-5300A flash disk. Only CL modules need to be reset after this procedure. sw-pack-4 for downloading and storing the software versions. This can be done remotely and does not require booting.0 software pack consists of three internal image files for the E5-MC-4. and a valid IP address. verify that you have the following: • • ETX-5300A unit with valid network connection to a PC with the SFTP/FTP server application. Each software pack consists of a set of image files for each module with appropriate headers. one of these partitions is set to active. E5-GBE-20/E5-1-GBE-2 and E5-cTDM-4 cards. 12-2 Upgrading Software using the CLI ETX-5300A Ver.Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual Software Files New version releases are distributed as software files named *. System Requirements Before starting the upgrade using SFTP or FTP. To activate the specified software version. 1. using the admin>software>install command. This is done. The software pack can be ordered for the entire chassis only. Using SFTP Network administrators use the SFTP protocol to securely distribute new software releases to all the managed ETX-5300A units in the network from a central location. The software package version.bin. as well as version of internal image files can be viewed using the show sw-pack command entered at the file# prompt. using the file>copy command The software pack is downloaded from the flash disk to the CL. The software upgrade utility includes four partitions called sw-pack-1.4 Upgrading Software using the CLI The recommended method for downloading software to the flash disk is to use the file copy command of the CLI environment.bin. Software file stored on the PC. A central SFTP server application is installed on a PC on the network. This is done via SFTP. sw-pack-3. internal software files cannot be changed or installed separately. 12. The version 1. for example sw-pack. Verify that the required image file is stored on the PC together with the SFTP server application.4> where sftp-ip-address is the IP address of the PC in which the SFTP server is installed. Pinging the PC Check the integrity of the communication link between ETX-5300A and the PC by pinging the ETX-5300A from the PC. 1. 5. as explained in Activating the SFTP Server. Activating the SFTP Server Once the SFTP server is activated on the PC.. Downloading the New Software Release File to ETX-5300A Flash Disk Use this procedure to download the new software release to the ETX-5300A flash disk. as explained in Downloading the New Software Release File to ETX-5300A Flash Disk. Activate the SFTP server application. it waits for any SFTP file transfer request originating from the product.0 Upgrading Software using the CLI 12-3 . 2. Ping the PC to verify the connection. 1. Downloading a Software Application File to ETX-5300A via SFTP Use the following procedure to download the software release to ETX-5300A using the copy command.Installation and Operation Manual Application file is transferred to ETX-5300A Ethernet PC with an Active SFTP Server and Application File Chapter 12 Software Upgrade ETX-5300 Figure 12-1.  To download an application file to the ETX-5300A flash disk via CLI: • At the file# prompt. enter the copy command. Note Configuration values shown in this chapter are examples only.  To run the SFTP server: • Activate a third-party SFTP server application. Download the image file to the unit. 4. ETX-5300A Ver. Verify that ETX-5300A has a valid network connection to the PC 3. as follows: copy sftp://<SFTP_user_name>:<SFTP_password>@<sftp_ip_address>/ <image_file_name> sw-pack-<index 1. and executes the received request automatically. 174.10/sw-pack. for example: ETX-5300A# show file copy Network to Device. the following message is displayed: ETX-5300A>file# sw-pack. Transferring Data Src: sftp://172. To check the flash memory contents: • At the file# prompt.3. enter the dir command.10.10.17.Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual • For example. for example:  ETX-5300A>file# dir Codes C .174.2011 8:50:52 Transferred : 665600 Bytes in: 16 seconds (41600 Bytes/Second) Finally.Software LO – Log Name Type Size(Bytes) Creation Date Status sw-pack-1 S 6306207 21-12-2010 valid 13:44:58 sw-pack-2 S 6305847 21-2-2011 valid 7:48:0 sw-pack-3 S 6278526 21-2-2011 valid 9:57:47 sw-pack-4 S 6289552 6-1-2011 valid 10:23:13 startup-config C 95872 13-3-2011 valid 14:7:35 user-default-config C 95872 13-3-2011 valid 14:6:51 factory-default-conf C 796 1-1-1970 Read Only 0:0:9 running-config C 0 1-1-1970 Read Only 0:0:9 Total Bytes : 101367808 Free Bytes : 63442944  To monitor the copy progress: • At the file# prompt. the application file is downloaded and saved in partition 4 of the flash disk. File copy command was completed.56/ sw-pack. Note Issuing the dir command (file# prompt) while installing a new software release causes the CLI to stop responding during the installation process. enter the show copy command.Configuration S .10.17.bin copied to sw-pack-4 successfully 12-4 Upgrading Software using the CLI ETX-5300A Ver.bin sw-pack-4 You are prompted to confirm the request: Are you sure? [yes/no] _ y The application file begins downloading.0 .10 with user name admin and password 1234: ETX-5300A>file# sftp://<admin>:<1234>@10. 1. to download the sw-pack. sftp://172. The CLI connection is restored after the SW installation is complete.10.bin Dst: sw-pack-4 Started: 14.bin copied to sw-pack-4 successfully 6306207 bytes copied in 133 secs (47415 bytes/sec) Once the file is downloaded.bin file to sw-pack-4 partition from the PC at 10.27.56/2. bin 1. ETX-5300A stores active software and startup-config in the restore-point-config file. When ETX-5300A includes redundant main cards. Are you sure? [yes/no] _ 2. At the admin>software # prompt.0. For ETX-5300A with a single main card:  Confirm the install. for example: ETX-5300A>file# show sw-pack Name Version Creation Time Actual ---------------------------------------------------------------------------sw-pack-1 1.0(1. enter the no-restore-point parameter in the following form: install <filename> [no-restore-point].65) 1.0 Upgrading Software using the CLI 12-5 .0(1. resulting in the main card flip.bin 1. 1.53) 1.1 31728762 eth1g eth1g.0(1.0.0(1. The sw-pack file includes the new software version for all the main and I/O cards. it must be copied to the main card to replace the current software.  To download the new software release file: 1. As long as the restore point remains valid.0.1 18829047 eth2X10g eth2X10g. the software installation process is slightly different.0.0. The previous software pack is deleted from the active partition: ETX-5300A Ver. enter the install command.0(1. For example: ETX-5300A# admin ETX-5300A>admin# software ETX-5300A>admin>software# install sw-pack-3 Note If you intend to skip creation of a restore point. ETX-5300A displays confirmation request: ! Device will install file and reboot.bin 1.bin 1.39) 2012-08-06 00:00:00 ready sw-pack-1 Size (Bytes) Type Name : 77140261 Version H/W Ver Size (Bytes) --------------------------------------------------------------main main. Caution ETX-5300A cannot be configured during software installation process. Simultaneously download the new software release file to all the main and I/O cards installed in the chassis. During the installation process.1 10698214 stm1ch stm1ch. enter the show sw-pack command.91) 1. according to your purchase order.65) 1.1 15883998 Installing the New Software Release File from the Flash Disk Once a file is saved on the ETX-5300A flash disk. you can return the device to the restore point (the application software and startup-config the device ran before the last software installation).Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 12 Software Upgrade  To display the partition contents: • At the file# prompt. Note For ETX-5300A with redundant main cards. If you fail to confirm the software. Confirmation of Software Application File ETX-5300A allows users to enable active confirmation of application software file after reboot. The former primary card starts up with the new software and becomes secondary. If confirmation of application software file is enabled. you can confirm the software application files only after the main card flip. ETX-5300A performs reboot automatically and is now ready for operation with new software version.bin /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/eth2X10g. When the secondary main card is online. Software file confirmation serves to prevent loss of the management link to a remote device due to an invalid file. you must confirm the software within a defined period of time.bin /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/eth1g. the primary card resets itself. ETX-5300A copies the previous application software from the restore-pointconfig file.0 . or 3. To enable software application confirmation: • At the admin>software# prompt. enter the software-confirm-required command according to the table below.bin The software pack stored in sw-pack-3 partition is transferred to the active partition and sent to all relevant cards that are found in the chassis. The secondary main card starts up with the new software.Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual deleting deleting deleting deleting file file file file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/main. For ETX-5300A with redundant main cards:  Confirm the install. and runs the previous application software version. reboots. no software-confirm-required to disable application software confirmation  Task Enabling or disabling confiramation of application software file after reboot 12-6 Upgrading Software using the CLI ETX-5300A Ver.      Reset the I/O cards manually to complete the installation process.bin /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/stm1ch. ETX-5300A is upgraded and starts with the new software version. 1. Command software-confirm-required [time-toconfirm <5–1440>] Comments Default time-to-confirm – 5 min. The secondary main card becomes primary.  The primary main card resets the secondary main card. 0.0 Restore Point Software : sw-pack-1 Version : 1.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Displaying Software Upgrade Status You can display the current software upgrade status for the system and all cards installed in the chassis. enter show status.0 Slot Upgrade Status --------------------------------------------------------------main-a Ready main-b Ready 1 Empty 2 Empty 3 Empty 4 Empty The chassis software installation statuses are as follows: • • • • • • • • Idle – No software installation performed since the last reboot In Progress – New software is being installed. with or without reboot Failed – Software installation has failed Main Card Reset Failed – Installation failed due to failure of the secondary main card to reset correctly Ended with Error – Unknown error has occurred during software installation Aborted By User – Installation failed due to user intervention Software Unconfirmed:    • • • • Software confirmation was not received on time ETX-5300A was reset before receiving software confirmation Previous software version is about to be reinstalled Awaiting Confirmation –Installation is on hold. and ETX-5300A waits for reset of at least one I/O card Software Installed From Boot – ETX-5300A detected a new software release installed via the Boot menu Unconfirmed Software Used in Lack Of Valid Software – ETX-5300A uses unconfirmed software due to the lack of confirmed file The slot software installation statuses are as follows: ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A>admin>software# show status Software Installation Status : Idle Remaining Time to Confirm Software Installation : -Active Software : sw-pack-1 Version : 1. pending user confirmation of the software file Awaiting Card Reset – The software was confirmed.0. 1. or no confirmation was required.0 Upgrading Software using the CLI 12-7 .  To display the software upgrade status: • At the admin>software # prompt. reboot has not been performed yet Ended Successfully – New software installed. Your ETX-5300A may display different software versions and port profiles. You can upgrade via the Boot menu using the FTP. Note All the screens shown in this section are for illustration purposes only. but the card has not been reset yet Failure – Software installation has failed. for example. The Boot menu can be accessed while ETX-5300A is performing initialization. using the download command The software pack is downloaded from the flash disk to the CL. The main difference is that you need to define the IP communication parameters associated with the corresponding Ethernet port -. This is usually performed by downloading from a remote location that provides an IP communication path to an Ethernet port of ETX-5300A.0 . The upgrade consists of two stages: • • The application software is downloaded from a PC to the ETX-5300A flash disk.IP addresses and the associated subnet mask.5 Upgrading Software via the Boot Menu Software download may also be performed using the Boot menu. and a default gateway IP address. 1.Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual • • • • • Ready – The card is installed and ready to accept the software package Empty – The card slot is empty In Progress – The card has been reset and software installation is in progress Manual Wait – Software installation has started. This is done via FTP. 12. The preparations for using the FTP protocol via the Boot menu are similar to the preparations for downloading software using the SFTP protocol via the CLI. Caution The Boot menu procedures are recommended for use only by authorized personnel. using the set-active command. the ETX-5300A software has not yet been downloaded or is corrupted. This is done. such as after power-up. You may need to start the loading from the Boot menu when it is not possible to activate SFTP using the CLI because. 12-8 Upgrading Software via the Boot Menu ETX-5300A Ver. because this menu provides many additional options that are intended for use only by technical support personnel. connect the ASCII terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the CONTROL DCE (serial) port of ETX-5300A.Set a sw pack index to be the active application control-x/reset . The parameters are described in Table 12-1. no parity. one start bit. Verify that the *. VXWORKS Boot Manager Help List 8.print boot parameters c [param] .delete a file dir .show list of files show <index> ..0 Upgrading Software via the Boot Menu 12-9 . Press any key to stop auto-boot. The boot prompt is displayed: [boot]: 7.<FileName|x>] .show sw pack info download <index> [..print boot logo with versions information run .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Starting Boot Manager Prior to initiating the VXWORKS Boot Manager functionality. Information about the System Boot.load active sw pack and execute delete <FileName> . eight data bits and one stop bit. The boot parameters list appears. Turn off ETX-5300A.by Xmodem) set-active <index> .change boot parameter(s) v . 2. Turn all types of flow control off. A typical boot parameters list is shown in Figure 12-3. 3. 6.download a sw pack to specific index (x . 4. OS-version.reboot/reset Figure 12-2. 1. • Commands: ?/help . and information about CPU.. BSP version and Boot Manager version is displayed. The Help list is displayed.  To start VXWORKS Boot Manager: 1. Boot version. Configure the communication parameters of the selected PC serial port for asynchronous communication for 115. 5.2 kbps. Activate the terminal application. Press <?> to display the Help list. ETX-5300A Ver. Press any key to stop the auto-boot and get a boot prompt. Press <P> to display all boot parameters. Turn on ETX-5300A.bin file is stored on the PC with the terminal application.print this list p . The following message appears: Use '?'/help to view available commands. 0.Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual [boot]: p file name (fn) : vxworks device IP (ip) : 10.bin.0.bin). type: c fn vxworks sw-pack.255. user u The user name.0. for example. 115200 Note The CLI commands are case insensitive. as registered at the FTP server. because the FTP server is attached to the same LAN as ETX-5300A being upgraded. ftp password vx The user password.10. Boot Parameters Parameter file name device ip device mask server IP gateway ip Command fn ip dm sip g Description The binary software pack file (*. Note: Displayed only when using FTP Protocol. to change the filename to sw-pack.0 . Typical Boot Parameters Screen Table 12-1. device name quick autoboot protocol baud rate dn q p b ETX-5300A Enabling or disabling the quick autoboot feature The file transfer protocol in use: FTP only Transmission bit rate (in kbps): 9600. Note: Displayed only when using FTP Protocol.0 server IP (sip) : 10.10.10.bin) name The IP address of ETX-5300A The IP subnet mask of ETX-5300A The FTP server IP address The FTP server default gateway IP-address if the server is located on a different LAN.   Type 'c' to modify all parameters Type 'c [parameter]' to modify the specific parameter (for example.10 gateway IP (g) : 10.10.10 user (u) : vxworks ftp password (pw) : ******* device name (dn) : ETX-5300A quick autoboot (q) : yes protocol (p) : ftp baud rate (b) : 9600 Figure 12-3.10. enter 0. 9. 12-10 Upgrading Software via the Boot Menu ETX-5300A Ver. 1. Note: If no default gateway is needed.88 device mask (dm) : 255. 19200. Note: Be sure to select an IP address within the subnet of the assigned ETX-5300A IP address.10. Press <C> to change the boot parameters and type valid values in each field. as registered at the FTP server.255. 10.10 user (u) : vxworks ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh): ******* device name (dn) : ETX-5300A quick autoboot [y/n] : y protocol [tftp/ftp] : ftp baud rate [9600/19200/115200]: 9600 10. Please wait. the user name and password in Boot parameters must be the same as defined in FTP server.' = clear field.255.255.0 Upgrading Software via the Boot Menu 12-11 . 2.10.10. follow the onscreen instructions. Note [<FileName>] is used if you did not specify the filename in the Boot menu earlier.10.88 device mask (dm) : 255.7580KB 226 Transfer finished successfully. Using dir command.0 server IP (sip) : 10. Using the FTP Protocol Use the following procedure to download software release to ETX-5300A via FTP.10 gateway IP (g) : 10.4> [<FileName>] command to start downloading the software pack file from the PC to the corresponding partition of the ETX-5300A flash disk. From the Boot menu. ^D = quit file name (fn) : vxworks sw-pack. To complete the upgrade and log on again. old file is being erased and written with new one. 4. Verify that the *. '-' = go to previous field.bin device IP (ip) : 10.10. 1.10.. Set FTP protocol.7580KB File downloaded successfully to :2 [boot]: 5. 3.  To download software file(s) from the Boot menu to ETX-5300A via FTP: 1.bin file is stored on the PC with the FTP server application. Activate the FTP server application. In this example it is sw-pack-1. ETX-5300A Ver. Turn on ETX-5300A and enter the Boot menu. type download <index 1. For example: Download the file to sw-pack-2 [boot]: download 2 The file is being copied to sw-pack-2 partition: File transferring . File writing to flash: . Note When working with FTP server.Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 12 Software Upgrade '. check which partition is currently active. bin deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/mainHdr... 1..bin SW set active 2 completed successfully.bin.Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual [boot]: dir SIZE FILE-NAME 796 factory-default-config 6296759 sw-pack-1 6305902 sw-pack-2 6278526 sw-pack-3 6289552 sw-pack-4 Active SW-pack is: 2 Total Bytes : 101367808 Free Bytes : 69701632 6.0 . Starting the APPLICATION off address 0x10000.   Press <Ctrl + X> to perform a cold (hard) reboot with turning power off and then on. The new software release is now stored in partition 2 and will be activated after reset. deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/main... 7. Perform one of the following:  Type “@” or “run”. Type “reset” to perform a warm (soft) reboot without turning off power.. Use set-active command to activate the partition to which the file has been downloaded (in this example: sw-pack-2). you will see a sequence of messages similar to the following: 12-12 Upgrading Software via the Boot Menu ETX-5300A Ver. When the downloading process is successfully completed. The following message is displayed: Are you sure (y/n)? Press <Y>. [boot]: set-active 2 set-active may take few minutes. The following message is displayed and the new software release is activated: [boot]: run External file header passed validation! Loading/un-compressing main. device = 0x20001 Formatting. serial number 7d0000 Label:" " .6 Verifying the Upgrade Results To verify that the upgrade was successful. enter show inventory-summary and verify the active software version in the SW Ver column. serial number 7d0000 Adding 71349 symbols for standalone. Press <Enter> to start working with the new SW release downloaded. FAT sectors 0 Root dir entries 0.. 1. 12.. Starting the APPLICATION off address 0x10000. sysId (null) . device = 0x20001 Formatting /ram for DOSFS Instantiating /ram as rawFs. log on to ETX-5300A to view the Inventory summary. Note The new parameters take effect only after the reset is completed. sectors per cluster 1 2 FAT copies. Disk with 64 sectors of 512 bytes will be formatted with: Volume Parameters: FAT type: FAT12.. External file header passed validation! Loading/un-compressing main. sysId VXDOS12 .0 Verifying the Upgrade Results 12-13 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 12 Software Upgrade External file header passed validation! Loading/un-compressing main. FAT sectors 2 Root dir entries 112..  To verify the upgrade result: • At the config# prompt.bin.. 54 clusters... hidden 0. Starting the APPLICATION off address 0x10000. 1 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 1. 8. ETX-5300A Ver...bin. 0 clusters. Instantiating /ram as rawFs.. hidden 0. sectors per cluster 0 0 FAT copies.. 0 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 0..Retrieved old volume params with %38 confidence: Volume Parameters: FAT type: FAT32. Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual ETX-5300A# configure chassis ETX-5300A# config>chassis# show inventory-summary Index Physical Class Name HW Ver SW Ver FW Ver ----------------------------------------------------------------------------1001 Chassis AC-chassi N/A 1. 1.39) N/A 2001 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 Backplane Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Backplane 1 2 3 4 main-a main-b Slot 5 Port 1 Slot 5 Port 2 Slot 5 Port 3 Slot 5 Port 4 Slot 6 Port 1 Slot 6 Port 2 Slot 6 Port 3 Slot 6 Port 4 Slot 1 Port 1 Slot 1 Port 2 Slot 1 Port 3 Slot 1 Port 4 Slot 1 Port 5 Slot 1 Port 6 Slot 1 Port 7 Slot 1 Port 8 Slot 1 Port 9 0.0.0(1.0/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 12-14 Verifying the Upgrade Results ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1.0 Verifying the Upgrade Results 12-15 .Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 12 Software Upgrade 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Container Slot 1 Port 10 Slot 1 Port 11 Slot 1 Port 12 Slot 1 Port 13 Slot 1 Port 14 Slot 1 Port 15 Slot 1 Port 16 Slot 1 Port 17 Slot 1 Port 18 Slot 1 Port 19 Slot 1 Port 20 Slot 4 Port 1 Slot 4 Port 2 Slot 4 Port 3 Slot 4 Port 4 Slot 4 Port 5 Slot 4 Port 6 Slot 4 Port 7 Slot 4 Port 8 Slot 4 Port 9 Slot 4 Port 10 Slot 4 Port 11 Slot 4 Port 12 Slot 4 Port 13 Slot 4 Port 14 Slot 4 Port 15 Slot 4 Port 16 Slot 4 Port 17 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ETX-5300A Ver. 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 12-16 Verifying the Upgrade Results ETX-5300A Ver.0.0.0 2.0(1.0.0 .0/0.1/0.91) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2.0 2.65) 1.0/0.0(1.65) 1.Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 4001 4002 4003 5001 5004 5005 5006 7001 7002 7003 7004 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7016 7017 7018 7019 Container Container Container Container Container Container Power Supply Power Supply Fan Module Module Module Module Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Slot 4 Port 18 Slot 4 Port 19 Slot 4 Port 20 AC Slot AC Slot FAN PS_AC 1 PS_AC 2 FAN IO Card 1 IO Card 4 Main Card A Main Card B Etherent port main-a/1 Etherent port main-a/2 Etherent port main-a/3 Etherent port main-a/4 MNG Port RS_232 Control Port Clock RJ45 Port Clock BNC Port Time Of Day BNC Port Time Of Day RS422 Port RS_232 Control Port Clock RJ45 Port Clock BNC Port Time Of Day BNC Port N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0.0/G N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1.0(1. 1.0/A 0.1/0. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 12 Software Upgrade 7020 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 7030 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7082 7083 7084 7085 7086 7087 7088 Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Time Of Day RS422 Port Ethernet Port 1/1 Ethernet Port 1/2 Ethernet Port 1/3 Ethernet Port 1/4 Ethernet Port 1/5 Ethernet Port 1/6 Ethernet Port 1/7 Ethernet Port 1/8 Ethernet Port 1/9 Ethernet Port 1/10 Ethernet Port 1/11 Ethernet Port 1/12 Ethernet Port 1/13 Ethernet Port 1/14 Ethernet Port 1/15 Ethernet Port 1/16 Ethernet Port 1/17 Ethernet Port 1/18 Ethernet Port 1/19 Ethernet Port 1/20 Ethernet Port 4/2 Ethernet Port 4/3 Ethernet Port 4/4 Ethernet Port 4/5 Ethernet Port 4/6 Ethernet Port 4/7 Ethernet Port 4/8 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ETX-5300A Ver.0 Verifying the Upgrade Results 12-17 . 1. Chapter 12 Software Upgrade Installation and Operation Manual 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 7095 7096 7097 7098 7099 7100 Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Ethernet Port 4/9 Ethernet Port 4/10 Ethernet Port 4/11 Ethernet Port 4/12 Ethernet Port 4/13 Ethernet Port 4/14 Ethernet Port 4/15 Ethernet Port 4/16 Ethernet Port 4/17 Ethernet Port 4/18 Ethernet Port 4/19 Ethernet Port 4/20 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Note If downloading failed. as long as the valid restore-point-config file exists in the system. ETX-5300A reverts to the previous software version and _reboots. At the admin>software# prompt. enter the undo-install command. repeat the entire procedure. 12.  To roll back to previous software version: 1.0 . Confirm the install. Are you sure? [yes/no] _ 2.7 Restoring the Previous Software Version ETX-5300A can roll back to previous application software version. 1. ETX-5300A displays confirmation request: ! This action will revert system to restore point. 12-18 Restoring the Previous Software Version ETX-5300A Ver. 7. + wire Not connected Receive data input. 9 2 3 Designation – Tx + Rx – Function Not connected Transmit Receive A. Pin Functions Pin 1 2 3 4. intended for direct connection to a supervision terminal. 8 Designation TxD+ TxD– RxD+ – RxD– – Function Transmit data output. 8.1 CONTROL DCE Connector The CONTROL DCE connector is a 9-pin D-type female connector with RS-232 asynchronous DCE interface. The port supports the MDI/MDIX crossover function. 1. CONTROL DCE Connector Wiring Pin 1. and therefore can be connected by any type of cable (straight or crossed) to any type of 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet port. Table A-1. MNG ETH Interface Connector.2 MNG ETH Connector Each ETX-5300A MNG ETH port has a 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet station interface terminated in an RJ-45 connector. + wire Transmit data output. The port also corrects for polarity reversal in the 10BASE-T mode. the receive and transmit pairs are interchanged. – wire Receive data input. – wire Not connected ETX-5300A Ver. Connector pin functions for the MDI state are listed in Table A-2. Table A-2. In the MDIX state.0 MNG ETH Connector A-1 . The connector is wired in accordance with Table A-1. 6. 4.Appendix A Connection Data A. 5 6 7. 6 7. Pin Functions Pin 1 2 4 5 3.5 TOD Connector The RS-422 GPS-based ToD clock interface on the E5-MC-4 card terminates in an RJ-45 connector.0 . wired in accordance with Table A-5. Connector pin functions are listed in Table A-3.Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual A.4 EXT CLK Connector The balanced external clock interface on the E5-MC-4 card terminates in an RJ-45 connector. Pin Functions Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal BI_DA+ BI_DABI_DB+ BI_DC+ BI_DCBI_DBBI_DD+ BI_DDFunction Bi-directional pair +A Bi-directional pair -A Bi-directional pair +B Bi-directional pair +C Bi-directional pair -C Bi-directional pair -B Bi-directional pair +D Bi-directional pair -D A. EXT CLK Interface Connector.3 Gigabit Ethernet Connector The Gigabit Ethernet connectors on the E5-GBE-20 card have 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet station interface terminated in an RJ-45 connector. 8 Designation RRING RTIP TRING TTIP – – Function Receive data input Receive data input Transmit data output Transmit data output Not connected Not connected A. wired in accordance with Table A-4. Gigabit Ethernet Interface Connector. A-2 TOD Connector ETX-5300A Ver. Table A-4. Table A-3. 1. ALARM Connector. major and minor alarm relay contacts +12V auxiliary voltage output External alarm sense input Connector pin functions are listed in Table A-6. TOD Interface Connector. + wire A. the maximum current that can flow through the contacts must be limited by external means. – wire Receive data input. (The maximum current through closed contacts is 1A. – wire Transmit/receive 1 pps. load switching capacity is 60 W). – wire Transmit/receive TOD.6 ALARM Connector The ALARM connector is a 15-pin D-type female connector which provides connections to the following functions: • • • Critical. Pin Functions Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function Minor Alarm Normally Open Minor Alarm Normally Close GND Major Alarm Normally Open Major Alarm Normally Close 12V output Critical Alarm Normally Open Critical Alarm Normally Close Minor Alarm common Input Alarm 0 ETX-5300A Ver. 5 7 8 Designation TOD Rx – TOD Rx + 1 pps Tx/Rx – 1 pps Tx/RX+ GND TOD Tx/Rx – TOD Tx/Rx + Function Receive data input. Caution To prevent damage to alarm relay contacts. + wire Transmit/receive 1 pps.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data Table A-5. Table A-6. Pin Functions Pin 1 2 3 6 4.0 ALARM Connector A-3 . + wire GND Transmit/receive TOD. 1. The maximum voltage across the open contacts is 60 VDC/30 VAC. 0 .Appendix A Connection Data Pin 11 12 13 14 15 Function Input Alarm 1 Installation and Operation Manual Major Alarm common Input Alarm 2 Input Alarm 3 Critical Alarm common A-4 ALARM Connector ETX-5300A Ver. 1. The cards perform ingress traffic processing and traffic management (pre-forwarding scheduling and shaping). B. • • ETX-5300A Ver. point-to-point VLAN cross-connect.1 • Data Path Model Figure B-1 illustrates the high-level structure of an ETX-5300A system. The TDM cards handle TDM pseudowire traffic. Four I/O cards are interconnected with the main card via the chassis backplane in a star topology. Ethernet I/O cards include 20 GbE or two 10GbE ports. TDM I/O cards include four channelized STM-1/OC-3 ports. in which: Two main cards include forwarding engines (packet processors) responsible for bridging.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management This appendix describes service creation and traffic management performed by ETX-5300A. Four 10GbE ports on each main card forward aggregated traffic towards the network. fan module) provide DC or AC power to the system and cool the chassis. System modules (power inlets and AC power supplies. They also perform post-forwarding scheduling and shaping (at port egress). and Level-3 forwarding (router). It discusses the following topics: • • • • • • • • Data Path Model Ingress Processing Classification CoS Mapping Ingress Color Mapping Policing VLAN Editing Traffic Management.0 Data Path Model B-1 . 1. 10GbE or SDH/SONET I/O Card Fans ETX-5300A Figure B-1. which provide 20 GbE bandwidth path with a non-blocking arch. 1.0 . High-Level Architecture of ETX-5300A I/O-to-Main and Main-to–I/O Traffic Path Figure B-2 illustrates the data flow and main traffic management functions performed by I/O and main Ethernet cards. B-2 Data Path Model ETX-5300A Ver.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual 4 x 10GbE 4 x 10GbE Main Card Main Card Timing Timing Packet Processor Common Logic Packet Processor Common Logic Power GbE. Main and I/O cards are interconnected via two 10GbE internal ports. These are GbE. as well as packet CoS and color information is available for the main card for further processing. These ports differ in the way they admit traffic. Main Card to I/O Card Direction Classification. priority mapping etc). 1. editing and user port egress scheduling and shaping are done by the main card. Editing and forwarding (bridging. forwarding decisions. Attached to the packet processor via the classification and traffic management engine (indirectly-attached ports). 10GbE and TDM ports on the I/O cards.0 Data Path Model B-3 . EVC cross-connect. These are 10GbE ports on the main cards. Port Types ETX-5300A ports can be either of two types: • • Attached directly to the main card packet processor (directly-attached ports). It supports a hierarchical scheduling and shaping at its egress to do a pre-forwarding scheduling and shaping (post-forwarding shaping at network egress is done by the main card). ETX-5300A Ver. CoS and color mapping and policing. routing) is done by the main card. the I/O card performs flow classification. Packets from the main card are sent to the appropriate port without any packet processing (no policing. and perform traffic management.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management I/O to Main Card Direction Pre-Forwarding Scheduling and Shaping Classify Map CoS and Color Police Forward Edit Post-Forwarding Scheduling and Shaping 20 x GbE or 2 x 10GbE Ethernet I/O Card 2 x 10GbE Ethernet Main Card 4 x 10GbE Post-Forwarding Scheduling and Shaping Edit Forward Map CoS and Color Classify Main to I/O Card Direction Figure B-2. Ingress and Egress Data Flow I/O Card to Main Card Direction In general. classify flows. Classification. Data Path Note SAG (Service Aggregation Group) is a logical port (management entity) that represents a physical connection between I/O and main Ethernet cards. for pseudowires it is called SVI (Service Virtual Interface). Ingress Egress Ethernet I/O or Main Card Ingress SAG I/O Card Ethernet Port Flow Aggregation Queuing VLAN Editing Shaping Ingress Processing (L2CP) Classification CoS & Color Mapping Policing Bridge TDM I/O Card Ingress TDM Pseudowire Processing I/O Card STM-1/ OC-3 Port Pseudowire Aggregation Router UDP/IP or MEF-8 Pseudowires Ingress Processing Forwarding Egress Traffic Managemnt Figure B-3.0 I/O or Main Card Ethernet Ports Tunnel Main Card Ethernet Port Queuing Shaping .Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual Data Path Figure B-3 illustrates the general traffic path within the ETX-5300A system in the ingress-to-egress direction. This identification allows the main card to make forwarding decisions. Flow aggregation and pseudowire aggregation entities are logical ports that create an aggregated classification identification for all Ethernet flows and pseudowires going in the same direction. 1. The Ethernet flow aggregation entity is referred to as SAP (Service Attachment Point). B-4 Data Path Model ETX-5300A Ver. Preforwarding scheduling and shaping are performed at the SAG level. GbE and 10GbE cards introduce logical ports that serve as management entities (SAG) and flow aggregation points (SAP). Figure B-5 illustrates Ethernet I/O card schematics. Detailed Ingress-to-Egress Packet-Processing Flow I/O Card Schematics As mentioned in the Note above. router or VLAN cross-connect) Second-Level VLAN Editing (using traffic classes and drop precedence) Post-forwarding Scheduling and Shaping (using traffic classes and drop precedence) Figure B-4. serving ports 1–10 and 11–20. SAG 1 serves port 1 and SAG 2 serves port 2 on the E5-10GbE-2 card. on the E5-GbE-20 card. Likewise. I/O Ethernet Card ETX-5300A Ver.0 Data Path Model B-5 . which aggregate ingress flows from I/O card ports. Each I/O Ethernet card has two SAGs. respectively.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Pre-forwarding Processing (VLAN/Ethertype recognition and admission) Per Port L2CP Handling Classification to Flows Per Flow L2CP Handling Traffic Class (CoS) Mapping Drop Precedence (Color) Ingress Mapping Policing Ingress Scheduling and Shaping (using traffic classes and drop precedence) Ethernet I/O Cards only First-Level VLAN Editing (using traffic classes and drop precedence) Forwarding (bridge. 1. Flow SAP 1-10 GbE ports on E5-GbE-20 1 10GbE port on E5-10GbE-2 SAG Flow SAP Flow SAP 11-20 GbE ports on E5-GbE-20 2 10GbE port on E5-10GbE-2 SAG Flow SAP Figure B-5. Each SAG includes 512 SAPs. Flow control is supported on both directly. the far-end device can then send packets again. Flow Control A flow control is a mechanism that allows an Ethernet receiving end that is unable to process all the traffic sent to it. The mechanism uses a PAUSE frame. as well as duplex mode and transmission speed are set after the negotiation is completed. This refers to outer VLAN only.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual B. to hold the transmitted traffic until it is able to process packets again.0 . If that timer expires or is cleared by getting a PAUSE frame with the timer value set to 0. When autonegotiation is disabled. the flow control mode is manually selected by the user. The outer VLAN of the incoming packet must match the configured Ethertype of the port in order to be considered as a VLAN-tagged frame (otherwise the frame is considered untagged or dropped). which tells the far-end device how long to suspend its transmission. The PAUSE frame includes a timer value (set by the originating receiver). ETX-5300A supports two Ethertype tag values: • • Default 8100 Any other type. The second Ethertype tag value is configured globally.2 Ingress Processing This section describes ingress processing of traffic performed by directly.and indirectly-attached ports: • • Directly-attached ports support symmetrical flow control (both Rx and Tx) Indirectly-attached ports support Rx flow control only. When autonegotiation is enabled. which is a packet instructing the far-end device to stop transmission of packets until the receiver is able to handle traffic again. and can thus be used in per port configuration. Flow control is an optional port-level parameter. without issuing Tx PAUSE frames (asymmetric flow control).3 LLC packets.and indirectly-attached ports. 1. It does not support IEEE 802. The actual flow control mode. Frame Format ETX-5300A supports Ethernet II frames. flow control mode is negotiated and a port advertises its user-selected flow control capabilities to the peer. Ethertype Ethertype configured per port is used for the identification of VLAN-tagged frames at ingress and VLAN editing at egress. B-6 Ingress Processing ETX-5300A Ver. Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Per-port Ethertype tag configuration allows identification of incoming and outgoing VLAN-tagged frames. Indirectly-Attached Ports with Port TPID 8100 Outer TPID 8100 8100 8100 X (other than 8100) None Inner TPID Admit/Drop Admit Admit Admit Admit Admit Recognized Tag Levels None 8100 X (other than 8100) Don’t care 1 2 1 Untagged Untagged – Table B-2. Indirectly-Attached Ports with Port TPID Y (other than 8100) Outer TPID Inner TPID Admit/Drop Admit Admit Admit Admit Admit Recognized Tag Levels Y Y Y Z (other than Y) None None 8100 X (other than 8100) Don’t care 1 2 1 Untagged Untagged – Table B-3.0 Ingress Processing B-7 . Table B-1. Note Ethertype tag cannot be changed if a port (Ethernet or LAG) has flows attached to it. Directly-Attached Ports with Port TPID 8100 Outer TPID 8100 8100 8100 X (other than 8100) None Inner TPID Admit/Drop Admit Admit Admit Admit Admit Recognized Tag Levels None 8100 or Y X (other than 8100) Don’t care 1 2 1 Untagged Untagged – ETX-5300A Ver. As for the inner TPID. 1. The configured tag protocol ID (TPID) refers to outer tag. The following tables describe the admission rules for different port and TPID types. the following assumptions are maintained: • • Indirectly-attached ports – inner VID (if exists) is 8100 Directly-attached ports – inner VID is either the same as outer VID Ethertype or 8100. Note If an L2CP profile has been attached to a port or a flow.0 . and.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual Table B-4. the profile cannot be deleted or modified. discard or peer (trap to host for protocol processing) L2CP packets. L2CP profiles are configured at a port. These actions are defined by L2CP profiles. In total. If no default action is configured for an unspecified address or protocol. 1. If no per-flow L2CP profile is configured. According to per-port L2CP profiles. SSM). • Peer action at flow level is supported only for 01-80-C2-00-00-02 frames (LACP. which also provide different L2CP addresses. They are either peered or discarded according to the flow control setting of a port. The following MAC addresses are supported by L2CP profiles: 0180-C2-00-00-00. at a flow level.and flow-level L2CP profiles. Directly-Attached Ports with Port TPID Y (other than 8100) Outer TPID Inner TPID Admit/Drop Admit Admit Admit Drop Admit Admit Recognized Tag Levels Y Y Y 8100 B (other than 8100 or Y) None None 8100 or Y B (other than 8100 or Y) Don’t care Don’t care 1 2 1 – Untagged Untagged – Note TPID is also used to indicate the Ethertype tag used in VLAN stacking. L2CP Handling ETX-5300A handles Layer-2 control protocol traffic on a per-port and/or a perflow basis. ETX-5300A performs the following: B-8 Ingress Processing ETX-5300A Ver. L2CP Profile Settings ETX-5300A can tunnel. 01-80-C2-00-00-02 – 10 and 01-80-C2-00-00-20 – 2F. ETX-5300A supports up to 16 L2CP profiles: • • Up to 4 (including default) port-level and a single flow-level profiles can be defined on directly-attached ports Up to 32 different addresses/protocols can be selected per L2CP profile. It affects both tagged and untagged L2CP frames. optionally. marker protocol. The following section describes functionality of port. Note • PAUSE frames (01-80-C2-00-00-01) are not part of L2CP profiles. this traffic is tunneled. a per-port-level profile is used. L2CP traffic is processed using a two-stage mechanism comprising per-port or per-flow profiles (set of rules for traffic handling). • Note ETX-5300A does not support peer action at port level. by default the flow traffic behaves according to the port profile. 1. the user must define an untagged flow with per-flow L2CP profile to peer the LACP traffic. as the L2CP traffic is dropped before it is processed by per-flow profile. no default L2CP profile is attached to a newly created flow. Therefore. In this case. If no per-flow profile is configured. The final decision (drop. Default L2CP Profile By default. a “tunnel all” profile is attached to every port. Table B-5. Note L2CP traffic can be peered only at the flow level. etc). Peers L2CP traffic. ETX-5300A forwards the traffic according to its configuration (flows. Tunnels L2CP traffic. L2CP Profiles and Classification Keys Classification Key VLAN + P-bit Flow Classification Type VLAN. etc). VLAN + P-bit Untagged (used for per-port L2CP profiles as well) Unclassified (indirectly-attached ports only) VLAN + Src/Dest MAC (indirectly-attached ports only) VLAN (outer) Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN Untagged (used for per-port L2CP profiles as well) Unclassified (indirectly-attached ports only) VLAN + Src MAC LAN + Non IP Outer VID + P-bit + Inner VID VLAN + IP-P or VLAN + DSCP P-bit Untagged (used for per-port L2CP profiles as well) Unclassified P-bit Untagged (used for per-port L2CP profiles as well) Unclassified ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A forwards the traffic according to its configuration (flows. However.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management • Discards L2CP traffic. for full LACP support. ETX-5300A performs the following: • • • Discards L2CP traffic Tunnels L2CP traffic. the L2CP traffic is handled according to per-port profile setting. per-port L2CP handling configuration supersedes per-flow profile.0 Ingress Processing B-9 . tunnel or peer) is made according the per-flow profile setting. Thus. According to per-flow L2CP profiles. ETX-5300A forwards the traffic to the CPU. L2CP Profiles and Traffic Classification Keys L2CP profiles can be attached only to flows created using the classification types detailed in Table B-5. DSCP Flow. The different types of classifier profiles supported per classification key are detailed in Table B-8. The classification key also defines the CoS mapping and color mapping methods. Table B-12. IP Precedence Flow. DSCP Flow. P-bit. Table B-6 and Table B-7 specify the supported classification keys and the associated CoS and color mapping methods. DSCP Flow.3 Classification The ingress traffic is first classified to flows according to classifier profiles. 1. P-bit Flow. IP Precedence Flow. DSCP Flow. Table B-13. Table B-10. IP Precedence Flow. DEI Flow.0 . A per port classification key defines the types of classifier profiles supported for this type of port. DEI. Table B-16. DSCP Flow Classification Type Installation and Operation Manual Non IP (used for per-port L2CP profiles as well) Unclassified B. Classification Keys for Indirectly-Attached Ports Classification Key (Port + …) CoS Mapping Method Ingress Color Mapping Method VLAN+P-bit (see Note below) VLAN+IP Precedence VLAN+DSCP P-bit IP Precedence DSCP Outer VLAN + Inner VLAN + Outer P-bit Flow. P-bit Flow. DSCP Flow.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Classification Key IP-P. DEI Flow. Flows must be deleted first. Table B-15. P-bit. DEI. Table B-11. Table B-9. Table B-6. P-bit. Table B-14. P-bit. DSCP Flow. IP Precedence Flow. B-10 Classification ETX-5300A Ver. DEI Table B-7. DSCP Note IA port classification key cannot be changed when the port has flows attached to it. Classification Keys for Directly-Attached Ports Classification Key (Port + …) CoS Mapping Method Ingress Color Mapping Method VLAN+P-bit (see Note below) Outer VLAN + Inner VLAN + Outer P-bit Flow. P-bit. P-bit. P-bit Flow. DSCP Flow. P-bit. Indirectly-Attached Ports with VLAN+P-Bit Classifier profile types for the VLAN+P-bit key that can be used for traffic originating from indirectly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-8. ETX-5300A Ver. For example. Indirectly-Attached Ports with VLAN+P-Bit Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type VLAN (see note 1 below) VLAN + P-bit VLAN + Src MAC (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Dst MAC (see note 1 below) VLAN + Src IP (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Dst IP (see Note 1 below) Src MAC Dst MAC Src IP Dst IP Ethertype Untagged Match All (Unclassified).0 Classification B-11 . VLAN + Src/Dst IP) are supported without explicit P-bit indication. as shown in Table B-8. if a flow with VID 5 exists (classifier profile type VLAN. a flow with VID 5 and P-bit 0 (classifier profile type VLAN+P-bit. single IP Range (per Flow) Single VLAN range.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Table B-8. For example. VLAN + Dst IP Group 2 – Src MAC. In this case. default Single Ethertype Single IP Single MAC Single VLAN. priority 1). priority 2) and VLAN 5 and Src MAC x (classifier profile type VLAN + Src MAC. Two flows having the same priority cannot overlap. it is possible to configure a flow with VLAN 5 (classifier profile type VLAN. 1. single MAC Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 Note • Some of the VLAN-based classifier profile types (VLAN. Dst IP. When flows have different priorities. Src IP. two flows must be created: VID 5 and P-bit 0 and VID 5 and P-bit 1–7. Ethertype. Classification Type Groups Some of the classification types under VLAN + P-bit key are divided into two groups that have certain configuration restrictions: • • Group 1 – VLAN + Src MAC. • ETX-5300A recognizes only one level of VLAN tagging on the flows created with this classifier key. single P-bit range Single VLAN. IP level is not detected. they can overlap. Dst MAC. • A packet with an Ethertype tag that does not match the port Ethertype tag is considered to be untagged. VLAN + Dst MAC. priority 2) is not allowed and vice versa. VLAN + Src/Dst MAC. priority 2). This means that for a double-tag packet. but they actually imply a full P-bit range (0–7). VLAN + Src IP. is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. Priority Flow priority. IP level is not detected. but cannot use VID 5 Src IP x (Group 2) profile. This means that for a double-tag packet. • ETX-5300A recognizes only one level of VLAN tagging on the flows created with this classifier key. up to 128 Group 1 or Group 2 flows can be defined on Ethernet ports 1– 10 or 11–20 of the E5-GbE-20 card. single IP-P range Single VLAN. you can add a flow based on VID 5 Dest MAC 2 (Group 1). Moreover. only one Group 1 classification type is allowed per VLAN. default Non-IP VLAN + Non-IP Single VLAN range Single Ethertype Single IP Single MAC Single VLAN. Packets with VLANs. In total. B-12 Classification ETX-5300A Ver. Indirectly-Attached Ports with VLAN + IP Precedence Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type VLAN (see Note 1 below) VLAN + IP Precedence VLAN + Src MAC (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Dst MAC (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Src IP (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Dst IP (see Note 1 below) Src MAC Dst MAC Src IP Dst IP Ethertype Untagged Match All (Unclassified). • A packet with an Ethertype tag that does not match the port Ethertype tag is considered to be untagged. single IP Range (per Flow) Single VLAN range. Indirectly-Attached Ports with VLAN + IP Precedence Classifier profile types for the VLAN + IP Precedence key that can be used for traffic originating from indirectly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-9. VLAN + Src/Dst IP) are supported without explicit IP precedence indication. 1. if the VID 5 and Dest MAC 1 (Group 1) classifier profile is configured on a port. but without IP Precedence (non-IP) will not match these classifier profiles.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual Group 1 and Group 2 classification types cannot be used on the same port. Thus. or on ports 1 or 2 of the E5-10GbE-2 card. single MAC Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 Note • Some of the VLAN-based classifier profile types (VLAN. VLAN + Src/Dst MAC. but they actually imply a full IP Precedence range (0–7).0 . Table B-9. priority 1). if a flow with VID 5 exists (classifier profile type VLAN. Thus. it is possible to configure a flow with VLAN 5 (classifier profile type VLAN. Indirectly-Attached Ports with VLAN + DSCP Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type VLAN (see Note 1 below) VLAN + DSCP VLAN + Src MAC (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Dst MAC (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Src IP (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Dst IP (see Note 1 below) Src MAC Dst MAC Src IP Dst IP Ethertype Untagged ETX-5300A Ver. VLAN + Dst MAC. single MAC Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 Classification B-13 . single DSCP range Single VLAN. In total. if the VID 5 and Dest MAC 1 (Group 1) classifier profile is configured on a port. Classification Type Groups Some of the classification types under VLAN + IP Precedence key are divided into two groups that have certain configuration restrictions: • • Group 1 – VLAN + Src MAC. priority 2) and VLAN 5 and Src MAC x (classifier profile type VLAN + Src MAC. is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. they can overlap. up to 128 Group 1 or Group 2 flows can be defined on Ethernet ports 1– 10 or 11–20 of E5-GbE-20 card. shown in Table B-9. In this case. For example. When flows have different priorities. Src IP. two flows must be created: VID 5 and IP-P 0 and VID 5 and IP-P 1–7. 1. For example. only one Group 1 classification type is allowed per VLAN. VLAN + Dst IP Group 2 – Src MAC. VLAN + Src IP.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Priority Flow priority. priority 2). Two flows having the same priority cannot overlap. Moreover. or on ports 1 or 2 of E5-10GbE-2 card.0 Single Ethertype Single IP Single MAC Single VLAN. priority 2) is not allowed and vice versa. you can add a flow based on VID 5 Dest MAC 2 (Group 1). Dst IP. Ethertype Group 1 and Group 2 classification types cannot be used on the same port. a flow with VID 5 and IP-P 0 (classifier profile type VLAN + IP-P. Dst MAC. Table B-10. Indirectly-Attached Ports with VLAN + DSCP Classifier profile types for the VLAN + DSCP key that can be used for traffic originating from indirectly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-10. single IP Range (per Flow) Single VLAN range. but cannot use VID 5 Src IP x (Group 2) profile. VLAN + Ethertype Group 2 – Src MAC. is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. up to 128 Group 1 or Group 2 flows can be defined on Ethernet ports 1– 10 or 11–20 of the E5-GbE-20 card. default Non-IP VLAN + Non-IP Single VLAN range Range (per Flow) Installation and Operation Manual Priority 3 2 2 Note • (1) Some of the VLAN-based classifier profile types (VLAN. but cannot use VID 5 Src IP x (Group 2) profile. When flows have different priorities. Packets with VLANs. Dst IP. For example. Two flows having the same priority cannot overlap. Priority Flow priority. only one Group 1 classification type is allowed per VLAN. priority 2) and VLAN 5 and Src MAC x (classification type VLAN + Src MAC. but they actually imply a full DSCP range (0–63). VLAN + Dst MAC. you can add a flow based on VID 5 Dest MAC 2 (Group 1). For example. VLAN + Src/Dst MAC. they can overlap. IP level is not detected. Dst MAC. priority 1). if the VID 5 and Dest MAC 1 (Group 1) classifier profile is configured on a port. • (2) ETX-5300A recognizes only one level of VLAN tagging on the flows created with this classifier key. a flow with VID 5 and DSCP 0 (classification type VLAN + DSCP. it is possible to configure a flow with VLAN 5 (classification type VLAN. B-14 Classification ETX-5300A Ver. This means that for a double-tag packet. 1. Classification Type Groups Some of the classification types under VLAN + DSCP key are divided into two groups that have certain configuration restrictions: • • Group 1 – VLAN + Src MAC. Moreover. VLAN + Src/Dst IP) are supported without explicit DSCP indication. In this case. two flows must be created: VID 5 and DSCP 0 and VID 5 and DSCP 1–63. VLAN + Src IP. priority 2). Ethertype Group 1 and Group 2 classification types cannot be used on the same port. but without DSCP (non-IP) will not match these classifier profiles. VLAN + Dst IP. Src IP. Thus. or on ports 1 or 2 of the E5-10GbE-2 card. Indirectly-Attached Ports with P-Bit Classifier profile types for P-bit key that can be used for traffic originating from indirectly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-11. if a flow with VID 5 exists (classification type VLAN.0 . shown in Table B-10. priority 2) is not allowed and vice versa.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Classifier Profile Type Match All (Unclassified). In total. three flows must be created: P-bit 0–2. Dst IP or Ethertype) are allowed on this port. default Single Ethertype Single IP Range (per Flow) Single P-bit range Single MAC Priority 2 1 1 1 2 3 Note ETX-5300A recognizes only one level of VLAN tagging on the flows created with this classifier key. or on ports 1 or 2 of the E5-10GbE-2 card. In total. Priority Flow priority. Indirectly-Attached Ports with IP Precedence Classifier profile types for the IP Precedence key that can be used for traffic originating from indirectly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-12. is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. if Src MAC x flow exists on port 1 of the E5-GbE-20 card in slot 1. Src IP. Table B-12. Classification Type Groups Some of the classification types under the P-bit key belong to a group that has certain configuration restrictions: Group 2 – Src MAC. Only one flow based on Group 2 classification method can be created on the same port. Indirectly-Attached Ports with P-Bit Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type P-bit Src MAC Dst MAC Src IP Dst IP Ethertype Untagged Match All (Unclassified). priority 2). priority 2) is not allowed and vice versa. This means that for a double-tag packet. up to 128 Group 2 flows can be defined on Ethernet ports 1–10 or 11– 20 of the E5-GbE-20 card. IP level is not detected. P-bit 3 and P-bit 4–7. Two flows having the same priority cannot overlap. Indirectly-Attached Ports with IP Precedence Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type IP Precedence Range (per Flow) Single IP-P range Priority 2 ETX-5300A Ver. Dst IP. Dst MAC. 1. shown in Table B-11. For example. For example. a flow with P-bit 3 (classification type P-bit. if a flow with P-bit 0–7 exists (classification type P-bit. Ethertype. In this case.0 Classification B-15 .Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Table B-11. Src IP. no other flows created using Group 2 classification method (Dst MAC. Indirectly-Attached Ports with DSCP Classifier profile types for the DSCP key that can be used for traffic originating from indirectly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-13. or on ports 1 or 2 of the E5-10GbE-2 card. In total. Table B-13. priority 2) is not allowed and vice versa. Src IP.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Classifier Profile Type Src MAC Dst MAC Src IP Dst IP Ethertype Match All (Unclassified). 1. if Src MAC x flow exists on port 1 of the E5-GbE-20 card in slot 1. Indirectly-Attached Ports with DSCP Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type DSCP Src MAC Dst MAC Src IP Dst IP Ethertype Untagged Match All (Unclassified). Dst IP. IP-P 3 and IP-P 4–7. default Non-IP Single Ethertype Single IP Range (per Flow) Single MAC Installation and Operation Manual Priority 1 1 1 3 1 Priority Flow priority. For example. priority 2). is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. if a flow with IP-P 0–7 exists (classification type IP Precedence. three flows must be created: IP-P 0–2. Dst MAC. Ethertype. no other flows created using Group 2 classification method (Dst MAC. shown in Table B-12. Only one flow based on Group 2 classification method can be created on the same port. Two flows with the same priority cannot overlap. Dst IP or Ethertype) are allowed on this port. For example.0 . default B-16 Classification Single Ethertype Single IP Range (per Flow) Single P-bit range Single MAC Priority 2 1 1 1 2 3 ETX-5300A Ver. Src IP. up to 128 Group 2 flows can be defined on Ethernet ports 1–10 or 11– 20 of the E5-GbE-20 card. a flow with IP-P 3 (classification type IP Precedence. In this case. Classification Type Groups Some of the classification types under the IP Precedence key belong to a group that has certain configuration restrictions: Group 2 – Src MAC. or on ports 1 or 2 of the E5-10GbE-2 card. For example. priority 2). In total. Indirectly-Attached Ports with Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN Classifier profile types for the Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN key that can be used for traffic originating from indirectly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-14. if Src MAC x flow exists on port 1 of the E5-GbE-20 card in slot 1. Note • TPID of outer VLAN is expected to match the user-configured port Ethertype tag. three flows must be created: DSCP 0–2. single inner VLAN range Priority 2 Single VLAN. priority 2) is not allowed and vice versa. Table B-14. if a flow with DSCP 0–63 exists (classification type DSCP.0 . Two flows with the same priority cannot overlap. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Priority Flow priority. Only one Group 2 classification type per port can be used. no other flows created using Group 2 classification method (Dst MAC. single IP Single VLAN. For example. Src IP. shown in Table B-13. In this case. DSCP 3 and DSCP 4– 63. up to 128 Group 2 flows can be defined on Ethernet ports 1–10 or 11– 20 of the E5-GbE-20 card. is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. Dst IP. single P-bit range 2 1 1 1 1 Classification B-17 ETX-5300A Ver. otherwise the inner VLAN and IP level are not recognized. single P-bit range. Classification Type Groups Some of the classification types under DSCP key belong to a group that has certain configuration restrictions: Group 2 – Src MAC. • TPID of inner VLAN must be 8100. single MAC Range (per Flow) Single outer VLAN. Indirectly-Attached Ports with Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN Outer VLAN + Inner VLAN (see Note 1 below) VLAN (see notes 1 and 2 below) VLAN + P-bit (see Notes 1 and 2 below) VLAN + Src MAC (see note 1 below) VLAN + Dst MAC (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Src IP (see Note 1 below) VLAN + Dst IP (see Note 1 below) Src IP Dst IP Ethertype Single Ethertype Single IP Single VLAN. a flow with DSCP 3 (classification type DSCP. Dst MAC. Src IP. Ethertype. Dst IP or Ethertype) are allowed on this port. Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Classifier Profile Type Untagged Match All (Unclassified), default Range (per Flow) Installation and Operation Manual Priority 2 3 Note • (1) Some of the VLAN-based classifier profile types (VLAN, Outer VLAN + Inner VLAN, VLAN + Src/Dst MAC, VLAN + Src/Dst IP) are supported without explicit P-bit indication, but they actually imply a full P-bit range (0–7). • (2) VLAN and VLAN + P-bit classifier profile types relate to packets with single VLAN level only. Priority Flow priority, as it appears in Table B-14, is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. Two flows having the same priority cannot overlap. For example, if a flow with VID 5 exists (classification type VLAN, priority 2), a flow with VID 5 and P-bit 0 (classification type VLAN+P-bit, priority 2) is not allowed and vice versa. In this case, two flows must be created: VID 5 and P-bit 0 and VID 5 and P-bit 1–7. When flows have different priorities, they can overlap. For example, it is possible to configure a flow with VLAN 5 (classification type VLAN, priority 2) and VLAN 5 and Src MAC x (classification type VLAN + Src MAC, priority 1). Classification Type Groups Some of the classification types under the VLAN + P-bit key are divided into two groups that have certain configuration restrictions: • • Group 1 – VLAN + Src MAC, VLAN + Dst MAC, VLAN + Src IP, VLAN + Dst IP Group 2 – Src MAC, Dst MAC, Src IP, Dst IP, Ethertype Group 1 and Group 2 classification types cannot be used on the same port. Moreover, only one Group 1 classification type is allowed per VLAN. Thus, if the VID 5 and Dest MAC 1 (Group 1) classifier profile is configured on a port, you can add a flow based on VID 5 Dest MAC 2 (Group 1), but cannot use VID 5 Src IP x (Group 2) profile. In total, up to 128 Group 1 or Group 2 flows can be defined on Ethernet ports 1– 10 or 11–20 of the E5-GbE-20 card, or on ports 1 or 2 of the E5-10GbE-2 card. Directly-Attached Ports with VLAN+P-bit Classifier profile types for the VLAN+P-bit key that can be used for traffic originating from directly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-15. Table B-15. Directly-Attached Ports with VLAN+P-bit Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type VLAN (see note 1 below) VLAN + P-bit Untagged Range (per Flow) Single VLAN range, Single P-bit range Priority 1 2 B-18 Classification ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Note • (1) VLAN classifier profile type is supported without explicit P-bit indication, but it actually implies a full P-bit range (0–7). • (2) When a two-level VLAN frame is received, this classification refers to the outer VLAN. Flow priority, shown in Table B-15, is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. Two flows with the same priority cannot overlap. For example, if a flow with VID 5 exists (classification type VLAN, priority 1), a flow with VID 5 and P-bit 0 (classification type VLAN+P-bit, priority 1) is not allowed and vice versa. In this case, two flows must be created: VID 5 and P-bit 0 and VID 5 and P-bit 1–7. Directly-Attached Ports with Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN Classifier profile types for the Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN key that can be used for traffic originating from directly-attached ports are detailed in Table B-16. Note A packet with an outer Ethertype tag that does not match the port Ethertype tag is considered untagged. Table B-16. Directly-Attached Ports with Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN Classifier Key Classifier Profile Type Outer VLAN + P-bit + Inner VLAN Outer VLAN + Inner VLAN (see note 1 below) VLAN (see notes 1 and 2 below) VLAN + P-bit (see note 2 below) Untagged Range (per Flow) Single outer VLAN, single P-bit range, single inner VLAN range Priority 1 Single VLAN, single P-bit range 1 1 Note • (1) VLAN classifier profile type is supported without explicit P-bit indication, but it actually implies a full P-bit range (0–7). • (2) VLAN and VLAN + P-bit classification profile type relate to packets with single VLAN level only. Flow priority, shown in Table B-16, is a hard-coded attribute of a flow that cannot be changed. Two flows having the same priority cannot overlap. For example, if a flow with VID 5 exists (classification type VLAN, priority 1), a flow with VID 5 and P-bit 0 (classification type VLAN+P-bit, priority 1) is not allowed and vice versa. In this case, two flows must be created: VID 5 and P-bit 0 and VID 5 and P-bit 1–7. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Classification B-19 Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual B.4 CoS Mapping User priorities must be mapped to internal Class of Service (CoS) values, according to P-bit, DSCP, IP Precedence or per-flow criteria. The newly defined CoS can then be used for: • • P-bit handling during VLAN editing process Queue mapping. In other words, each packet is first “normalized” to a CoS value (0–7), then this CoS is used for VLAN editing (P-bit) or priority queue mapping. CoS Mapping Profiles to map packet to CoS: • Ingress Traffic → • • • P-bit to CoS (0–7) DSCP to CoS (0–7) IP Precedence to CoS (0–7) Flow to CoS → CoS to P-bit (VLAN Editing) Profiles to map: • CoS to P-bit Queue Mapping Profiles to map: • CoS to priority queue (0–7) Table B-6 and Table B-7 give detailed description of CoS mapping methods supported by directly- and indirectly-connected ports, depending on a classification key used for traffic classification. Note Unmapped traffic is assigned to the default (lowest, 7) CoS. Capacity ETX-5300A supports up to 36 user-defined CoS mapping profiles per I/O card. There are three default profiles for P-bit to CoS, IP Precedence to CoS, DSCP to CoS mapping. These profiles are considered part of the 36 CoS mapping profiles supported per system Table B-17. P-Bit to CoS Default Mapping Profile P-bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B-20 CoS Mapping ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Table B-18. IP Precedence to CoS Default Mapping Profile IP-P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Table B-19. DSCP to CoS Default Mapping Profile DSCP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7–63 CoS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Indirectly-attached ports support up to 12 profiles. The CoS mapping method for indirectly-attached ports depends on the selected classification key (see Table B-6). The number of CoS mapping profiles supported by directly-attached ports depends on the selected ingress color mapping. For any flow, the methods used for CoS and ingress color mapping are related in the following way: • • • The flow to CoS mapping method is supported only with flow to ingress color mapping The P-bit to CoS mapping method is supported only with either DEI or P-bit to ingress color mapping methods The DSCP to CoS mapping method is supported only with DSCP to ingress color mapping method. Up to 15 different combinations of X to CoS + X to color are supported for directly-attached ports. CoS mapping method for directly-attached ports depends on the selected classification key (see Table B-7). ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 CoS Mapping B-21 Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual Table B-20. Possible Combinations of CoS and Ingress Color Mapping Methods for Directly-Attached Ports CoS Mapping Method Per flow (flow to CoS) Per P-bit (P-bit to CoS) Per P-bit (P-bit to CoS) Per DSCP (DSCP to CoS) Ingress Color Mapping Method Per flow (flow to color) Per P-bit (P-bit to color) Per DEI (DEI to color) Per DSCP (DSCP to color) Note See Ingress Color Mapping for details on the color mapping methods. Priority Queue Mapping When an Ethernet flow is connected to a level-0 scheduling element (SE), CoS values are mapped into SE queues according to the default queue mapping profile (QueueMapDefaultProfile). This profile is fixed and cannot be changed. This profile is the only queue mapping profile that can be attached to a flow. Table B-21. CoS to Priority Queue Mapping CoS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B-22 CoS Mapping ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management B.5 Ingress Color Mapping ETX-5300A supports an ingress color mapping mechanism as a part of its traffic policing features. The mechanism inspects incoming packets and assigns a color (green or yellow) value according to configured color mapping profiles. The following mapping profiles are supported: • • • • • • P-bit to color DSCP to color IP Precedence to color DEI to color (fixed mapping, 0 to green and 1 to yellow) Flow to color Mark all green (default). In total, ETX-5300A supports up to 36 ingress color mapping profiles (12 of each type). Packet color is used afterwards by WRED mechanism for congestion prevention and during VLAN editing process (setting DEI value). Note Ingress color mapping method for both directly- and indirectly-attached ports depends on a classification key used for the port. See Table B-6 and Table B-7 for details. Color Mapping for Indirectly-Attached Ports In addition to color mapping, indirectly-attached port flows have policers applied to them. Thus, the final color of the packet also depends on the policing result. Two policer modes relate to ingress color mapping: • Color-blind policer that configures packet color without taking into account any preexisting markings that may be set for a packet by another traffic policer at a previous network node Color-aware policer that adds color information packet color taking into account previously configured packet color • Color Mapping for Directly-Attached Ports Directly-attached ports do not support the policing mechanism, and map previously configured packet color to the same egress color directly. Note The ingress color mapping method for directly-attached ports depends on selected CoS mapping for a flow. See Table B-20 for possible combinations of CoS mapping and color mapping profiles. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Ingress Color Mapping B-23 Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual B.6 Policing When the flows are established, a metering and policing function can be applied for each ingress flow on indirectly-attached ports to regulate traffic according to the contracted CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS bandwidth profiles.Rate limitation is performed according to the Dual Token Bucket mechanism (two rates, three colors) in color-aware or color-blind modes. The final color of a packet is determined by a policer (color-aware or color-blind). If a policer is not applied on a specific flow, the ingress color mapping determines packet color. Policer Bandwidth Profiles Policing is implemented by defining policer bandwidth profiles and assigning them to one or more (up to 16) flows (aggregate policer profile). ETX-5300A supports up to 128 policer bandwidth profiles (regular and aggregate) with up to: • 2K policer instances per each Ethernet I/O card Policer Parameters Policer uses the following for bandwidth control: • • • • • Committed Information Rate (CIR) for the current profile. The CIR specifies a bandwidth with committed service guarantee (“green bucket” rate). Committed Burst Size (CBS) for the current profile. The CBS specifies the maximum guaranteed burst size (“green bucket” size). Excess Information Rate (EIR). The EIR specifies an extra bandwidth with no service guarantee (“yellow bucket” rate). Excess Burst Size (EBS). The EBS specifies the extra burst with no service guarantee (“yellow bucket” size). Coupling Flag. This parameter is relevant for color-aware mode only. See Color-Aware Policer section below. Overhead Compensation , you can also specify the amount of bytes that the shaper or policer can use to compensate for the overhead of Layer-1 (preamble and IFG) and the overhead for the added VLAN header in case of stacking. Color-Aware Policer When determining whether or not a packet conforms to a bandwidth profile, the color-aware policer takes into account any preexisting color markings that may have been set for a packet by another traffic policer. The packet ingress color is resolved by a color mapping profile (see Ingress Color Mapping section above). B-24 Policing ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management The color-aware policing mechanism conforms to MEF 10.1 requirements and is illustrated below: Arriving packet is green and CIR bucket is not exceeded No Yes Packet is green Packets are admitted to network EIR bucket is not exceeded (see Note below) No Yes Packet is yellow Packet is red and it is dropped Figure B-6. Color-Aware Policing Note When the Coupling Flag is enabled, a sum of CIR and EIR volumes is taken into account. Coupling flags are described below. The coupling flag allows a choice between two modes of operations for the rate enforcement algorithm. The chosen value for CF has the effect of controlling the volume of the yellow packets. • • When CF is disabled, the long term average bit rate of yellow packets is set by EIR. When CF is enabled, the long term average bit rate of yellow packets is set by CIR + EIR, depending on volume of the green packets. In both cases the burst size of the yellow packets is limited by EBS. In other words, when the CF is enabled, a yellow packet arrives with an empty EIR bucket, and the policer forwards the packet, using tokens form the CIR bucket. This allows the EIR to be extended to the value of “configured CIR” + “extended EIR”. Color-Blind Policer In the color-blind mode, the policer ignores the packet color (if any) when determining whether or not a packet conforms to a bandwidth profile. B.7 VLAN Editing The VLAN tag editing mechanism allows service providers to carry customertagged traffic on its network using its own VLANs. You can configure tag editing ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 VLAN Editing B-25 Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual operations to stack (push), remove (pop), or swap (mark) tags on single-, or double-tagged packets. Note When configuring VLAN editing via CLI, swap is referred to as mark. ETX-5300A performs the VLAN editing in the following cases: • • E-Line E-LAN   • At bridge ingress port At bridge egress port Router   At ingress router interface At egress router interface When a VLAN is pushed or swapped, the inner bits (P-bit, CFI/DFI) are either copied from the original VLAN or set according to CoS marking profile. E-Line VLAN Editing Table B-22 details VLAN editing options available for E-Line (point-to-point) services. Table B-22. VLAN Editing Options for E-Line Services Action 1 None Pop (outer) Pop (outer) Push (copy P-bit and DEI) Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Swap (copy P-bit and DEI) Action 2 None None Pop (inner) None None CLI Command – vlan-tag pop vlan vlan-tag pop vlan inner vlan vlan-tag push vlan <vid> p-bit copy vlan-tag push vlan <vid> p-bit profile <profile name> None mark all vlan <vid> Swap (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Swap (copy P-bit and DEI) None mark all vlan <vid> marking-profile <profile name> Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) mark all vlan <vid> exit vlan-tag push vlan <vid> p-bit profile <profile name> B-26 VLAN Editing ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Action 1 Swap (copy P-bit and DEI) Action 2 Push (copy P-bit and DEI) Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management CLI Command mark all vlan <vid> exit vlan-tag push vlan <vid> p-bit copy Push (copy P-bit and DEI) Push (copy P-bit and DEI) Push (copy P-bit and DEI) Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile), see Note below Swap (copy P-bit and DEI) vlan-tag push vlan <vid> p-bit copy inner-vlan <vid> pbit copy vlan-tag push vlan <vid> p-bit profile <profile name> inner-vlan <vid> p-bit copy vlan-tag push vlan <vid> p-bit profile <profile name> inner-vlan <vid> p-bit profile <profile name> mark all inner-vlan <vid> exit vlan-tag pop vlan Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile), see Note below Pop Pop Swap (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) mark all vlan <vid> marking-profile <profile name> exit vlan-tag pop vlan Note Both VLAN editing actions must use the same CoS marking profile. The TPID (Ethertype) editing policy for specific actions in E-Line topology is detailed below: • • • Push: TPID of the egress port Swap: TPID of the egress port Swap-push:   • Swap: User-configured TPID. Default setting is 8100. Push: TPID of the egress port Push-push:   Push 1: User-configured TPID. Default setting is 8100. Push 2: TPID of the egress port • • Pop: Not relevant Pop-swap:   Pop: Not relevant Swap: TPID of the egress port • ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Pop-pop: Not relevant. VLAN Editing B-27 Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual E-LAN VLAN Editing The VLAN editing options available for E-LAN services at ingress and egress bridge ports are detailed in the tables below. Table B-23. VLAN Editing Options at Bridge Port Ingress Action None Pop (outer) Push (copy P-bit and DEI) Push (set P-bit to a user-configured value, set DEI to 0) Swap (copy P-bit and DEI) CLI Command – vlan-tag-pop vlan vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit copy [tag-ether-type <tag-ether-type>] vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan>p-bit fixed <fixed-p-bit>[tag-ether-type <tag-ethertype>] mark all vlan <vlan-value> p-bit copy [tagether-type <tag-ether-type>] Table B-24. VLAN Editing Options at Bridge Port Egress Action None Pop (outer) Push (copy P-bit and DEI) Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Swap (copy P-bit and DEI) Swap (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) CLI Command – vlan-tag-pop vlan vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit copy vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit profile <inner-marking-profile-name> mark all vlan <vlan-value> p-bit copy mark all vlan <vlan-value> p-bit profile <inner-marking-profile-name> Note • The VLAN editing options allowed at bridge port ingress also depend on the configured flow classification method. Valid combinations are listed in Table B-25 and Table B-26. • VLAN tag swap is not available if the associated broadcast domain is connected to a router interface. The TPID (Ethertype) editing policy for specific actions in E-LAN topology is detailed below: • • • Bridge port egress push: TPID of the egress port Bridge port egress swap: TPID of the egress port Bridge port ingress push/swap: user-configured TPID. Default setting is 8100. Table B-25 details allowed combinations of flow classification method, ingress VLAN editing action and flow VID for flows originating at directly-attached ports. B-28 VLAN Editing ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Table B-25. Flows Originating at Directly-Attached Port Classification Method Ingress Editing Action Bridge Broadcast Domain Untagged Push X None VLAN X VLAN X VLAN Y VLAN Y VLAN X VLAN Y VLAN Z VLAN Z VLAN X Push Y Swap (mark) Y None Outer VLAN X + Inner VLAN Y Pop Push Z Swap (mark) Z Table B-26 details allowed combinations of flow classification method, ingress VLAN editing action and flow VID for flows originating at indirectly-attached ports. Table B-26. Flows Originating at Indirectly-Attached Ports (via SAP) Classification Method Ingress Editing Action Bridge Broadcast Domain Match All Outer VLAN X Outer VLAN X + Inner VLAN Y Swap (mark) X Push X None Pop VLAN X VLAN X VLAN X VLAN Y Router VLAN Editing Router-type SVIs are considered to be untagged entities, inheriting their VLAN properties from attached flows. Table B-27 and Table B-28 detail VLAN editing options available for router interfaces. VLAN editing option type at ingress must be the same as the one at egress (1, 2 or 3). For example, if pop (outer)/none actions (type 2) are used at ingress, push/none (type 2) actions must be used at egress. Table B-27. VLAN Editing Options at Ingress Router Interface Type 1 2 Action 1 None Pop (outer) Action 2 None None CLI Command – vlan-tag pop vlan Remarks Untagged packets only Tagged packets only. This is the only allowed action, when a router interface is connected to a bridge port. ETX-5300A Ver. 1.0 VLAN Editing B-29 TPID is userconfigured. If TPID is not configured. Remarks 3 Push (set Pbit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Note All bridge ports with flows originating from indirectly-attached ports and sharing the same RIF broadcast domain (RIF over bridge/VLAN) must use the same VLAN editing options. Push-push:   Inner tag: TPID is user-configured. TPID is copied from a port TPID If a router interface is connected to a bridge port. when a router interface is connected to a bridge port. Table B-28. VLAN Editing Options at Egress Router Interface Type 1 2 Action 1 None Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Action 2 None None CLI Command – vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit profile <inner-markingprofile-name> vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit profile <inner-markingprofile-name> inner vlan <inner-sp-vlan> p-bit profile <innermarking-profile-name> Tagged packets only. The TPID Editing TPID (Ethertype) editing policy for specific actions for internal router is detailed below: • Push:   • If a router interface is connected to a physical port. If TPID is not configured. 1. when a router interface is connected to a bridge port. This is the only allowed action.0 . default setting is used (8100). inheriting their VLAN properties from attached flows. This action is not available. Table B-29 and Table B-30 detail VLAN editing B-30 VLAN Editing ETX-5300A Ver. Outer tag: TPID is copied from a port TPID.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Type 3 Action 1 Pop (outer) Action 2 Pop (inner) CLI Command vlan-tag-pop vlan vlantag-pop inner-vlan Installation and Operation Manual Remarks Double-tagged packets only. SVI PW Editing PW-type SVIs are considered to be untagged entities. default setting is used (8100). green 1) values. green. green) values The color-blind profile translates CoS (0–7) into P-bit (0–7) and DEI (yellow. VLAN Editing Options at Egress PW-Type SVI Type 1 2 Action 1 None Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) Action 2 None None vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit profile <inner-marking-profilename> vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit profile <inner-marking-profilename> inner vlan <innersp-vlan> p-bit profile <inner-marking-profilename> vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit fixed <fixed-p-bit> CLI Command Remarks PtP flows PtP flows 3 Push (set P-bit and DEI according to CoS marking profile) PtP flows 4 Push (set P-bit to a fixed value and DEI=0) None Multipoint flows Marking Profile P-bit/DEI translation is further enhanced by using marking profiles that convert CoS and packet color values into P-bit and DEI. VLAN editing option type at ingress must be used with the similar option at egress. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management options available for PW-type SVIs. VLAN Editing Options at Ingress PW-Type SVI Type 1 2 3 Action 1 None Pop (outer) Pop (outer) Action 2 None None Pop (inner) CLI Command – vlan-tag pop vlan vlan-tag-pop vlan vlantag-pop inner-vlan Remarks Untagged packets only Single-tagged packets only Double-tagged packets only Table B-30. it is automatically set to 0. Table B-29. yellow) into P-bit (0–7) and DEI (yellow. ETX-5300A Ver. Note If the DEI value is omitted during configuration. as detailed below: • • • Ingress type 1 – egress type 1 Ingress type 2 – egress types 3 and 4 Ingress type 3 – egress type 3. ETX-5300A supports up to 16 color-aware and color-blind marking profiles: • • The color-aware profile translates CoS (0–7) and packet color (all.0 VLAN Editing B-31 . tunnel and port levels. For example. Scheduling Elements Each scheduling element consists of strict or weight fair queues. The queue groups consist of 2. Post-forwarding (egress) traffic management is done at both directly. this allows a tunnel to aggregate several EVCs while ensuring CIR of each one. the next level SE (aggregating several SEs from the previous level) ensures committed traffic (as long as it is not oversubscribed) and shares the remaining bandwidth with the EIR traffic of aggregated SEs per the configured weights.and dual-rate shapers operate at per-queue and per-scheduling-element level to shape traffic into a required traffic profile (CIR. Dual Shaper and EIR Sharing When using a dual shaper. Type-2 and Type-3 queue groups below). and to share the remaining tunnel bandwidth with the EVCs EIR. B-32 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver. The magnified portion of the diagram details functionality of a level-1 SE.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual B. CBS or CIR/EIR. They are configured over SAGs or physical ports. The TM entities allow hierarchical scheduling and shaping at several levels. This means that several shaped EVCs can be bundled into one shaped tunnel. Figure B-7 illustrates the hierarchical TM concept and the dual shaper functionality. The same procedure can be performed for tunnels at the port level.or 3-level scheduling elements (queue blocks) per port type (see the description of Type-1. Overview ETX-5300A traffic management entities are called queue groups. 1.and indirectly-attached ports egress. single. Similar bandwidth allocation can be made among the different tunnels at the port level by committing on tunnel’s CIR and sharing the remaining port bandwidth between tunnel’s EIR. As illustrated in the data flow diagram (Figure B-3). using advanced queuing and shaping mechanisms.and/or post-forwarding traffic management (TM). CBS/EBS). As explained above. pre-forwarding (ingress) traffic management is performed at the Service Aggregation Group (SAG) of an Ethernet I/O card for indirectly-attached ports ingress traffic. In addition. It provides pre. A dual shaper at the EVC level ensures committed EVC CIR on the aggregated tunnel while sharing the remaining traffic between the EIR part of the other EVCs (see Dual Shaper and EIR Sharing below). a 3-level TM entity schedules and shapes traffic at EVC. The queue blocks consist of separate internal strict-priority or WFQ queues.8 Traffic Management ETX-5300A employs enhanced traffic engineering techniques for efficient handling of multi-priority traffic on a per-flow basis.0 . 0 Traffic Management B-33 . Traffic Management Hierarchy and Dual Shaper Functionality ETX-5300A Ver. 1.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management CIR/EIR Shaper WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 SP 1 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shaper SP 2 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Level-0 SEs CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 1 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 CIR/EIR Shaper WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shaper WFQ 63 WFQ 64 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 WFQ 2 CIR Shaper Level-2 SE CIR/EIR Shaper Level-1 SEs WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shaper CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 CIR/EIR Shaper EVC Level Tunnel Level Port Level Figure B-7. packets belonging to lower classes of service are not penalized when higher priority queues are not empty and may still receive transmission time. while other services are mapped to the remaining slots using weight fair queuing (WFQ): • The Strict Priority queues ensure minimal latency and jitter for the RT traffic. The user defines an internal queue profile and then assigns it to a queue block. • A queue block consists of several internal queues and each queue is defined by its profile. whereby applications requiring low latency and jitter are mapped to Strict Priority queues. whereby CoS 7 is mapped to the lower priority queue. A flow packet is mapped to a specific queue according to the packet’s CoS (set by CoS mapping profile at the ingress). Strict Priority traffic will always be processed first. B-34 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver. while flows mapped to the WFQ slots are buffered until the Strict Priority queues are empty. In this manner.0 . even when a large amount of bursty data traffic is sent over the same uplink. 1. Packet Queuing ETX-5300A supports a combination of traffic scheduling techniques. QoS-conformant scheduling is handled by assigning different “weights” to the various queues instead of equally dividing overall bandwidth among all active flows. The WFQ technique avoids scheduling starvation of lower priority queues and ensures relatively fair allocation of bandwidth by sharing it among all flows.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual For WFQs belonging to the queue groups defined for physical ports (not for SAGs) Queuing Each flow is assigned to a queue block as its destination. and CoS 0 to the highest. Each queue block includes scheduling queues in accordance with CoS delivery priorities. Level-0 SEs CIR Shapers Packets mapped to queue according to their CoS SP 1 SP 2 Flow mapped to SE (queue block) SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 1 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 384 CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Up to 384 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Up to 64 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 63 WFQ 64 Up to 64 WFQ 2 CIR Shaper Level-2 SE CIR/EIR Shapers Level-1 SEs WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shapers Figure B-8. Congestion Avoidance As the queues fill up. ETX-5300A supports up to eight WRED profiles. The packets can be dropped as the queue becomes totally full (tail-drop) or dropped selectively before all buffers are filled. measured in percentages. Each WRED profile includes two curves – one for green and one for yellow packets. Maximum threshold: a percentage of maximum queue depth. A packet is mapped into a curve according to its color. the packet is dropped at the drop probability of the particular queue size. Congestion avoidance mechanisms are complementary to queuing algorithms. queuing algorithms manage the front of a queue. the drop probability for new packets increases. • • ETX-5300A Ver. based on statistical probabilities. Maximum drop probability: a drop probability of the maximum threshold queue size. The WRED algorithm monitors the fill level of each queue and determines whether an incoming packet should be queued or dropped. using a statistical probability. WRED Profile A congestion control policy is defined by a WRED profile attached to an internal queue (level-0 SE only). Each WRED profile includes the following parameters: • Minimum threshold: a percentage of maximum queue depth. the packet is admitted. The ETX-5300A traffic management engine solves such issues by employing a weighted random early discard (WRED) mechanism for intelligent queue management and congestion avoidance. ETX-5300A provides three queue group types for post-forwarding traffic management (TM) and one queue group type for pre-forwarding TM. If a packet is queued and the queue size is the minimum threshold minus the maximum threshold. The different queues are allocated different occupancy thresholds. above which incoming packets are discarded at random at a growing rate as the queue fills. with green packets having priority over the yellow ones. new packets face a growing risk of being discarded due to lack of buffer space. congestion avoidance mechanisms manage the end of the queue.0 Traffic Management B-35 .Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management An internal queue profile has the following attributes: • • • • Queue type (strict or WFQ) Queue weight for WFQ Shaper profile (relevant for level-1 queue blocks of post-forwarding shaping only). WRED profile (relevant for level-1 queue blocks of post-forwarding shaping only). 1. See Congestion Avoidance below. Near-empty queues accept all incoming packets. until the queue has reached a maximum threshold and all incoming packets are dropped. See Post-Forwarding Traffic Management Entities below. Selective dropping of packets when the queues are filling up is referred to as congestion avoidance. but as the queues begin to fill. If a packet is queued and the queue size is 0 minus the minimum threshold. 0 . supported by 3-level queue groups (see Type 2 Queue Group). strict or WFQ) Shaping element type (single or dual rate). you may not exceed maximum allowed number of its elements. WRED Profile Default WRED Profile By default. you can activate less than 384 level-0 SEs. ETX-5300A provides default queue groups for every available type. B-36 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver. For example. When configuring and using queue groups. To facilitate the configuration process. 1. Traffic Management Entities ETX-5300A supports several types of queue groups characterized by the following: • • • • Number of supported SE levels Scale (maximum number of SEs at each level) SE type (maximum number of queues and their scheduling scheme.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual Drop Probability 100% Max Drop Probability Min Threshold Max Threshold 100% Queue Depth Figure B-9. These default entities can be used as a basis for creating customized queue groups according to user requirements. ETX-5300A has one WRED profile with the following settings: • Green packets    • Minimum threshold – 100% Maximum threshold – 100% Maximum probability – 100% Yellow packets:    Minimum threshold – 70% Maximum threshold – 85% Maximum probability – 100%. Three queue group types handle post-forwarding traffic. One level-1 scheduling element (SE) consisting of eight WFQs. Each queue in the block can be configured to a different weight (1–63). Type 1 Queue Group The type 1 queue group consists of: • Up to eight level-0 scheduling elements (queue blocks) with four strict priority queues and four weight fair queues in each block. Each queue in the block can be configured to a different weight (1–63) with fixed queue depth (200 kbytes). Level-0 SEs CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 8 CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 7 WFQ 8 Up to 8 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 5 WFQ 6 CIR Shaper Level-1 SE CIR/EIR Shapers Figure B-10.and indirectly-attached ports. Type 1 Queue Group The type 1 queue group is a two-level TM entity with single and dual leaky bucket shapers. Shaping elements:    Single leaky bucket shaper per internal queue in level-0 SE Dual leaky bucket shaper per level-0 SE queue block Single leaky bucket shaper at level-1 SE egress. • • ETX-5300A Ver. Post-Forwarding Traffic Management Entities Post-forwarding (egress) traffic management is performed by the main card for both directly. one per each level-1 queue block. ETX-5300A supports up to 88 type-1 queue group instances per device.and pre-forwarding traffic management entities are described below.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management The post. 1.0 Traffic Management B-37 . ETX-5300A provides a level-0 queue block profile with the following attributes: • • Four strict priority and four weight fair queues with default priority queue profiles (see Default Queue Profiles below). as described below No shaper profiles. B-38 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver. rename. or used as the basis for a new queue group (copy default queue group. The default queue group profile can be viewed and bound to a port as is. 1. The default level-1 queue block profile uses queues with the default WFQ queue profile (weight fair queues. Default Queue Block Profiles By default. weight = 10. rename and edit). and then bound to a port. A queue group that is bound to a port cannot be replaced. A queue block that is bound to a queue group cannot be edited (you can replace it with a different queue block). no shaper). you must verify that no flows are attached to it. edit). ETX-5300A provides a type-1 queue group profile with the following attributes: • • • Eight level-0 SEs connected to one level-1 SE Queue block profiles. and bound to a queue group. delete it. the following configuration actions are allowed: • • Replacing queue block profiles Replacing or deleting shaper profiles (a shaper profile cannot be edited while it is in use in a queue group). When a queue group is bound to a port. and then bind a new one. or as the basis for a new queue block (copy.0 . The default queue block profile can be used as is. No shaper profile. ETX-5300A supports up to 128 different weight combinations for level-0 queue block.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual Default Queue Group Profile By default. ETX-5300A rounds it to 4096. One level-2 scheduling element consisting of 64 WFQs with each queue userconfigurable to a different weight (1–4096). ETX-5300A supports up to 88 type 2 queue group instances per device. one per each level-0 queue block. which falls between the two allowed values of 2048 and 4096. if you set a WFQ weight to 3000. the highest value is automatically selected. Weight granularity: each of the 64 WFQs belonging to the level-2 SE (queue block) can have one of 127 predetermined weights. Level-0 SEs CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 1 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 384 CIR Shapers SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Up to 384 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Up to 64 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 63 WFQ 64 Up to 64 WFQ 2 CIR Shaper Level-2 SE CIR/EIR Shapers Level-1 SEs WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shapers Figure B-11.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Type 2 Queue Group The type 2 queue group is a three-level TM entity with single and dual leaky bucket shapers. For example. • • ETX-5300A Ver.0 Traffic Management B-39 . Each WFQ in the level-1 queue block can be configured to a different weight (1–63). When a weight is selected in the range of two consecutive values. Type 2 Queue Group The type 2 queue group consists of: • Up to 384 level-0 scheduling elements (queue blocks) with four strict priority queues and four weight fair queues in each block. Up to 64 level-1 scheduling elements (queue blocks) with 384 WFQs in each block. 1. Each queue in the block can be configured to a different weight (1–63) with a fixed queue depth of 200 kBytes). according to the table below. described below No shaper profiles.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 71 71 73 74 75 77 78 80 81 83 85 87 89 91 93 95 97 99 102 105 107 Installation and Operation Manual 110 113 117 120 124 128 132 136 141 146 151 157 163 170 178 186 195 204 215 227 240 256 273 292 315 341 372 409 455 512 585 682 819 1024 1365 2048 4096 • Shaping elements:     Single leaky bucket shaper per internal queue in level-0 SE Dual leaky bucket shaper per level-0 SE queue block (see Egress Shaping below) Dual leaky bucket shaper per level-1 SE queue block(see Egress Shaping below) Single leaky bucket shaper at level-2 SE egress. or used as the basis for a new queue group (copy default queue group. A queue group that is bound to a port cannot be replaced. The default queue group profile can be viewed and bound to a port as is. When a queue group is bound to a port. the following configuration actions are allowed: • • • Replacing queue block profiles Replacing or deleting shaper profiles (a shaper profile cannot be edited while it is in use in a queue group). 1. and then bound to a port. you must verify that no flows are attached to it. delete it. Default Queue Group Profile By default. ETX-5300A provides a type-2 queue group profile with the following attributes: • 384 level-0 SEs. B-40 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver. You can connect up to 384 level-0 SE to a single level-1 SE. 64 level-1 SEs and one levl-2 SE:   • • Every six level-0 SEs are connected to one level-1 SE All level-1 SEs are connected to level-2 SE Queue block profiles.0 . Editing connections between level-0 and level-1 queue blocks. and then bind a new one. rename and edit). No shaper profile. rename. edit). Type 3 Queue Group The type 3 queue group is a three-level TM entity with single and dual leaky bucket shapers. Default level-1 and level-2 queue block profiles use queues with default WFQ queue profile (weight fair queues. 1. ETX-5300A supports up to 128 different weight combinations for level-0 queue block. ETX-5300A supports up to four type-3 queue group instances per main card. Up to 64 level-1 scheduling elements (queue blocks) with 384 WFQs in each block. and bound to a queue group. Each queue has a fixed depth of 200 kBytes. It consists of 64 WFQs with each queue user-configurable to a different weight (1–4096).0 . The default queue block profile can be used as is. A queue block that is bound to a queue group cannot be edited (you can replace it with a different queue block). Type 3 Queue Group Type 3 queue group consists of: • • Up to 768 level-0 scheduling elements (queue blocks) with four strict priority queues in each block. Traffic Management B-41 • ETX-5300A Ver. weight = 10.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Default Queue Block Profiles By default. no shaper). Level-1 SEs WFQ 1 Level-0 SEs SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 Up to 768 Up to 768 Up to 64 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 383 WFQ 384 WFQ 63 WFQ 64 Up to 64 Level-2 SE WFQ 1 WFQ 2 CIR Shaper CIR/EIR Shapers WFQ 2 CIR/EIR Shapers Figure B-12. Each WFQ in the level-1 queue block can be configured to a different weight (1–63). ETX-5300A provides a level-0 queue block profile with the following attributes: • • Four strict priority and four weight fair queues with default priority queue profiles (see Default Queue Profiles below). One level-2 scheduling element is attached to a physical port. or as a basis for a new queue block (copy. the highest value is automatically selected. and then bound to a port. 1. described below No shaper profiles. The default queue group profile can be viewed and bound to a port as is.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual • Weight granularity: each of the 64 WFQs belonging to the level-2 SE (queue block) can have one of 127 predetermined weights. rename and edit). 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 71 71 73 74 75 77 78 80 81 83 85 87 89 91 93 95 97 99 102 105 107 110 113 117 120 124 128 132 136 141 146 151 157 163 170 178 186 195 204 215 227 240 256 273 292 315 341 372 409 455 512 585 682 819 1024 1365 2048 4096 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 • Shaping elements:    Dual leaky bucket shaper per level-0 SE queue block (see Egress Shaping below) Dual leaky bucket shaper per level-1 SE queue block(see Egress Shaping below) Single leaky bucket shaper at level-2 SE egress. ETX-5300A rounds it to 4096. 64 level-1 SEs and one levl-2 SE:   • • Every 12 level-0 SEs are connected one level-1 SE All level-1 SEs are connected to level-2 SE Queue block profiles. if you set a WFQ weight to 3000. according to the table below. For example. the following configuration actions are allowed: • • Replacing queue block profiles Replacing or deleting shaper profiles (a shaper profile cannot be edited while it is in use in a queue group). Default Queue Group Profile By default. or used as the basis for a new queue group (copy default queue group. which falls between the two allowed values of 2048 and 4096. B-42 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A provides a type-3 queue group profile with the following attributes: • 768 level-0 SEs. When a weight is selected in the range of two consecutive values.0 . When a queue group is bound to a port. In total. delete it. no shaper). 10–512 kBytes (configured in bytes). 256 kbps–10 Gbps (configured in kbps) CBS/EBS: 0. A queue group that is bound to a port cannot be replaced. You can connect up to 384 level-0 SE to a single level-2 SE. you must verify that no flows are attached to it. Note • EBS = 0 is valid only if EIR = 0. ETX-5300A provides a level-0 queue block profile with the following attributes: • • Four strict priority queues with default priority queue profiles (see Default Queue Profiles below). Pre-Forwarding Traffic Management Entities Pre-forwarding (ingress) traffic management is performed by the Ethernet I/O cards for indirectly-attached ports at the SAG level. and bound to a queue group A queue block that is bound to a queue group cannot be edited (you can replace it with a different queue block). 1. rename. • CBS = 0 is valid only if CIR = 0. One queue group type is intended for pre-forwarding traffic. The default queue block profile can be used as is or used as the basis for a new queue block (copy.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management • Editing connections between level-0 and level-2 queue blocks. ETX-5300A Ver. The default level-2 and level-3 queue block profiles use queues with default WFQ queue profile (weight fair queues. No shaper profile. ETX-5300A supports up to 256 shaper profiles with the following configuration ranges: • • CIR/EIR: 0. and then bind a new one.0 Traffic Management B-43 . Default Queue Block Profiles By default. weight = 10. Egress Shaping As described above. edit). ETX-5300A provides the following post-forwarding shaping elements: • • • • Single leaky bucket shaper (CIR/CBS) per each level-0 SE queue Dual leaky bucket shaper per each level-0 SE queue block Dual leaky bucket shaper per each level-1 SE queue block Single leaky bucket shaper per level-2 SE queue block. One level-1 scheduling element (queue block) has 50 WFQs. 1.0 . rename and edit). The pre-forwarding queue group includes one single leaky bucket shaper per each level-0 queue block. Pre-Forwarding Queue Group The pre-forwarding queue group consists of: • Up to 50 level-0 scheduling elements (queue blocks) with four strict priority queues and four weight fair queues in each block.Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Level-0 SEs SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 50 SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP4 WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 3 WFQ 4 Up to 50 CIR Shapers Installation and Operation Manual Level-1 SE WFQ 1 WFQ 2 WFQ 49 WFQ 50 Figure B-13. Default Queue Group Profile By default. and then bound to a port. The default queue group profile can be viewed and bound to a port as is. the following configuration actions are allowed: B-44 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver. Queue block profiles. When a queue group is bound to a port. • • The ingress CIR/CBS shaper has the following configuration ranges: • • • CIR: 0–1 Gbps (configured in kbps) CBS: 0–64 kBytes (configured in bytes) Compensation: 0–63 bytes. ETX-5300A provides two-level queue group profile for pre-forwarding scheduling with the following attributes: • • • 50 level-0 SEs with all of them connected to one fixed and non-configurable SE with the same weight. or used as the basis for a new queue group (copy default queue group. Each WFQ in the level-1 queue block has the same weight of 10. described below No shaper profiles. Each of the WFQs queues in the block can be configured to a different weight (3–110) with fixed queue depth of 200 kBytes. Default Queue Profiles By default. no shaper). ETX-5300A Ver. ETX-5300A provides two queue profiles – one for strict. and bind to a queue group. Default Queue Block Profiles By default. rename. The default level-1 queue block profile uses queues with default WFQ queue profile (weight fair queues. and one for weight fair queue: • • Strict priority profile without shaper profile and with WRED profile WFQ profile with weight set at 10. 1. A queue block that is bound to a queue group cannot be edited (you can replace it with a different queue block). weight = 10.0 Traffic Management B-45 . delete it and bind a new one. ETX-5300A provides a level-0 queue block profile with the following attributes: • • Four strict priority and four weight fair queues with default priority queue profiles (see Default Queue Profiles below). edit). without shaper profile and with default WRED profile. or as the basis for a new queue block (copy. you must verify that no flows are attached to it. No shaper profile. A queue group that is bound to a port cannot be replaced.Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management • • Replacing queue block profiles Replacing or deleting shaper profiles (a shaper profile cannot be edited while it is in use in a queue group). The default queue block profile can be used as is. Appendix B Data Flow and Traffic Management Installation and Operation Manual B-46 Traffic Management ETX-5300A Ver.0 . 1. . USA Tel. 972-3-6458181 Fax 972-3-6498250. NJ 07430.rad.com . Israel Tel. 6474436 E-mail [email protected] No. 201-5291100 Toll free 1-800-4447234 Fax 201-5295777 E-mail market@radusa. 805010 International Headquarters 24 Raoul Wallenberg Street Tel Aviv 69719. 570-200-03/13 Order this publication by Catalog No.com www.com North America Headquarters 900 Corporate Drive Mahwah.
Copyright © 2024 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.